20130126 Permit Pkg 03282013 � City of Yelm Permit No.: 20130126
� Community Development Department Issue Date: 3/28/2013
� (Work must be completed within 180 days)
Building Division
Phone: (360)458-8407
"` " Fax: (360)458-3744
Applicant:
Name: YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS Phone: 360-458-1900
Address: P.O. BOX 476
YELM WA 98597
Property Information:
Site Address: 1315 YELM AVE W Owner: YELM COMMUNITY
SCHOOLS
Assessor Parce� No.: 21724210500 Subdivision: Lot:
Contractor Information:
Name: LAKE TAPPS CONSTRUCTION Phone:
Address: DARREL
PO BOX 7318
BONNEY LAKE WA 98390
Contractor License No.: LAKETCU101J6 Expires: 3/15/2013
Project Information:
Project: YCS AGRICULTURAL DEPT IMPROVEM
Description of Work: TI FOR AG CLASSROOM AND 535 SF ADDITION TO THE 975 SF BARN Fire Alarm
Sq. Ft. per floor: First 3332 Heat Type(Electric, Gas, Other): ELECTRIC
Second
Third
Garage
Basement
Fees:
Item Contractor Fees
BUILDING LAKE TAPPS CONSTRUCTION $1,186.18
MECHANICAL LAKE TAPPS CONSTRUCTION $ 47.00
PLUMBING LAKE TAPPS CONSTRUCTION $ 0.00 \
FIRE ALARM ALARM CENTER $ 114.26 .J '�— ,
TOTAL FEES: $ 1,347.44
ApplicanYs Affidavit: OFFICIAL USE ONLY
i certify that I have read and examined the information contained within the application and know the same
to be true and correct. I also certify that the proposed structure is in conformity with all applicable City of #Sets of Prints:
Yelm regulations including those governing zoning and land subdivision,and in addition, all covenants,
easements and restrictions of record. If applying as a contractor, t further certify that I am currently Final Inspection:
registered in the State Washington.
Signature � � '�`/ Date 3 "��j �j Date:
Firm u 1�� J� L�'v1�;� � � �ri . By:
Cit� of Y�lm
(36 ) 458-8402
REC#; U0123279 3/28/2013 10;22 AM
OPER: CO TERM: Q01
REF#; 333
TRAN: :�3.U000 BUILDTNG PERMITS
20130126 114.26CR
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
1315 YELM AVE W
FA 114.26CR
TENDERED: 114.26 CHECK
APPLIED. 114.26-
CHANGE; � 0.�0
CITY OF YELM
COMMERCIAL BUILDING PERMIT APPLICATION FORM
Project Address: 1315 YELM AVE. W. Parcel#: 21724210500
Zoning; Current Use: Proposed Use:
New Construction !: Re-Model/ Re-Roof/Tenant Improvement
- Plumbing - Mechanical z Fire Prevent/Suppress/Alarm '- Other
Project Description/Scope of Work: INSTALL NEW FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
Project Value:$1 675.00
Building Area (sq. ft) Parking Garage 151 Floor 3,330 2"d Floor 3�d Floor
Building Height
Are there any environmentally sensitive areas located on the parcel? If yes, a
completed environmental checklist must accompany permit application.
BIJILQt#�IG �WNEF�/TEIUANT IUAME:YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS NO. 2
ADDRESSPO BOX 476 EMAIL
CITY YELM STATE WA ZIP 98597 TELEPHONE (360�458-6128
ARCHITECTIEM1IGENEER LICENSE#
ADDRESS EMAIL
CITY STATE ZIP TELEPHONE
GiENERAL C�NTRACTC�R ALARM CENTER,INC TELEPHONE �360)786-0404
ADDRESS PO BOX 3407 EMAIL jfossett@alarmcenterinc.com
C�N LACEY STATE WA ZIP 98509 FAX (360)438-4244
CONTRACTOR'S LICENSE# ALARMCI055CW EXP DAT���s���ITY LICENSE# �2-0000ss.o
PLUMBIiVG C��ITRACTC3R TELEPHONE
ADDRESS EMAIL
CITY STATE ZIP FAX
CONTRACTOR'S LICENSE# EXP DATE CITY LICENSE#
MECHANICAL CC�RITRACTtJR TELEPHONE
ADDRESS EMAIL
CITY STATE ZIP FAX
CONTRACTOR'S LICENSE# EXP DATE CITY LICENSE#
Copy of City Mitigation documentation(TFC).
I hereby certify that the above information is correct and that the construction on,and the occupancy and the use of the
above described property will be in accordance with the laws,rules and regulations of the State of Washington and the
City of Yelm.
31 �� �
ApplicanY Sign ture Date
Owner/C trac or/Owner's Agent/Contractor's Agent/Tenant (Please circle one.)
All permit are non-transferable and wili expire if work authorized by such permit is not begun
within 180 days of issuance, or if work is suspended or abandoned for a period of 180 days
RECEIVED
MAR � G 2013
105 Yelm Auenue West ( 60)4a'8-3835
PO Box 479 ( �1�'S8-3144 FAX
Y"elm,Wfl 98597 w . . • •
��u�#�'E�01 �;����IIC���"1� �?�I�I�41"i� ��'�'I�'��
.�i'='�iJ,°Vl & �reaK ctia�5 ap?�utic?r
An up-front visible glass rod on the SIGA-270 discourages tam-
The SIGA-270 and SIGA-278 series Manual Pull 5tations are part pering.
of GE Security's Signature Series system.The SIGA-270 Fire Alarm
Manual Pull Stations feature our very familiar teardrop shape.They � ����1��4�����?�������'f����rssf rr€icrapracesscsr
are made from die-cast zinc and finished with red epoxy pow- All decisions are made at the station allowing lower communica-
der-coat paint complemented by aluminum colored stripes and tion speed while substantially improving control panel response
markings. With positive pull-lever operation,one pull on the station time.Less sensitive to line noise and loop wiring properties;
handle breaks the glass rod and turns in a positive alarm,ensuring twisted or shielded wire is not required.
protection plus fool-proof operation.Presignal models ISIGA-270P) � �;��_,;����iie merrror�r
are equipped with a general alarm(GR1 keyswitch for applications permanently stores serial number,type of device,and job num-
where two stage operation is required.The up-front highly visible ber.Automatically updates historic information including hours
glass rod discourages tampering,but is not required for proper of operation,last maintenance date,number of alarms and
operation. troubles,and time and date of last alarm.
GE Security's double action single stage SIGA-278 station is a � q��p���,����i������s�,t=
contemporary style manual station made from durable red colored Each station transmits wiring information to the loop controller
iexan. To initiate an alarm,first lift the upper door marked°LIFT regarding its location with respect to other devices on the circuit.
THEN PULL HANDLE",then pul)the alarm handle.
� Efe�ironiW n��s�ssi;��
Permanently stores programmable address;there are no
�����;��;; �:.�,����-�c switches or dials to set. Addresses are downloaded from a PG
Note:Snme features described here may not be supported by ati contro!systems. Of the SIGA-PRO Sig�CJtUfe PfOgf4m/S2fVICe To01.
Check your controi paneYs Installation and Operation Guide ior detail;. � �e�gg��J-r���g��p��s-pt;et;
� Traditional famiiia�appearahee The station inputs an alarm even if the loop controller's poliing
SIGA-270 models feature our familiar teardrop design with interrogation stops.
simple positive pull action and sturdy die-cast metal body. « C�i��restic L=�w;
� �1n�=,tr�c�e$GA„�wa stc�ge ipre-sic#nal;,anc�cio��ie c�4ti�€�modei� Status LEDs;flashina GREEN shows normal polling�,flashing RED
SIGA-270 models are available for one or two stage alarm sys- shows alarm state.
tems.The single stage double actiQn SIGA-278 feotures a rugged � [�es�r�r+��far niq;�cambi�nt teanper��ur�operc��ior
Lexan housing with keyed reset mechanism. install in ambient temperatures up to 120°F(49°CI.
� �� £ � � , „ �..:������i,�. ._ � ,,. ° �
«
�� ;�� 6 � �
,-- �, -�r� .-��� ��_��s-,� F•� � � 0
�
��"�`.' � �� �, � �._.:,°�, � '���';
�.°�i.�a,'�'`� ' �� ;� � �
� • ,��,�;;
� I MEA
Patented
� .. �
SIGA-278 SIGA-270 SERIES
� �► � �
; ;�
� I�EC�I'�1'ED
Data Sheet 55001-0279 Issue 7
N t to be used for installation purposes.Page 1 of 4
MAR 16 Zo�3
E�Y: -
��'��ICu�I���? ';�'�I�.Q6 it�i�"I?��.
The operating characteristics of the fire alarm stations are deter- The�fire alarm station's terminal block accepts#18 AWG 10.75mmz)
mined by their sub-type code or"Personality Code".NORMALLY- to#12 AWG(2.5mm�1 wire sizes.See Signature Loop Controller cata-
OPEN ALARM-LATCHING(Pesonality Code 1)is assigned by the log sheet for detailed wiring requirement specifimtions.
factory;no user configuration is required.Tne device is�onfigured
for Class B IDC operation.An A�ARM signal is sent to the loop con- Wiring Notes
troller when the station's pull lever is operated.The alarm condition
is latched at the station. 0 Refer to Signature l.00p Controller manual for maximum
wire distance.
2. All wiring is power limited and supervised.
;�....�.�.�T�I�,�. ;�..-��J}1�III}l,i REARVIEW �
.., l,
. of
Signature Series manual stations are compatible only with GE Secu- s��^-`7e e
rity's Signature Loop Controller. o 0
0
,�� �
���tur�ir���s � :�:a�i�r�s a � �I
� < ��
This device will not operate without electrical powec As fires fre- ��
quently cause power interruption,we suggest you discuss further '�ea��D ���ee��u
(Alarm/Active? �-��� (NOrmap
safeguards with your local fire protection specialist. ' ' ` '
o ra,
O
�`�����t� C:� ��f?��i��°:�t��ti�.�
To test(or reset)the station simply open the station and operate ;onTA�N�.� �nT�o,�r c.,
the exposed switch.The SIGA-270 series are opened with a tool;the � �Ar.4���c-; �A.A��,c-,}
SIGA-278 requires the key which is supplied with that station. r�omsa�a,�«���;�����; �aNeM�e���e
a Pr�vicus Dcvicc
�ll
The station's automatic self-diagnosis identifies when it is defec-
tive and causes a trouble message.The user-friendly maintenonce �=ag���°. ,��,�3G����c��k�s����
program shows the current state of each Signature series device
and other pertinent messages.Single devices may be deactivated
temporarily,from the control panel.Availability of maintenance
features is dependent on the fire alarm system used. REA cviEw
Scheduled maintenance IRegulqr or Selectedl for proper system S�G A2�aP6 � �o
operation should be planned to meet the requirements of the Au- � o
thority Having Jurisdiction IAHJI.Refer to current NFPA 72 and ULC o
CAN/ULC 536 standards. Tg �' �
I A*� b ., �
0 0 • �
Retl LEC � ��, ��.g Green i.ED
(Alo;m/ACtive� (NormaU
4 3 2 1
TBi i
_—___'__.. �
O p
0
o �
(DATA IN(*? DAL4 C�UT(+)'�
1
�DNTA W(-) DATA OUT(-)I
From;ianoture Lbr�trdle+ To Ner.,Device
or Premous Device ;��.
!=lytir�'�. Ii�JO SLCiC��?S�+SLBt�'3S
Data Sheet 85001-0279 Issue 7
Not to be used for installation purposes.Page 2 of 4
i����;���.IEJ;"3
Singi�-stcscte Signature Series fire alarm manual pull stations mount to North American 2�/z inch(64 mm)deep 1-gang boxes.
3wo stnge presignal(270P)models require 11/z inch(38 mm)deep 4-inch square boxes with 1-gang,�/z-inch raised covers.Openings must be
angular.Rounded openings are not acceptable.Recommended box:Steel City Model 52-G13;in Canada,use Iberville Model CI-52-C-49-1/2.
�I�m�c�ess include terminals are suited for#12 to#18 AWG 12.5 mm'to 0.75 mm'i wire size.GE Security recommends that these fire alarm
station�be installed according to lates�recognized edition of national and local fire alarm codes.
Eie"renic t�tiaressinct: The loop controiler electronically addresses each manual station,saving valuable time during system commission-
ing.Setting complicated switches or dials is not required.Each station has its own unique serial number stored in its on-board memory.The
loop controller identifies each device on the loop and assigns o"sofY'address to each serial numbec If desired,the stations can be addressed
using the SIGA-PRO Signature Program/Service Tool.
Key-Latch Compatibie Electricai 6ox --
Cover Release .A,
\ Ccmpatible Elecidcal Box ; � � �,�
�� � � Cover
'� � __
Release y t
� Screw �
3 ���i` � , , I .l � I
i �,j�((�
�� �.i� o �o ��.1'�T,[n. � \ I:, � � �ir=.�S3.+ i
, � � ��� i
p a Q o
Back � Back �,
Q Piate �� � � Plate ��
P
Toggle p�j� � To99�e �
�' Swiich *`+�� o Switcn i ;�'`�'-
OBMa�a vcr^"ti�
O"O
.� p O
� �' . t , '��� Glass Rod - � � Glass Roc
Release Lever
OPEN
'� � ° .��
= ,.
�-�ea�ar�2. Sl��-�7�,insta€�ation F��;�r�2. S(��;-2�G;�€�C-Z7�J�,SE�C-27Q�instc€Ilotior�
Cover Release
Scr w
�� �:�
� :���--Compatible � . �
Electncal Box �
��� d^"""��' � with'/rinch ,�� _
,� � „ ,,:�-°�°"'� . � raisetl covers�
.� o� � ,� .`, � � �
��� � � ��i ��� �
_ ��� � ,�
,
a � ,� ��
� �`y Back '
� � � L/�. Plate ° "�
o . ,�
�
.. . �, � Togale l. ::
o Switch
NORMPL
±�o O f �',' � GfassRod
`�'�'• Release Lever
� Do not use � ���: �
boxes with
rounded 1\� �
openings. ��
.
\ '
'� ...,.����J
rtx#Ui�.. ��:a�`- ?7itt ai �"��,€Ctw.��r,`LI:
Data Sheet 85001-02791ssue 7
Not to 6e used for i�stallation purposes.Page 3 of 4
u.s. ���Cl�a��l�&��
T 888-378-2329
F 866-503-3996 '; Sf,{-�aA-27G,SIC`'C-27�:-, 5fvFi-c74F, '
Canada C��nioq Numbcr Sfu:-27C7B SI6C-270PB SiGA-278
T 519 376 z�30 � ' �Single Action Single Action-Two ' Doubie Action
F 519 376 i 258 Description
-One Stage Stage(Presignap -One Stage
Asia Addressing Uses 1 Module Uses 2 Module � ' Uses 1 Module
T 852 2907 8108 Requirements Address Addresses ' Address
F g5z 2142 5063 �� � Standby=250�A Standby=396uA �Standby=250uA�
Operating Current Activated=400NA Activated=680uA Activated=400NA
Australia -
7 61 3 9259 47oC ' Diecast Zinc-Red Epoxy � Lexan-Red with
F 5i 3 9259 a�99 Construction&Finish with aluminum markings white markings
_._ _... ___ _�_ � __.�
Europe Type Code ; Factory Set
- ......._..- — ° --- _�_.__ ..._....---- _ ..T .,...-- — -
r 3z 2 725 11 zo Operating Voltage 15.2 to 19.95 Vdc(19 Vdc nominali
F 32 2 7z186 13 Storage and Operating� ��� Operatinq Temperature:32°F to 120°F(0°C to 49°C) �
Latin America Environment Storage Temperature -4°F to 140°F(-20°C to 60°C)Humidity:0 to 93%RH
_ _ �__....._r � � e.__ �.��____m .�__�__.. __ �
T 305 593 4301 ' On-board Green LED-Flashes when polled
F 3C5 593 43oC LED Operation On-board Red LED-Flashes w hen in alarm
' Both LEDs-Glow steady when in alarm(stand-alonel
www.9esecurity.com Compatibility �� � Use With:Signature Loop Controller �� �
�. . _-- ......_ __.._ _. �m, ......_
�O 2006 General Electnc Company AgenCy Listings UL,ULC(note 1; MEA,CSFM
All Rights Reserved . __ :_ __ __ _. __ _ ___ __ .
Note:SI6C 77GF,SIGC 170R and SIGC?70PR ara ULC nsted only Sutnx"F"inaicates French marking�
Sufnr."6"ind:cotes Enqlish/French biling uol ma�kirgs.
Sianature Series is a Trademark
of GE Security.
t.,t-��r{i1i,� �C1�'��"�i��I�C`
Cai�iog Ship�,it.
Numbe� Gescription (bs ik�!
_ _._. ... ____.__.... �__....-,--- _._ _-- ______ _._..... .._---._
SIGA-270 One Stage Fire Alarm Station, Engiish Markings-UUULC Listed
_-_ ___ __-_ ....._..._ __-_ . _
SIGC-270F One Stage Fire Alarm Station, French Markings-ULC Listed
__ _�� .__ _.___._ ___ .� ________._ ___m______......�� �...v.._
51GG27QB One Stage Fire Alarm Station,French/English Markings-ULC Listed
__ __ . _
SIGA-270P Two Stage IPresignal)Fire Alarm Station English Markings-UL/ULC Listed 110.5;
SIGC-270PB Two Stage(Presignap Fire Alarm 5tation,FrenchlEnglish Markings
-ULC Listed
_,_.......___. .m___.__W___�_..� ....._.__ ___. _
SIGA-278 Double Action IOne Stagel Fire Alarm Station,English Markings
-UUULC Listed
Atcpssorie,w
.. _ _- _..�.._ _ __ ____ _ _
32997 GA Key w/Tag-for pre-signal station(CANADA ONLYI
276-K2 GA Key-for pre-signai station (USA ONLY; ��������� ��
_ __ _ _.
27165 12 Glass Rods-for SIGA-270 series(CANADA ONLY) 0.1(.05)
_ __ _ _ __. .
270-GLR 20 Glass Rods-for SIGA-270 series (USA ON LY)
_ ..._ _— _.._.. .—— _ ..- —_. - - _....._ . ._
276-GLR 20 Glass Rods-for SIGA-278 series
______.,._.�___._ ______... ____m__..__—__ __...__._.....____ ___�
276B-RSB Surface Mount Box,Red-for SIGA puil stations 1(0.6)
�'' f
, ����������� �� `t�t��'^�
Data Sheet 85001-0279 Issue 7
Not to be used for installation purposes.Page 4 of 4
� �ro_;e� N,ms. 3e1�.. ��;;�irr��s
T 1�3
��� �
" Li/e Safety & Communicatrons
U�
� �� U�C
'
� -'� MEA
. � � i :"�`��
�� �� �� � � � � �`��;,m""`����: ��<`)
� CE
�� ��'�� �C� '�- �c
'�� 4va`- , .,m+',. . p' FM
�i� �^ . . �� Pending
��r�b�� i�� �� � w�;
_ � �
�'��"��E�?�C�' �'�'3�'��� ECS/�iNSappliancesavailable �� ��� ',���..--�-" '� ��
with clear or amber lenses. ,
� � �
� W��_�-aT � .,.- � ���
- � , : °� .'� ��:av..
_ ,�.'�
Overview Standarci F�atures
The Genesis line of fire alann and mass notification�'emergency • Unique law-profile design
communications(ECS/MNS)signals are among the smaliest, — The most compact UL-1971lULGS526 listed strobe available
most compact audible-visible life safety signaling devices in the — Ultra-slim—protrudes less than one in�h
worid.About the size of a deck of playing cards,these devices are — Rttractive appearance
desigr�ed to blend with any decor. — No visible mounting screws
Thanks to patented breakthrough technology; Edwards Gen- • Four field-canfigurabie options in one device
esis si:robes do not require bulky specular reflectors and lenses. — Select 15, 30, 75, or 110 cd strobe output
Instead, an ex�lusive cavity design conditions light to produce — Select high(default)or low dB horn output
a highly controlled distribution pattern. Significant development — Select temporal(default)or steady horn output
efforts employing this new technology have given rise to a new — Sele�t public mode flash rate(default)or private mode
benchmark in strobe performance—FuIlLight technology. temporal flash
FuIlLight strobe technology produces a smooth light distribution ' ��X�� ��������n����vai�abf�
pattern without the spikes and voids characteristic of specular��e- � ECS/MNS modeis availabi�
flectors.This ensures the entire coverage area receives consistent
illumination from the strobe flash.As a result, Genesis strobes with ' ��sy to install
FuIILi7ht technology go weU beyond the UL-1971 and ULC-S526 — Fits standard 1-gang electri�al boxes —no trim plate needed
light distribution requirements. — Optional trim plate accommodates oversized openings
— Pre-assembled with captive hardware
Gene:>is strobes and horn-strobes offer selectal�le candela output — #12 AWG terminals—ideal for long runs or existing wiring
by means of a conve��iently-lacated switch on the side of the
device. Models are also available that offer fixed 15/75 cd output. ` �nparalleied performance
The candela output setting remains clearly visible even after final — Industry's mast even light distrik�utior�
installation,yet it stays locked in place to prevent unauthorized — Meets tough synchronizing standards for strobes
tampering. — Single microprocessor controls both horn and strobe
— Independent horn control over a single pair of wires
Genesis ECS/MN5 appliances affer emergency signaling with — Highly regulateJ in-rush current
clear or amber lenses and with optional ALERT housing labels. — Multiple frequer,cy tone improves sound penetration
T!�ey are ideal for applications that require differentiation between — Field-programmabie temporal strobe output option
fire alarm and mass notification aferts.
Page 1 of 8 ��uu t—V��.3
issue 1 S
Application installation
Genesis strobes are UL 1971-listed for use indoors as wall-mount- Genesis horns and strobes mount to any standard one-gang sur-
ed public-mode notification appiiances for the hearing impaired. face or flush electrical box. Matching optional trim plates are used
Prevailing codes require strobes to be used where ambient noise to cover oversized openings and can accommodate one-gang,
conditions exceed 105 dBA(87dBA in Canada),where occupants two-gang,four-inch square, or octagonal boxes,and European
use hearing protection,and in areas of publi�accommodation 100 mm square.
as defined in the Americans with Drsabriities Act(see application All Genesis si nals come re-assembled
notes—USAJ. ��"`r��,;,", �°��� g p
� with captive mounting screws for easy in-
Combination horn-strobe signals must be installed in accordance stallation.Two tabs at the top of the signal
with guidelines established for strobe devices. Consult with your unlock the cover to reveal the mounting
Authority Having Jurisdiction for details. *° . hardware.The shallow depth of Genesis
devi�es leaves ample room behind the
All Genesis strobes exceed UL synchronization requirements signal for extra wiring. Once installed with
(within 10 i7�illiseconds over a two-hour period}when used with a � the cover in place, no mounting screws
synchronization source. Synchronization is important in order to ° „ .,,� , are visible.
avoid epileptic sensitivity. � °��---
WARNFNG:These devices will not operatP without electrlcal�owec As
fires frequently cause power interruptions. furkher safeguards such-as Fi@Id COIIfIgUYat1011
Genesis HornlStrobe
backup power supplies may be required. with optional trim piate Temporal horn and horn-strobe models
are factory set to sound in a three-pulse
temporal pattern. Ur�its may be con-
figured Tor use with coded systems by cutting a jumper on the
Horns circuit board.This results in a steady output that can be turned
Genesis horn output reaches as high as 99 dB and features a on and off(coded)as the system applies and removes power to
unique multiple frequency tone that results in excelient sound the signai circuit.A Genesis Signal Master is required when horn-
penetration and an unmistakable warning or danger. Horns may be strobe models are configured for coded systems. Non-temporal,
configured for either coded or non-codecl signal circuits.They can horn-only models sound a steady tone.
also be set for low dB output with a jumper cut that reduces horn Genesis clear strobes and horn-strobes are shipped from the fac-
output by about 5 dB.Horn-only models may be ceiling-mounted tory r�eady for use as UL 1971 compliant signals for public mode
or wall-mounted. operation.These signals may be configured for temporal flash by
The suggested sound{�ressure level for each signaling zone used with cutting a jumper on the circuit board.This battery-saving feature is
alarm signals is at least 15 dB above the average ambient sound level, intended for private mode signaling oniy.
or 5 dB above the maximum sound level having a duration of at least Genesis clear strobes and horn-strobes may be set for 15,30,75,
60 seconds,whichever is greater,measured 5 feet(1.5 m)above the or 110 candela output.The output setting is changed by simply
floor.The average ambient sound level is,A-weighted sound pressure opening the device and sliding the switch to the desired setting.
measured over a 24-hour period. The device does not have to be removed to change the output
Doubling the distance from the signal to the ear will theoreticaliy result setting.The setting remains visible through a small window on the
in a 6 dB reduction of the re�eived sound pressure level.The actual side of the device after the cover is ciesed.
effect depends on the acoustic properties of materials in the s�ace. Homs and horn-strobes are factory set for high dB output.
A 3 dBA difference represents a barely noticeable change in volume. Low dB output may be selected by cutting a jumper on the
circuit board.This reduces the output by about 5 dB,
ECS/MNS�4pplicat6ons
Genesis ECS/MNS strobe appliances bring the same high-
performance fire alarm features and unobtrusive design to mass
notification applications.Available with amber lenses and optional 1/�/�1'i1�1C�
ALERT housing labels,they are ideal for applications that require Field wiring terminals accommodate#18 to#12 AWG (0.75 mm=
differentiation between fire alarm and mass notification alerts. to 2.5 mm')wiring. Horns, strobes, and combination horn-strobes
are interconnected with a single pair of wires as shown below.
�
+ + To next
appliance.
Polarity shown in end-of-Iine
alarm condition H H or retum to
con[rol
equipment
ONote:Strobes must have continuous voltage.
Page 2 of 6 O�IIV 1—Q�7�
. . ... � ... � .. ... issue'11
Curr�n� Draw
Strobes,Horn-Strobes Horns
Nfulti-cd Wall Strobes (G1-VM} VVali or Ceiling Nfounted
— ._...._— _ _ _ — — -
UL 15 cd* 3d cd* 15/75 cd** 75 cd* 110 cd* Tempora[Horns(G1-Ha}
___ � ... �__ _ _. ...�...___.. _ �
Rating RMS RMS RMS FtMS RMS UC High dB Low dB
16 Vdc . _ _103 __ 141 152 255 31� Rating (RMS} (RMB�_
--- -_ _ . _____ ..,._ __, --._. _,.__ —
16 Vtwr 125 17�J 224 346 392 16 Vdc 26 19
.._.._ �� _._...___ _ __... .___.-_ _
. --°---- ___ �.
�� _�" ����� �� 2�Vdc 36 27
'G7-Vf�A mutti-cd:'"C�1 F-V16I�fixed 1 b/75 cd
33 Vdc 41 33
_ �.___ _ .___._� ._.� __ _.--- � -_ ._ - - -- �
Typicaf 15 cd 30 cd 15175 75 cc! 1i0 cd 16 Vrwi 51 37
___�_._. ___ . _�.__.._
Gurrent RMS RMS. RMS � RMS RM� 2�Vfwr 69 b2
_._--- _ . __ _-
_16 Vdc 85 12; 1tiU 240 2�3b _ 33 Vfwr 76 �0
_._ .---- � . _ _.__� .�_._� __. �...
- -
20 Vdc ?1 98 123 188 240
-- ___ __ - -- --._ -- - ----_ ___ r _
24 Vdc 59 02 �04 152 1 Q1 Typical °Nigh dB low dB
_ __ ____._..._� __ _�___ �.�.....—__..__ —__ e —._. .__ _�__..___ -
0o Vdc 46 64 84 112 13% Gurrent RMS RMS
16 Viwr 119 169 223 332 ! 376 16 Vdc 22 17
_ _- - _ _ _ . - _
20 Vtwr 103 1,3 139 253 331 20 Vdc 24 19
_�_ .� __._.�_ _____W_.. ... �_ .___� _,_ .._.�. __
____-___r__� __.�_.__..
24 Vfwr 94 129 169 213 262 2�Vdc 27 22
-_, --. -- - --
_ _, � ___.__...
33 Vfwr �� 8- ' 112 148 179 �� 2�5 33 Vdc 32 26
� _ ___. _ _.___ __w_ _--
--� -._..._.��___ _.� __._._.__ . _......__ _..�_� ._mm �......
16 Vfwr 34 30
Wati Tempora!Fiarn-strobes-Fligh dB Setting 20 Vfwr 40 34
_ —__� _._ _ ... __�... _._._._ —
15 30 15/75 75 1i4 'G1-HDVM m�dti-cd 2�Vr"w� 45 38
UL _ ______ ..___
cd` cc1* cd*` cd' cd" "'G1 F-HDV15?:fixed 15i?5 cd 33 Vfwi 52 47
Ratinc� Rfl+IS ' RMS RMS RMS RMS _.
_ _ __.�.. . .__�._. .. _� � _ � �_
1�Vde 129 167 1'2 201 337 Wall or Geiiing(Vfounted hiorn�{G1-P}
_ .�_ -_ �_ _ __ - -
1b VrNr 176 �.iU 269 39� 443 Max.Currea�t,
_ �_. _ ....�.._ _ �. _.._.....__. _ .� UL�Designa#iorr . �VoltageRange '� � RMS
- --_ __ ___., _ .�_ � _ _ _._ ._
Typica( 15 ect 30 cd 15175 75 cd 110 ed Rdculated 24 16-33 Vdc 13 mF�
Current RMS RIwS RM5 RMS RMS
_ . ...... ����____ _ _ _ ._ _ _.._:._,. --�_W __
1 b Vdc 102 135 160 246 309 2�fwr '6-33 Viwr 11 mA. .
_. __-- - _ __ .
___ - . _
�0 Vdc 88 109 13? _ 1Q� 248
�_.._ _._ _ _ .,
__.u. ___—__.___ ___ _ _. ___ .____._
24 Vdc"T 81 94 122 1 E1 203 TYpical Current Rfv1S
-- - -�
. 33 Vdc �q _ 72 106 �24 154 __ 24 Vdc _ 10 ..... _.
�m _... .._ _ �. ._. _� �.
-- � - _._ ___. ---- „ �
16 Viwr 144 1�2 24� 3�? 393 ��Vdc 1 _ .. _
20 Vtwr 141 162 220 274 362 31 Vdc 1?
__...._ — ...__... . ______ _� . _m_ .. _..___-
24 Vf�vr 136 152 _ 2U3 _230 2�2 20 Vtwr _ __ 9 _ .
- - -��- — — - �� 2�VTwr 10
-
33 Vtw✓r 125 1�4 196 201 232 _ .
Current values are shown in mF;.
tNal€Temporal Fiorn-strobes-Law dB SetYing
_ _ . ____ 1�....._..__30 : 15175 75 910
U� cd` cd� cci*" cd` cc9*
Rating ___ �_
FiMS RM� RMS RMS RMS
_ _
16 Vdc 122 '' 160 146 274 ' 330 'G1-HDVM multi-cd
. _ _ -
16 Vrwr 16� 216 231 ' 303 ' 429 ""G1 F-HDV15%5 fixed 15%?5 cd
TYpical i 6 cd 3d cd 15175__ 75 cd 1 i0 cd
._ ___ ._._ _ _._. _.. _ _ __ __ _ _
Carrent RMS � RlVJ s RMS �� RMS RMS
16 Vd� 96 .. �30 158 243 3�2 .
.,, _
20 Vd: 79 104 133 189 ' 241
^4 Vdc ... ��_ . .._. _ _ao.___ _� g - , _ .� 1�G 1�3? �_..
� - - - --
33 Vdc 56 71 l00 118 146
�__ _._. . __- mm _.__�_� _
16 Vtwr 128 180 241 344 339
_. _ _.
2�Vf�vr 11� 15? 2'3 266 343
_.... ., _,.,. ___ _
24 Vfwr ' 113 ' 1�4 195 230 279
_ � ._.. . . __ .___ ��r_ _� . - - - __ __. ,, __._�. . ._. __
33 Vi�vr �12 � �3� 182 �9� 226
Fage 3 af 6 �`a��������
Essue 11
dBA output Average Sound flutput (dBA�
Temporal Horns, Fiorn-strobes(Gi-HD, G'f-HDVM series) (High dB setting,anechoic, 24V, measured at 10ft)
____ —. � ----�----- -- ----
High UL4fi4 Average , Peak ,�
..- �"�..�- .....�-- �'"'..._ '"""'"", �^..""..�"' t10�oD 9c 0 EC 6� � 0 30 �p o�+� ac .c e �0 80 9.
d� Temporal Steady TemparaU Terrtporal/ �90 � " �
Settin9 . I Steady Steady i
._ _.._ _ _ � ......__.— _._. ____, ;
16 Vdc 81 4 85.5 91.4 94 2 -,s•t _
24 Vdc �' 84.4 : 88.6 94.5 97.6
-- __ _ ___ .__— -_ _ ;
33 Vdc 86.3 90.4 ; 96.9 99.5 �`, � ,�
Ut4�4 � Average Peak `� � �� � � �
Low�dB - _ _. Tem o�It Tem or _ _�_�: �� �����
Setting Temporal Steady p � a�f -
� ; Stead ' Sfeady 3- �_.,, �o
�
_____ . _.._____ ...__ ......._"_ . _ .......: .........._____ ..... .'.5`
16 Vdc 76.0 80.1 86.3 89.2 t5 ` -
. ..._ _-- —_ .�. _.._._._ _.���._
„
24 Vdc _ 79.4 83.5 89.0 92.5_
33 Vdc 82.1 _ 86.5 g2.5 _ 95.3 LIC�rIt (�U�p�l� - ������IV� CC��
Steady Tone Norns{C�1-R series} Percent of UL rating versus angle
�_ .. -- __ . _. .._ --
UL464 m ' taverage Peak
_�� _ .._ �__._. .._. �___,�_. ____.__ � ... _ _._
16 Vdc ?�dBA.min 85 dBA 91 dBA , 5,: ,� ,� ;_;�
...�.� ,�-- �..,,;,., —.... :.!� _.........— '-.40°
..._..' ___ _._" _ _
1 f Vfwr 77 dBA.min 85 dBA , 91 dBA j
Notes -�s°t ��� �,s•
1. All values shown are dBA measured ar 10 feeC(3.01 m). t
2. UL464 values measured m re�ierberant room. -F0" oc°
3. Average and Peak values are measured in anechoic chambec `�
-�s�. � . � .;as•
-30°�_ � %'30°
��5:-'- �.r- ..15._V
0•
Specifi�atior�s
_ ._ �. � � . .� _ _�_... ____ __,_. ___ _ .___ � _ �__.
Heusing Red or white textured UV stabdized.color impregnated engineered plast�a Exceeds 94V-C UL flammability rating.
__ ___ ____ _ ___ _....._... ._--_ __.
�ens Opticai grade polycarbonate iclear)
.._ _. � -- - _ . _... �--__ . . _..._..... � __. ..---_ _ _ _.._ _. ---
Strobes and horn-strobes are for wall-mount installation only. Horn-only models may be ceilii�g-or wall-mounted.
Mounting Rusl�i mount:2Yr inch(64 mm)deep one-yang box
(indoor only) Sorface mount:Model 2%193 surface mount box,wiremold box,or equivalent surface-mount box
With optional trim plate:One-gang,two gang,four inch square.octagonal,er European single-gang box
--- .. _ - _. _-- _. _ -- __
VVire connections Screw terminals•single mput ror both hom and strobe.�18 to#12 AWG(0.?5 mm'to 2 5 mm�;wire size
__ - -- ___ — _ ........ _ � _ _--
Operating environment indoor only.3� 1LO��F(0 49`Cj ambient temperature.93°/a relative humidity ���� ��
�-- — _ m. __ _____.__�_...__ _ �_�____.. _ _....m� _ _w� ._.._ _
Agency listings/approvals UL 19�1 UL 1 bdb UL 464, U�� S52� ULC S526,CSFM. CE. FCC. MEA.
(Ail rr�odels comply wiU ADA Code of Federal Regulation Chapier 2o Par 36 Final Rule.j
__.._ � . � _M_ _�._ _ �_._W _— _�._�___m_._ ______�_ _ __..�_ _ __�__.�__�.__...�_ __..____ ____�
Dimensions(HxWxD; Signal 4-112 x 2 314"x 13i16 (113 mm x 68 mm x 21 mm1
Trimplate: 5 (12�mm) tieight 5-7/8"(149 mm;,Depth %"(13 mm;
___ . .... - __... ._ _ - _ ---_ _..
G1-HD series temporal-tone horns: non coded,filtered 16-33 Vdc or unfiltered 16-33 Vdc FWR�or coded when horn
set to steady tone)
Operating voltage u1-HDVM series ternporal-tone horn-strobes non-coded,filtered 16-33 Vdc or unfiltered 16-33 Vdc FWR jor codecJ
(audible NAG only)when used vdith cptional G1 M Genesis Signal Master',
G1-VM series strobes non-coded,filtered 16-33 Vdc or unfiltered 16-33 Vdc FWP,
G1-P series steady-tone horns:co�ed or non-coded,tiltered 20-31 Vdc or untiltered 20-2?Vfw�
_.. _ � ..... .� ._----_ _._______ �.___._____ _._.... ...._ _.. _�._ . __m_m_...
UL 19?1,UL 1636,ULC S526:selectable 15 ed,30 c,d.75 cd,or 11 )cd output
Strobe output rat;ng UL 19'1: 15 cd(fixed 1�f?5 cd modelsl
UL 1638,ULCS526: ?5 cd ffixed 15;75 cd modelsj
__ _.._ _ .. _-__. ___ _-- __
G1-VM strabes and G1-HDVM series temporal-tone horn-strobes:one flash per second synchronizeci with opticnal
Strobe flash rate G1 M Genesis Signal Master indefinitely within 10 milliseconds.Temporal settinc�(�rivate n�ode onlyj:synchronized to
temporal outp�it of horns on same circuit
_ _ -- _ _ -- _...... _ _....__ __.
SIGA-CC'S,SIGA-MCC1S,SIGA-CC2A.SIGA-MCC2A,G1M-RfU
Synchron zation Sources BPS6A, BPS10A,APS6A,�PS'OF\.i064,i0500, Fireshield Plus 3,5 and 10 zone.
Add G1 M for G1-CVM&G1-HDVM devices only.
_ _ __ _ __
._ _ . ..
Horn pulse rate G1-HD ternporal-tone horns and G1-HDVM series temporal-tone horn-strobes teiYiporal rate synchronized with optional
G1 M Genesis Signal Master indefinitely witnin 10 milliseconds.G1-P steady-tone homs:continuous,steady tone oniy
_iemporal audibie pattern 'i�sec ON. %sec OFF. ?2 sec ON i sec OFF h sec "
- - -- - - � _
' ' ' ON, 1�/�sec OFF.then repeat cycle
Page 4 of 6 �3JUV�—kJ�3�a7
. �� . . .. . .. .. issue 71
r-, { { + Fire appliances available with whi*e or red housings.
�.�c�.t1��`G�iC� ��lp�i
Lens Switch Switch Switcfi Switch � �y i �" i
Fiating Positinn � �Position Posi#ion ` ��� �-l�-- � ��
�Color �Positian A B � � "-� ` �.�a �� ��
Amber UL 1630 110 cd 75 cd� � 30 co 15 cd �"`� � ��� �
__ __. ... ___.. ._. �---- _ _..._ .
Amber UL 19?1� 88 cd 60 cd 24 cd 12 cd
. __ _ _ ___
Clea� UL 19?1 110 cd �5 cd 30 cd 15 cd ECSIMNS appliances available vdith clea!or amber lenses.
'Equivalent Roting p �
L �
, � � E ="
��°��� T , � ,T': .� �R��:
=ew�n�w+� t��a� �.� �'�
E
� a�f .�. ,_�t �_ �� --_� �-,
Orderir�� Information �. .. _
Mode1 Housing � Marking ' Lens Strobe Horn Ship Wt.lbs(kgj
Fire Aiarm Appiiances(clw running man icon screen prin#ec6 on hausing) __
_ _ -_ __ _._
G1 Vf�� White Nene Clear Selecta�le 15 30. ?5,oi 11 U cd Strcbe only 0.25 10.11 j
. __ __ ___ -
G1 F-FID Whit� FIRE Clea
-
r Horn only Selectable high/low dB 0.25 (0.11)
_ . ._ _...__ __._..__ _..... _ _ _ ....._... ._ .�,.. _ _ _..._
G1 F-FIDV1575 Whlte � f-IRE � Cle�r 15!75 cd' ��lernporal hi!lo d13-24V 0.25 (0.11)
...._- ...__ _ ._ ______ _. _..__ _.._ ___ _ _. _
U1 F-HDVM White FIRE Clear Selectable 15.3(1 '5.or 11 C)cd Selectable high!low dB �.2b (U.1�j
-- _.. _ __ _ _-- -
G1 F-F' White FIRE Clear Steady Horn inot compatible with Genesis Signal Master) 0.2� (0.11)
--_ _, _. _ _ _ - -- -----= - -- _,_ _ _ ._ __.
...
u1 F-V'15 r 5 White �IRE Clear 15/?5 cd' S:robe only 0.25 (0.11)
__ �._ . ___ _. -- --. __. _ _ _
G1 F-VM White FIRE Clear Selectable 15 30 75,or 11 U cd Sttobe only C.25 (0 11 j
-----. _ � ._���_____ w _.��.._�.w_ ._...__. ._.__ __ _��__ ._ __._� _.� __ __
_. a_..__.
G1-HD White None Clear Horn only Selectable high%low dB 0.2� �0_111
, ----- - - __ __ _ _.. _
a1 H[7��. _ _ ___ _ ._ �...
�' VM Whlte None Clear Selectaole 15 30.75,or 110 cd Selectable high/low dB 025 (0.11)
------- ..____ _ .._.__ _-- _ _.__ -. _ . _
G1-P White None Clear Steady Horn(nct compatible Nlith Genesis Sigral Master 0 25 �0 11 j
_ _.__ _._._ _� _��_.__. _�_. � _ ____ _ ________ _. . �. _�_..�. _ _ _ __ m_- �__.
G1 RF--ID Red FIRE Clear Horn only Selectable high/low d6 0.2o i0.11)
___- . _..... __ _.__ - -- -- -- - _ _
G1 RF -iDV15?5 Red FIRE Clear 15.!?5 cd' Temporal hi!lo dB-24V 025 IQ.111
^ _. �_. . ---- _-- _
u1 RF HDVM Red FIRE Clear Selecta�le 15 3Q 75,or 110 cd Selectable high/low dB 0.25 10 11�
�_...__ _ _.�.� _..e ____._ ._._� T___.� __ - ___�_ _�_� __�__ � _..__ __..
G1 RF � Red FIRE Clear Steady Horn(nct compatible with Genesis Sigi�al Master; 0.25 1�.11 j
--- __ _ _ -- ---- -- �-- - .._ -- --... --.. -- --- -
G1 P,F-V1575 Red FIRE Clear 1�?5 cd' S*.rcbe only Q25 (0.111
_ ---� _. __. � _
G1 RF-VM ReU FIRE Clear Selectanle 15 3Q 75,or 110 cd S:rebe only 0.2� 10 11)
_�. .._____�_ _ _. _ �__�___�� ___ �. �.� _. _____. _ _.__ __.�_ , ��_._ __ -_ _____�..
_�_...�_ _
G1 f;-Hb Red None Clea� Horn only Selectable hlglvlow c�B 0.2� ��.11)
- - -- -- - -- - - � - - -
_, __ - - --
G1 R-HDVM Red NenE Cleai Selectable 15.3(�. (�.or 110 cd Selectable high/low dB 0.2� (�.111
�..� _..,.__..� ____._..._ _ - ��- �� .. __ . _ �_ __._.�� _.. .� _ __.._
G1 R-P Red None ' Clear Steady Horn(not compatible with Genesis Signal Master; 0.25 (0.1�)
--- - ..__ _ ___ _. . _ _ _. __ .
u1�-VM Red None Clear Selectable 15.�0. 75.or 110 cd STrobe only 025 (0.1�j
_ _ _ _
_ .
E�Sl�VINS App{ianees{no running man icon on housingj
_ __
G1 Wf\-VMA White ALERT Am��e� Selectable A, B. C or D ' Strobe only 0.25 (0.11)
_._,_� � _..�m W. _�-_. ..... _ ._. .._._.� . ... _ _ _ .,___
__- -
C1 N,�A-VMC White AL FRT Clear Selectable 15 30, 75,or 110 cd S}rcbe only 0.�5 (0.11�
_ _ __ --__. _._ r_..... y _ __ __-_ __. __
G1 WN-VMA White Nene Amaer Selectable A, B, C or D S.rcbe onl Q25 (0.111
G1 WfJ-VMC White Nene Clear Selectable 15 30. 75.or 110 cd S:rebe only 0.25 f0.111
Trim PEates
_.�_.....__ .._., �_.__.._. ..___, _ _ _ _ . _ e ____ _ __. �_�___ _� ____.. ._�_
G1 T White Nene Genesls T�im Plate(tor two-gang ar 4�square boxes; 0'�,0.7)
_ . _ _-- ___- _. .._---_ __ __. ___ ..._ _ ___. _. .__
G1 RT Red None Genesis Trim Plate(for two gang or 4 sq�are boxes) 0.15(0.7!
�;1 i-F IRE �Nhite RRE Genesis Trun Plate(tor two-ganc�or 4"square boxes! 0 15�0?;
_ __ .,.._ _ ____._� _..__ _._.__ ___._ _ __ _ �._._.._.. _..�.__ _.__ _ ___ m -
u11�1-FIR� Recl I-IHE Uenesis I-irli Plate Itor two-yang or 4"square boxes' 0.'5(0.';
.._.__ . ____ _--. __-=- _ _----__ _ . ___
U1 V��-ALERT White ALEP,T Genesis Trim Pla[e(for t�r�o-gang or 4' sq�are boxes; �'b(�.�'
Surface B�xes
._. __.. _ _ � _- _.._ _ .___-- --° ___ �_. __.-- . _____ _
_ W..
27193-16 Wnite ` N/A One-gang surTace mount box 1 (0.4)
_ .,.._.._ __... _
2�193-11 Red N(A One-gang s�riace mount box 1 (0.4?
'These 15/75 cd models provide fixed output and are not multi-candela devices.The 15 cd output component c,omplies with UL1971,while the?5 cd
output component complies with UL 163&.
Fage 5 of 8 .. �. . �. � ....��� C3JVi!i�U�t 3
issue y 1
��eu��� � : �„ � ,�{�
�� � r i�i 6�� �.
�� � � ��a���� �
�� A UTC Fre&6ecunty Company
Detection&alarm since 1872
U.S.
T 888 378 2329
F 866 503 3996
Canada
Chubb Edwards
T 519 376 2430
F 519 376 7258
Southeast Asia
T:+65 6391 9300
F:+65 6391 9306
India
T:+91 80 4344 2000
F:+91 80 4344 2050
Australia
T+fi1 3 9239 1200
F+61 3 9239 1299
Europe
T+32 2 725 11 20
F+32 2 721 86 13
Latin America
T 305 593 4307
F 305 593 4300
utcfi reand security.com
O 2010 UTC Fire&Security.
All rights reserved.
0
Page6of6 ��UV�—U��a� �
� issue 9 t �
�'rcaject Nlar�ual
�C�,���"�,1�����1L �EPT. I1�ll�'�01/�ii'�11�1'V��
Yelm Community Schools No. 2
OWNER
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS NO.2
PO BOX 476
YELM,WA 98597
CONTACT: ERLING BIRKLAND
PHONE: (360)458-6128
FAx: (360)458-6434
ARCHITECT
ERICKSON MCGOVERN, P.L.L.C.
120131 ST STRE�SOUTH
TACOMA,WA 98444
CONTACT: RAY MOW
PHOtvE: (253)531-0206
FAx: (253) 531-9197
STRUCTURAL ENGINEER
PCS STRUCTURAL SOLUTIONS
1250 PACIFIC AVENUE,SUITE 7O1
TACOMA,WA 98402
CONTACT:JACK PINKARD
PHOrvE: (253) 383-2797
FAx: (253)383-1557
11ilECHANICAL&ELECTRICAL ENGINEERS
$CE ENGINEERS
6021 12T"STREET EAST,SUITE 200
TACOMA,WA 98424
CONTACT:CARRIE TAY�OR
PHONE: (253)922-0446
FAx: (253)922-0896
�IANUARY 2013
�2F��;�V�D
FES Q 5 2013
� ��.r.
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVER�
1 TABL.E OF�:ONTENTS
2 �_��„R��.���� �I,JMBER OF PAGES
3 ���{'IFIGATi�iNS
4 D!'VISIOi�00—�RO�CUREMEN'9'AiVD CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS
5 SECTION 00 0100,TABLE OF CONTENTS.......................................................................................... 3
6 00 1113,ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS.................................................................................. 1
7 00 21 13, INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS................................................................................. 7
$ 00 4200, FORM OF PROPOSAL........................................................................................... 1
9 00 5200,CONTRACT FORMS..............................................................................................
1 O 00 7200,GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION............................46
11 Di'�+ISIOid 01 —GENERAL REC�UIREMENTS
12 SECTION 01 1000,SUMMARY........................................................................................................... 4
13 O1 2000, PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES..................................................................... 9
14 01 2300,ALTERNATES...................................................................................................... 1
15 01 3000,ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS......................................................................... 8
16 01 4000,QUALITY REQUIREMENTS .................................................................................... 4
17 01 4219, REFERENCE STANDARDS .................................................................................... 3
1 S O1 5000,TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS .............................................................. 4
19 01 6000,PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS .................................................................................. 4
2� 01 6001,SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM........................................................................... 2
2 1 01 7000,EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS........................................................ 8
2 2 DI'�✓ISION 02—DEiV10LTION/HAZARDOUS N1ATERIAL REMOVAI.
2 3 SECTION 02 4100, DEMOLITION....................................................................................................... 7
2 4 DI'VISIf3N 03,C�NCRET�
2 5 SECTION 03 3000,CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE.................................................................................13
2 6 DPVISIO�i 04.MASONRY
2 7 NC)NE
2 8 DI'101S10N fl5.ME?AL�
2 9 NotvE
3 0 Df1/ISIA�d 06.WOOa AiND PLASTICS
31 SE:CTION O6 1 OOO,ROUGH CARPENTRY........................................................................................... 7
3 2 06 2000, FINISH CARPENTRY ............................................................................................ 5
3 3 06 6400, PLASTIC LAiNINATE WAINSCOT............................................................................. 2
34
35 DIViSION Q7 TtiERil?IALAND MOiSTURE PROTECTION
3 6 SE:CTION 071900,SLAB SEALERS................................................................................................... 2
3 7 07 2100,THERMAL INSULATION........................................................................
.................
3 8 07 2500,WEATHER BARRIERS.......................................................................................... 2
3 9 07 3113,ASPHALT SHINGLES............................................................................................ 5
4 O O7 6200,SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM...................................................................... 3
4 1 07 9005,�OINT SEALERS .................................................................................................. 4
42
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements Bid -TOC - 1 TABLE OF CONTENTS 1-15-13
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEP'f. IMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOt3LS °
ERI�KSON MCGOVER�I
1 �IVISIUN 08,DOORS AND NVINDOWS '
2 SECTION 081113, HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES..............................................................:... 5
3 08 1416, FLUSH WOOD DOORS......................................................................................... 4
4 08 3323,OVERHEAD COILING DOORS................................................................................ 3
5 OS 8000,G�azING ............................................................................................................ 7
6 DIVISIO�I�9.FINISIiES
7 SECTION 09 5153, DIRECT-APPLIED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS(ALTERNATE BiD A-3� ............................. 3
8 09 9000, PAINTS AND COATINGS—(NEW CONSTRUCTION)..................................................15
9 09 9005, PAINTS AND COATINGS—(EXISTING STRUCTURES................................................14
1 O 09 2116,GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES.............................................................................. 6 °
11 DlVISION 10.SPECIAL�'IES
12 NONE
13 DI'�,/ISIG1id 1'!.EQUIPI4lENT
14 SECTION 12 3450, FACTORY BUILT CASEWORK................................................................................ 1 O �_
15 DIViSIOR!12,FURNISHINGS �
16 NONE 4,
17 DiilISl�Oid 13
18 NONE
;P.
19 �IECH�IICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS............................................................................................. 1
2 0 DNISION 20 M�CHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS `
2 1 SECTION 20 0000,GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS............................................................... 1 �-
22 DIVISlON 21,FIRE SUPPRESSIOI�
2 3 NONE ,r
2 4 �1VISiUid 22.P�UMBING SPECIFIGATIONS
25
2 6 SECTION 22 0523,VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING ............................................................ 4 s�
2 7 22 0529, HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING EQUIPMENT......................................... 4
2 8 22 0719, PIPING INSULATIONS............................................ ";:
................................................ 3
2 9 221116, DOMESTIC WATER PIPE AND FITTINGS................................................................. 3
�
3 0 22 1119, PIPING SPECIAL'TIES............................................................................................ 4
31 22 1300,SOIL,WASTE&VENT PIPING SYSTEM.................................................................. 4 ,,,,
32 � 22 2000,EXCAVATION AND BACKFI�L FOR MECHANICAL UNDERGROUND UTILITIES............... 5
3 3 22 3300, ELECTRIC STORAGE TYPE V�/ATER HEATERS........................................................ 2 �
3 4 22 4000, PLUMBING FIXTURES......................................................................................._... 3
35 -
3 6 DIVISIt)N 23 HEATING VEIVTILIA�ING AND AIR CONDITIONING SPECIFICATIONS „,�,
37
3 8 SECTION 23 0529, HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC EQUiPMENT............................................... 2
3 9 23 0548,VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL...................................................................... 4 �,
4 0 23 8239, UNIT HEATERS.................................................................................................... 2
41
4 2 ELECTRi�AL.�.ABLE OF CONTENTS.............................................................................................. 1
43 �
2012-37/YCS Agriculturai Dept Improvements Bld -T��'i -2 TABLE OF CONTENTS 1-15-13
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
1�G DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 DI'VISION 26 �LECTRICAL SP'ECIFICA"fIONS
2
3 SE:CTION 26 0000, ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS.................................................................:... S
4 26 0005,ELECTRICAL-EXISTING SYSTEMS......................................................................... 2
5 26 5019,WIRES AND CABLES............................................................................................ 2
6 26 0532,OUTLET AND PULL BOXES................................................................................... 2
� 26 0533,RACEWAY ............................................................................ 3
..............................
$ 26 2726,SWITCHES AND RECEPTACLES............................................................................. 2
g26 5000, LIGHTING............................................................................................................ 3
10 DfV1SI0iV 27 COiNIIAUfVICATION SPECIFICATIONS
11 NONE
12 DIVISION 28 ELEC'�RICAL SAFETY AND SECURITY
13 NONE
14 DIVISION 3�,
15 NONE
16 DIV�SIOiV 3� EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
17 SE:CTION 32 3313,CHAIIV LINK FENCES AND GATES.......................................................................... 4
18 DIV�SICi�33,
19 NONE
2 p Et�D OF TABLE OF COMTE�J�S
20�12-37/YCS Agricuttural Dept Improvements Bid -TOC -3 TABLE OF CONTENTS 1-15-13
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 SEGTION QO 1113
2 ADVER�'iSEMENT �OF� BIDS
3
4 NOTICE TO BIDDEf�S
5 SEALED BIDS 11VILL BE RECEI\/ED BY OWNER AT THE �OLLOWlNG LOCATiON:
6 Yelm Community Schoois, Administration Office '
7 Facilities Department,ATTN: Cheri Wolf
8 107 1 st Street North
9 Yelm,WA 98597
10 RE: YCS -SOC-Agricultural Dept Improvements
11 Bids will be received on the Form of Proposal, until 3:30 P.M., P.D.S.T., Tuesday, February 11,
12 2013 (stamped in and held).
13 All bids will be reviewed by the Owner.A public opening of bid will not occur. Bid Proposals, not
14 received prior to their scheduled time of receipt may be returned without consideration at the
15 discretion of the Owner. �
16 The Owner reserves the right to reject any and all Bids, and to waive any informalities or '
17 irregularities in any Bid or in the bidding.
.
18 Each Bid and other enclosures shall be enclosed in an opaque, sealed envelope bearing the name
19 and address of the bidder and addressed to the Owner. Mark lower left corner of the envelope k
20 "YCS SOC-Agricultural Dept. Improvements."
21 The Bid(s) and Contract(s)are subject to equal employment opportunity provisions of Washington '�
22 State Law, compliance with prevailing wage standards of RCW Chapter 39.12, and all reporting �
23 requirements relating to each of the above.
24 DOCUMENTS �
25 AS REQUIRED BY SMALL WORKS,CONTRACTORS iDENT�FIED TO BID PROJfCT SHALL RECENE
26 ONE SET OFF DRAIIVIMGS AND SPECIFICATIONS.
27 SPECIFICATIONS,INCWDING BID AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS,AND DRAWINGS, MAY BE
28 EXAMINED AT THE OFFICE OF ERICKSON MCGOVERN, P.L.L.C., �i 01 EAST 26TH STREET SUITE 300,
29 TACOMA,WASHINGTON (253)539-0206. -
30 FULL SET PI�RCHASES ARE AVAILABLE FOR THE COST OF REPRODUCTIOid. BIDDERS
31 REQUESTING THAT BID DOCUMENTS SE DELIVERED BY MAIL WILL BE REQUIRED TO PAY �
32 ACTUI�L SFIIPPING (MA(LING)COSTS.SHOULD A BIDDER WISH PARTIAL SETS,INDIVIDUAL
33 DRAWINGS OR DOCUMENTS OR IN QIGI7AL FORMAT Oid COMPACT DISK(CD),THEY MAY OBTAIN �
34 THEM FROM,R�RC, P.253.383.6363, BY PAYING TNE COST OF REPRODUCTION AND SHIPPING.
,�..
35 COMPLETE PDF BID DOCUIVIENTS ARE AVAILABLE FOR DOWNLOAD FREE OF CHARGE AT
36 NORTHWEST COiVTRACTORS NETWORK-NWCONTRACTORSNETWORK.COM.SELECT PUBLIC .
37 PROJECTS>WASHINGTOIV PROJECTS>"YCS AG BUILDING">DOWNLOAD PDF. FOR
38 ASSISTANCE CONTACT ARC AT 253-383-6363. ,_
39 PRE-SID MEETING
40 THERE SHALL BE A NON-MANDATORY PRE-BID MEETING ON 5th DAY, OF February,2013 AT 3:00
41 P.1VI., P.D.S.T.,AT THE PROJECT SITE, 1315 YELM AVE WEST,YELM,WASNINGTON 98597.
42 PROJECT ES71N1ATE$95,000.00
43 BY THE ORDER OF:
44 YELM COAAMUNITY SCHOOL N�.2
45
46 END OF SECTION
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 00 1113 - 1 ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVEAfd
1 S�CTION 00 21 i 3
2 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
3 INST�iUCT10NS TO BIDDERS
4 1.0'1 DEFIIViTIONS
5 A. All definitions set forth in the Contract for Construction or in other Contract Documents are
6 applicable to the Bidding Documents.
7 B. "Addenda"are written or graphic instruments issued prior to the execution of the Contract which
8 modify or interpret the Bidding Documents by additions,deletions, clarifications or corrections. The
9 contents of Addenda are issued in no particular order and therefore should be carefully and
10 completely reviewed.
11 C. An "Alternate Bid" (or"Alternate") is an amount stated in the Bid to be added to or deducted from
12 the amount of the Base Bid if the corresponding change in the Work, as described in the Bidding
13 Documents, is accepted.
14 D. The "Base Bid" is the sum stated in the Bid for which the Bidder offers to pertorm the Work
15 described in the Bidding Documents as the base to which work may be added or from which work
16 may be deleted for sums stated in Alternate Bids.
17 E. A"Bid" is a complete and properly signed proposal to do the Work or designated portion thereof,
18 submitted in accordance with the Bidding Documents,for the sums therein stipulated.
19 F. A"Bidder"is a person or entity who submits a Bid.
20 G. The"Bidding Documents" include the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid, Instructions to Bidders,
21 the bid form, any other sample bidding and contract forms,the Bid Bond,and the proposed
22 Contract Documents, including any Addenda issued prior to receipt of bids.
23 H. The "Contract Documents" proposed for the Work consist of the Agreement (as well as any
2� General Conditions, revisions, Supplemental, Special or other Conditions included in the Project
25 �Vlanual), any Drawings and Specifications, and all Addenda issued prior to and all modifications
26 issued after execution of the Contract.
27 I. A"Sub-bidder" is a person or entity who submits a bid to a Bidder for materials, equipment or labor
28 for a portion of the Work.
29 J. A"Unit Price" is an amount stated in the Bid as a price per unit of ineasurement for materials,
30 equipment or services as described in the Bidding Documents or in the proposed Contract
31 Documents.
32 1.02 BID�E4�'S REA�ESENTATIONS
33 A. By making its Bid, each Bidder represents that:
34 1. Bidding Documents. The Bidder has read and understands the Bidding Documents, and its
35 Bid is made in accordance with them.
36 2. Pre-Bid Meeting. The Bidder has attended any pre-bid meeting(s) required by the Bidding
37 Documents.
38 3. Possible Self-Performed Work Requirement. The Bidder will perform with its own forces at
39 least any percentage of the Work required by the Bidding Documents or the Contract
40 Documents.
41 4. Basis. Its Bid is based upon the materials, systems, services, and equipment required by the
42 Bidding Documents, without exception.
43 5. Examination. The Bidder has carefully examined the Bidding Documents, Contract
44 Documents, and the Project site, including any existing buildings, and it has satisfied itself as
45 to the nature, location, character, quality and quantity of the Work,the labor, materials,
46 equipment, goods,supplies, work, services and other items to be furnished, and all other
47 requirements of the Contract Documents. The Bidder has also satisfied itself as to the
48 conditions and other matters that may be encountered at the Project site or affect
49 performance of the Work or the cost or difficulty thereof, including but not limited to those
2012-37/YCS Agricuttural Dept Improvements 00 2113- 1 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN -
1 conditions and matters affecting:transportation, access, disposal, handling and storage of ''
2 mate�ials, equipment and other items; availability and quality of labor, water, electric power
3 and utilities; availability and condition of roads; climatic conditions and seasons; physical
4 conditions at the Project site and the surrounding locality;topography and ground surface
5 conditions; and equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and at all times during the
6 pertormance of the Work. The failure of the Bidder fully to acquaint itself with any applicable
7 condition or matter shall not in any way relieve the Bidder from the responsibility for
8 pertorming the Work in accordance with, and for the Contract Sum and within the Contract
9 Time provided for in,the Contract Documents.
10 6. Project Manual. The Bidder has checked its copies of any Project Manual issued with the
11 Table of Contents baund therein to ensure the Project Manual is complete.
12 7. Separate Work. The Bidder has examined and coordinated all Drawings, Contract
13 Documents, and Specifications for any other contracts to be awarded separately from, but in
14 connection with,the Work being bid upon, so that the Bidder is fully informed as to conditions
15 affecting the Work under the contract being bid upon. �
16 8. License Requirements. Bidders and their proposed Subcontractors shall be registered and
17 shall hold such licenses as may be required by the laws of Washington, including RCW
18 18.27,for the performance of the Work specified in the Contract Documents.
�
19 j.03 BIDDING DOCUMENTS
20 A. COPIES
21 1. Deposit. Sidders may obtain complete sets of the Bidding Documents from the issuing office ,�,
22 and other locations designated in the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid in the number and for
23 the deposit sum, if any, stated. The deposit will be refunded to Bidders who submit a bona �
24 fide Bid and return the Bidding Documents in good condition within ten days after receipt of
25 Bids. The cost of replacement of any missing or damaged documents will be deducted from �
26 the deposit. A Bidder awarded the Contract may retain the Bidding Documents, and its
27 deposit will be refunded. `
28 2. Sub-bidders. Bidding Documents will not be issued directly to Sub-bidders or others unless
29 specifically offered in the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid. �
30 3. Complete sets. Bidders shall use complete sets of Bidding Documents in preparing Bids; the
31 Owner assumes no responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of
32 incomplete sets of Bidding Documents. =
33 4. Conditions. The Owner and/or any Architect or Engineer make copies of the Bidding
34 Documents availabie on the above terms oNy for the purpose of obtaining Bids on the Work
35 and do not confer a license or grant permission for any other use.
36 B. INTERPRETATION OR CORRECTION OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS
37 1. Format. The Contract Documents are divided into parts, divisions, and sections for
38 convenient organization and reference. Generally,there has been no attempt to divide the
39 Specification sections into Work pertormed by the various building trades, any work by
40 separate contractors, or any Work required for separate facilities in or phases of the Project.
41 2. Notify Owner. Bidders and Sub-bidders shall promptly notify the Owner of any ambiguity,
42 inconsistency, or error which they may discover upon examination of the Bidding Documents ..:
43 or of the site and local conditions.All Bidders and Sub-bidders shall thoroughly familiarize
44 themselves with spec'rfied products and installation procedures and submit to the Owner any
45 objections (in writing) no later than 10 days prior to the Bid Date. The submittal of the Bid
46 constitutes acceptance of products and procedures specified as sufficient, adequate, and �
47 satisfactory for completion of the Contract.
48 3. Written request. Bidders and Sub-bidders requiring clarification or interpretation of the
49 Bidding Documents shall make a written request which shall reach the Owner at least three
50 days prior to the date for receipt of 8ids.
51 4. Addenda.Any interpretation, correction or change of the Bidding Documents will be made by .
52 written Addendum. Interpretations, corrections or changes of the Bidding Documents made in
53 any other manner wili not be binding, and Bidders shall not rely upon such interpretations, �
5� corrections and changes.
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 00 2113 - 2 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS �.
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMEiVTS
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 5. Singular references. Reference in the singular to an article, device, or piece of equipment
2 shall include as many of such articles as are indicated in the Contract Documents or as are
3 required to complete the installation.
4 6. Utilities and runs. The Bidder should assume that the exact locations of any underground or
5 hidden utilities and plumbing and electrical runs may be somewhat different from any location
6 indicated in the surveys or Contract Documents.
7 C. SUBSTITUTIONS
8 1. Standard. The materials, products, procedures and equipment described in the Bidding
9 Documents establish a standard of required function, dimension, appearance, and quality that
10 must be met by any proposed substitution.
11 2. Substitution procedure. No substitution will be considered prior to receipt of Bids unless the
12 Owner receives a written request for approval on a complete Substitution Request Form at
13 least FIVE (5) days prior to the date for receipt of Bids. Each such request shall include the
14 name of the material or equipment proposed to be replaced and a complete description of the
15 proposed substitute, including drawings, cuts, performance and test data and any other
16 information necessary for an evaluation.A statement setting forth any changes in other
17 materials, equipment or other Work that incorporation of the substitute would require shall be
18 included.The proposer has the burden to prove the merit of the proposed substitute; by
19 proposing the substitution,the Bidder represents that it has personally investigated the
20 proposed material or product and determined that it is equal or better in all respects to that
21 specified,that the same or better warranty wil! be provided for the substitution,that complete
22 cost data, including all direct and indirect costs of any kind, has been presented, and that it
23 will coordinate the installation of the substitute if accepted and make all associated changes
24 in the Work. The Owner's decision to approve or disapprove a proposed substitution shall be
25 final.Written requests for approval shall constitute a guarantee by the Bidder that the articles
26 or materials are, in all respects, including warranty, equal or superior to those specified,
27 unless otherwise noted. To the extent the proposed substitution will require additional work by
28 an architect or consultants after Bid award,the Contractor will be required to pay for this work
29 at their customary hourly rates.
30 3. Addendum. If the Owner approves a proposed substitution prior to receipt of Bids,the
31 approval will 6e set forth in a written Addendum. Bidders shall not rely upon approvals made
32 in any other manner.
33 4. Post-bid substitutions. After the Contract has been executed,the Owner may consider a
34 written request for the substitution of material or products in place of those specified in the
35 Contract Documents only under exceptional circumstances as specified.
36 D. ADDENDA
37 1. Written. All Addenda will be written. They will be mailed, e-mailed,faxed and/or delivered to
38 those the Owner knows to have received a complete set of Bidding Documents.
39 2. Copies. Copies of Addenda will be made available for inspection wherever Bidding
40 Documents are on file for that purpose.
41 3. Verification and acknowledgment of receipt. Prior to bidding, each Bidder shall ascertain that
42 it has received all Addenda issued. Each Bidder shall acknowledge its receipt of all Addenda
43 in its Bid.
44 1,04 BiIDDINICa PROCE�URE
45 A. FORIM AND STYLE OF BIDS
46 1. Form. Bids shall be submitted on forms identical to the form included with the Bidding
47 Documents.
48 2. Entries on the bid form. All blanks on the bid form shall be filled in by typewriter or manually in
49 ink.
50 3. Words and figures.Where so indicated by the makeup of the Bid form, sums shali be
51 expressed in both words and figures; in case of discrepancy between the two,the amount
52 written in words shall govern.
2012-37/YCS Agricuftural Dept Improvements 00 2113-3 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
�IELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSOPIIVICGOVERN -
1 4. Initial changes. Any interlineation, alteration or erasure must be initialed by the signer of the "'
2 Bid.
3 5. Alternates. All requested Alternates should be bid. The Owner reserves the right, but is not
4 obligated, to reject any Bid on which all requested Alternates are not bid. If no change in the
5 Base Bid is required for an Alternate, enter "No Change." If there is no entry, it will be
6 presumed that is the Bidder has made no offer to accomplish the Alternate.
7 6. iVo conditions. The Bidder shall make no conditions or stipulations on the bid form nor qualify
8 its Bid in any other manner. °°
9 7. Identity of Bidder. The Bidder shall include in the appropriate location on the bid form the
10 legal name of the Bidder and, if requested, a description of the Bidder as a sole proprietor, a
11 partnership, a joint venture, a corporation (include state of incorporation), or another �
12 described form of legal entity.The Bid shall be signed by the person or persons legally
13 authorized to bind the Bidder to a contract. A Bid submitted by an agent shall have a current
14 power of attorney attached certifying the agent's authority to bind the Bidder.
15 8. Bid amounts do not include sales tax. The Bid shall include in the sum stated all taxes
16 imposed by law, EXCEPT STATE AND LOCAL SALES TAX.
17 9. Bid breakdown.The Bid form may contain, for the Owner's accounting purposes only, a
18 breakdown of some or all of the components included in the Base Bid. _
19 B. POSSIBLE TRENCH EXCAVATION SAFETY PROVISIONS
20 1. To ensure that the Bidder agrees to comply with relevant trenching safety requirements of
21 RCW 39.04.180,the Base Bid may include the cost of any required trenching. The Bidder
22 shall enter in the blank provided on the Bid form the dollar amount the Bidder has included in �
23 its Base Bid for any work requiring trenching that will exceed a depth of four feet. If trench �.
24 excavation safety provisions do not pertain to the Project, the Bidder should enter"N.A." or
25 "Not Applicable° in the blank on the bid form. �
26 C. BID SECURITY
27 1. Purpose and procedure. Each Bid shall be accompanied by a bid security equal to five
28 percent of the Base Bid.The bid security constitutes a pledge that the Bidder will enter into �,
29 the Contract with the Owner in the form provided, in a timely manner, and on the terms stated
30 in its Bid and will furnish in a timely manner the payment and performance bonds, certificates
31 of insurance, Contractor's Construction Schedule, and all other documents required in the
32 Contract Documents. Should the Bidder fail or refuse to enter into the Contract or fail to �
33 furnish such documents, the amount of the bid security shall be forfeited to the Owner as
34 liquidated damages, not as a penalty. "�
35 2. Form. The bid security shall be in the form of a certified or bank cashier's check payable to
36 the Owner or a bid bond executed by a bonding company licensed in the State of Washington �
37 on a Public Works Bond or equivalent form. .
38 3. Retaining bid security.The Owner will have the right to retain the bid security of Bidders to
39 whom an award is being considered until either(a)the Contract has been executed, and �
40 payment and pertormance bonds have been furnished, or (b)the specified time has elapsed
41 so that Bids may be withdrawn, or (c) all Bids have been rejected.
42 4. Return of Bid Security. Within 45 days after the Bid Date,the Owner will release or return bid
43 securities to Bidders whose Bids are not to be further considered in awarding the Contract. �
44 Bid securities of the three apparent low Bidders will be held until the Contract has been finally
45 executed, after which all unforfeited bid securities will be returned.
46 D. SUBMISSION OF BIDS
47 1. Procedure. The Bid,the bid security, and any other documents required,to be submitted with
48 the Bid shall be enclosed in a sealed opaque envelope identified with the Project name, the
49 Bidder's name and address and, if applicable,the designated portion of the Work for which .
50 the Bid is submitted. If the Bid is sent by mail the sealed envelope shall be enclosed in a
51 separate mailing envelope with the notation "SEALED BID ENCLOSED"on the face thereof.
52 2. Deposit. Bids shall be deposited at the designated location prior to the time and date for
53 receipt of Bids indicated in the Advertisement or fnvitation to Bid, or any extension thereof �
2012-37/YCS Agricuftural Dept Improvements 00 2113 - 4 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS =.
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELBA COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 made by Addendum. Bids received after the time and date for receipt of Bids may be returned
Z without consideration at the discretion of the Owner.
3 3. Responsibility. The Bidder assumes full responsibility for timely delivery at the location
4 designated for receipt of Bids.
5 4. Form. Oral, telephonic,fax or telegraphic Bids are invalid and will not be considered.
6 E. MODIFICATION OR WITHDRAWAL OF BID
7 1. After receipt time.A Bid may not be modified, withdrawn or canceled by the Bidder during a
g 45-day period folfowing the time and date designated for the receipt of Bids, and each Bidder
g so agrees in submitting its Bid.
10 2. Before receipt time. Pcior to the time and date designated for receipt of Bids, any Bid
11 submitted may be modified or withdrawn by notice to the party receiving Bids at the place
12 designated for receipt of Bids.The notice shall be worded so as not to reveal the amount of
13 the original Bid.
14 3. Resubmittal.Withdrawn Bids may be resubmitted up to the time designated for the receipt of
15 Bids provided that they are then fuliy in conformance with these Instructions to Bidders.
16 4. Bid security with resubmission. Bid security shall be in an amount sufficient for the Bid as
17 modified or resubmitted.
18 F. NOTICE
19 1. Notice or a request from a Bidder under these Instructions to Bidders must be in writing over
20 the signature of the Bidder and delivered in person or by mail, express delivery,telegram or
21 fax. If the notice is by telegram or fax, written confirmation over the signature of the Bidder
22 must be mailed and postmarked on or before the date and time set for the notice.
23 1.{95 CO�ISIDERATiON OF BIDS
24 A. OPENING OF BIDS:
25 1. Unless stated otherwise in the Advertisement or invitation to Bid,the properly identified Bids
26 received on time will be opened and review by the district.A public bid opening will not occur.
27 An abstract of the Base Bids and Alternate Bids, if any, will be made available to Bidders.
28 B. REJECTION OF BIDS:
29 1. The Owner shall have the right but not the obligation to reject any or all Bids for any reason or
30 for no reason,to reject a Bid not accompanied by required bid security or by other material or
31 data required by the Bidding Documents, or to reject a Bid which is in any way incomplete or
32 irregular.
33 C. ACCEPTANCE OF BID (AWARD)
34 1. Owner.The Owner intends (but is not bound)to award a Contract to the lowest responsible
35 and rESponsive Bidder, provided the Bid has been submitted in accordance with the
36 requirements of the Bidding Documents and does not exceed the funds available.The Owner
37 has the right to waive any informality or irregularity in any Bid(s) received and to accept the
38 Bid(s) which, in its judgment, is in its own best interests.
39 2. Alternates. The Owner shall have the right to accept Alternates in any order or combination,
40 unless otherwise specifically provided in Article 1.09, and to determine the low Bidder on the
41 basis of the sum of the Base Bid and the Alternates accepted. The Owner retains the right to
42 accept Alternate Bid items at the price bid within 45 days after the Agreement is executed.
43 D. BID PROTEST PROCEDURES
44 1. Procedure.A Bidder protesting for any reason the Bidding Documents, a bidding procedure,
45 the award of the Contract or any other aspect arising from or relating in any way to the
46 bidding shall cause a written protest to be filed with the Owner within two full business days of
47 the event giving rise to the protest and, in any event, no later than two full business days after
48 the date upon which bids are opened.The written protest shall include the name of the
49 protesting Bidder, a detailed description of the specific factual and legal grounds for the
50 protest, copies of all supporting documents, and the specific relief requested, The written
51 protest shall be delivered to:
52
2012-37/YCS Agricuftural Dept Improvements 00 2113- 5 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
YEL�IiI HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMEiVTS
Y�LiVI COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 Superintendent
2 Owner
3 107 1 st St. North
� Yelm,VVA 98597-0476 -
5 2. Consideration. Upan receipt of the written protest,the Owner wiil consider the protest. The
b Owner may,within three business days of the Owner's receipt of the protest, provide any
7 other affected Bidder(s)the opportunity to respond in writing to the protest. If the protest is
8 not resolved by mutual agreement of the protesting Bidder and the Owner,the °
9 Superintendent of the Owner or designee will review the issues and promptly furnish a final
10 and binding written decision to the protesting Bidder and any other affected Bidder(s) within
11 six business days of the Owner's receipt of the protest. (If more than one protest is filed,the �
12 Owner's decision will be provided within six business days of the Owner's receipt of the last
13 protest.) If no reply is received during the six-business-day period,the protest shall be -
14 deemed rejected.
15 3. Waiver. Failure to comply with these protest procedures will render a protest waived.
16 4. Condition precedent.Timely and proper compliance with and exhaustion of these protest
17 procedures shall be a condition precedent to any otherwise permissible judicial consideration
18 of a protest. �
�9 1.06 POST BID IN�ORIIAATIOid
20 A. INFORMATION FRONI APPARENT LOW BIDDER
21 1. Submittal:Within five days of the Owner's request,the apparent low Bidder shall submit to �.
22 the Owner:
23 a. a letter or form from the Bidder's insurance company stating that the insurance required °
24 by the Contract Documents will become effective upon execution of the Contract;
25 b. a detailed breakdown of the Bid in a form acceptable to the Owner; �
26 c. the names of the persons or entities (including a designation of the Work to be
27 performed with the Contractor's own forces, and the names of those who are to furnish
28 materials or equipment fabricated to a special design) proposed for each of the principal ,�.
29 portions of the Work; and
30 d. the praprietary names and the suppliers of the principal items or systems of materials --
31 and equipment proposed for the Work. Failure to provide such information in a timely
32 manner may constitute an event of breach permitting forfeiture of the Bid security.
33 2. Responsibility.The Bidder will be required to establish to the satisfaction of the Owner the
34 reliability and responsibility of the persons or entities proposed to furnish and perform the
35 Work described in the Bidding Documents.The responsibility of the Bidder may be judged in ,
36 part by the responsibility of these proposed entities.The following will be considered:
37 a. The ability, capacity, and skill to perform the contract; °
38 b. The character, integrity, reputation,judgment, experience, and efficiency of the Bidder;
39 c. Whether the Bidder can perform the contract within the time specified; °
40 d. The quality of performance of previous contracts;
41 e. The preuious and existing compliance by the Bidder with laws relating to the contract;
42 and ,,.
43 f. Such other information as may be secured having a bearing on the decision to award the
44 contract.
45 3. Objection. Prior to the award of the Contract,the Owner will notify the Bidder in writing if the
46 Owner, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to a person or entity proposed by
47 the Bidder. ff the Owner has reasonable objection to a proposed person or entity, the Bidder
48 may, at Bidder's option, (1) withdraw the Bid, or (2) submit an acceptable substitute person or
49 entity with no change in the established Contract Time and no adjustment in the Base Bid or .
50 Alternate Bid, even if there is a cost to the Bidder occasioned by the substitution. In the event
51 of withdrawal, bid security will not be forfeited.
52 4. Change. Persons and entities proposed by the Bidder and to whom the Owner has made no
53 reasonable objection must be used on the Work for which they were proposed and shall not m
54 be changed except with the written consent of the Owner.
2012-37/YCS Agricuttural Dept Improvements 00 2113- 6 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS ,
YELM HiGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELIuI COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERiCKSOM MCGOVERN
1 B. BIDDING MISTAKES:
2 1. The Owner will not be obligated to consider notice of claimed bidding mistakes received more
3 than three business days after the bid opening.
4 1.07 PERFORMANCE BOND AND LABOR A�VD MATERIAL PAYMENT BOND
S A. BOND REQUIREMENTS:
6 1. Within ten days after the issuance of the Notice of Intent to Award, and prior to the date of
7 execution of the Contract,the Bidder shall furnish evidence satisfactory to the Owner of its
g ability to obtain statutory bonds pursuant to RCW 39.08 covering the faithful performance of
9 the Contract and the payment of all obligations arising thereunder in the form and amount
1Q prescribed in the Contract Documents. The cost of such bond shall be included in the Base
11 Bid.
12 B. TIME OF DELIVERY AND FORM OF BONDS:
13 1. The Bidder shall deliver the required bonds to the Owner within ten days after the date of
14 execution of the Contract and prior to commencing operations at the site.
15 1.08 FORNI O�AGREEiVIENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR
16 A. FORM TO BE USED:
17 1. The Agreement for the Work will be written on the form(s) contained in the Bidding
18 Documents, including any Supplemental or Special Conditions, and the other Contract
1g Documents included with the Project Manual. In the event no form is enclosed, a AIA
20 Document A101, Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor,where the
21 basis of payment'is a Stipulated Sum,"as revised, modified and supplemented, along with
22 revised AIA Document A201, General Conditions, will be used.
23 B. CONFLICTS:
24 1. In case of conflict between the provisions of these Instructions and any other Bidding
25 Document,these Instructions shall govern. In case of conflict between the provisions of the
26 Bidding Documents and the Contract Documents,the Contract Documents shall govern.
27 1.09 �O�ITRACT DOCUMEidTS
28 A. This paragraph contain descriptions of some but not all of the provisions of the Contract
29 Documents.
30 1. RETAINAGE:
31 a. The Contract Documents specify the statutory retainage requirements for this Project.
32 2. CO�ITRACT TIME:
33 a. The Contract Documents specify the Contract Time.Timely completion of this Project is
34 essential to the Owner.
35 3. PREVAILING WAGES:
36 a. The Contract Documents contain requirements regarding the payment of prevailing
37 wages pursuant to RCW 39.12.
38 4. WRITTEN CLAIMS AND NOTICE:
39 a. The Contract Documents contain a number of provisions that require the Contractor to
40 make Claims in writing within a specified time in order to maintain the claim.
41 5. CHANGES IN CONTRACT SUM:
42 a. The Contract Documents contain provisions specifying requirements for and pricing of
43 changes in the Contract Sum.
44 6. CONTRACTOR REGiSTRATION:
45 a. Pursuant to RCW 39.06,the Bidder shall be registered or licensed as required by the
46 laws of the State of Washington, including but not limited to RCW 18.27.
47 END OF SECTION
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 00 2113- 7 INSTRUCTIONS TO 81DDERS
YELIIiI HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. lMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSQN MCGOVERN
1 aECT10N 00 4200
2 �ORM t"�F PROPOSAL
3 F0�111� �OF PROPOS�L
4 1.01 PART� OF 2
5 A. In this Section 00 4200 there is the Form of Proposal.which must be submitted in its entirety with
6 the correct bid package and at the appropriate date and time as specified in Section 00 0110,
7 Advertisement For Bids.
8 TO: Owner (Yelm Community Schools)
9 Facilities Department
10 Attn: Cheri Wolf
11 107 1 st St. North
12 Yelm,WA 98597-0476
13 B. Having carefully examined the Project I�anual and Drawings entitled Yelm Community Schools -
14 Yeim High School -Agricultural Dept. Improvements,as well as the premises and conditions
15 affecting the work,the Undersigned proposes to furnish all labor, materials, and supplies and to
16 construct the project and perform all work as required by the Contract Documents for the fotlowing
17 sums:
18 C. Amount shall be shown in both words and figures. In case of discrepancy,the amount shown in
19 words will govern.
20 D. BASE BID
21 1. For the Base Bid, as defined in the Specifications,the sum of:
22 ($ )
23 (Numeric format)
24 Dollars
25 (1Nritten format)
26 E. TRENCH EXCAVATION SAFETY PROVISIONS
27 1. (Include also in Base
28 Bid).......................................................................($ )
29 2. If the bid amount contains any work which requires trenching exceeding a depth of four feet,
30 all costs for trench safety shall be included in the Base Bid and indicated above for adequate
31 trench safety systems in compliance with Chapter 39.04 RCW, 49.17 RCW and WAC
32 296-155-650. Bidder must include a lump sum dollar amount in blank above (even if the value
33 is$0:00)to be responsive.
34 F. ADDENDA
35 1. Receipt of the following Addenda is hereby acknowledged and costs of the work therefore
36 have been included in the proposal.
37
Addendum Na Addendum No.
Adde�dum No. Addendum No.
Addendum No. Addendum No.
Addendum No. Addendum No.
38
39 G. SALES TAX AND PERMITS
40 1. The retail sales tax shall not be included in the Bid sums;the Owner will pay such taxes
41 proportionally with each periodic payment.Additional fees and permits identified as to be paid
42 by the Contractor in Section 01 1000- SUMMARY shall be paid by the Contractor and
43 included the Bid.
44 H. OVERHEAD AND PROFIT
45 1. Alt of the above Bid prices include overhead and profit.
2012-37/YCS Agricuftural Dept Improvements 00 4200 - 1 FORM OF PROPOSAL
YE�M HiGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. iIVIPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
�RICKSON MCGOVERN
1 I. THE UNDERSIGNED ALSO AGREES AS FOLLOWS
2 1. To do any extra work, not covered by the above schedule of prices which may be ordered by
3 the Owner, pursuant to the Contract Documents.
4 J. TIME OF COMPLETION/LIQUIDATED DAMAGES °
5 1. The Undersigned agrees if awarded the Contract,to complete the entire project as stipulated
6 in the Contract Documents. The Undersigned further agrees that the Owner may retain from
7 the compensation otherwise due,the liquidated damage costs incurred by the Owner,for
8 each calendar day expiring beyond the time fixed for completion that the work remains not
9 substantially completed,this sum not to be construed in any sense as penalty, but as agreed
10 liquidated damages which the Owner shall sustain in the case of the failure of the
11 Undersigned to complete the work at the time stipulated. For dates of completion and �-
12 liquidated damages amount,see Section 01 1000 - SUMMARY..
13 K. CONTRACT AND BOND
14 1. If the Undersigned be notified of the acceptance of this Bid within forty-five (45)days after the
15 time set for opening bids, he agrees to execute a Contract for the above work for a
16 compensation established by adjusting the Base Bid by any Alternate Bids selected by the
17 Owner, in the Form of Agreement required by the Specifications, and to furnish Performance
18 and Labor and Material Payment Bonds as required by the Specifications. '
19 2. The Standard Form of the American Institute of Architects, No. A101, entitled "Standard Form
20 of Agreement Befinreen Owner and Contractor,"2007 Edition, has been modified and made
21 the FORM OF AGREEMENT for this Contract.
22 3. Note additional requirement to provide costs to add bonds for Subcontractors as listed in the
23 Alternate Bids.
24 L. BID GUARANTEE
25 1. The Undersigned further agrees that the check or bid bond accompanying this Bid is left in
26 escrow with the Owner,that its amount is the measure of the damages which the Owner will ,
27 sustain by the failure of the Undersigned to execute said agreement and bonds, and that if
28 the Undersigned fails to deliver said documents within ten (10) days after written notice of the ��
29 award of the Contract to him,then the check shall become the property of the Owner or the
30 bid bond shall remain in full effect. But if this Bid is not accepted within forty-five (45) days `
31 after the time set for opening bids, or if the Undersigned delivers said Contract and bonds,
32 then the check shall be returned to him or the bid bond shall become void.
33
34 M. ALTERNATE BIDS
35
A-1 NEW OVERHEAD DOOR DEDUCT $
A-2 DRYING CANOPY DEDUCT $ �
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
2012-37/YCS Agricuftural Dept fmprovements 00 4200 -2 FORM OF PROPOSAL
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1
2 N. REINSTATEMENT OF ALTERNATE BIDS
3 The Undersigned agrees that the Owner has the right to reinstate, at the bid price, any Alternate
4 Bid, Base Bid Substitute Bid or Alternate Bid Substitute Bid, not incorporate� in the Contract,
5 provided the Owner so notifies the Undersigned within 45 calendar days after the Contract is
6 signed.
7
COMPANY NAME:
SIGNATURE:
TITLE:
ADDRESS:
STATE:
ZIP:
TELEPHONE NO.
CONTRACTOR'S REGISTRATION NO.
8
9 END O�SECTION
2012-37/YCS Agricuftural Dept Improvements 00 4200- 3 FORM OF PROPOSA�
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
Y�LM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSOfd MCGOVERN
1 SEC'�IOiV 00 5200
2 Cl3N'�RACT FORMS
3 FOR�1 OF AGREEIIiIENT
4 1.0� THE STANDARD FORM,OF THE AMERICAiV INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, NO.A101 ENTITLED
5 STANDARD FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR WHERE THE
6 'BASIS OF PAYMENT IS A STIPULATED SUM",2007 EDITION,HAS BEEN MODIFlED AND MADE
7 THE �ORM OF AGREEMENT FOR THIS CONTRACT BY REFERENCE.
8 �,0� FORIIA OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTFiACTOR iNCLUDE THE FOLLOWING
9 ARTICLES:
10 A. The Contract Documents.
11 B. The Work Of This Contract.
12 C. Date Of Commencement And Substantial Completion.
13 D. Contract Sum.
14 E. Payments.
15 F. Dispute Resolution.
16 G. Termination Or Suspension.
17 H. Miscellaneous Provisions.
18 I. Enumeration Of Contract Documents.
19 J. Insurance And Bonds.
20 END OF SECTlOiN
2012-37/YCS AgriCUltural Dept Improvements 00 5200 - 1 CONTRACT FORMS
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT.IiNPROVEMEiVTS
`lELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSOM MCGOVERN
1 SECTI0�1 00 720t�
2 GE�IERAL CONDI'�IONS
3 �EidEFiA�.+COMDlTIONS O�THE CON`�RACT
4 1.01 MODIFIED FORM OF THE AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF ARCHITECTS, "GENERAL CONDITIONS
5 OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION,"AIA DOCUMENT A201,2007 EDITION,SHALL
6 APPLY IN ALL RESPECTS TO THE WORK UNDER TH�CONTRACT.
7 A. General Conditions are bound herein after this Section.
g �ND OF SECTiOId
2012-37/YCS Agricuttural Dept Improvements 00 7200- 1 GENERAL CONDITIONS
SUPPORT OPERATION CENI'ER PHASE 2
YELi� COMMUNITY SCHOOLS No.2
ERICKSON McGOVERN
1 SEC710�V 00�20fl
2 faEi+➢ERAL COidDITIONS OF TFiE CONTRAC'�' FOR CONSTRUCTION
3 ARTICLE 1
4 GEiVERAL PROVISIONS
5 1.1 �I�S1C DEFINITIONS
6 1.1.1 THE C�NTRQCT DOCUMENTS
7 The Contract Documents consist of the Agreement between Owner and Contractor (hereinafter the
8 Agreement), Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and other Conditions), Drawings,
9 Specifications, addenda issued prior to execution of the Contract, other documents listed in the Agreement
10 and modifications issued after execution of the Contract. A modification is (1) a written amendment to the
11 Contract signed by both parties, (2) a Change Order, (3) a Construction Change Directive or (4) a written
12 order far a minor change in the Work issued by the Architect subject to the requirements of Paragraph 7.4.
13 Unless specifically enumerated in the Agreement, the Contract Documents do not include other documents
14 such as bidding requirements (advertisement or invitation to bid, Instructions to Bidders, sample forms,
15 rneeting minutes, the Contractor's bid or portions of addenda relating to bidding requirements).
16 1.1.2. T�iE CONTRACT
17 The Contract Documents form this Contract for Construction. The Contract represents the entire and
18 integrated agreement be#ween the parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations, representations or
19 agreements, either written or oral. The Contract may be amended or modified only by a Modification. The
20 Contract Documents shall not be construed to create a contractual relationship of any kind (1) between the
21 Architect and Contractor, (2) between the Owner and a Subcontractor regardless of tier or (3) between any
22 persons or entities other than the Owner and the Contractor. The Architect shall, however, be entitled to
23 performance and enforcement of obligations under the Contract intended to facilitate performance of the
24 Architect's duties.
25 �.1.3 TH�WORK
26 The term "Work" means the construction and services required by the Contract Documents, whether
27 comple�ted or partially completed, and includes all other labor, materials, transportation, equipment and
28 services provided or to be provided by the Contractor to fulfill the Contractor's obligations. The Work may
29 constitute the whole or a part of the Project.
30 1.1.4 7HE Pi�4�JEaCT
31 The Project is the total construction of which the Work performed under the Contract Documents may be the
32 whole or a part and which may include construction by the Owner or by separate contractars.
33 1.�.5 THE DRAUViI�lGS
34 The Drawings are the graphic and pictorial portions of the Contract Documents, wherever located and
35 whenever issued, showing the design, location and dimensions of the Work, generally including plans,
3b elevations, sections,details, schedules and diagrams.
37 1.1.6 THE S�ECIFICATlONS
38 The Specifications are that portion of the Contract Documents consisting of the written requirements for
39 materials, equipment, construction systems, standards and workmanship for the Work, and performance of
40 related services.
41 1.1.7 T�IE PRUJECT MANUAL
42 The Project Manual is the volume usually assembled for the Work which may include the bidding
43 requirements, sample forms, General Conditions of the Contract and Specifications.
44
2010-16 /YCS Fueling Station Bld—OO 7ZOO - 1 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION 1-15-13
SUPPORT OPERAI'ION CENTER PHASE 2
�lE�M COMMUNITY SCHOOLS No.2
ERICKSON McGOVERN �
1 1.2 EXECUTION, CO�R�iELAT�ON AND INT�NT
2 1.2.1 The Cont�act Documents shall be executed by the Owner and Contractor by signing the Agreement.
3 .1 By executing this Contract, Contractor represents and acknowledges that it has carefully
4 examined the Contract Documents and the Project site and that it has satisfied itself as to,
5 and Contractor does hereby assume full and sole responsibili#y for: the nature, location,
6 character, quality and quantity of the Work; the labor, materials, equipment, goods, supplies,
7 work, services and other items to be furnished, and all other requirements of this Contract,
8 as well as the conditions and other matters that may be encountered at the Project site or
9 affect the performance of the Work or the cost or difficulty thereof, including but not limited to
10 those conditions and matters affecting: transportation, access, disposal, handling and
11 storage of materials, equipment and other items; availability and quality of labor, water,
12 electric power, utilities and fire protection; availability and condition of streets; climatic
13 conditions and seasons; physical conditions at the Project site dnd surrounding locality;
14 other construction work planned for the area and required coordination therewith; potentially �s.
15 applicable governmental laws, requirements and permits; potential water and air pollution
16 conditions; topography and ground surface conditions; and equipment and facilities needed
17 preliminary to and at all times during the performance of the Work.
18 .2 Claims for additional compensation or extensions of time because of the failure of the
19 Contractor to so examine the Contract Documents, Project site, local conditions and i
20 potentially applicable laws, regulations and permits and to familiarize itself therewith will not
21 be allowed. ""
22 �f.2.2 The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all items necessary for the proper execution and �
23 compfetion of the Work by the Contractor. The Contract Documents are compiementary, and what is
24 required by one shall be as binding as if required by all. Work not covered in the Contract Documents will be �
25 required if it is reasonabfy inferable as being necessary to produce the results intended by the Contract
26 Documents for a completed project to the level of quality consistent with the nature and standard of such �
27 Work required by the Contract Documents. �r
28 1.2.3 In the case of inconsistency, conflicts or discrepancies among the Contract Documents, the more
29 stringent requirement shall take precedence unless waived in writing by the Owner. The more stringent
30 requirement shall be interpreted so that the higher quantity, better quality, or more costly Work to be
31 provided in accordance with the Architect's interpretation. '*
32 1.2.4. Organization of the specifications into divisions, sections and articles, and arrangement of Drawings
33 are for convenience only and shall not be construed as nor imply a division of the Work among
34 Subcontractors nor establish the extent of Work to be performed by any trade. The Contractor shall be
35 responsible for the division of Work and for coordinating the allocation of Work among its Subcontractors and
36 suppliers.
37 1.2.5. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, words which have well-known technical or ��
38 construction industry meanings are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized
39 meanings.
40 1.�.8. In the event of any conflict or inconsistency between any of the Contract Documents, the conflict or
41 inconsistency shall be resolved according to the following hierarchy of documents, with each document
42 governing those listed below it:
43 .1 Contract Amendments signed by both parties;
44 .2 Change Orders,
45 .3 General Conditions;
46 .� Supplementary Conditions;
47 .5 Specifications; ��
48 .� Drawings.
49 1.3 USE OF DRAWINGS,SPECIFICATIONS AND OTHER DOCUMENTS
2010-16 /YCS Fueling Station Bld—�0 72�� -2 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION 1-15-13
SUPPORT OPERATION CENTER PHASE 2
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS No.2
ERICKSON McGOVERRI
1 1.3,9 The Drawings, Specifications and other documents are instruments through which the Work to be
2 executed by the Contractor is described. The Contractor may retain one contract record set. Neither the
3 Contractor nor any Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor or material or equipment supplier shall own or claim a
4 copyright in the Drawings, Specifications and other documents. All copies of them, except the Contractor's
5 record set, shall be returned or suitably accounted for to the Architect, on request, upon completion of the
b Work. The Drawings, Specifications and other documents and copies thereof furnished to the Contractor,
7 are for use solely with respect to this Project. They are not to be used by the Contractor or any
8 Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor or material or equipment supplier on other projects or for additions to this
9 Project outside the scope of the Work without the specific written consent of the Owner. The Contractor,
10 Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors and material or equipment suppliers are granted a limited license to use
11 and reproduce applicable portions of the Drawings, Specifications and other documents appropriate to and
12 for use in the execution of their Work under the Contract Docurnents. All copies made under this license
13 shall bear the statutory copyright notice, if any, shown on the Drawings, Specifications and other documents.
14 Submittal or distribution to meet official regulatory requirements or for other purposes in connection with this
15 Project is not to be construed as publication in derogation of copyright or other reseroed rights.
16 �.4 CAPITALIZATIO�1
17 1.4.1 Terms capitalized in these General Conditions include those which are specifically defined herein.
18 1.5 INTERPRETATION
19 1.�.'� In the interest of brevity the Contract Documents frequently omit modifying words such as "all" and
20 "any" and articles such as "the° and "an," but the fact that a modifier or an article is absent from one
21 statement and appears in another is not intended to affect the interpretation of either statement.
22 1.5.2 The General Conditions of the Contract Documents are modified from AIA Document A201,
23 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION, 1997 Edition.
24 1.5.3 No oral representation prior to bid concerning the Work by the Owner or its representatives shall
25 alter or limit in any way the Contractor's responsibilities under this Contract, including, but not limited to,
26 obligations to carefully inspect the site of the work and thoroughly examine and be familiar with the Contract
27 Documents and applicable government regulations and permits pertaining to the work.
28 ARTICLE 2
29 01NNER
30
31 2.1 D�FI�1TlONS Ald[3 AUTHORITY
32 2.1.1 The Owner of this project is the Yelm Community School District ("District" or "Owner") which is
33 governed by its Board of Di�ectors ( Board ). The District shall designate a representative(s)
« ��
34 ("Representative"), to act on its behalf. Unless specifically limited by the District, its Representative(s) shall
35 have, at (their) discretion, complete authority to transmit instruction, receive information, and to interpret and
36 define the Owner's policies and decisions with respect to the Work. The Board shall retain the final decision
37 on acceptance of the contract and approval of any proposed Change Orders, except that the Board has
38 delegated to the Owner's Superintendent of Schools the authority for the Superintendent of Schools to
39 approve change orders and/or issue Construction Change Directives which each change the Contract Sum
40 no more than $5,000.00 and which collectively increase the Contract Sum no more than 5%.
41 2.c I�lFOR�MATiOid AND SERVICES REC1UiRED OF THE OWNER
42 2.2,1 The Owner shall furnish surveys describing legal limitations for the site of the Project, and a legal
43 description of the site upon written request of the Contractor.
44 2.2.2 Information or services under the Owner's control which are required to be furnished to the
45 Contractor under the terms of this agreement shall be furnished by the Owner with reasonable promptness to
46 avoid delay in orderly progress of the Work.
47
2010-i6 /YCS Fueling Station Bld—��72�� -3 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION t-15-13
Sl1PPOFtT OPERATION CENT�R PHASE 2
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS �o.2
ERICKSOfd McGOVERN °
1 22.3 Upon request, the Contractor will be furnished free of charge up to five (5) copies, if available, of
2 Drawings and Specifications from copies returned to Owner from the bidding procedure, including up to five
3 (5) copies of revised Drawings, Addenda, or Supplementary drawings. Additional sets beyond those readily
4 available to the Owner will be furnished at the cost of reproduction and delivery.
5 2.2.4 The foregoing are in addition to other duties and responsibilities of the Owner enumerated herein
6 and especially those in respect to Article 6 (Construction by Owner or by Separate Contractors), Article 9
7 (Payments and Completion) and Article 11 (Insurance and Bonds).
8 2.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO STOP THE WORK
9 2.3.1 If the Contractor fails to correct Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of the
10 Contract Documents as required by Paragraph 12.2 or fails to carry out Work in accordance with the
11 Cantract Documents, the Owner, by written order signed personally or by an agent specificaily so
12 empowered by the Owner in writing, may order the Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until .
13 the cause for such order has been eliminated; however,the right of the Owner to stop the Work shall not give
14 rise to a duty on the part of the Owner to sxercise this right for the benefit of the Contractor or any other �
15 person or entity, except to the extent required by Subparagraph 6.1.3. Owner will exercise the right to stop
16 work only if Contractor's performance deviates from the requirements of the Contract Documents in a
17 material way that is damaging to the interests of the Owner as determined by the Owner.
18 2.� faV�INE�2'S RIGHT TO CARRY OUT THE WORK
19 2.�.'� If the Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out the work in accordance with the Contract
20 Documents and fails within a seven-day period after receipt of written notice from the Owner to commence ,�.
21 and continue correction of such default or neglect with diligence and promptness, the Owner may, without
22 prejudice to other remedies the Owner may have, correct such deficiencies. In the event such deficiencies
23 threaten the health or safety of Owners, employees, students or occupants, or exist within fourteen calendar
24 days of the date on which the Owner is scheduled to begin to operate school at the Project, the Owner may �°
25 proceed to correct such deficiencies with such notice to the Contractor as is reasonable under the
26 circumstances, which notice shall not exceed 48 hours. When the Owner has undertaken to carry out a
27 portion of the work prior to final acceptance of the contract, an appropriate Modification shall be issued
,>.
28 deducting from payments then or thereafter due the Contractor the cost of correcting such deficiencies,
29 including compensation for the Architect's additional service and expenses made necessary by such default, 4.
30 neglect or failure; and the amounts charged to the Contractor are subject to the prior review of the Architect
31 as to decisions and amounts charged. If payments then or thereafter due the Contractor are not sufficient to �°
32 cover such amounts,the Contractor shall promptly pay the difference to the Owner.
33 2.5 SUSi���Slt3�l OF WOF�K y
34 2.5.1 Ovaner may, at any time and without cause, and without liability suspend the Work or any portion �e
35 thereof for a period of not more than ninety (90) days by notice in writing to Contractor and Architect which �.
36 will fix the date on which Work will be resumed. Contractor shall resume the Work on the date so fixed.
37 2.5.2 In the exercise of the Owner's right to carry out the Work, the Owner shall have the right to use the �,
38 Owner's own forces or hire another Contractor, with or without public bid, to carry out such work. .
39 ARTiCLE 3
40 �ONTRACTOR �`
41
42 3,�1 DE��Ni�'!OM
43 3.1.1 The Contractor is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to
44 throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The term "Contractor" means the Contractor
�5 or the Contractor's authorized representative.
46 3.2 R��/IEW OF CONTRACI" DOCUMENTS AND FIELD CONDITiONS BY CONTRACTOR
47 3.2,1 The Contractor shall promptly and carefully study and compare the Contract Documents with each �
48 other and with information furnished by the Owner pursuant to Subparagraph 2.2.2 and shall at once report
49 to the Architect and to the Owner any errors, inconsistencies or omissions discovered. Prior to and during
2010-16 /YCS Fueling Station Bld—�d 72�0 -4 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION 1-15-13
SUPPORT OPERATION CENTER PHASE 2
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOQLS i�o.2
ERICKSON McGOVER�i
1 the execution of the Work, the Contractor shall check all Drawings, Specifications, and job conditions and
2 shall immediately notify the Architect and the Owner in writing of any errors, discrepancies, conflicts or
3 omissions found therein and have the same explained or corrected by the Architect before proceeding with
4 the Work. Work wrongly ordered, fabricated or constructed by the Contractor without such notification shall
5 be corrected by the Contractor at its own expense. The Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work at
6 any time without appropriate Contract Documents or, where required, approved Shop Drawings, Product
7 Data or Samples for such portion of the Work.
8 3.2.2 The Contractor shall take field measurements and verify field conditions and shall carefulfy compare
9 such field measurements and conditions and other information known to the Contractor with the Contract
10 Documents before commencing activities. Errors, inconsistencies or omissions discovered shall be reported
11 to the Architect and to the Owner at once.
12 3.2.3 The Contractor shall notify the Architect and the Owner in writing of materials, systems, procedures
13 or methods of construction, either shown on the Drawings or specified, of which it has knowledge,
14 experience or other information which supports the conclusion that they are incorrect, inadequate, obsolete
15 or unsuitable for the purpose intended and the basis therefore. The Architect will respond to these matters in
1b writing.
17 3.2.4 The Contractor shall pertorm the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and submittals
18 approved pursuant to Paragraph 3.13.
19 32.5 Investigation of subsurface conditions on the site have been made for design purposes. The results
20 of such investigations are available at the Architect's office for the convenience of the prospective bidders
21 and the Contractor, but are not to be considered a part of the Contract Documents. There is no guarantee,
22 either express or implied, that the conditions indicated are representative of those existing throughout the
23 site, or that unforeseen developments may not occur. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for any
24 interpretations of the information or extrapolations beyond the location of each individual boring or test pit.
25 3.3 SUPERVlS101d AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES
26 3.3,1 The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work, using the Contractor's best skill and attention.
27 The Contractor shall be solely responsible for and have control over safety of the Work Site, for construction
28 means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures and for protecting and coordinating all portions of
29 the Work under the Contractor, unless the Contract Documents give other specific instructions concerning
30 these matters.
31 3,3.2 The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for acts and omissions of the Contractor's
32 employees, Subcontractors and their agents and employees, and other persons performing portions of the
33 Work under a contract v+iith the Contractor.
34 3.�.3 The Contractor shall not be relieved of obligations to perform the Work in accordance with the
35 Contract Documents either by activities or duties of the Architect in the Architect's administration of the
36 Contract, or by tests, inspections or approvals required or performed by persons other than the Contractor.
37 3.3.4 The Contractor shall be responsible for inspection of portions of Work already performed under this
38 Contract to determine that such portions are in proper condition to receive subsequent Work.
39 3.3,5 In performing the Work, the Contractor shall comply with all applicable federal, state and local laws
40 and regulations including, but not limited to, the following:
41 (1) Chap. 18.27 RCW relating to Contractor's registration;
42 (2) Chap. 19.27 RCW relating to the State building code;
43 (3) Chap. 27,44 RCW relating to Indian graves;
44 (4) Chap. 27.53 RCW relating to archaeological sites;
45 (5) RCW 28A.210.310 relating to use of tobacco products;
46 (6) RCW 28A.400.330 prohibiting use of employees of contractor with crimes against
47 children;
48 (7) Chap. 39.06 RCW relating to Contractor's registration;
49 (8) Chap. 39.08 RCW relating to Contractor's bonds;
50 (9) Chap. 39.12 RCW relating to prevailing wages;
51 (10) RCW 39.30.060 relating to submittal of names of subcontractors;
2010-16 /YCS Fueling Station Bid—00 7200 - 5 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION 1-15-13
SUPPORT OPERP►TION CENTER PH�SE 2
YELM COMMUNITY SCH!)OLS No.2
�RICKSON McGOVER�I
1 (11) Chap. 49.17 relating to industrial safety and health; ,
2 (12) Chap. 49.26 RCW relating to asbestos;
3 (13) Chap. 49.28 RCW relating to hours of labor;
4 (14) Chap. 49.60 RCW relating to discrimination;
5 (15) Chap. 49.70 RCW relating to hazardous materials,
6 (16) Chap. 50.24 relating to unemployment compensation; and
'7 (17) Chap. 70.92 RCW relating to the provisions for the aged and physically disabled.
8 The foregoing list is provided only as a courtesy to the Contractor, and the Owner has not thereby -
9 undertaken any obligation to provide legal advice to the Contractor. The Owner makes no representation as
10 to the currency, accuracy, or completeness of the list.
11 3.4 L�►BOR AND �VIATERIALS
12 3.4.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall provide and pay for a
13 sufficient labor force and shall provide and pay for materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and
14 machinery, water, heat, utilities, transportation, hauling arrangements and other facilities and services
15 necessary for proper and timely execution and completion of the Work, whether temporary or permanent and
1b whether or not incorporated or to be incorporated in the Work.
17 3.4.2 After the Contract has been executed, the Owner and the Architect may consider a formal request
18 from the Contractor for the substitution of products in place of those specified only under exceptional
19 conditions. Whether or not to grant such request shall be entirely subject to the Owner's discretion upon
20 recommendation{s)from the Architect. By making requests for substitutions, the Contractor:
21 .1 represents that the Contractor has personally investigated the proposed substitute product °
22 . and determined that it is equal or superior in all respects to that specified; x
23 .2 represents that the Contractor will provide the same or greater warranty for the substitution
24 that the Contractor would provide for that specified; �.;
25 .3 certifies that the cost data presented is complete and includes all related costs under this
2b Contract, and waives all claims for additional costs related to the substitution which
27 subsequently become apparent;
28 .4 will coordinate the installation of the accepted substitute, making at Contractor's sole cost ^�
29 such changes as may be required for the Work to be complete in alf respects; and
30 .5 shall pay for all the ArchitecYs reasonable and necessary fees in reviewing the proposed
31 substitution and reviewing any resulting changes to the work.
32 3.4.3 The Contractor shall enforce strict discipline and good order among the Contractor's employees and
33 other persons carrying out the Contract. The Contractor shall not permit employment of unfit or
34 insubordinate persons or persons not skilled in tasks assigned to them.
�
35 3.4.4 The Contrac�or shall take all reasonable steps to prevent any labor disputes involving the Contractor
36 and any of its Subcontractors or suppliers of any products or services from: (1) disrupting the work under this �'
37 Contract; (2) interfering with access to the Owner's property by the Owner, including its agents,
38 representatives, employees and officials; (3) interfering with access and work by any other contractors �
39 engaged in construction activities; and (4) interfering with access to property by invitees or licensees of the
40 Owner.ln the event any picketing or other activity by employees involved in a labor dispute with the
41 Contractor or its Subcontractors or suppliers interferes in any way with access to the Owner's property or to �.
42 the site of the work by any persons, the Contractor shall promptly and expeditiously take all reasonabte
43 actions to eliminate or minimize such interference, including but not limited to: (1) utilizing all reasonable
44 means of restricting any picketing to a single entrance to the property or site of the work; (2) posting notices
45 or signs which advise interested persons and labor organizations that a particular entrance to the property or °
4b site of the work is for the employees of "primary" or, as the case may be "neutral" employers; (3) policing
47 entrances; (4) notifying all interested labor organizations of the "primary" or "neutral" status of particular
48 entrances; And (5) in the event any such picketing or concerted activity is unlawful or has a secondary
49 impact upon the employees of neutral employers, promptly and expeditiously taking appropriate action to
50 seek recourse through the appropriate governmental agency or state or federal courts to limit the location of
51 such picketing so as to reduce the impact thereof upon neutral employers.
2010-16 /YCS Fueling Station Bid—00 7200 - 6 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION 1-15-13
SUPPORT OPERATION CENTER PNI�►SE 2
YEI.M COMMUNITY SCHOOLS No.2
ERICKSON McGOVERR�
1 The Owner will cooperate with the Contractor to accompiish the foregoing actions and will render assistance
2 as may be in the best interests of the Owner. However, the Owner shall have the right to direct the
3 Contractor to modify any of the foregoing actions the Contractor has taken or plans to take or to overrule
4 such actions, to designate the entrances to be used as "primary" or "neutral" entrances, and to take
5 appropriate legal action in order to protect the Owner's property and interests. In any event, the Contractor
6 shall be liable for all costs, including costs to the Owner, and actual damages resulting from the relocation,
7 rerouting, delays or actions required to maintain the uninterrupted progress of the work. Failure by the
8 Contractor to take the actions described above or to comply with the directives of the Owner shall be
9 considered a material breach of this Contract and the Owner may terminate the Contract or suspend the
10 Contractor as provided in this Contract.
11 Whenever Contractor has knowledge of any actual or potential labor dispute which may in any way affect,
12 delay or arise in connection with or as a result of the performance of this Contract, Contractor will
13 immediately notify and submit relevant information to Owner.
14 3.5 WAGES AND BEN�FI"�'S
15 3.5.1 This Contract is subject to the wage and hour requirements of RCW 39.12 and RCW 49.28 (as
16 amended or supplemented). The Contractor, each Subcontractor and other person doing any work under
17 this Con#ract shall pay laborers, workmen or mechanics not less than the prevailing rate of wage for an
18 hour's work in the same trade or occupation in the locality within the state of Washington where such labor is
19 performed. Wages and benefits higher than the minimums required by law may be paid. It is the contractor's
20 sole responsibility to determine the wage rates it will actually have to pay. ln the event rates of wages and
21 benefits change while this Contract is in force, the Contractor shall bear the cost of such changes and shall
22 have no claim against the Owner on account of such changes. No claim for additional compensation will be
23 allowed which is based upon a lack of knowledge or a misunderstanding of any such requirements by the
24 8idder/Contractor or a failure to include in the Bidder's bid price adequate increases in such wages over the
25 term of this Contract.
26 3.5.2 All determinations of the prevailing rate of wage shall be made by the industrial statistician of the
27 Department of Labor and Industries of the state of Washington. The schedule of prevailing wage rates as
28 determined by the industrial statistician for the locality or localities where this Contract will be performed are
29 by this reference made a part of this Contract. The state schedule of prevailing wage rates applicable to the
30 Work, as most recently provided by the state, may be set forth in the Project Manual. If or to the extent
31 employing labor is not listed, the Contractor shall request the industrial statistician to determine the correct
32 wage rate for that class and locality. To obtain a listing of current minimum wages for any county contact:
33 Department of Labor and Industries
34 201 - 11 th Avenue
35 0lympia,Washington 98504
36 (Telephone: (360) 902-5335)
37 3.�,3 In case any dispute arises as to what are the prevailing rates of wages for work of a similar nature
38 and such dispute cannot be adjusted by the parties in interest, including labor and management
39 representatives,the matter shall be referred for arbitration to the director of the Department of Labor and
40 Industries of the State of Washington and his or her decision therein shall be final and conclusive and
41 binding on all parties involved in the dispute.
�2 3.5.4 The Contractor, each Subcontractor and other person required to pay the prevailing rate of wage
43 shall post in a location readily visible to workers at the job site: (1) a copy of the statement of intent to pay
44 prevailing wages approved by the industrial statistician of the Department of Labor and Industries under
45 RCW 39.12.040; and (2) the address and telephone number of the industrial statistician of the Department of
4b Labor and Industries where a complaint or inquiry concerning prevailing wages may be made.
47 3.5.5 Apprentice workmen employed hereunder for whom an apprenticeship agreement has been
48 registered and approved with the state apprenticeship council pursuant to Chapter 49.04 RCW must be paid
49 at least the prevailing hourly rate for an apprentice for that trade. Any workman for whom an apprenticeship
50 agreement has not been registered and approved by the state apprenticeship council shall be considered to
S 1 be a fully qualified journeyman, and,therefore, shall be paid at the prevailing hourly rate for journeymen.
2010-16 /YCS Fueling Station Bid—00 7200 - 7 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION 1-15-13
SUPPORT OPERATION CENTER PHASE 2
YELM COMMUNI7Y SCHOOLS No.2
ERICKSON McGOVERIV
1 3.5.6 Pursuant to RCW 39.12, the Contractor and each Subcontractor from the Contractor or a ,
2 Subcontractor shall submit the following documents to the Owner:
3 ,1 Before payment is made by Owner, the Contractor and each Subcontractor shall submit a
4 "Statement of lntent to Pay Prevailing Wages" which has been approved by the industrial
$ statistician of the Department of Labor and Industries. °
6 .2 With each request for payment, the Contractor shall submit a statement that prevailing
� wages have been paid in accordance with the "Statement of Intent to Pay Prevailing Wages"
g filed with Owner. ,_
9 .3 Following final acceptance of the work and before funds retained according to RCW
10 60.28.010 are released to the Contractor, the Contractor and each Subcontractor shall
11 submit an "Affidavit of Wages Paid"which has been approved by the industrial statistician of
12 the Department of Labor and Industries. �
13 Any fees charged by the department of labor and industries for filing the "Statement of Intent
14 to Pay Prevailing Wages" and the "Affidavit of Wages Paid" shall be paid by the Contractor
15 and each Subcontractor, as applicable. If, for any reason, Owner pays such fees, then the
16 Contractor shall be charged the amounts thereof.
17 3.5.7 Owner may inspect or auditthe Contractor's wage and payroll records at any time while the Contract
18 is in force and for at ieast three (3) years after the date of final acceptance. The Contractor shall maintain
19 such records for that period. The Contractor shatl also guarantee that wage and payroll records of all his
20 Subcontractors and agents shall be open to similar inspection and auditing for the same period of time. -
21 Owner will give the Contractor reasonable notice of the starting date if an audit will begin more than sixty(60)
22 days after the final acceptance date. "
23 3.5.8 The Contractor shall make all payments required for unemployment compensation under Title 50
24 RCW and for industrial insurance and medical aid required under Title 51 RCW. The Contractor shall also
25 obey all federal, state and local laws, ordinances, and regulations establishing safety standards for the �°
26 protection of employees. If any payment required by Title 50 or Title 51 is not made when due, Owner may
27 retain such payments from any money due the Contractor and pay the same into the appropriate fund. The `
28 Public Works Contract Division of the Department of Labor and Industries will provide the Contractor with ,
29 applicable industrial insurance and medical aid classification and premium rates. Before release of any
30 funds retained according to RCW 60.28.010, the Contractor shall provide to the Owner such reasonable �.
31 documentation as the Owner shall require that demonstrates the Contractor has paid such premiums, and
32 Owner shall be entitled ta verify the accuracy of such documentation. �
33 3.5.9 Pursuant to RCV1/ 49.28.010, eight (8} hours of labor shall constitute a legal day's work. The Y
34 Contractor or any Subcontractor shall not require more than eight (8) hours of labor in a day from any person
35 employed in the performance of the Work under this Contract except as may otherwise be allowed by law. ,�
36 Failure of the Contr�ctor to perform the Work in accordance with the hours of labor policies of the State of
37 Washington shall be deemed a failure on his part to comply with the provisions of this Contract. k�r°
38 3.5.iG1 Subject to applicable laws and governmental permits, overtime and shift work may be established as �
39 a regular procedure by the Contractor with reasonable advance written notice to both the Architect and the
40 Owner. Notice must be given a minimum of seventy-two (72) hours prior to the start of overtime and shift -
41 work. No work other than overtime and shift work established as a regular procedure shall be performed
42 during vueekdays betv+ieen the hours of 6:00 p.m. and 7:00 a.m. nor on Saturdays or Sundays, except such �
43 work as is necessary for the proper care and protection of the Work already performed in case of an
44 emergency or as necessary to recover schedule delays.
45 The additional cost of Work performed after regular working hours shall be borne by the Contractor. No �
46 claim for additional compensation shall be allowed for failure of Bidder/Contractor to include in the bid price
47 adequate reserves for overtime work.
48 The Contractor shall pay the costs of overtime inspection by the Architect and the Owner except those -
49 occurring as a result of overtime and shift work established as a regular procedure. Overtime inspection
SO shall include inspection required during weekdays between the hours of 6:00 p.m. and 7:00 a.m. and on
51 Saturdays or Sundays. Costs of overtime inspection will cover engineering, inspection, general supervision �
52 and overhead expenses which are directly chargeable to the overtime work.
2010•16 /YCS Fueling Station Bid—00 7200 - 8 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION 1-15-13 "
SUPPORT OPERATION CENTER PHASE 2
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS No.2
ERICKSON McGOVERN
1 Contractor agrees that the Owner may deduct such charges from payments due the Contracto�. In the event
2 of circumstances beyond the Contractor's control which could not be reasonably foreseen and which require
3 the Contractor to work at other than normal weekday working hours, the Architect may, without obligation
4 and only in writing, waive the requirement that the Contractor pay such overtime inspection costs. In the
5 event of a change order requiring the Contractor to work in excess of the established schedule of working
6 hours, the Contractor will not be charged for inspection costs of the Owner or the Architect associated
7 therewith.
S 3.6 WORKiV1ANSHIP
9 3.6.'1 The Contractor warrants to the Owner that materials and equipment furnished under the Contract will
10 be of good quality and new unless otherwise specifically required or permitted by the Contract Documents,
11 that the Work will be of good quality and free from faults or defects and that the Work will conform with the
12 requirements of the Contract Documents. The standard of care for any Work performed by or under the
13 direction of the Contractor shall be the care and skill ordinarily used by members of the trades or professions
14 practicing under similar conditions at the same time and locality. Work not conforming to these
15 requirements, including substitutions not properly approved and authorized, may be considered defective.
16 The Contractor's responsibility excludes remedy for damage or defect caused by abuse, modifications not
17 executed by the Contractor, improper or insufficient maintenance, improper operations, or normal wear and
18 tear under normal usage. If required by the Architect, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to
19 the kind and quality of materials and equipment. This warranty is not limited by the provisions of Paragraph
20 12.2 and does not abrogate any warranty or guarantee that may be imposed by law or that may be otherwise
21 provided by the Contractor.
22 3.6.2 Warranty work shall remedy defective Work, resultant damage to other Work and include any
23 incidental work related to or required for proper correction.
24 3.7 TA.CES
25 3.7.1 The Work to be performed under this Contract constitutes a "retail sale" as such term is defined in
26 RCW 82.04.050, and the contract price is subject to the State of Washington and local retail sales taxes.
27 The bid price shall not include such retail sales taxes. Based on the Contract Sum, Owner will pay retail
28 sales taxes on each progress payment and final payment to the Contractor for transmittal by the Contractor
29 to the State of Washington Department of Revenue.
30 All other applicable taxes which the Contractor is required to pay, excepting State and local retail sales tax
31 as specified above, shall be deemed included in the Contractor's proposed prices for the Work under this
32 contract. No adjustment will be made in the amount to be paid by Owner under this contract because of any
33 misunderstanding by the bidder/Contractor as to its liability for or the amount of any taxes or because of any
34 increases in tax rates imposed by any federal,state or local government.
35 3.�3 PER�VIITS, FEES AN� NOTICfS
3b 3.8.1 Contractor shall secure all governmental licenses and inspections necessary for the proper
37 execution and completion of the Work, including Occupancy Permit(s),which are customarily secured after
38 execution of the Contract and which are legally required for and during the prosecution of the work and the
39 subsequent warranty period. Owner will secure and purchase the building permit.
40 3.8,2 The Contractor shall comply with and give notices required by laws, ordinances, rules, regulations
41 and lawful orders of public authorities bearing on performance of the Work.
42 3.8.3 If the Contractor observes that the Contract Documents are not in accordance with applicable laws,
43 statutes, ordinances, building codes, and rules and regulations or that portions of the Contract Documents
44 are at variance therewith, the Contractor shall promptly notify the Architect and Owner in writing, and
45 necessary changes shall be accomplished by appropriate Modification.
46 3.8.A� If the Contractor performs Work knowing it to be contrary to laws, statutes, ordinances, building
47 codes, and rules and regulations without such notice to the Architect and Owner, the Contractor shall
48 assume full responsibility for such Work and shall bear the attributable costs, including, but not limited to,
49 fines, penalties, and interest.
SQ 3.9 ALLOWANCES
2010-16 /YCS Fueling Station Bld—OO 7200 -9 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION 1-15-13
SUPPOR7 OPERATION CENTER PHASE 2 ~
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS No.2
�RICICSON McGOVERN "'
1 3.9.1 The Contractor shall include in the Contract Sum all allowances stated in the Contract Documents. ,
2 Items covered by allowances shall be supplied for such amounts and by such persons or entities as the
3 Owner may direct, but the Contractor shall not be required to employ persons or entities �gainst which the
4 Contractor makes reasonable objection.
5 .1 Materials and equipment under an allowance shall be selected promptly by the Owner to �x
6 avoid delay in the Work;
7 .2 Allowances shall cover the cost to the Contractor of materials and equipment delivered at
8 the site, less applicable trade discounts; u_
9 ,3 Contractor's costs for unloading and handling at the site, labor, installation costs, overhead,
10 profit and other expenses contemplated for stated allowance amounts shall be included in
11 the Contract Sum and not in the allowances.
12 ,�4 Whenever costs are more than or less than allowances, the Contract Sum shall be adjusted •_
13 accordingly by Change Order. The amount of the Change Order shall reflect the difference
14 between actual costs and the allowances under Clause 3.9.1.2.
15 3.10 SUPEF3INTENDENT �
16 3,10.9 The Contractor shall employ a competent superintendent and necessary assistants who shall be in
17 attendance at the Project site during performance of the Work. The superintendent shall represent the
18 Contractor, and communications given to the superintendent shalt be as binding as if given to the Contractor.
19 Important communications shall be similarly confirmed on written request in each case.
20 3.10.2 The Contractor's Superintendent shall remain on the job at all times during progress of the Work until
21 the Date of Substantial Completion as determined pursuant to Paragraph 9.8. The Contractor shall give the �
22 name of the Superintendent to the Owner and the Architect at the time ot execution of the Contract. The
23 Superintendent shall not be changed without the approval of the Owner, which shall not be unreasonably --
24 withheld. The Superintendent shall not be employed on any other project during the course of the Work.
�
25 3.90.3 The Project Engineer shail be tamiiiar with the quality control aspects of projects similar to the
26 Project. The Project Engineer shall review initial pay draw requests for consistency with the Project schedule �
27 of values. The Project Engineer shall review submittals and mock-ups prior to submission to the Architect;
28 coordinate sho� drawings with major Subcontractors; and review shop drawings for consistency with Project �
29 specifications prior to submission.
30 3.10.4 The Contractor shall employ a Project Manager who shall be assigned to the Project during the
31 progress of the Work. The Project Manager shatl not be changed without the approval of the Owner, which �
32 shall not be unreasonably withheld.
33 3.10.5 The Owner reserves the right, after consultation with the Contractor,to require the Contractor to �
34 replace a Superintendent, Project Engineer, Project Manager or other assistants if the Owner determines
35 that such replacement is in the best interests of the Project. The Owner shall exercise such right in a �
36 reasonable manner. The Owner shall be entitled to exercise the same rights concerning any replacement. .
37 3.11 CONTRAC70R'S CONSTRUCT101d SCHEDULES
�
38 3,11.1 The Contractor shali prepare a Schedule of Values, which is coordinated with the Contractor's
39 construction schedule. The Schedule of Values serves to break down the Contract Sum in sufficient detail to "
40 facilitate continued evaluation of payment requests and progress reports. The Schedule of Values shall
41 indicate at least 5% shall be earned through completion of all Contract closeout and punchlist activities, and �
42 other proportional amounts for completion of all landscape maintenance and for technology cabling. The �
43 Contractor shall earn said amounts only when said tasks are fully completed; no payments shall be earned
44 for partial completion of said tasks� Said 5% is for closeout and punchlist activities and is distinct and �<>
45 different from statutory �etainage. Covered play areas, building demolition and hazardous materials
46 abatement shall be indicated separately. Line items shall correspond with categories required by the Owner, �
47 which shall at least include the divisions of work listed in the table of contents in the Specifications and any
48 additional requirements imposed by a third-party governmental entity with authority. �"
49 3.�2 DfJ�UMENTS AND SAMPLES Ai'THE SITE
50
�
2010-16 /YCS Fueling Station Bld—OO 7200 - 1 O GENERALCONDITfONS
OF THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION 1-15-13
SUPPORT OPERATION CENTER PHASE 2
YELM GOMMUNITY SCHOOLS No.2
ERICKSON McGOVERN
1 3.12.1 The Contractor shall maintain at the site for the Owner one reproducible, record copy of the
2 Drawings, Specifications, Addenda, Change Orders and other Modifications, in good order and marked
3 currently to record changes and selections made during construction, and in addition. approved Shop
4 Drawings, Product Data, Sam�les and similar required submittals. These shall be available to the Architect
5 and Owner during the course of the Work. The location of all existing or new underground piping, valves,
6 and utilities, as located during the course of construction, shall be appropriately marked until the actual field
7 location dimensions and coordinates are incorporated on the record drawings. Upon completion of the Work,
8 the Contractor shall certify that the record documents reflect complete and accurate "as-built" conditions and
9 shall deliver the documents as well as the approved permit set of plans in good condition to the Architect for
10 submittal to the Owner in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents. Satisfactory
11 maintenance of up-to-date record drawings will be a requirement for approval of progress payments.
12 3.13 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA,SAMPLES,AND REQUEST FOR INFORMA�ION
13 3.13.1 Shop Drawings are drawings, diagrams, schedules and other data specially prepared for the Work
14 by the Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier or distributor to illustrate
15 some point of the Work.
16 3.13.2 Product Data are illustrations, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, brochures,
17 diagrams and other information furnished by the Contractor to illustrate materials or equipment for some
18 portion of the Work.
19 3,i3.3 Samples are physical examples which illustrate materials, equipment and workmanship and
20 establish standards by which the Work will be judged.
21 3.'13.4 Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and other similar submittals are not Contract Documents.
22 7he purpose of their submittal is to demonstrate for those portions of the Work for which submittals are
23 required the way the Contractor proposes to conform to the information given and the design concept
24 expressed in the Contract Documents. Review by the Architect is subject to the limitations of Subparagraph
25 4.2.7.
26 3.13.5 After checking and verifying field measurements, specified performance criteria, installation and
27 materials requirements, catalogue information and the like,the Contractor shall review, approve and submit
28 to the Architect Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals required by the Contract
29 Documents,with reasonable promptness, bearing the Contractor's certification that the submittals comply
30 with the requirements of the Contract Documents, and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the Work or
31 in the activities of the Owner or of separate contractors. Submittals made by the Contractor which are not
32 required by the Contract Documents may be returned without action. If Shop Drawings, Product Data,
33 Samples and similar Submittals presented to the Rrchitect by the Contractor contain deviations from
34 requirements of the Contract Documents,the Contractor shall, in writing, designate such deviations at the
35 time of submittal and subsequent resubmittals.
36 3.'13.6 The Contra�tor shall perform no portion of the Work requiring submittal and review of Shop
37 Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals until the respective submittal has been reviewed by
38 the Architect as provided in Subparagraph 4.2.7. Such Work shall be in accordance with accepted
39 submittals.
40 3.13.7 By approving and submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals, the
41 Contractor represents that the Contractor has determined and verified materials, field measurements and
42 field construction criteria related thereto, or will do so, and has checked and coordinated the information
43 contained within such submittals with the requirements of the Work and of the Contract Documents.
44 Corrections required to bring Shop Drawings into conformance with the intent of the Contract Documents
45 shall not be cause for extension of time or cost.
46 3.13.8 The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for deviations from requirements of the Contract
4� Documents by the ArchitecYs review of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals unless
48 the Contractor has specifically informed the Architect and Owner in writing of such deviation at the time vf
49 submittal and the Owner has given written approval to the specific deviation. The Contractor shall not be
50 relieved of responsibility for errors or omissions in the Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar
51 submittals by the Architect's review thereof. Any corrections or modifications to Shop Drawings made by the
52 Architect shall be deemed accepted by the Contractar, without change in Contract Sum or Time, unlsss the
2010-16 /YCS Fueling Station Bid—00 7200 - 1 1 GENERAL CONDITIONS
OF THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION 1-15-13
SUP�ORT OPERATION �ENTER PHJ4SE 2
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS No.2
IERICKSON MCGOVERN °
1 Contractor provides the Architect with written notice before commencing any work from such Shop Drawings.
2 The Contractor shall make all corrections requested by the Architect and provide a corrected Submittal
3 without change in Contract Sum or Contract Time.
4 3.13.9 The Contractor shall direct specific attention, in writing or on resubmitted Shop Drawings, Product
5 Data, Samples or similar submittals to revisions other than those requested by the Architect on previous
6 submittals.
7 3.13.10 Informational submittals upon which the Architect is nof expected to take responsive action may be
8 so identified in the Contract Documents.
9 3,13.�1 When professional cert'rfication of performance criteria of materials, systems or equipment is
10 required by the Contract Documents, the Architect shall be entitled to rely upon the accuracy and
11 completeness of such calculations and certifications. The Contractor shall make any required corrections
12 and shall resubmit the required number of corrected shop drawings, samples or submittals. Resubmittals
13 necessitated by required corrections shall not be a cause for extension in time.
14 3.13.12 The Contractor may submit to the Architect requests for clarification or information concerning the `
15 Contract Documents. However, if a clarification or information request is unnecessary because the
16 information is clearly provided in the Contract documents, the Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for the
17 costs of the Architect's (and or subconsultant's)time spent responding to the request.
18 3.14 USE OF SITE
19 3.�4.1 The Contractor shall confine operations at the site to areas permitted by law, ordinances, permits
20 and the Contract Documehts and shall not unreasonably encumber the site or areas adjacent to the site with "'
21 materials, equipment or debris. Damage to areas of the Site not scheduled for Work shall be remedied,
22 repaired or replaced at Contractor's expense. The Contractor shall coordinate all of its operations with and
23 secure approval of the Owner before using any portion of the site.
24 3.15 CU�'TII�� AND PATCHING
25 3,i5.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for cutting, fitting or patching required to complete the Work or to
26 make its parts fit together properly. �
27 3.15.2 The Contractor shall not damage or endanger a portion of the Work or fully or partially completed ry-
28 construction of the Owner or separate contractors by cutting, patching or otherwise altering such
29 construction, or by excavation. The Contractor shall not cut or otherwise alter such construction by the �
30 Owner or a separate contractor except with written consent of the Owner and of such separate contractor;
31 such consent shall not be unreasonably withheld. The Contractor shall not unreasonably withhold from the °'
32 Owner or a separate contractor the Contractor's consent to cutting or otherwise altering the Work.
33 3,15.3 Existing struetures and facilities, including but not limited to buildings, utilities, topography, streets,
34 curbs, and walks, that are damaged or removed due to excavations or other construction work, shall be `*
35 patched, repaired or replaced by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Architect, the owner of such
36 structures and facilities, and governmental authorities having jurisdiction. In the event the governmental �`
37 authorities require that the repairing and patching be done with their own labor and/or materials, the �.
38 Contractor shalt abide by such regulations and it shall pay for such work.
39 3.16 CLEAidi�1C'a U!�
40 3.16.1 The Contractor shall keep the premises and surrounding area free from accumulation of waste -
41 materials or rubbish caused by operations under the Contract. At completion of the Work the Contractor
42 shall remove from and about the Project waste materials, rubbish, the Contractor's tools, construction '
43 equipment, machinery and surplus materials and shall perform all cleaning necessary to make premises
44 ready for occupancy and use. Contractor shall submit, and if approved by Owner, follow a waste
45 management/recycle program. ,
4b 3.16.2 If the Contractor fails to clean up as provided in the Contract Documents, the Owner may do so and
47 the cost thereof shall be charged to the Contractor.
48 3.17 A��ESS TO WORK -
2010-16 /YCS Fueling Statlon Bid—00 7200 - 12 GENERAL CONDITIONS
OF THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION 1-15-13 `"
SUPPORT OPERATION CENTER PH�►SE 2
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS No.2
ERICKSON McGOVERN
1 3,17.1 The Contractor shall provide the Owner and Architect access to the Work in preparation and
2 progress wherever located.
3 3,'!g RO�IA�.TIES, PATENTS,COPYRIGH'�S,AND 07HER INTEL�ECTUAL PROPERTY
4 3.18.�i The costs involved in fees, royaities or claims for any patented invention, article, process or method,
5 or any copyright or other intellectual property right that may be used upon or in a manner connected with the
6 work under this Contract or with the use of completed work by the Owner shall be paid by the Contractor.
7` The Contractor and its sureties shall protect and hold Owner together with its officers, agents and
8 emptoyees, harmless against any and all demands made for such fees or claims brought or made by the
9 holder of any such right. Before final payment is made on the account of this Contract,the Contractor shall,
10 if requested by the Owner,furnish acceptable proof of a proper release from all such fees or claims.
11 Should the Contractor, his agent,servants or employees, or any of them be enjoined from furnishing or using
12 any invention, article, material or appliances, or any copyrighted item or other item of intellectual property
13 supplied or required to be supplied or used under the Contract, the Contractor shall promptly substitute other
14 articles, materials or appliances in lieu thereof of equal efficiency, quality,finish,suitability, and market value,
15 and satisfactory in all respects to the Owner and Architect. In the event that the Owner elects, in lieu of such
16 substitution,to have supplied and to retain and use any such invention, article, material or appliances, or any
17 copyrighted item or other item of intellectual property as may be required to be supplied by the Contract, the
18 Contractor shall pay such royalties and secure such valid licenses as may be requisite and necessary for the
19 Owner, its officers, agents, servants and employees, or any of them to use such invention, article, material or
20 appliance, or any copyrighted item or other item of intellectual property without being disturbed or in any way
21 interfered with by any proceeding in law or equity on account thereof. Should the Contractor neglect or
22 refuse to make the substitution promptly or to pay such royalties and secure such licenses as may be
23 necessary, then in that event the Owner shall have the right to make such substitution or the Owner may pay
24 such royalties and secure such licenses and charge the Contractor even though final payment under the
25 Contract may have been made.
26 3.19 INDEiNNITY AND DEFENSE
27 3.19.1 To the maximum extent permitted by law, the Contractor shall be liable for all damages and injury
28 which shall be caused to owners of property on or in the vicinity of the work or which shall occur to any
29 person or persons or property whatsoever arising out of the performance of this Contract, whether or not
30 such damage or injury be caused by negligence of the Contractor and whether or not such damage or injury
31 be caused by the inherent nature of the work specified.
32 3.19.2 To the maximum extent permitted by law, the Contractor shall indemnify and hold the Owner and
33 Architect and all of their officers, principals, agents and employees harmless from any liability whatsoever for
34 any injuries to persons or property arising out of the performance of this Contract; provided, however, that if
35 {and only ifl the provisions of RCW 4.24.115 apply to the work and any such injuries to persons or property
36 arising out of performance of this Contract are caused by or result from the concurrent negligence of
37 Contractor or its subcontractors, agents or employees, Architect, and the Owner or its agents or employees,
38 the indemnification applies only to the extent of the negligence of the Contractor, its subcontractors, agents
39 or employees. The Contractor specifically assumes potential liability for actions brought by the Contractor's
40 own employees against the Owner and the Architect and for that purpose the Contractor specifically waives
41 any immunity under the workers compensation act, RCW Title 51. By executing the Agreement, the
42 Contractor recognizes and confirms that this waiver was specifically entered into pursuant to the provisions
43 of RCW 4.24.115 and was the subject of mutual negotiation.
44 3.19.3 In case any suit or legal proceedings shall be brought against the Owner, the Architect, or any of
45 their officers, principals, agents or employees on account of loss or damage sustained by any person or
46 property as a resu�t of the performance of this Contract, whether or not such injuries or damage be caused
47 by the inherent nature of the work specified,the Contractor agrees to assume the defense thereof and to pay
48 all expenses connected therewith and all judgments that may be obtained against the Owner, the Architect,
49 or any of their officers, principals, agents or employees in such suits. In the event that any lien is placed
50 upon the property of the Owner or any of its officers, principals, agents or employees as a result of such
51 suits, the Contractor agrees to at once cause the same to be dissolved and discharged by giving bond or
52 otherwise.
2010-18 /YCS Fueling Statlon B1CI —OO 7200 - 13 GENERAL CONDITIONS
OF THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION 1-15-13
SUPPORT OPERATION CENTER PHASE 2
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS No.2
ER�CKSON McGOVERN •-
1 In addition to the amounts required by Chapter 60.28 RCW to be withheld from the progress payments to the
2 Contractor, the Owner may, in its sole discretion, withhold amounts sufficient to pay any property damage
3 claim of which the Owner may have knowledge, regardless of the informalities of notice of such claim, arising
4 out of the performance of this Contract, provided that the total amounts withheld for such purpose shall not
5 exceed one percent of the Contract Price. The term "property damage claim" shall not include any claim for
6 personal injuries or any claim by persons furnishing supplies or materials or performing labor for the
7 Contractor. The amount withheld will not be paid to the claimant by the Owner but will be hetd until either the
8 Contractor secures a written release from the claimant, obtains a court decision that such claim is without
9 merit or satisfies any judgment in favor of the claimant on such claims.
10 319A In claims against any person or entity indemnified under this Paragraph 3.19 by an employee of the
11 Contractor, a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they
12 may be liable, the indemnification obligation under this Paragraph 3.19 shall not be limited by a limitation on
13 amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for the Contractor or a Subcontractor
14 under workers' or vuorkmen's compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts.
15 �.19.5 The obligations of the Contractor under this Paragraph 3.19 shall not extend to the liability of the
1b Architect, the ArchitecYs consultants, and agents and employees of any of them.
17 ARTICLE 4
1$ ADMlNISTRATION OF THE CONTRAC7 '
19
20 4.'I ARt�HITECT
21 4.1.1 The Architect is the person lawfully ficensed to practice architecture or an entity lawfully practicing
22 architecture identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if
23 singular in number. The term"Architect" means the Architect or the Architect's authorized representative.
qtR•
24 4.2 ARC�iITECT'S ASSIST�►NC� IN ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRAC�'
25 �.2.1 The Architect will assist the Owner in administration of the Contract as described in the Contract �
26 Documents, and may, as specifically authorized by the Owner, serve as the Owner's representative
27 (1) during construction, (2} until final payment is due and (3)from time to time during the correction period
28 described in Paragraph 12.2. The Architect will advise and consult with the Owner. The Architect may have �
29 authority to act on behalf of the Owner only to the extent provided in the Contract Documents or the
30 agreement between the Owner and the l�rchitect, unless otherwise modified by written instrument in �
31 accordance with other provisions of the Contract Documents. The Authority of the Architect is separate from
32 that of the Owner's Representative. °
33 4.2.2 The Architect will visit the site at intervals appropriate to the stage of construction to become familiar �-
34 with the progress and quality of the completed Work and to determine in general if the Work is being
35 performed in a manner indicating that the Work, when completed, will be in accordance with the Contract �`
36 Documents. However, the Architect will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous on-site
37 inspections to check quality or quantity of the Work. On the basis of on-site observations as an architect, the �`'`,
38 Architect will keep the Owner informed of progress of the Work, and will use its best efforts to guard the �,
39 Owner against defects and deficiencies in the Work. The Architect shall not exercise prerogatives or pertorm
40 dufiies in a manner that will increase the cost of construction or increase construction time without Owner's �,
41 prior written approval. It is the Contractor's responsibility to inform Owner, in writing, of direction by Architect
42 that may affect Contract Sum or Contract Time prior to proceeding with that work. �
43 4.2.3 The Architect will not have control over or charge of and will not be responsible for construction K.
44 means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or for safety precautions and programs in
45 connection with the Work, since these are solely the Contractor's responsibility as provided in Paragraph 3.3. -
46 The Architect will not have control over or charge of and will not be responsible for acts or omissions of the
47 Contractor, Subcontractors, or their agents or employees, or of any other persons performing portions of the
48 Work.
49 4.2.4 Except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents or when direct communications have been
50 specially authorized, the Owner and Contractor shall endeavor to communicate through the Architect. �
51 Communications by and with Subcontraetors and material suppliers shall be through the Contractor.
2010-16 !YCS Fueling Station Bid—00 7200 - 14 GENERAL CONDITIONS
OF THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION 1-15-13
SUPPOR7 f3PERATION CENTER PHASE 2
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS No.2
ERICKSON McGOVERfd
1 Communications by and with separate contractors shall be through the Owner. The Contractor additionally
2 shall PROVIDE THE OWNER WITH A DIRECT COPY OF ALL IMPORTANT WRITTE�I
3 COM�vIUNICATIONS TO THE ARCHiTECT, including all notices, claims, and potential.changes in the
4 Contract Sum or Time.
5 4.2.5 Based on the Architect's observations and evaluations of the Contractor's Applications for Payment,
b the Architect will review and certify the amounts due the Contractor and will issue Certificates for Payment in
7 such amounts.
S 4.2.6 The Architect will have the authority to reject Work which does not conform to the Contract
9 Documents, If the Contractor disputes the rejection of any Work and the correction thereof shall involve
10 additional costs or time,the Contractor shall inform the Owner of the correction in writing and it shaA'be the
11 Owner's option to accept such Work whether it is conforming or nonconforming. The Owner will not exercise
12 this option with respect to nonconforming Work that the Architect certifies as presenting a threat to the
13 durability of the building, a threat to human health or life, or that violates any applicable code requirement.
14 Whenever the Architect considers it necessary or advisable for implementation of the intent of the Contract
15 Documents, the Architect will have authority to require additional inspection or testing of the Work in
16 accordance with Subparagraphs 13.5.2 and 13.5.3, whether or not such Work is fabricated, installed or
17 completed. Nowever, neither this authority of the Architect nor a decision made in good faith either to
18 exercise or not to exercise such authority shall give rise to a duty or responsibility of the Architect to the
19 Contractor, Subcontractors, material and equipment suppliers,their agents or employees, or other persons
20 performing portions of the Work.
21 4.2,7 The Architect will review and take appropriate action upon the Contractor's submittals such as Shop
22 Drawings, Product Data and Samples, but only for the limited purposes of checking for conformance with
23 information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. The Architect's action will
24 be taken with such reasonable promptness as to cause no delay in the Work or in the activities of the Owner,
25 Contractor or separate contractors, while allowing sufficient time in the Architect's professional judgment to
26 permit adequate review. Review of such submittals is not conducted for the purpose of determining the
27 accuracy and completeness of other details such as dimensions and quantities, or for substantiating
28 instructions for installation or performance of equipment or systems, all of which remain the responsibility of
29 the Contractor as required by the Contract Documents. The Architect's review of the Contractor's submittals
30 shall not relieve the Contractor of the obligations under Paragraphs 3.3, 3.5, and 3.12. The Architect's
31 review shall not constitute approval of safety precautions or, unless otherwise specifically stated by the
32 Architect, of any construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures. The Architect's
33 review of a specific item sha11 not indicate approval of an assembly of which the item is a component.
34 �.2.8 The Architect will prepare Change Orders and Construction Change Directives, and may authorize
35 minor changes in the Work as provided in Paragraph 7.4.
3b 4.2.9 The Architect will conduct inspections to determine the date or dates of Substantial Completion and
37 the date of final completion, will receive and forward to the Owner for the Owner's review and records written
38 warranties, operations and maintenance manuals, record drawings and related documents required by the
39 Contract and assembled by the Contractor, and will issue a final Certificate for Payment upon compliance
4Q with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
41 4.2.10 If the Owner and Architect agree, the Architect will provide one or more project representatives to
42 assist in carrying out the Architect's responsibilities at the site.
43 4.2.11 The Architect will interpret and decide matters concerning performance under and requirements of
44 the Contract Documents on written request of either the Owner or Contractor. The ArchitecYs response to
45 such requests will be made with reasonable promptness and within any time limits agreed upon. If no
46 agreement is made concerning the time within which interpretations required of the Architect shall be
47 furnished in compliance with this Paragraph 4.2, then delay, if any, shall not be recognized on account of
48 failure by the Architect to furnish such interpretations until fifteen (15) days after written request is made for
49 them or after the Architect has received from the Owner or Contractor all of the information necessary for the
50 Architect to respond to the request, whichever is later.
2010-16 /YCS Fueling Station Bid—00 7200 - 15 GENERAL CONDITIONS
OF THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION 1-15-13
SUPPORT OPERATION CEN'fER PHASE 2
YEL�IA COMMUNITY SCHOOLS No.2
ERICKSON McGOVERN �
1 4.2.i2 Interpretations and decisions of the Architect will be consistent with the intent of and reasonably
2 inferable from the Contract Documents and will be in writing or in the form of drawings. When making such
3 interpretations and decisions,the Architect will endeavor to secure faithful performance by Contractor.
4 4.2.13 As between the Architect and the Contractor, the Architect's decisions on matters relating to
5 aesthetic effect will be final if consistent with the intent expressed in the Contract Documents.
6 4.2.14 The Architect shall conduct meetings at least once weekly with the Contractor and such
7 Subcontractors as may be requested by the Architect to review the progress of the work and the status of
8 schedules. The Architect shall prepare and circulate minutes of such meetings.
9 4.3 CL.Al�IS AN!� DISPUTES
10 �4.3.1 A "Claim° is a substantiated demand or assertion by the Contractor seeking, as a matter of right,
11 adjustment or interpretation of Contract terms, payment of money, extension of time or other relief with
12 respect to the terms of the Contract. The term "Claim" or"claim" also includes other disputes and matters in
13 question between the Owner and Contractor arising out of or relating to the Contract.
14 4.3.2 Claims must be made by written notice and substantiated by detailed information. The responsibility
15 to substantiate Claims rests solely with the Contractor. The substantiation of a Claim shall include, at a
16 minimum,the following:
17 .1 A written narrative explaining the factual basis of the claim and the bases for the claim under
18 the Contract Documents;
19 .2 A written and/or graphic explanation of how the alleged acts or failure to act by the Owner
20 under the Contract directly caused the damages or delay complained of; �
21 .3 Full documentation of the additional costs or damages allegedly resulting in such detail as
22 may be requested by the Owner, including original bid and budget records;
23 .4 Schedule analyses which demonstrate that the alleged acts or failure to act caused delays to
24 the critical path activities of the Contractor; and
25 .5 Such other job records, reports, documents, calculations and bid or estimate information as
� 26 the Owner may reasonably require to evaluate the Claim.
27 In the event the Contractor believes that a change in the Work that is the responsibility of the Owner has -
28 caused, or may cause, an increase in the Contractor's costs in the form of labor and equipment inefficiencies
29 or lost productivity, such alleged costs must be specifically identified in the notice of claim. In addition, the
30 Contractor must establish that the alleged cost increases result directly from such change and must
31 demonstrate the impact by utilizing comparisons of the Work pertormed during the impacted period with
32 Work performed during a non-impacted period or on a closely similar but different part of the Work if such
33 comparisons are reasonably available or feasible.
34 4,3.3 Claims, including those alleging an error or omission by the Architect, shall be submitted to the �`
35 Architect and the Owner. A decision by the Owner, shall be required as a condition precedent to litigation of �
36 a Claim between the Contractor and Owner as to all such matters arising prior to the date final payment is
37 due, regardless of (i) whether such matters relate to execution and progress of the Work or (2) the extent to �
38 which the Work has been completed.
39 4.3.4 Pending final resolution of a Claim, unless otherwise agreed in writing, the Contractor shall proceed
40 diligently with pertormance of the Contract and the Owner shall continue to make payments that are not in
41 dispute in accordance with the Contract Documents.
42 4.3,5 If conditions are encountered at the site which constitute subsurface or otherwise concealed physical
43 conditions which differ materially from those indicated in the Contract Documents, then written notice by the
�� Contractor shall be given to the Owner promptly before such conditions are disturbed and in no event later
45 than three (3) days after first observance of such conditions. The Architect will promptly investigate such
46 conditions and, if they differ materially and cause an increase or decrease in the Contractor's cost of, or time
47 required for, performance of any part of the Work, witl recommend an equitable adjustment in the Contract h
48 Sum or Contract Time, or both, to the Owner for consideration. If the Architect and Owner determine that the
49 conditions at the site are not materially different from those indicated in the Contract Documents and that no
50 change in the terms of the Contract is justified, the Owner shall so notify the Contractor in writing, stating the
51 reasons. Protests in opposition to such determination must be set forth in writing within fourteen (14) days
2010-16 /YCS Fueling Station Bid—00 7200 - 16 GENERAL CONDITIONS
OF THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION 1-15-13 °
SUPPORT t�PERATION CENTER PHASE 2
YELM COMMUNfTY SCHOOLS �o.2
ERICKSON McGOVERN
1 after the Owner has given notice of the decision. if the Owner and Contractor cannot agree on an
2 adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, any claim by the Contractor arising there from shall be
3 made in accordance with the dispute resolution procedure in Paragraph 4.4.
4 4.3.6 All claims for additional cost and/or time (regardless of how described) must be made
5 according to Paragraphs 4.3,4.4 and 4.5 or they will be waived. If the Contractor claims that an
6 additional cost is involved because of conflicts or omissions within a particular type of Contract Document
7 (e.g., Drawings),the Contractor and Subcontractors will be deemed to have carefully reviewed all of the
8 Contract Documents, including drawings, schedules, and specifications, and the most expensive work
9 indicated on the particular type of Contract Document within which a conflict or omission is claimed shall be
10 provided with no change in the Contract Sum or Time. !n the event that work is shown on Drawings but not
11 contained in Specifications, it will be assumed the work as shown shall be provided at no change in the
12 Contract Sum or Time, according to specifications to be issued by the Architect. The Contractor shall not be
13 entitled to an increase in the Contract Sum or Time arising out of an error or conflict where the Contractor
14 failsd adequately to review the Contract Documents and timely report the error or conflict to the Architect.
15 4.3.7 If the Contractor wishes to make a Claim for an increase in the Contract Sum, written notice as
16 provided herein timely filed as provided in Subparagraph 4.3.6 and Paragraphs 4.4 and 4.5 shall be given
17 before proceeding to execute the Work. The claim shall be fully documented as provided above. Prior
18 notice is not required only for Claims relating to an emergency endangering life or property arising under
19 Paragraph 10.3.
20 4.3.8 If the Contractor wishes to make Claim for an increase in the Contract Time, written notice as
21 provided herein time{y filed as provided in subparagraph 4.3.6 and Paragraphs 4.4 and 4.5 shall be given.
22 The Contractor's Claim shall be fully documented as provided above and shall include a description of critical
23 path activity impacted by delay, an estimate of cost and of probable effect of delay on progress of the Work.
24 In the case of a continuing delay only one written Claim is necessary, provided, the written notice states that
25 the delay and the conditions causing such delay are continuing. Subject to the provisions of Subparagraph
2b 8.3.3 herein limiting the Contractor's right of recovery to time extensions only for reasonable delays, the
27 Contractor's daily cost of any change in Contract Time associated with a delay for which the Contractor is
28 entitled to damages or an adjustment in the Contract Sum shall be limited for each day of such delay to the
29 lesser of the Contractor's actual costs or five percent (5%) of the Contract Sum divided by the number of
30 calendar days in the Contract Time.
31 4.3.9 If adverse weather conditions are the basis for a Claim for additional time or cost, such Claim shall
32 be documented by data substantiating that weather conditions were abnormal for the period of time and
33 could not have been reasonably anticipated, and that weather conditions had an adverse effect on the critical
34 path of the current submitted construction schedule.
35 Precipitation as rain, hail or snow, low temperature, or a windstorm which might reasonably have been
36 anticipated from the National Weather Service historical records of the general locality of the work shall not
37 be construed as abnormal. To preclude the difficulties of actual measurement, the parties hereto agree that
38 weather data at the site of the work shall be expressly deemed to be the same as that measured at the
39 Seattle-Tacoma International Airport by the Environmental Data and Information Service of the iVational
40 Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration (NOAA) of the U.S. Department of Commerce.
41 For the purposes of this subparagraph, a "month" shall mean a calendar month and a "week" shalf inean a
42 calendar week of Sunday tMrough Saturday.
43 4.3.10 If either party to the Contract suffers injury or damage to person or property because of an act or
44 omission of the other party, of any of the other party's employees or agents, or of others for whose acts such
45 party is legally liable, written notice of such injury or damage, whether or not insured, shall be given to the
46 other party within a reasonable time not exceeding fourteen (14) days after first observance. The notice shall
47 provide sufficient detail to enable the other party to investigate the matter. If a Claim for additional cost or
48 time related to this Claim is to be asserted, it shall be filed as provided in Subparagraphs 4.3.7 or 4.3.8.
49 4.4 f1ISPUTE RESOL�ITION
50 4.4.1 All Claims, disputes and other matters in question of the Contractor arising out of, or relating to, the
51 project or the Contract Documents or the breach thereof, except Claims which have been waived under the
2010-16 /YCS Fueling Statlon Bld—�� 72�� - 17 GENERAL CONDITIONS
OF THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION 1-15-13
SUPPORT OPE�tAT10N CENTER PHASE 2
YELM CCIMMUNITY SCHOOLS No.2
ERICKSON McGOVERIV
1 terms of the Contract Documents shall be decided exclusively by the following dispute resolution procedure
2 specified in Paragraph 4.4 unless the parties mutually agree in writing otherwise.
3 4.�4.2 The Contractor shall give written notice to the Owner and the Architect of all Claims within
4 twenty-one (21) days of the event giving rise to them. Faiture to properly give such notice shall constitute
5 waiver of the Claim. The Contractor shall not be entitled to any change in the Contract Sum or the Contract
6 Time, nor any other compensation, for any events or costs that occurred more than twenty-one (21) days
7 before the written notice. The written notice must be substantiated in accordance with Subparagraph 4.3.2
8 above. The notice shall be deemed to include a statement that the Claim covers all changes in cost and in --
9 time (direct, indirect, impact, consequential, and otherwise) to which the Contractor (and Subcontractors and
10 Supptiers) is entitled. The Owner or its representative shall have the right to audit the books and records of
11 the Contractor and/or of any Subcontractor of any tier making a Claim.
12 .1 If a Claim is not resolved, the Contractor may bring no Claim against the Owner in litigation
13 unfess the Claim is first subject to nonbinding mediation before a single mediator under the
14 Voluntary Construction Mediation Rules of the American Arbitration Association. This
15 requirement can be waived only by an explicit written waiver signed by the Owner. An .
16 officer of the Contractor and the Representative or designee of the Owner, both having full
17 authority to settle the claim, must attend the mediation session. To the extent there are
18 other parties in interest, such as the Architect, Engineers, Consultants, Subcontractors or
19 Suppliers, their representatives, or others deemed necessary by the Owner, with full
20 authority to settle the Claim, shall also attend the mediation session. Unless the Owner and
21 the Contractor mutually agree in writing otherwise, all unresolved Claims shall be considered
22 at a single mediation session which shall occur prior to Final Acceptance by the Owner. ,
23 .2 The Contractor may bring no litigation on Claims unless such claims have been properly
24 raised and considered in the procedures of subparagraphs 4.4.1 through 4.4.2.1 above. All -
25 unresolved Claims shall be waived and released unless the Contractor has strictly complied
26 with the time limits of the Contract Documents, and litigation is served and filed within the
27 earlier of (a) sixty (60) days after Final Acceptance, or (b) one hundred twenty (120) days
28 aiter Substantial Completion. This requirement can be waived only by an explicit written '
29 waiver signed by the Owner.
30 4.�.3 The Contractor shall diligently carry on the Work and maintain the progress schedule during any
31 dispute resolution proceedings, unless otherwise agreed by it and the Owner in writing.
32 4.4.4 The Contractor agrees that the Owner and Architect may join the Contractor as a party to any 4Y
33 litigation/arbitration/mediation involving the Project in any way. All disputes unresolved after mediation shall
34 be decided by litigation in accordance with the Contract Documents.
35 4.4.5 Notwithstanding the above, the Owner may demand arbitration, before a single arbitrator appointed
36 by the American Arbitration Association under the Expedited Procedure of the Construction Industry
37 Arbitration Rules within five (5) days of the demand, for the purpose of seeking a declaratory judgment "
38 regarding the proprietary of the Owner's prospective termination of the Contractor. The hearing shall occur
39 within seven days of the appointment of the arbitrator, and the award shall be made within two days of the �
40 close of the hearing and shall be final and binding. _
4"1 4,5 WRI"�'1'�EN �IflTIC� O�CLAIMS
g_.
42 4.5.1 Any Claim of the Contractor against the Owner for damages, additional payment for any reason, or
43 extension of time, whether under the Contract or otherwise, shall be conclusively deemed to have been �
44 waived by the Contractor unless a timely and substantiated written notice of claim therefore is made
45 pursuant to and in strict accordance with the appficable provisions of the Contract, particularly �
46 Paragraphs 4.3 and 4.�1; or, if(and only ifl no such provision is applicable, unless such Claim is substantiated
47 in writing and received by the Owner within twenty-one (21) calendar days of the event giving rise to it. No
48 act, omission, or knowledge, actual or constructive, of the Owner or the Architect shall in any way be
�,.
49 deemed to be a waiver of the requirement for timely written notice unless the Owner provides the Contractor
50 with an explicit, written waiver of timely notice. �
2010-18 /YCS Fueling Station Bid—00 7200- 18 GENERAL CONDITIONS
OF THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION 1-15-13 `
SUPPORT OPERATION CENTER PHASE 2
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS No.2
EAICKSON McGOVERN
1 4.5.2 All Claims shall be addressed to:
2 Superintendent
3 Yelm Community Schools No. 2
4 107 1 St North
5 Yelm,WA 98597-0476
6 4.6 RETEIdTION t�F REC{JRDS AN�AUDIT
7 The Contractor shall maintain and retain for a period of not less than three (3) years after the date of
8 acceptance of Work ali documents related to the Contractor's bid for this Contract (e.g., estimating sheets,
9 take-offs, etc.) and all records pertaining to the performance of the Work under this Contract, including Work
10 performed as extra work. The Contractor shall ensure each of his Subcontractors maintains and retains for
11 said period all records pertaining to performance of Subcontractor Work under this Contract, including Work
12 performed as extra work. Upon twenty-one (21) days' notice to Contractor, all such documents and records
13 shall be open to inspection and audit by Owner or others designated or authorized by Owner or under
14 applicable law and regulations. If an audit is to be commenced more than sixty (60) calendar days after the
15 acceptance of Work, Owner will give reasonable notice of the time when the audit is to begin.
�6 ARTICLE 5
�� Sl1BCONTRACTORS
18
19 5.1 DEFINITIONS
20 5.1.� A Subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct contract with the Contractor to perform a
21 portion of the Work at the site. The term "Subcontractor" is referred to throughout the Contract Documents
22 as if singular in number and means a Subcontractor or an authorized representative of the subcontractor.
23 The term"Subcontractor"does not include a separate contractor or Subcontractors of a separate contractor.
24 �.1.2 A Sub-subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct or indirect contract with a Subcontractor
25 to perform a portion of the Work at the site. The term "Sub-subcontractor" is referred to throughout the
26 Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Sub-subcontractor or an authorized
27 representative of the Sub-subcontractor.
28 5.1.3 A Supplier is a person or entity who has a direct or indirect contract with the Contractor or a
29 Subcontractor of any tier to furnish materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work.
30 5,2 AWARD OF SUBCUN�'RACTS AND OTHER CONTRACTS FOR PORTIONS OF THE WC?RK
31 5.�.1 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents or the bidding requirements, the Contractor,
32 within (10) days of Owner's Conditional Notice to Proceed, shall furnish in writing to the Owner through the
33 Architect the names of persons or entities (including those who are to furnish materials or equipment
34 fabricated to a special design) proposed for each principal portion of the Work, consistent with the listing
35 requirements on the Bid. The Architect will promptly reply to the Contractor in writing stating whether or not
36 the Owner or the Architect, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to any such proposed person or
37 entity. Failure of the Owner or Architect to reply promptly shall constitute notice of no reasonable objection.
38 The Owner shall have the right to reject any proposed Subcontractor when the Owner reasonably believes
39 the Subcontractor is not qualified or responsible to perform the Work or 'rf the Subcontractor is different from
40 one listed on or with the Bid.
41 5.2.2 The Contractor shall not contract with a proposed person or entity to whom the Owner or Architect
42 has made reasonable objection. The Contractor shall not be required to contract with anyone to whom the
43 Contractor has made reasonable objection.
44 5.2.3 If the Owner or Architect has reasonable objection to a person or entity proposed by the Contractor,
45 the Contractor shall propose another to whom the Owner or Architect has no reasonable objection. The
46 Contract Sum shalt be increased or decreased by the difference in cost occasioned by such change which is
47 fully documented to the Owner's and Architect's reasonable satisfaction and an appropriate Change Order
48 shall be issued. However, no increase in the Contract Sum shall be allowed for such change unless the
49 Contractor has acted promptly and responsively in submitting names as required. The Owner shall not be
50 responsible for any increased cost for any change involving a person or entity who or which was not in all
51 respects qualified, competent and suificiently experienced to perform proposed Work.
52
2010-16 /YCS Fueling Station Bid—00 7200 - 19 GENERAL CONDITIONS
OF THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION 1-15-13
SUPPORT OPERATION CE�1�'E13 PHASE 2
Y�L.IIA COMMUNiTY SCHOOLS No.2
ERICKSON McGOVERN �
1 5.2.4 The Contractor shali not change a Subcontractor, person or entity previously selected if the Owner or
2 Architect makes reasonable objection to such change. The Owner may require the Contractor to change any
3 Subcontractor previously approved for reasonable cause. Actions by the Owner or Architect pursuant to this
4 subparagraph shall not be deemed to make either responsible for the performance or iuture performance of
5 a Subcontractor. "
6 5.� Sl9BCt9NTRACTUAL RELATIONS --
7 5.3.1 The Contractor shalt require each Subcontractor, to the extent of the Work to be performed by the
8 Subcontractor,to be bound to the Contractor by terms of the Contract Documents, and�ro assume toward the
9 Contractor all the obligations and responsibilities which the Contractor, by these Contract Documents,
10 assumes toward the Owner and Architect. Each subcontract agreement shall preserve and protect the rights
11 of the Owner and Architect under the Contract Documents with respect to the Work to be performed by the ..
12 Subcontractor so that subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such rights, and shall allow to the
13 Subcontractor, unless specifically provided otherwise in the subcontract agreement, the benefit of all rights,
14 remedies and redress against the Contractor that the Contractor, by the Contract Doc;uments, has against
15 the Owner. Where appropriate, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor to enter into similar °
16 agreements with Sub-subcontractors. The Contractor shall make available to each pro;posed Subcontractor,
1'7 prior to the execution of the subcontract agreement, copies of the Contract Doa�ments to which the
18 Subcontractor will be bound, and, upon written request of the Subcontractor, identify to the Subcontractor fi,
19 terms and conditions of the proposed subcontract agreement which may be at variarice with the Contract
20 Documents. Subcontractors shall similarly make copies of applicable portions of such documents available
21 to their respective proposed Sub-subcontractors.
22 �,�.2 Any part of the Work performed for the Contractor by a Subcontractor shall be pursuant to a written
23 subcontract agreement between the Contractor and such Subcontractor, which shall be available to the
24 Owner for review upon request. The Contractor shall schedule, supervise, and coordiriate the operations of
25 all Subcontractors and Suppliers of any tier. No subcontracting of any of the Work shall relieve the
26 Contractor from its responsibility for the performance of the Work or its obligation:� under the Contract
27 Documents. Each such Subcontractor Agreement shall: ""
28 .1 Require that such Work be performed in accordance with all of the requirements of the
29 Contract Documents and applicable laws and regulations; '
30 .2 Waive all rights the contracting parties and their insurers may have ac�ainst one another or
31 that the Subcontractor may have against the Owner for damages caused by fire or other
32 perils covered by the property insurance described in the Contract Documents; �
33 ,3 Require the Subcontractor to carry and maintain insurance in accordaiice with the Contract
34 Documents,
35 .�t Require the Subcontractor to furnish such certificates and waivers a:� may be reasonably
36 requesfed to the extent Subcontractor has been paid for Work ��erformed under the '��
37 Subcontract Agreement; ,�
38 ,5 Require the Subcontractor to incorporate EEO statements in accordance with the Contract
39 Documents; �
40 ,f Require payment of prevailing wages in accordance with the Contract Ciocuments.
41 5��i COi�TiMGEld7 �1SSIGNlIflEiVT OF SUBC(J�d°�RACTS
42 5.4.1 Each subcontract agreement for a portion of the Work is assigned by the Contreictor to the Owner �+
43 provided that:
44 .1 Assignment is effective only after termination of the Contract by the Owner for cause
45 pursuant to Paragraph 14.2 and only for those subcontract agreements which the Owner
46 accepts by notifying the Subcontractor in writing;and
47 ,2 Assignment is subject to the prior rights of the surety, if any, obligated under a bond relating
48 to the Contract.
49 5.5 LIENS
50 The Contractor shall defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Owner from any liens aris�ing out of the work. �
2010-16 /YCS Fueling Station Bld—�� 720� -2� GENERAL CONDITIONS
OFTHE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION 1-15-13 E
SUPPO�T OPERATION CENTER PHASE 2
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS No.2
ERICKSON McGOVERN
1 ARTICLE 8
2 CC3NSTRUCTION BY CIWNER OR Bl(SEPARATE CON'�FdACTORS
3
4 6,1 OVI/NER'S RIGI�i'TO PERFORiIiI CONSTRUC'T�ON A�D TO 1�WARD SEPARATE CONTRACTS
5 6.1,1 The Owner reserves the right to perform construction or operations related #o the Project with the
6 Owner's own forces, and to award separate contracts in connection with other portions of the Project or other
7 construction or operations on the site under conditions of the Contract identical or substantially similar to
8 these including those portions related to insurance and waiver of subrogation. The Contractor shall
9 coordinate its Work with that of separate contractors. If the Contractor claims that delay or additional cost is
10 involved because of such action by the Owner, the Contractor may file and document a Claim subject to the
11 Claim provisions in the Contract Documents.
12 6.1.2 When separate contracts are awarded for different partions of the Project or other construction or
13 operations on the site, the term "Contractor" in the Contract Documents in each case shall mean the
14 Contractor that executes each separate Owner-Contractor Agreement.
15 6.1.3 The Owner sha{I provide for coordination of the activities of the Owner's own forces and of each
16 separate contractor with the Work of the Contractor, who shall fully cooperate with them. The Contractor
17 shall participate with other separate contractors and the Owner in reviewing their construction schedules
18 when directed to do so. The Contractor shall make any revisions to the construction schedule and Contract
19 Sum deemed necessary after a joint review and mutual agreement. The construction schedules shall then
20 constitute the schedules to be used by the Contractor, separate contractors and the Owner unless and until
21 subsequently revised.
22 6.1.4 Occupancy or use of any portion of the Work site by Owner shall not be construed as Substantial
23 Completion.
24 6.2 MU7UA�RESPONSIBiLITY
25 6.2.�1 The Contractor shall afford the Owner and separate contractoPs reasonable opportunity for
26 introduction and storage of their materials and equipment and performance of their activities and shall
27 connect and coordinate the Contractor's construction and operations with theirs as required by the Contract
28 Documents.
29 5,2.2 If part of the Contractor's Work depends for proper execution or results upon construction or
30 operations by the Owner or a separate contractor, the Contractor shall, prior to proceeding with that portion
31 of the Work, promptly report to the Architect apparent discrepancies or defects in such other construction
32 that would render it unsuitable for such proper execution and results. Faiiure of the Contractor so to report
33 shall constitute an acknowledgment that the Owner's or separate contractors' completed or partially
34 completed construction is fit and proper to receive the Contractor's Work, except as to defects not then
35 reasonably discoverable.
36 6.�.3 Costs caused by delays or by improperly timed activities or defective construction shall be borne by
37 the party responsible therefore.
38 6.2.4 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage caused by the Contractor to completed or partially
39 completed construction or to properry of the Owner or separate contractors as provided in Subparagraph
40 10.2.5.
41 6.2.5 Claims and other disputes and matters in question between the Contractor and a separate contractor
42 shall be subject to the provisions of Paragraphs 4.3 and 4.4 provided the separate contractor has reciprocal
43 obligations.
44 6,2,5 The Owner and each separate contractor shall have the same responsibilities for cutting and
45 patching as are described for the Contractor in Paragraph 3.15.
4b 6.3 04'YNER'S RIGHT TO CLEAN UP
47 6.3,1 If a dispute arises among the Contractor, separate contractors and the Owner as to the responsibility
48 under their respective contracts for maintaining the premises and surrounding area free from waste materials
2010-16 !YCS Fueling Station Bld—��72�� -21 GENERAL CONDITIONS
OF THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION 1-15-13
SUPPORT OPERATIOi� CENTER PHASE 2 -
YEL�IiI COMMUNITY SCHOOL.S No.2
ERiCKSON McGOVERN �
1 and rubbish as described in Paragraph 3.16, the Owner may ciean up and allocate the cost among those
2 responsible as the Owner determines to be reasonable,
3 ARTICLE 7
q. CHANG�S IN THE WORIC
5
6 7',1 CH�1lVGES
7 7.1.i Changes in the Work may be accomplished after execution of the Contract, and without invalidating �-
8 the Contract, by Change Order, Construction Change Directive or order for a minor change in the Work,
9 subject to the iimitations stated in this Article 7 and elsewhere in the Contract Documents. The Contractor
10 shall be responsible for notifying the bonding and insurance company (ies) of any changes in the Work;
11 provided that neither the number or quality of changes nor Contractor's failure to provide notice shall release
12 or impair bonding or insurance obligations or coverages.
13 .1 Before effectuating a change in the Work, the Owner may request the Contractor to propose
14 the amount ot change in the Contract Sum, if any, and the amount of change in the Contract �:
15 Time, if any, arising from a proposed change in the Work. The Contractor shall submit its
16 responsive proposal within no more than 14 days and shall in good faith specify the amounts ~
17 by which the Contract Sum and/or Time would change. The Owner may accept the proposal
18 in writing, in which case it will be included in a future Change Order, and the change in the k�
19 Work may commence immediately. The Owner may reject the proposal, in which case the
20 Owner may either not effectuate the change or may order the change through a Construction
21 Change Directive.
22 7.1.2 A Change Order shall be based upon agreement among the Owner, Contractor and Architect; a
23 Construction Change Directive requires agreement by the Owner and Architect and may or may not be
24 agreed to by the Contractor; an order for a minor change in the Work, for which there is no change in the �,_
25 Contract Sum or Time, may be issued by the Architect alone.
26 �.i.3 Changes in the Work shall be performed under applicable provisions of the Contract Documents, yY
27 and the Contractor shall proceed upon receipt of written Notice to Proceed from the Owner, unless otherwise
�
28 provided in the Change Order, Construction Change Directive or order for a minor change in the Work.
29 7,1.4 If unit prices are stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon, and if quantities `$
30 originally contemplated are so changed in a proposed Change Order or Construction Change Directive that
31 application of such unit prices to quantities of Work proposed will cause substantia� inequity to the Owner or �'
32 Contractor, the applicable unit prices shall be equitably adjusted. �.
33 �.2 C�lANG�E�URDERS
��
34 7,2.�1 A Change Order is a written instrument prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owner,
35 Contractor and Architect, stating their agreement upon all of the following: '
3b .i A change in the Work;
37 .2 The amount of the adjustment in the Contract Sum, if any; and
38 .3 The extent of the adjustment in the Contract Time, if any. ,
39 7.2.2 A Change Order shall constitute final resolution of the matter addressed by the Change Order.
�.
40 7.2.3 Methods used in determining adjustments to the Contract Sum may include those listed in
41 Subparagraph 7.3.3. °
42 7.3 CO�S7R�CT�O�I �I�Ah1GE DIRE�T��/ES .
43 7.3.1 A Construction Change Directive is a written order prepared by the Architect and signed by the
44 Owner and Architect, directing a change in the Work and stating a proposed basis for adjustment, if any, in
45 the Contract Sum or Contract Time, or both. The Owner may by Construction Change Directive, without �
46 invalidating the Contract, order changes in the Work within the general scope of the Contract consisting of
47 additions, deletions or other revisions,the Contract Sum and Contract Time being adjusted accordingly. -
48 7,3.2 A Construction Change Directive �hall be used in the absence of total agreement on the terms of a
49 Change Order.
2010-t6 /YCS Fueling Station Bld—OO 7200-22 GENERAL CONDITIONS
OFTHE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION 1-15-13
SUPPORT OPERATION CENTER PHASE 2
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS No.2
ERICKSON McGOVERN
1 7.3.3 If the Construction Change Directive provides for an adjustment to the Contract Sum,
the adjustment
2 shall be based on one of the following methods:
3 ,1 mutual acceptance of a lump sum properly itemized and supported by sufficient
4 substantiating data to permii evaluation;
5 .2 unit prices stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon;
( .3 cost to be determined in a manner agreed upon by the parties (accompanied by an itemized
� estimate of probable cost) and a mutually acceptable fixed or percentage fee; or
g .4� as provided in Subparagraph 7.3.6.
9 7.3.4 Upon receipt of a Construction Change Directive, the Contractor shall promptly proceed with the
1Q change in the Work involved. As soon as possible, and within seven (7) days of receipt,the Contractor shall
11 advise the Architect in writing of the Contractor's agreement or disagreement with the proposed adjustment
12 or the method, if any, provided in the Construction Change Directive for determining the proposed
13 adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time. The Contractor's response shall reasonably specify the
14 reasons for its disagreement and the amount or other terms that it proposes. Without such timely written
15 response, the Contractor shall conclusively be deemed to have accepted the Owner's adjustment. The
1b Contractor's disagreement sha11 not relieve the Contractor of its obligation to comply promptly with any
17 written notice issued by the Owner or the Architect. The adjustment shall then be determined by the
18 Architect in strict accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents.
19 7.3.5 A Construction Change Directive signed by the Contractor indicates the agreement of the Contractor
20 therewith, including adjustment in Contract Sum and Contract Time or the method for determining them.
21 Such agreement shall be effective immediately and shall be incorporated into a Change Order.
22 7.3.6 If the Contractor does not respond promptly or disagrees with the method for adjustment in the
23 Contract Sum, or if cost is to be determined under Clause 7.3.3.3, the Contractor shall keep and present
24 within twenty-one days' written demand from the Owner, in such form as the Architect may prescribe, an
25 itemized accounting of the time and material expended, together with supporting data. In order to facilitate
26 checking of such quotations, all proposals, except those so minor that their propriety can be seen by
27 inspection, shall be accompanied by complete itemization of costs, including labor, materials, equipment and
28 subcontract costs. Labor, equipment and materials shall be itemized in the manner described in Paragraph
29 7.5. When major cost items arise from Subcontractors of any tier,these items shall also be itemized, and the
30 Contracto�must include a statement that the Contractor has reviewed the Subcontractors' costs and believes
31 them to be accurate. Approval may not be given vvithout such itemization. Failure to provide data within 21
32 days of the Architect's request shall constitute waiver of any Claim for changes in the Contract Time or
33 Contract Sum. The total cost of any change, including a Claim under Paragraph 4.3 or 4.4, shall be limited
34 to the reasonable value, as determined by the Architect (subject to appeal through the dispute resolution
35 procedure of Paragraph 4.4), of the items in Paragraph 7.5. Unless otherwise agreed in writing by the
36 Owner, the cost shall not exceed the lower of the prevailing cost for the work in the locality of the Project or
37 the cost of the work in the current edition of R. S. Means Company, Inc., Building Construction Cost Data as
38 adjustad to local costs and conditions. The Architect and the Owner may confer directly with Subcontractors
39 of any tier concerning any item chargeable directly or indirectly to the Owner under this article to confirm
40 contract balances due and to obtain statements or lien waivers.
41 7.3.'� Pending final determination of the total cost of a Construction Change Directive to the Owner, and
42 provided that any reservations of rights in respect to the Construction Change Directive have been initialed
43 by the Owner, amounts not in dispute for such changes in the Work may be included in Applications for
44 Payment accompanied by a Change Order indicating the parties' agreement with part or all of such costs. If
45 the Contractor adds a reservation of rights that has not be initialed by the Owner, all the amounts for the
46 Construction Change Directive shall be considered disputed unless costs are renegotiated or the reservation
�7 is withdrawn or changed in a manner satisfactory to the Owner. The amount of credit to be allowed by the
48 Contractor to the Owner for a deletion or change which results in a net decrease in the Contract Sum shall
49 be the largest of (i)the reasonable value of the deletion or change, (ii)the line item value in the Schedule of
50 Values, or (iii)the actual net cost as confirmed by the Architect. When both additions and credits covering
51 related Work or substitutions are involved in a change, the allowance for overhead and profit shall be figured
52 on the basis of net increase, if any,with respect to that change.
2010-16 /YCS Fueling Station Bid—00 7200 -23 GENERAL CONDITIONS
OFTHE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION 1-15-13
SUP�'ORT OPERATION CE�VTER PH�SE 2
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS No.2
ERICKSON McGOVERId
1 7.3.8 If the Owner and Contractor do not agree with the adjustment in Contract Time or the method for �
2 determining it, the adjustment or the method shall be referred to the Architect for determination. Any
3 adjustment in the Contract Time arising from a Change or a Claim shall be limited to the change in the actual
4 critical path of the Contractor's Construction Schedule directly caused thereby.
5 7.3.9 When the Owner and Contractor agree with the determination made by the Architect concerning the �
6 adjustments in the Contract Sum and Contract Time, or otherwise reach agreement upon the adjustments,
7 such agreement shall be effective immediately and shall be recorded by preparation and execution of an
8 appropriate Change Order. °
9 7.4 MiNOR CHANGES IN THE WORK
10 7.4.1 The Architect will have authority to order minor changes in the Work not invoNing adjustment in the
11 Contract Sum or extension of the Contract Time and not inconsistent with the intent of the Contract "
12 Documents. Such changes shall be effected by written order and shall be binding on the Owner and
13 Contractor. The Contractor shall carry out such written orders promptly even if the Contractor intends ta file
14 a Claim, in which case the notice of claim must be filed in advance of any such Work pursuant to the �:
15 �rovisions of Paragraph 4.3.
16 7.5 PRICING �COMPONENTS
17 7.� The total cost of any changed Work or of any other increase or decrease in the Contract Sum, �
18 including without limitation a Claim or a Change, shall be limited to the following components. The Owner
19 shall not be obliged to pay for Claim pricing on a basis different from that bid.
20 7,5,1 �irect labor cos�s: These are the on-site labor costs determined by either an agreed estimate or =
21 actual number of additional craft hours and the hourly cost necessary to pertorm directly the change in the
22 Work, or the unit labor costs applied to the reasonably incurred and necessary material quantities and
23 extended, provided the unit labor costs are developed from the above craft hour cost, whichever is F_
24 applicable, according to industry practice.
25 The hourly cost shall be based upon the following:
26 .1 Basic wages: The hourly wage (without markup, fringe benefits or labor burden and not to
�_.
27 exceed that specified in the applicable "Intent to Pay Prevailing Wages") for the laborers,
28 apprentices, journeymen, and foremen performing and/or directly supervising the changed g,.
29 Work on the site. The premium portion of overtime wages is not included unless pre-
30 approved by the Owner. �
31 .2 Fringe benefits: Fringe benefits paid by the Contractor as established by the Washington
32 Department of Labor and Industries, or contributed to labor trust funds as itemized fringe "
33 benefits, whichever is applicable. Cost paid or incurred by the Contractor for vacations, per
34 diem, bonuses, stock options, or discretionary payments to employees are not reimbursable.
35 .3 Workers' insurances: Direct contributions to the State of Washington as industrial insurance; �,
36 medical aid; and supplemental pension by class and rates established the Washington
37 Department of Labor and Industries. �.
38 .4 Federal insurances: Direct contributions required by the Federal Insurance Compensation
39 Act (FICA); Federal Unemployment Tax Act (FUTA); and State Unemployment °�
40 Compensation Act (SUCA).
41 7.5,2 Qirec�rna�eria! costs: This is an itemization, including material invoices, of the quantity and cost of
42 additional materials reasonable and necessary to perform the change in the Work. These costs shalt be by •=
43 the unit cost applied to the quantity and extended. The unit cost shall be based upon the net cost after all
44 discounts or rebates,freight costs, express charges, or special delivery costs when applicable. No lump sum �
45 costs will be allowed except when approved in advance by the Owner.
46 7.5.3 Construc#iora equipment usage costs: This is an itemization of the actual length of time that
47 construction equipment appropriate for the Work will be used solely on the change in the Work at the site
48 times the applicable rental cost as established by the lower of the local prevailing rate published in The
49 Rental Rate Blue Book by Data �uest, San Jose, California, as modified by the AGC/WSDOT agreement or �
50 the actual rate paid to unrelated third parties as evidenced by rental receipts. Actual, reasonable
51 mobilization costs are permitted if the equipment is brought to the site solely for the change in the Work. �
2010-16 /YCS Fueling Station Bid—00 7200 - 24 GENERAL CONDITIONS
OF THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION 1-15-13 "
SUPPORT OP�RATIOiV CENTER PHASE 2
YELM COMMUNlTY SCHOOLS No.2
ERICKSOiV McG4VERN
1 If more than one rate is applicable, the lowest rate will be utilized. The rates in effect at the time of the
2 pertormance of the Change work are the maximum rates allowable for equipment of modern design and in
3 good working condition and include fufl compensation for furnishing all fuel, oil, lubrication, repairs,
4 maintenance, and insurance. Equipment not of modern design and/or not in good working condition will
5 have lower rates. Hourly, weekly, and/or monthly rates, as appropriate, will be applied to yield the lowest
6 total cost. The rate for equipment necessarily standing by for future use on the changed Work shall be 50%
7 of the rate established above. The total cost of rental allowed shall not exceed the cost of purchasing the
8 equipment outright.
9 If equipment is required for which a rental rate is not established by The Rental Rate Blue Book, an agreed
10 rental rate shall be established for that equipment, which rate and use must be approved by the Owner prior
11 to performing the changed Work.
12 7.5.4 Cost of change in insurance or bond premium. This is defined as:
13 .1 Contractors' liability insurance: The cost(expressed as a percentage) of any changes in the
14 Contractor's liability insurance arising directly from the changed Work; and
15 .2 Public works bond: The cost(expressed as a percentage) of the change in the Contractor's
16 premium for pertormance and payment bonds required by the Owner and arising directly
�'7 from the changed Work,
18 Upon request, the Contractor shall provide the Owner with supporting documentation from its insurer or
19 surety.
20 7.5.5 Subcontractor costs: These are payments the Contractor makes to Subcontractors for changed
21 Work performed by Subcontractors. The Subcontractors' cost of changed Work shall be determined in the
22 same manner as prescribed in Subparagraphs 7.5.1 through 7.5.4.
23 7.5.6 Fee: The Fee is the allowance for all combined overhead, profit and other costs, including all office,
24 home office and site overhead (including project manager, project engineer, other engineers, project
25 foremen, estimator, and superintendent and their vehicles), facilities, taxes (except for sales tax),
26 engineering, estimating, purchasing, quality control or assurance, clerical, preparation and safety costs, hand
27 and small tools and expendable charges, change order or claim preparation, preparation of as-built
28 drawings, impact on unchanged Work, and delay, acceleration and impact costs of any kind, added to the
29 total cost to the Owner of any Change Order, Construction Change Directive, Claim, or any other claim of
30 any kind. It shall be limited in all cases to the following schedule.
31 .1 The Contractor shall receive 10% of the costs prescribed in Subparagraphs 7.5.1 through
32 7.5.4 of any materials properly supplied or work satisfactorily performed by the Contractor's
33 own forces.
34 ,2 The Contractor shatl receive 8% of the amount owed directly to a Subcontractor for materials
35 properly supplied or work satisfactorily performed by that Subcontractor as prescribed in
36 SubParagraph 7.5.5.
37 .3 Each Subcontractor of any tier shall receive 10% of the costs prescribed in Subparagraphs
38 7.5.1 through 7.5.4 of any materials properly supplied or work satisfactorily performed by its
39 own forces.
40 .4 Each Subcontractor of any tier shall receive 6% of the amount it properly incurs for materiafs
41 properly supptied or Work satisfactorily performed by its suppliers or subcontractors of any
42 lower tier as prescribed in Subparagraph 7.5.5.
43 .5 The total summed Fee of the Contractor and all Subcontractors of any tier shall not exceed
44 24%.
45 .0 None of the fee percentages authorized in this paragraph 7.5.6 may be compounded with
4b any other fee percentage or percentages authorized in this paragraph.
47 If a change in the Work involves both additive and deductive items, the appropriate Fee allowed will be
48 added to the net difference of the items. If the net difference is negative, no Fee will be added to the
49 negative figure as a further deduction.
2010-16 /YCS Fueling Station Bld—��72�� - 25 GENERAL CONDITIONS
OF THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION 1-15-13
SUPPf�RT OPERATION CE�TEFi PHASE 2
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS No.2
ERICKSON McGOVERN 9
1 AFiTICLE 8
2 TIME
3
4 8.1 DE�FiNATI��IS
5 8.1.1 Unless otherwise provided, the Contract Time is the period of time allotted in the Contract
6 Documents from notice to Proceed to date of Substantial Completion of the Work as defined in subparagraph
7 8.1.3. The only adjustments thereto are by Change Order. .,
8 8.1.2 The date of commencement of the Work is the date established in the Agreement unless otherwise
9 provided by written conditional Notice to Proceed. The date shall not be postponed by the failure to act of
10 the Contractor o�of persons or entities for whom the Contractor is responsible.
11 8.1.3 The date of Substantial Completion is the date certified by the Architect in accordance with
12 Paragraph 9.8
13 8.1.4 The term "day" as used in the Contract Documents shall mean calendar day unless otherwise k
14 specifically defined.
15 8.1.5 "Conditional Notice to Proceed" is the written notice issued by the Owner identifying the date of
16 commencement of the Work and identifying conditions to be satisfied before execution of the Contract and
17 Work on site may commence.
18 8.2 PAOGRESS AND COMPLETIOR!
19 8.2,1 Within ten days of Owner's vuritten notification to the Contractor of its Conditional Notice to Proceed, �
20 the Contractor shall submit an executed contract, surety bond, preliminary progress schedule, certificates of
21 insurance, any documents required by state or local authorities, and all other documents required by the
22 Contract. Failure to make such a submission shall constitute a material breach of the conditions of the bid ,
23 and bid bond; and, at Owner's sole discretion, Owner may void the bid award and forfeit contractor's bid
24 bond.
25 8.2.2 Time is of the essence for commencement and completion of the Work. The Owner is relying
2b materially on a specific construction period and will suffer serious direct, indirect and consequential damages
27 should the established dates not be met. The Contractor shall promptly start the Work as soon as possible _
28 after the date of the Notice to Proceed and shall prosecute the Work so that the various portions of the Work
29 shall be complete in accordance with any intermediate and final completion date(s) set forth in the Contract �
30 Documents and the Contractor's schedule. During periods when weather or other conditions are unfavorable
31 for construction, the Contractor shall pursue only such portions of the Work as will not be damaged thereby;
32 no portions of the Work shatl be constructed while those conditions exist if acceptable quality or efficiency
33 will be adversely affected. It is expressly understood and agreed by and between the Contractor and the �
34 Owner that the Contract Time for completion of the Work described herein is a reasonable time taking into ,�
35 consideration the weather conditions and other factors prevailing in the locality of the Work.
36 �
37 8.2.3 The Contractor shall provide progress schedules, cash flow projections and additional reports, as
38 may be spec'rfied in the Contract Documents or as reasonably requested by the Owner, demonstrating the �-�
39 Contractor's logic and sequencing plan for scheduling and completing the Work within the Contract Time.
40 Contract Time extensions approved by the Owner shall be incorporated into updated schedules reflecting °
41 their effect at the time of occurrence. Progress payments will not be considered by the Owner until the
42 Contractor complies with these requirements.
43 The Contractor shall promptly notify the Architect and the Owner in writing of any facts or conditions which �•
44 would affect the Contractor's ability to meet the intermediate or final completion date(s) for the Work. If the
45 Contractor fails to maintain the progress necessary for the completion of the intermediate or final completion
46 date(s) as required under this Contract, the Owner shail have all of the rights and remedies provided by law
47 and under this Contract. Notwithstanding such rights and remedies,the Contractor shall, upon written notice
48 by the Owner and at no additional cost to the Owner, work such hours as allowed by applicable permits and
49 other such constraints, and furnish such additional personnel, equipment and construction plant for such a
50 period of time as necessary to regain and thereafter maintain the progress required by the Contract. �
2010-16 /YCS Fueling Station Bld—��72�� - 26 GENERAL CONDITIONS
OF THE
CONTRAGT FOR CONSTRUCTION t-15-13 °
SUP�'ORT OPERATION CENTER PHASE 2
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS No.2
ERICKSON McGOVERN
1 If the Contractor fails to comply with the Owner's notice or fails to regain and thereafter maintain the
2 progress required by the Contract, the Owner shall have all the rights and remedies provided by law and
3 provided by this Contract, including those set forth in Paragraph 142 herein.
4 8.2.5 The Contractor shall not knowingly, except by agreement or instruction of the Owner in writing,
5 prematurely commence operations on the site or elsewhere prior to the effective date of insurance required
6 by Article 11 to be furnished by the Contractor. Neither the date of commencement of the Work nor the date
7 of completion of the Work shall be changed by the effective date of such insurance.
8 8.2.6 The Contractor shall proceed expeditiously with adequate forces and shall achieve Substantial
9 Completion within the Contract Time.
10 8.3 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME
11 8.3.1 If the Contractor is unavoidably delayed at any time in progress of the Work by an act or neglect of
12 the Owner or Architect or of a separate contractor employed by the Owner, or by changes ordered in the
13 Work, or by labor disputes, fire, unavoidable casualties or other causes which are both beyond the
14 Contractor's control and could not be reasonably anticipated, or by other unavoidable causes which the
15 Architect determines may justify delay, then the Contract Time shall be extended by Change Order for such
16 reasonable time as the Owner may determine after considering the recommendations of the Architect.
17 8.3.2 Claims relating to time shall be made in accordance with applicable provisions of Paragraphs 4.3,
18 4.4 and 4.5.
19 8,3.3 For delays concerning which the Contractor has given proper and timely notice pursuant to
20 Paragraphs 4.3, 4.4 and 4.5, the Contractor shall submit to the Owner and Architect a substantiated Claim.
21 The Owner may grant an extension af time to the extent that unavoidable and reasonable delays necessarily
22 affect controlling operations in the construction schedule. During such extension of time no damages for
23 delay will be charged to the Contractor. It is understood and agreed by the Contractor and Owner that time
24 extensions due to unavoidable and reasonable delays necessarily involve controlling operations which would
25 prevent completion of Work within the Contract Time. To the extent that any such extension of time is
26 caused by act(s) or omission(s) of someone other than the Owner or persons acting for the Owner, or to the
27 extent that the extension of time arises from a reasonable delay, the Contractor's sole remedy shall be the
28 extension of time and it may not recover any damages whatsoever arising in any manner from such delay.
29 For purposes of this paragraph, any individual delay of up to the greater of 5 days or one percent of the
30 Contract Time (as extended) shall be deemed reasonable and any individual delay of up to the greater of ten
31 (10) days or five percent (5%) of the Contract Time (as extended) shall be presumed reasonable.
32 AR'fICLE 9
33 Pd�Y1111E�i'�S A�ID COMPLETION
34
35 9.1 CUNi'RACT SUM
36 9.1,1 The Contract Sum is stated in the Agreement and, including authorized adjustments, is the total
37 amount payable by the Owner to the Contractor for performance of the Work under the Contract Documents.
38 9.2 SCHEDU�E OF VALUES
39 9.2.1 At least fourteen (14) days before the Contractor submits its first Application for Payment, the
40 Contractor shall submit to the Architect a schedule of values allocated to various portions of the Work as
41 required in subparagraph 3.11.4, prepared in such form and supported by such data to substantiate its
42 accuracy as the Architect may require. This schedule, unless objected to by the Architect, shall be used as a
43 basis for reviewing the Contractor's Applications for Payment.
44 9.3 APPLIC�ITIOM FOR �RIYMENT
45 9.3.1 Contractor shall submit to Architect an itemized Application for Payment for Work completed during
46 the monthly application period and not covered in a preceding Application for Payment. Such application
47 shall be in the form of required by the Owner, and shall be supported by such data substantiating
48 Contractor's right to payment as Owner or Architect may require, such as copies of requisitions from
�9 Subcontractors and materiai suppliers and any EEO compliance forms. Such applications shall refiect any
2010-16 /YCS Fueling Station Bid—00 7200 -27 GENERAL CONDITIONS
OF THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION 1-15-13
Sl1PPORT OPERATION CEh1TER PHASE�
1(ELM COMMUNITY SCHOQLS Na 2
ERICKSON McGOVERN °
1 retainage amount required herein, shall contain the statements required herein, and shall be accompanied „
2 by an updated progress schedule per Section 3.11, and by partial lien releases executed by all
3 Subcontractors, mechanics and materialmen who supplied labor or materials or both in the performance of
4 Work for which progress payments were previously made. Such application may not include a request for
5 payment of any amount Contractor does not intend to pay to a Subcontractor, mechanic or materialmen
b because of a dispute or other reason.
'7 .� At the last weekly meeting each calendar month, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect
g a report on the current progress of the Work as compared to the Contractor's Construction
g Schedule, and a draft, itemized application for payment for Work performed during the prior
10 month to the date of submission. This shall not constitute a payment request. The
11 Contractor and Architect shall confer at the meeting regarding the current progress of the
12 Work and the amount of payment to which the Contractor is entitled.
13 .2 The Architect or Owner may request the Contractor to provide data substantiating the
14 Contractor's right to payment, including,without limitation:
1$ .� Copies of requisitions from Subcontractors;
1C .2 lien releases (see subparagraph 5.3.2.4);
17 .3 certified payroll records for Contractor and all major Subcontractors, including
18 sitework and utilities, mill work, framing, electrical, mechanical, painting and drywall,
19 and masonry; �-
Zp ,�l retainage documentation; and
21 .5 other documentation as provided elsewhere in the Contract Documents. �
22 .3 The Contractor shall not be entitled to make a payment request, nor is any payment due the
23 Contractor, until data requested by Architect or Owner is furnished. �
24 .4 After the Contractor and the Architect have met and conferred regarding the draft
25 application, and the Contractor has furnished all progress information required and all data
26 requested by the Architect under Subparagraphs 9.3.1.1 and 9.3.1.2 above, the Contractor �
27 may submit a payment request in the agreed-upon amount, in the form of a signed, itemized
28 Application for Payment for Work performed during the prior month to the date of the last -K
29 weekly meeting referenced above, on a form supplied or approved by the Owner. Among
30 other things, the Application shall state that prevailing wages have been paid in accordance °
31 with the prefiled �tatement(s) of intent to pay prevailing wages on file with the Owner and
32 that all payments due Subcontractors and Suppliers of any tier from the Ovaner's payment
33 the prior month have been made. THE SUBMISSION OF THIS APPLICATION
34 CONSTITUTES A CERTIFICATION THAT THE WORK IS CURRENT ON THE
35 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, unless otherwise noted on the
36 application.
37 .5 If the Contractor believes it is entitled to payment for Work performed during the prior -
38 calendar month in addition to the agreed-upon amount,the Contractor may,within the same
39 five-day time period, submit to the Owner and the Architect a separate written payment
40 request specifying the exact additional amount due,the category in the Schedule of Values
41 in which the payment is due,the specific Work for which the additional amount is due, and �`
42 why the additional payment is due. Furthermore,the Contractor and all Subcontractors shall
43 file with the Owner within the five-day time period certified copies of all payroll records
44 relating to the additional amount due.
45 .6 A payment request shall not be valid unless it complies with the requirements of the Contract
4b Documents. If a separate payment request concerning a disputed amount does not comply
47 with the requirements of the Contract,the Owner will provide a written statement to the
48 Contractor. "
49 .7 No payment request shall include amounts the Contractor does not intend to pay to a
50 Subcontractor or Supplier because of a dispute or other reason. If after making a request for
51 payment but before paying a Subcontractor or Supplier for its performance covered by the k
52 payment request, the Contractor discovers that part or all of the payment otherwise due to
53 the Subcontractor or Supplier is subject to withholding from the Subcontractor or Supplier
54 under the subcontract for unsatisfactory pertormance, the Contractor may withhold the
55 amount as allowed under the subcontract, but it shall give the Subcontractor,the Owner and
56 the Architect written notice of the remedial actions that must be taken as soon as practicable
2010-i6 /YCS Fueling Station Bld—��72�� - 28 GENERALCONDITIONS
OF THE ..
CONTRACT FOF1 CONSTRUCTION 1-15-13
SUPPORT OPERATION CENTER PHASE 2
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS No.2
ERICKSON McGOVER�I
1 after determining the cause for withholding but before the due date for the
2 Subcontractor/Supplier payment, and pay the Subcontractor/Supplier within eight working
3 days after the Subcontractor/Supplier satisfactorily completes the remedial.action identified
4 in the notice.
5 9.3.2 tf Architect has received the Contractor's Application for Payment in a timely manner, Architect will
6 issue to Owner a Certificate for Payment, with a copy to Contractor, for such amount as Architect and Owner
7 determine is properly due against the pending application for- payment. Owner shall make a progress
8 payment to Contractor, in accordance with paragraph 9.6.1.
9 9,3.3 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, payments shall be made on account of
10 materials and equipment delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent incorporation in the Work.
11 If approved in advance by the Owner, payment may similarly be made for materials and equipment suitably
12 stored off the site at an insured and secure location agreed upon in writing. Payment for materials and
13 equipment stored on or off the site shall be conditioned upon compliance by the Contractor with procedures
14 satisfactory to the Owner to establish the Owner's title to such materials and equipment or otherwise protect
15 the OwnePs interest, and shall include applicable insurance, storage and transportation to the site for such
16 materials and equipment stored off the site.
17 9.3.4 The Contractor warrants that title to all Work covered by an Apptication for Payment will pass to the
18 Owner no later than the time of payment. The Contractor further warrants that upon submittal of an
19 Application for Payment all Work for which Certificates for Payment have been previously issued and
20 payments received from the Owner shall, to the best of the Contractor's knowledge, information and belief,
21 be free and clear of liens, claims, security interests or encumbrances in favor of the Contractor,
22 Subcontractors, material suppliers, or other persons or entities making a claim by reason of having provided
23 labor, materials or equipment relating to the Work.
24 9.3.5 Owner shall retain from any amount otherwise earned by Contractor hereunder a sum equal to five
25 percent(5%) of the amount earned by Contractor in accordance with RCW Chapter 60.28. If the Contractor
2b elects to submit a retainage bond in accordance with Chapter 60.28 RCW,the bond must be issued by a
27 surety licensed to do business in the state where the Work is located with an A.M. Best rating of A+/IX or
28 better. The Contractor may withhold from Contractor's payments to its Subcontractors and Suppliers not
29 more than 5% as retainage from moneys earned by such persons or entities.
30 .1 The retainage shall be held as a trust fund for the protection and payment of any person or
31 � persons, mechanic, Subcontractar, or materialmen who shall perform any labor under this
32 Contract, as provided by Chapter 6028 Revised Code of Washington (RCW) and all
33 persons who shall supply such person or persons of Subcontractors with provisions, and
34 supplies for the carrying on of such Work, and the State with respect to taxes imposed
35 pursuant to RCW Title 82 which may be due from Contractor. In accordance with the
36 provisions of Chapter 60.28 RCW, said trust fund shall be retained for the statutory period,
37 and every person pertorming labor or furnishing supplies toward the completion of said Work
38 shall have a lien upon said fund provided that proper notice of the lien shall be given as
39 required by law. After the expiration of the statutory notice period, and after receipt of a
40 clearance of the Department of Revenue and Department of Labar & Industries, the reserve
41 in excess of a sum sufficient to discharge the taxes certified as due or to become due by the
42 Department of Revenue, the Department of Labor & Industries, and the claims of
43 materialmen and laborers who have filed their claims,together with a sum sufficient to defray
44 the cost of foreclosing the liens of such claims, and to pay attorneys' fees, shall be paid to
45 Contractor. The provisions of this subparagraph shall supersede any other conflicting
46 provision in this Contract.
47 .2 Monies reserved under provisions of Chapter 60.28 RCW shall, at the option of the
48 Contractor, be:
49 a. Retained in a fund by the Owner with no interest paid thereon to the Contractor; or
50 b. Deposited by tne Owner in an interest-bearing account in a bank, mutual savings
51 bank, or savings and loan association, not subject to withdrawal until after final
52 acceptance of all work, or a portion thereof, as may be approved by the Owner; or
53
2010-16 /YCS Fueling Statlon Bid—00 7200 -29 GENERAL CONDITIONS
OF THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION 1-15-13
SUPPORT OP�RATION CEN7�R PHASE 2
YELi1A COMMUNITY SCHOOLS No.2
�RICKSON McGOVERN
� c. Placed in escrow in a bank or trust company by the Owner. When the monies
2 reserved are to be placed in escrow, the Owner will issue a check representing the
3 sum of the monies reserved payable to the bank or trust co,mpany and the
4 Contractor jointly. Such check shall be converted into bonds and securities chosen
5 by the Contractor and approved by the Owner, and the bonds and securities heid in -
6 escrow. interest on the bonds and securities shali be paid to the Contractor as the
� interest accrues.
8 Under option b and c above, interest will be paid to the Contractor as the interest accrues. The Contractor .
9 shal! designate the option desired on a form as may be provided by the Owner. This form shall be submitted
10 no later than with the Contractor's �rst partial payment request. The Contractor in choosing option b or c
11 agrees to assume full responsibility to pay all costs which may accrue from escrow services, brokerage
12 charges, or both, and further agrees to assume all risks in connection with the investment of the retained
13 monies. If retainage funds are placed in escrow, the escrow agreement shall be a standard Superintendent
14 of Public Instruction ("SPI") Format.
15 9.4 CEI�TIFICATES FOR PAYMENT
16 9.�.�! The Architect will, within seven days after receipt of the Contractor's Application for Payment, either
17 issue to the Owner a Certificate for Payment, with a copy to the Contractor, for such amount as the Architect
18 and Owner determine is properly due, or notify the Contractor and Owner in writing of the ArchitecYs reasons
19 for withholding cert'rfication in whole or in part as provided in Subparagraph 9.5.1.
20 9.4.2 The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will constitute a representation by the Architect to the
21 Owner, based on the Arch.itect's observations at the site and the data comprising the Application for
22 Payment, that the Work has progressed to the point indicated and that, to the best of the ArchitecYs
23 knowledge, information and belief, quality of the Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents. The
24 foregoing representations are subject to an evaluation of the Work for conformance with the Contract
25 Documents upon Substantial Completion,to results of subsequent tests and inspections,to minor deviations
26 from the Contract Documents correctable prior to completion and to specific qualifications expressed by the
27 Architect.
28 9.5 �ERTIFI+I�ATIOi� AND PAYMEN7S WITHHELD '�
29 9.�.1. The Architect may decide not to certify payment and may withhold a Certificate for Payment in .
30 whole or in part, to the extent reasonably necessary to protect the Owner, if in the Architect's opinion the
31 representations to the Owner required by Subparagraph 9.4.2 cannot be made or if the Contractor's �
32 Application for Payment does not comply with the requirements of the Contract. If the Architect is unable to
33 certify payment in the amount of the Application, the Architect will notify the Contractor and Owner as
34 provided in Subparagraph 9.4.1. If the Contractor and Architect cannot agree on a revised amount, the
35 Architect will promptly issue a Certificate for Payment for the amount for which the Architect is able to make �`
36 such representation to the Owner. The Owner may, with or without the Architect's concurrence, withhold
37 payment, and the Architect may also decide not to certify payment or, because of subsequently discovered
38 evidence or subsequent observations, may nullify the whole or a part of a Certificate for Payment previously �
39 issued, to such extent as may be necessary in the Owner's or Architect's opinion to protect the Owner from
40 loss because of:
�1 .1 Defective lNork or unsatisfactory performance not remedied;
42 .� Third party claims filed against the Owner relating to the Work or reasonable evidence °
43 indicating probable filing of such claims;
44 .3 FaFlure of the Contractor to make payments properly to Subcontractors or for labor, materials
45 or equipment; or failure to submit affidavits pertaining to wages paid as required by the
�b Contract Documents,
47 .4 Damage to the Owner or another contractor;
48 .5 Reasonable evidence that the Work will not be completed within the Contract Time, and that
49 the unpaid balance would not be adequate to cover liquidated damages for the anticipated ��
50 delay;
51 .6 Failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents;
52
2010-16 /YCS Fueling Station Bid —00 7200 - 30 GENERAL CONDITIONS
OF THE „
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION 1-15-13
SUPPORT OPERATI0�1 CENTER PHASE�
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS No.2
ERICKSON McGOVER�V
1 .7 If Owner or Architect, in its good faith judgment, determines that the portion of the Contract
2 Sum then remaining unpaid will not be sufficient to complete the Work in accordance with
3 the Contract Documents, then the Owner shall make no additional payments and none will
4 become due to the Contractor unless and until the Contractor, at its sole cost, performs a
5 sufficient portion of the Work so that the Contract Sum then remaining unpaid is determined
( by the Owner or Architect to be sufficient to so complete the Work;
� .8 Failure of the Contractor to submit timely schedule updates; or delay by the Contractor
g and/or its Subcontractor(s) of any tier, or failure to comply with Contractor's Progress
9 Schedule; or
10 .9 Liquidated damages.
11 9.5.2 When the above reasons for withholding certification are removed, cert'rfication will be made for
12 amounts previously withheld.
13 9.5.3 Owner shall not be deemed to be in breach of this Contract by reason of the withholding of any
14 payment if the Work in question shall have been rejected by any governmental authority. The �wner shall
15 have no obligation to make payments for defective Work and unsatisfactory performance until such Work
16 and pertormance is corrected or replaced as provided herein and compensation is thereby earned.
17 9.5.4 Pursuant to RCW 39.12, the Contractor will not receive any payment until the Contractor and all
18 Subcontractors of any tier have submitted a"Statement of Intent to Pay Prevailing Wage" to the Owner. The
19 statement must have the approval of the Industrial Statistician of the Department of Labor and Industries
20 before it is submitted to the Owner. The statement must include the Contractor's registration number, the
21 number of workers in each trade classification, and the applicable wage rate for each trade listed. The
22 Contractor agrees to provide each Subcontractor with a schedule of applicable prevailing wage rates. The
23 Contractor and the respective Subcontractors shall pay all fees required by the Department of Labor and
24 Industries, including fees for the approval of the"Statement of Intent to Pay Prevailing Wages." Approved
25 copies of the"Statement of Intent to Pay Prevailing Wages" must be posted where workers can easily read
26 them.
27 9.S RROGR�SS PAYMENTS
28 9,6.� After the Architect has issued a Certificate for Payment, the Owner shall make payment in the
29 manner and within the time provided in the Contract Documents, and shall so notify the Architect. The
30 Owner will make a progress payment within thirty (30) days of its receipt of the ArchitecYs Certificate for
31 Payment, but shall be entitled to withhold payment according to subparagraph 9.5, notwithstanding the
32 issuance of a Cert'rficate for Payment.
33 9.6 2 The Contractor shall promptly pay each Subcontractor, upon receipt of payment from the Owner, out
34 nf the amount paid to the Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's portion of the Work, the amount to
35 which said Subcontractor is entitled, reflecting percentages actually retained from payments to the
36 Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's portion of the Work. The Contractor shall, by appropriate
37 agreement with Subcontractors, require each Subcontractor to make payments to Sub-subcontractors in
38 similar manner. If the Contractor does not receive payment for any cause which is not the fautt of a
39 particular Subcontractor, the Contractor shall pay that Subcontractor on demand, made at any time after
40 which such payment to the Contractor would have been made, for its work to the extent completed, less the
41 retained percentage.
42 9.6.3 The Architect will, on request, furnish to a Subcontractor, if practicable, information regarding
43 percentages of completion or amounts applied for by the Contractor and action taken thereon by the
44 Architect and Owner on account of portions of the Work done by such Subcontractor.
45 9.6.4 Neither the Owner nor Architect shall have an obligation to pay or to see to the payment of money to
46 a Subcontractor except as may otherwise be required by law.
47 9.6.5 Payment to material suppliers shall be treated in a manner similar to that provided in Subparagraphs
48 9.6.2, 9.6.3 and 9.6.4.
49 9.6.6 A Certificate for Payment, a progress payment, or partial or entire use or occupancy of the Project by
50 the Owner shall not constitute acceptance of Work.
51 9.7 LITiGATION DELAY COSTS
2010-16 /YCS Fueling Station Bid—00 7200 -31 GENERAL CONDITIONS
OF THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTJON 1-15-13
SUPPCtI��+��:i��it1A,���.1N CENTER PHASE 2
YELIIA COMMUNITY SCHOOLS No.2
ERICKSON McGOVERN °
1 9.7.1 In the event of delays primarily due to litigation which qualifies under RCW 60.28.080, the parties
2 hereto agree that the reasonable costs of such litigation delay shall consist only of the foflowing:
3 .1 Actual and necessary direct costs to the Contractor directly attributable to the period of delay
4 for wages, wage taxes and labor costs other than wages; provided,that such costs cvuld not
5 be otherwise avoided by layoffs or employment on other projects during the period of delay.
( The wage rates shall not exceed those listed on the Contractor's"Statement of Intent to Pay
7 Prevailing Wages on Public Works Contract" as approved by the Industrial Statistician of the
8 State of Washington.
9 2 Additional and necessary direct costs for materials and equipment rentals actually incurred
10 and paid by the Contractor directly attributable to the period of delay.
11 .� Actual equipment standby costs established by rental agreements or, if Contractor owned,
12 by the lowest rate utilized by The Contractor for purposes of its project accounting. �-
13 .4� Additional and necessary direct costs of insurance premiums and bonds actually incurred
14 and paid by the Contractor directly attributable to the periad of delay.
15 .5 Additional and necessary costs for subcontracts actually incurred and paid by the Contractor
16 directly attributable to the period of delay; provided, that such additional costs could not be "
17 avoided by cancellation or renegotiation of such subcontracts.
18 ,6 To such costs shall be added an amount equal to ten percent (10%) thereof as a reasonable
19 amount for overhead, profit, and all other costs not specifically accounted for above. �:
20 Within three days after notice of litigation delay under this paragraph, the Contractor shall notify the
21 Owner and Architect in writing of the Contractor's estimated weekly litigation delay costs as described above;
22 provided, however, that in no event will payment for actual litigation delay costs exceed one hundred twenty- „
23 five percent (125%) of the said estimated costs. The Contractor shall submit to the Architect no later than
24 the fifth day of each month a request for such litigation delay costs incurred during the previous calendar
25 month. The request for payment shall be in a form satisfactory to the Architect and Owner and shall include
2b copies of invoices, correspondence and such other verifiable evidence of delay costs actually and
27 necessarily incurred by the Contractor as the Owner or Architect may require. This paragraph shail be the
28 Contractor's exclusive remedy for litigation delay costs.
29 9.8 SUBS�A�ITIAL COMPLETION �
30 9.8.1 Substantial Completion is the stage in the progress of the Work when the Work or designated portion
31 thereofi is sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy or
32 utilize the Work for its intended purpose, as determined by Owner ar�d Architect. Substantial completion »�
33 shall not be granted until receipt of a satisfactory HVAC balancing report by Owner. No portion of the project
34 will be considered substantially complete until the local building, fire and DSHS authorities have issued �
35 rert'rficates of Occupancies and or other approval for occupancy covering that portion of the Work. All of the
3b Project's parts and systems shall be accessible, operable, and commissioned to be usable by the Owner, �
37 including site Work. The Project shall be clean. Preliminary training of personnel must take place. Only
38 incidental corrective Work under"Punch Lists" and final cleaning (if required) may remain to be done.
39 .1 There may be a separate Date of Substantial Completion specified in the Contract �
40 Documents for completion of one or more receiving areas to be used by the Owner for
41 receiving assembly and delivery of Owner-supplied items. The Work is not Substantially 4
42 Complete if all systems and parts are not usable and commissioned, if utilities are not
43 connected and operating normally, or if the Work is not accessible by normal vehicular and �
44 pedestrian traffic routes. The fact that the Owner may occupy the Work or designated
45 portion thereof does not indicate that the Work is Substantially Complete or is acceptable in
46 whole or in part, nor does such occupation toll or change any liquidated damages due the _
47 Owner.
48 -
49 9.8.2 When the Contractor considers that the Work,or a portion thereof which the Owner agrees to accept
50 separately, is substantially complete,the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Architect a �
51 comprehensive list of items to be completed or corrected. The Contractor shall proceed promptly to
52 complete and correct items on the list. Failure to include an item on such list does not alter the responsibility
53 of the Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Upon receipt of the
54 Contractor's list, the Architect wi41 make an inspection to determine whether the Work or designated portion "
2010-16 /YCS Fueling Station Bid—00 7200 -32 GENERAL CONDITIONS
OF THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION 1-15-13
SUPPORT OPERATION CENTER PFiASE 2
YELM COMMUNITY SCii00LS lVo.2
ERICKSON McGOVERN
1 thereof is substantially complete to assist the Contractor in completing the Work. If the Architect's inspection
2 discloses any item, whether or not included on the Contractor's list, which is not in accordance with the
3 requirements of the Contract Documents,the Contractor shall, before issuance of the Certificate of
4 Substantial Compfetion, complete or correct such item upon notification by the Architect. The Contractor
5 shall then submit a request for another inspection by the Architect to determine Substantial Completion.
6 The cost of this and any additional inspections by the Architect shall be at Contractor's expense in
7 accordance with subparagraph 9.82.1 below. When the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially
8 complete,the Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion which shall establish the date of
9 Substantial Completion,shall establish responsibilities of the Owner and Contractor for security,
10 maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work and insurance, and shall fix the time within which the
11 Contractor shall finish all items on the list accompanying the Certificate. The general Project warranty and all
12 other warranties required by the Contract Documents shall commence on the date of Final Completion and
13 Acceptance by Owner's Board of Directors of the Work or designated portion thereof unless otherwise
14 provided in the Certificate of Substantial Completion. The Certificate of Substantial Completion shall be
15 submitted to the Owner and Contractor for their written acceptance of responsibilities assigned to them in
16 such Certificate.
17 �1 The Architect and Owner will make one Punch List check and perform one back check of the
18 Punch List to determine Final Completion in accordance with Section 9.10. Added
19 inspections or meetings shall be at Contractor's expense at Architect's applicable rates.
20 Such inspection meetings may be required because of:
21 .1 Failure on the part of Contractor to satisfactorily complete all items on Punch List
22 prior to Back Check of the Punch List, or
23 .2 Additional inspections required by defective installations or equipment.
24 9.8.3 Upon Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof and upon application by the
25 Contractor and certification by the Architect, the Owner shall make payment, reflecting adjustment in
26 retainage, if any,for such Work or portion thereof as provided in the Contract Documents.
27 9.8.4 Cnntractor's acceptance of Substantial Completion payment shall constitute a waiver of all
28 claims by the Contractor except those previously made ir� writing and identified in writing by the
29 Contractor as unsettled at the time of the application for payment for the substantial Completion
30 payment, and except for the Contract Sums due at Final Acceptance.
31 9.9 PARTIAL OCCUPANCY OR USE
32 9.9.1 The Owner may occupy or use any completed or partially completed portion of the Work at any
33 stage when such portion is designated by separate agreement with the Contractor, provided such occupancy
34 or use is consented to by the insurer as required under Subparagraph 11.3.3 and authorized by public
35 authorities having jurisdiction over the Work. Such partial occupancy or use may commence whether or not
3b the portion is substantially complete, provided the Owner and Contractor have accepted in writing the
37 responsibilities assigned to each of them for payment, retainage if any, security, maintenance, heat, utilities,
38 damage to the Work and insurance, and have agreed in writing concerning the period for correction of the
39 Work and commencement of warranties required by the Contract Documents. When the Contractor
40 considers a portion substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare and submit a list to the Architect as
41 provided under Subparagraph 9.8.2. Consent of the Contractor to partial occupancy or use shall not be
42 unreasonably withheld. The stage of the progress of the Work shall be determined by written agreement
43 between the Owner and Contractor or, if no agreement is reached, by decision of the Architect.
44 9.9.2 Immediately prior to such partial occupancy or use, the Owner, Contractor and Architect shall jointly
45 inspect the area to be occupied or portion of the Work to be used in order to determine and record the
4b condition of the 4Vork.
47 9.9.3 Use by Owner of any finished part of the Work, which has specifically been identified in the Contract
48 Documents, or which Owner, Architect and Contractor agree constitutes a separately functioning process,
49 facility or portion of the Work that can be used by Owner without significant interference with Contractor's
50 performance of the remainder of the Work, may be accomplished prior to Substantial Completion of all the
51 Work subject to the following:
2010-16 /YCS Fueling Station Bid—00 7200 -33 GENERAL CONDITIONS
OF THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION 1-15-13
SUPPOR7 C)PERATION CENTER PIiASE 2
YELIVI COMMUNITY SCHOOLS No.2
ERICKSON IMcGOVER�t
1 Owner at any time may request Contractor in writing to permit Owner to use any such part of the
2 �lVork which Owner believes to be ready for its intended use and substantially complete. If
3 Contractor agrees, Contractor will certify to Owner and Architect that said part of the Work is
4 substantially complete and request Architect to issue a Certificate of Substantial Completion for that
5 part of the Work. Contractor at any time may notify Owner and Archi#ect in writing that Contractor
6 considers any such part of the Work ready for its intended use and substantiaHy complete and
7 request Architect to issue a Certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work. Within a
8 reasonable time after either such request, Owner, Contractor and Architect shall make an inspection
9 of that part of the Work to determine its status of completion. If Architect does not consider that part
10 of the Work to be substantially complete, Architect will notify Owner and Contractor in writing giving
11 the reasons therefore. If Architect considers that part of the Work to be substantially complete, the
12 provisions of subparagraphs 9.8.1 and 9.8.2 wi11 apply with respect to cert'rfication of Substantial w
13 Completion of that part of the Work and the division of responsibility in respect thereof and access
14 thereta
15 9.9.4 Unless otherwise agreed, Owner's partial occupancy or use of a portion or portions of the Work shall .
1b not constitute acceptance of Work not complying with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
17 9.14 FI�lAL CC7ililP�ETIOIV AND FINAL PAYMEi�T
18 910.i Upon receipt of written notice that the Work is ready for final inspection and acceptance and upon °
19 receipt of a final Application for Payment, the Architect and Owner will promptly make such tests and
20 inspection and, when the Architect and Owner find the Work acceptable under the Contract Documents and
21 the Contract fulty performed,the Architect will promptly issue a final Certificate for Payment stating that to the ,
22 best of the Architect's knowledge, information and belief, and on the basis of the Architect's observations and
23 inspections, the Work has been completed in accordance with terms and conditions of the Contract
24 Documents and that the balance found to be due the Contractor and noted in said final Certificate is due and
25 payable. The Architect's final Certificate for Payment will constitute a further representation that conditions �
26 listed in Subparagraph 9.10.2 as precedent to the Contractor's being entitled to final payment have been
27 fulfilled. �
28 9,'1a.2 Final Acceptance will not be granted until Owner has received and accepted Record Documents, °�
29 Operations and Maintenance Manuals, staff training on all operable equipment, final certificates of
30 occupancy from local jurisdictions and all required certificates or other evidence of warranties. Final "
31 Completion must be achieved within thirty (30) days of the scheduled Substantial Completion date as
32 described in Paragraph 9.8. �
33 9.'�0.3 Neither final payment nor any remaining retained percentage shall become due until the Contractor
34 submits to the Architect (1) an affidavit that payrolls, bills for materials and equipment, and other
35 indebtedness connected with the Work for which the Owner or the Owner's property might be responsible or �-
36 encumbered (less amounts withheld by Owner) have been paid or otherwise satisfied, (2) a certificate
37 evidencing that insurance required by the Contract Documents to remain in force after final payment is �
38 currently in effect and will not be canceled or allowed to expire until at least thirty(30)days' prior written
39 notice has been given to the Owner, (3) a written statement that the Contractor knows of no reason that the '�
40 insurance will not be renewable to cover the period required by the Contract Documents, (4) consent of
41 surety to final payment, (5) other data establishing payment or satisfaction of obligations, such as receipts,
42 releases and waivers of liens, claims,security interests or encumbrances arising out of the Contract,to the
43 extent and in such form as may be designated by the Owner or as may be required by applicable laws and
44 regulations, and (6) all claims by the Contractor have been waived or resolved. Such forms and filings shall t
45 include:
46 ,1 Certificates approved by the Washington State Department of Labor and Industries, "�
�7 Washington State Employment Security Department, and all other departments and
48 agencies having jurisdiction over the activities of the Contractor have been provided to the
49 Owner;
SQ .� A release obtained from the Washington State Department of Revenue that state taxes have
51 been paid; and
52 .3 "Affidavits of Wages Paid" for the Contractor and each Subcontractor approved by the
53 Industrial Statistician of the Washington State Department of Labor and Industries have �
54 been provided to the Owner.
2010-16 /YCS Fueling Statio� Bid—00 7200 -34 GENERAL CONDITIONS
OF THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION 1-15-13
SUPPORT OPERATION CENTER PHASE 2
YELIV! COMMUNITY SCHOOLS No.2
ERICKSON McGOVERfd
1 if such taxes have not been discharged or the claims, expenses, and fees have not been paid, the Owner
2 shall either retain in its funds, or in an interest bearing account, or retain in escrow, at the option of the
3 Contractor, an amount equal to such unpaid taxes and unpaid claims together with a sum sufficient to defray
4 the costs and attorney fees incurred in foreclosing the lien of such claims, and shall pay, or refease from
5 escrow,the remainder to the Contractor.
5 9.10.4 If a Subcontractor refuses to furnish a release or waiver required by the Owner, the Contractor may
7 furnish a bond satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify the Owner against such Jien. If such lien remains
8 unsatisfied after payments are made,the Contractor shall refund to the Owner all money that the Owner may
9 be compelled to pay in discharging such lien, including all costs and attorneys' fees. Lien notices shall be
10 delivered to:
11 Superintendent
12 Yelm Community Schools No. 2
13 107 1St North
14 Yelm,WA 98597-0476
15 9.10.5 The making of final payment shall not constitute a waiver of any claims by the Owner, including, but
16 not limited to, those arising from:
17 .1 Unsettled liens;
18 .2 Faulty or defective Work appearing after Substantial completion;
19 .3 Failure of the Work to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents; or
20 ,4 Terms of any warranties or guarantees required by the Contract Documents or supplemental
21 agreements between the Owner and Contractor.
22 9.1C�.6 If, after Substantial Completion of the Work, final completion thereof is materially delayed through
23 no fault of the Contractor or by issuance of Change Orders affecting final completion, and the Architect so
24 confirms, the Owner shall, upon application by the Contractor and certification by the Architect, and without
25 terminating the Contract, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and
26 accepted. If the remaining balance for Work not fully completed or corrected is less than retainage stipulated
27 in the Contract Documents, and if bonds have been furnished, the written consent of surety to payment of
28 the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by the
29 Contractor to the Architect prior to certification of such payment. Such payment shall be made under terms
30 and conditions governing final payment, except that it shall not constitute a waiver of claims.
31 9.10.7 Acceptance of final payment by the Contractor, a Subcontractor ar material supplier shall
32 constitute a waiver of claims by tha# payee except those previously made in writing and identified in
33 writing by that payee as unsettled at tlae time of final Appiication for Payment. Such waivers shall be
34 in addi�ion#o any waive�s of Claims resulting from the operation of Paragraphs 4.3,4.4,4.5 and 9.8.4.
35 �.193.8 The Owner reserves the right pursuant to Chapter 60.28 RCW to withhold from any retainage funds
36 remaining after the clearance of claims for liens and taxes an amount necessary to satisfy claims by the
37 Owner against the Contractor, and the remainder of the retainage shall be released to the Contractor.
38 ARTICLE 10
39 �R�'TECTl1�N OF PERSONS AND PROi�ERTY
40
41 1Q.1 SA�ETY PRECAlJT10N3 AfVD PROGRAMS
42 10.1.1 The Contractor shall be solely and completely responsible for conditions of the work site, including
43 safety of all persons and property, during performance of the Work. The Contractor shall maintain the Work
44 site and perform the Work in a manner which meets statutory and common law for the provision of a safe
45 place to work. This requirement shall apply continuously and not be limited to normal working hours. That
46 the Architect or Owner conducts construction review of the Contractor's pertormance does not and shall not
47 be intended to include review of the adequacy of the Contractor's safety measures in, on or near the site of
48 the Work. The Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety
49 precautions and programs in connection with the performance of the Contract.
50 10.2 SA�ETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY
2010-16 /YCS Fueling Station Bid—00 7200 -35 GENERAL CONDITIONS
OFTHE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION 1-15-13
SUP�ORT OPEFtATION CENTER P'HASE 2
YELM COMMUNI'TY SCHOOLS No.2
ERICKSON McGOVERN
1 �l0.2.1 The Contractor shall take reasonable precautions for the safety of, and shali provide reasonable
2 protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to:
3 .1 Employees on the Work and other persons who may be affected thereby;
4 .2 The Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or
5 off the site, under care, custody or control of the Contractor or the Contractor's -
& Subcontractors or Sub-subcontractors; and
7 .3 Other property at the site or adjacent thereto, such as trees, shrubs, lawns, walks,
8 pavements, roadways, structures and utilities not designated for removal, relocation or
9 replacement in the course ofi construction.
10 1CD.2.2 The Contractor shall give all notices and comply with all applicable laws, ordinances, rules,
11 regulations and lawful orders of public authorities bearing on safety of persons or property or their protection
12 from damage, injury or loss.
13 The Contractor shall comply with the safety regulations set forth in "Safety Standards for Construction" and
14 "General Safety Standards" and any other requirements published by the Washington State Department of
15 Labor and Industries.
16 The Contractor shall comply with the Federal Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (OSHA), including
17 all revisions, amendments and regulations issued thereunder, and the provisions of the Washington
18 Industrial Safety Act of 1973 (WISHA), including all revisions, amendments and regulations issued `"
19 thereunder by the Washington State Department of Labor and Industries. The WISHA regulations shall
20 apply to all excavation, trenching and ditching operations. In case of conflict between any such
21 requirements, the more stringent regulation or requirement shall apply.
22 idD.2.3 The Contractor shall erect and maintain, as required by existing conditions and performance of the
23 Contract, reasonable safeguards for safety precaution, including posting danger signs and other warnings
24 against hazards, promulgating safety regulations and notifying owners and users and adjacent sites and
25 utilities. The Contractor shall maintain at the work site office or other well-known place at the work site all �
2b materials (e.g., a first aid kit) necessary for giving first aid to the injured, and shall establish, publish and
27 make known to all employees procedures for ensuring immediate removal to a hospital or a doctor's care,
28 persons, including employees, who may have been injured on the site. Employees shall not be permitted to
29 work on the site before the Contrac#or has established and made known procedures for removal of injured
30 persons to a hospital or a doctor's care. The Contractar's and/or any Subcontractors shall ensure that at
31 least one of such employees has a valid, effective first aid card.
32 1{9.2.4 When use or storage of explosives or other hazardous materials or equipment or unusual methods '
33 are necessary for execution of the Work, the Contractor shall exercise utmost care and carry on such
34 activities under supervision of properly qualified personnel.
35 10,2.5 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage and loss to properry referred to in
3b Subparagraphs 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.1.3 caused in whole or in part by the Contractor, Subcontractor, a Sub-
37 subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts they
38 may be liable and for which the Contractor is responsible under Subparagraph 10.2.1, except damage or �
39 loss attributable to acts or omissions of the Owner or Architect or anyone directly or indirectly employed by
40 either of them, or by anyone for whose acts either of them may be liable, and not attributable to the fault of �
41 negligence of the Contractor. The foregoing obligations of the Contractor are in addition to the Contractor's
42 obligations under Paragraph 3.19. "
43 10.2.6 The Contractor shall designate a responsible member of the Contractor's organization at the site
44 whose duty shall be the prevention of accidents. This person shall be the Contractor's superintendent unless
45 otherwise designated by the Contractor in writing to the Owner and Architect.
46 10.2.7 At all times until the Owner's occupancy of the Work or a designated portion of the Work, the
47 Contractor shall protect from damage, weather, deterioration, theft, vandalism and malicious mischief all
48 materials, equipment, tools, and other items incorporated or to be incorporated in the Work or designated �
49 portion, or consumed or used in the performance of the Work or designated portion, and all Work in process
50 and completed Work or designated portion.
51 10.2,8 The Contractor shall not load or permit any part of the construction or site to be loaded so as to x
52 endanger its safety.
2010-16 /YCS Fueling Station Bid—00 7200 -36 GENERAL CONDITIONS
OF THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION 1-15-13
SUF'PORT OPERATION CENTEA PHASE 2
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS No.2
ERICKSON McGOVERId
1 1�.3 HAZARD4US MATERlALS
2 10.3.1 If reasonable precautions will be inadequate to prevent foreseeable bodily injury or death to persons
3 resulting from a material or substance, including but not limited to asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl
4 (PCB), encountered on the site by the Contractor, the Contractor shall, upon recognizing the condition,
5 immediately stop Work in the affected area and report the condition to the Owner and Architect in writing.
6 1�.3�2 The Owner shall obtain the services of a licensed or accredited laboratory to verify the presence or
7 absence of the material or substance reported by the Contractor and, in the event such material or
8 substance is found to be present,to verify that it has been rendered harmless. Unless otherwise required by
9 the Contract Documents, the Owner shall furnish in writing to the Contractor and Architect the names and
10 qualifications of persons or entities who are to perform tests verifying the presence or absence of such
11 material or substance or who are to perform the task of removal or safe containment of such material or
12 substance. The Contractor and the Architect will promptly reply to the Owner in writing stating whether or not
13 either has reasonable objection to the persons or entities proposed by the Owner. If either the Contractor or
14 Architect has a reasonable objection to a person or entity proposed by the Owner, the Owner shall propose
15 another to whom the Contractor and the Architect have no reasonable objection. When the material or
16 substance has been rendered harmless, Work in the affected area shall resume upon written agreement of
17 the Owner and Contractor. The Contract Time may be extended appropriately and the Contract Sum may be
18 increased in the amount of the Contractor's demonstrated, reasonable additional costs of shut-down, delay
19 and start-up, which adjustment shall be accomplished as provided in Article 7.
20 'i0.3.3 The Contractor shall not install in the Work any hazardous material. The Owner shall not be
21 responsible under Paragraph 10.3 for materials or substances brought to the site by the Contractor unless
22 such materials or substances were required by the Contract Documents.
23 1U.4 PUB�.I� SAFETY AND�CONVEN�ENC�
24 10.4.1 The Contractor shall conduct its Work so as to ensure the least possible obstruction ta vehicular
25 traffic and inconvenience to the general public and the residents in the vicinity of the Work and to ensure the
2b protection of persons, properly and natural resources. No road or street shall be closed to the public except
27 with the permission of the Owner and the proper governmental authority. Fire hydrants on or adjacent to the
28 Work shall be accessible to firefighting equipment at all times. Temporary provisions shall be made by the
29 Contractor to ensure the use of sidewalks, fire lanes, private and public driveways and proper functioning of
30 gutters, sewer inlets, drainage ditches and culverts, irrigation ditches and natural water courses, if any, on
31 the Work site.
32 10.5 SANAT�'►TiON
33 iCl.5.1 The Contractor shall comply with WAC 296-155-140 and other applicable laws and regulations
34 establishing sanitation standards in the construction industry.
35 10.5 EMERGENCIES
3b 10.6.1 In an emergency affecting safety of persons or property, the Contractor shall act, at the Contractor's
37 discretion, to prevent threatened damage, injury or loss. Additional compensation or extension of the time
38 claimed by the Contractor on account of an emergency beyond the control of the Contractor shall be
39 determined as provided in Paragraph 4.3 and Article 7.
40 ARTlCLE 11
41 i�SURANCE AND BONDS
42
43 11.1 CONTRACTOR'S LI14BILi7Y iNSURANCE
44 11.1.1 The Contractor shall purchase and maintain in a company or companies licensed to do business in
45 the state which the project is located, with an A.M. Best rating of A/IX or better and reasonably satisfactory to
�6 Owner, such insurance as will protect Contractor and Owner from claims set forth below which may arise out
47 of or result from the Contractor's operations under the Contract, whether such operations be by itself or by
48 any Subcontractor or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts
49 any of them may be liable. All reinsurers that may be called upon to support or share in an insurer's
2010-16 /YCS Fueting Station Bid—00 7200 - 37 GENERAL CONDITIONS
OF THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION 1-15-13
SUPi�ORT OPERATION CENTE�3 I�HASE 2
YE�,M COMMUNITY SGHOOLS No.2
�RICKSON McGOVERf�
1 obiigations specified in connection with insurance required of the Contractor by the Contract Documents
2 must also have an A.M. Best rating of A/IX or better."
3 .1 Claims under workers' or workmen's compensation, disability benefit and other similar
4 employee benefit acts which is applicable to Work to be performed;
5 .2 Claims for damages, because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of
6 the Contractor's employees;
7 .3 Claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person
8 other than the Contractor's employees;
9 .4 Claims for damages insured by usual personal injury liability coverage which are sustained
10 (1) by a person as a result of an act or omission directly or indirectly related to employment
11 of such person by the Contractor, or (2) by another person;
12 .5 Claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of �
13 tangible property, including loss of use resulting there from;
14 .S Claims for damages because of bodily injury, death of a person or property damage arising
15 out of ownership, maintenance or use of a motor vehicle;
16 .7 Claims involving contractual liability insurance applicable to the Contractor's obligations
17 under Paragraph 3.19;
18 .8 Liability insurance shall include all major divisions of coverage and be on a comprehensive
19 basis including:
20 1. Premises operations {including X, C &U as applicable);
21 2, Independent Contractor's protective;
22 3. Products and completed operations;
23 4. Personal injury liabitity with employment exclusion deleted; T
24 5. Contractual, including specific provision for Contractor's obligation under Paragraph
25 3.18;
26 6. Owned, non-owned and hired motor vehicles; ,
27 7. Broad form property damage including completed operations; and
28 8. Umbrella excess liabiJity.
29 1'i.1.2 The insurance required by Subparagraph 11.1.1 shall be written for not less than limits of liability
30 specified below or required by law, whichever coverage is greater. Coverages, whether written on an
31 occurrence or claims-made basis, shall be maintained without interruption from date of commencement of
32 the Work until date of final payment and termination of any coverage required to be maintained after final
33 payment.
34 1. Workers Compensation:
35 (A) State: Statutory
36 (B) Applicable Federal (e.g., Longshoremens): Statutory
37 (C) Employers Liability: $1,000,000.00 �
38 2. Corriprehensive General Liability (Including Premises Independent Contractor's Protective; ,
39 Products and Completed Operations; Broad Form Property Damage):
40 (A) Bodily Injury: ��
�1 $1,000,000.00. Each occurrence
�2 $1,000,000.00. Annual aggregate
43 (B) Property Damage:
44 $1,000,000.00. Each occurrence
45 $1,000,000.00. Annual aggregate
4b (C) Products and completed operations to be maintained for three years after final
47 payment. _
48 (D) Property Damage Liability Insurance shafl provide X, C or U coverage as applicable.
49 3. Contractual Liability:
50 (A) Bodily lnjury:
51 $1,000,000.00. Each occurrence
52 (B) Property Damage:
53 $1,000,000.00. Each occurrence
54 $1,000,000.00. Annual occurrence
55 4. Personal Injury, with employment exclusive deleted: $1,000,000. Annual aggregate
2010-16 /YCS Fueling Station Bid—00 7200 -38 GENERAL CONDITIONS
OF THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION t-15-13
SUPPOHT OPERATIOiV CENTER PHASE 2
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS No.2
ERICKSON McGOVERid
1 5. Comprehensive Automobile Liability:
2 �q) Bodily Injury:
3 $1,000,000.00. Each person
4 $1,000,000.00. Each occurrence
5 6. Umbrella Excess Liability:
( $2,000,000. Over primary insurance.
'7 $50,000. Retention for selt-insured hazards each occurrence.
8 11.`i.3 Certificates of Insurance and Endorsements acceptable to the Owner shall be filed with the Owner
9 prior to commencement of the Work. These Certificates and the insurance policies required by this
10 Paragraph 11.1 shall contain a provision that coverages afforded under the policies will not be reduced,
11 canceled or allowed to expire until at least thirry (30) days' prior written notice has been given to the Owner.
12 The Owner shall be included as an additional insured on all such policies. If any of the foregoing insurance
13 coverages are required to remain in force after final payment and are reasonably available, an additional
14 certificate evidencing continuation of such coverage shall be submitted with the final Application for Payment
15 as required by Subparagraph 9.10.3. Information concerning reduction of coverage shall be furnished by the
16 Contractor with reasonable promptness in accordance with the Contractor's information and belief.
17 11.1.4 The Contractor shall furnish one copy each of the certificates of insurance herein required for each
18 copy of the agreement which shafl specifically set forth evidence of all coverage required by subparagraphs
19 11.1.1, 11.1.2 and 11.1.3. The Contractor shall furnish to the Owner copies of any endorsements that are
20 subsequently issued.
21 1`I.2 OM,INER'S L.IABIL�TY INSURANC�
22 11.2.1 The Owner shall be responsible for purchasing and maintaining the Owner's usual liability
23 insurance. Optionally, the Owner may purchase and maintain other insurance for self-protection against
24 claims which may arise from operations under the Contract. The Contractor shall not be responsible for
25 purchasing and maintaining this optional Owner's liability insurance unless specifically required by the
26 Contract Documents.
27 11.3 PR4PERTY I�NSiJRANCE
28 11.3.1 Before commencement of the work, the Contractor will submit written evidence (via certificate of
29 insurance) that it has purchased (at Contractor's expense) for the period of this Contract, Builder's Risk"All-
30 Risk" Completed Value Insurance Coverage, in the face amount of this Contract including taxes, (including
31 coverage for fire, Collapse, and Damage resulting from Faulty Workmanship, Material, or Design; but not
32 including Flood, Earthquake or Landslide unless specified for a given project) upon the entire work which is
33 the subject of this Contract, including completed work and work in progress but excluding structures in
34 existence at the time the Contract was awarded. Such insurance shall include as Additional Named
35 Insureds: The Owner(s) and each of their officers, agents and employees; and any other persons with an
36 insurable interest designated by the Owner as Additional Named Insureds. Such insurance must be issued
37 by an insurer(s) and reinsurers meeting the qualification requirements of subparagraph 11.1.1. Within 30
38 days of award of the Contract, the Contractor shall also provide the Owner with a copy of the insurance
39 contract required by this Subsection.
40 Such insurance may have a deductible clause but not to exceed $10,000.00. (The deductible on
41 earthquake, flood and landslide may be in accordance with the Underwriters' requirements.) The Contractor
42 shall be soiely responsible for any such deductibles.
43 11.3.2 Upon the occurrence of an insured loss, the Owner, as first named insured, shall have the right to
44 adjust and settle any loss with the insurers. The Owner shall deposit in a separate account any monies
45 received, and shall distribute such funds in accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest may
�b reach. If no agreement is reached, any damaged Work shall first be repaired or replaced, and payment
47 therefore made from the separate account by Change Order or by payment to a separate contractor, at
48 Owner's option; further disbursements from the separate account will then be determined pursuant to the
�9 provisions of subparagraphs 4.4 and 4.5 above.
50
2010-16 I YGS Fueling Station Bid—00 7200 -39 GENERAL CONDITIONS
OF THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION 1-15-13
SUPPORT OPERATlON CENTER PHASE 2
YELIN �OMMUNITY 5CHOOLS No.2
ERICKSON McGOVERI�
1 11.3.3 Partial occupancy or use in accordance with Paragraph 9.9 shall not commence until the insurance
2 company or companies providing property insurance have consented to such partial occupancy or use by
3 endorsement or otherwise. The Owner and the Contractor shall take reasonable steps to obtain consent of
4 the insurance company or companies and shall, without mutual written consent, take no action with respect
5 to partial occupancy or use that would cause cancellation, lapse or reduction of insurance.
6 1`I.4 P�fiFCDRMAIVCE AN[D PAYMENT BOND
7 �11.4.1 The Contractor shall secure and pay for a Pertormance and Payment Bond(s) in the full amount of
8 the Contract Sum plus sales tax, pursuant to Chapter 39.08 RCW. Said bond shall meet all requirements of
9 Chapter 39.08 RCW and shall also be issued by a surety with an A.M. Best rating of A/IX or better. All
10 reinsurers that may be called upon to support or share in a surety's obligations specified in connection with
11 the pertormance and payment bond obligations required of the Contractor by the Contract Documents must
12 also have an A.M. Best rating of A/IX or better. Within 10 days after the issuance of the Conditional Notice to
13 Proceed, the Contractor shall deliver two copies of the Bond to the Owner and one copy to the Architect.
14 THE OWNER MAY DECLINE TO ENTER INTO THE CONTRACT, WiTHHOLD ITS "NOTICE TO
15 PROCEED,° AND/OR WITHHOLD PAYMENT TO TNE CONTRACTOR UNTIL SUCH SURETY BOND IS
16 RECEIVED. If the contract is executed,the Contract Time shall be reduced by one day for each day after 10
17 days that said bond is not received by the Owner, and there shall be no adjustment to the substantial
18 completion date.
19 11.�.2 The Owner may require certain subcontractors to provide evidence of performance bondability in
20 writing to the Owner and it may also require certain subcontractors to provide and maintain at the Owner's
21 expense during the life of the Contract, a performance bond equal to the total amount of such subcontract,
22 excluding sales tax. Any bond(s) so required by the Owner shall be issued by a surety licensed to do
23 business in this state with an A.M. Best rating of AN or better.
24 AR7'ICLE 12
25 �l�C+I�VERINIG AND CORRECTION OF WORK
26
27 12.1 UNC4VERi1VG O�F WORK x
28 12.1.1 If a portion of the Work is covered contrary to the ArchitecYs, Owner's or governmental authority
29 with jurisdiction request or to requirements specifically expressed in the Contract Documents, it must, if
30 required in writing by the Architect, Owner, or governmental authority with jurisdiction, be uncovered at „
31 Contractor's expense for the Architect's observation and be replaced at the Contractor's expense without
32 change in the Contract Time.
33 12.1.2 If a portion of the Work has been covered which the Architect has not specifically requested to A
34 observe prior to its being covered, the Architect may request to see such Work and it shall be uncovered by
35 the Contractor. If such Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents, and Contractor has notified �
36 Owner in writing of ArchitecYs request and Contractor has signed a sworn statement that the Work is in
37 compliance with the Contract Documents and submits evidence of reasonable care, quality control and �
38 inspection completed by Contractor to determine such, costs of uncovering and replacement shall, by
39 appropriate Change Order, be charged to the Owner. If such Work is not in accordance with the Contract "
40 Documents,the Contractor shall pay such costs, except to the extent the condition was caused by the Owner
41 or a separate contractor of Owner, in which event the Owner shall be responsible for purposes of this `
42 Contract only for payment of such costs to the extent of its proportionate responsibility.
43 12.2 WA�FiANT�ES AND Ct�RRECTION OF WORIC
44 12.2.1 'fhe Contractor shall promptly correct Work rejected by the Architect or Owner failing to conform to
45 the requirements of the Contract Documents, whether observed before or after Substantial Completion and
46 whether or not fabricated, installed or completed. The Contractor shall bear costs of correcting such rejected
47 Work, including additional testing and inspections and compensation for the Architect's services and
48 expenses made necessary thereby.
49
2010-16 /YCS Fueling Station Bfd—�� 72�� - 4� GENERAL CONDITIONS
OFTHE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION 1-15-13
SUPPORT OPERATION CENTER PHASE 2
YEL.M COMMUNiTY SCHOOLS No.2
ERICKSON McGOVER(d
1 12.2.2 The generai project warranty period of one year from Final Completion and Acceptance by the
2 Owner's Board of Directors shall be extended with respect to portions of Work first performed or corrected
3 after Substantial Completion by the period of time between Substantial Completion and the satisfactory
4 performance or correction of the Work. At the election of the Owner, the extended periods of warranty shall
5 be confirmed by submission by the Contractor of written special warranties. If, within one year after the date
6 of Final Completion and Acceptance of the Work or designated portion thereof, or after the date for
7 commencement of warranties established under Subparagraph 9.8.2, or by terms of an applicable special
8 warranty required by the Contract Qocuments, any of the Work is found to be not in accordance with the
9 requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shatl correct it promptly after receipt of notice from
10 the Owner to do so unless the Owner has previously given the Contractor a written acceptance of such
11 condition. This obligation under this Subparagraph 12.2.2 shall survive acceptance of the Work under the
12 Contract and termination of the Contract. The Owner shall give such notice promptly after discovery of the
13 condition.
14 12.2.3 The Contractor shall remove from the site portions of the Work which are �ot in accordance with the
15 requirements of the Contract Documents and are neither corrected by the Contractor nor accepted by the
16 Owner in writing.
17 12.2.4 If the Contractor fails to correct nonconforming Work within a reasonable time, the Owner may
18 correct it in accordance with Paragraph 2.4. If the Contractor does not proceed with correction of such
19 nonconforming Work within a reasonable time fixed by written notice from the Architect, the Owner may
20 remove it and store the salvable materials or equipment at the Contractor's expense. If the Contractor does
21 not pay costs of such removal and storage within ten (10) days after written notice, the Owner may sell such
22 materials and equipment at auction or at private sale and shall account for the proceeds thereof, after
23 deducting costs and damages that shou(d have been borne by the Contractor, including compensation for
24 the Architect's services, attorneys' senrices, and expenses made necessary thereby. If such proceeds of
25 sale do not cover costs which the Contractor should have borne, the Contract Sum shall be reduced by the
2b deficiency. If payments then or thereafter due the Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amount, the
27 Contractor promptly shall pay the difference to the Owner.
28 12.2.5 The Contractor shall bear the cost of correcting destroyed or damaged construction, whether
29 completed or partially completed, of the Owner or separate contractors caused by the Contractor's correction
30 or removal of Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of Contract Documents.
31 12.2.6 Nothing contained in this Paragraph 12.2 shall be construed to establish a period of limitation with
32 respect to other obligations which the Contractor might have under the Contract Documents. Establishment
33 of the time period of one year as described in Subparagraph 1222 relates only to the specific obligation of
34 the Contractor to correct the Work, and has no relationship to the time within which the obligation to comply
35 with the Contract Documents may be sought to be enforced, nor to the time within which proceedings may
3b be commenced to establish the Contractor's liability with respect to the Contractor's obligations other than
37 specifically to correct the Work. Correction of Work may be performed by Owner's selected contractors at
38 Contractor's expense.
39 i2.3 A�CCEPTANCE OF �IONCUNFORMI�IC;WORK
40 12.3.1 If the Owner prefers to accept Work which is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract
41 Documents,the Owner may do so instead of requiring its removal and correction, in which case the Contract
42 Sum will be reduced as appropriate and equitable. Such adjustment shall be effected whether or not final
43 payment has been made.
44 ARTICLE 13
45 i�IISCE�.LANEOUS PROVISIONS
46
47 13.1 �OVEAiVING LA'VIJ
48 13.i,�1 The Contract shall be governed by the law of the place where the Project is located. The venue of
49 any litigation under the Contract shall be in Pierce County,Washington.
50 13.2 SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS
2010-16 /YCS Fueling Station Bid—00 7200-41 GENERAL CONDITIONS
OF THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION t-15-13
SIJPPORT OPERATION CENTER PHASE 2 °
YE�M COMMUNITY SCHOOLS No.2
ERICKSON McGOVERN }
1 13.2.1 The Owner and Contractor respectively bind themseives, their partners, successors, assigns and ,
2 legal representatives to the other party hereto and to partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives
3 of such other parry in respect to covenants, agreements and obligations contained in the Contract
4 Documents. Except to the extent specifically provided elsewhere in the Contract Documents, neither party to
5 the Contract shall assign the Contract in whole or in part without written consent of the other. If either party
6 attempts to make such an assignment without such consent, that parry shall nevertheless remain legally
7 responsible for ali obligations under the Contract.
8 3.3 VI/RITTEN NOTICE
9 i3.3.1 Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual or a
10 member of the firm or entity or to an officer of the corporation for which it was intended, actual receipt by
11 #acsimile or if delivered at or sent by registered or certified mail to the last business address of a party. The ��-
12 addresses and facsimile contact numbers for Owner, Architect and Contractor are listed in the Project
13 Manual.
14 13.4 RIGH7�AND RENiEDIES
15 13.4.� Except as limited herein or specially provided for herein,the parties shall have such other duties,
16 obligations, rights, and remedies otherwise imposed or made available by the law of the State of
17 Washington.
18 13.4;� The failure of any party to insist in any one or more instances upon the strict performance of any
19 one or more of the provisions of this Contract, or to exercise any right herein contained or provided by law,
20 shall not be construed as a waiver or relinquishment of the performance of such provisions or rights or of the
21 right to subsequently demand such strict performance or exercise of such rights.
22 13.4.3 If any clause, sentence, or provision of this Contract is held as a matter of law to be void or
23 unenforceable,the remainder of the Contract shall be enforceable without such clause,sentence, or
24 provision.
25 13.5 TESTS AND INSPECTIO�VS
26 13.5.1 Tests, inspections and approvals of portions of the Work required by the Contract Documents or by
27 laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, orders of public authorities having jurisdiction shall be made at an
28 appropriate time. The Contractor shall make timely arrangements for such tests, inspections and approvals
29 with an independent testing laboratory or entity provided by the Owner, or with the appropriate public _
30 authority and the Owner, and shall bear all related costs of tests, inspections and approvals except as noted
31 otherwise in the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall give the Architect timely notice of when and
32 where tests and inspections are to be made so the Architect may observe such procedures. The Owner
33 shall bear costs of tests, inspections or approvals which have become requirements after bids were received. rY
34 13.�.2 if the Architect, Owner or public authorities having jurisdiction determine that portions of the Work
35 require additional testing, inspection or approval not included under Subparagraph 13.5.1, the Architect will,
3b upon consent of the Owner, instruct the Contractor to make arrangements for such additional testing, �
37 inspection or approval by any entity acceptable to the Owner, and the Contractor shall give timely notice to
38 the Architect of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so the Architect may observe such "
39 procedures. The Owner shall bear such costs except as provided in Subparagraph 13.5.3.
40 13.5.3 If such procedures for testing, inspection or approval under Subparagraphs 13.5.1 and 13.5.2 reveal
41 failure of the portions of the Work to comply with requirements established by the Contract Documents, the -
42 Contractor shall bear all costs made necessary by such failure including those of repeated procedures and
43 compensation for the Architect's services and expenses. If the Owner is responsible under the Contract
44 Documents, law or regulation to pay only for an inspection of any inspector, consultant or Architect, the
45 Owner shall be required to pay only for the first actual inspection. If the Contractor arranges for an
46 inspection and the inspector is required to wait, to leave without inspecting,to perform a partial inspection, to
47 return to complete or reinspect, or otherwise to expend time other than for the primary inspection, the
48 Contractor shall be responsible for all such costs. If the Contractor does not pay the charges for which it is
49 responsible within 30 days of billing, the Owner may pay the charges directly and backcharge the Contractor
50 on the next progress payment the amount paid plus a 10% handling fee. •
2010-16 /YCS Fueling Station Bid—00 7200 -42 GENERAL CONDITIONS
OF THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION 1-15-13 `
i
SUPPORT OPERATION CENTER PHASE 2
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS No.2
ERICKSON iNcGOVERN
1 13,5.4 Required certificates of testing, inspection or approval shall, unless otherwise required by the
2 Contract Documents, be secured by the Contractor and promptly delivered to the Architect.
3 13.5.5 If the Architect is to observe tests, inspections or approvals required by the Contract Documents,
4 the Architect will do so promptly and, where practicable, at the normal place of testing.
5 13.5.6 Tests or inspections conducted pursuant to the Contract Documents shall be made promptly to
6 avoid unreasonable delay in the Work.
7 13.5.7 IVo acceptance of any Work shall be construed to result from any inspections, tests or failure to
8 inspect or test by the Owner, the Owner's representatives, the Architect or any other person. No inspection,
9 test, failure to inspect or test, or failure to discover any defect or nonconformity by the Owner, the Owner's
10 representatives,the Architect or any other person shall relieve the Contractor of its responsibility for meeting
11 the requirements of the Contract Documents or impair the Owner's right to reject defective or nonconforming
12 items or right to avail itself of any other remedy to which the Owner may be entitled, notwithstanding the
13 Owner's knowledge of the defect or nonconformity, its substantiality or the ease of its discovery.
14 13.6 I�ITERESI'
15 1�.6.1 Payments due and unpaid under the Contract Documents shall bear interest from the date payment
16 is due at the rate provided under RCW 39.76.010.
17 13.7 PARTNERING
18 The Owner, Contractor and Architect may participate together in cooperative procedures mutually developed
19 by the parties to avoid or minimize problems on the Project.
20 ARTICLE 14
21 TERMlNATION OR SUSPENSIO�I OF 7HE Ct?NTRACT
22
23 1�.1 TERMIPIATION BY T�iE C�NTRACTOR
24 14,�.1 The Contractor shail have the right to terminate the Contract only under the circumstances and with
25 the rights and remedies provided in RCW 60.28.080.
26 i�1.2 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOFi CAUSE
27 '�4.2.1 The Owner may, upon seven (7) days' written notice to the Contractor, terminate (without prejudice
28 to any right or remedy of the Owner) the whole or any portion of the Contract or Work for cause, including,
29 but not limited to,the following circumstances:
30 .1 The Contractor fails to prosecute the Work or any portion thereof with sufficient diligence to
31 ensure the Substantial Completion of the Work within the Contract Time;
32 2 The Contractor is adjudged bankrupt, makes a general assignment for the benefit of its
33 creditors, or if a receiver is appointed on account of its insolvency;
34 .3 The Contractor fails to supply a sufficient number of properly skilled workers or proper
35 materials;
36 .4 The Contractor fails to make prompt payment due to Subcontractors or for materials or labor;
37 .5 The Contractor disregards or violates laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or orders of any
38 public authority having jurisdiction; or
39 .6 The Contractor breaches any material provision of the Contract Documents.
4Q 14.2.2 When any of the above reasons exist, or when any other legally sufficient cause exists, the Owner,
41 upon certification by the Architect that sufficient cause exists to justify such action, may without prejudice to
42 any other rights or remedies of the Owner and after giving the Contractor and the Contractor's surety, if any,
43 seven days' written notice, terminate employment of the Contractor and may, subject to any prior rights of
44 the surety:
45 .� Take possession of the site and of all materials, equipment, tools and construction
46 equipment and machinery thereon owned by the Contractor;
47 .2 Accept assignment of subcontracts pursuant to Paragraph 5.4; and
48 .3 Finish the Work by whatever reasonable method the Owner may deem expedient.
2010-16 /YCS Fueling Station Bid—00 7200 -43 GENERAL CONDITIONS
OF THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION 1-15-13
SiJPP'�R'f OPERATION CENTER �HASE 2
YEL.iW COMMUNITY SCHOOLS No.2
EF3ICKSON McGOVERN �`
1 14.2.3 When the Owner terminates the Contract for cause pursuant to subparagraph 14.2.1, the Contractor
2 shall not be entitled to receive further payment until the Work is finished.
3 14,2.4 If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds costs of finishing the Work, including
� compensation fior the Architect's services, attorneys' fees, and expenses made necessary thereby, and other
S damages incurred by the Owner and not expressly waived, such excess shall be paid to the Contractor. If
6 such costs and damages exceed the unpaid balance, the Contractor shall promptly pay the difference to the
7 Owner. The amount to be paid to the Contractor or Owner, as the case may be, shall be certified by the
8 Architect, upon application, and this obligation for payment shall survive termination of the Contract.
9 142.5 If, after Contractor has been terminated pursuant to this paragraph, it is determined that legally
10 sufficient cause does not exist, then such termination shall be considered a termination for convenience
11 pursuant to Paragraph 14.3. -
12 14.2.6 If the Owner terminates in whole or in any part af the Work pursuant to Paragraph 14.2, the Owner
13 may procure, upon such terms and in such manner as it deems appropriate, supplies or services similar to
14 those so terminated, and the Contractor shall be liable to the Owner for any excess costs for such similar �
15 supplies or services. The Contractor shall continue the performance of this Contract to the extent not
16 terminated hereunder.
17 14.3 'fERMI�A7'aCD�I C9R SUSPENSIQN BY i'HE t)WfdER FOR CONVENIENCE �.
18 14.3.1 The Owner may, at any time upon ten (10) days' written notice to the Contractor and Contractor's
19 surety, terminate (without prejudice to any right or remedy of the Owner) or suspend the whole or any portion
20 of the Work for the convenience of the Owner. �
21 14.3.2 If the Owner terminates the Work or any portion thereof for convenience, the Owner shall be liable
22 to Contractor only for those costs reimbursable to Contractor in accordance with subparagraph 14.3.3, plus
23 ten percent of the actual costs recovered under 14.3.3, unless the Contractor wrould have sustained a loss on ��
24 the entire Contract had it been completed, in which case the ten percent markup will not be inc�uded, and an
25 appropriate adjustment will be made to reduce the amount due the Contractor in proportion to the rate of
26 loss.
27 14,3.3 If the Owner terminates the Work or any portion thereof for convenience, the Owner shall pay the
28 Contractor as folfows:
29 .1 An amount consistent with the terms of the Contract Documents for supplies, services, or
30 property accepted by the Owner pursuant to subparagraph 14.4.1.6 (or sold or acquired �
31 pursuant to subparagraph 14.4.1.7)for which the Owner has not paid;
32 .� the amount due under Article 9 of this Agreement for the performance of the Work already
33 performed, exclusive of any costs attributable to supplies or services otherwise paid or to be
�.
34 paid.for under this subparagraph; and
35 .3 the cost of settling and paying claims arising out of the termination of Work under �.
36 subcontracts or orders, pursuant to subparagraph 14.4.1.5, which are properly chargeable to
37 the terminated portion of the Work (exclusive of amounts paid or payable on account of �
38 completed items of equipment delivered or services furnished by subcontractors or vendors
39 prior to the effective date of the Notice of Termination and exclusive of unearned profit). R
4Q 14.3.4 If the Owner suspends all or any portion of the Work in accordance with Subparagraph 2.5.1 for the
41 Owner's convenience, the Contract Sum and/or Time shall be equitably adjusted only to the extent the
42 Contractor can demonstrate actual impact as a result of such suspension.
43 14.3.5 The total sum to be paid to the Contractor under this paragraph 14.3 shall not exceed the Contract
44 Sum as reduced by the amount of payments otherwise made and the price of Work not terminated, and as
45 otherwise permitted by the Contract Documents. The amounts payable to the Contractor shall exclude the
46 fair value of property which is destroyed, lost, stolen, or damaged so as to become undeliverable to the
47 Owner or to a buyer pursuant to subparagraph 14.4.1.7.
48 14.4 CONTRACTOR'S DUTIES ON TERMINATION
49 14.4.1 Unless the Owner directs otherwise, after receipt of a Notice of Termination from the Owner
50 pursuant to paragraphs 14.2 or 14.3,the Contractor shall promptly: '�
2010-16 /YCS Fueling Station Bld—��72�� -44 GENERALCONDITIONS
OF THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION 1-15-13 `
Sl1PPORT OPERATION CENTER PHASE 2
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS No.2
ERICKSON McGOVERN
1 .1 Stop Work under the Contract on the date and as specified in the Notice of Termination;
2 .2 place no further orders or subcontracts for materials, equipment, services or facilities, except
3 as may be necessary for completion of such portion of the Work as is not terminated;
4 ,3 procure cancellation of all orders and subcontracts, upon terms acceptable to the Owner, to
$ the extent that they relate to the performance of Work terminated;
( .4 assign to the Owner all of the right, title and interest of the Contractor under all orders and
'7 subcontracts, in which case the Owner shall have the right, in its discretion, to settle or pay
g any or all claims arising out of the termination of such orders and subcontracts;
9 .� settle all outstanding liabilities and all claims arising out of such termination of orders and
10 subcontracis;
11 .6 transfer title and deliver to the entity or entities designated by the Owner the fabricated or
12 unfabricated parts, Work in process, partially completed supplies and equipment, materials,
13 parts, tools, dies, jigs and other fixtures, completed Work, supplies and other material
14 produced as part of, or acquired in connection with the performance of,the Work terminated,
15 and the completed or partially completed plans, drawings, information and other property
16 related to the Work;
17 ,7 use its best efforts to sell any property of the types referred to in subparagraph 14.4.1.6.
1g The Contractor shail not be required to extend credit to any buyer, and may acquire any
19 such property under the conditions prescribed by and at a price or prices approved by the
20 Owner, and the proceeds of any such transfer or disposition may be applied in reduction of
21 any payments to be made by the Owner to the Contractor;
22 .8 take such action as may be necessary or as directed by the Owner to preserve and protect
23 the 1lUork and property related to this Project in the possession of the Contractor in which the
24 Owner has an interest; and
25 .9 continue performance only to the extent not terminated.
26 14.4.2 The Contractor shall, from the effective Date of Termination until the expiration of three years after
27 final settlement under this Contract, preserve and make available to the Owner, at all reasonable times at the
28 office of the Contractor, and without charge to the Owner, ali books, records, documents, photographs and
29 other evidence bearing on the costs and expenses of the Contractor under this Contract and relating to the
30 terminated or completed Work.
31 14.4.3 In arriving at any amount due the Contractor after termination,the following shall apply:
32 .1 The Contractor shall refund to the Owner any amounts paid by the Owner to the Contractor
33 • in excess of costs reimbursable under paragraph 14.3.
34 .2 The damages and relief from termination by the Owner specifically provided in Article 14
35 shall be the Contractor's sole entitlement in the event of termination.
36 END(?F S�CTICIN
2010-i6 /YCS Fueling Station Bid—00 7200 -45 GENERAL CONDITIONS
OF THE
CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION 1-15•13
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSAN MCGOVERN
1 SEC�'ION 09 1000
2 SUNIMARY
3 f'ART �1 GENERAL
4 �1.0� PROJECT
5 A. Project Name: Yeim High School-Agricultural Dept. Improvements.
6 B. Owner's Name: Owner(Yelm Community Schools).
7 C. Architect's Name:Architect{Erickson McGovern).
8 D. The Work consists of complete construction of the following:
9 1. Tenant improvements to an 1,900 S.F. existing classroom building with the extent as
10 indicated on the drawings. Work includes, but not limited to: replacement of insulation and
11 finishes, new doors, new casework, interior partitions and new mechanical and electrical
12 components.
13 2. Construction of approximately 536 S.F. non-conditioned addifion to an existing barn.
14 E. This Project consists of a single construction phase.
15 F. Special provisions.
16 1. See Section 00 8300- Prevailing Wage Rates:
17 a. For State of Washington requirements regarding prevailing wage rates.
18 '1,02 C�NTRAC7 DESCRIPTION
19 A. Contract Type:A single prime contract based on a Stipulated Price as described in the General
20 Conditions.
21 B. The Standard Form, of the American Institute of Architects, No. A101 entitled "Standard Form of
22 Agreement between Owner and Contractor," 2007 Edition. Is included at part of the project by
23 reference.
24 '1.03 1?EMS TO BE SUPPLIED BY OWNER AlVD INSTALLE� BY THE COfVTRACTOR UNDER�HiS
25 CONTRACT;
26 A. The Owner(Yelm Community Schools)will supply the items identified on the drawings and this
27 Project Manual as "owner provided/contractor install", O.F.C.I.
28 '1.04 WORK �Y OWNER
29 A. The following furnishings will be provided by the Owner(Yelm Community Schools) by a KCDA
30 contract:
31 1. Resilient Athletic Flooring - See Section.
32 2. Entry mat flooring materials.
33 3. Rubber Wall Base and Accessories.
34 B. General Contractor shall schedule and provide ample time for installation of the above Finishes.
35 C. Items noted NIC(Not in Contract)will be supplied and installed by Owner(Yelm Community
36 Schools) before Substantial Completion.
37 '1.05 OWN�R OCCUP�4NCY
38 A. Owner(Yelm Community Schools) intends to occupy the Project upon Substantial Completion.
39 B. Schedule the Work to accommodate Owner(Yelm Community Schools)occupancy.
40 C. Criticalltems:
41 1. Scheduling and Sequencing: See paragraph below Work Scheduling and Sequencing in this
�2 Section for dates critical for start and completion dates.
43 2. Safety, Protection, and other Temporary Controls: Provide as specified for the temporary
44 safety, protection and other controls required as specified in this Project Manual.
45 '1.06 CORfTRACTOR USE OF SITE
46 A. Construction Operations: Limited to areas noted on Drawings.
2012-37/YCS Agricultura(Dept Improvements 01 1000- 1 SUMMARY
YELM HiGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS �
YELM COMMUNITY SCNOOLS
ERICKSO�V MCGOVER�J
1 B. Arrange use of site and premises to allow: � �
2 1. Owner(Yelm Community Schools)occupancy of the adjacent areas on site.
3 2. Work by Others.
4 3. Work by Owner(Yelm Community Schoois).
5 C. Provide access to and from site as required by law and by Owner(Yelm Community Schools):
6 1. Do not obstruct roadways, sidewalks, or other pubiic ways without permit.
7 D. Utility Outages and Shutdown:
8 1. Limit disruption of utility services to hours the existing Yelm High School is unoccupied.
9 a. Do not disrupt or shut down life safety systems, including but not limited to fire sprinklers
10 and fire alarm system,without 7 days' notice to Owner(Yelm Community Schools) and
11 authorities having jurisdiction.
12 E. Prevent accidental disruption of utility services to other#acilities.
13 F. Time Restrictions:
14 1. Limit conduct of work to requirements and standards of the Washington State.
15 2. Limit conduct of exterior work to the hours of 7:00 AM and 7:00 PM unless approved by
16 Owner(Yelm Community Schools).
17 1.07 COORDINI�TION OF WORK
18 A. Contractor is required to coordinate all related requirements and work specified throughout the
19 Project Manual.
20 1. General: The work of this Contract includes coordination of the entire work of the project,
21 including preparation of general coordination drawings, diagrams and schedules, and control
22 of site utilization,from beginning of construction activity through project close-out and
23 warranty periods. �
24 Z. The General Prime Contractor is responsible for coordinating and scheduling work of
25 subcontractors to expedite progress of the project. General Contractor assumes all
26 responsibility if his subcontractors do not perform.When emergencies occur or if the DistricYs
27 operations are compromised due to incomplete or inaccurate work by subcontractors, the
28 General Contractor will take whatever measures are necessary to correct problems at no
29 expense to the Owner(Yelm Community Schools) and before leaving the site.
30 B. Coordinate operations with the construction schedule, Architect(Erickson McGovern), and Owner -
31 (Yelm Community Schools)'s representative.
32 C. Unless otherwise indicated the Contractor's work and responsibilities also include, but are not
33 limited to the following:
34 1. Providing and paying for labor, materials, equipment, tools, machines,facilities and services
35 necessary for proper execution and completion of work.
36 2. Selective demolition to accommodate miscellaneous improvements including interior and
37 exterior remodeling and structural, mechanical, electrical and roofing work. °�
38 a. This is in addition to demolition denoted and shown on the drawings.
39 3. Paying required taxes except as noted in the General and Special Conditions.
40 D. Securing and paying for, as necessary for proper execution and cornpletion of work(as applicable
41 at time of receipt of Bid):
42 1. Fees.
43 2. Licenses.
44 3. Inspections, unless otherwise noted.
45 E. Giving required notices.
46 F. Enforcing strict discipline and good order among employees. �
47 G. Using new materials, except as noted.
48 H. Maintaining required access to and egress from the site and other requirements in accordance
49 with governing codes, ordinances and Owner(Yelm Community Schools)'s Policies throughout the �
50 work. Coordinate and provide for school operation access.
2012-37!YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 01 1000-2 SUMMARY
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 i. Coordinate all utility service requirements with serving utility companies including, but not lim9ted
2 to, power, telephone, water, sewer, and natural gas service. Observe specifications, standards,
3 written details, and sketches showing equipment locations and dimensions as indicated by the
4 Utility Company project engineers. Coordinate scheduling of Utility Company work with all other
5 trades.
6 J. Utility Costs: The Owner(Yelm Community Schools) will pay the cost of all utility charges
7 assessed by Public Utilities for the installation and connection of permanent services that are
8 provided by the Public Utilities provider.
9 1. The Contractor shall be responsible for scheduling, sequencing, and coordination of utility
10 work and work associated as part of this project. The Contractor will be responsible for
11 additional charges and fees due to the Contractor's lack of coordination, timeliness of
12 schedules or payments.
13 2. Permit Costs and Fees do not include utility charges such as temporary water or electrical
14 services(See Section 01 5000-Temporary Facilities and Controls).
15 1.08 TIME OF COMPLETION
16 A. Start Date: Upon the Owner's written notice to proceed and intent to award contract or by the date
17 of contract execution, whichever is earliest. Note: Owner has right to hold bids for up to 45
18 calendar days.
19 B. Substantial Completion: Barn addition: April 1, 2013. Tenant Improvements: April 15, 2013
20 C. Final Acceptance Date: Thirty calendar days from the date of Substantial Completion.
21 '1.09 LIQ�1ID�,TED DAMAGES
22 A. For each calendar day after the date fixed for Substantial Completion,that the work remains
23 uncompleted the Contractor shall pay the Owner a sum of$200.00 per day beyond substantial
24 completion date as fixed and agreed liquidated damages, but not as a penalty. Should an
25 extension of time be granted the Contactor, he shall indemnify and save harmless the Owner for
26 any loss to any other contractor caused by such extension of time. The Contractor will not be due
27 any additional compensation for this coordination.
28 B. For each calendar day after the date fixed for Final Acceptance, that the work remains
29 uncompleted the Contractor shall pay the Owner a sum of$100.OQ per day beyond the contract
30 Final Acceptance date as fixed and agreed liquidated damages, but not as a penalty. Should an
31 extension of time be granted the Contactor, he shall indemnify and save harmless the Owner for
32 any loss to any other contractor caused by such extension of time. The Contractor will not be due
33 any additional compensation for this coordination.
34 '1.10 l�LTERId#�TE BIDS, ALL011VANCES,AND UNIT PRICES
35 A. Alternate Bids: Alternate Bids have been requested by the Owner(Yelm Community Schools) in
36 order to ensure that the Project can be constructed within the Owner(Yelm Community Schools)'s
37 budget.
38 1. See Section 01 2300 for a complete listing of all Alternate Bids.
39 't,'1'I PERMITS, FEES AND iV0710E5
40 A. Permits provided by Owner(Yelm Community Schools):
41 1. Building plan review and permit.
42 a. Includes general Mechanical Permit.
43 b. Includes general Plumbing Permit.
44 B. Other Permits:
45 1. The Contractor will be responsible for securing and paying all other permits and
46 governmental fees, licenses and inspections necessary for proper execution and completion
47 of the Work which are customarily secured after execution of the Contract and which are
48 legally required when bids are received or negotiations concluded. The Owner(Yelm
49 Community Schools)will reimburse for these other permits and governmental fees, licenses
SO and inspections. Reimbursement will be for the cost of these other permits and governmental
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 01 1000-3 SUMMARY
YE��NI HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 fees, licenses and inspections, only, and shall not include any mark-up or other associated
2 costs.
3 a. These include, but are not Iimited to:
4 1) Electrical -miscellaneous permits and fees.
5 2) Mechanical- miscelianeous permits and fees.
6 3) Fire alarm review and approvai/permits.
7 2. The Owner(Yelm Community Schools)will not pay, and the Contractor or associated
8 subcontractor will be responsible for and will not be reimbursed for, any renewals and
9 penalties of the building permit and other permits and governmental fees.
10 a. Plumbing reviews and permits, other than generai permit provide with building permit.
11 b. Mechanical reviews and permits, other than general permit provide with building permit.
12 c. Fire alarm review and permit.
13 C. Business Licenses:
14 1. It is the General Contractor and (all lower tier)Sub-Contractors responsibility to secure said
15 license at no cost to the Owner(Yelm Community Schools).
16 1.12 STATUTES
17 A. The General Prime Contractor and all subcontractors shall comply with the State of Washington
18 statutes as per reference in the General Conditions and the remainder of the Contract Documents.
19 1. Includes all WAC's per reference.
20 2. Includes all RCW's per reference.
21 '1.'13 V1IORt( UIdDER OT�9ER CONTRACI'S
22 A. Separate Contract: The Owner(Yelm Community Schools), under separate contract, may elect to
23 remove and/or install new materials and equipment at the site. Those operations will be conducted ,
24 simultaneously with work under this Contract.
25 B. Cooperate fully with separate contractors so that work under those contracts may be carried out ''
26 smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract.
27 PART 2 PRODUCTS-NOT USED '
28 PAFt�3 EXECUTIOId -IdOT USEb
29 3A1 PRECONSTRUCTfON COfVFERENCE
30 A. A preconstruction conference is required and the time, date and location of the conference will be
31 set by Architect(Erickson McGovern). Those required to be present are Architect(Erickson
32 McGovern), Owner(Yefm Community Schools)'s representative, General Contractor, such
33 subcontractors as he deems necessary and the Contractor's Superintendent of the project and �
34 Local Building Department Representative. y
35 END OF SECTION
�,:
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 01 1000-4 SUMMARY -
YELA�I HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. iMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON 9NCGOVERN
1 SECTION 01 2000
2 �FiiCE AND PAYMEN7 PROCEDURES
3 pART1GENERAL
4 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
5 A. Procedures for preparation and submittal of applications for progress payments.
6 8. Modifications procedures.
7 C. Payment for stored materials.
8 D. Change procedures.The attached forms at the end of this Section shall be used for the
9 substantiation of costs and development of all change procedures for this Project.
10 1. Architect's Supplemental Instructions (ASI).
11 2. Request For Information (RFI).
12 3. Construction Change Directive (CCD).
13 4. Change Order(CO) -AIA document(G701).
14 E. Computation of Change in Contract Amount.
15 F. Substantiation of Costs.
16 1.{D2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
17 A. Document-State of Washington Public Works Contract: Contract Sum, retainages, payment
18 period.
19 1. Retainage-Contractors Options according RCW 60.28.
20 a. Bank or Savings and Loan Account.
21 b. Escrow with Bank or Trust Company to be converted into bonds.
22 c. Securities to be held in escrow with interest.
23 B. Document 00 7200- General Conditions:
24 1. Additional requirements for progress payments,final payment, changes in the Work.
25 2. Percentage allowances for Contractor's overhead and profit.
26 1.03 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
27 A. Electronic media printout including equivalent information will be considered in lieu of standard
28 form specified; submit sample to Architect (Erickson McGovern) for approval.
29 1. Refer to General Conditions of the Contract for Construction for any special provisions in
30 preparing and the format for the Schedule of Values.
31 B. Forms filleri out by hand will not be accepted.
32 C. Submit a printed schedule on a form as stipulated in Section 01 3000 -Administration
33 Requirements. Contractor's standard form or electronic media printout will be considered.
34 D. Submit Schedule of Values in duplicate within 15 days after date of Owner-Contractor Agreement.
35 1.04 APPLiCATIOMS Ft��i PROGR�SS PAYMENT�
36 A. Payment Period: Submit at intervals stipulated in the Agreement.
37 B. Electronic media printout including equivalent information will be considered in lieu of standard
38 form specified; submit sample to Architect(Erickson McGovern) for approval.
39 C. Forms filled out by hand will not be accepted.
40 D. Present required information in typewritten form.
41 E. General:
42 1. Submit itemized payment request as required in General Conditions together with Schedule
43 of Values and other submittals as Iisted herein.
44 2. Except as otherwise indicated, sequence of progress payments is to be regular, and each
45 must be consistent with previous applications and payments; it is recognized that certain
2012-37/YCS Agricuttural Dept.Improvements 01 2000 - 1 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
YELM HIGM SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS �
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 applications involve extra requirements, including initial application, application at times of
2 substantial completion, and final payment application.
3 3. The contractor certifies that to the best of his'knowledge, information, and belief,the work
4 covered by each Application for Payment has been completed in accordance with the k�
5 Contract documents,that all amounts have been paid by him for work for which previous
6 Applications for Payment were issued and that all computations, attachments, invoices and
7 representations are truthful and accurate.
8 4. Except as otherwise indicated, complete every entry provided for on the various forms,
9 including notarization and execution by authorized persons; incomplete applications will be
10 returned by Architect without action.
11 a. Entries must match current date of schedule of values and progress schedule.
12 F. Draft Applications:
13 1. Submit three (3) copies to the Architect at last scheduled weekly meeting of each month or 4
14 days prior to actual progress application date. ,,,
15 a. Draft applications submitted at last scheduled weekly meeting of month will be reviewed
16 by Owner, Architect, and Contractor at site. Contractor shall correct application based on
17 review conclusions.
18 b. Applications submitted at other than last scheduled weekly meeting of month will be
19 reviewed by Owner and Architect. The Architect will transmit review conclusions of the
20 Owner and Architect, and the Contractor shall correct application based on review
21 conclusions.
22 G. Application Transmittal:
23 1. Submit five (5) executed copies of each payment application, one copy of which is completed
24 with waivers of lien and similar attachments.
25 2. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing those attachments, and recording
26 appropriate information related to application in a manner acceptable to Architect.
27 3. Transmit to Architect by means ensuring receipt within 24 hours.
28 H. Initial Payment Appfication: �
29 1. The principal administrative actions and submittals which must precede or coincide with
30 submittal of first payment application can be summarized as follows, but not necessarily by
31 way of limitation: ,�
32 a. Statements of Intent to Pay Prevailing Wages on Public Works Contract; Contractor and
33 Subcontractors. �
34 b. Schedule of Values, allocated to the various portions of the work;the schedule shall be
35 used as a basis for the Contractor's Application for Payment. �°
36 c. List of subcontractors and major material suppliers.
37 d. Schedule of Unit Prices, as applicable. �
38 e. Schedule of submittals (preliminary if not finat). �.,
39 f. Listing of Contractor's staff assignments; Superintendent, Project Engineer, and Project
40 Manager. ��
41 g. Copies of acquired building permits and similar authorizations and licenses from
42 governing authorities for current performance of the work. �
43 h. Initial progress report, including report of pre-construction meeting.
44 i. Pertormance and Payment Bonds.
45 j. Certificate of Insurance. ,�;
46 k. Work Schedule.
47 I. Applications Each Month During Construction:
48 1. Submit itemized application, in number of copies specified below, each with Contractor's
49 notarized affidavit and signed receipts from principal subcontractors and suppliers as
50 specified below. .
51 2. After the first request for payment, all copies of each subsequent request shall be
52 accompanied by Contractor's notarized original signature with the statement that all �
53 subcontractors and suppliers have been paid to date as their interests appeared in the last
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept. Improvements 01 2000 - 2 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
YELM HMGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 payment received (less eared retainage applicable to subcontractors), and shall also be
2 accompanied by a signed receipt from the principal subcontractors and sup.pliers stating that
3 all sub subcontractors, suppfiers, wages,fringe benefits, and taxes arising out of such
4 subcontract have been paid in full as their interest appeared in the last payment received.
5 3. Each application shall be accompanied with"Partial Waiver of Mechanics' Lien by General
6 Contractor and Subcontractors".
7 4. Present required information in typewritten form.
8 5. For each item, provide a column for listing each of the following:
9 a. Item Number.
10 b. Description of Work.
11 c. Scheduled Values.
12 d. Previous Applications.
13 e. Total Completed and Stored to Date of Application.
14 f. Work in Place and Stored Materials under this Application.
15 g. Authorized Change Orders.
16 h. Percentage of Completion.
17 i. Balance to Finish.
18 j. Retainage.
19 6. Use data from approved Schedule of Values. Provide dollar value in each column for each
20 line item for portion of work performed and for stored Products.
21 7. List each authorized Change Order as a separate fine item, listing Change Order number and
22 dollar amount as for an original item of Work.
23 J. Execute certification by signature of authorized officer.
24 K. Include the following with the application:
25 1. Construction progress schedule, revised and current as specified in Section 01 3000.
26 2. Project record documents as specified in Section 01 7800, for review by Owner (Yelm
27 Community Schools) which will be returned to the Contractor.
28 1.0� APPLiCAT10N AT TIME OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
29 A. See General Conditions for principal administrative actions and submittals which must precede or
30 coincide with such special applications.
31 1.06 FlNA�.PAYMENi'APPLiCATION
32 A. See Supplemental and General Conditions for principal administrative actions and submittals
33 which must precede or coincide with such special applications.
34 1.07 PAY�IENT �OR STOREI� MA'�ERiA�.
35 A. Payment for stored items will be subject to prior approval by the Owner.
36 1. On-Site Materials: Progress payments may be made for permanent materials and equipment
37 to be incorporated in the work if approved in advance and properly stored on the project site.
38 2. Off-Site Materials: Progress payments may be made for permanent, pre-fabricated materials
39 or specially designed equipment to be incorporated into the work if approved in advance per
40 terms of General Conditions and stored in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
41 B. Proof of Need:With payment request for stored material,submit a copy of purchase order and
42 payment voucher clearly identifying the material, specification reference, contract number and
43 price. The following additional documentation may be included.
44 1. Title shifting agreement.
45 a. Example of agreement is available from the Owner(Yelm Community Schools)
46 2. Notarized certification of payment from supplier.
47 3. Copy of canceled check to supplier.
48 4. Lien release from supplier.
49 C. Stored materials items may be included in monthly application for payment only after drawing and
50 data submittals, if any are required, have been completed per Contract Documents.
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept. Improvements 01 2000- 3 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
YELIIA HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 D. Verification of Price and Payment: The Contractor shail demonstrate that the costs of materials `
2 have been paid and will establish the Owner's title to such materials or equipment or otherwise
3 protect the Owner's interest including applicable insurance and transportation for those items
4 stored off-site. n
5 E. Partial payment for materials and equipment in advance of installation shall not constitute
6 acceptance thereof and will not relieve Contractor of full responsibility for condition and
7 subsequent acceptance by the Owner. Faulty materials discovered will be rejected even though
S partial payment may have been made.
9 1.08 SU9S'�ANTIATING DA'TA
10 A. When Architect/Engineer require substantiating information,submit data in a timely manner
11 justifying line item amounts in question.
12 �.09 MODIFICATION PROCEDURES
13 A. General: (Forms attached at end of this Section) ._
14 1. Changes to and/or clarifications of the work may be made by response to a Request For
15 Information, order for a minor change in the work, Construction Change Directive, and
16 Change Orders.
17 2. A monetary change to the Contract is only implemented by a Change Order.
18 B. Architect's Supplemental Instructions (ASI) -attached document (page 6 of this Section).
19 1. Architect►nay issue supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in Work, not
20 involving adjustment to Contract Sum or Contract Time, on form (bound at end of this
21 Section).
22 2. Architect's Supplemental Instructions (ASI). Issuance and accumulation of ASt's will not be
23 basis for claim(s).
�
24 C. Request For Information (RFI) -attached document (page 7 of this Section).
25 1. VVhen Contractor's questions and Architect's answers require written record, submit copy of A-
26 Request For Information (RFI)form (bound at end of this Section) appropriately filled-in at
27 top. Architect will return form appropriately filled-in at bottom. RFI forms are to be numbered �'
28 in sequence. RFI's based directly on previous RFI's are to be numbered with original number =
29 and sequential extension.
30 a. Submittal, return, and accumulation of RFI's will not be basis for claim(s). :
31 2. Procedure:
32 a. Form provided by Architect. °
33 b. Prepared by Contractor.
34 a Transmitted to Architect.
35 d. Response by Architect.
36 e. Acceptance by Owner.
37 f. Transmitted by Architect to Contractor. #
38 g. Contractor must either:
39 1) Proceed upon receipt of response if no cost impact; or, �
40 2) Submit a statement of cost impact within 5 days of response date.
41 h. RFI's and responses shall be numbered consecutively and faxed to appropriate parties. ��
42 i. Responses shall be marked on record drawings and specifications. �.
43 D. Construction Change Directive (CCD} -attached document(page 8 of this Section).
44 1. To avoid delay of Project, when Owner and Contractor disagree on terms of Proposal �'
45 Request, or Contractor's request for change. y
46 2. Owner may authorize and Architect will issue Construction Change Directive (CCD)form
47 (bound at end of this Section) which instructs Contractor to proceed with change in Work,for �:
48 subsequent inclusion in Change Order.
49 a. Construction Change Directive contains complete description of change in Work and �
50 designates method to follow to determine change in Contract Sum or Contract Time.
51 �"
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept. Improvements 01 2000-4 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
YELN�I HIGH SCHOOL
AC; DEPT.iMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNIT`l SCHOOLS
° ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 3. Issued in response to:
2 a. An RFI with unresolved cost impacts.
3 b. An unresolved order for minor change in the work.
4 c. Absence of agreement on Change Order terms.
, 5 4. Directive is issued to expedite the work and avoid delays.
6 5. Procedure:
7 a. Form provided by Architect.
8 b. Prepared by Architect.
g c. Signed by Architect and Owner.
10 d. Contractor must proceed immediately.
11 e. Method of adjustment of Contract Sum shall be determined per General Conditions,
12 Section 7.3.
13 f. COP or CO is prepared.
14 E. Change Order (CO) -AIA document (G701).
15 1. Procedure:
16 a. Prepared by Architect.
17 b. May include several COP's.
18 a Sha41 be signed by Contractor as soon as practicable.
19 d. Change Orders shall be numbered consecutively.
20 e. Changes shall be marked on record drawings and specifications.
21 F. Computation of Change in Contract Amount:
22 1. For change requested by Architect for work falling under a fixed price contract,the amount
23 will be based on Contractor's price quotation.
24 2. For change requested by Contractor,the amount will be based on the Contractor's request for
25 a Change Order as approved by Architect.
26 3. For pre-determined unit prices and quantities,the amount will based on the fixed unit prices.
27 4. For change ordered by Architect without a quotation from Contractor,the amount will be
28 determined by Architect based on the Contractor's substantiation of costs as specified for
29 Time and Material work.
30 G. Substantiation of Costs: Provide full information required for evaluation.
31 1. On request, provide following data:
32 a. Quantities of products, labor, and equipment.
33 b. Taxes, insurance, and bonds.
34 c. Overhead and profit.
35 d. Justification for any change in Contract Time.
36 e. Credit for deletions from Contract, similarly documented.
37 H. After execution of Change Order, promptly revise Schedule of Values and Application for Payment
38 forms to record ea�h authorized Change Order as a separate line item and adjust the Contract
39 Sum.
40 1.10 SUBSTi7'U�'ION�
41 A. Comply with Section 01 6000, if proposed change requires substitution for product or system
42 specified.
43 1.11 �HAI�GES TO SCHEDULE
44 A. Contractor shall make every effort to comply within Contract completion date.
45 B. Contractor may not make claim for costs associated with use of float time, if any, between
46 anticipated completion and contract completion date.
47 PAR7 2 PRODUCTS- NUT USED
48 PAR�'3 �JCEGUI'lON- NOT USED
49 END OF SECTION
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept.Improvements 01 2000- 5 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
ARCHITECT'S SUPPLEIVIENTAL INSTRIICTIOIVS
ERICKSQN •N1cGOVERN�
�������
Archite�t's Suppiementa/Instructions�
YCS-SUPPORT OPERATIONS CEN7Ef�-FUELING STATIONS�
Contractor.• ' •
Address: Date:
rrenn:
REFERENCE DRAWING OR SPECIFICATION:
DESCRIPTION OF INSTRUCTIONS:
�
�,.
�
�.
Prepared By: Date:
The worOc shal/be carried out in accordance wlth the supplemental/nstructions issue above in accordance wlih the
Contract Documenfs w/thout change in the Contract Sum or Contract Tlme.
Proceeding s�v/th the Work in accordance fo fhese insfruct/ons indlcates the Contractors aaknowledgment �
that there wiil be no change in the Contracf Sum or Contract Tlme.
COPIES TO:
�
ATTACHMENTS:
2012-37/YCS Agricutturel Dep Improvements 01 2000-6 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
REQUEST FOR INFORMA'fION
ERICKS�N •McGOVERN
�����
Request for Informatiorr
YCS-SUPPORT OPERATIONS CENTER-FUELING S7ATIONS
� Contractor: '
' Address: Date:
ITEM:
REFERENCE DRAWING OR SPECIFICATION:
DESCRIPTION OF REQUEST:
Prepared By: Date:
SUQGESTED RESOLUTION:
IMPACT ON
Contract Sum (Y/N): Contract Time (Y/N):
RESPOMSE:
Prepared By: Date:
OWMER RESPONSE: R8J@Ct@CI: ❑ Accepted: ❑ Other: ❑
This response is nof an authorization to proceed wifh work involvfng add/tlonal cost and/or time.
Notiflcailon musi be g/ven In accordance with the coniract documents
Pf any response resulis in a change to ihe confract sum or fime.
COPIES TO:
ATTACHMENTS:
20'12-37/YCS Agricuftural Dept Improvements �1 2�0�-7 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES
CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DiRECT111E
�RIGKSCJN •!v'IcGt�VERN ar
���� �
Construction Change Directive�
Y�S-S�JPPOFtT OPERATiONS CENTER-FUELI�IG STATiON
�
Contractor. � �
�
Address: Date:
REFERENCE DRAWING OR SPECIFICATION:
In order to expedite the Work and/or avoid delays in the Work the Contract Documents are hereby
amended as described below and/or detailed on the attachments referred to: ^'_
DESCRIPTION OF CHANGE:
REASOW FOR CHANGE:
Prepared By: Date;
OWNER RESPONSE: R2J@Ct@CI: ❑ Accepted: ❑ Other: ❑
Bethel School District
Representative: Date:
�.
When this CCD is signed by the Owner and the Architect and received by the Contractor,the Contractor shall promptly proceed with the
change(s)described. Change(s) become effective immediately as a Construction Change Directive(CCD). �
Submif cos#s for this Work ta adJust Confracf Sum and for inclusion in a change order as follows:
❑ Fixed Maximum Lump Sum �
❑ Documented Actual Costs Per Article 7 of the General Conditions ,.
❑ Documented Unit Price Costs
❑ No Cost Change �
❑ Other
This CCD is proposed to change the Cantract Time as tollows:
❑ No Time Change `�
❑ Day(s) _
❑ Other
Contractor signature indicates agreement with the proposed change(s) in this CCD and the adjustments to Contract Sum and Contract �`
Time as set forth in Articie 7.7 of the General Conditions.
CONTRACTOR RESPONSE:
Contractor's Representative: Date: �
COPIES TO:
ATTACHMENTS: «
2012-37/YCS Agricuttral Dept improvements �1 2000-8 PRICE ANO PAYMENT PROCEDURES
CHANGE ORDER PROPOSAL
ERI�KSON •MeGt�VER�I
���
Change Order Propasal (COP�
YCS-SUPPflFiT OPERAT90NS CENTER-FUELING S7ATIONS
Contractor.• � '
Address: Date: 7/16/2012
REFERENCE DRAWING OR SPECIFICATION:
DESCRIPTION OF CHANGE:
REASOM FOR CHANGE:
Prepared By: Date: 7/16/2012
We propose to perform all changes in the abave description for a total(check one).
� Addition O Deduction ❑ No Change
To the contract sum of: Dollars
And a change of contract time by days.
Reason for request of change in contract time
{6Nashington Sfata sales tax not included) in accordance to Article 7 of fhe General Conditions ot the confracf.
The foregoing amaunt covers all direci and lndirect cosis related to#his change
and fo the effect af#his change on fhe remafnder of fhe project.
All other pravlsions of the cantract remaln in fuil force and effect.
The contracfor agrees fo be bound to this quotatlon far 60 days after fhis date.
Contractor: Date:
We have carefully examined the foregoing proposal,negotiated wifh the contractor
where n�cessary and find if to be reasonabie.
Architect: Date:
The Owner responds to the foregoing proposal below.
If the proposal is accepted beiow,th/s Instrument when fully sl,gned
const/tutes the condltfons upon which a change order wlil be issued.
OWNER AESPONSE: R@J@Ct2Cl: ❑ Accepted: ❑ Other: ❑
Bethel School District
Representative: Date: _
COPIES TO:
ATTACHMENTS:
2012-37/YCSAgricuttural Dept Improvements 01 2000-9 PRICE AND PAMENT PROCEDURES
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSOW MCGOVERN
1 S�CTIO�I Oi 2300
� AL7ERNATES
3 PART 1 GENERAL
4 1.0� SE�TION INCLUDES
5 A. Procedures for pricing alternates.
6 B. Documentation of changes t�Contract Sum and Contract Time.
7 �.02 REL,ATED REt�UIREMENTS
8 A. Instructions to Bidders: Instructions for preparation of pricing for alternatives.
9 B. Document 00 7200-General Conditions.
10 1.03 ACCEPTANCE OF ALTERNATES
11 A. Alternatives quoted on Bid Forms will be reviewed and accepted or rejected at the option of Owner
12 (Yelm Community Schools).Accepted alternatives will be identified in the Owner-Contractor
13 Agreement.
14 B. Coordinate related work and modify surrounding work to integrate the Work of each alternate.
15 i.04 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES
16 A. Alternative No.A-1 (NEW OVER HEAD DOOR):
17 1. Atternate Bid A-1 shall be to NOT PROVIDE AND INSTALL THE OVERHEAD DOOR AS
18 SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS.
19 2. Base Bid shall be to provide and install the overhead door as shown on the drawings.
20 B, Alternate Bid A-2 (DRYING CANOPI�
21 1. Alternate No.A-2 shall be to NOT PROVIDE AND INSTALL THE DRYING CANOPY AS
22 SHOWN ON THE DRAWINGS.
23 2. Base Bid shall be to provide and install the drying canopy as shown on the drawings.
24 C. Alternate Bid A-3 (ACOUSTICAL CEILWG TILE)
25 1. Alternate No. A-3 shall be to provide acoustical ceiling tile over furring as shown on A6.00
26 and detailed.
27 2. Base Bid shall be to provide to texture and paint.
28
29 PA�tT 2 PRO�U�CTS- NOZ US�D
30 PAR�"3 EXECUTION-iVOT USE�
31 END t'�F SECTION
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 01 2300- 1 ALTERNATES
YELM HIGN SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELfNI COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSOId MCGOVERN
1 SECTION 01 3000
2 ADMINIS7RATIVE REQUIREIIAENTS
3 PAR'T 1 GENERAL
4 1.01 S�CTION 1NCLUDES
5 A. Schedule of Values.
6 B. Project coordination.
7 C. Preconstruction meeting.
8 D. Site mobilization meeting.
9 E. Progress meetings.
10 F. Construction progress schedule.
11 G. Submittals for review, information, and project closeout.
12 H. Submittal procedures.
13 I. Color selection process.
14 J. General coordination.
15 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
16 A. Document 00 7200-General Conditions: Dates for applications for payment.
17 B. Section 01 7000- Execution and Closeout Requirements:Additional coordination requirements.
18 C. Section 01 7800-Closeout Submittals: Project record documents.
19 1.�?3 SCH�DULE OF VALUES
20 A. Submit a printed schedule on AIA Form G703-Application and Certificate for Payment
21 Continuation Sheet. Contractor's standard form or electronic media printout will be considered.
22 B. Submit Schedule of Values in duplicate within 10 days after date of Owner-Contractor Agreement.
23 C. Format: Utilize the Table of Contents of this Project Manual. Identify each line item with number
24 and title of the specification Section. Identify site mobilization.
25 1. Identify each line item with number and title of respective major Spec'rfication Section and its
26 corresponding Construction Schedule category.
27 2. Include in each item a directly proportionate amount of Contractor's overhead and profit.
28 3. Provide unit costs for Sections of specified items or work in the Project Manual when
29 possible. Provide material and labor costs.
30 4. List separate line item at end of Schedule of Values equal to 3�0 of each portion of the
31 contract for project closeout as defined in Section 01 7000- Execution and Closeout
32 Requirements.
33 5. For each line item of installed value exceeding $5,000, show breakdown by major products or
34 operations under each item.
35 6. Round-off figures to nearest dollar amount.
36 7. Make sum of total scheduled costs equal to Contract Sum.
37 8. Coordinate Schedule of Values submittal with Construction Schedule submittal.
38 D. Include separately from each line item, a direct proportional amount of Contractor's overhead and
39 profit.
40 E. Revise schedule to list approved Change Orders with each Application For Payment.
41 1.04 P�i+OJECT COORDINATION
42 A. See Section 01 7000- Execution requirements for additional requirements.
43 B. Cooperate with the Project Coordinator in allocation of mobilization areas of site;for field offices
44 and sheds,for emergency access,traffic, and parking facilities.
45 C. During construction, coordinate use of site and facilities through the Project Coordinator.
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 01 3000 - 1 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS w._
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERfV
1 D, Comply with Project Coordinator's procedures for intra-project communications; submittals, reports
2 and records, schedules, coordination drawings, and recommendations; and resolution of
3 ambiguities and conflicts.
4 E. Comply with instructions of the Project Coordinator for use of temporary utilities and construction
5 facilities.
6 F. Coordinate field engineering and layout work under instructions of the Project Coordinator.
7 G. Make the following types of submittals to Architect (Erickson McGovern)through the Project -
8 Coordinator:
9 i. Requests for interpretation.
10 2. Requests for substitution.
11 3. Shop drawings, product data, and samples.
12 4. Test and inspection reports.
13 5. Manufacturer's instructions and field reports.
14 6. Applications for payment and change order requests.
15 7. Progress schedules.
16 8. Coordination drawings.
17 9. Closeout submittals. .
18 �ART 2 PRODl9aCTS- NOT US�D
19 PART 3 �XECl7TlOi�
20 3,01 �RECO�STRUCi'ION MEETING "
21 A. Architect (Erickson McGovern) will schedule a meeting after Notice of Award. -
22 B. Attendance Required:
23 1. Owner (Yelm Community Schools).
24 2. Architect (Erickson McGovern).
25 3. Contractor.
26 4. Mechanical and Electrical Engineers.
27 C. Agenda:
28 1. Execution of Owner (Yelm Community Schools) -Contractor Agreement �
29 2. Submission of executed bonds and insurance certificates. �
30 3. Distribution of Contract Documents.
31 4. Submission of list of Subcontractors, Schedule of Values, and Progress Schedule. "
32 5. Designation of personnel representing the parties to Contract, Owner (Yelm Community
33 Schools)and Architect (Erickson McGovern) �`
34 6. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals,substitutions, applications for ;.
35 payments, proposal requests, Change Orders, and Contract closeout procedures.
36 7. Scheduling. ,�
37 D. Items of significance that could affect progress including such topics as following:
38 1. Critical Work sequencing. '�
39 2. Designation of responsible personnel. �
40 3. Submittal of Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples.
41 4. Preparation of Record Documents.
42 5. Use of premises.
43 6. Office,work and storage areas. �
44 7. Equipment deliveries and priorities.
45 8. Erosion control measures.
46 9. Safety procedures.
47 10. First aid.
48 11. Security.
49 12. Housekeeping.
50
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 01 3000- 2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUfREMENTS �
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
�l'ELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 13. V�/orking hours.
2 14. Scheduled progress meetings.
3 E. Record minutes and distribute copies within 4 days after meeting,with 1 copy to Architect
4 (Erickson McGovern), Owner (Yelm Community Schools), participants, and those affected by
5 decisions made.
6 3.02 S9'�E MOBILIZATION MEE7ING
7 A. Architect (Erickson McGovern) will schedule a meeting at the Project site prior to Contractor
8 occupancy.
9 B. Attendance Required:
10 1. Contractor.
11 2. Owner (Yelm Community Schools).
12 3. Architect(Erickson McGovern).
13 C. Agenda:
14 1. Use of premises by Owner (Yelm Community Schools) and Contractor.
15 2. Owner (Yelm Community Schools)'s requirements and occupancy priar to completion.
16 3. Construction facilities and controls provided by Owner (Yelm Community Schools).
17 4. Temporary utilities provided by Owner(Yelm Community Schools).
18 5. Survey and building layout.
19 6. Security and housekeeping procedures.
20 7. Schedules.
21 8. Application for payment procedures.
22 9. Procedures for testing.
23 10. Procedures for maintaining record documents.
24 11. Requirements for start-up of equipment.
25 12. Inspection and acceptance of equipment put into service during construction period.
26 D. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants,with two copies
27 to Architect (Erickson McGovern), Owner (Yelm Community Schools),participants, and those
28 affected by decisions made.
29 3.03 PR�UGRESS �►AEETINGS
30 A. Schedule and administer meetings throughout progress of the Work at maximum weekly intervals.
31 B. Architect(Erickson McGovern) will make arrangements for meetings, prepare agenda with copies
32 for participants, preside at meetings.
33 C. Attendance Required: Job superintendent, major subcontractors and suppliers, Owner(Yelm
34 Community Schools),Architect(Erickson McGovern), as appropriate to agenda topics for each
35 meeting.
36 D. Agenda:
37 1. Review minutes of previous meetings.
38 2. Review of Work progress.
39 3. Field observations, problems, and decisions.
40 4. Identification of problems that impede, or will impede, planned progress.
41 5. Review of submittals,schedule, and status of submittals.
42 S. Maintenance of progress schedule.
43 7. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules.
44 8. Planned progress during succeeding work period.
45 9. Maintenance of quality and work standards.
46 10. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination.
47 11. Other business relating to Work.
48 12. Other Topics: Review present and future needs of each entity present, including such items
49 as following:
50 a. Interface requirements.
2012-371 YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 01 3000- 3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
YEL.M HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS >
YELIV! COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERlCKSON MCGOVERIV
1 b. Sequences. y
2 c. Deliveries.
3 d. Off-site fabrication problems.
4 e. Access.
5 f. Site utilization.
6 g. Temporary facilities and services.
7 h. Hours of Work.
8 i. Hazards and risks. Housekeeping. `
9 j. Quality and Work standards.
10 k. Change Orders.
11 I. Documentation of information for payment requests. m
12 E. Erickson McGovern shall record minutes and distribute copies within three days after meeting to
13 participants, with two copies to Architect (Erickson McGovern), Owner(Yelm Community Schools),
14 participants, and those affected by decisions made. .
15 1. Format: Record minutes of these meetings per following format:
16 a. Header:
17 1) Project Name, Date, and Time.
18 2) Attendees.
19 b. Main Headings.
20 c. Corrections (previous weeks meeting minutes).
21 d. Progress. �
22 e. Technical Concerns:
23 1) Structural.
24 2) Electrical.
25 3) Architectural. �
26 f. Schedule.
27 g. Submittals.
28 h. Coordination and Changes (RFI's, COP's, CCD's, and CO's) (Pay Requests).
29 i. Old Business.
30 j. New Business.
31 k. Site Observations.
32 I. Other Items. ?
33 m. Distribution.
34 1) All attendees and others required (provide listing).
35 2. Next Meeting Time and Location: (Agenda for last meeting of month will include review of ��
36 monthly payment request).
37 3.04 CCf�dSTRUCTi0�1 �F�OGRESS SCHE�ULE
38 A. Within 14 days after date of the Agreement, submit Preliminary Schedule. `�
39 B. If preliminary schedule requires revision after review,submit revised schedule within 10 days. �
40 C. Within 20 days after review of preliminary schedule, submit draft of proposed complete schedule
41 for review. �
42 1. Include written certification that major contractors have reviewed and accepted proposed
43 schedule.
44 D. Within 10 days after joint review, submit complete schedule. °�
45 E. Submit updated schedule with each Application for Payment.
46 3.Qa SUBMITTALS FOR �E\/IEVl/
47 A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for review: �
48 1. Product data. �
49 2. Shop drawings.
50 3. Samples for selection. �
51 4. Samples for verification.
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 01 3000 -4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMEN7S
YELIVI COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKS�N MCGOVERN
1 B. Submit to Architect (Erickson McGovern) for review for the limited purpose of checking for
2 conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents.
3 C. Samples will be reviewed only for aesthetic, color, or finish selection.
4 D. After review, provide copies and distribute in accordance with SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES article
5 below and for record documents purposes described in Section 01 7800 -CLOSEOUT
6 SUBMITTALS.
7 3.06 SUBMI'fTALS FOR INFOR'AAATIOIV
8 A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for information:
9 1. Design data.
10 2. Certificates.
11 3. Test reports.
12 4. Inspection reports.
13 5. Manufacturer's instructions.
14 6. Manufacturer's field reports.
15 7. Other types indicated.
16 B. Submit for Architect(Erickson McGovern)'s knowledge as contract administrator or for Owner
17 (Yelm Community Schools). No action will be taken.
18 3A7 Sl1BMl'1'"rALS FOR PRC?JECT CL�SEOUT
19 A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them at project closeout:
20 1. Project record documents.
21 2. Operation and maintenance data.
22 3. Warranties.
23 4. Bonds.
24 5. Other types as indicated.
2S B. Submit for Owner (Yelm Community Schoofs)'s benefit during and after project comptetion.
26 3.08 NUMBER OF COPIES OF SUBMITTALS
27 A. Documents for Review:
28 1. Small Size Sheets, Not Larger Than 8-1/2 x 11 inches (215 x 280 mm): Submit the number of
29 copies which the Contractor requires, plus two copies which wilf be retained by Architect
30 (Erickson McGovern).
31 2. Larger Sheets, Not Larger Than 36 x 48 inches (910 x 1220 mm): Submit the number of
32 opaque reproductions that Contractor requires, plus two copies that will be retained by
33 ArChitect (Erickson McGovern).
34 B. Documents for Information: Submit two copies.
35 C. Documents for Project Closeout: Make one reproduction of submittal originally reviewed. Submit
36 one extra of submittals for information.
37 D. Samples: Submit the number specified in individual specification sections; all of which will be
38 retained by Architect (Erickson McGovern).
39 1. Retained samples will not be returned to Contractor unless specifically so stated.
40 3.09 SUBNli7°i'AL PR4CEDURES
41 A. Transmit each submittal with AIA Form G810.
42 B. Sequentially number the transmittal form. Revise submittals with original number and a sequential
43 alphabetic suffix.
44 C. Identify Project, Contractor, Subcontractor or supplier; pertinent drawing and detail number, and
45 specification section number, as appropriate on each copy.
46 D. Apply Contractor's stamp,signed or initialed certifying that review, approval,verification of
47 Products required,field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and coordination of information is
48 in accordance with the requirements of the Work and Contract Documents.
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 01 3000 - 5 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
YELIM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
Y'�LM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERlCICSON MCGf?VERN
1 E. Deliver submittals to Architect (Erickson McGovern) at business address.
2 F. Schedule submittals to expedite the Project, and coordinate submission of related items.
3 G. For each submittal for review, allow 15 days excluding delivery time to and from the Contractor.
4 H. Identify variations from Contract Documents and Product or system limitations that may be
5 detrimental to successful performance of the completed Work.
6 I. Provide space for Contractor and Architect (Erickson McGovern) review stamps.
7 J. When revised for resubmission, identify all changes made since previous submission.
8 K. Distribute reviewed submittals as appropriate. Instruct parties to promptly report any inability to
9 comply with requirements.
10 L. Submittals not requested will not be recognized or processed.
11 3.10 ARCHITEC°T'S ACTION
12 A. Except for submittals for record, information or similar purposes, where action and return is �°
13 required or requested, the Architect will review each submittal, mark to indicate action taken, and
14 return promptly.
15 1. Compliance with specified characteristics is the Contractor's responsibility.
16 B, Action Stamp: The Architect will stamp each submittal with a uniform, self-explanatory action
17 stamp.The stamp will be appropriately marked to indicate action taken. °
18 1. Do not permit submittals marked "Revise as Noted and Resubmit" or"Rejected"to be used at
19 the Project site, or elsewhere where Work is in progress. �"
20 2. Other Action:Where a submittal is primarily for information or record purposes, special ,
21 processing or other activity,the submittal will be returned, marked "No Exceptions Noted" or
22 "Provide as Noted". �..
23 3.11 COL+C��i ��LEC�'IONS
24 A. All samples required to be submitted for selection and verification will be approved as soon as
2S acceptable, however colors will be selected as a group according to the following groups:
26 1. Architectural interior finishes.
27 2. Architectural exterior finishes.
28 3. Electrical items and fixtures.
29 4. Mechanical items and fixtures. �
30 B. It is vital that the contractor provide all items required in a group designation for a color selection.
31 Missing items will delay the selection process and all delays will be the responsibility of the
32 Contractor. No additional time or extensions will allowed due the delay of submitting required �
33 submittals:
34 C. Allow 5 calendar days for selection of colors by the Owner and the Architect.
35 3.12 C;E�IERAL�OC�RDIfde4T10�9 "�'
36 A. Administration: _
37 1. Assign specific persons as project manager,superintendent, project engineer, and staff to
38 administer and supervise Work. Do not change assigned persons without permission of �
39 Owner and Architect. Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures
40 with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and ensure orderly progress of Work.
41 B. Sunreys And Records/Reports: �
42 1. General:Working from lines and levels established by the property survey, establish and
�3 maintain bench marks and other dependable markers. Establish bench marks and markers to °
44 set lines and levels for work at each story of construction and elsewhere as needed to
45 properly locate each element of the project. Calculate and measure required dimensions as
46 shown within recognized tolerances. Drawings shall not be scaled to determine dimensions.
47 Advise entities performing work of marked lines and levels provided for their use.
48 C. Limitations On Use Of The Site:
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 01 3000 - 6 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELN9 COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSOM MCGOVERN
1 1. General: Limitations on site usage as well as specific requirements that impact site utilization
Z are indicated on the drawings and by other contract documents. In addition to these
3 limitations and requirements, administer allocation of available space equitably among
4 entities needing both access and space so as to produce the best overall efficiency in
5 �erformance of the total work of the project. Schedule deliveries so as to minimize space and
6 time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on site.
7 2. Access:Where availability of space is limited, coordinate installation of different components
g to assure maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service and repair.
9 D. Organization:
10 1. Coordinate construction activities to assure efficient and orderly installation of each part ot
11 Work. Coordinate construction operations of Contractor, subcontractors of any tier, and
12 suppliers,that are dependent upon each other for proper installation, connection, and
13 performance.
14 E. Timing:
15 1. Where installation of part of Work is dependent on insta4lation of other components, schedule
16 construction activities in sequence required to obtain best results. Make adequate provisions
17 to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.
18 F. Notification:
19 1. Where necessary, prepare transmittal for distribution to each party involved, outlining special
20 procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and
21 attendance at meetings.
22 2. Other Work: Prepare similar memoranda for Owner, utility companies, and separate
23 Contractors where coordination of their Work is required.
24 G. Cleaning And Protection:
25 1. General: During handling and installation of work at the project site, clean and protect work in
26 progress and adjoining work on the basis of continuous maintenance.Apply protective
27 covering on installed work where it is required to ensure freedom from damage or
28 deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
29 a. Clean and maintain as frequently as necessary through remainder of construction
30 period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without
31 damaging effects.
32 2. Limiting Exposures of Work; To the extent possible through reasonable control and protection
33 methods, supervise pertormance of the work in such a manner and by such means which will
34 ensure that none of the work,whether completed or in progress, will be subjected to harmful,
35 dangerous, damaging or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period.
36 a. V1lhere appticable, such exposures include, but are not limited to,the following:
37 1) Excessive static or dynamic loading.
38 2) Excessive internal or external pressures.
39 3) F�ccessively high or low temperatures.
40 4) Thermal shock.
41 5) Excessively high or low humidity.
42 6) Air contamination or pollution.
43 7j Water or ice.
44 8) Solvents.
45 9) Chemicals.
46 10) Light.
47 11) Radiation.
48 12) Puncture.
49 13) Abrasion.
50 14) Heavy traffic.
51 15) Soiling,staining and corrosion.
52 16) Bacteria.
53
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 01 3000- 7 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMEN7S a
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
�RICKSON MCGOVERN
1 17) Rodent and insect infestation. �
2 18) Combustion.
3 19) Electricai current.
4 20) High speed operation. °
5 21) Improper lubrication.
6 22) Unusual wear or other misuse.
7 23) Contact between incompatible materiafs.
8 24) Destructive testing.
9 25) Misalignment.
10 26) Excessive weathering.
11 27) Unprotected storage. ""
12 28) Improper shipping or handiing.
13 29) Theft.
14 30) Vandalism. .>
15 H. Existing Utilities:
16 1. Contact Utilities Underground Location Center at 1-800-424-5555 at least four (4) days before
17 starting excavation work. Utility representatives will come out to mark underground lines.
18 Yellow indicates gas or oil, red is electric, orange is telephone and cable TV, blue is water,
19 green is sewer, pink is for temporary survey markings, and white is for proposed excavation.
20 I. Conservation and Salvage:
21 1. General: It is a requirement for supervision and administration of the work that construction
22 operations be carried out with the maximum possible consideration given to conservation of
23 energy, water and materials.
24 END OF SECTIOI� t
�
�
ra
2012-37/YCS AgrlcuRural Dept Improvements 01 3000- 8 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS -
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 SECTION 01 4000
2 �UAL�TIf'REQUIREMENT'S
3 PA�iI' `i G�NERAL
4 1.01 5E�TION INCLUDES
5 A. References and standards.
6 B. Quality assurance submittals.
7 C. Control of installation.
8 D. Tolerances.
9 E, Testing and inspection services.
10 F. Manufacturers'field services.
11 G. Schedule of required testing and inspections.
12 1.02 'FiEL.ATED REQUIREMENTS
13 A. Document 00 7200 -General Conditions: tnspections and approvals required by public authorities.
14 B. Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements: Submittal procedures.
15 C. Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements: Requirements for material and product quality.
16 1.03 REFEREI�CE STANDARDS
17 A. ASTM C1021 - Standard Practice#or Laboratories Engaged in Testing of Building Sealants; 2008.
18 B. ASTM C1077- Standard Practice for Laboratories Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates for
19 Use in Construction and Criteria for Laboratory Evaluation; 2011.
20 C. ASTM C1093 - Standard Practice for Accreditation of Testing Agencies for Masonry; 2009.
21 D. ASTM D3740- Standard Practice for Minimum Aequirements for Agencies Engaged in the Testing
22 and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction; 2010.
23 E. ASTM E329- Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged Construction Inspection and/or
24 Testing; 2011.
25 F. ASTM E543- Standard Specification for Agencies Performing Nondestructive Testing; 2009.
26 1,D4 SIJBAilIT'fALS
27 A. Testing Agency Qualifications:
28 1. Prior to start of Work, submit agency name, address, and telephone number, and names of
29 full time registered Engineer and responsible officer.
30 2. Submit copy of report of laboratory facilities inspection made by NIST Construction Materials
31 Reference Laboratory during most recent inspection, with memorandum of remedies of any
32 deficiencies reported by the inspection.
33 B. Test Reports:After each test/inspection, promptly submit two copies of report to Architect
34 (Erickson N1cGovern) and to Contractor.
35 1. Include:
36 a. Date issued.
37 b. Project title and number.
38 c. Name of inspector.
39 d. Date and time of sampling or inspection.
40 e. Ident'rfication of product and specifications section.
41 f. Location in the Project.
42 g. Type of test/inspection.
43 h. Date of test/inspection.
44 i. Results of test/inspection.
45 j. Conformance with Contract Documents.
46 k. When requested by Architect (Erickson McGovern), provide interpretation of results.
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 01 4000- 1 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS .�
YE�M COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERiCKSON MCGOVERN
1 2. Test report submittals are for Architect (Erickson McGovern)'s knowiedge as contract
2 administrator for the limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and the
3 design concept expressed in the contract documents, or for Owner (Yelm Community
4 Schools)'s information.
5 C. Manufacturer's Instructions:When specrfied in individual specification sections, submit printed
6 instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing,for the
7 Owner (Yelm Community Schools)'s information. Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions
S requiring special attention, and special environmental criteria required for application or
9 installation.
10 1.05 RE�ER�Id�E�AND STANDARDS
11 A. For products and workmanship specified by reference to a document or documents not included in ?
12 the Project Manual, also referred to as reference standards, comply with requirements of the
13 standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes.
14 B. Conform to reference standard of date of issue current on date of Contract Documents, except
15 where a specific date is established by applicable code.
16 C. Obtain copies of standards where required by product specification sections.
17 D. Maintain copy at project site during submittals, planning, and progress of the specific work, until �
18 Substantial Completion.
19 E. Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request ciarification from
20 Architect (Erickson McGovern) before proceeding. '�
21 F. Neither the contractual relationships, duties, or responsibilities of the parties in Contract nor those ...
22 of Architect(Erickson McGovern) shall be altered from the Contract Documents by mention or
23 inference otherwise in any reference document. -�
24 1.OS TESTING ANL7INSPECTION AGENCIES
25 A. Owner (Yelm Community Schools) will employ and pay for services of an independent testing
26 agency to perform other specified testing. n
27 B. As indicated in individual specification sections, Owner (Yelm Community Schools) or Contractor
28 shall employ and pay for services of an independent testing agency to perform other specified
29 testing.
30 C. Employment of agency in no way relieves Contractor of obligation to perform Work in accordance
31 with requirements of Contract Documents.
32 D. Contractor Employed Agency: �
33 1. Testing Agency: Comply with requirements of ASTM E 329,ASTM E 543,ASTM C 1021,
34 ASTM C 1077, and ASTM C 1093. "�
35 2. Inspection Agency: Comply with requirements of ASTM D3740 and ASTM E329.
36 3. Laboratory: Autharized to operate in Washington State.
37 4. Laboratory Staff: Maintain a full time registered Engineer on staff to review services. �
38 5. Testing Equipment: Calibrated at reasonable intervals either by NIST or using an NIST
39 established Measurement Assurance Program, under a laboratory measurement quality �F
40 assurance program.
41 F�I�RT 2 PRODU�7'S- 1V(9T USED
42 PART 3 E3(���W'TIORI .
43 3.01 Ct)�lTROL 4F!MS'�A�LATION
44 A. Monitor yuality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and
45 workmanship,to produce Work of specified quality. `
46 B. Comply with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence.
47 C. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from
48 Architect (Erickson McGovern) before proceeding. �'
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements �1 4000 - 2 QUALII'Y REQUdREMENTS
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 D. Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the Work except where more stringent
2 tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise
3 workmanship.
4 E. Have Work performed by persons qualified to produce required and specified quality.
5 F. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings or as instructed by the
6 manufacturer.
7 G. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand
8 stresses, vibration, physical distortion, and disfigurement.
9 3.02 i'C1l.ERANCES
10 A, Monitor fabrication and installation tolerance control of products to produce acceptable Work. Do
11 not permit tolerances to accumulate.
12 B. Comply with manufacturers'tolerances. Should manufacturers'tolerances conflict with Contract
13 Documents, request clarification from Architect(Erickson McGovern) before proceeding.
14 C. Adjust products to appropriate dimensions; position before securing products in place.
15 �.�U3 TESTfNG A�VD INSPECTION
16 A. Testing Agency Duties:
17 1. Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with Architect (Erickson McGovern) and
18 Contractor in performance of services.
19 2. Perform specified sampling and testing of products in accordance with specified standards.
20 3. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents.
21 4. Promptly notify Architect(Erickson McGovern) and Contractor of observed irregularities or
22 non-conformance of Work or products.
23 5. Perform additional tests and inspections required by Architect (Erickson McGovern).
24 6. Submit reports of all tests/inspections specified.
25 B. Limits on Testing/Inspection Agency Authority:
26 1. Agency may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents.
27 2. Agency may not approve or accept any portion of the Work.
28 3. Agency may not assume any duties of Contractor.
29 4. Agency has no authority to stop the Work.
30 C. Contractor Responsibilities:
31 1. Deliver to agency at designated location, adequate samples of materials proposed to be used
32 that require testing, along with proposed mix designs.
33 2. Cooperate with laboratory personnel, and provide access to the Work and to manufacturers'
34 facilities.
35 3. Provide incidental labor and facilities:
36 a. To provide access to Work to be tested/inspected.
37 b. To obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of Products to be tested/inspected.
38 c. To facilitate tests/inspections.
39 d. To provide storage and curing of test samples.
40 4. Notify Architect(Erickson iVlcGovern) and laboratory 24 hours prior to expected time for
41 operations requiring testing/inspection services.
42 5. Employ services of an independent qualified testing laboratory and pay for additional
43 samples,tests, and inspections required by Contractor beyond specified requirements.
44 6. Arrange with Owner (Yelm Community Schools)'s agency and pay for additional samples,
45 tests, and inspections required by Contractor beyond spec'rfied requirements.
46 D. Re-testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shafl be performed by
47 the same agency on instructions by Architect(Erickson McGovern).
48 E. Re-testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be paid for by
49 Contractor.
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 01 4000 - 3 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
YELN! Ii1GH S�HOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMEWTS
Y�LM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON AACGOVERfV
1 F. Re-testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be performed by
2 the same agency on instructions by Architect(Erickson �1cGovern). Payrnent for re-testing will be
3 charged to the Contractor by deducting testing charges from the Contract Price.
4 3.0� iWAi�11UFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES °
5 A. When specified in individual specification sections, require material or product suppliers or
6 manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions, conditions of surfaces
7 and installation, quality of workmanship, start-up of equipment,test,adjust and balance of ..
8 equipment and training as apphicable, and to initiate instructions when necessary.
9 B. Report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that are
10 supplemental or contrary to manufacturers'written instructions.
11 3.05 DE�ECT ASSESSMENT
12 A. Replace Work or portions of the Work not confo�ming to specified requirements.
13 B. If, in the opinion of Architect (Erickson McGovern), it is not practical to remove and replace the -
14 Work,Architect (Erickson McGovern) will direct an appropriate remedy or adjust payment.
15 3.06 SCHEDULE �9� REQUIRED T�STING AND INSPECTIONS
16 A. Additional Structural: As specified on Structural General Notes Quality Assurance/Special
17 I nspection.
18 B. Schedule:
19 1. Soils Compaction: Make tests at jobsite as work proceeds as described under Section 39
20 0000- '�aa�tlawork.
21 2. Structural Concrete: Perforrn tests to concrete as required under"Quality Control" paragraph
22 of Section 03 3000-Cast-In-Place Concrete.
23 3. Reinforcing Steel: Material verification (see Structural drawings).
24 4. Bolts Installed in Concrete: Inspection and observation during the placement of concrete or
25 epoxy around bolts (see Structural drawings).
26 5. Concrete and Reinforcing Steel Placement: Periodic visual inspection (see Structural >
27 drawings).
28 6. Plywood Shear Wall and Plywood Diaphragm Nailing: Periodic visual nailing inspections (see
29 Structural drawings).
30 END OF'SECTIOIV �
�
2012-37/YCS Agricuttural Dept Improvements 01 4000 -4 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERiCKSON MCGOVERN
1 SECTI�f�0'! 5000
Z TEMPORARR�FAClLITIES AND CONTROLS
3 PAR71 GENERAL
4 1�09 SECTION INCLUDES
5 A. Temporary utilities.
6 B. Temporary sanitary facilities.
7 C. Temporary controls:fencing.
8 D. Water.
g 1. Drinking water.
10 E. Waste removal facilities and services.
1.1 F. Miscellaneous temporary requirements.
12 1.02 7EMPORARY UTILITIES
13 A. Provide clean, potable water as required. Make temporary connections to closest existing utility
14 piping and provide meter, piping, hoses, nozzles and other accessories as required.At completion,
15 or before if directed, disconnect temporary connections and piping and remove from site.
16 1. Requirements include water as required for irrigation of any and all landscaping and fields.
17 B. Existing facilities may be used as follows:
18 1. Electrical Power may be obtained from the existing facility'rf available.
19 a. Provide all temporary power, including pole and poles,transformer if required,of voltage
20 and phasing as required for the work. Provide wiring for all required extension cords,
21 lighting outlets, and power outlets (grounding type), and other required equipment and
22 accessories necessary for construction and site improvement purposes. Remove power
23 and their connections at completion of the work, or sooner if approved or directed.
24 2. Temporary Water may be obtained from the existing facility if available.
25 a. Coordinate with Owner locations of connections and routing of service lines. Service
26 lines shali not restrict use or cause health and safety issues or problems.
27 C. Use trigger-operated nozzles for water hoses,to avoid waste of water.
28 1.03 DFiliVK1NG WATER
29 A. Provide,from proven safe source,for all those connected with the work. Pipe or transport water in
30 such manner as to keep it clean and fresh. Serve from single service containers or sanitary
31 drinking fountains.
32 1.04 TEMPORARY SANlTARY FAI:ILlTIES
33 A. Provide and maintain required facilities and enclosures. Provide at time of project mobilization.
34 B. Maintain daily in clean and sanitary condition.
35 1 A5 FEN+C1NCa
36 A. Construction: Contractor's option.
37 B. Provide 6 foof(1.8 m) high fence around construction site; equip with vehicular and pedestrian
38 gates with locks.
39 1.Ofi VEHICLI�AR ACCESS/AIdD PARKIfVG
40 A. Coordinate access and haul routes with governing authorities and Owner (Yelm Community
41 Schools).
42 B. Provide and maintain access to fire hydrants,free of obstructions.
43 C. Provide means of removing mud from vehicle wheels before entering streets.
44 D. Provide temporary parking areas to accommodate construction personnel.When site space is not
45 adequate, provide additional off-site parking.
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 01 5000- 1 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
YELM HIGH SCHC?OL
AG DERT. IMPROVEMENTS
YE�14� COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON AACGOVERN
1 1.07 1NAS"�E REMCDVAL �
2 A. Provide waste removal facilities and services as required to maintain the site in clean and orderiy
3 condition.
4 B. Provide containers with lids. Remove trash from site periodically.
5 C. If materials to be recycled or re-used on the Project must be stored on-site, provide suitable
6 non-combustible containers; locate containers holding-flammable material outside the structure
7 unless otherwise approved by the authorities having jurisdiction. �
8 D. Open free-fall chutes are not permitted. Terminate closed chutes into appropriate containers with
9 iids.
10 1,08 �EMOVAL.OF 1)TILiTIES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLS "
11 A. Remove temporary utilities, equipment,facilities, maierials, prior to Final Application for Payment
12 inspection.
13 B. Remove underground installations to a minimum depth of 2 feet (600 mm). Grade site as
14 indicated.
15 C. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work.
16 D. Restore new permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition. '
17 1.09 d111iSCELLANEC?US TEMPORARY REQUIREMENTS
18 A. Cleaning-Up:
19 1. During the Work: Contractor and each subcontractor at all times shall keep the premises free
20 from accumulation of waste materials or rubbish caused by his operations. Just before
21 completion of the work, Contractvr and each subcontractor shall remove all his waste
22 materials and rubbish from and about the Project as well as all his tools, construction �
23 equipment, machinery and surplus materials. If Contractor fails to enforce clean-up
24 procedures,the Owner may do the clean-up and the cost thereof shall be charged to the
25 Contractor as provided in the General Conditions.
26 B. Temporary Shoring, Bracing &Sheeting:
27 1. Provide as required for work in the various Sections.
28 C. Dust Control:
�:
29 1. Provide positive methods and apply dust control materials to minimize raising dust from
30 dispersing into the atmosphere. :-
31 D. Water Control:
32 1. Provide positive methods to control surface water. Prevent damage to Project, site, and
33 adjoining properties. �
34 a. Control fill, grading, and ditching to direct surface drainage away from excavations, pits,
35 #unnels, and other construction areas. Direct all drainage to proper runoff. �
36 2. Provide, �perate, and maintain hydraulic equipment of adequate capacity to control surface
37 water. '�
38 3. Dispose of drainage water in a manner to prevent flooding, erosion, siltation, and other
39 damage to any portion of the site or adjoining areas. Special care shall be taken to prevent �`
40 run off into the irrigation ditch along the north boundary of the site.
41 E. Debris Control:
42 1. Maintain all areas under Contractor's control free of extraneous debris. `
43 2. Areas will be designated for parking of trucks to receive demolition debris. Coordinate with
44 Owner at time of scheduling.
45 3. Initiate ancl maintain a specific program to prevent accumulation of debris at construction site,
�6 storage and parking areas, or along access roads and haul routes.
47 a. Provide containers for deposit of debris.
48 b. Prohibit overloading of trucks to prevent spillage on access and haul routes.
49 1) Provide periodic inspection of traffic areas to enforce requirements. �
2012-37/YC5 Agricultural Dept Improvements 01 5000 - 2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS ,
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELW1 COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 4. Schedule periodic inspection and disposal of debris.
2 a. Provide additional collections and disposal of debris whenever the periodic schedule is
3 inadequate to prevent accumulation.
4 5. Keep storm sewers free of debris or extraneous materials.
5 F. Pollution Control:
6 1. Provide methods, means and facilities required to prevent contamination of soil, water or
7 atmosphere.Allow no discharge of noxious substances from construction operations.
g 2, Prouide equipment and personnel to perform emergency measures required to contain
g spitlage.
10 a. Remove contaminated soils or liquids.
11 1) Excavate and dispose of any contaminated earth off-site. Replace with suitable
12 compacted fill and topsoil.
13 3. Take special measures to prevent harmful substances from entering public waters.
�,4 a. Prevent disposal of wastes, effluents, chemicals, or other such substances adjacent to
15 bodies of water, or in sanitary or storm sewers.
16 4. Provide systems for control of atmospheric pollutants.
17 a. Prevent toxic concentrations of chemicals.
18 b. Prevent harmful dispersal of poilutants into the atmosphere.
19 c. Provide adequate ventilation in all areas during and after application of epoxy paint or
zp paint.
21 G. Erosion Control:
22 1. Plan and execute construction and earth work by methods of control surface drainage from
23 cuts and fills, and from borrow and waste disposal areas,to prevent erosion and
24 sedimentation.
25 a. Hold the areas of bare soil exposed at one time to a minimum.
2b b. Provide temporary control measures such as berms,dikes and drains.
27 2. Construct fills and waste areas by selective placement to eliminate surface silts or clays
28 which will erode.
29 3. Periodically inspect earthwork to detect any evidence of the start of erosion and apply
30 corrective measures as required to control erosion.
31 H. Vermin Control:
32 1. Provide rodent and insect control as necessary to prevent infestation of construction or
33 storage areas.
34 a. Employ methods and materials not adversely affecting conditions at the site or on
35 adjoining materials.
36 b. Submit an informational copy of the proposed pesticide program to Owner with a copy to
37 Architect. Clearly indicate:
38 1) The area or areas to be treated;
39 2) The pesticides to be used, with a copy of the manufacturer's printed instructions,
40 and;
41 3) The pollution preventative measures to be employed.
42 2. The use of any pesticide shall be in full accordance with the manufacturer's printed
43 instructions and recomme.ndations.
44 3. Leave premises clean and free of any infestation at time of Substantial Completion.
45 PA�tT 2 P�i�3DUCTS- NOT#�SED
46 PART 3 �XECl7TlfJ�J- NO? USED
47 EfVD OF SECTION
2012-37/YCS AgricuRural Dept Improvements 01 5000- 3 TEMPORARY FAGLITtES AND CONTROLS
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNI7Y SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 SECTION Oi 6000
2 PRODUCT REGIUIREMEIVTS
3 PART 7 GENERA�.
4 i.0"� S!�aCTIO�d INCLUDE�
5 A. General product requirements.
6 1. Existing products.
7 2. New products.
8 B. Transportation, handiing,storage and protection.
9 C. Product option requirements.
10 D. Substitution limitations and procedures.
11 1. Product substitutions.
12 a. Requirements prior to bid.
13 b. Requirements after bid date.
14 E. Procedures for Owner(Yelm Community Schools)-supplied products.
15 F. Maintenance materials, including extra materials, spare parts,tools, and software.
16 G. Damaged materials or products.
17 1.42 REi�ATED REQUIREMENTS
18 A. Document 00 2113 - Instructions to Bidders: Product options and substitution procedures prior to
19 bid date.
20 B. Section 01 4000 -�uality Requirements: Product quality monitoring.
21 1.03 SUBiV11TTALS
22 A. Procluct Data Submittals: Submit manufacturer's standard published data. Mark each copy to
23 identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement manufacturer's standard
24 data to provide information specific to this Project.
25 B. Shop Drawing Submittals: Prepared specifically for this Project; indicate utility and electrical
26 characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service for
27 functional equipment and appliances.
28 C. Sample Submittals: Illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of the product,with integral
29 parts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for intertacing work.
30 1. For selection from standard finishes, submit samples of the full range of the manufacturer's
31 standard colors,te�ures, and patterns.
32 PART 2 PRODUCTS
33 2.01 ME�J PRCaDUCT�
34 A. Provide new�roducts unless specifically required or permitted by the Contract Documents.
35 B. Do not use products having any of the following characteristics:
36 1. Made using or containing CFC's or HCFCs.
37 2.02 PRODU�T OPTIO�S
38 A. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Use any product meeting
39 those standards or description.
40 1. Provide products that comply with Contract Documents,that are undamaged and, unless
41 otherwise indicated, new at time of installation. Provide products complete with accessories,
42 trim,finish, safety guards, and other devices and details needed for complete installation and
43 intended use and effect.Where available, provide standard products of types that have been
44 produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects.
45 B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with a Provision for Substitutions:
46 Submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer not named.
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 01 6000- 1 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT, IMPROVEMENTS �_
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON 'MCGOVERN
1 C. Product Selection:
2 1. Contract Documents and governing regulations govern product selection and not industry
3 traditions or procedures experienced by Contractor on previous construction projects.
4 Procedures governing product selection include following: .
5 a. Proprietary Specification Requirements:Where Specifications name only single product
6 or manufacturer, provide product indicated.
7 b. Semi-proprietary Specification Requirements:Where Specifications name two or more
g products or manufacturers, provide one of the products indicated. "'
9 c. Or Approved:Where Specifications specify products or manufacturers by name,
10 accompanied by term "or approved", comply with Contract Document provisions
11 concerning "substitutions"to obtain approval for use of unnamed product. �
12 d. Nonproprietary Specifications:When Specifications list products or manufacturers that
13 are available and may be incorporated in Work, but do not restrict Contractor to use of
14 these products only, Contractor may propose other available product that complies with
15 requirements of the Contract Documents. Comply with Contract Document provisions •�
16 concerning"substitutions"to obtain approval for use of unnamed product.
17 e. Descriptive Specification Requirements:Where Specifications describe product or
18 assembly, listing exact characteristics required,with or without use of brand or trade
19 name, provide product or assembly that provides characteristics and otherwise complies
20 with Contract requirements.
21 f. Performance Specification Requirements:Where Specifications require compliance with
22 pertormance requirements, provide products that comply with these requirements and �
23 are recommended by manufacturer for application indicated. Manufacturer's
24 recommendations may be contained in published product literature or by the
25 manufacturer's certification of performance. Overal� performance of product is implied
26 where product is specified for specific pertormances.
27 g. Compliance with Standards, Codes, and Regulations:Where Specifications only require
28 compliance with imposed code, standard, or regulation, select product that complies with
29 standards, codes,or regulations spec"rfied.
30 h. Visual Matching:Where Specifications require matching established Sample,Architect's
31 decision will be final on whether proposed product matches satisfactorily.Where no
32 product available within specified category matches satisfactorily and complies with
33 other specified requirements, comply with provisions of Contract Documents concerning �
34 "substitutions"for selection of matching product in another product category.
35 i. ullhere specified product requirements include phrase "... as selected from
36 manufacturer's standard colors, patterns,textures..." or similar phrase,select product �.
37 and manufacturer that complies with other specified requirements.Architect will select
38 color, pattern, and texture from product line selected. �
39 2.0� MdAIMTENA�ICE �'IATER�ALS �
40 A. Furnish extra materials, spare parts,tools, and software of types and in quantities specified in
41 individual specification sections.
42 B. Deliver to Project site; obtain receipt prior to final payment. k
43 PART 3 EXEC�9TI4�9
44 3.01 SUBS'�ITUT10F1 PROCEDURES
45 A. During bidding, requests for approved equal or substitutions, clarification of specifications, or �
46 protest of specifications shall be received by Architect, not later than six (6) days prior to bid date.
47 Requests received after that time wi11 not be considered
48 1. To aid in the review of requests, submit on form following this section, which may be copied. y
49 2. If proposed substitution is approved,such approvals will be set forth in an Addendum.
50 Bidders shall not rely upon approvals made in any other manner
2012-37(YCS Agricuitural Dept Improvements 01 6000- 2 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERId
1 B. After date of Contract,the Owner may, at his option, consider formaf requests from Contractor for
2 substitution of products in place of those specified when submitted in accordance with the
3 requirements of this Section. One or more of the following conditions must also be documented:
4 1. The substitution must be required for compliance with final interpretation of code
5 requirements or insurance regulations
6 2. The substitution must be due to the unavailability of the specified products,through no fault of
7 the Contractor. The contractor must provide a letter from the supplier or manufacturer
g attesting to the products unavailability.
9 3. The substitution may be requested when subsequent information discloses the inability of the
10 spec'rfied products to pertorm properly or to fit in the designated space.
11 4. The substitution may be due to the manufacturer's or fabricator's refusal to certify or
12 guarantee performance of the specified product as required.
13 5. The substitution may be requested when it is clearly seen, in the judgment of the Architect
14 that a substitution would be in the Owner's best interests in terms of cost,time, or other
15 considerations.
16 6. Request for substitution beyond those identified in items 1 through 4 above, will not be
17 considered unless General contractor and/or material supplier agree to an adjustment in the
18 contract amount associated with costs relating to the review of the substitution request.An
19 adjustment in the contract amount shall be required in both cases of approval or disapproval
2p of the substitution request.
21 7. Rates of Compensation shall be as follows:
22
Erickson McGovern Architects $150.00 er hour
Civil, Structural, Mechanical,Electricaf En ineers $150.00 er hour
Landsca e Architect $150.00 er hour
Other Consultants $150.00 er hour
Milea e .65 er mile
23
24 C. Substitutions will not be considered if:
25 1. Acceptance will require substantial revision of Contract Documents
26 2. They are indicated or implied on Shop Drawings or product data submittals without request
27 submitted in accordance with the Contract Documents.
28 D. Substitution Submittal Procedure:
29 1. Submit three copies of request for substitution for consideration. Limit each request to one
30 proposed substitution.
31 2. Submit shop drawings, product data, and certified test results attesting to the proposed
32 product equivalence. Burden of proof is on proposer.
33 3. Architect (Erickson McGovern) will notify Contractor in writing of decision to accept or reject
34 request.
35 3.0� OW�IER-SUPPLI�D �RODUCTS
36 A. General: Owner will furnish certain products for Project.
37 1. Contract installation work includes providing any necessary backing and support systems to
38 receive and install Owner's equipment, plus make mechanical, electrical, and ancillary
39 connections.
40 2. Cost for installation of this work is included in Contract Sum.
41 B. Owner (Yelm Community Schools)'s Responsibilities:
42 1. Arrange for and deliver Owner(Yelm Community Schools) reviewed shop drawings, product
43 data, and samples,to Contractor.
44 2. Arrange and pay for product delivery to site.
45 3. On deiivery, inspect products jointly with Contractor.
46 4. Submit claims for transportation damage and replace damaged, defective, or deficient items.
47 5. Arrange for manufacturers'warranties, inspections, and service.
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 01 6000 - 3 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
YELllvl HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS ,
'i'ELM COMIVIUNITY SCHOOLS
EFiICKSON MCG01/ER�I
1 C. Contractor's Responsibilities: �
2 1. Receive and unload products at site; inspect for completeness or damage jointly with Owner
3 (Yelm Community Schools).
4 2. Handle, store, install and finish products. -
5 3. Repair or replace items damaged after receipt.
6 3.03 TRANSPtJRTATION ANLI HANDLING
7 A. Coordinate schedule of product delivery to designated prepared areas in order to minimize site
8 storage time and potentiai damage to stored materials.
9 B. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
10 C. Transport materials in covered trucks to prevent contamination of product and littering of
11 surrounding areas.
12 D. Promptly inspect shipments to ensure that products comply with requirements, quantities are
13 correct,and products are undamaged.
14 E. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement,
15 or damage.
16 F. Arrange for the return of packing materials, such as wood pallets, where economically feasible.
17 3.04 STO�AGE AND PROTECTION
18 A. Designate receiving/storage areas for incoming products so that they are delivered according to
19 installation schedule and placed convenient to work area in order to minimize waste due to
20 excessive materials handling and misapplication.
21 B. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.
22 C. Store with seals and labels intact and legible.
23 D. Store sensitive products in weather-tight, climate controlled enclosures in an environment
24 favorable to product.
25 E. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above ground.
26 F. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to �
27 prevent condensation and degradation of products.
28 G. Prevent contact with material that may cause corrosion, discoloration, or staining. �'
29 H. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, •-
30 or damage.
31 I. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to verify products �F
32 are undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition. ��
33 3.0 s DAMI'�GED PFdrJC1i9CTS
�
34 A. Damaged or deterio�ated materials shall be removed from the premises. Replace materials which
35 have been damaged. -
36 E�lD C3�SECTI�OIV
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 01 6000-4 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS r
YELiM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELM C�MMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
� SECTiON Oi 6b01
2 SUBSTITUTION REQIlEST FORIVI
3 SUBSTiTUTIOid REQUEST FORIIA
4 1.09 TO: !�WNER (YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS)
5 1.02 PROJECT:YELi1fl HIGH SCHOOL-AGRICULTURAL DEP'f IMPROVEMENTS
6 1.03 SPECIFIED ITEIIA:
7 A. Section: Page: Paragraph:
8 B. Description:
9
10 1. The undersigned requests consideration of the following:
11 a. (manufacturer)
12 b. (product)
13 1.04 �ANUFACTURER
14 A. Address:
15
16 B. Phone Number:
17 C. Trade Name:
18 D. History: q less than 5 years q less than 10 years q greater than 10 years
19 1.05 1�STA�.LER (PROVIDE,OR LIST SAME I�BY MANUFACTURER)
20 A. IVame of Company:
21 B. Address:
22
23 C. Phone Number:
24 D. History:_less than 5 years_less than 10 years_greater than 10 years
25 1.06 PROPOSED SUBSTITUTION
26 A. Attached data includes product description, specifications, drawings, photographs, performance
27 and test data adequate for evaluation of the request; applicable portions of the data are clearly
28 identified.
29 1. Include complete information on changes to Drawings and/or Specifications which proposed
30 substitution will require for it proper installation or use.
31 B. Fill in the blanks below:
32 1. Does the substitution affect dimensions indicated on the drawings ? YES NO (*).
33 a. If yes, provide information indicating change.
34 2. Will the undersigned pay for changes to the building design, including engineering and detail
35 costs caused by the requested substitution ?YES NO (*).
35 a. "Yes"answers shall be grounds for rejection.
37 3. Will the substitution affect othsr trades? YES NO (*).
38 a. If yes, provide information indicating affect or change.
39 4. Will the substitution affect or be affected by applicable code requirements? YES
40 NO (*).
41 a. If yes, provide information indicating affect.
42 5. Are there sign'rficant differences between the proposed substitution and the specified item?
43 YES NO (*).
44 a. If yes, provide information indicating differences.
45 6. Is there a difference relating to guarantee/warranties between the proposed substitution and
46 the specified item? YES NO (*).
2012-37/YCS Agricuftural Dept Improvements 01 6001 - 1 SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM
YE�iM HIGH SCHOOL
A� DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS :
YEL�M COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
EFiICQCSON MCGOVERN °
1 a. If yes, provide information indicating differences. °`
2 7. �/Vill the substitution affect an increase in contract time? YES IVO (*).
3 a. If yes, provide information indicating affect or change.
4 G (*) -1f the answer to any of the above questions is "NO" and this is found to be incorrect,the
5 substitution may be rejected and the Undersigned will be required to provide the original specified
6 item, including corrective work.
7 D. The undersigned further states that the following paragraphs, unless modified on attachments, are �
8 correct.
9 1. They have personally investigated the specified item and compared it to the item requested
10 for substitution.
11 2. Maintenance and service parts will be locally available for the proposed substitution.
12 3. The function, appearance and quality of the Praposed Substitution are equivalent or superior
13 to the Specified Item.
14 4. Waives any known or unknown for an increase in Contract Sum or Time.
15 E. Submitted by:
16 1. Signature:
17 a. (Signature shall be by person having authority to legally bind its firm to the above terms.)
18 2. Firm:
19 3. Address:
20 4. Date:
21 5. Telephone:
22 F. Attachments:
23
Drawin s. Re orts. �
Product Data. Warran .
Samples. Other:
Tests.
24
25
26 _
27 FUR USE BY ARCHITEC�'
28
ACCEPTED NOT ACCEPTED �
ACCEPTED AS NOTED RECEIVED TO LATE .
REMARKS
�
29
30 Y
31 �•:
Hlf':
DATE:
32 �
33
34 END OF SECTION
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 01 6001 - 2 SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YE�M COMMUNt'TY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 SECTION�1 7000
2 EX�CU7ION AND CLOSEOl9T REQl9�REMENTS
3 PART 1 GENERAL
4 1.01 SECTIOi� INCLIlDES
5 A. Examination, preparation,and generaf installation procedures.
6 B. Pre-instailation meetings.
7 C. Cutting and patching.
8 D. Surveying for laying out the work.
9 E. Cleaning and protection.
10 F. Safety procedures.
11 G. Starting of systems and equipment.
12 H. Demonstration and instruction of Owner (Yelm Community Schools) personnel.
13 I. Closeout procedures, except payment procedures.
14 J. General requirements for maintenance service.
15 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMEN'TS
16 A. Section 01 1000-Summary: Limitations on working in existing building; continued occupancy;
17 work sequence; identification of salvaged and relocated materials.
18 B. Section 01 3000-Administrative Requirements; Submittals procedures.
19 C. Section 01 4000 - Quality Requirements:Testing and inspection procedures.
20 D. Section 01500-Temporary Facilities and Controls: Temporary heating, cooling, and ventilating
21 facilities.
22 E. Section 01 7800- Closeout Submittals: Project record documents, operation and maintenance
23 data, warranties and bonds.
24 �,Q3 SUBMITTALS
25 A. See Section 01 3000-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures.
26 B. Survey Work: Submit name, address, and telephone number of Surveyor before starting survey
27 work.
28 1. On request, submit documentation verifying accuracy of survey work.
29 2. Submit a copy of site drawing signed by the Land Surveyor,that the elevations and locations
30 of the work are in conformance with Contract Documents.
31 3. Submit surveys and survey logs for the project record.
32 1.04 QIJALI�iCATIiaNS
33 A. For demolition work, employ a firm specializing in the type of work required.
34 1. Minimum of 3 years of documented experience.
35 B. For survey work, employ a land surveyor registered in State of Washington and acceptable to
36 Architect (Erickson McGovern). Submit evidence of Surveyor's Errors and Omissions insurance
37 coverage in the form of an Insurance Certificate.
38 1,05 PRtDJECT CONDI710NS
39 A. Grade site to drain. Maintain excavations free of water. Provide, operate, and maintain pumping
40 equipment.
41 B. Protect site from puddling or running water. Provide water barriers as required to protect site from
42 soil erosion.
43 C. Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials,to dissipate humidity, and to prevent
44 accumulation of dust,fumes, vapors, or gases.
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 01 7000- 1 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS
YELM HIGH SCHOOL m
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS �
Y�LM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
� ERICKSON MCGOVER�
1 D. Dust Control: Execute work by methods to minimize raising dust from construction operations. `
2 Provide positive means to prevent air-borne dust from dispersing into atmosphere and over
3 adjacent property.
4 E. Cover all ductwork intake and exhaust diffusers during all demolition and/or construction. Remove �
5 upon completion of construction and system start-up.
6 F. Erosion and Sediment Control: Plan and execute work by methods to control surface drainage
7 from cuts and fills from borrow and waste disposal areas. Prevent erosion and sedimentation. f.
8 G. Pest and Rodent Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent pests and insects from
9 damaging the work.
10 H. Rodent Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent rodents from accessing or -
11 invading premises.
12 I. Pollution Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent contamination of soil, water,
13 and atmosphere from discharge of noxious,toxic substances,and pollutants produced by ,,
14 construction operations. Comply with federal, state, and local regulations.
15 1.06 �CQORDINATIOIV
16 A. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and work of the various sections of the Project Manual to
17 ensure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements,with
18 provisions for accommodating items installed later.
19 B. Notify affected utility companies and comply with their requirements.
20 C. Verify that utility requirements and characteristics of nevu operating equipment are compatible with
21 building utilities. Coordinate work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities for
22 installing, connecting to,and placing in service,such equipment.
23 D. In finished areas except as otherwise indicated, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within the
24 construction, Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements.
25 E. Coordinate completion and clean-up of work of separate sections.
26 F. After Owner (Yelm Community Schools)'s occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for
27 correction of defective v�ork and work not in accordance with Contract Documents,to minimize
28 disruption of Owner{Yelm Community Schools)'s activities.
�
29 PART 2 PR�3DUCTS
30 2.01 PATCHI�IG MATERI/�LS "
31 A. New Nlaterials: As specified in product sections; match existing products and work for patching �
32 and extending work.
33 B. Type and Quality of Existing Products: Determine by inspecting and testing products where `
34 necessary, referring to existing work as a standard.
�
35 C. Product Substitution: For any proposed change in materials, submit request for substitution
36 described in Section D1 6000.
37 PART 3 EXECUTI�N
38 3.01 EK�M��IATIUM
39 A. Verify that existing site conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsequent work.
40 Start of work means acceptance of existing conditions. �
41 B. Verify that existing substrate is capable of structural support or attachment of new work being
42 applied or attached.
43 G Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections. .�.
44 D. Take field measurements before confirming product orders or beginning fabrication,#o minimize
45 waste due to over-ordering or misfabrication. `
46 E. Verify that utility services are available, of the correct characteristics, and in the correct locations. .�
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept ImprovemeMs 01 7000 - 2 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
Y�LM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSI�N MCGQVERIV
1 F. Prior to Cutting: Examine existing conditions prior to commencing work, including elements subject
2 to damage or movement during cutting and patching. After uncovering existing work, assess
3 conditions affecting pertormance of work. Beginning of cutting or patching means acceptance of
4 existing conditions.
5 3.02 PR�PARATION
6 A. Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next materiai or substance.
7 B. Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance.
8 C. Apply manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior to
9 applying any new material or substance in contact or bond.
10 3.03 PAEINSTALLATION MEETINGS
11 A. When required in individual specification sections, convene a preinstallation meeting at the site
12 prior to commencing work of the section.
13 B. Require attendance of parties directly affecting, or affected by, work of the specific section.
14 C. Prepare agenda and preside at meeting:
15 1. Review conditions of examination, preparation and installation procedures.
16 2. Review coordination with related work.
17 3.0� LAY#NG OUT THE WORK
18 A. Verify locations of survey control points prior to starting work.
19 1. Verify layout information on Drawings, in relation to property survey, existing benchmarks and
20 field conditions before proceeding to layout Work. Locate and protect existing benchmarks
21 and control points. Preserve permanent reference points during construction
22 B. Promptly notify Architect (Erickson McGovern) of any discrepancies discovered.
23 C. Proteet survey control points prior to starting site work; preserve permanent reference points
24 during construction.
25 D. Promptly report to Architect (Erickson McGovern) the loss or destruction of any reference point or
26 relocation required because of changes in grades or other reasons.
27 E. Replace dislocated survey control points based on original survey control. Make no changes
28 without prior written notice ta Architect (Erickson McGovern).
29 F. Utilize recognized engineering survey practices.
30 1. Performance:
31 a. Layout:Working from lines and levels established by property survey, establish
32 benchmarks, control points, and markers to set lines and levels at each story of
33 construction (such as slabs, steel bearings, and imbeds) and elsewhere as needed to
34 properly locate each element of Project. Calculate and measure required dimensions
35 within indicated or recognized tolerances. Do not scale Drawings to determine
36 dimensions.
37 1) Inform: Advise entities engaged in construction activities,of marked lines and levels
38 provided for their use.
39 2) Check:As construction proceeds, check every major element for line, level and
40 plumb.
41 G. Establish elevations, lines and levels. Locate and lay out by instrumentation and similar
42 appropriate means:
43 1, Site improvements including pavements; stakes for grading, fill and topsoil placement; utility
44 locations, slopes, and invert elevations.
45 2. Grid or axis for structures.
46 3. Building foundation, column locations, ground floor elevations.
47 H. Periodically verify layouts by same means.
48 I. Maintain a complete and accurate log of control and survey work as it progresses.
2012-37/YCS Agricuftural Dept Improvements 01 7000- 3 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEP7, IMPR4VEMENTS .
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
�RICKSON MCGOVERN
1 1. Surveyor's Log: Maintain surveyor's log of control and other survey Work. Make this log
2 available for reference.
3 a. Deviations: Record deviations from required lines and {evels, and advise Architect
4 (Erickson McGovern) when deviations that exceed indicated or recognized tolerances ..
5 are detected. On Project Record Drawings, record deviations that are accepted and not
6 corrected.
7 b. Dimensions: Show sizes, locations, angles, and elevations of buildings and sitework.
8 3.05 GEIdERAL lNSi'ALLATION REQUIREMENTS
9 A. Inspection of Conditions:
10 1. Require installer of each Work component to inspect both substrate and conditions under
11 which Work is to be pertormed. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been
12 corrected in acceptable manner. Initiation of insiallation will confirm installer's acceptance of
13 work place for Work to proceed.
14 B. Install products as specified in individual sections, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions ;
15 and recommendations, and so as to avoid waste due to necessity for replacement.
16 C. Make vertical elements plumb and horizontal elements level, unless otherwise indicated.
17 D. Install equipment and fittings plumb and level, neatly aligned with adjacent vertical and horizontal
18 lines, unless otherwise indicated.
19 E. Make neat transitions between different surfaces, maintaining texture and appearance.
20 F. When existing finished surfaces are cut so that a smooth transition with new work is not possible,
21 terminate existing surface along a straight line at a natural line of division and make
22 recommendation to Architect(Erickson McGovern).
23 G. Where a change of plane of 1/4 inch or more occurs in existing work, submit recommendation for °
24 providing a smooth transition for Architect (Erickson McGovern) review and request instructions.
25 3A6 ALTERA'�IOfVS
26 A. Drawings showing existing construction and utilities are based on casual field observation and
27 existing record documents only.
28 1. Verify that construction and utility arrangements are as shown.
29 2. Report discrepancies to Architect (Erickson McGovern) before disturbing existing installation. w_
30 3. Beginning of alterations work constitutes acceptance of existing conditions.
31 B. Maintain weatherproof exterior building enclosure except for interruptions required for replacement
32 or modifications;take care to prevent water and humidity damage. �;
33 1. Where openings in exterior enclosure exist, provide construction to make exterior enclosure
34 weatherproof. f-
35 2. Insulate existing ducts or pipes that are exposed to outdoor ambient temperatures by
36 alterations work. '�
37 C. Remove existing work as indicated and as required to accomplish new work. .
38 1. Remove rotted wood, corroded metals, and deteriorated masonry and concrete; replace with
39 new construction specified. �
40 2. Remove items indicated on drawings.
41 3. Relocate items indicated on drawings.
42 4. Where new surface finishes are to be applied to existing work, perform removals, patch, and
43 prepare existing surfaces as required to receive new finish; remove existing finish if
44 necessary for successful application of new finish.
45 5. Where new surface finishes are not specified or indicated, patch holes and damaged
46 surfaces to match adjacent finished surfaces as closely as possible. -
47 D. Services (including, but not limited to, HVAC, Plumbing, Electrical, and Telecommunications):
48 Remove, relocate, and extend existing systems to accommodate new construction.
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 01 7000- 4 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 1. Maintain existing active systems that are to remain in operation; maintain access to
2 equipment and operational components; if necessary, modify instaliation to allow access or
3 provide access panel.
4 2. Where existing systems or equipment are not active and Contract Documents require
5 reactivation, put back into operational condition; repair supply, distribution, and equipment as
b required.
7 3. Where existing active systems serve occupied facilities but are to be replaced with new
g services, maintain existing systems in service until new systems are complete and ready for
g service.
10 a. Disable existing systems only to make switchovers and connections; minimize duration
11 of outages.
12 b. Provide temporary connections as required to maintain existing systems in service.
13 4. Verify that abandoned services serve only abandoned facilities.
14 5. Remove abandoned pipe, ducts, conduits, and equipment, including those above accessible
15 ceilings; remove back to source of supply where possible, otherwise cap stub and tag with
16 identification; patch holes left by removal using materials specified for new construction.
17 E. Protect existing work to remain.
18 1. Prevent movement of structure; provide shoring and bracing if necessary.
19 2. Perform cutting to accomplish removals neatly and as specified for cutting new work.
20 3. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during removal work.
21 4. Patch as specffied for patching new work.
22 F. Adapt existing work to fit new work: Make as neat and smooth transition as possible.
23 1. When existing finished surfaces are cut so that a smooth transition with new work is not
24 possible, terminate existing surface along a straight tine at a natural line of division and make
25 recommendation to Architect (Erickson McGovern).
26 2. Trim existing wood doors as necessary to clear new floor finish. Refinish trim as required.
27 G. Patching:V1/here the existing surface is not indicated to be refinished, patch to match the surface
28 finish that existed prior to cutting.Where the surface is indicated to be refinished, patch so that the
29 substrate is ready for the new finish.
30 H. Refinish existing surfaces as indicated:
31 1. Where rooms or spaces are indicated to be refinished, refinish all visible existing surtaces to
32 remain to the specified condition for each material, with a neat transition to adjacent finishes.
33 2. If inechanical or electrical work is exposed accidentally during the work, re-cover and refinish
34 to match.
35 3. Patch as specified for patching new work.
36 I. Remove demolition debris and abandoned items from alterations areas and dispose of off-site; do
37 not burn or bury.
38 J. Do not begin new construction in alterations areas before demolition is complete.
39 K. Comply with all other applicable requirements of this section.
40 3.07 PROCaR�SS CM..EANINCa
41 A. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly
42 condition.
43 B. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed or
44 remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space.
45 C. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surtace finishing, and continue cleaning to
46 eliminate dust.
47 D. Collect and remove waste materials, debris,and trash/rubbish from site periodically and dispose
48 off-site; do not burn or bury.
49 3.08 SAFETY PROCEDURES
SO A. Preliminary Work:
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 01 7000-5 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT, IMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNI7Y SCHOOLS
ERICKSOfV MCGOVERN
1 1. Prior to the start of and during the course of the Work (above and below ground),the
2 Contractor shall make a thorough survey of the entire worksite to determine all potential
3 hazards.Workmen shall be made aware of those hazards and shall be instructed in
4 procedures and the use of equipment for their protection. The Contractor shall verify the
5 location and condition ("live"or "dead") of all utilities on and near the worksite and take
6 precautions to protect his employees,the general public, and the property. --
7 B. Imminent Danger:
g 1. The Contractor shall be wholly responsible for any accidents (including death) occurring at
g any time during the progress of the work and until the final acceptance of the work by the
10 Owner which may happen to any of his workmen or those of any Subcontractor employed on
11 the building, or for any damage or injuries (including death) which his work and operations ..
12 may cause to the work being constructed, or to existing buildings, or to any tenants and
13 occupants of the property, or of the adjoining properties, or to the public or private property. -
14 C. Safety:
15 1. The Contractor shall ensure that all employees,visitors, subcontractors' employees, and
16 suppliers' employees, while on the work site, comply with the requirements of WISHA,these
17 requirements and the safety precautions contained in the several Specifications Sections.
18 The Contractor shall promptly and fully comply with, execute and, without separate charge �
19 thereof to the Owner, shall enforce compliance with the provisions of the Washington
20 Industrial Safety and Health Act of 1973, with particular attention paid but not limited to
21 Chapter 296-155,WAC Safety Standards for Construction Work;with particular attention paid
22 but not limited to Chapter 296-24 WAC General Safety and Health Standards; with particular
23 attention paid but not limited to Chapters 296-27, 196-350 and 296-360 WAC regarding �.
24 Administrative Safety and Health Act Chapter 49-17 RCW, and any addenda thereto.
25 2. The Contractor shall immediately advise the Owner of inspections conducted by WISHA at
26 the work site, and shall transmit copies of citations and violations to the Architect (Erickson
27 McGovern).
28 D. Safety Responsibilities -
29 1. Contractor shall be responsible to:
30 a. Ensure compliance with these requirements,WISHA requirements, and other safety
31 requirements.
32 b. Authorize immediate action to correct substandard safety conditions.
33 c. Review and act to ensure compliance with safety procedures with his supervisors,
34 subcontractors, and suppliers.
35 d. Make thorough daily safety inspections of the work site and immediately act to eliminate .
36 unsafe acts and unsafe conditions.
37 e. Investigate worksite accidents and recommend immediate corrective action.
38 f. Assist in the preparation of accident investigation and reporting procedures.
39 g. Be responsible for the control, availability, and use of safety equipment, including
40 employee personal protective equipment.
41 E. Request For Variances:
42 1. Requests for variances to deviate from WISHA requirements must follow the current
43 established procedures by the Agency.
44 F. Failure To Comply:
45 1. If the project is shut down due to The Contractor's failure to comply with the requirements of •
46 WISHA or other applicable safety requirements, no part of the time loss due to any such
47 suspension of operations or stop orders shall be made the subject of a claim for extension of
48 time or for increased cost or damage by the Contractor.
49 3.09 PROT�CTl�?N OF lNSTALLED WORK
50 A. Protect installed work from damage by construction operations.
51 B. Provide special protection where specified in individual specification sections. �
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 01 7000 - 6 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS
YELNI HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
''!lELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSOIJ NICGOVERN
1 C. Provide temporary and removabie protection for installed products. Control activity in immediate
2 work area to prevent damage.
3 D. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections,jambs, sills, and soffits of openings.
4 E. Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt,wear, damage, or movement of
5 heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials.
6 F. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity is necessary,
7 obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material manufacturer.
8 G. Remove protective coverings when no longer needed; reuse or recycle plastic coverings if
9 possible.
10 3.i0 SYSTEIVI S7ARTUP
11 A. Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems.
12 B. Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive
13 rotation, belt tension, control sequence, and for conditions that may cause damage.
14 C. Verify tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by
15 the equipment or system manufacturer.
16 D. Verify that wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested.
17 E. Execute start-up under supervision of applicable Contractor personnel and manufacturer's
18 representative in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.
19 F. When specified in individual specification Sections, require manufacturer to provide authorized
20 representative to be present at site to inspect, check, and approve equipment or system
21 installation prior to start-up, and to supervise placing equipment or system in operation.
22 G. Submit a written report that equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning
23 correctly.
24 3,�1 DEMONSTRATlON AND iNSTRUC'fION
25 A. Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment,trouble-shooting, servicing, maintenance,
26 and shutdown of each item of equipment at scheduled time, at equipment location.
27 B. For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation, perform demonstration for other season
28 within six (6) months.
29 C. Provide a qualified person who is knowledgeable about the Project to perform demonstration and
30 instruction of owner personnel.
31 3.12 Ai3�1�JSTING
32 A. Adjust operating products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation.
33 3.13 F�NA�C�EANIidC�
34 A. Use cleaning materials that are nonhazardous.
35 B. Clean interior and exterior glass, surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains and
36 foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces, vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces.
37 C. Remove all labels that are not permanent. Do not paint or otherwise cover fire test labels or
38 nameplates on mechanical and electrical equipment.
39 D. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition with cleaning materials appropriate to the
40 surface and material being cleaned.
41 E. Replace filters of operating equipment.
42 F. Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, and drainage systems.
43 G. Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces.
44 H. Remove waste, surplus materials,trash/rubbish, and construction facilities from the site; dispose of
45 in legal manner; do not burn or bury.
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 01 7000 - 7 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG L�EP7. IMPROVEMENTS ..
1f�L141 COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 i. Compliance: Comply with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction and safety standards for �
2 cieaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on the Owner's
3 property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful or dangerous materials into drainage systems.
4 Remove waste materials from the site and dispose of in a lawful manner ��
5 1, Where extra materials of value remaining after completion of associated Work have become
6 the Owner's property, arrange for disposition of these materials as directed.
7 3.14 CLOS�OUT PROCEDURES �.
S A. See Section 01 7800-Closeout Submittals and Procedures for additional requirements.
9 B. Make submittals that are required by governing or other authorities.
10 C. Notify Architect (Erickson McGovern) when work is considered ready for Substantial Completion. �
11 D. Submit written certification that Contract Documents have been reviewed, work has been
12 inspected, and that work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for
13 Architect(Erickson McGovern)'s review.
14 E. Correct items of work listed in executed Certificates of Substantial Completion and comply with
15 requirements for access to Owner (Yelm Community Schools)-occupied areas.
16 F. Notify Architect (Erickson McGovern) when work is considered finaliy complete.
17 G. Complete items of work determined by Architect(Erickson McGovern)'s final inspection.
18 3.i5 Tii/aI�1TENANCE
19 A. Provide service and maintenance of components indicated in specification sections.
20 B. Maintenance Period:As indicated in specification sections or, if not indicated, not less than one
21 year from the Date of Substantial Completion or the length of the specified warranty, whichever is
22 longer. `
23 C. Examine system components at a frequency consistent with reliable operation. Clean, adjust, and
24 lubricate as required.
25 D. Include systematic examination,adjustment, and lubrication of components. Repair or replace �
26 parts whenever required. Use parts produced by the manufacturer of the original component.
27 E. Maintenance service shall not be assigned or transferred to any agent or subcontractor without
28 prior written consent of the Owner(Yelm Community Schools). �-
29 END C1F SECTION
�.
«�
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 01 7000 - 8 EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS
YEL11il HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELllil COMMUIdITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 SECTICIN 02 4100
2 DEMOL9TION
3 PARi'� GENERAL
4 1,0� SECTION INCLUDES
5 A. Selective demolition of building elements for alteration purposes.
6 B. Repair procedures for selective demolition operations.
7 1.02 DESCFtiPTION
8 A. Demotish and remove from the site, in accordance with this Section but not necessary limited to,
9 the following items so indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein and other Section of the
10 Project Manual.
11 1. Remove and dispose of existing structures,foundations and all contents inside except those
12 indicated to be salvaged.
13 2. Provide necessary demolition and excavation for the new installations as indicated on
14 contract drawings and on other sections of the Project Manual.
15 3. Owner assumes no responsibility for condition of areas to be selective demolished.
16 a. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner
17 as far as practical.
18 i.133 R�LATED REQUIREiVIEidTS
19 A. Section 01 5000 -Temporary Facilities and Controls: Site fences, security, protective barriers, and
20 waste removal.
21 B. Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements: Handling and storage of items removed for salvage and
22 relocation.
23 C. Section 01 7000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Project conditions; protection of bench
24 marks, survey control points, and existing construction to remain; reinstallation of removed
25 products;temporary bracing and shoring.
26 1.04 DEFINITlONS
27 A. Remove: Remove and legally dispose of items except those indicated to be reinstalled, salvaged,
28 or to remain the Owner's property.
29 B. Existing to Remain: Protect cons�truction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during
30 selective demolition.When permitted by the Architect, items may be removed to a suitable,
31 protected storage location during selective demolition and then cleaned and reinstalled in their
32 original locations.
33 1.05 NIATERIALS I�W�ERSHIP
34 A. Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated
35 to remain Owner property, demolished materials shall become Contractor's property and shall be
36 removed from Project site, at no additional cost to the Owner.
37 1.06 PEFdiIiIITS
38 A. The Contractor shall obtain all special permits and Iicenses and give all notices required for
39 performance and completion of the selective demolition and removal work, hauling, and disposal of
40 debris.
41 1.07 RE�ERE�lCE S°�ANDARDS
42 A. AtJSI A10.6-Safety Requirements for Demolition Operations.
43 B. 29 CFR Part 1910-Occupational Safety and Health Standards, current edition.
44 1 A$ SIIBiMITT1��S
45 A. See Section 01 3000-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures.
46 1. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and
47 Division 1 Specification Sections, for information only, unless otherwise indicated.
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvemenis 02 4100 - 1 DEMOLITION
YELM Fi1GH SCHOUL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
°f�ELM COMMUNI'�Y SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 2. Permits: Submit copies of demolition, hauling, and debris disposal permits and notices for
2 record purposes.
3 3. Private Property Owner's Release: If material demolished and removed from the site will be
4 deposited on private property,submit two copies of written releases not more than 15 days
5 before the start of work. Releases shall absolve the Owner from responsibility in connection
6 with the disposing of material on private properry, and shall be signed by the owners of such
7 property on which the material will be deposited.
8 4. Proposed dust-control measures.
9 5. Proposed noise-control measures.
10 1,09 QllA�.I'i'Y ASSURANC�
11 A. Demolition Firm Qualifications: Company specializing in the type of work required.
12 1. Minimum of 2 years of experience.
13 2. Engage an experienced firm that has successfully completed selective demolition Work
14 sim+lar to that indicated for this Project. °
15 B. Standards: Compiy with ANSI A10.6 and NFPA 241.
16 1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished.
17 2, Review structural load limitations of existing structure.
18 3. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials,
19 demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.
20 4. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed by
21 selective demolition operations. `
22 1.10 SCHEDUL.ING
23 A. Arrange selective demolition schedule so as not to interfere with �wner's on-site operations. See �
24 Phasing Plan in specification Section 01100 - Summary of Work.
25 1.11 MISCE�.LAI�iEOUS GEiVERAL REQUIREMENTS
26 A. General: Comply with the following as noted in other Sections of the Project Manual. �
27 1. Erection and maintenance of shoring,temporary fencing and safety protection.
28 2. Dust control. --
29 3. Repair of damages.
30 4. Clearing and removal of rubbish and debris. �
31 1.12 PROJ��T�ONDITiONS
32 A. Comply with other requirements specified in Section 01 7000.
33 1. Owner assumes no responsibility for actual condition of buiidings to be selectively
34 demolished or removed in their entireTy. _
35 a. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner
36 as far as practical. ,
37 b. Storage or sale of removed iterris or materials on-site will not be permitted.
38 B. Hazardous Materials: '
39 1. It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work. �
40 a. If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not
41 disturb; immediately notify the Government. Hazardous materials will be removed by the ry
42 Owner under a separate contract.
43 C. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site are not permitted. '�
44 1.13 PRQdEC�G�OSE0�7T -
45 A. Existing Special Warranty: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or g
46 damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing
47 �arranties. Contact the issuer of the subject warranty for correctional work required.
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 02 4100 - 2 DEMOUTION �
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERiCKSOld MCGOVERN
�. PART 2 PRODUC�'S
2 2,p1 AitATERIA�S
3 A. The Contractor shall furnish all materials,tools, equipment, devices, appurtenances,facilities, and
4 services as required for performing the selective demolition and removal work.
5 2.02 REPAIR MATERIALS
6 A. Use repair materials identical to existing materials.
7 1. Where identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used for exposed surfaces, use
8 materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.
4 2. Use materials whose installed performance equals or surpasses that of existing materials.
10 PART 3 EXECl1TiON
11 3.01 �XAMINATION
12 A. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine e�ctent of
13 selective demolition required.
14 B. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with the intended
15 function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of the conflict.
16 Promptly submit a written report to the Architect.
17 C. Survey the condition of the buifding to determine whether remaving any element might result in
18 structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of the structure or adjacent structures
19 during selective demolition.
20 D. Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards resulting from selective demolition
21 activities.
22 3.02 PREAARATION
23 A. Drain, purge, or otherwise remove, collect, and dispose of chemicals, gases, explosives, acids,
24 flammables, or other dangerous materials before proceeding with selective demolition operations.
25 B. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations
26 to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets,walks,walkways, and other adjacent occupied
27 and used facilities.
28 C. Conduct demolition operations and remove debris to ensure minimum interference with roads,
29 streets,walks, and ather adjacent occupied and used facilities.
30 1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without
31 permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around
32 closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by governing regulations.
33 2. Conduct demolition operations to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings
34 and facilities to remain. Ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area.
35 3. Erect temporary protection, such as walks,fences and railings where required by authorities
36 having jurisdiction.
37 4. Protect existing site improvements, appurtenances, and landscaping to remain.
38 5. Provide temporary weather protection on exterior surtaces and new construction to ensure
39 that no water leakage or damage occurs to structure or interior areas.
40 6. Protect walls, ceilings,floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain and are
41 exposed during selective demolition operations.
42 D. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury
a3 to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.
44 1. Provide temporary weather protection on exterior surtaces and new construction to ensure
n5 that no water leakage or damage occurs to structure or interior areas.
46 2, Protect walls, ceilings,floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain and are
47 exposed during selective demolition operations.
48 E. Provide barriers and appropriate signs meeting requirements of 29 CFR 1910 for size and color
49 where necessary to restrict pedestrians from wandering into construction areas.
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 02 4100- 3 DEMOLITION
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS ,
YEi�M COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 3.t33 F'ULLUTION CONTROL.S
2 A. Provide services for effective air and water pollution controls as required by local authorities having
3 jurisdiction.
4 B. Dust Control: Use temporary enclosures, and other suitable methods to limi�spread of dust and
5 dirt. Comply with governing environmental-protection regulations.
6 1. Use water mist,temporary enclosures, and othec suitable methods to limit the spread of dust
7 and dirt. Comply with governing environmental protection regulations. �
8 a. Do not use water when it may damage existing construction or create hazardous or
9 objectionable conditions, such as ice,flooding, and pollution.
10 b. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surtaces
11 and areas.
12 c. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will
13 convey debris to grade level.
14 d. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective _
15 demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before start of
16 selective demolition.
17 C. Disposal: Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces
18 and areas.
19 1. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will
20 convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent.
21 D. Cleaning: Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust,dirt, and debris caused by
22 selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective
23 demolition operations began.
24 3.04 NOT1FiCATIO�IS `
25 A. Notifications of Concerning Utilities:All the utility companies owning conduits and pipes running to
26 and from the building and/or property are to be notified to make arrangements for their removal or
27 capping, in accordance with the instructions from the utility companies, local governing agencies, �
28 and/or the Engineer.All other utilities, such as the sewer and storm drain, shall be protected,
29 supported or removed, in accordance with the instructions from the Engineer.
30 3.05 GE��RAL PRU��EDURES AND PROJECT COMDITIONS �
3� A. Comply with applicable codes and regulations for demolition operations and safety of adjacent
32 structures and the public. ""
33 1. Obtain required permits.
�
34 2. Use Qf explosives is not permitted.
35 3. Take precautions to prevent catastrophic or uncontrolled collapse of structures to be �
36 removed; do not allow worker or public access within range of potential collapse of unstable
37 structures. �
38 4. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary barriers and security devices.
39 5. Use physical barriers to prevent access to areas that could be hazardous to workers or the '�
40 public.
41 6. Conduct operations to minimize effects on and interference with adjacent structures and �
42 occupants.
43 7. Do not close or obstruct roadways or sidewalks without permission from the Architect.
44 8. Conduct operations to minimize obstruction of public and private entrances and exits; do not �-
45 obstruct required exits at any time; protect persons using entrances and exits from removal
4b operations.
47 9. Obtain written permission from owners of adjacent properties when demolition equipment will
48 traverse, infringe upon or limit access to their property.
49 B. Do not begin removal until receipt of notification to proceed from Owner.
50 C. Do not begin removal until built elements to be salvaged or relocated have been removed.
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 02 4100- 4 DEMOLITION
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 D. Do not begin removal until vegetation to be relocated has been removed and specified measures
2 have been taken to protect vegetation to remain.
3 E. Protect existing structures and other elements that are not to be removed.
4 1. Provide bracing and shoring.
5 2. Prevent movement or settlement of adjacent structures.
6 3. Stop work immediately if adjacent structures appear to be in danger.
7 F. Jackhammering:
g 1. Jackhammering will be permitted only to a limited degree with prior approval of the Engineer.
9 2. Do not jackhammer within 2 inches of reinforcing or structural steel to remain.
10 a. Remove final2 inches of material with a chipping gun.
11 G. Cutting:
12 1. Cut new openings neat, as close as possible to profiles indicated.
13 2. Do not cut or alter structural members without the prior written approval of the Engineer.
14 3. Remove concrete and masonry whenever possible by saw cutting or similar approved
15 method.
1b H. If hazardous materials are discovered during removal operations, stop work and notify Architect
17 and Owner; hazardous materials include regulated asbestos containing materials, lead, PCB's,
18 and mercury.
19 3.D6 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION FOR ALTERATIOfVS
20 A. Drawings showing existing construction and utilities are based on casual field observation and
21 existing record documents only.
22 1. Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction
23 and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing
24 regulations and as follows:
25 a. Proceed with selective demolition systematically,from higher to lower level. Complete
26 selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting
27 members on the next lower level.
28 b. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use
29 cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction.
30 Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and
31 chopping,to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to
32 remain.
33 c. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring
34 existing finished surfaces.
35 d. Do not use cutting torches without Owner's approval, and wait until work area is cleared
36 of fVammable materials.At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors,verify
37 condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain
38 fiire watch and portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.
39 e. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches.
40 f. Remove decayed, vermin-infested, or otherwise dangerous or unsuitable materials and
41 promptly dispose of off-site.
42 g. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to avoid
43 free fall and to prevent ground impact or dust generation.
44 h. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to
45 impose excessive loads on supporting walls,floors, or framing.
46 i. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly.
47 j. Return elements of construction and surfaces that are to remain to condition existing
48 before selective demolition operations began.
49 2. Remove all mechanical and electrical devices, panels, conduit,wiring, and other items not for
50 reuse in new systems.
51 3, Verify that construction and utility arrangements are as shown.
52 4. Report discrepancies to Architect before disturbing existing installation.
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 02 4100- 5 DEMOLITION
YELilil HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNlTY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 B. Maintain weatherproof exterior buiiding enclosure except for interruptions required for replacement
2 ar modifications;take care to prevent water and humidity damage.
3 C. Remove existing work as indicated and as required to accomplish new work.
4 1. Coordinate with General Contractor and do not remove any more of the existing roofing than
5 can be replaced by the new roofing in a single day.
6 2. Remove items indicated on drawings.
7 D. Services (Including but not limited to HVAC, Plumbing, Electrical, and Telecommunications):
S Remove existing systems and equipment as indicated.
9 1. Maintain existing active systems that are to remain in operation; maintain access to
10 equipment and operational components. _
11 2. Where existing active systems serve occupied facilities but are to be replaced with new
12 setvices, maintain existing systems in service until new systems are complete and ready for
13 service.
14 3. See Section 01 1000 for other limitations on outages and required notifications.
15 4. Verify that abandoned services serve only abandoned facilities before removal.
1b 5. Remove abandoned pipe, ducts, conduits, and equipment, panels, devices ; remove
17 back to source of supply where possible, otherwise cap stub and tag with identification.
18 6. Remove air-conditioning equipment without releasing refrigerants.
19 7. If unanticipated mechanical, electrical,or structural elements that confiict with intended
20 function or design are encountered, investigate and measure both nature and extent of the
21 conflict. Submit report to Owner's Representative in written, accurate detaii. Pending receipt e--
22 of directive from Owner's Representative, rearrange selective demolition schedule as
23 necessary to continue overall job progress without undue delay.
24 E. Protect existing work to remain.
25 1. Prevent movement of structure; provide shoring and bracing if necessary.
26 2. Perform cutting to accomplish removals neatly and as specified for cutting new work.
27 3. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during removal work.
28 4. Patch as specified for patching new work.
29 F. Concrete: Demolish in sections. Cut concrete full depth at junctures with construction to remain
30 and at regular intervals, using power-driven saw,then remove concrete between saw cuts.
31 G. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished,then break up and
32 remove. r.
33 H. Roofing: Remove no more existing roofing than can be covered in one day by new roofing and so
34 that building interior remains watertight and vveathertight. Refer to Division 7 roofing Sections for �
35 new roofirsg requirements.
36 1. Remove existing roof inembrane,flashings, copings, and roof accessories. '
37 2. Remove existing roofing system down to substrate. ,�
38 I. Air-Conditioning Equipment: Remove equipment without releasing refrigerants.
39 3.07 PA7��91�('a AN�1 R'�i�AIRS
40 A. Damage to existing materials and surfaces of adjacent construction, incurred during selective °
41 demolition process shall be repaired or restored to their condition prior to the damage.This repair
42 or restoration work shall be done at no additional cost to the Owner.
43 B. Patch with materials similar in composition and dimension.
44 1. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into adjoining
45 construction to remain in a manner that eliminates evidence of patching and refinishing.
46 2. Patch and repair the damaged areas of the floors, walls, and ceilings, where walls or
47 partitions have been removed.
48 3. Provide a flush and even surtace with durable seams that are as invisible as possible.
49 4. Closely match new texture to existing adjacent surface texture and blend the two together.
50 5. Where patching a smooth wall or ceiling surtaces, extend final paint coat over entire surface .�
51 of wall or ceiling after the application of primer and first coat of finish.
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 02 4100 - 6 DEMOLITION
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON iNCGOVERN
1 C. Floors and Walls:Where walls or partitions that are demolished extend one finished area into
2 another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surtace of
3 uniform finish color,texture, and appearance. Remove existing floor and wall coverings and
4 replace with new materials, if necessary,to achieve uniform color and appearance.
5 1. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with
6 installation requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications.
7 2. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, appiy primer and intermediate paint coats over
8 patch and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing patch. Provide
9 additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces.
10 3. Where feasible,test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate integrity af
11 installation.
12 4. Voids, holes, and other demolition caused by the removal of inechanical and electrical items
13 shall be filled and repaired to match existing surfaces.
14 D. Ceilings:Patch, repair, or rehang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface
15 of uniform appearance.
16 1. Voids, holes, and other demolition caused by the removal of inechanical and electrical items
17 shall be filled and repaired to match existing surfaces.
18 3.08 DE�RIS AND INASTE REMOVAL
19 A. Remove debris,junk, and trash from site.
20 1. Promptly dispose of demolished materials. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate
21 on-site.
22 a. Transport demolished materials off Owner property and legally dispose of them off site at
23 no additional cost to the Owner.
24 2. Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.
25 3. Burning of demolished materials is strictly prohibited.
26 B. Leave site in clean condition, ready for subsequent work.
27 C. Clean up spillage and wind-blown debris from public and private lands.
28 3,U9 CLEANIN�fa
29 A. Sweep the building broom clean on completion of selective demolition operation.
30 B. After demolition operations are completed, or along with demolition operations, as appropriate,
31 clean the entire buildings and site of all dirt and dust, cobwebs, oil and grease, stains of asphalt
32 and paint, and other debris.
33 C. Ceilings, walls, and floors shall be dusted and wiped clean with brooms and cloths or other
34 suitable methods as required to clean all surfaces free of dirt and dust.
35 D. Use suitable cleaning fluids or solvents, steel wool, blow-torch burning,scraping, and power
36 sanding as required to remove the various incrustations and stains, including asphalt.
37 ���3 OF SECTIO�d
2012-37/YCS Agricuftural Dept Improvements 02 4100 - 7 DEMOLITION
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
� SECTiON 03 3000
2 CAST-i1V-PL.ACE CON�RETE
3 pART 1 GENERAL
4 1.�D1 SECTlOid INCLUDES
5 A. Concrete formwork.
6 B. Floors, walks and slabs on grade.
7 C. Concrete founda#ion walls.
8 D. Concrete reinforcement.
9 E. Joint devices associated with concrete work.
10 f. Slab Base Course.
11 G. Concrete curing.
12 1.Q2 RELATED REQUiREMENTS
13 A. Section 07 1900- Slab Sealers. Sealing of interior concrete siabs.
14 B. Section 07 9005 -Joint Sealers: Sealants for saw cut joints and isolation joints in slabs.
15 1.D3 �EFERENCE STANDARDS
16 A. ACI 2i 1.1 - Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass
17 Concrete;Ame�ican Concrete Institute International; 1991 (Reapproved 20Q2).
18 B. ACI SP-16-89, "Field Reference Manual."
19 C. AGI 301 -Spec'rfications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American Concrete Institute
20 International; 2010.
21 D. ACI 302.1 R- Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction;American Concrete Institute
22 International; 2004 (errata 2007).
23 E. ACI 304R -Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete; American Concrete
24 Institute International; 2000.
25 F, ACI 305R - Hot Weather Concreting;American Concrete Institute International;2010.
26 G. ACI 306R - Cold Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute International; 2010.
27 H. ACI 308 -Standard Practice for Curing Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 2001.
28 I. ACI 318- Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary;American
29 Concrete Institute International; 2008.
30 J. ASTM A615/A615M - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete
31 Reinforcement; 2009b.
32 K. ASTM A884/A884M - Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Steel Wire and Welded Wire
33 Reinforcement; 2006.
34 �. ASTM C39/C39M -Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete
35 Specimens; 2010.
36 M. ASTM C94/C94M - Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete; 2011.
37 N. ASTM C143/C143M -Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement Concrete; 2010a.
38 O. ASTM C150- Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2011.
39 P. ASTM C171 - Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete; 2007.
40 Q. ASTM C173/C173M -Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the
41 Volumetric Method; 2010b.
42 R. ASTM C309-Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing
43 Concrete; 2007.
2012-37!YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 03 3000 - 1 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
YELiVI HIGH SCHOOL
AG C1EPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELiV! COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERtCKSON MCGOVERN
1 S. ASTM C685/C685M -Standard Specification for Concrete Made by Volumetric Batching and
2 Continuous Mixing; 2010.
3 T. ASTM C881/C881 fV1 -Standard Specification for Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for
4 Concrete; 2010.
5 U. ASTiVI C1059/C1059M -Standard Specification for Latex Agents for Bonding Fresh to Hardened
6 Concrete; 1999 (Reapproved 2008).
7 V. ASTM D1751 - Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving
8 and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types); 2004 (Reapproved
9 2008).
10 W. AST�II E1155 -Standard Test Method for Determining F (F) Floor Flatness and F (L} Floor
11 Levelness Numbers; 1996 (Reapproved 2008).
12 X. ASTM E 1643 - Standard Practice for Installation of Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with
13 Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs; 1998 (Reapproved 2005}.
14 Y. ASTM E1745- Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Soil
15 or Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs; 2009.
16 Z. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI), °Manual of Standard Practice.°
17 1,04 SUBMITa'ALS
18 A. See Section 01 3000-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures.
19 B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on manufactured products showing compliance with
20 specified requirements.
21 C. Samples: Submit samples of underslab vapor retarder to be used.
22 D. Shop drawings shall be furnished by Contractor for fabrication, bending, and placement of '
23 concrete reinforcement. Comply with ACI SP-66 (88), "ACI Detailing Manual,"showing bar
24 schedules, stirrup spacing, diagrams of bent bars, and arrangement of concrete reinforcement.
25 Include special reinforcement required for openings through concrete structures.
26 E. Materials certificates in lieu of materials laboratory test reports when permitted by Architect.
27 Materials certificates shall be signed by manufacturer and Contractor, certifying that each material
28 item complies with or exceeds specified requirements. Provide certification from admixture
29 manufacturers that chloride content complies with specification requirements.
30 1.05 QtJAL1TY ASSl1RAMCE
31 A. Pertorm work of this section in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 318.
32 B. Follow recommendations of ACI 305R when concreting during hot weather.
33 C. Follow recommendations of ACI 306R when concreting during cold weather.
34 D. ACI SP-16-89, "Field Reference Manual". �
35 E. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI), "Manual of Standard Practice." .
36 PART 2 PRODiJ�TS
37 2.0� FQRiNVlIOR'K
38 A. Form Materials: Contractor's choice of standard products with sufficient strength to withstand
39 hydrostatic head without distortion in excess of permitted tolerances.
40 1. Form Facing for Exposed Finish Concrete: Contractor's choice of materials that will provide
41 smooth,stain-free final appearance.
42 a. Plywood, metal, metal framed plywood faced, or other acceptable panel type materials,
43 to provide continuous, straight, smooth, exposed surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable .
44 sizes to minimize number of joints and to conform to joint system shown on drawings.
45 2. Forms for Unexposed Finish Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or other acceptable material.
46 Provide lumber dressed on at least 2 edges and 1 side for tight fit.
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 03 3000 - 2 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
YELf1A HIGH SGHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 3. Form Coating: Release agent that will not adversely affect concrete or interfere with
2 application of coatings.
3 a, Provide commercial formulation form-coating compounds with a maximum VOC of 350
4 g/I that will not bond with,stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair
5 subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.
6 4. Form Ties: Factory fabricated, adjustable length, removable or snap off metal form ties,
7 designed to prevent form deflection and to prevent spalling concrete upon removal. Provide
8 units that will leave no metal closer than 1 1/2 inches to exposed surface.
9 a. Provide ties that, when removed, will leave holes not larger than 1 inch diameter in
10 concrete surtace.
11 5. Form Ties: Cone snap type that will leave no metal within 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) of concrete
12 surface.
13 2A2 REINFORCIEMENT
14 A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615/A615M Grade 60 (420).
15 1. Type: Deformed billet-steel bars.
16 B. Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement:ASTM A 82, plain, cold-drawn steel.
17 1. Form: Coiled Rolls.
18 2. Welded Wire Fabric:ASTM A 185, welded steel wire fabric.
19 3. Mesh Size and Wire Gage: As indicated on drawings. (_x�.
20 C. Reinforcement Accessories:
21 1. Tie Wire:Annealed, minimum 16 gage (1.5 mm).
22 2. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers: Sized and shaped for adequate support of
23 reinforcement during concrete placement.
24 a. Use wire-bar or plastic type supports complying with CRSI specifications.
25 1) For slabs on grade, use supports with sand plates or horizontal runners where base
26 material will not support chair legs.
27 2.03 CON+CRETE M�►TERIALS
28 A. Cement:ASTM C 150,Type II - Moderate Portland type or Type I-II.
29 1. Use one brand of cement throughout project unless otherwise acceptable to Architect.
30 B. Water: Clean and not detrimental to concrete.
31 C. Fiber Reinforcement:As required on Drawings.
32 2.44 Ch1E!lU1iCAL ADMIX�URES
33 A. Do not use chemicals that will result in soluble chloride ions in excess of 0.1 percent by weight of
34 cement.
35 2.�i5 SLAB BASE�O�JRSE
36 A. General: Drainage course consists of placement of crushed gravel material, in layer of 4 inch
37 thickness, over subgrade surface to support concrete building slabs.
38 1. Slab Base Course: Use coarse aggregate,WSDOT 9-03.1(3) C, Grading No. 5, with the
39 following proportions:
40
Sieve Size Percent Passin
� 3/4" 80- 100
3/8" 10- 40
#4 0 - 4
41
42 B, Placing: Place base course material on prepared subgrade in layers of uniform thickness,
43 conforming to indicated cross-section and thickness. Maintain optimum moisture content for
44 compacting material during placement operations. Compact to 95 percent maximum dry density.
2012-37/YCS Agrfcuttural Dept Improvements 03 3000- 3 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELIlYI COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 1. Level base material between screeds to 1/4 inch in 10 feet then compact to specified density. °
2 Keep smooth and level during all operations including concrete plaoement.
3 2,�5 �CONCRETE,4CCESSORIES
4 A. Reglets: Formed steel sheet, galvanized, with temporary filler to prevent concrete intrusion during
5 placement.
6 B. Bonding Agent:ASTM C 1059, Type II acrylic non-redispersable type.
7 C. Epoxy Bonding System:ASTM C 881,type as required by project conditions. Provide Concresive �
8 LPL manufactured by Master Builders or approved.
9 D. Absorptive Cover: Burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf,weighing approximately 9 oz. per sq. yd.,
10 complying with AASHTO M 182, Class 2. Always shall be covered with Moisture-Retaining Cover.
11 E. Liquid Curing Compound: ASTM C309, Type 1, clear or translucent.
12 1. Liquid Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: Liquid-type membrane-forming curing
13 compound complying with ASTM C 309, Type I, Class A, and 20% min. Solids. Provide one �
14 of the foltowing or approved:
15 a. Sonneborn: Kure-N-Seal 30
16 b. W.R. Meadows: Sealtight CS-309-25
17 c. Masco: Mascocure- Biocure
18 F. See Section 07 1900- Slab Sealers for requirements for sealing slabs.
19 2.07 JOI�VT DEYICES AND M/�►TERIALS
20 A. Waterstops: Rubber type, COE CRD-C 513.
21 B. Joint Filler: Nonextruding, resilient asphalt impregnated fiberboard or felt, complying with ASTM D
22 1751, 1/4 inch (6 mm)thick and 4 inches (200 mm) deep;tongue and groove profile. .
23 C. Construction Joint Devices: Integral gafvanized steel; 1/8 inch L_mm)thick,formed to tongue
24 and groove profile,with removable top strip exposing sealant trough, knockout holes spaced at 6
25 inches (150 mm), ribbed steel spikes with tongue to fit top screed edge.
26 2.08 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN
27 A. As required on Drawings (See Structural Notes on Structural Drawings).
28 B. Ready Mix Concrete: Comply with requirements of ASTM C 94, and as specified.
29 1. Add all ingredients including all admixtures at the batch plant during the mixing time with the
30 weights recarded on the delivery ticket. This includes all Cement,Aggregate, Water, and
31 Admixtures.
32 2. When air temperature is between 85 deg F (30 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce
33 mixing and delivery time from 1 1/2 hours to 75 minutes, and when air temperature is above ..
34 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.
35 C. Admixtures:Add acceptable admixtures as recommended in ACI 211.1 and at rates recommended `�
3b by manufacturer.
37 2.09 MIXI�IG
38 A. On Project Site: Mix in drum type batch mixer, complying with ASTM C685. Mix each batch not
39 less than 1-1/2 minutes and not more than 5 minutes.
�0 B. Transit lUfixers: Comply with ASTM C94/C94M.
41 PART 3 EXEGUTIO� LL
42 3.p1 G�MERAL
43 A. Mix, place, vibrate,finish and cure concrete per AC1301. _
44 B. Coordinate the installation of joint materials and vapor retarders/barrier, and other related
45 materials with placement of forms and reinforcing steeL
46 3,02 EKAMINATit�N
47 A. Verify lines, levels, and dimensions before proceeding with work of this section.
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 03 3000 - 4 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
YELII►1 HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. lMPROVEMENTS
Y�LM COMMUNITY SCHOULS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 3,�3 '�OR�►IS
2 A. General: Design, erect, support, brace, and maintain formwork to support vertical and lateral,static
3 and dynamic loads that might be applied until concrete structure can support such loads. Construct
4 formwork so concrete members and structures are of correct size, shape, alignment, elevation,
5 and position. Maintain formwork construction tolerances and surface irregularities complying with
6 ACI 347.
7 B. Construct forms to sizes, shapes, lines, and dimensions shown and to obtain accurate alignment,
8 location, grades, level, and plumb work in finished structures. Provide for openings, offsets,
9 sinkages, keyways, recesses, moldings, rustications, reglets, chamfers, blocking, screeds,
10 bulkheads, anchorages and inserts, and other features required in work. Use selected materials to
11 obtain required finishes. Solidly butt joints and provide backup at joints to prevent leakage of
12 cement paste.
13 C. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surtaces. Provide
14 crush plates or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top
15 forms for inclined surfaces where slope is too steep to place concrete with bottom forms only. Kerf
1b wood inserts for forming keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like,for easy removal.
17 D. Provide temporary openings for clean-outs and inspections where interior area of formwork is
18 inaccessible before and during concrete placement. Securely brace temporary openings and set
19 tightly to forms to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at
20 inconspicuous locations.
21 E. Chamfer exposed corners and edges as indicated, using wood, metal, PVC, or rubber chamfer
22 strips fabricated to produce uniform smooth lines and tight edge joints.
23 F. Provisions for Other Trades: Provide openings in concrete formwork to accommodate work of
24 other trades. Determine size and location of openings, recesses, and chases from trades providing
25 such items.Accurately place and securely support items built into forms.
26 G. Cleaning and Tightening: Thoroughly clean forms and adjacent surtaces to receive concrete.
27 Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, or other debris just before placing concrete. Retighten forms
28 and bracing before placing concrete, as required,to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper
29 alignment.
30 H. Forms for Slabs: Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve
31 required elevations and contours in finished surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed
32 strips using strike off templates or compacting type screeds.
33 3A4 PREPARATION
34 A. Formwork:Comply with requirements of ACI 301. Design and fabricate forms to support all applied
35 loads until concrete is cured, and for easy removal without damage to concrete.
36 B. Verify that forms are clean and free of rust before applying release agent.
37 C. Coordinate placement of embedded items with erection of concrete formwork and placement of
38 form accessories.
39 D. Prepare previously placed concrete by cleaning with steel brush and applying bonding agent in
40 accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
41 E. In locations where new concrete is doweled to existing work, drill holes in existing concrete, insert
42 steel dowels and pack solid with non-shrink grout.
43 F. Interior Slabs on Grade: Install vapor retarder under interior slabs on grade. Lap joints minimum 6
44 inches (150 mm). Seal joints, seams and penetrations watertight with manufacturer's
45 recommended products and follow manufacturer's written instructions. Repair damaged vapor
46 retarder before covering.
47 G. Cold Weather Preparation;
48 1. Remove all snow, ice, and frost from the surfaces, including reinforcement, against which the
49 concrete is to be placed. Before beginning concrete placement,thaw the subgrade to the
50 depth specified in the Contract Documents. Do not place concrete around massive
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 03 3000- 5 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
YELNI HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
`i'��141 COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICK50N IVICGOVERN
1 embedments identified in the Concrete Documents unless such embedments are at a
2 temperature above freezing.
3 3.{D5 SL�1� BASE�OI�RSE
4 A. General: Drainage course consists of placement of crushed gravel material, in layer of 4 inch
5 thickness, over subgrade surface to support concrete building slabs.
6 B. Placing: Place base course material on prepared subgrade in layers of uniform thickness,
7 conforming to indicated cross-section and thickness. Maintain optimum moisture content for
8 compacting material during placement operations. Compact to 95 percent maximum dry density.
9 3.06 1NSTALLING REINFORC�MENT AIVD OTHER EMBEDDED ITEMS
10 A. Comply with requirements of ACI 301. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, and
11 accurately position, support, and secure in place to achieve not less than minimum concrete
12 coverage required for protection.
13 B. Install welded wire reinforcement in maximum possible lengths, and offset end laps in both
14 directions. Splice laps with tie wire.
15 3.p7 PL.ACING CONCRETE
16 A. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 304R. %
17 B. Place concrete for floor slabs in accordance with ACI 302.1 R.
18 1. All floor slabs requiring steel reinforcing (bars or weld fabric) shall be place on chairs,
19 bolsters, bar supports, and spacers, only. Post lifting (pulling during or after concrete pour) is
20 not permitted.
21 C. Notify Architect not less than 24 hours prior to commencement of placement operations.
22 D. Placing Concrete in Forms: Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers no deeper than 24 `
23 inches and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints.Where placement consists of several
24 layers, place each layer while preceding layer is still plastic to avoid cold joints.
25 1. Consolidate placed concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand ,_
26 spading, rodding, or tamping. Use equipment and procedures for consolidation of concrete
27 complying with ACI 309.
28 2. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators
29 vertically at uniformly spaced locations no farther than the visible effectiveness of the
30 machine. Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches into
31 preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to set.
32 At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and
33 complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mix to
34 segregate.
35 E. Placing Concrete Slabs: Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a continuous operation, within
36 limits of construction joints, until the placing of a panel or section is completed. "
37 1. Consolidate slab concrete during placing operations so that concrete is thoroughly worked
38 around reinforcement, other embedded items and into corners.
39 2. Bring slab surfaces to correct level with straightedge and strike off. Use bull floats or darbies ,..
40 to smooth surface,free of humps or hollows. Do not disturb slab surfaces prior to beginning
41 finishing operations.
42 3. Maintain reinforcing in proper position on chairs during concrete placement.
43 F. Cold Weather Placing: Comply with provisions of ACI 306 and as follows. Protect concrete work
44 from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost,freezing actions, or low
45 temperatures.
46 1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4 deg C), uniformly z
47 heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less
48 than 50 deg F (10 deg C) and not more than 80 deg F (27deg C) at point of placement.
49 2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on
�_
50 frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.
2012-37/YCS AgricuRural Dept Improvements 03 3000 - 6 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE ,
YELNI HIGH SCHOOL.
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, and other materials containing antifreeze agents or
2 chemical accelerators unless otherwise accepted in mix designs.
3 4. Scheduling Protection Materials:
4 a. All materials and equipment required for protection shall be available at the project site
5 before cold weather concreting.
6 G. Hot Weather Placing:When hot weather conditions exist that would seriously impair quality and
7 strength of concrete, place concrete in compliance with ACI 305 and as specified.
8 1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of placement below
9 90 deg F (32 deg C). Mixing water may be chilled, or chopped ice may be used to control
10 temperature provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water.
11 Use of liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.
12 2. Cover reinforcing steel with water soaked burlap if it becomes too hot,so that steel
13 temperature will not exceed the ambient air temperature immediately before embedment in
14 concrete.
15 3. Cool placing environment as follows: Fog spray forms, reinforcing steel, and subgrade just
16 before concrete is placed. Keep subgrade moisture uniform without puddles or dry areas.
17 4. Use water-reducing retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or
18 other adverse placing conditions,when acceptable to Architect.
19 H. Ensure reinforcement, inserts,waterstops, embedded parts, and formed construction joint devices
20 will not be disturbed during concrete placement.
21 I. Finish floors level and flat, unless otherwise indicated, within the tolerances specified below.
22 3.�8 SLAB,JOINTING
23 A. Locate joints as indicated on the drawings.
24 B. Anchor joint fillers and devices to prevent movement during concrete placement.
25 C. lsolation Joints: Use preformed joint filler with removable top section for joint sealant,total height
26 equal to thickness of slab, set flush with top of slab.
27 D. Repair underslab vapor retarder damaged during placement of concrete reinforcing. Repair with
28 vapor retarder material; lap over damaged areas minimum 6 inches (150 mm) and seal watertight.
29 E. Separate slabs on grade from vertical surfaces with joint filler.
30 F. Install joint devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
31 G. Install construction joint devices in coordination with floor slab pattern placement sequence. Set
32 top to required elevations. Secure to resist movement by wet concrete.
33 H. Maintain records of concrete placement. Record date, location, quantity, air temperature,and test
34 samples taken.
35 I. Do not interrupt successive placement; do not permit cold joints to occur.
36 J. Screed floors level, maintaining surface flatness of maximum 1/4 inch in 10 ft. (6 mm/3 m).
37 3.0� Jt9l�l�TS
38 A. Construction Joints: Locate and install construction joints as indicated or, if not indicated, locate so
39 as not to impair strength and appearance of the st�ucture, as acceptable to Architect.
40 B. Provide keyways at least 1-1/2 inches deep in construction joints between walls and footings.
41 Bulkheads designed and accepted for this purpose may be used for slabs.
42 C. Place construction joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across
43 construction joints except as otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of
44 strip placements.
45 D. Use bonding agent on existing concrete surfaces that will be joined with fresh concrete. Follow
46 manufacturer's directions on mixing and timing of placement.
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 03 3000- 7 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNII'Y SCHOOLS
ER�CKSUId MCGOVERN
1 E. Isolation Joints in Slabs on Ground: Construct isolation joints in slabs on ground at points of °
2 contact between slabs on ground and vertical surtaces,such as column pedestals,foundation
3 walls, grade beams, and other locations as indicated.
4 1. Joint filler and sealant materials are specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants". ,
5 F. Contraction (Control) Joints in Slabs on Ground: Construct contraction joints in slabs on ground in
6 square pattern spaced at 16 feet o.c. maximum in 4 inch thick slabs or to pattern as shown on
7 drawings. If joint pattern not shown, provide Drawings for Architect's approval, showing joints not
8 exceeding 16 feet in either direction and located to conform to bay spacing wherever possible (at "
9 column centerlines, half bays,third bays).
10 1. Form contraction joints by inserting premolded plastic, hardboard, or fiberboard strip into
11 fresh concrete in straight lines until top surtace of strip is flush with slab surface. Tool slab
12 edges round on each side of insert.After concrete has cured, remove inserts and clean
13 groove of loose debris.Zip Strips are not allowed.
14 2. Saw cut joints in concrete, at each control joint location, as soon as the slab will support the
15 weight of the saw and operator without disturbing#he final finish. Normally 2 hours maximum `
16 after final finishing or 150 psi. Joints to be 1/8 inch wide and 1/4 slab depth saw cut.
17 3. Joint fillers and sealants are specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants".
18 3.10 1�1STALLATIUN OF ENlBEDDED ITEMS �
19 A. General: Set and build into formwork anchorage devices and other embedded items required for
20 other work that is attached to or supported by cast in place concrete. Use setting drawings,
21 diagrams, instrwctions, and directions provided by suppliers of items to be attached thereta
22 3.11 PREPe4�AT10N OF �OFtM S�IRFACES
23 A. General: Coat contact surfaces of forms with an approved, nonresidual, low VOC, form coating
24 compound before placing reinforcement. -
25 B. Do not allow excess form coating material to accumulate in forms or to come into contact with
26 in-place concrete surfaces against which fresh concrete will be placed. Apply in compliance with
27 manufacturer's instructions.
28 C. Coat steel forms with a nonstaining, rust preventative material. Rust stained steel formwork is not
29 acceptable.
30 3.i2 FLOOR FI�►TNESS AND LEVELNESS TOLERANCES
31 A. Minimum F (F) Floor Flatness and F(L) Floor Levelness Values:
32 1. Exposed to View and Foot Traffic: F (F) of 20; F(L) of 15, on-grade only.
33 2. Under Thin Resilient Flooring: F (F) of 35; F(L) of 25, on-grade only. w.
34 B. Measure F (F) and F (L) in accordance with ASTM E1155,within 48 hours after slab installation;
35 report both composite overall values and local values for each measured section. rc�
36 C. Correct the slab surface if composite overall value is less than specified and if local value is less �
37 than two-thirds of specified value or less than F(F) 13/F{L) 10.
38 D. Correct defects by grinding or by removal and replacement of the defective work. Areas requiring �
39 corrective work will be identified. Re-measure corrected areas by the same process.
40 3.13 C0�14CRETE FINISHING
41 A. Repair surface defects, including tie holes, immediately after removing formwork.
42 B. Unexposed Form Finish: Rub down or chip off fins or other raised areas 1/4 inch (6 mm) or more in �
43 height.
44 C. Exposed Form Finish: Rub down or chip off and smooth fins or other raised areas 1/4 inch (6 mm)
45 or more in height. Provide finish as follows:
46 1. Smooth Rubbed Finish:Wet concrete and rub with carborundum brick or other abrasive, not
47 more than 24 hours after form removal.
48 D. Monolithic Slab Finishes
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 03 3000- 8 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT, IMPROVEMENTS
'YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 1. Float Finish: Apply float finish to monolithic slab surfaces to receive trowel finish and other
2 finishes as spec'rfied; slab surfaces to be covered with membrane or elastic waterproofing,
3 membrane or elastic roofing, or sand bed terrazzo; and as otherwise indicated.
4 a. After screeding, consolidating, and leveling concrete slabs,do not work surface until
5 ready for floating. Begin floating, using float blades or float shoes only, when surface
6 water has disappeared, or when concrete has stiffened sufficiently to permit operation of
7 power driven floats, or both. Consolidate surface with power driven floats or by hand
g floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Check and level surface plane to a
g tolerance not exceeding 1/4 inch in 10 feet when checked with a 10-foot straightedge,
10 ACI 301 Class B. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Uniformly slope surfaces to
11 drains. Immediately after leveling, refloat surtace to a uniform, smooth, granular texture.
12 2. Nonslip Broom Finish: Apply a nonslip broom finish to exterior concrete plaiforms, steps, and
13 ramps, and elsewhere as indicated.
14 a. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen concrete surface by brooming with fiber
15 bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with
16 Architect before application.
17 E. In areas with floor drains, maintain floor elevation at walls; pitch surfaces uniformly to drains at
18 1:50 nominal.
19 3,1� CURING AND PROTECTION
20 A. Comply with requirements of ACI 308R. Immediately after placement, protect concrete from
21 premature drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury.
22 B. Cold Weather Protection Temperature:
23 1. Unless otherwise specified, the minimum temperature of concrete during the protection
24 period shall be as specified in ACI 306.1-90. Temperatures specified to be maintained during
25 the protection period shall be those measured at the concrete surface, whether the surtace is
26 in contact with formwork, insulation, or air. Measure the temperature with a surface
27 temperature measuring device having an accuracy of±2 F. Measure the temperature of
28 concrete in each placement at regular time intervals as specified in the Contract Documents.
29 2. Termination of Protection:
30 a. The maximum decrease in temperature measured at the surface of the concrete in a
31 24-hour period shall not exceed the values as specified in ACI 306.1-90. Do not exceed
32 these limits until the surface temperature of the concrete is within 20 F. of the ambient or
33 surrounding temperatures.When the surface temperature of the concrete is within 20 F.
34 of the ambient or surrounding temperature, all protection may be removed.
35 3. Protection Against Freezing:
36 a. Cure and protect concrete against damage from freezing for a minimum period of 3
37 days, unless otherwise specified.
38 b. Maintain the surface temperature of the concrete during that period in accordance with
39 AC I 306.1-90.
40 C. Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for period
41 necessary for hydration of cement and hardening of concrete.
42 1. iVormal Concrete: Not less than 7 days.
43 D. Hot Weather Protection Temperature:
44 1. Per the American Concrete Institute (ACI) Committee 301 recommendations, cure concrete a
45 minimum of 7 days or upon the concrete attaining 70% of the specified compressive strength
46 by one of the following methods.
47 a. Ponding and immersion.
48 1) Ponding is to be used to cure flat surfaces on smaller jobs. Care should be taken to
49 maintain curing water temperature at not more than 11°C (20°F) cooler than the
50 concrete to prevent cracking due to thermal stresses.
51 b. Spraying and fogging.
2012-37/YCS Agricuftural Dept Improvements 03 3000- 9 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
YELM HiGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
�t'�L.NI COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 1) Spraying and fogging shall use when the ambient temperatures are well above
2 freezing and the hurnidity is low.
3 c. Saturated wet coverings
4 1) Wet coverings saturated with water should be used after concrete has hardened �
5 enough to prevent surface damage. Slabs shall then be kept constantly wet.
6 d. Le�(t in Place Forms.
7 1) Left in place forms shall be provided fo�satisfactory protection against moisture
g loss for formed concrete surtaces.The forms shall be left in place as long as the `
9 construction schedule allows. If the forms are made of wood, they should be kept
10 moist, especially during hot, dry weather.
11 e. Reducing the loss of mixing water from the surface of the concrete. .
12 1) a. Covering concrete with impervious paper or plastic sheets.
13 (a) Impervious paper and plastic sheets shall be applied on thoroughly wetted
14 concrete.The concrete surface should be hard enough to prevent surface
15 damage from placement activities. '
16 2. Hot weather shall be defined as any temperature above 68 degrees Fahrenheit (20 degrees
17 Celsius).
18 E. Surfaces Not in Contact with Forms:
19 1. Initial Curing: Start as soon as free water has disappeared and before surface is dry. Keep
20 continuousfy moist for not less than three days by water ponding, water-saturated sand,
21 water-fog spray, or saturated burlap. ,
22 2. Final Curing: Begin after initial curing but before surface is dry.
23 a. Moisture-Aetaining Cover: Seal in place with waterproof tape or adhesive.
24 F. Curing compound:
25 1. Surface Preparation:
26 a. Newly Placed Concrete:
27 1} Surface must be sound and properly finished.
28 2) Surtace is application ready when damp but not wet, and it can no longer be marred 3
29 by foot traffic.
30 b. Newly Cured Bare Concrete:
31 1) Level any gouges.
32 2) Remove all dirt, dust, oil, grease, asphalt, and foreign matter. Clean with caustics
33 and detergents as required. Citrus degreaser is excellent for removing oil stains and
34 many curing compounds.
35 3) Rinse thoroughly and allow to dry so that surface is no more than damp and never �-
36 wet.
37 a Aged Concrete: "
38 1) Patch, grout, and fill cracks and holes.
�
39 2) Surface must also be free of any dust, dirt, and other foreign matter. Remove any
40 incompatible sealers or coatings. Clean as described under "Newly cured
41 concrete."
42 2. Application:
43 a. Apply in two coats at right angles, using application rate recommended by manufacturer.
44 G. Slab Sealers:
45 1. Seal all interior exposed concrete slabs.
4fi 2. See Section 07 9005-Water Repellents, Anti-graffiti Coatings, Slab Sealers for requirements
47 for sealing slabs. -
48 3,15 FI�L�1 QUALITY CCI�ITFtOL :
49 A. General: The Owner will employ a testing agency to perform tests and to submit test reports.
50 Testing laboratory shall furnish all equipment for taking samples and testing.
51 B. Sampling and testing for quality control during placement of concrete may include the following, as
52 directed by Architect:
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 03 3000- 1 0 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
YELiVA HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELNi COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 1. Sampling Fresh Concrete:ASTM C 172, except modified for slump to comply with ASTM C
2 94.
3 a. Slump:ASTM C 143; one test at point of discharge for each day's pour of each type of
4 concrete; additional tests when concrete consistency seems to have changed.
5 b. Air Content:ASTM C 173, volumetric method for lightweight or normal weight concrete;
6 ASTM C 231, pressure method for normal weight concrete;one for each day's pour of
7 each type of air entrained concrete.
g c. Concrete Temperature:ASTM C 1064. Test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F (4
9 deg C) and below, when 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and one test for each set of
10 compressive strength specimens.
11 d. Compression Test Specimen:ASTM C 31; one set of 4 standard cylinders for each
12 compressive strength test, unless otherwise directed. Mold and store cylinders for
13 laboratory cured test specimens except when field cure test specimens are required.
14 e. Compressive Strength Tests:ASTM C 39;one set for each day's pour exceeding 5 cu.
15 yds. plus additional sets for each 50 cu. yds. rnore than the first 25 cu. yds. of each
16 concrete class placed in any one day; one specimen tested at 7 days,two specimens
17 tested at 28 days, and one specimen retained in reserve for later testing 'rf required.
18 2. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than 5 strength tests for a given class of
19 concrete, conduct testing from at least 5 randomly selected batches or from each batch if
20 fewer than 5 are used.
21 3. Test results will be reported in writing to Architect, Structural Engineer, Ready Mix Producer,
22 and Contractor within 24 hours after tests. Reports of compressive strength tests shall
23 contain the project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of
24 concrete testing service, concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in structure,
25 design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials,
26 compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7 day tests and 28 day tests.
27 4. Additional Tests:The testing service will make additional tests of in-place concrete when test
28 results indicate specified concrete strengths and other characteristics have not been attained
29 in the structure, as directed by Architect.Testing service may conduct tests to determine
30 adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or by other methods as
31 directed. Contractor shall pay for such tests when unacceptable concrete is verified.
32 3.�5 REd11ylOVING FORMS
33 A. General: Formwork not supporting weight of concrete, such as sides of beams,walls, columns,
34 and similar parts of the work, may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F
35 (10 deg C)for 24 hours after placing concrete, provided concrete is sufficiently hard to not be
36 damaged by form removal operations, and provided curing and protection operations are
37 maintained.
38 B. Formwork supporting weight of concrete,such as beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural
39 elements, may no#be removed in less than 14 days and until concrete has attained at least 75
40 percent of design minirnum compressive strength at 28 days. Determine potential compressive
41 strength of in-place concrete by testing field cured specimens representative of concrete location
42 or members.
43 C. Form facing material may be removed 4 days after placement only if shores and other vertical
44 supports have been arranged to permit removal of form facing material without loosening or
45 disturbing shores and supports.
46 3.17 REUS�Oi�FORaVIS
47 A. Clean and repair surtaces of forms to be reused in work. Split,frayed, delaminated,or otherwise
48 damaged form facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces.Apply new form coating
49 compound as specified for new formwork.
50 B. When farms are extended for successive concrete placement,thoroughly clean surfaces, remove
51 fins and laitance, and tighten forms to close joints.Align and secure joint to avoid offsets. Do not
52 use"patched"forms for exposed concrete surfaces except as acceptable to Architect.
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 03 3000- 1 1 CAST-IN-PLACE CONGRETE
YELM HIGH S�HOOL
AG C7EPT, 1MPROVEMENTS �
YELII�1 COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
EFtICKSON MCGOVERN -
1 3.18 �ONCRET�SURFACE REPAIRS
2 A. Patching Defective Areas: Repair and patch defective areas with cement mortar immediately after
3 removing forms, when acceptabte to Architect.
4 B. Mix dry-pack mortar, consisting of one part Portland cement to 2-1/2 parts fine aggregate passing `
5 a No. 16 mesh sieve, using only enough water as required for handling and placing.
6 1. Cut out honeycomb, rock pockets,voids over 1/4 inch in any dimension, and holes left by tie
7 rods and bolts down to solid concrete but in no case to a depth of less than 1 inch. Make .
8 edges of cuts perpendicular to the concrete surtace.Thoroughly clean, dampen with water,
9 and brush coat the area to be patched with bonding agent. Place patching mortar before
10 bonding agent has dried.
11 C. For surfaces exposed to view, blend white Portland cement and standard Portland cement so that,
12 when dry, patching mortar will match color surrounding. Provide test areas at inconspicuous
13 location to verify mixture and color match befiore proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in
14 place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface. °
15 D. Repair Formed Surtaces: Remove and replace concrete having defective surfaces if defects
16 cannot be repaired to satisfaction of Architect. Surface defects include color and texture
17 irregularities, cracks,spalls, air bubbles, honeycomb, rock pockets,fins and other projections on
18 surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. Flush out form tie
19 holes,fill with dry pack mortar,or precast cement cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent.
20 1. Repair concealed formed surfaces, where possible, containing defects that affect the
21 concrete's durability. If defects cannot be repaired, remove and replace concrete.
22 E. Repair Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as monolithic slabs,for smoothness and
23 veri#y surface tolerances specified for each surtace and finish. Correct low and high areas as
24 specified. Test unformed surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness by using a
25 template having required slope.
26 1. Repair�nished unformed surfaces containing defects that affect the concrete's durability.
27 Surface defects include crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that penetrate to
28 reinforcement or completely through nonreinforced sections regardless of width, spalling,
29 popouts, honeycomb, rock pockets, and other objectionable conditions.
30 2. Correct high areas in unformed surfaces by grinding after concrete has cured at least 14
31 days. �
32 3. Correct low areas in unformed surfaces during or immediately after completion of surface
33 finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish
34 repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. Proprietary underlayment compounds may be
35 used when acceptable to Architect.
36 4. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes not exceeding 1 inch in
37 diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with
38 clean, square cuts and expose reinforcing steel with at least 3/4 inch clearance all around. re
39 Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix
40 patching concrete of same materials to provide concrete of same type or class as original
41 concrete. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same
42 manner as adjacent concrete.
43 F. Repair isolated random cracks and single holes 1 inch or less in diameter by dry pack method.
44 Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean of dust, dirt, and loose
45 particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surtaces and apply'bonding agent. Place dry pack before
46 bonding agent has dried. Compact dry pack mixture in place and finish to match adjacent
47 concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours.
48 G. Perform structural repairs with prior approval of Architect for method and procedure, using
49 specified epoxy adhesive and mortar.
50 H. Repair methods not specified above may be used, subject to acceptance of Architect.
2012-37/YCS Agricuttural Dept lmprovements 03 3000 - 12 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
YELlIA HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 3.�9 DE�E�CTIVE�ONCRETE
2 A. Test Results: The testing agency shall report test results in writing to Architect and Contractor
3 within 24 hours of test.
4 B. Defective Concrete: Concrete not conforming to required lines, details, dimensions,tolerances or
5 specified requirements.
b C. Repair or replacement of defective concrete will be determined by the Architect. The cost of
7 additional testing shall be borne by Contractor when detective concrete is identified.
8 D. Do not patch,fill,touch-up, repair, or replace exposed concrete except upon express direction of
9 Architect for each individual area.
10 EIVD OF SECTION
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 03 3000 - 13 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
YELiN HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
Y'�Lllil COMMUNlTY SCHOOLS
ERICKSOW MCGOVERN
� SEC�t'IOi� 06 1000
2 ROUGH CARF�EMTRY
3 f�ART'1 G�NERAL
4 1.0� SECTiON INCLUDES
5 A. Structural dimension lumber framing.
6 B. Non-structural dimension lumber framing.
7 C. Structural wall and roof framing.
8 D. Built-up structural beams and columns.
9 E. Construction Panels.
10 1. Sheathing.
11 a. See special protection requirements for roof and exterior wall sheathing below.
12 F. Preservative treated wood materials.
13 G. Miscellaneous framing and sheathing.
14 H. Fasteners and anchors.
15 I. Miscellaneous wood nailers,furring, and grounds.
16 J. Caulking and sealant to limit infiltration.
17 K. Weather resistive barrier (air infiltration barrier).
18 1.182 RELAT�D REQUIREMENTS
19 A. Section 07 6200 -Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: SiH flashings.
20 1,03 REFEREiVCE STANDARDS
21 A. AFPA(WFCM) -Wood Frame Construction Manual for One-and Two-Family Dwellings;American
22 Forest and Paper Association; 2001.
23 B. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
24 Hardware; 2009.
25 C. PS 20-American Softwood Lumber Standard; National Institute of Standards and Technology
26 (Department of Commerce); 2005.
27 D. RIS (GR) -Standard Specifications for Grades�f Catifornia Redwood Lumber; Redwood
28 Inspection Service; 2000.
29 E. SPIB (GR).- Grading Rules; Southern Pine Inspection Bureau, Inc.; 2002.
30 F. WCLB (GR) -Standard Grading Rules for West Coast Lumber No. 17;West Coast Lumber
31 Inspection Buteau; 2004, and supplements.
32 G. WWPA G-5-Western Lumber Grading Rules;Western Wood Products Association; 2011.
33 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANC�
34 A. Lumber: Comply with PS 20 and approved grading rules and inspection agencies.
35 1. Acceptable Lumber Inspection Agencies: RIS.
36 B. Exposed-to-View Rough Carpentry: Submit manufacturer's certificate that products meet or
37 exceed specified requirements, in lieu of grade stamping.
38 C. Fire-Retardant Treated Wood: Mark each piece of wood with producer's stamp indicating
39 compliance with specified requirements.
40 D. Preservative-Treated Wood: Provide lumber and plywood marked or stamped by an
41 ALSC-accredited testing agency, certifying level and type of treatment in accordance with AWPA
42 standards.
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 06 1000- 1 ROUGH CARPENTRY
YELNI HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEf�T. IMPROVEMENTS �
YELI1� COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
�RICKSON iVICGOVERN
1 1.05 DELlVER1f, S'fOf3A('aE,A�ID HANDLING
2 A. General: Cover wood products to protect against moisture. Support stacked prod�rcts to prevent
3 deformation and to allow air circulation.
4 B. Fire Retardant Treated Wood: Prevent exposure to precipitation during shipping, storage, or `
5 installation.
6 PART 2 �'RODUCTS
7 2.0� GENEFiA� FtEQUIREMENTS �
8 A. Dimension Lumber: Comply with PS 20 and requirements of specified grading agencies.
9 1. If no species is specified, provide any species graded by the agency specified; if no grading
10 agency is specified, provide lumber graded by any grading agency meeting the specified
11 requirements.
12 2. Grading Agency: Any grading agency whose rules are approved by tf�e Board of Review,
13 American Lumber Standard Committee (www.alsc.org) and who provides grading service for
14 the species and grade specified; provide lumber stamped with grade mark unless otherwise
15 indicated.
16 B. Lumber fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted. _
17 C. Lumber Standards: Comply with DOC PS 20, "American Softwood Lumber Standard,"and with
18 applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by ALSCs Board of Review.
19 D. Inspection Agencies: Inspection agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include ,,
20 the following:
21 1. WCLIB-West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau.
22 2. WVVPA-Western Wood Products Association.
23 3. Grade Stamps: Provide lumber with each piece factory marked with grade stamp of
24 inspection agency evidencing compliance with grading rule requirements and identifying
25 grading agency, grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill.
26 4. For exposed lumber,furnish pieces with grade stamps applied to ends or back of each piece,
27 or omit grade stamps and provide grade-compliance certificates issued by inspection agency.
28 E. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture
29 content specified.Where actual sizes are indicated,they are minimum dressed sizes for dry
30 lumber.
31 1. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. -
32 2. Provide dry lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing for 2-inch
33 nominal (38-mm actual) thickness or less, unless otherwise indicated. �
34 2.0� DIIVIEi�SlON 'LUi�1BER FOR Cl7NCEALED APPLICATIONS
35 A. Grading Agency:Western Wood Products Association (WWPA).
36 B. Grade: See Structural General Notes. �
37 C. Sizes: Nominal sizes as indicated on drawings, S4S.
38 D. Moisture Content: S-dry or MC19. „
39 E. Sizes: Framing members shall be as shown on the drawings.
40 F. Structural Blocking: See Structural Drawings for structural blocking.
41 G. Miscellaneous Framing, Blocking, Nailers, Grounds, and Furring: -
42 1. Lumber: S4S, No. 2 or Standard Grade.
43 2. Boards: Standard or No. 3.
44 2.03 EX�C�S�D DIMENStO�➢ LUMBER
45 A. Grading Agency:West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (WCLIB).
4b B. Moisture Content: S-dry or MC19.
47 C. For exposed framing lumber, provide material complying with the following requirements:
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 06 1000 - 2 ROUGH CARPENTRY
YELNi HIGH SCMOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELN1 COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 1. Definition: Exposed framing refers to dimension lumber that is not concealed by other
2 construction and is indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, i.e., exposed backing for
3 fascia and rake boards.
4 2. Grading: Material hand-selected at factory from lumber of species and grade indicated below
5 that complies with "Appearance" grade requirements of ALSC National Grading Rule; issue
6 inspection certificate of inspection agency for selected material.
7 a. For exposed decking, 3 x 6 Hem-Fir, Select Structural Grade per WCLB Std. Grading
g Rules No. 17, Pg. 77, Par. 124-a. Run thru tongue and groove decking pattern. End
g matched.
10 b. For miscellaneous wood trim not included as standing or running trim, use Douglas Fir
1� dndustrial Clear"C Industrial" MG per WCLB No. 17, Pg. 111, Par. 151-c.
12 D, Sizes: Framing members shall be as shown on drawings.
13 2.04 l'lM�ERS
14 A. Grading Agency:Western Wood Products Association (WWPA).
15 B. Sizes: Nominal sizes as indicated on drawings, S4S.
16 C. Moisture Content: S-dry(23 percent maximum).
17 D. Beams and Posts 5 inches (125 mm) and over in thickness:
18 1. Grade: See Structural Drawings for requirements.
19 2,05 Si'RUC7UAAL COMPOSITE LIJMBER
20 A. At contractor's option, structural composite lumber may be substituted for concealed dimension
21 lumber and timbers.
22 B. Structural Composite Lumber: Factory fabricated beams, headers, and columns, of sizes and
23 types indicated on drawings; structural capacity as published by manufacturer.
24 1. Columns: Use laminated veneer lumber, laminated strand lumber, or parallel strand lumber
25 with manufacturer's published E (modulus of elasticity): 1,800,000 psi, minimum.
26 2. Beams: Use laminated veneer lumber, laminated strand lumber, or parallel strand lumber with
27 manufacturer's published E (modulus of elasticity): 1,800,000 psi, minimum.
28 3. Headers not larger than 48 inches: Use laminated veneer Jumber, laminated strand lumber, or
29 paratlel strand lumber with manufactuer's published E (modulus of elasticity): 1,800,000 psi,
30 minimum.
31 4. Manufacturers:
32 a. Redbuilt LLC: Product[Redlam LVL]www.redbuilt.com <http://www.redbuiit.com>
33 b. iLevel by Weyerhaeuser: www.ilevel.com <http://www.ilevel.com>
3q c. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements
35 2,OS MISCELLANEiOUS LUIVIBER
36 A. General: Provide lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including rooftop
37 equipment curbs and support bases, cant strips, bucks, nailers, blocking,furring, grounds,
38 stripping, and similar members.
39 B. Fabricate miscellaneous lumber from dimension lumber of sizes indicated and into shapes shown.
40 C. Moisture Content: 19 percent maximum for lumber items not specified to receive wood
41 preservative treatment.
42 D. Grade: For dimension lumber sizes, provide No. 3 or Standard grade lumber per ALSC's NGR's of
43 any species. For board-size lumber, provide No. 3 Common grade per NELMA, NLGA, or WWPA;
44 iVo. 2 grade per SPiB; or Standard grade per NLGA,WCLIB, or WWPA of any species.
45 2.07 BLUCK�NG AND BACKING �OR WALL-MOUNTED AND RECESSED ITEMS
46 A. Provide nominal 2-inch thickness of same material as studs, placed and nailed as required for
47 nailing, bolting wall-mounted and recessed items, including for wall-mounted items noted as
48 "N.I.C."on the drawings.
49 1. Provide nominal 4-inch thickness of same material as studs at special conditions if required.
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 06 1000- 3 ROUGH CARPENTRY
YEL11A HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS F.
Y'�LIWI COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSO(V MCGQVERN -
1 a. Basketball backboards or other athletic equipment.
2 b. Others.
3 B. The following is a list of probable items requiring solid blocking. Please note that this list is not
4 intended as a total inclusive list of all possible items and does not relieve the Contractor of his
5 responsibility to furnish all required blocking.
6 1. Casework.
7 2. Shelf Standards.
8 3. Horizontal Blinds.
9 2,08 ACCESSORIES
10 A. Fasteners and Anchors:
11 1. Metal and Finish: Hot-dipped galvanized steel per ASTM A 153/A 153M for high humidity and
12 preservative-treated wood locations, unfinished steel elsewhere.
13 2. Ivletal Framing Anchors (Connectors and Fasteners):
14 a. General: Provide galvanized steel framing anchors of structural capacity,type, size "'
15 indicated,and as follows:
16 1) Research or Evaluation Reports: Provide products for which model code research
17 or evaluation reports exist that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and �_
18 that evidence compliance of inetal framing anchors for application indicated with
19 building code in effect for Project. �
20 2) Allowable Design Loads: Provide products with allowable design loads, as
21 published by manufacturer,that meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's '
22 published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering
23 analysis, and demonstrated'by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified
24 independent testing agency. ��
25 3) Galvanized Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM
26 standards for galvanized G60, G185, and G90 coating designation; structural,
27 commercial, or lock-forming quality, as standard with manufacturer for type of
28 anchor indicated. See Structural General Notes for acceptable connectors and -
29 fasteners to be used in conjunction with various preservative wood treatments.
30 b. Nails,Wire, Brads, and Staples: FS FF-N-105.
31 c. Power-Driven Fasteners: CABO NER-272.
32 d. Wood Screws:ASME B18.6.1.
33 e. Lag Bolts:ASME 6182.1. (ASME B18.2.3.8M)
34 f. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568, Property Class
35 4.6); with ASTM A 563 (ASTIVI A 563M) hex nuts and,where indicated,flat washers. "�'
36 2.t�J 4VEATHER RESIS'��VE BARRIEFt (AIFi INFIL7RATION �ARRIER) y
37 A. Building Wrap:
38 1. Polyethylene sheet, 0.0061 inch thick,formed by spinning continuous strands of fine high �'
39 density polyethylene interconnected fibers and bonding them together by heat and pressure;
40 with a moisture vapor transmission rate of 400 grams/sq. meter/24 hrs. per ASTM E 96,
41 Procedure B; flame spread and smoke developed ratings of 5 and 10 per ASTM E 84.
42 2. �iVoven polyolefin sheet, 0.005 inch thick, with a moisture vapor transmission rate of 70
43 grams/sq. meter/24 hours per ASTM E 96, Procedure A, and a flame spread not exceeding
44 25 per ASTM E 84.
45 3. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following or approved:
46 a. "Tyvek Housewrap," Fibers Department, Du Pont Company.
47 b. "R-Wrap," Simplex Products Division, Anthony Industries, Inc.
48 WART 3 �XE��J�'ION
49 3,01 INSTALLATIOIV-GENERAL
50 A. Setect material sizes to minimize waste.
2012-37/YCS Agricultural'Dept Improvements 06 1000- 4 ROUGH CARPENTRY
YELi41 HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
Y�LM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 B. Reuse scrap to the greatest extent possible; clearly separate scrap for use on site as accessory
2 components, including: shims, bracing, and blocking.
3 3.�02 �RAIWIIVG SNST/�►�.LA�'�ON
4 A. Generai:
5 1. Discard units of material with defects that impair quality of rough carpentry and that are too
6 small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.
7 2. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb,true to line, cut, and
g fitted.
9 3. Fit rough carpentry to other construction;scribe and cope as required for accurate fit.
10 Correlate location of furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to allow
11 attachment of other construction.
12 4. Apply field treatment complying with AWPA M4 to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber
13 and plywood.
14 5. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated,
15 complying with the following:
16 a. CABO NER-272 for power-driven staples, P-nails, and allied fasteners.
17 b. Published requirements of inetal framing anchor manufacturer.
18 c. "Table 2304.9.1 -Fastening Schedule"of the International Building Code.
19 6. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Use finishing nails for finish work. Select
20 fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to
21 view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install
22 fasteners without splitting wood; predrill as required.
23 7. Use hot-dip galvanized or stainless-steel nails where rough carpentry is exposed to weather,
24 in ground contact.
25 8. Countersink nail heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes with wood filler.
26 9. Wood Nailers, Blocking, and Sleepers:
27 a. Instatl wood nailers, blocking, and sleepers where shown and where required f�r
28 attaching other work. Form to shapes shown and cut as required for true line and tevel of
29 attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved.
30 b. Attach to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with
31 surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. Build into masonry during installation of masonry
32 work.Where possible, anchor to formwork before concrete placement.
33 10. �/Vall and Partition Framing:
34 a. General:Arrange studs so that wide face of stud is perpendicular to direction of wall or
35 partition and narrow face is parallel. Provide single bottom plate and double top plates
36 using members of 2-inch nominal (38-mm actual)thickness whose widths equal that of
37 studs; except single top plate may be used for non-load-bearing partitions. Nail or anchor
38 plates to supporting construction, unless otherwise indicated.
39 b. Construct corners and intersections with 3 or more studs. Provide miscellaneous
40 blocking and framing as shown and as required to support facing materials,fixtures,
41 specialty items, and trim.
42 c. Frame openings with multiple studs and headers. Provide nailed header members of
43 thickness equal to width of studs. Set headers on edge and support on jamb studs.
44 1) For non-load-bearing partitions, provide double-jamb studs with headers not less
45 than 4-inch nominal (89-mm actual} depth for openings 36 inches (900 mm) and
46 less in width, and not less than 6-inch nominal (140-mm actual) depth for wider
47 openings.
48 2) For load-bearing walls, provide double-jamb studs for openings 72 inches (1,800
49 mm) and less in width, and triple-jamb studs for wider openings. Provide headers of
50 depth shown or, if not shown, as recommended by AFPA's "Manuaf for Wood
51 Frame Construction." See Structural Drawings for additional requirements.
52 3) For all mechanical openings within framed walls,the General Contractor shall frame
53 in such openings and shall coordinate with the Mechanical Contractor to determine
54 all sizes and locations.
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 06 1000-5 ROUGH CARPENTRY
�IELM HI�GH SCFIOOL
� AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENT�
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 4) Fire Blocking: Provide from materiais and thickness, as required in Chapter 7 of the
2 International Buiiding Code, members of same width as wall or partition at the
3 following locations:
4 (a) In concealed spaces of stud walls and partitions, including furred spaces, at a.
5 the ceiling and floor levels, and at 10-foot intervals both vertical and horizontal.
6 See also Section 803 of International Building Code.
7 (b) At all interconnections between concealed vertical and horizontal spaces such
g as occur at soffits, drop ceilings, and cove ceilings.
9 (c) tn concealed spaces between stair stringers at the top and bottom of the run
10 and between studs along and in line with the run of stairs if the walls under the
11 stairs are unfinished.
12 (d) In openings around vents, pipes,ducts, chimneys,fireplaces and similar
13 openings which afford a passage for fire at ceiling and floor levels,with
14 noncombustible materials.
15 (1) At openings between attic spaces and chimney chases for factory-built
16 chimneys.
17 d. Wood Stripping:
18 1) For rated and non-rated assemblies, including but not limited to the following: ,
19 (a) Ceiling,floor ceiling, roof, roof ceiling, and any other locations indicated or
20 shown on the drawings. �
21 (b) When framing members are to receive a layer or multiple layers of gypsum
22 drywall, plywood, etc. in exposed and concealed conditions, and their spacing
23 is greater than 24 inches o.c., the contractor shall apply 2 x stripping at
24 spacings indicated below.
25 (1) Space stripping at 24" o.c. ma�c:Apply material with iong axis
26 perpendicular to stripping.
27 (2) Space stripping at 16"o.c. max:Apply material with long axis parallel to
28 stripping.
29 (c) Apply solid blocking between stripping at vertical surfaces and at all openings, �
30 i.e.vents, access panels, lights, etc.
31 B. Select material sizes to minimize waste.
32 C. Reuse scrap to the greatest extent possible; clearly separate scrap for use on site as accessory
33 components, including: shims, bracing, and blocking.
34 D. Set structural members level, plumb, and true to line. Discard pieces with defects that would lower
35 required strength or result in unacceptable appearance of exposed members. �t
36 E. Make provisions for temporary construction loads, and provide temporary bracing sufficient to .
37 maintain structure in true alignment and safe condition until completion of erection and installation
38 of permanent bracing.
39 F. Install structural members full length without splices unless otherwise spec'rfically detailed.
40 G. Comply with member sizes, spacing,and configurations indicated, and fastener size and spacing
41 indicated, but not less than required by applicable codes and AFPA Wood Frame Construction
42 Manual.
43 H. Construct double joist headers at floor and ceiling openings and under wall stud partitions that are
44 parallel to floor joists; use metal joist hangers unless otherwise detaited.
45 I. Frame wall openings with two or more studs at each jamb;support headers on cripple studs.
46 3,03 CAULKING ANC9 SEALINCa
47 A. The follov�ing openings in the building shall be caulked or otherwise sealed to limit infiltration. ~
48 1. Around door and window casings and rough openings.
49 2. At openings for plumbing, electricity, gas lines and ductwork in exterior walls, floor and
50 ceiling.
51 3. Where walls and ceiling meet exposed beams.
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 06 1000- 6 ROUGH CARPENTRY .
YELII►1 HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
�l'�LM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERlCKSO� MCGOVERid
1 4. At the mud sill and in addition to normal sill sealer in conditioned basements.
2 5. At all other openings in exterior building envelope.
3 6. See Section 07 9005 for the appropriate sealers.
4 3.04 QU�4L11Y CONTROL TESTING DURING Ct)NSTRUCTION
5 A. General:The Owner will employ a testing agency to perform tests and observations and to submit
6 reports as required per Section 01 4000-Quality Requirements.
7 3.05 OBSERVATIOId FOR QUALI7Y CONTROL
8 A. Nailing of plywood diaphragms: Periodic observations.
g B. Nailing of plywood shear walls: Periodic observations.
10 3.06 CL.EANING
11 A. Do not leave any wood,shavings, sawdust, etc. on the ground or buried in fill.
12 B. Prevent sawdust and wood shavings from entering the storm drainage system.
13 END OF SECTION
2012-37(YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 06 1000- 7 ROUGH CARPENTRY
YELllil HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEP7. lMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 SE��'ION 06 2000
2 FINISF� CARPENTRY
3 PART 1 G�NERAL
4 �.01 SECTION INCLUDES
5 A. Finish carpentry items.
6 B. Exterior standing and running trim.
7 C. Interior standing and running trim.
8 D. Interior OSB wainscot paneling.
9 E. Definition: Finish carpentry includes carpentry work which is exposed to view, is non-structural,
10 and which is not specified as part of other sections.
11 1.02 R�LATED REGIUIREMENTS
12 A. Section 06 1 Q00) - Rough Carpentry: Furring, blocking, and other carpentry work not exposed to
13 view.
14 B. Section 09 9000- Painting and Coating: Painting and finishing of finish carpentry items.
15 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
16 A. ANSI A208.1 -American National Standard for Particleboard;2009.
17 B. ASTM A 153/A 153M -Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
18 Hardware; 2005.
19 C. AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) -Architectural Woodwork Standards; 2009.
20 D. NHLA G-101 - Rules for the Measurement& Inspection of Hardwood &Cypress; National
21 Hardwood Lumber Association;2007.
22 E. PS 1 - Structural Plywood; 2007.
23 F. PS 20-American Softwood Lumber Standard; National Institute of Standards and Technology
24 (Department of Commerce); 2005.
25 G. WCLIB-West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau.
26 H. WDMA/NWWDA I.S.4-Water-Repellent Preservative Non-Pressure Treatment for Millwork;
27 National Wood Wi�dow and Door Manufacturers Association; 2005.
28 I. WWPA-Western Wood Products Association.
29 1.04 QU�4I.ITY ASSURANCE
30 A. Factory-mark each piece of lumber and plywood with type, grade, mill and grading agency
31 ident'rfication; except omit marking from surfaces to receive transparent finish, and submit mill
32 certificate that material has been inspected and graded in accordance with requirements if it
33 cannot be marked on a concealed surface.
34 B. Fabricator Qual'rfications: Company specializing in fabricating the products specified in this section
35 with minimum five years of documented experience.
36 1.05 DELiIlERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING
37 A. Protect work from moisture damage.
38 1. Keep materials under cover and dry. Protect against exposure to weather and contact with
39 damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels. Provide for air circulation
40 within and around stacks and under temporary coverings.
41 2. Do not deliver interior finish carpentry until environmental conditions meet requirements
42 specified for installation areas. If finish carpentry must be stored in other than installation
43 areas,store only where environmental conditions meet requirements specified for installation
44 areas.
2012-37(YCS Agricuitural Dept Improvements 06 2000 - 1 FINISH CARPENTRY
YEL�1�1 HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
Y��.iIA COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERIC�CSOtd �IACGOVERN
1 1.06 F��tC3JECT CO�IDOT�ONS
2 A. Sequence installation to ensure utility connections are achieved in an orderly and expeditious
3 manner.
4 B. Coordinate the work with plumbing rough-in, electrical rough-in, and installation of associated and
5 adjacent components.
6 C. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install interior finish carpentry until building is enclosed
7 and weatherproof, wet-work in space is completed and nominally dry, and HVAC system is
8 operating and will maintain temperature and refative humidity at occupancy levels through the
9 remainder of construction period.
10 D. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installing exterior finish carpentry only when existing and
11 forecasted weather conditions will permit work to be performed according to manufacturer's
12 recommendations and warranty requirements and at least one coat of specified finish to be applied
13 without exposure to rain, snow or dampness.
14 1.07 PI�IiIAING
15 A. Work of this Section shall be primed prior to installation as work of Section 09 9000- Painting.
16 Coating with specified materials and under specified conditions may be applied either on site or off
17 site, at Contractor's option. Provide space and heat for priming and storage while prime coats are
18 drying. Painter subcontractor shall make an adequate quantity of priming material, of applicable
19 types, available to carpenters for priming job site cut ends and/or edges as the installation work
20 proceeds. -
21 PAR7'2 PRC9'�D1.7CTS
22 2,01 FINIShI C�►RPEN7Fd'�f ITEMS
23 A. Quality Grade: Unless otherwise indicated provide products of quality spec'rfied by �"
24 AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards for Premium Grade.
25 2.02 I►�IATERIA�STANDARDS
26 A. Lumber Standards: Comply with document PS 20, "American Softwood Lumber Standard,"for
27 lumber and with applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by American Lumber
28 Standards Committee Board of Review.
29 B. Woodworking Standard:Where indicated for a specific product, comply with specified provision of °
30 the following:
31 1. Architectural Woodwork Institute (A�/VI) "Quality Standards."
32 C. Inspection Agencies: Inspection agencies, and other abbreviations used to reference them, include E�
33 the following:
34 1. NHLA- National Hardwood Lumber Association.
35 2. WCLIB-West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau.
36 3. V�/WPA-Western Wood Products Association.
37 D. Grade Stamps: Provide lumber with each piece factory marked with grade stamp of inspection �-
38 agency evidencing compliance with grading rule requirements and identifying grading agency,
39 grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and milL
40 1. For exposed lumber,furnish pieces with grade stamps applied to ends or back of each piece,
41 or omit grade stamps entireiy and provide certificates of grade compliance issued by
42 inspection agency. ,�
43 E. Glued-up Lumber Standard: Comply with PS 56.
44 F. Softwood Plywood: Comply with document PS 1, "U.S. Product Standard for Construction and
45 Industrial Plywood.° >-.
46 G. Medium-Density Fiberboard (Medite II): Product made without formaldehyde and complying with
47 requirements of ANSI A208.2-1994, product class MD.
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 06 2000-2 FINISH CARPENTRY
YEL�111 HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEpT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELIuI COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 2.03 MATERiAL�
2 A. Nominal sizes are indicated, except as shown by detailed dimensions. Provide dressed or worked
3 and dressed lumber, as applicable, manufactured to the actual sizes as required by PS 20 or to
4 actual sizes and pattern as shown, unless otherwise indicated.
5 B. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of specified inspection agencies and
6 manufacturer's recommendations for moisture content.of finish carpentry and relative humidity
7 conditions existing during time of fabrication and in installation areas.
8 C. Lumber for Transparent Finish (Stained or Clear): Use pieces made of solid lumber stock.
9 D. Lumber for Painted Finish: At Contractor's option, use pieces which are either glued-up lumber or
10 made of solid lumber stock.
11 E. For exterior finish carpentry work, use glued-up lumber complying with PS 56 for"wet-use"and
12 certified so by respective grading and inspecting agency for species and product indicated.
13 2.04 �XT'ERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY
14 A. Fascia/Rake Boards: For trim in form of boards and worked products, provide lumber complying
15 with the following requirements including those of the grading agency listed with species.
16 1. Product: Ply-Trim as manufactured by Ply-Trim or approved (1-500-545-4454).
17 2. Material: Manufactured from high grade exterior plywood with both edges plugged and sealed
18 and one face sealed and primed.
19 3. Texture: Sealed and primed face to be covered with proprietary overlay and pressed to form
20 a deep embossed wood grain surface. Both edges to be smooth.
21 4. Warranty: Product carries a 20-year limited warranty against delamination or structural failure
22 of the substrate.
23 B. Wood Trim:
2� 1. Size: As shown on drawings.
25 2. Species:Western Cedar.
26 3. Grade: KD., Batten. (WCLIB No. 113, Pg. 44).
27 4. Textured: Resawn.
28 C. Plywood Siding: T-111 per structural and UNO.
29 1. Species: See structural.
30 2. Type: 303-OC.
31 3. Exposure Durability: Exterior.
32 4. Thickness: 1/2" unless noted or shown otherwise on drawings.
33 5. Face: Rough-sawn and unsanded. (No grooves.)
34 6. Edge'Shiplapped.
35 2,05 I�ITERtOR FIIdIS�I CARPENTRY
36 A. Standing and Running Trim for Painted Finish: Any Western softwood species graded and
37 inspected by WWPA complying with the following requirements:
38 1. Grade for Standard Sizes and Patterns: Finish Grade, KD, "C and'Better" (WCLIB No. 17, pg.
39 26, Para. 101-c).
40 B. OSB Wainscot: Structural-Use Panel Standards: Shall be plywood or Oriented Strand Board. Shall
41 comply with PS 1 "U.S. Product Standard for Construction and Industrial Plywood"for plywood
42 panels and,for products not manufactured under PS 1 provisions, with APA-The Engineered
43 Wood Association "Performance Standard and Policies for Structural Use Panels," Form No. E445
44 1. Thickness:
45 a. Interior Wainscot:
46 1) 1/2 inch.
47 2.OS MISCE!�LANEOUS MATERIALS
48 A. Fasteners and Anchorages: Provide nails, screws and other anchoring devices of the type, size,
49 material and finish required for application indicated to provide secure attachment, concealed
50 where possible, and complying with applicable Federal Specifications.
2012-37/YCS Agricuftural Dept Improvements 06 2000-3 FINISH CARPENTRY
YEL14� HiGH SCHOOL
�►G �DEPT. lMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNi7Y SCHOOLS
ERIC�CSOId MCGOVERId
1 1. Where finish carpentry is exposed on exterior or in areas of high relative humidity, provide
2 fasteners and anchorages with a hot-dipped zinc coating (ASTM A 153).
3 B. Soffit Vents: Provide the following as manufactured by Tamlyn &SonS Building Materials
4 (1-800-334-1676), or approved.
5 1. Soffit Louver Strips: Tamlyn Brand Snapvent#SV516. Extruded vinyl with 1/8" wall thickness.
6 Overall width 3-1/2 inches x 12.7 sq. inches of net free ventilation per lin.ft. Color is white.
7 C. Sealants: Comply with requirements of Section 07 9005 "Joint Sealants"for materials required for
8 sealing siding work.
9 2.07 FIiIBRICATl01�
10 A. Fabricate finish carpentry to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated.
11 1. Back out or kerf backs of the following members, except members with ends exposed in
12 finished work:
13 a. Interior standing and running trim, except shoe mold and crown mold.
14 2. Ease edges of lumber less than 1 inch (25 mm) in nominal thickness to 1/6-inch (1.5-mm)
15 radius.
16 3. Ease edges ot lumber 1 inch (25 mm) or more in nominal thickness to 1/8-inch (3-mm) radius.
17 2.08 SHEET MATERIALS
18 A. Softwood Plywood Exposed to View: Face species as indicated, plain sawn, particleboard core;
19 PS 1 Grade A-B; glue type as recommended for application.
20 2.0� FABRICATION
21 A. Shop assemble work for delivery to site, permitting passage through building openings.
22 B. Vllhen necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting. Provide
23 trim for scribing and site cutting.
24 PART 3 EXE�UTION
25 3.01 'EKAi1�liVATlOId
26 A. Verifiy adequacy of backing and support framing.
27 B. Verify mechanical, electrical, and building items affecting work of this section are placed and ready
28 to receive this work.
29 C. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation
30 tolerances and other conditions affecting installation and performance of finish carpentry. Do not
31 proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
32 3.02 1NSTALLATiON
33 A. Install work in accordance with AV►/VAWMACNVI Architectural Woodwork Standards requirements
34 for grade indicated.
35 B. Set and secure materials and components in place, plumb and IeveL
36 C. Carefully scribe work abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch (1 mm). Do not
37 use additional overlay trim to conceal larger gaps. _
38 3.fl3 PREPARATIO�J
39 A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application.
40 B. Condition finish carpentry to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before °
41 installation,for a minimum of 24 hours unless longer conditioning is recommended by
42 manufacturer.
43 3.04 INSI'A�LTATiON,GEIVERA�.
44 A. Do not use finish carpentry materials that are unsound, warped, improperly treated or finished,
45 inadequately seasoned, or too small to fabricate with proper jointing arrangements.
46 1. Do not use manufactured units with defective surfaces, sizes, or patterns. �
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 06 2000- 4 FWiSH CARPENTRY
YELN1 HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YSLM COMMUNlTY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 B. Install finish carpentry plumb, level, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use concealed
2 shims where required for alignment.
3 1. Scribe and cut finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts as recommended
4 by manufacturer.
5 2. Anchor finish carpentry work with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as
6 required for a complete installation. Except where prefinished matching fastener heads are
7 required, use fine finishing nail for exposed nailings, countersunk and filled flush with colored
8 caulking compound, and matching final finish where transparent is indicated.
9 3. Install to tolerance of 1/S inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm)for plumb and level. Install
10 adjoining finish carpentry with 1/32-inch (0.8-mm) maximum offset for flush installation and
11 1/16-inch (1.5-mm) maximum offset for reveal installation.
12 4. Coordinate finish carpentry with materials and systems in or adjacent to standing and running
13 trim and rails. Provide cutouts for mechanical and electrical items that penetrate exposed
14 surfaces of trim and rails.
15 3.05 i�IS�'ALLAi'ION OF STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM
16 A. Install with minimum number of joints practical, using full-length pieces from maximum lengths of
17 lumber available. Do not use pieces less than 24 inches (610 mm) long, except where necessary.
18 Stagger joints in adjacent and related standing and running trim. Cope at returns and miter at
19 corners to produce tight-fitting joints with full-surface contact throughout length of joint. Use scarf
20 joints for end-to-end joints. Plane backs of casings to provide uniform thickness across joints, if
21 required.
22 1. Install trim after gypsum board joint finishing operations are completed.
23 2. Drill pilot holes in hardwood before fastening to prevent splitting. Fasten to prevent movement
24 or warping. Countersink fastener heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes.
25 3.06 PREPARATION FOR SITE FINISHI�VG
26 A. Site Finishing: See Section 09 9000.
27 3.07 TOLEFdANCES
28 A. Maximum Variation from True Position: 1l16 inch (1.5 mm).
29 B. Maximum Offset from True Alignment with Abutting Materials: 1/32 inch (0.7 mm).
30 3.08 A�J�DSTING
31 A. Repair damaged or defective finish carpentry where possible to eliminate functional or visual
32 defects.Where not possible to repair, replace finish carpentry. Adjust joinery for uniform
33 appearance.
34 3.09 CLEANiN�G
35 A. Clean finish carpentry on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. Touch-up factory-applied finishes
36 to restore damaged or soiled areas.
37 3.10 PROTECTION
38 A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure finish carpentry is without damage or
39 deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion.
40 fND OF SECTION
2012-37/YCS Agricuitural Dept Improvements 06 2000- 5 FINISH CARPENTRY
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNITY SCNOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 S�CTION 06 6400
2 '�LASTI� LAMINATE WAINSCOT
3 PA�iT 1 GE�iERAL
4 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
5 A. Plastic laminate wainscoting at eye wash and sink areas.
6 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
7 A. Section 09 2116-Gypsum Board Assemblies.
8 1.03 REFEFiENCES
9 A. AWI P-200-Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated;Architectural Woodwork
10 Institute; 1997, Seventh Edition, Version 1.0.
11 B. NEMA LD 3 - High-Pressure Decorative Laminates; National Electrical Manufacturer's Association;
12 1995.
13 1.04 SiJBMITTAI.S
14 A. See Section 01 3000-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures.
15 B. Samples:
16 1. Submit samples of all available colors and brochure showing materials to be used indicating
17 quality and colors.
18 1.05 QUp►L1Tof'ASSURANCE
19 A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum
20 2 years of experience.
21 B. Perform work in accordance with AWI P-200, Custom Grade.
22 1. Conform to the Architectural Woodwork Institute's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards
23 and Guide Specifications," latest edition, as issued by AWI, Chesterfield House, Suite A,
24 5055 South Chesterfield Road,Arlington, Virginia 22206, hereinafter called "AWI"for the
25 installation of(HPDL) high pressure decorative laminates.
26 1.06 DE�.iVERY, STORAGE,AND PROTECTION
27 A. Store indoors. Store on edge to prevent accumulation of moisture between panels and away from
28 direct heat and sunlight.
29 1. Protect finish materials during transit, delivery, storage and handling to prevent damage,
30 soiling and deterioration.
31 2. Do not deliver finish materials, until painting, wet work, grinding and similar operations which
32 could damage, soil or deteriorate woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If, due
33 to unforeseen circumstances,finish carpentry materials must be stored in other than
3�1 instal{ation areas, store only in areas meeting requirements specified for installation areas.
35 1.07 PROJ�CT CONDITIQN�a
36 A. Sequence installation to ensure utility connections are achieved in an orderly and expeditious
37 manner.
38 B. Coordinate the work with plumbing rough-in, electrical rough-in, installation of associated and
39 adjacent components, and casework.
40 PAAT 2 PRfJDUCTS
41 2.01 14�A�UFACTURERS
42 A. The miscellaneous laminates used may require selection of color from more than a single
43 manufacturer's standard color line.
44 1. Wilsonart.
45 2. Formica.
46 B. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000- Product Requirements.
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 06 6400- 1 PLASTIC LAMINATE WAINSCOT
YE�.M HiGH SCHOOL
AG DEP�'. IMPROVEMENTS -�
YELiIA COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 2.iD2 lIV1d�TERIALS
2 A. High Pressure Plastic Laminate: AWI "P�emium grade;"edge treatment AWI 500B-2; exterior
3 corner AWI 500B-3.
4 B. Adhesive: Furnish contact cement meeting or exceeding the requirements of U.S. Commercial T
5 Standard CS35 Type II, conforming to AWI Test 100-G-11.
6 C. Metaf Trim: Provide standard metal accessory trim, division bars, inside corners, and caps at all
7 panel tops and corners.
8 2.Q3 AD�IESIVE
9 A. Adhesive: Type recommended by laminate manufacturer to suite application.
10 2.�4 ACCESSORIES
11 A. Aluminum Edge Trim: Extruded convex shape; smooth surface finish; self-locking serrated tongue;
12 of width to match component thickness; natural mill finish. ,
13 PART 3 EXECUTIOIV
14 3.01 EXAMINAI'ION
15 A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing.
16 B. Verify mechanical, electrical, and building items affecting work of this section are placed and ready
17 to receive this work.
18 3,02 P�EPARATION
19 A. Wall surface shall be free of bumps, projections and misalignments.
20 3.l33 �fVS7ALLATlON
21 A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
22 B, Conform to AWI Section 500B for plastic laminates applied to wood, plywood or GWB substrates, �
23 either done "in plant"or at the job site, to AWI "Premium Grade" laminate construction and edge
24 treatment. Use one piece full length for each panel unless otherwise approved for faces of length '�'
25 greater than stock lengths; seams are required to be tightly butted, practically invisible. �.
26 C. Set and secure materials and components in place, plumb and level.
27 3.04 CL.�A�JING, FINiSHING !�►ND PROTE�TION �
28 A. RepJace damaged and defective finish work wherever possible to eliminate defects functionally �
29 and visually. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.
�
30 B. Clean finish work on all exposed surfaces.
31 C. Protection: Jnstaller of work shall advise Contractor of final protection and maintained conditions `"
32 necessary to ensure that work will be without damage or deterioration at time of acceptance.
�
33 END I,�F SECTION
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 06 6400-2 PLASTIC LAMINATE WAINSCOT
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
Y�LM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERlCKSON MCGOVERN
1 SEC'�ION 07 �9Q0
2 SUaB SEA�LERS
3 PARfi 1 GENERA�
4 1.Oi SECTIOIV INCLl1DES
5 A. Concrete slab sealer.
b 1. Concrete slab sealer applied to all sxposed interior concrete slabs.
7 B. Pressure washing.
8 1,�2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
9 A. Section 07 9005 -Joint Sealers.
10 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
11 1.04 StJBMITTALS
12 A. See Section 01 3000-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures.
13 B. Product Data: Provide product description.
14 C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and conditions requiring
15 special attention; cautionary procedures required during application.
16 D. Manufactu�er's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
17 1.05 {G4UALIi"Y ASSURANC�
18 A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum
19 3 years' experience.
20 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS
21 A. Protect liquid materials from freezing.
22 B. Weather and Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with application of water repellent (except with
23 written recommendation of manufacturer), when ambient temperature is less than 50 degrees F
24 (10 degrees C); when substrate surtaces have cured for less than a period of 2 months; when rain
25 or temperatures below 40 degrees F (4 degrees C), are predicted for a period of 24 hours, or
26 earlier than 3 days after surfaces became wet;when substrate is frozen; at surface temperature of
27 less than 40 degrees F (4 degrees C).
28 1.07 4'V�4RRAN'i'Y
29 A. Upon completion of the job the owner shall receive a written 10-year warranty signed by the
30 Manufacturer and the General Contractor.
31 PARi'2 PRODUCTS
32 2.01 N1A�U�ACTtJRERS
33 A. Concrete Slab Sealer:
34 1. Sivento; Product- DYNASYLAN BH-N PLUS: www.sivento-silanes.com.
35 a. 100% active silane treatment with oleophobic additive, as manufactured by Sivento, or
36 approved, and represented by Saleeco, Inc. - (253) 841-2849.
37 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
38 2.02 MATERl,�LS
39 PA�i'f 3 EXECUTIO�1
40 3.tf1 EXAMINATION
41 A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.
42 B. Verify joint sealants are installed and cured.
43 C. Verify surfaces to be coated are dry, clean, and free of efflorescence, oil, or other matter
44 detrimental to application of water repellent.
2012-37/YCS AgricuRural Dept Improvements 07 1900 - 1 SLAB SEALERS
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN °
1 3.02 �R�PARATION
2 A. Prepare surfaces to be coated as recommended by water repellent manufacturer for best results.
3 B. Remove loose particles and foreign matter. ,,
4 C. Remove oiI and foreign substances with a chemical solvent that will not affect water repellent.
5 D. Pressure wash surfaces to be coated:
6 1. Concrete: High pressure wash at 1500 to 4000 psi (10 to 30 MPa),at 6 to 12 inches (150 to �_
7 300 mm)from surface.
S E. Allow surfaces to dry completely to degree recommended by water repellent manufacturer before
9 starting coating work.
10 3.03 APPLICATIQf�
11 A. Apply water repellent in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, using procedures and
12 application methods recommended as producing the best results.
13 1. Concrete Slab Sealer: Jn addition to the specified curing compound, apply water repellent to
14 concrete floor slabs scheduled for sealer coat, in Finish Schedule, a minimum of 28 days
15 after the ffoors have been poured.
16 a. Apply at rate recommended by manufacturer, continuously over entire surface.
17 3.04 �ROTECTION OF ADJACENT WORK
18 A. Protect adjacent landscaping, property, and vehicles from drips and overspray.
19 B. Protect adjacent surfaces not intended to receive water repellent.
20 C. Remove water repe8ent from unintended surFaces immediately by a method instructed by water -
21 repellent manufacturer.
22 3.05 COMPLETIC?N
23 A. Work that does not conform to specified requirements shall be corrected and/or replaced as
24 directed by the Owner's Representative at Contractor's expense without extension of time.
25 END OF SECTION
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 07 1900 - 2 SLAB SEALERS A
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
�RICKSON MCGOVERN
� SECTIt)N(�7 2100
2 THERMA� INSU�AT10�
3 PART 1 GENERAL
4 1.01 �ECTiOfd INCLUDES
5 A. Batt insuiation and vapor retarder in exterior wall construction.
6 �.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
7 A. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Supporting construction for batt insulation.
8 �.03 A�FERENCE STANDARDS
9 A. ASTM C665- Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame
10 Construction and Manufactured Housing; 2006.
11 B. ASTM E84- Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
12 2010b.
13 C. ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmissian of Materials; 2010.
14 D. ASTM E 119-Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials;
15 2005a.
16 E. ASTM E136 -Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace At 750
17 Degrees C; 2011.
18 F. ASTM C 1136 - Standard Specification for Flexible, Low permeance Vapor Retardars for thermal
19 insulation.
20 G. NFPA 255 - Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
21 National Fire Protection Association; 2006.
22 1.04 SUBMITTALS
23 A. See Section 01 3000-Administrative Requirements,for submittal p�ocedures.
24 B. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance criteria, and product
25 limitations.
26 C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include information on special environmental conditions
27 required for installation and installation techniques.
28 D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
29 1.�15 +QUd1LITY,�SSURAiNCE
30 A. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide insulation materials which are identical to those whose
31 fire pertormance characteristics, as listed for each material or assembly of which insulation is a
32 part, have been determined by testing, per methods indicated below, by UL or other testing and
33 inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
34 1. Surtace Burning Characteristics:ASTM E 84.
35 2. Fire Resistance Ratings:ASTM E 119.
36 3. Combustion Characteristics:ASTM E 136.
37 B. Maximum Allowable Asbestos Content of Inorganic Insulations: Provide insulations composed of
38 mineral fibers or mineral ores which contain 0% asbestos of any rype.
39 1.46 DE�IVERYa �aTORAGE, AND HIANDLING
40 A. General Protection: Protect insulations from physical damage and from becoming wet, soiled, or
41 covered with ice or snow. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for handling, storage and
42 protection during installation.
43 1.07 FIELD CO�VDITIONS
44 A. Do not install insulation adhesives when temperature or weather conditions are detrimental to
45 successful installation.
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 07 2100 - 1 THERMAL INSULATION
YELM H1GH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMEiVTS
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSt)Id MCGOVERN
1 PAR`T 2 PRO�UCTS f
2 2.01 IV1AR1l7FACl'URERS
3 A. Manufacturers of Glass Fiber insulation:
4 1. CertainTeed Corp.
5 2. Johns Manville.
6 3. Knauf lnsulation.
7 4. United States Gypsum.
8 B. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
9 2.02 BAT�' INSULATION MATERIALS
10 A. Where batt insulation is indicated, either glass fiber or mineral fiber batt insulation may be used, at
11 Contractor's option.
12 B. Glass Fiber Batt Insulation: Flexible preformed batt or blanket, complying with ASTM C665;friction
13 fit.
14 C. Full Cavity Requirements for Exterior Walls:All exterior walls shall be filled to full depth of wall
15 cavity at all exterior walls.
16 1. All exterior walls shall be filled to full depth of wall cavity at all exterior walls. '
17 2. iVlinimum R-values:
18 a. 2 x 6 WaIIsR-21
19 b. 2 x 8 VUaIIsR-25
20 c. 2 x 10 (or walls to 10")Walls R-30
21 d. 2 x 12 (or walls to 12")WaIIsR-38
22 e. Note: This requirement shall supercede any drawing.
23 3. Not to be left exposed in any location. �`
24 4. Flame Spread Index: 25 or less,when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
25 5. Combustibility: Non-combustible, when tested in accordance with ASTM E136, except for
26 facing, if any. ,�,
27 6. Formaldehyde Content: Zero.
28 7. Facing: Aluminum foil,flame spread 25 rated; one side. ��
29 8. Manufacturers:
30 a. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com. �`
31 b. Johns Manville Corporation: www.jm.com. .
32 c. Knauf Insulation GmbH:www.knaufinsulation.us.
33 d. Owens Coming Corp:www.owenscorning.com. �
34 9. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000- Product Requirements.
35 D. Mineral Fiber Batt Insulation: Flexible preformed batt or blanket, complying with ASTM C665;
36 friction fit; unfaced flame spread index of 0 (zero) when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. ��
37 1. Smoke Developed Index: 0 (zero), when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
38 E. Batt Unfaced Insulation:ASTM C 865; preformed glass fiber batt;friction fit, Type I (blankets
39 without membrane facing) conforming to the following:
40 1. Not to be left exposed in any location.
41 2. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index of 25 or less; smoke developed index of
42 50 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.
43 3. Combustibility, Non-combustible when tested in accordance with ASTM E 136, except for -
44 facing, if any.
45 4. Provide insulation made without formaldehyde.
46 5. Facing: Unfaced. q
47 6. Width: Provide in full width to accommodate friction fit between studs.
48 F. Batt Faced Insulation:ASTM C 665; preformed glass or mineral fiber batt;friction fit, Type III, -
49 Class A(blankets with reflective vapor-retarder membrane facing with flame spread of 25 or
50 less)conforming to the following: `
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 07 2100- 2 THERMAL INSULATION
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. lMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGUVERN
1 1. To be used when exposed in any location.
2 2. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index of 25 or less; smoke developed index of
3 450 or less,when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.
4 3. Combustibility: Non-combustible when tested in accordance with ASTM E 136, except for
5 facing, if any.
6 4. Facing: Foil-Scrim-Kraft Vapor-Retarder membrane on one face, respectively; and as follows:
7 a. Mineral Fiber Type: Fibers manufactured from glass.
8 1) Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame spread and smoke developed
9 values of 25 and 50, respectively.ASTM E-84.
10 5. Width: Provide in full width to accommodate friction fit between studs.
11 2.03 �1CC�SSORIES
12 A. Pofyirnide(Nylon) Vapor Retarder: ASTM C 665 2-mil polyimide film,with laboratory tested vapor
13 transmission rating of 0.2 perms, natural color. Seal to door and window frames.All mechanical
14 and electrical penetrations shall be properly sealed. To be used only when covered by GWB or
15 other fire resistant material.
16 1. Manufacturer: Certainteed
17 2. Product: Certainteed MemBrain
18 B. Reinforced Vapor Retarder: Laminated.00035"aluminum foil with Tri-Directional Fiberglass Scrim
19 and 30 Ib. Natural Kraft paper.Vapor transmission rating of.02 Perms as tested by ASTM E-96.
20 Seal to door and window frames.All mechanical and electrical penetrations shall be properly
21 sealed. To be used when vapor retarder is exposed to inside atmosphere and not covered by
22 GWB or other finish material. This shall include insulated but unfinished spaces which are planned
23 for future development. Flame spread classification of 25.
24 C. Vapor-Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor retarder
25 manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder.
26 D. Insulation Fasteners: Impaling clip of unfinished steel with washer retainer and clips,to be adhered
27 to surface to receive insulation, length to suit insulation thickness and substrate, capable of
28 securely and rigidlyfastening insulation in place.
29 1. Mechanical Anchors: Type and size indicated or, if not indicated, as recommended by
30 insulation manufacturer for type of application and condition of substrate.
31 E. Mastic Sealer: Type recommended by insulation manufacturer for bonding edge joints between
32 units and filling voids in work.
33 F. Adhesive: Type recommended by insulation manufacturer for application.
34 1. Bond insulation securely to substrate, and complying with requirements for fire performance
35 characteristics.
3b PART 3 EXECUTION
37 3.01 EXAi�11NATION
38 A. Verify that substrate, adjacent materials, and insulation materials are dry and that substrates are
39 ready to receive insulation and adhesive.
40 1. Examine s�rbstrates and conditions,with Installer present,for compliance with requirements
41 of Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and to determine if other
42 conditions affecting performance of insulation are satisfactory. Do not proceed with
43 installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
44 B. Verify substrate surfaces are flat,free of honeycomb,fins, irregularities, or materials or substances
45 that may impede adhesive bond.
46 3A2 PREPARA�IOR�
47 A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulations or vapor retarders, including removing
48 projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders or that intertere with insulation attachment.
49 3,�}3 I�ISTALL.A?ION, GEIdERAL.
50 A. See note regarding full wall cavity insulation for exterior walls.
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 07 2100 - 3 THERMAL INSULATION
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
Y�LM COMMUNI7Y SCHUOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, unsoiled, and has not been exposed at any time to ice °
2 and snow.
3 C. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for particular conditions of installation in each case. If
4 printed instructions are not available or do not apply to project conditions, consult manufacturer's °-
5 technical representative for specific recommendations before proceeding with work.
6 D. Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly
7 around obstructions, and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections which interfere with
8 placement.
9 E. Apply a single layer of insulation of required thickness, unless otherwise shown or required to
10 make up total thickness.
11 3.04 �'0-t'1'T ITISTAL�ATION
12 A. Install insulation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
13 1. Apply insulation units to substrate by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written
14 instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use
15 mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units.
16 B. Install in location identified in the drawings without gaps or voids. Do not compress insulation.
17 C. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Insulate miscellaneous gaps and voids.
18 D. Fit insulation tightly in cavities and tightly to exterior side of inechanical and electrical services
19 within the plane of the insulation.
20 E. Install with factory applied vapor retarder membrane facing warm side of building spaces. Lap
21 ends and side flanges of inembrane over framing members.
22 1. Seal joints between closed-cell (nonbreathing) insulation units by applying adhesive, mastic, ,
23 or sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fitl voids
24 in completed installation with adhesive, mastic, or sealant as recommended by insulation
25 manufacturer.
26 a. Tape joints and ruptures in vapor retarder, and seal each continuous area of insulation to
27 surrounding construction to ensure air-tight installation.
28 2. Set reflective,foil-faced units with not less than 0.75-inch (19-mm) air space in front of foil as
29 indicated.
30 3. Stuff loose glass fiber insulation into all miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces in all walls �
31 which receive insulation. Compact to approximately 40% of normal maximum volume (to a ,
32 density of approximately 2.5 Ibs. per cu.ft.).
33 F. Tape seal butt ends, lapped flanges, and tears or cuts in membrane.
34 3.175 INSTA�LATIf)I� OF!/A�OR R�TAR�3�RS
35 A. General: Extend vapor retarder to extremities of areas to be protected from vapor transmission.
36 Secure in place with adhesives or other anchorage system as indicated. Extend vapor retarder to
37 cover miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including those filled with loose fiber-type
38 insulation.
39 B. Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over framing by lapping not less than 2 wall studs. Fasten
40 vapor retarders to framing at top, end and bottom edges, at perimeter of wall openings and at lap
41 joints; space fasteners 16" o.c.
42 C. Seal overlapping joints in vapor retarders with adhesives or vapor-retarder tape according to vapor .
43 retarder manufacturer's instructions. Seal butt joints and fastener penetrations with vapor-retarder
44 tape. Locate all joints over framing members or other solid substrates.
45 D. Firmly attach vapor retarders to substrates with mechanical fasteners or adhesives as
46 recommended by vapor retarder manufacturer.
47 E. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes and similar items penetrating vapor
48 retarders with vapor retarder tape to create an air-tight seal between penetrating objects and vapor
49 retarder.
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 07 2100 - 4 THERMAL INSUTATION
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMEN7S
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 F. Repair any tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other work.
2 Cover with vapor retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarder.
3 G. Installation of Board Acoustical Insulation: Install to drywall using adhesive or screws as
4 recommended by manufacturer.
5 3.06 P'�iClTECTION
6 A. Do not permit installed insulation to be damaged prior to its concealment.
7 1. Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather
8 exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures
9 where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent
10 construction immediately after installation.
11 3.07 �tEPLl�10EMENT OF INSULATIORI
12 A. Any insulation that becomes water saturated due to lack of protection, roof leaks, or the results of
13 any other construction related incident shall be replaced.
14 END OF SECTION
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 07 2100- 5 THERMAL INSULATION
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT.IMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 SEC710N 07 250Q
2 WEA�'HER BARRIEFiS
3 P�►RT 1 G�NERA'�
4 �A1 SECTICIN INCLUDES
5 A. Air (infiltration) Barriers: Materials to stop passage of air through joints around frames of openings
6 in exterior walls and exterior wall infills.
7 B. Vapor Retarder (Barriers):
8 1. See section 07 2100-Thermal Insulation: Vapor retarder installed in conjunction with batt
9 insulation.
10 1.02 RELA,TED REQUIREMENTS
11 A. Section 07 2100 -Thermal Insulation:Vapor retarder instalfed in conjunction with batt insulation.
12 B. Section 07 9005 -Joint Sealers: Sealant materials and installation techniques.
13 1.03 DEFINITIONS
14 A. Air(infiltration) Barrier:Air-tight barrier made of material that is relatively air impermeable but water
15 vapor permeable, both to the degree specified, with sealed seams and with sealed joints to
16 adjacent surfaces.
17 B. Vapor Retarder: Air tight barrier made of material that is relatively water vapor impermeable,to the
18 degree specified, with sealed seams and with sealed joints to adjacent surfaces.
19 1. Water Vapor Permeance: For purposes of conversion, 57.2 ng/(Pa s sq. m) = 1 perm.
20 1.04 REFEREIdCE STAIdDARDS
21 A. AATCC Test Method 127-Water Resistance: Hydrostatic Pressure Test; 2008.
22 B. ASTM E84- Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
23 2010b.
24 C. ASTM E2178- Standard Test Method for Air Permeance of Building INaterials; 2003.
25 PAR7 2 PRODUCTS
26 2.0'i I�IR BARRIER MATERIALS (WAT�R VAPOR PERMEABLE AND WATER-RESISTIVE)
27 A. Air Barrier Sheet, Mechanically Fastened:
28 1. Air Permeance: 0.004 cubic feet per square foot (0.02 liters per second per square meter),
29 maximum,when tested in accordance with ASTM E2178.
30 2. Water Vapor Permeance: 5 perms (287 ng/(Pa s sq. m)), minimum, when tested in
31 accordance with ASTM E96/E96M Procedure A(desiccant method).
32 3. Water Vapor Permeance: 20 perms (1149 ng/ (Pa s sq. m)), minimum, when tested in
33 accordance with ASTM E96/E96M Procedure A(desiccant method).
34 4. Water Penetration Resistance:V1/ithstand a water head of 21 inches (55 cm), minimum,for
35 minimum of 5 hours, when tested in accordance with AATCC 127.
36 5. Ultraviolet and Weathering Resistance: Approved in writing by manufacturer for minimum of 9
37 months weather exposure.
38 6. Ultraviolet and Weathering Resistance:Approved in writing by manufacturer for minimum of 4
39 months weather exposure.
40 7. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index of 25 or less, smoke developed index of
41 50 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
42 8. Products:
43 a. DuPont Building Innovations; Tyvek CommercialWrap, Tyvek Wrap Caps,Tyvek Tape,
44 and Tyvek Commercial Sealant: www.dupont.com.
45 b. Pactiv Corporation; GreenGuard RainDrop Building Wrap: greenguard.pactiv.com.
46 c. VaproShield, LLC;WrapShield: www.vaproshield.com.
47 d. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 07 2500- 1 WEATHER BARRIERS
YELiVI HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMfNTS =
YE�M COMMUNITYSCHOOLS
ERlCKSON MCGOVERN
1 �,�2 SEAl.ANTS
2 A. Silicone Sealant: as specified in Section 07 9005.
3 2,03 �CCESSORI�S
4 A. Self-Adhesive Sheet Flashing: ASTM D 1970:
5 B. Thinners and Cleaners:As recommended by material manufacturer.
6 PART 3�XECUTION
7 3.�i EXAMINATION
8 A. Verify that surfaces and conditions are ready to accept the work of this section.
9 3.02 P�tEPARATION ji
10 A. Remove projections, protruding fasteners, and loose or foreign matter that might interfere with
11 proper installation. �
12 B. Clean and prime substrate surfaces to receive adhesives in accordance with manufacturer's �
13 instructions.
14 3A3 INSTALLAi'ION
15 A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
16 B. Air Barriers: Install continuous air tight barrier over surfaces indicated,with sealed seams and with `
17 sealed joints to adjacent surfaces.
18 C. Apply sealants and adhesives within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult
19 manufacturer if temperature is out of this range.
20 D. Mechanically Fastened Sheets -On Exterior:
21 1. Install sheets shingle-fashion to shed water, with seams generally horizontaL
22 2. Overlap seams as recommended by manufacturer but at least 6 inches.
23 3. Overlap at outside and inside corners as recommended by manufacturer but at least 12
24 inches (305 mm). �-
25 4. Attach to framed construction with fasteners extending through sheathing into framing. Space
26 fasteners at 12 to 18 inches (305 to 46Q mm) on center along each framing member
27 supporting sheathing. �
28 5. For applications specified to be air tight, seal seams, laps, penetrations,tears, and cuts with
29 self-adhesive tape;vse only large-headed, gasketed fasteners recommended by the
30 manufacturer.
31 �. Where stud framing rests on concrete or masonry, extend lower edge of sheet at least 4 �
32 inches (100 mm) below bottom of framing and seal to foundation with sealant.
33 7. Install air barrier and vapor retarder UNDER jamb flashings.
34 8. Install head flashings under weather barrier.
35 9. At openings to be filled with frames having nailing flanges, wrap excess sheet into opening; at
36 head, seal sheet over flange and flashing.
37 3.04 FIEI.d QUALITY COiVTROL
38 A. Do not cover installed weather barriers until required inspections have been completed.
39 3.05 PAOTECTIO�d
40 A. Do not leave materials exposed to weather longer than recommended by manufacturer.
41 EMC9 OF$ECTION
2012-37/YCS Agricuftural Dept Improvements 07 2500-2 WEATHER BARRIERS
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMEIdTS
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 SECTION 07 3i 13
2 ASPFIAL'T SHINGL�S
3 PART 1 G�NERAL
4 1,01 SIEC710�V INCLUDES
5 A. Composition asphalt shingle roofing.
6 B. Underlayment membrane.
7 C. Flexible sheet membranes for eave protection, underlayment, and valley protection.
8 1. Protection Membrane: Self adhering (ice and water shield) protection membrane for eaves,
9 valleys, and as shown on drawings.
10 D. Associated metal flashings and accessories.
11 �.02 REI..ATE� REQUiREMENTS
12 A. Section 06 1000- Rough Carpentry: Roof sheathing.
13 B. Section 07 6200 -Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Other fiashings.
14 1.�D3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
15 A. ASTM D3161 - Standard Test Method for Wind-Resistance of Asphalt Shingles (Fan-Induced
16 Method); 2009.
17 B. ASTM D3462 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Shingles Made From Glass Felt and Surfaced
18 With Mineral Granules; 2010a.
19 C. ASTM D 4601 -Standard Specification for Asphalt-Coated Glass Fiber Base Sheet Used in
20 Roofing; Current Edition.
21 D. ASTM E 108 -Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Roof Coverings; Current Edition.
22 E. NRCA MS104 -The NRCA Steep Roofing Manual; National Roofing Contractors Association;
23 Current Edition, with interim updates.
24 F. SMACNA(ASMM) -Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning
25 Contractors' National Association; 2003.
26 G. UL (RMSD) - Roofing Materials and Systems Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; current
27 edition.
28 j.04 SUBMITTALS
29 A. See Section 01 3000-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures.
30 B. Product Data: Provide data indicating material characteristics.
31 C. Samples: Submit two samples of each shingle color indicating color range and finish
32 texture/pattern;for color selection.
33 D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation criteria and procedures.
34 E. Nlanufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed spec'rfied requirements.
35 1.05 QUALlfiY ASSUFRAfdC�
36 A. Perform Work in accordance with the recommendations of NRCA Steep Roofing Manual.
37 B. Products Required to Comply with Fire Resistance Criteria: UL listed and labeied.
38 1. Fire Test Response Classification:Where products with a fire test response classification are
39 specified, provide asphalt shingles identical to those tested according to ASTM E 108 or UL
40 790 and listed by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities
41 having jurisdiction. Identify each bundle of asphalt shingles with appropriate markings
42 indicating fire test response classification of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
43 C. Wind Resistance Test Characteristics:Where wind resistant asphalt shingles are indicated,
44 provide products identical to those tested according to ASTM D 3161 or UL 997 and passed.
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 07 3113 - 1 ASPHALT SHINGLES
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS .�,
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 Identify each bundle of asphalt shingles with appropriate markings of applicable testing and `
2 inspecting agency.
3 D. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer("Roofer")that is approved by the
4 specified shingle manufacturer to perform shingle roofing work who has specialized in the -
5 installation of roofing systems similar to that required for this project. Installer must also be a
6 member in good standing with the State and National Roofing Contractors Association.
7 1. Bidder to provide evidence they are an approved installer by the manufacturer of the
8 specified shingles at time of their bid.
9 E. Source Limitations: Obtain insulation, vented nail base, ridge and hip cap shingles, underlayment
10 and self-adhering sheet underlayment from single source from single manufacturer.
11 �.06 �E�IVERI(, STORAGE, AND HANDLING �
12 A. Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturer's unopened bundles, rolls or containers,with
13 labels intact.
14 B. Handle and store materials at Project site to prevent water damage, staining, or other physical
15 damage. Store roll goods on end. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for job site
16 storage, handling, and protection.
17 C. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling, and
18 other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for
19 handling, storage, and protection during installation.
20 D. Protect plastic insulation as follows:
21 1. Do not expose to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and
22 concealment.
23 2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver plastic insulating materials to project site
24 ahead of installation time.
25 3. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area
26 of construction.
27 1.07 ENVIROiVMENTAL REQUIREMENi'S �
28 A. Do not install shingles or eave protection membrane when surtace temperatures are below 45
29 degrees F (7 degrees C).
30 B. Substrate: Proceed with shingle work only after substrate construction and penetrating work have
31 been completed. �
32 C. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installing asphalt shingles only when existing and forecasted
33 weather conditions will permit work to be performed according to manufacturers' recommendations �
34 and warranty requirements, and when substrate is completely dry. _.
35 D. Instailation of roofing is roofing contractor's acceptance of substrate.
36 1.08 1MARRAfdTY
37 A. General Warranty:The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of
38 other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in
39 addition to, and cun concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements -
40 of the Contract Documents.
41 B. Installation\IUarranty: Contractor shall provide a signed 2-year warranty on installation.
42 1,4� EXTRA MA1'�FlIA�S �,
43 A. See Section 01 6000- Product Requirements,for additional provisions.
44 B. Provide 100 sq.ft. (_sq. m) of extra shingles of each color specified.
45 PAF3�'2 �RODUCTS
46 2.�1 SHINGLES
47 A. Manufacturers:
48 1. Malarkey Roofing Company; www.malarkeyroofing.com.
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 07 3113- 2 ASPHALT SHINGLES
YELAII HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELAII COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSC)N MCGOVERN
1 a. Product: Alaskan (3 Tab).
2 Z. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000- Product Requirements.
3 B. Asphalt Shingles: Asphalt-coated glass felt, mineral granule surtaced, complying with ASTM
4 D3462; Class A fire resistance.
5 1. Style: Square.
6 2. Color: Selected from standard color line.
7 2.02 A+CCESSOAIES
8 A. Roofing Nails: Standard round wire shingle type, of hot-dipped zinc coated steel, 11 gage,
9 0.120-inch- (3-mm-) diameter shank diameter, 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) head diameter, of sufficient
10 length to penetrate through roof sheathing or 3/4 inch (19 mm) into roof sheathing or decking.
11 1. Use hot-dipped galvanized nails when nailing shingles through the ice and water guard.
12 a. Where nails are in contact with flashing, prevent galvanic action by providing nails made
13 from the same metal as that of the flashing.
14 2. Use stainless steel nails when nailing shingles through the ice and�nrater guard.
15 B. Nails (For Nailing Base Sheet): Provide (simplex) round cap roofing nails similar to GRIP TITE as
16 manufactured by Hoffler Wire Products Co., Inc. 11 gauge annular threaded nails with 1" diameter
17 20 gauge flat cap.
18 C. Eave, Valley, and other Protection Membrane: Self-adhering polymer-modified asphalt sheet
19 complying with ASTM D 1970; 40 mil (1 mm) total thickness;with strippable treated release paper
20 and polyethylene sheet top surface.
21 1. Provide SBS modified rubberized asphalt material reinforced to withstand puncture and
22 severe stress. Membrane to be tacky on one side (with release film) to provide good bonding
23 to the substrate.
24 a. Manufacturer:
25 1) Malarkey 401
26 2) Protecto Wrap's"Rainproof'.
27 3) Mirafi Miradri WIP 100.
28 4) Grace"Ice and Water Shield".
29 b. Provide at the following locations, unless noted otherwise on drawings:
30 1) Eaves: Instal4 from lower outer edge of eave up to 24 inches beyond line of the
31 inside face of outside wall.
32 2) Roof to Side Wall: Prior to installation of roofing or siding install minimum height of
33 8 inches onto wall and 10 inches out onto roof sheathing.
34 D. Underlayment: Tarco- Leakbarrier EasyLay; no exceptions.
35 1. Asp�talt Saturated High Performance Polyester(HPP).
36 2. Class A fire rating.
37 3. 4-square, 36-inch wide rolls.
38 E. Plastic Primer:ASTM D 41 primer.
39 1. Siplast: PA-1125 Primer
40 2. Henry: HE-104 Asphalt Primer.
41 3. Or approved equal.
42 2.03 METAL FL.ASHINGS
43 A. Metal Flashings: Provide sheet metal eave edge and other flashing indicated.
44 B. Sheet Metal: Prefinished galvanized steel, as specified in Section 07 6200.
45 PART 3 E)CECUTIC?M
46 3,01 EXA�III�➢ATIOi�
47 A. Verify existing conditions prior to beginning work.
48 B. Verify that deck is of sufficient thickness to accept fasteners,
49 C. Verify that roof penetrations and plumbing stacks are in place and flashed to deck surtace.
2012-37/YCS Agricuttural Dept Improvements 07 3113- 3 ASPHALT SHINGLES
YELiIA HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
�RICKSOI� MCGOVERN
1 D. Verify roof openings are correctly framed.
2 E. Uerify deck surfaces are dry,free of ridges, warps, or voids.
3 3.�2 PAEPARATIUId ,_
4 A. Seal roof deck joints wider than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) with deck tape.
5 B. At areas where eave protection membrane is to be adhered to substrate, fii( knot holes and surface
6 cracks with latex filler.
7 C. Broom clean deck surtaces before installing underlayment or eave protection.
8 D. Coordinate instatlation with flashings and other adjoining work to ensure proper sequencing. Do
9 not install roofing materials untii all vent stacks and other penetrations through roof sheathing have ,.,.
10 been installed and are securely fastened against movement.
11 3.03 1NSTALLATION-GENERAL
12 A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations but not less than those
13 recommended by"The NRCA Steep Roofing Manual."
14 1. Fasten asphalt shingles to roof sheathing by hand nailing (only).
15 3.04 INSTAL�ATIf��i- EAVE PROTECTION MEMBRANE
16 A. Install eave protection membrane from eave edge to minimum 2 ft. (600 mm)vp-slope beyond
�7 interior face of exterior wall.
18 B. Instalt eave protection membrane in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. �.
19 3.05 �fVS3'Ai.LATlO�� ��VDERLAYM�NT
20 A. At Roof Slopes Up to 4:12: (At Roof Slopes Up to 1:3 :) Install two layers of underlayment over
21 area not protected by eave protection, with ends and edges weather lapped minimum 4 inches •
22 (100 mm). Stagger end laps of each consecutive layer. Nail in place.
23 B. Prior to instaliation of underlayment membrane, place and install protection membranes (ice and
24 water shield) at locations specified. �,
25 C. SBS Base Sheet Underlayment on Roof Sheathing At Roof Slopes Less Than 4:12 {1:3): Install
26 two layers of underlayment over entire roof area, with ends and edges weather lapped minimum 6 %`
27 inches (150 mm) and at the edges 50%. Stagger end laps of each consecutive layer. Nail in place
28 1. SBS Base Sheet Underlayment On Roof Sheathing:Apply a double layer of fiberglass SBS
29 base sheet in the horizontal direction. A half wide starter sheet should be applied to the
30 eaves.A full-width sheet should then be applied covering the starter sheet with a full lap.
31 Succeeding sheets should be lapped 50°� plus 3" over the preceding sheets. End laps should
32 be a minimum of 6 inches. Backnail with hot-dipped nails under laps only as necessary to
33 hold the felts in place until application of shingles.
34 D. Items projecting through or mounted on roof:Weather lap and seal watertight with piastic cement.
35 3.06 fidS7ALLATICiIV - UMDERLAYME�d7'
36 A. Prior to installation of underlayment membrane, place and install protection membranes (ice and
37 water shield) at locations specified.
38 B. Place a full width piece of underlayment, parallel to the eave (low) edge of the roof.
39 1. Unroll Underlayment 2 to 3 feet, with the lay lines facing up, and position the end of it to the
40 edge of the eave and rake.
41 2. Install a few fasteners at the top, near the rake,and roll out the sheet to a manageable
42 leng#h.
43 3. Pull, straighten and align the sheet so that any wrinkles are eliminated and the sheet is even
44 with the eave edge.
45 4. Underlayment shall be fastened with 3/8" headed roofing nails hand driven, spaced 9" o.c. at
46 all laps in the center of the seam area, and two staggered rows fastened 12"o.c. in the field
47 of the sheet, or according to applicable Building Code.
48 5. Fastening shali be done from the top to avoid walking or kneeling on unsecured sheet.
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 07 3113 -4 ASPHALT SHINGLES .
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNITY SCHUOLS
ERICKSf�N MCGOVERN
1 6. Continue on to the end of the substrate and fasten down.
2 C. Base Sheet Underlayment on Roof Sheathing At Roof Slopes Less Than 4:12 (1:3): Install two
3 layers of underlayment over entire roof area,with ends and edges weather lapped minimum 6
4 inches (150 mm) and at the edges 50%. Stagger end laps of each consecutive layer. Nail in place.
5 1. Base Sheet Underlayment On Roof Sheathing:Apply a double layer of fiberglass base sheet
6 in the horizontal direction.A half wide starter sheet should be applied to the eaves. A
7 full-width sheet should then be applied covering the starter sheet with a full lap. Succeeding
8 sheets should be lapped 50°� plus 3"over the preceding sheets. End laps should be a
9 minimum of 6 inches. Backnail with hot-dipped nails under laps only as necessary to hold the
10 felts in place until application of shingles.
11 D. Items projecting through or mounted on roof:Weather lap and seal watertight with plastic primer.
12 1. Prime all metal collars,flashings, valley liners and drip edges with ASTM D 41 primer.
13 3.iD7 I�dSTALLi4TiON-SFIINGLES
14 A. Install shingles in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
15 1. Fasten individual shingles (cut shingles) using 2 nails per shingle (minimum), or as required
16 by code or manufacturer, whichever is greater.
17 2. Fasten strip shingles using 6 nails per strip, or as required by code or manufacturer,
18 whichever is greater (for specified blow-offs as noted above).
19 B. Place shingles in straight coursing pattern with 5 5/8 inch �mm) weather exposure to produce
20 double thickness over full roof area. Provide double course of shingles at eaves.
21 C. Instafl starter course prior to first course application. Starter course shall consist of 3-Tab shingles
22 with the tabs removed per recommendations of the NRCA. Place with self-sealing tabs on down
23 slope side and nail with hot-dipped galvanized nails. Place nails within 5" of the eave, maximum,
24 NRCA recommendations.
25 D. Project first course of shingles 3/4 inch (19 mm) beyond fascia boards.
26 E. Extend shingles 1/2 inch (13 mm) beyond face of gable edge fascia boards.
27 F. Complete installation to provide weather tight service.
28 3.08 PROTECTiON
29 A. Do not permit traffic over finished roof surface.
30 B. Replace any damaged materials installed under this Section with new materials that meet
31 specified requirements.
32 END�DF SEGTIOIV
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 07 3113 -5 ASPHALT SHINGLES
YELM iilGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVEHN
1 SECTiO�I 07 6200
2 Sl�EET IVIE7AL FLASFIING AIdD TRiM
3 PART 1 GENERAL
4 '�.01 SECTION INCL.UDES
5 A. Fabricated shest metal items, including flashings, gutters, and downspouts.
6 1. Roof-drainage systems.
7 2. Metal flashing.
S B. Sheet metal splash pans.
9 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
10 A. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry:Wood biocking for batten seams.
11 B. Section 07 9005 -Joint Sealers.
12 C. Section 09 9000 - Painting and Coating: Field painting.
13 1 A3 FiEFERENCE STANDARDS
14 A. AAMA 2603-Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for
15 Pigmented Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; 2002.
1b B. AAMA 2605-Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for
17 Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; 2005.
18 C. ASTM A653/A653M -Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
19 Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2010.
20 D. ASTM B32- Standard Spec'rfication for Solder Metal; 2008.
21 E. ASTM B749- Standard Specification for Lead and Lead Alloy Strip, Sheet, and Plate Products;
22 2003 (Reapproved 2009).
23 F. ASTM D4586- Standard 5pecification for Asphalt Roof Cement,Asbestos-Free; 2007.
24 G. SMACNA(ASMM) -Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning
25 Contractors' National Association; 2003.
26 1.04 aUBM17TALS
27 A. See Section 01 3000-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures.
28 B. Product Data including manufacturer's material and finish data, installation instructions, and
29 general recommendations for each specified flashing material and fabricated product.
30 C. Shop Dr�wings: Indicate material profile, jointing pattern,jointing details,fastening methods,
31 flashings,terminations, and instaflation details.
32 1. Shop Drawings of each item specified showing layout, profiles, methods of joining, and
33 anchorage cletails. Include all flashing and sheet metal units and others as required for a
34 complete watertight and weathertight building. Provide layouts at 1/4 inch scale and details at
35 3 inch scale.
36 D. Samples: Submit two samples in size illustrating metal finish color, as follows:
37 1. 8-inch- (200-mm-) square Samples of specified sheet materials to be exposed as finished
38 surfaces.
39 2. 12-inch- (300-mm-) long Samples of factory-fabricated products exposed as finished Work.
40 Provide complete with specified factory finish.
41 1.05 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
42 A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to withstand wind loads, structural movement,
43 thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failing.
44 1.06 +QUALITY ASSURANCE
45 A. Perform work in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual requirements and
46 standard details, except as otherwise indicated.
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 07 6200- 1 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
YEL(1►1 HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT, IMPROVEMENTS �
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 B. Fabricator and Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in sheet metal work with 3 years of
2 documented experience.
3 i.d97 DEL�VER`t', S°TC�RAG�,AND HANDLI�IG
4 A. Stack material to prevent twisting, bending, and abrasion, and to provide ventilation. Slope metal
5 sheets to ensure drainage.
6 B. Prevent contact with materials that could cause discoloration or staining.
7 '�.08 P�tCDJE�T CONDITIONS
S A. Coordinate Work of this Section with interfacing and adjoining Work for proper sequencing of each
9 installation. Ensure best possible weather resistance, durability of Work, and protection of
10 materials and finishes.
11 1.09 PROJECT C�OSEOUT
12 A. Guarantee: Guarantee exterior work watertight and weathertight for two years from date of final
13 completion.
14 PA�lT 2 PRODUCTS
15 2.01 SHEET �111AT�f�IAL.S
16 A. Galvanized Steel: ASTM A653/A653M, with G90/Z275 zinc coating; minimum 0.02 inch (0.6 mm)
17 thick base metaL
18 B. Pre-Finished Galvanized Steel:ASTM A653/A653M, with G90/Z275 zinc coating; minimum 0.02
19 inch (0.6 mm) thick base metal,shop pre-coated with PVDF coating.
20 1. PVDF (Polyvinylidene Fluoride) Coating: Superior Performance Organic Finish, AAIVIA 2605;
21 multiple coat,thermally cured fluoropolymer finish system.
22 a. Colors shall match color selected for wall and roof inetal panel of the Section 13 3419
23 Metal Building.
24 C. Lead:ASTM 6749, 2.5 Ib./sq.ft. (0.99 mm)thick.
25 2.02 ACCESSORIES �`
26 A. Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene; nonhardening, nonskinning, nondrying, nonmigrating sealant. -
27 B. Primer: Zinc chromate type.
28 C. Protective Backing Paint: Zinc molybdate alkyd.
29 D. Plastic Cement: ASTM D4586, Type L
30 1. Adhesives: Type recommended by flashing sheet metal manufacturer for waterproof and �
31 weather-resistant seaming and adhesive application of flashing sheet metal.
32 E. Metal Accessories: Provide sheet metal clips, straps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory °�
33 units as required for installation of Work, matching or compatible with material being installed;
34 noncorrosive; size and thickness required for pertormance. �
35 F. Solder: ASTM B32; Sn50 (50/50) type.
36 G. Downspout Strainers: Provide "beehive"type fabricated downspout strainer at each downspout
37 location. Select materials for compatibiJity with gutters and downspouts.
38 2.03 �ABRICA7lON
39 A. Sheet AAetal Fabrication Standard: Shop-fabricate work to greatest extent possible. Fabricate
40 sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations of SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet
41 Metal Manual"that apply to the design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of the item
42 indicated. Comply with material manufacturer instructions and recommendations for forming
43 material.
44 B. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects.
45 C. Form pieces in longest possible lengths.
46 D. Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2 inch (13 mm); miter and seam corners. `
2012-37/YCS Agricuttural Dept Improvements 07 6200 -2 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 E. Form material with flat lock seams, except where otherwise indicated.At moving joints, use sealed
2 lapped, bayonet-type or interlocking hooked seams.
3 F. Fabricate corners from one piece with minimum 18 inch (450 mm) long legs;seam for rigidity, seal
4 with sealant.
5 G. Fabricate aertical faces with bottom edge formed outward 1/4 inch (6 mm) and hemmed to form
6 drip.
7 H. Fabricate flashings to allow toe to extend 1 1/2 inches (_mm) over roofing edge. Return and
8 brake edges.
9 I. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that fit substrates and result in waterproof and
10 weather-resistant performance once installed. Verify shapes and dimensions of surtaces to be
11 covered before fabricating sheet metal.
12 J. Form exposed sheet metal Work that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks
13 and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.
14 K. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams in sheet metal with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed,
15 form seams, and solder.
16 L. Expansion Provisions: Space movement joints at maximum of 10 feet (3 m) with no joints allowed
17 within 24 inches (610 mm) of corner or intersection.Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion
18 provisions in Work cannot be used or would not be sufficiently weatherproof and waterproof,form
19 expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep,filled with
20 mastic sealant (concealed within joints).
21 M. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion, but movable,joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric
22 sealant to comply with SMACNA standards.
23 N. Separate metal from noncompatible metal or corrosive substrates by coating concealed surfaces
24 at locations of contact with asphalt mastic or other permanent separation as recommended by
25 manufacturer.
26 O. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed
27 on faces of sheet metal exposed to public view.
28 �.04 GlJTi'ER AND DOWtVSPOUT FABRICATIORi
29 A. Gutters: Profile as indicated.
30 1. Gutters: Shall be fabricated from 24 gauge galvanized steel with a baked-on fluoropolymer
31 finish in 10' long sections or in continuous roll formed sections of 50' maximum lengths.
32 Shape to be Style "I" as shown on Plate 2 of SMACNA manual with size as detailed on
33 drawings.
34 2. Shall be of free floating design supported without penetrations by suspension from galvanized
35 support brackets at 3'-0"o.c. maximum. Reinforce top of gutter with galvanized tie-straps at
36 3'-0" o.c., staggered with support brackets. Secure as detailed on drawings. Finish support
37 bracket and top reinforcing with a baked-on fluoropolymer finish. Provide for expansion at
38 ends of gutter runs.
39 3. Joints of gutters shall be lapped a minimum of 2 inches, sealed and riveted. Seal with
40 elastomeric rubber sealant"Flexable Seal" as manufactured by A.C. Products, or approved.
41 (253) 843-1577.
42 4. Furnish end caps, corner units, downspout outlets, support brackets, spacers,joint covers,
43 bafFles and other necessary accessories as required.
44 B. Downspouts: Profile as indicated.
45 C. Gutters and Downspouts: Size for rainfall intensity determined by a storm occurrence of 1 in 5
46 years in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.
47 D. Accessories: Profiled to suit gutters and downspouts.
48 1. Anchorage Devices: In accordance with SMACNA requirements.
49 2. Downspout Supports: Brackets.
2012-37/YCS Agricuftural Dept Improvements 07 6200- 3 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
YELiIA HIGFi SCHOOL
/�►G DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS �
Y�L�111 COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 E. Splash Pan: Shali be fabricated from 24 gauge gaivanized sheet metal as shown on the drawings
2 or similar to Plate 36 of the SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual with the following
3 dimensions.
4 1. 8ack height: 4 inches.
5 2. Back width: 8 inches.
6 3. Sides: Taper from 4"down to 1".
7 4. Front width: 18 inches.
8 5. Length: 24 inches. 2
9 F. Seal metal joints.
10 2.05 FINISFB
11 A. Factory Finish, Sheet Metal: Provide manufacturer's baked-on factory finish on sheet metal
12 flashing units. Color as selected by the Architect.
13 1. Metal Counter Flashing; and Base Flashing (If Any).
14 2. Rake Flashing.
15 3. Eave Flashing.
16 �. Gutters.
17 5. Miscellaneous Wall Flashing.
18 6. Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Accessories.
19 a. Finish as listed below:
20 1) Fluoropolymer Coating:
21 (a) Exterior coating to be full-strength 70% "Kynar 500" coating baked-on with a
22 dry film thickness of 1.0 mil, 30% reflective glass (ASTM D 523), over minimum
23 0.2 mil baked-on modified epoxy primer.
24 (b) Back-side coating to consist of.15 mil epoxy primer and.35 mil off-white �
25 backer.
26 (1) Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line of standard
27 colors. See Section 09 9999 for color selection, sizes, and other selection
28 information. '�`
29 PART 3 EXECUTION -
30 3.01 EXAi1AINAT10tV
31 A. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, and vents through roof are solidly set, reglets in
32 place, and nailing strips located.
33 1. Examine substrates and conditions under which sheet metal flashing and trim are to be
34 installed and verify that Work may properly commence. Do not proceed with installation until
35 unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
36 B. Verify roofing termination and base flashings are in place,sealed, and secure.
37 3A2 PREPAR,a710N �"
38 A. Install starter and edge strips, and cleats before starting installation.
39 B. Back paint concealed metal surfaces with protective backing paint to a minimum dry film thickness
40 of 15 mil (0.4 mm).
41 3,03 Ihi�'fALLATION
42 A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with
43 performance requirements,manufacturer's installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural
44 Sheet Metal ManuaL"Anchor units of Work securely in place by methods indicated,,providing for
45 thermal expansion of inetal units; conceal fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and
46 level as indicated. Install Work with laps,joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and
47 weatherproof.
48 1. Install exposed sheet metal Work that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool
49 marks and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form
50 hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in waterproof and
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 07 6200-4 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 weather-resistant performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered
2 before fabricating sheet metal.
3 2. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed sheet metai Work. Space
4 movement joints at maximum of 10 feet (3 m) with no joints allowed within 24 inches (61 Q
5 mm) of corner or intersection.Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions in Work
6 cannot be used or would not be sufficiently weatherproof and waterproof,form expansion
7 joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep,filled with mastic
g sealant(concealed within joints).
9 3. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pre-tin
10 edges of sheets to be soldered to a width of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm), except where pre-tinned
11 surface would show in finished Work.
12 a. Do not use torches for soldering. Heat surfaces to receive solder and flow solder into
13 joint. Fil1 joint completely. Completely remove flux and spatter from exposed surfaces.
14 b. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate
15 elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA standards. Fill joint with sealant and form
16 metal to completely seal joint.
17 c. Use joint adhesive for nonmoving joints specified not to be soldered.
18 d. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams in sheet metal with flat-lock seams.Tin edges to be
19 seamed,form seams, and solder,
20 e. Roof-Drainage System: Install drainage items fabricated from sheet metal, with straps,
21 adhesives, and anchors recommended by SMACNA's Manual or the item manufacturer,
22 to drain roof in the most efficient manner. Coordinate roof-drain flashing installation with
23 roof-drainage system installation. Coordinate flashing and sheet metal items for
24 steep-sloped roofs with roofing installation.
25 B. Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners. Use exposed fasteners only where permitted.
26 C. Apply plastic cement compound between metal flashings and felt flashings.
27 D. Fit flashings tight in place. Make corners square, surfaces true and straight in pianes, and lines
28 accurate to profiles.
29 E. Solder metal joints for full metal surface contact.After soldering,wash metal clean with
30 neutralizing solution and rinse with water.
31 F. Secure gutters and downspouts in place using concealed fasteners.
32 G. Set splash pans under downspouts.
33 3.04 CLEA�liiVG AND PROTECTION
34 A. Clean exprased metal surfaces, removing substances that might cause corrosion of inetal or
35 deterioration of finishes.
36 B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure sheet metal flashing and trim Work
37 during construction is without damage or deterioration other than natural weathering at the time of
38 Substantial Completion.
39 E�ID OF SECTIOfd
2012-37/YCS Agricuftural Dept Improvements 07 6200 - 5 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 SECTl0�107 9005
2 .lOINT SEAL.ERS
3 PART 1 GENERA�.
4 1.01 SEC710�d INCLUDES
5 A. Sealants and joint backing.
6 B. This Section includes joint sealers for the following locations:
7 1. Exterior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces as indicated below:
8 a. Control, expansion, and isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs for floors and
9 paving.
10 b. Other joints as indicated.
11 2. Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal non-traffic surfaces as indicated below:
12 a. Perimeter joints of exterior openings where indicated.
13 b. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors and windows
14 c. Other joints as indicated.
15 C. Precompressed foam sealers.
16 1.(B2 �EFINITIONS
17 A. Joint sealer, caulk, and sealant shall be interchangeable in the specifications and the drawings.
18 1.03 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
19 A. Section Q3 3000-Cast-in Place Concrete.
20 B. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry, sealing of joints to limit infiltration.
21 1A4 REFERENCE STANDARDS
22 A. ASTM C1193- S#andard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants;2010.
23 B. ASTM D1667- Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials--Poly(Vinyl Chloride) Foam
24 (Closed-Cell); 2005 (Reapproved 2011).
25 1.t15 Ql1ALITY ASSURAIdCE
26 A. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with
27 minimum 2 years experience.
28 1.QS SYST�II� PEFtFORMAI�CES
29 A. Provide joint sealers that have been produced and installed to establish and maintain watertight
30 and airtight continuous seal without causing staining or deterioration of joint substrates.
31 1,47 DELlV�ERY, S'�ORAGE,AND HANDLI�IG
32 A. Deliver materials to project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels informing
33 about manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period for use, pot life, curing
34 time, and mixing instructions for Multi-component materials.
35 B. Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturers' recommendations to prevent their
36 deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes.
37 1.08 F9�LD CONDITlONS
38 A. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and after
39 installation.
40 B. Joint Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealers where joint widths are less
41 than allowed by joint sealer manufacturer for application indicated.
42 C. Joint Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealers until contaminants
43 capable of interfering with their adhesion are removed from joint substrates.
44 1.09 COORDINATION
45 A. Coordinate the work with all sections referencing this section.
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 07 9005 - 1 JOINT SEALERS
YEL�NI HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS �
Y�L�'I COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 B. Sequence installation of joint sealers to accur not less than 21 nor more than 30 days after °
2 completion of concrete and masonry waterproofing, unless otherwise indicated. .
3 i.�t? VUA�tRANTY
4 A. See Section 01 7800-Closeout Submittals,for additionai warranty requirements. `
5 B. Correct defective work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion.
6 C. VVarranty: Include coverage for installed sealants and accessories which fail to achieve airtight
7 seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure.
8 PAR'f 2 PRODl1C�'S
9 2A1 MAi'E�tIA�.S,GENERAL
10 A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealers,joint fillers and other related materials that are compatible with
11 one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and apptication, as demonstrated
12 by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.
13 B. Colors: Provide color of exposed joint sealers indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as selected
14 by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. �-
15 2.{3�^ 14�lANU�ACTU'RERS
16 A. Silicone Sealants:
17 1. Bostik Inc:www.bostik-us.com.
18 2. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com.
19 3. BASF Construction Chemicals-Building Systems; Product
20 www.buildingsystems.basf.com.
21 4. GE Plastics:www.geplastics.com.
22 5. Degussa Building Systems/Sonneborn: www.chemrex.com.
23 6. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
24 B. Polyurethane Sealants;
25 1. Bostik Inc: www.bostik-us.com. w
26 2. Pecora Corporation:www.pecora.com.
27 3. Degussa Building Systems/Sonneborn: www.chemrex.com.
28 4. Substitutions:See Section 01 6000- Product Requirements.
29 C. Polysulfide Sealants:
30 1. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com.
31 2. BASF Construction Chemicals-Building Systems:www.chemrex.com.
32 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000- Product Requirements.
33 D. Acrylic Sealants (ASTM C920):
34 1. Tremco Global Sealants: www.tremcosealants.com.
35 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000- Product Requirements.
36 E. Butyl Sealants:
37 1. Bostik Inc: www.bostik-us.com.
38 2. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora,com.
39 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000- Product Requirements.
40 F. Acrylic Emulsion Latex Sealants:
41 1. Bostik Inc: www.bostik-us.com.
42 2. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com.
43 3. Degussa Building Systems/Sonneborn:www.chemrex.com.
44 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
45 G. Preformed Compressible Foam Sealers: f
46 1. EMSEAL Joint Systems, Ltd: www.emseaLcom.
47 2. Sandell Manufacturing Company, Inc: www.sandellmfg.com.
48 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000- Product Requirements.
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 07 9005 -2 JOINT SEALERS
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 2.�3 SEALANTS
2 A. General Purpose Exterior Sealant: Polyurethane;ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Ciass 25, Uses M, G,
3 and A;single component.
4 1. Applications: Use for:
5 a. Control, expansion, and soft joints in masonry.
6 b. Joints between concrete and other materials.
7 c. Joints between metal frames and other materials.
8 d. Other exterior joints for which no other sealant is indicated.
9 B. General Purpose Interior Sealant:Acrylic emulsion latex;ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF single
10 component, paintable.
11 1. ApPlications: Use for:
12 a. Interior wall and ceiling control joints.
13 b. Joints between door and window frames and wall surfaces.
14 c. Other interior joints for which no other type of sealant is indicated.
15 C. Concrete Paving Joint Sealant: Polyurethane, self-leveling; ASTM C 920, Class 25, Uses T, I, M
16 and A; single component.
17 1. Color: Gray.
18 2. Applications: Use for:
19 a. Joints in sidewalks and vehicular paving.
20 2.dk1 A+�CESSORIES
21 A. Primer: Non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.
22 B. Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer;
23 compatible with joint forming materials.
24 C. Joint Backing: Round foam rod compa#ible with sealant;ASTM D 1667, closed cell PVC; oversized
25 30 to 50 percent larger than joint width.
26 D. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.
27 PART 3 EXECU710M
28 3.01 EXAMINATIOIV
29 A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work.
30 B. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant.
31 3.02 Pf�E�+ARA'TIO�d
32 A. Remove loose materials and foreign matter that could impair adhesion of sealant.
33 B. Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
34 1. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where indicated or where recommended by joint sealer
35 manufacturer based on preconstruction joint sealer-substrate tests or prior experience.Apply
36 primer to comply with joint sealer manufacturer's recommendations. Confine primers to areas
37 of joint sealer bond, do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.
38 C. Perform preparation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C1193.
39 D. Protect elements surrounding the work of this section from damage or disfigurement.
40 1. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining
41 surfaces which otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by
42 cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling
43 without disturbing joint seal.
44 3.03 INS�A�LATlOIV
45 A. Perform work in accordance with sealant manufacturer's requirements for preparation of surtaces
46 and material installation instructions.
47 B. Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C1193.
2012-37/YCS AgricWtural Dept Improvements 07 9005 -3 JOINT SEALERS
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELiN COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 C. Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used.
2 1. install bond breaker tape between sealants and joint-fillers, compression seais or back of
3 joints where adhesion of sealant to surfaces at back of joints would result in sealant failure.
4 D. Install sealant free of air pockets,foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags.
5 E. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when
6 sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges.
7 F. Tool joints concave. `"
8 G. Precompressed Foam Sealant: Do not stretch; avoid joints except at corners, ends, and
9 intersections; install with face 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3 to 6 mm) below adjoining surface.
10 H. Compression Gaskets:Avoid joints except at ends, corners, and intersections; seal all joints with `
11 adhesive; install with face 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3 to 6 mm) below adjoining surface.
12 I. Installation of Sealant Backings: Install sealant backings to comply with the following requirements:
13 1. Install joint fillers of type indicated to provide support of sealants during application and at
14 position required to produce the cross sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants
15 relative to joint widths which allow optimum sealant movement capability.
16 a. Do not leave gaps between ends of joint fillers.
17 b. Do not stretch,twist, puncture or tear joint fillers.
18 c. Remove absorbent joint fillers which have become wet prior to sealant application and -
19 replace with dry material.
20 3.tf4 CL�ANING
21 A. Clean adjacent soiled surfaces.
22 3.t95 PR�TECTION
23 A. Protect sealants until cured.
24 1. Protect joint sealers during and after curing period from contact with contaminating °
25 substances or from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so that
26 they are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such �
27 protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint ,
28 sealers immediately and reseal joints with new materials to product joint sealer installations
29 with repaired areas indistinguishable from original work.
30 END OF SECTION
�,.
2012-37/YCS Agncuttural Dept Improvements 07 9005-4 JOINT SEALERS �
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
'efELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 SECTION 0� 1113
2 HtJLLOW NIETA�DOORS AND FRAMES
3 PART 1 GENERAL
4 1.01 SECTiOR� INCLUDES
5 A: Non-fire-rated steel doors and frames.
6 B. Thermally insulated steel doors.
7 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
8 A. Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware.
9 B. Section OS 8000 -Glazing: Glass for doors and borrowed lites.
10 C. Section 09 9000- Painting and Coating: Field painting.
11 �1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
12 A. ANSI/ICC A117.1 -American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and
13 Facilities; International Code Council; 2003.
14 B. ANSI A250.8- SDI-100 Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames;
15 2003.
16 C. ANSI A250.10-Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for
17 Steel Doors and Frames; 1998 (R2004).
18 D. ASTM A653/A653M -Standard Specification for Steel Sheet,Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
19 Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2010.
20 E. ASTM C1363 -Standard Test Method for Thermal Performance of Building Assemblies by Means
21 of a Hot Box Apparatus;2005.
22 F. BHMA A156.115- Hardware Preparation in Steel Doors and Steel Frames; 2006.
23 G. DHI A115 Series -Spec'rfications for Steel Doors and Frame Preparation for Hardware; Door and
24 Hardware Institute; 2000 (ANSI/DHI A115 Series).
25 H. NAAMM HMMA 840- Guide Specifications for Installation and Storage of Hollow Metal Doors and
26 Frames;The National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers; 2007.
27 I. NAAMM HMMA 860 -Guide Specifications for Hollow Metal Doors and Frames; The National
28 Association of Architectural Metal Allanufacturers; 1992.
29 J. NAAIv1M HMMA 861 - Guide Specifications for Commercial Hollow Metal Doors and Frames;The
30 National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers; 2006.
31 1 A4 SUBMITTALS
32 A. See Section 01 3000-Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures.
33 B. Product Data: Materials and details of design and construction, hardware locations, reinforcement
34 type and locations, anchorage and fastening methods, and finishes; and one copy of referenced
35 grade standard.
36 C. Shop Drawings: Details of each opening, showing elevations, glazing,frame profiles, and
37 identifying location of different finishes, if any.
38 1. Provide schedule of doors and frames using same reference numbers for details and
39 openings as those on contract drawings.
40 a. Indicate coordinate of glazing frames and stops with glass and glazing requirements.
41 1.05 Ql1ALITY ASSIJRANCE
42 A. Provide doors and frames complying with Steel Door Institute "Recommended Specifications
43 Standard Steel Doors and Frames"ANSI A 250.8/SDI-100-98 and as herein specified.
44 B. Glazed openings, other than doors or ducts, in one-hour rated corridors,shall be labeled for a fire
45 protection rating of at least three-fourths hours and shall include an affixed label on frame. The
2012-37/YCS Agricuttural Dept Improvements 08 1 1 13- 1 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
YELiVI HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEP�. IMPROVEMENTS �-,
YELM COMMUNiTY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 total area of all openings, other than doors, in any portion of an interior corridor shall not exceed 25 '
2 percent of the area of the corridor wall of the room which it is separating from the corridor.
3 �A6 DE��VEF��f', S�'ORAGE,AND HANDLING
4 A. Deliver doors and frames cardboard wrapped or crated to provide protection during transit and job
5 storage. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory-finished doors and
6 frames.
7 B. Inspect doors and frames upon delivery for damage. Minor damages may be repaired provided
8 refinished items are equal in all respects to new work and acceptable to Architect; otherwise,
9 remove and replace damaged items as directed.
10 C. Store in accordance with IVAAMM HMMA 840. Y
11 1. Store doors and frames at building site under cover. Place units on minimum 4-inches high
12 wood blocking.Avoid use of non-vented plastic or canvas shelters which could create
13 humidity chamber. If cardboard wrapper on door becomes wet, remove carton immediately.
14 Provide 1/4-inches spaces between stacked doors to promote air circulation.
15 D. Protect with resilient packaging; avoid humidity build-up under coverings; prevent corrosion.
16 y.t�7 V!/ARRA�ITIr'
17 A. Submit door manufacturer's two-year warranty, from date of final completion, signed by
18 Manufacturer, Installer and Contractor, agreeing to repair or replace defective doors or doors that
19 do not conform to tolerance limitations of referenced quality standards.
20 PAF�?'2 PROD�JCT�
21 2.0� MANUFI�►��URERS
22 A. Steel Doors and Frames:
23 1. Assa Abloy Ceco, Curries, or Fleming: www.assaabloydss.com.
24 2. Ceco Door Products: www.cecodoor.com.
25 3. Curries Company: www.curries.com.
26 4. Steelcraft: www.steelcraft.com. ""
27 5. Stiles Custom Metal, Inc.: www.hollowmetal.com.
28 6. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
29 2.02 DOOR�AIVD FF3AMES `
30 A. Requirements for All Doors and Frames:
31 1. Accessibility: Comply with ANSI/ICC A117.1.
32 2. Door Texture: Smooth faces.
33 3. Glazed Lights: Non-removable stops pn non-secure side; sizes and configurations as
34 indicated on drawings.
35 4. Hardware Preparation: In accordance with BHMA A156.115, with reinforcement welded in
36 place, in addition to other requirements specified in door grade standard.
37 5. Galvanizing for Units in Wet Areas: All components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated
38 (galvannealed), manufacturer's standard coating thickness.
39 6. Finish: Factory primed,for field finishing.
40 B. Fabrication:
41 1. Fabricate steel door and frame units to be rigid, neat in appearance and free from defects,
42 warp or buckle.Wherever practicable,fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. Clearly m
43 identify work that cannot be permanently factory-assembled before shipment,to assure
44 proper assembly at project site. Comply with ANSI/SDI-100 requirements.
45 a. Joints: The width of all exposed joints at the intersection of frame members shall not
�5 exceed 1/64" (.015"} maximum. Joints exceeding this limit shall be filled with the
47 specified plastic filler and sanded smooth to flush out with surface of frame.
48 b. Internal Construction: Manufacturer's standard honeycomb, polyurethane, polystyrene,
49 unitized steel grid, vertical steel stiffeners, or rigid mineral fiber core with internal sound 4
2012-37/YCS Agricuttural Dept Improvements 08 1113 -2 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES _
YELM WIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELiU1 COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 deadener on inside of face sheets where appropriate in accordance with SDI standards.
2 (E�erior doors insulated).
3 c. Clearances: Not more than 1/8 inch at jambs and heads except between non-fire rated
4 pairs of doors not more than 1/4 inch. Not more than 3/4 inch at bottom.
5 2. Fabricate exposed faces of doors and panels, including stiles and rails of non-flush units,
6 from only cold-rolled steel.
7 3. Fabricate door edges with exposed hairline seam of uniform width located on center of door
S edge.
9 4. Fabricate frames, concealed stiffeners, reinforcement, edge channels, louvers and moldings
10 from either cold-rolled or hot-rolled steel. (Fabricator's option.}
11 5. Fabricate exterior doors, panels, and frames from galvanized sheet steel in accordance with
12 SDI-112. Provide top flush edges of exterior dovrs as integral part of door construction or by
13 addition of minimum 16 gage inverted steel channels. Recessed space between faces, at top
14 of door, not acceptable.
15 6. Exposed Fasteners: Unless otherwise indicated, provide countersunk flat or oval heads for
16 exposed screws and bolts.
17 7. Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for
18 surface applied hardware may be done at project site. Provide 10 gage reinforcement for all
19 hardware; include reinforcement for closers on frames whether closers are scheduled or not,
20 and plasterguards at strike pockets.Welding of hinges to frames or doors not permitted.
21 8. Shop Painting: Clean,treat, and paint exposed surfaces of steel door and frame units,
22 including galvanized surfaces.
23 a. Clean steel surfaces of mill scale, rust, oil, grease, dirt, and other foreign materials
24 before application of paint.
25 b. Apply shop coat of prime paint of even consistency to provide a uniformly finished
26 surface ready to receive finish paint.
27 c. After welding of galvanized steel, clean and grind welds as necessary, and apply high
28 zinc dust content paint for regalvanizing welds, complying with the Military Spec.
29 MIL-P-21035 (Ships) or SSPC-Paint-20.
30 9. Apply asphalt emulsion undiluted,to all concealed surfaces of frames in shower and drying
31 areas and exterior frames.This is in addition to the prime coat.
32 10. Glazing Stops: Minimum 20 gage steel.
33 a. Provide non-removable stops on outside of exterior doors and on secure side of interior
34 doors for glass, louvers, and other panels in doors.
35 b. Provide screw applied removable glazing beads on side opposite of stops for glass,
36 louvers, and other panels in doors. Screws shall be of tamper-proof type.
37 c. Locate glazing stops on opposite side of relite from horizontal blinds. See Specification
38 Section 12 2113 for horizontal blind locations.
39 11. Locate hardware as indicated on final shop drawings or, if not indicated, in locations listed in
40 SECTION 08 7100 - FINISH HARDWARE. If not indicated in the Finish Hardware then, in
41 accordance with "Recommended Locations for Builder's Hardware on Standard Steel Doors
42 and Frames," published by Door and Hardware Institute.
43 C. Combined Requirements: If a particular door and frame unit is indicated to comply with more than
44 one type of requirement, comply with all the specified requirements for each type;for instance, an
45 exterior door that is also indicated as being sound-rated must comply with the requirements
46 specified for exterior doors and for sound-rated doors; where two requirements conflict, comply
47 with the most stringent.
48 2.03 STE�L DOURS
49 A. General:
50 1. li doors are scheduled with vision panels at 43"from bottom of door, the vision panel shall be
51 adjusted to accommodate vision frames, any undercutting and/or thresholds so glass is a
52 maximum of 43"above finished floor.
2012-37/YCS Agricuttural Dept Improvements 08 1113 - 3 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
YEL�1 HIGH SCHOOL
ACa DEPT. lMPROVEMENTS
YEL�VI COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERM
1 2. If doors are scheduled with vision panel more than 43"from bottom of door, Architect shall be
2 notified and the correct dimension shall be confirmed.
3 B. Exterior poors:
4 1. Grade: NAAMM HMMA 861, physical performance Level A.
5 2. Core: Polystyrene foam.
6 3. Top Closures for Outswinging Doors: Flush with top of faces and edges.
7 4. Galvanizing:All components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed) in accordance
8 with ASTM A853/A653M, with manufacturer's standard coating thickness.
9 5. Insulating Vafue: U-value of 0.50, when tested in accordance with ASTM C1363.
10 6. Weatherstripping: Integral, recessed into door edge or frame.
11 C. Interior poors, Non-Fire-Rated:
12 1. Grade: NAAMM HMMA 860, physical performance Level A.
13 2. Core: Cardboard honeycomb.
14 3. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches (44 mm).
15 2.04 �`��EL FRAMES
16 A. General:
17 1. Comply with the requirements of grade specified for corresponding door, except:
18 a. ANSI A250.8 Level 1 Doors: 16 gage frames.
19 1) Fabricate interior frames of 16-gage cold-rolled furniture steel.
20 b. ANSI A250.8 Level 3 Doors: 14 gage frames. ..
21 1) Form exterior frames from 14-gage hot-dipped galvanized steel.
22 a Frames for Wood Doors: Comply with frame requirements specified in NAAMM HMMA
23 861
24 2. Finish: Same as for door. '
25 B. Exterior poor Frames: Face welded, seamless with joints filled.
26 1. Galvanizing:All components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed) in accordance
27 with ASTM A653/A653M, with manufacturer's standard coating thickness. �
28 2. Weatherstripping: Separate, see Section 08 7100.
29 C. Interior poor Frames, Non-Fire-Rated: Face welded type.
30 2.05 ACCESSORY Mt�,TERIALS '"
31 A. Glazing:As specified in Section 08 8000.
32 B. Insulation Fill for Hollow Metal Frames:All interior and exterior hollow metal frames shall be filled
33 with unfaced glass fiber batt-insulation.
34 C. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units.Where items are to be built into �-
35 exterior walls, hot-dip galvanize in compliance with ASTM A 153, Class C or D as applicable.
36 D. Supports and Anchors: Fabricate of not less than 18 gage sheet steel; G60 galvanized where used �
37 with galvanized frames.
38 E. Silencers: Resilient rubber, fitted into drilled hole; 3 on strike side of single door, 3 on center
39 mullion of pairs, and 2 on head of pairs without center mullions. "
40 F. Temporary Frame Spreaders: Provide for all factory-or shop-assembled frames. �
41 2.06 �I�IISF� i�►lA�'�R�ALS
42 A. Primer: Rust-inhibiting, complying with ANSI A250.10, door manufacturer's standard. �
43 B. Bituminous Coating: Asphalt emulsion or other high-build, water-resistant, resilient coating.
44 PART 3 EX.�CI�TI{��I
45 3.01 �XAMiNAT10N
46 A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.
47 B, Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 08 1113 - 4 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMfNTS
'IELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 3.02 PREPARATIORI
2 A. Coat inside of frames to be installed in masonry or to be grouted,with bituminous coating, prior to
3 instatlation.
4 3A3 iMSTALLATIOtd
5 A. Install in accordance with the requirements of the specified door grade standard and NAAMM
6 HMMA 840.
7 B. Coordinate frame anchor placement with wall construction.
8 C. Placing Frames: Comply with provisions of SDI-105 "Recommended Erection Instructions For
9 Steel Frames," unless otherwise indicated.
10 1. Interior Frames: In all interior wood and steel stud walls or existing masonry walls, pack solid
11 the head and jambs of all newly installed hollow metal door frames with Structo-Lite Gypsum.
12 V1/hen integral sidelites are a part of the door frame assembly creating mullions, pack only the
13 perimeter framework of the overall frame assembly. Do not pack the enclosed interior
14 mullions. Relites alone do not receive packing. fn gypsum wallboard walls, protect the
15 exposed wallboard from excess moisture.
16 2. Exterior Frames: Solid grout the perimeter head and jambs of all newly installed hollow metal
17 door frame assemblies at all exterior walls. Provide wood or styrofoam filler materials in "door
18 stop" recess to promote easier drilling for weatherstrip installation. Seal all joints between
19 frame and wall surface to prevent loss of grout, bulging, uneven or exposed grout surtaces.
20 3. The instaAation of frames shatl be prior to construction of enclosing walls and ceilings. Set
21 frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors
22 are set. After wall construction is completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders leaving
23 surfaces smooth and undamaged.
24 D. Coordinate installation of hardware.
25 E. Coordinate installation of glazing.
26 F. Coordinate installation of electrical connections to electrical hardware items.
27 G. Touch up damaged factory finishes.
28 3.�D4 TOLERANCES
29 A. Clearances Between Door and Frame:As specified in ANSI A250.8.
30 B. Ntaximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 in (1.5 mm) measured with straight edge, corner to corner.
31 3.05 A�1,JU5TING
32 A. Adjust for smooth and balanced door movement.
33 B. Prime Coat Touch-up: Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of
34 prime coat and apply touch-up of compatible air drying primer.
35 C. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items, leaving steel doors and frames
36 undamaged and in complete and proper operating condition.
37 3A& SCH�DUL�
38 A. Refer to Door and Frame Schedule on the drawings.
39 EN� OF SECTIO�V
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 08 1113- 5 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FFIAMES
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
'YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 SECTIl7N 081416
z FLUSH WOOD DOORS
3 PART'1 G�NERAL
4 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
5 A. Flush wood doors;flush configuration; non-rated.
6 B. Transom panels.
7 i.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
8 A. Section 08 1113 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames.
9 B. Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware.
10 C. Section 08 8000 -Glazing.
11 1.03 FtEFERENCE STANDARDS
12 A. AWI/AWMAC (QSI) -Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated;Architectural
13 Woodwork Institute and Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada; 2005, 8th
14 Ed., Version 2.0.
15 B. WDMA I.S.1-A-Architectural Wood Flush Doors;Window and Door Manufacturers Association;
16 2004.
17 1.04 SUBMITTALS
18 A. See Section 01 3000-Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures.
19 B. Product Data: Indicate door core materials and construction; veneer species,type and
20 characteristics.
21 C. Shop Drawings: Illustrate door opening criteria, elevations, sizes,types, swings, undercuts
22 required, special beveling, special blocking for hardware,factory machining criteria,factory
23 finishing criteria, identify cutouts for glazing and louvers.
24 D. Warranty, executed in Owner's name.
25 1.05 CIUALITY ASSURAN�E
26 A. Quality Standards: Comply with the current edition of the following standards:
27 1. WDMA Quality Standard: I.S.1-A"Industry Standard for Wood Flush Doors", of Window and
28 Door Manufacturers Association (WDMA}.
29 2. AWI Quality Standard: "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards"; including Section 1300
30 "Architectural Flush Doors", of Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI)for grade of door, core
31 cons#ruction,finish and other requirements exceeding those o#WDMA quality standard.
32 B. WDMA Quality Marking: Mark each wood door with WDMA Wood Flush Door Certification
33 Hallmark certifying compliance with applicable requirements of WDMA I.S. 1 Series.
34 1. For manufacturers not participating in WDMA Hallmark Program, a certification of'compliance
35 may be substituted for marking of individual doors.
36 C. Manufacturer: Obtain doors from a single manufacturer.
37 1.OS QELIVERY, S�'ORAGE,AND IiANDLING
38 A. Package,deliver and store doors in accordance with specified quality standard.
39 1. Protect doors during transit, storage and handling to prevent damage, soiling and
40 deterioration. Comply with requirements of referenced standards and recommendations of
41 WDMA pamphlet"How to Store, Handle, Finish, Install, and Maintain Wood Doors", as well
42 as with manufacturer's instructions.
43 B. Accept doors on site in manufacturer's packaging. Inspect for damage.
44 1. Identify each door with individual opening numbers which correlate with designation system
45 used on shop drawings for door,frames, and hardware, using temporary, removable or
46 concealed markings.
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 08 1416- 1 FLUSH WOOD DOORS
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS .
Y�ELIuI COMMUNiTY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 C. Protect doors v�rith resilient packaging sealed with heat shrunk plastic. Do not store in damp or wet °°
2 areas, or in areas where sunlight might bleach ueneer. Seal top and boitom edges with tinted
3 sealer if stored more than one week. Break seal on site to permit ventilation.
4 1.�7 P�iOJECT COIVDITIONS • ``
5 A. Coordinate the work with door opening construction,door frame and door hardware installation.
6 1. Do not deliver or install doors until conditions for temperature and relative humidity have been
7 stabilized and will be maintained in storage and installation areas during remainder of
8 construction period to comply with the following requirements applicable to project's
9 geographical location:
10 a. Referenced AWI quality standard including Section 100-S-3 °Moisture Content".
11 '�.08 V�JAFiRAid7Y M
12 A. See Section 01 7800 -Closeout Submittals for additional warranty requirements.
13 1. General:Warranties shall be in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights fihe Owner may
14 have under the Contract Documents.
15 2. Door Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit written agreement in door manufacturer's standard
16 form signed by Manufacturer, Installer and Contractor, agreeing to repair or replace defective
17 doors that have warped (bow, cup or twist) or that show telegraphing of core construction in ..
18 face veneers, or do not conform to tolerance limitations of referenced quality standards.
19 a. Warranty shall also include reinstallation which may be required due to repair or
20 replacement of defective doors where defect was not apparent prior to hanging.
21 b. Warranty shall be in effect during following period of time after date of Final Completion.
22 B. Interior poors: Provide manufacturer's warranty for the life of the installation.
23 C. Include coverage for delamination of veneer, warping beyond specified installation tolerances,
24 defective materials, and telegraphing core construction.
25 D. Contractor's Responsibilities: Replace or refinish doo�s where Contractor's work contributed to •
26 rejection or to voiding of manufacturer's w�arranty.
27 PAR�'2 PRODUCTS ��
28 �.01 MANUFACTURERS
29 A. Wood Veneer Faced Doors: N.
30 1. Eggers Industries: www.eggersindustries.com.
31 2. Marshfield DoorSystems, Inc: www.marshfielddoors.com.
32 3. Oshkosh Door Company: www.oshkoshdoor.com.
33 4. V.T. Industries: www.vtindustries.com. '
34 5. Vancouver poor Company: www.vancouverdoorco.com.
35 6. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000- Product Requirements.
36 2.02 �4C1RS A�1D PANELS �`
37 A. General: ,.
38 1. If doors are scheduled with vision panels at 43"from bottom of door,the vision panel shall be
39 adjusted to accommodate vision frames, any undercutting and/or thresholds so glass is a
40 maximum of 43"above finished floor.
41 2. If doors are scheduled with vision panel more than 43"from bottom of door, Architect shall be
42 notified and the correct dimension shall be confirmed.
43 B. All Doors: See drawings for locations and additional requirements.
44 1. Duality Level: Custom Grade, in accordance with AWI/AWMAC Architectural Woodwork
45 Quality Standards Illustrated, Section 1300.
46 2. Wood Veneer Faced Doors: 5-ply unless otherwise indicated.
47 C. Interior poors: 1-3/4 inches (44 mm) thick unless otherwise indicated; flush construction.
48 1. Provide solid core doors at all locations.
49 2. Wood veneer facing with factory transparent finish.
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 08 1416 -2 FLUSH WOOD DOORS
YELM HiGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 D. Transom Panels: Same construction and finish as door; same performance rating as door.
2 2.03 DOC�DR AND PAidEL COR�S
3 A. Non-Rated Solid Core and 20 Minute Rated Doors: Type particleboard core (PC), piies and faces
4 as indicated above.
5 2.04 DOOR FAClMGS
6 A. Wood Veneer Facing for Transparent Finish:White Oak (all doors must be of same facing), veneer
7 grade as specified by quality standard, plain sliced, book veneer match, running assembly match;
8 unless otherwise indicated.
9 1. Vertical Edges:Any option allowed by quality standard for grade,
10 2. Transoms: Continuous match to doors.
11 2.05 ACCESSORIES
12 A. Metal Frames for Light Openings in All Doors: Provide manufacturer's standard frame formed of 18
13 gauge cold-rolled steel,factory primed, and approved for use in non-rated doors as well as in
14 doors with fire-ratings indicated. To be painted per Section 09 9000. Interior doors to
15 accommodate 1/4" glass and exterior doors to accommodate 1"thick insulated glass assembly.
16 See Section 08 8000 for glass.
17 1. The"size" as indicated on the door types (in Door schedule) is the clear vision space
18 between the glass stops.
19 B. Glazing Stops:Wood, of same species as door facing, butted corners; prepared for countersink
20 style tamper proof screws.
21 2.06 DOQR CONS7RUCTIOW
22 A. Fabricate doors in accordance with door quality standard specified.
23 B. Cores Constructed with stiles and rails:
24 C. Fit door edge trim to edge of stiles after applying veneer facing.
25 D. Factory machine doors for hardware other than surface-mounted hardware, in accordance with
26 hardware tequirements and dimensions.
27 E. Factory frt doors for frame opening dimensions identified on shop drawings,with edge clearances
28 in accordance with specified quality standard.
29 F. Provide edge clearances in accordance with the qua�ity standard specified.
30 2.Q7 FACTORY�INISHII�G-WOOD VENEER 1700RS
31 A. General: Comply with referenced AWI quality standard including Section 1500 "Factory Finishing".
32 B. Transparent Finish: Comply with requirements indicated for grade,finish system, staining effect
33 and sheen.
34 1. AWI Grade: Premium.
35 2 Finish:AW1 System TR-2 catalyzed lacquer.
36 3. Staining: Custom color. (As selected by Architect).
37 4. Sheen: Semi-gloss.
38 C. Factory finish doors in accordance with approved sample.
39 D. Seal door top edge with color sealer to match door facing.
40 PART 3 EXECU710N
41 3.01 E3CA11illINllTIOi�
42 A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.
43 B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.
44 C. Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb or are out-of-tolerance for size or
45 alignment.
46 D. Reject doors with defects.
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 08 1416-3 FLUSH WOOD DOORS
YELM HlGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT.iMPROVEMENTS �
YELM COMMUNI7Y SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 E. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. '
2 3,02 INS�AL.LATIO�
3 A. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and specified quality standard.
4 B. Factory-Finished Doors: Do not field cut or trim; if fit or clearance is not correct, replace door.
5 C. Use machine tools to cut or drill for hardware.
6 1. For installation see Section 08 7100- "Finish Hardware"section of these specifications.
7 D. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames and hardware.
8 E. Coordinate installation of glazing.
9 F. install door louvers plumb and level. �-
10 1. Job-Fit Doors:Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated
11 below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted with
12 fire-rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal cut surtaces after fitting and machining.
13 3.03 TO�ERA�NCES
14 A. Conform to specified quality standard for fit and clearance tolerances.
15 1. Fitting Clearances for Non-Rated Doors: Provide 1/8"at jambs and heads; 1/16" per leaf at
16 meeting stiles for pairs of doors; and 1/8"from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish
17 or covering. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4" clearance from bottom of
18 door to top of threshold.
19 2. Fitting Clearances for Fire-Rated Doors: Complying with NFPA 80.
20 B. Conform to specified quality standard for telegraphing, warp, and squareness.
21 C. Maximum uertical Distortion (Bow): 1/8 inch (3 mm) measured with straight edge or taut string, top
22 to bottom, over an imaginary 36 by 84 inches (915 by 2130 mm) surface area. �'
23 D. Maximum Width Distortion (Cup): 1/8 inch (3 mm) measured with straight edge or taut string, edge �
24 to edge, over an imaginary 36 by 84 inches (915 by 2130 mm) surface area.
25 3.04 ADJIlSTING =•
26 A. Adjust doors for smooth and balanced door movement.
27 B. Adjust closers for full closure.
28 3,05 SCFIEDULE �
29 A. Refer to Door and Frame Schedule appended to this section.
30 �ND OF SECTION
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 08 1416- 4 FLUSH WOOD DOORS
YELiM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERIGKSON MCGOVERN
� SECTIt�N 08 3323
2 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
3 PART 9 GENERAL
4 i.01 SECTION INCLUDES
5 A. Overhead coiling doors,operating hardware, non-fire-rated and exterior, manual operation.
6 1. Provide complete operating door assemblies including door curtains, guides, counterbalance
7 mechanisms, hardware, operators and installation accessories.
8 1.02 �EFERE�fCE STANDARDS
9 A. ASTM A653/A653M -Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
10 Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2010.
11 B. ASTM A666- Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Auste�itic Stainless 5teel
12 Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2010.
13 1.03 StlBMITTALS
14 A. See Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.
15 B. Product Data: Provide general construction, component connections and details.
16 1. For each type and size of overhead coiling door and accessory. Include details of
17 construction relative to materials, dimensions of individual components, profiles, and finishes.
18 Provide roughing-in diagrams, operating instructions, and maintenance information. Include
19 the following:
20 a. Setting drawings,templates, and installation instructions for built-in or embedded anchor
21 devices.
22 C. Shop Drawings: Indicate pertinent dimensioning, anchorage methods, hardware locations, and
23 installation details.
24 D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation sequence and procedures,adjustment and
25 alignment procedures.
26 E. Maintenance Data: Indicate lubrication requirements and frequency and periodic adjustments
27 required.
28 1.0� PERFORMANCE REQUIR�MENTS
29 A. Structural Performance: Provide overhead coiling doors capable of withstanding the effects of
30 gravity laads and the following loads and stresses without evidencing permanent deformation of
31 door components.
32 1.05 �IUARRANTY
33 A. A.Door Warranty: Furnish one (1) year written warranty signed by the manufacturer and installer
34 agreeing to repair or�eplace work which has failed as a result of defects in materials or
35 workmanship. Upon notification within the warranty period, such defects shall be repaired at no
36 cost to the owner.
37 PART 2 PRC}DUG'TS
38 2.01 MANi1�fl►CTURERS
39 A. Overhead Coiling Doors:
40 1. Cornell Iron Works, Inc:www.cornelliron.com.
41 2. The Cookson Company: www.cooksondoor.com.
42 3. Wayne-Dalton, a Division of Overhead Door Corporation: www.wayne-dalton.com.
43 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
44 2.02 C��LIMt"'., DOCIRS
45 A. All Coiling Doors: Stee�slat curtain.
46 1. Capable of withstanding positive and negative wind loads of 30 psf �_Pa), without undue
47 deflection or damage to components.
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 08 3323 - 1 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
YE�M HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS �
Y�LM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 2. Sandwich slat construction with insulated core of closed cell urethane foam type insulation; y
2 insulation (u-) value: 0.50 BTU/hr. sq.ft. deg F (2.84 W/sq. m deg K)
3 3. Nominal Slat Size: 3 inches (75 mm) wide x required length.
4 4. Finish: Per Schedule at the end of this Section.
5 5. Guides: Angles; galvanized steel.
6 6. Hood Enclosure: Per Schedule at the end of this Section; primed steeL
7 7. Operation: Per Schedule at the end of this Section.
8 8. Mounting: Surface mounted. See drawings for additional requirements.
9 9. Hardware: Per Schedule at the end of this Section.
10 2.03 i1►aATERIALS
11 A. Curtain Construction: Interlocking slats.
12 1. Slat Ends:Alternate slats fitted with end locks to act as wearing surface in guides and to
13 prevent lateral movement.
14 2. Curtain Bottom: Fitted with angles to provide reinforcement and positive contact in closed °
15 position.
16 3. Weatherstripping: Moisture and rot proof, resilient type, located at jamb edges, bottom of
17 curtain, and where curtain enters hood enclosure of e�cterior doors.
18 B. Steel Slats: Minimum 20 gage (_mm) ASTM A653/A653M galvanized steel sheet.
19 C. Guide Construction: Continuous, of profile to retain door in place with snap-on trim, mounting
20 brackets of same metaL
21 D. Steel Guides: Formed from galvanized stee{sheet, 18 gage �mm thick); 1.5 inch �mm)
22 wide; complying with ASTM A653/A653M.
23 1. Galvanizing: Minimum G90/Z275 coating.
24 E. Bottom 8ar: Shall consist of two (2) angles, each not less than 2"x 2"x 1/8" steel formed to fit
25 slats. Bottom bar shall be provided with slotted holes to allow for thermal expansion.
26 F. Mounting Brackets: Fabricated of hot rolled 3/16"steel plate minimum, brackets shall be provided
27 to house ends of the counterbalance barrel assembly.
28 G. Hood Enclosure: Internally reinforced to maintain rigidity and shape.
29 1. Shall be provided to entirely enclose curtain and counterbalance barrel assembly. Hood shall
30 be fabricated 22 gauge primed steel and designed to match brackets.Top and bottom shall �
31 be bent and reinforced for stiffness.
32 2. Prime paint.
33 H. Hardware:
34 1. Latching: Inside mounted, adjustable keeper, spring activated latch bar with feature to keep in
35 locked or retracted position.
36 2. Latch Handle: Interior and exterior handle. �
37 1. Roller Shaft Counterbalance: Steel pipe and helical steel spring system, capable of producing
38 torque sufficient to ensure smooth operation of curtain from any position and capable of holding
39 position at mid-travel;with adjustable spring tension; requiring 25 Ib. (10 kg) nominal force to
40 operate.
41 PART 3 EXEC�TIUf�
42 3.01 EXANII�IATIt�N
43 A. Verify that opening sizes,tolerances and conditions are acceptable.
44 3.02 I�Si'ALLATICl�
45 A. Install units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
46 B. Use anchorage devices to securely fasten assembly to wall construction and building framing
47 without distortion or stress.
48 C. Securely and rigidly brace components suspended from structure. Secure guides to structural °
49 members onfy.
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 08 3323-2 OVERHEAD COIUNG DOORS
YELM H1GH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELiVI COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 D. Fit and align assembly including hardware; level and plumb,to provide smooth operation.
2 E. Coordinate installation of sealants and backing materials at frame perimeter as specified in Section
3 07 9005.
4 F. Jnstall perimeter trim and closures.
5 3.03 ADJUSTING
6 A. Adjust operating assemblies for smooth and noiseless operation.
7 3.04 C��ANING
8 A. Clean installed components.
9 B. Remove labels and visible markings.
10 3A5 DEMONSTRATIOIV
11 A. Startup Services: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup services
12 and to train Owner's maintenance personnel as specified below:
13 1. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
14 equipment.
15 2. Delete below if no fire-rated doors. Verify if testing is required by authorities having
16 jurisdiction.
17 3. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to startup and
18 shutdown, troubfeshooting, servicing and preventive maintenance.
19 4. Review data in the maintenance manuals. Refer to Section 01 7800 Section "Closeout
20 Submittals".
21 5. Schedule training with Owner with at least 7 days' advance notice.
22 3.� SCHEDULE
23
ITEM 026
COUNTER DOOR
SERVICE DOOR X
FIRE RATED
MOTOR OPERATED
MANUAL OPERATED X
CHAIN HOIST X
CHAidK HOIST' {1MlTH
WAND/BAR
STAINLESS STEEL SLATS X
GALVANIZED SLATS
pRIMED STEEL SLATS }C
I�iSULATED X
STAINLESS STEEL HOOD
STA�NLESS STEEL iVIOTOR
�COVER
GALVANIZED HOO'D X
CYLIiVDER �.00K*
SLIDE BOLT X
Lt1CKING BAR
24
25 A. Refer to Door and Frame Schedule as shown on the drawings.
26 END OF SECTION
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 08 3323 -3 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
Q Z O W �
w
� � U � _
� 'o } � �
�
� z �
� � � � °o
-� � Y ` � O �
U o
� � O � o a �
� U � m
-°'a E
� � il o y o
� �- r N N � C rC � V
m m vi
� a > > � 3 � `omE
} N o 0 0 o .a . 0 o � m
� C� UC� U � � o .� � ° c
� � d � � _ � O f6 �`p y Q
z 3 3 3 3 � � c � � m �.
-o v v -a Q � v, Y a�
ro co m m -o �p 3 � �
� Y Y = C� 'p � N
� O �
Q � N
m �
m O �>
� a a`
W o 0 0 0 0 0 0
�
� ti � � � � n� ti
o X X X X X X X
� O O O O d O O
� <"M <`') M M CO V �
W W
� y Q Q Q Q �
LL � �
�
Q � U p U U Q Q
c�
z Q Q Q <L Q Q Q
Q z z `z `z `z `z z
�
Z �- �- � �- r- �- �-
�
�. o. a a � a a_ a
�
a
� �
� s = i = � `n ~ �
x �n �
�u �
E
z � c�i� � � v�i i a a o, a.
� o � v �
Ly,l O J N a: d
�
� � � 2 S � � � � � u' � �
a � � �S � X � XH
� � � � � _
_ p
w � � o �
x
tatl � O O °o �
� OC tu J CA J � !q Z Z = ti j
Q � (n � (/� R' Q' f6 y CO O
O Q Z CO J m Y J m m � � O E
= m O W z 6�j,1 Q � W W O � ... p � y
C> C -� p
� � > � > � c~n � z u�i = � a � w � Q
� Z W W � 2 � aLLZCO N
� O
� (j O O Q Q [o M m Q m N
} rw oz o 0 0 � o 0 0
YELM H{GH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. tMPROVEMENT5
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON McGOVERN
1 SECTIOW 08 7100
�
3 DOOR HARDWARE
4
5 PAR71 —GENERAL
6
i 1.9 RELATED DOCUMEWTS
s
9 A. Drawings and genera! provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 1
10 Specifcation Sections,apply to this Section.
11
12 1.2 SUMMARY
13
14 A. Work under this section incfudes the complete finish hardware requirements for the project.
15 Quantities listed are for the Contractor's convenience only and are not guaranteed. Items not
16 specifically mentioned, but necessary to complete the work shall be furnished, rnatching the ifems
17 specified in quality and finish.
18
19 B. Related Sections:
20 1. Division 08 Section"Steel Doors and Frames"
21 2. Division 08 Section"Door Schedule"
��
23 1.3 REFERENCES
24
25 A. Standards: Current edition at date af bid.
26 1. ADAAG—Americans with Disabilities Act"Accessibility Guidefines for Buildings and Facilities"
2 r 2. ANSI/BHMA A156.18—Materials and Finishes
28 3. ICC/ANSI A1 i 7.1 —Accessible and Usable Facilities and Buildings
29 4. NFPA 80—Standard for Fire Doors and Windows
30 5. NFPA 252—Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies
3I 6. Underwriters Laboratories—Building Materials Directory
32 7. UL 10C—Positive Pressure Fire Test of Door Assemblies
33
34 B. Codes
35 1. IBC International Building Code(IBC)2009
36 2. Chapter 51-50 WAC Washington State Building Code
37
38 1.4 SUBMITTALS
39
40 A. General Requirements: Ali Submittafs shall be in accordance with Division 01 Section "Submittal
41 Procedures".
42
43 B. Product Data: Submit six copies of manufacturer's data for each item of finish hardware
44
45 C. Hardware Schedule:Submit six copies of a detailed Finish Hardware Schedule.
46 1. The submitted Finish Hardware Schedule shall indicate the complete designation of every item
4 r required for each door or opening.
48 2. Furnish cover sheet listing title of project as shown on the Contract Documents, name, address,
49 phone and fax numbers of Owner, Architect, Contractor, and Suppfier, name of Certified
50 Hardware Consuftant,and date of submitta{.
51 3. List each opening individually under separate headings in the same order as the Door Schedule.
52 Do not continue individual headings on separate pages.
53 4. Each heading shall indicate opening location, handing, degree of opening, door size, type, fire
54 rating, and Door and Frame material.
55 5. An index shall be included in the Finish Hardware submittals indicating daor, page, and heading
56 numbers,and Eocking function of each opening
2012-37!YCS Agriculiural Dept Impeavements 08 7100-Page 1 DOOR HARDWARE
__ __ _._ _.
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ER[CKSON McGOVERN
1 6. Indicate product Manufacturer and incorporate cross-reference to syrnbols used in Article 2.14
2 Hardware Groups.
3 7. A cross reference for any abbreviations or symbols used shall be incfuded.
4 8. 5chedules in coded or horizontal format are unacceptable.
5 9. Submittals not conforming to these requirements will be returned without review, for re-submittal.
6 Foliowing is an example of the required format:
7
8 1 Sgl. Daor#503A—Corridor 5Q1 from Classroom 503 LHR 90°
9 3-0 x 7-0 x 1-3/4"x 20 Minute x 7ype B SC WD x NMF
io
].1 3 Each Hinges MC TA2714 US26D(652)4.5 x 4.5 x 1/2MS
12 1 Classroom Lockset CR ML2055 NSM 630 LHR x C6 x CT6
13 1 Door Closer NO PR7500 Alum/689 x STB
14 1 Kick Plate TI B4EKP—10 x 34.5—US32D x B4E x CTSK
15 1 Wall Stop TR 1270CX-SV 626(US26D)
16 1 Sef Gasket PE S88D—17'per Set
17
18 D. Processing: Hardware schedules will not be reviewed by the Architect until they have been reviewed
19 and approved by Contrac#or. Resubmit only corrected copies of those sheets requiring coRec#ion and
20 update distributed copies with corrected sheets.
21
22 E. Modifications: The �inish Hardware Submittal shal[ be kept current throughout the project duration,
23 All revisions incorporated shall be submitted in accordance with the above requirements. Submit only
24 cover sheet and revised pages. All revisions shall clearly identify changes from previous submittai
25 content.
26
27 F. Samples: If requested by the Architect, submit one sample of each expased hardware category,
28 finished as required, and tagged with full description for coordination with the hardware schedule.
29 Samples wilE be reviewed, by the Architect, for design and finish only, compliance with other
30 requirements is the responsibility of the Contractor. Units which are acceptable and remain
31 undamaged through submittal procedures may be used on the project.
32
33 G. Color Samples: Submit six sets of color charts and physical sampfes of each praduct requiring color
34 selection.
35
36 H. Operations and Maintenance Data.
37 1. Submit Maintenance and Operations Manuals under the provisions of Division 01 Section
38 °Closeout Subrnit#als".
39 2. Manuals shall be furnished in a clearly marked, tabbed, 3-ringed binder. Each Manual shall
40 contain:
41 Fina1°As BuiEi"copy of the Finish Hardware Submittal
42 Product Data
43 Key Schedule
44 Parts lists and diagrams
45 Installation and maintenance instructions for Locksets, Exit Devices, and Door Closers
4&
47 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
48
49 A. Supplier: Finish hardware shali be supplied by a recognized builders' hardware supplier who has been
50 fumishing hardware in the same area as the project for a period of not less thart five years. They shall
51 be a factory direct, authorized distributor of the Exit Devices, Locksets and Door Closers. The
52 supplier's organization shall include an Architectural Hardware Consultant, certified by the Door and
53 Hardware Institute, who is available at all reasonabfe times during the course of the work to meet with
54 the Owner,Architect or Contractor for project hardware consultation. Provide certificaEion of compliartce
55 with these requirements prior to preparation of Finish Hardware Submittals
56
2072-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Impeovements 08 7100 -Page 2 DOOR HARDWAFtE
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON McGOVERN
1 B. Approved Suppfiers: 7he be[ow listed suppliers are approved for use on this project. Alternative
2 suppliers must be pre-approved by procedure for "substitutions" described in Division 01 Section
3 °Product Requirements". Other proposed suppfiers must submit a resume of similar completed
4 projects for prior approval.
5
6 Benson Industries Tacoma,WA (253)474-5356
7 Builders Hardware&Supply Co. Inc. Seattle,WA (206)281-3700
S Contract Hardware, Inc. Seattle,WA (206)298-4770
9 Evergreen Construction Specialties Auburn,WA (253)395-9933
IO Washington Architectura[ Hardware Co. Tacoma,WA (253)471-9150
11
I2 C. Source: Ob#ain each kind of Hardware (Butts, Locksets, Exit Devices, Door Closers, etc.) from only
13 one manufacturer.
14
15 D. Installer: Finish hardware shalf be installed only by experienced tradesmen in compliance with trade
l.6 union jurisdic�ions,either at the door and frame fabrication plant or at the project site.
lr
1S E. Electronic Lock System: Provide for Exit Device Manufacturer's local Factory Representa#ive to
19 consult and instruct General Contractor and Electrica! sub-contractor in rough-in and installation
20 requirements for Electrified Exit Devices and Accessories. Include substantial completion inspection
21 and written acceptance of installatian. Include two(2)separate visits, up ta two hours each.
��
23 F. Templates: Furnish hardware templates for each fabricator of doors, frames and other work to be
24 factory prepared for the installation of hardware. Upon request, check the shop drawings of such
25 other work to confirm tha#provisions will be made for the proper installation of hardware.
26
27 G_ Regulatory Requirements:
28 1. All finish hardware shall comply with applicable local and state building codes.
�9 2. Hardware for fire-rated openings shall also be in compliance with all fire building codes appEicable
30 to the district in which the building is located. Provide only hardware which has been tested and
31 listed by "UL" for the types and sizes of doors required, and which complies with the
32 requirements af the door and door frame labels.
33
34 9.6 PRODUC7 HANDLING AND STORAGE
35
36 A. Packaging: Each item or package is to be separately tagged with identification related to the final
37 hardware schedule. Basic installation instructions shall be included in the packages.
38
39 B. Storage: Provide a locked room at the jobsite for the storage of the hardware.
40
41 1.7 WARRANTY
42
43 A. Finish hardware shall be guaranteed against defects in workmanship and operation for a period of
44 one year, backed by a factory guarantee of the hardware manufacturer. The following products shall
45 be guaranteed for periods beyond one Year:
46 1. Lockset and Latchsets:7wo Years
47 2. Door Closers:Ten Years
48 3. Panic Devices:Three Years
49
50 1.8 MAINTENANCE
51
52 A. Furnish the following extra materials, which shal� be delivered directly to the Owner prior to
53 substantial completion.
54 '[. Provide one Set of Special Tools required for Ins#alEation and Adjustment
55 2. Extra Hardware:
56 Quantitv Description Factory Number
2012-37!YC5 Agricultural Qept Impeovements 08 7100-Page 3 DC?OR HARDWARE
_. . ._. ___ ___ _- ---- _ ___ - __ -- ____ _.._ _....... .. ._ ___._. _..._._.__..._ ._.. __ _
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG QEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON McGOVERN
1 Two Locksets ML2Q55
2 Two Daor Closers PR7500
3 Four Floor Stops 4215CKU
4
5 PART 2—PRODUCTS
6
7 2.9 MANUFACTURERS AND ACCEPTABLE SUBSTITUTIONS
s
9 2. Products may be furnished by the manufacturers listed under "As Specified" below, or equivalent
10 products of type, grade, design, and function, from manufacturers listed under "Acceptable
11 Substitutions". Requests for products not listed mus# be made in accordance with Division 01 Section
12 "Product Requirements".
13
14 Product As 5qecified Accentable Substitutions
15 Butt Hinges McKinney(MC) Bommer, Hager
16 Locksets Corbin/Russwin{CR) None
1 i Cylinders Corbin/Russwin(CR) None
18 Door Closers Norton 7500 Series(NO) None
19 Exit Devices Corbin/Russwin None
20 Kick&Mop Plates Tice Industries{TI) Rockwood,7rimco
21 Wal1 and Floor Stops Trimco(TR) RocEcwaod
22 Overhead Stop and Holders Glyrtn.lohnson (GJ) Rixson,ABH
23 Weatherstrip&7hresholds Psmko(PE) National Guard, Reese
24
?5 2.2 HARDWARE MATERIALS ANb FABRICATION
26
27 A. Fasteners: Provide fasteners for ins#a(lation with each hardware item. Provide Phillips head
28 �asteners, countersunk oval, flat head, or undercut head per the manufacturer's templates and as
29 appropriate for material to be installed, Provide Door Closers and F�acit Devices applied to wood
30 composite or mineraf core doors with Sex Bolts sized to the thickness of the door.
31
32 B. Compatibility. Provide fas#eners which are compatible wi#h bath un9t fastened and substrate, and
33 which will not cause corrosion or deteripration of hardware, base material,or fastener.
34
35 2.3. FIN[SHES
36
3� A. Finish in general shall be: US26D Satin Chrome Plates(BHMA 626},except:
38 1. Locksets, Exit Devices, Push Plates, Door Pulls, Overhead Stops, Kick and Mop Plates, and
39 Exterior Butts: US32D,Satin Stainless Steel(BHMA 630).
40 2. Interior Hinges: US26D, Satin Chrome over Steel Base{BHMA 652).
41 3. Removable Mullions: Painted Aluminum{BHMA 689).
42 4, Door Closers: Painted Afumi�urn (BHMA 689}.
43 5. Smoke Gasketing:As Selected.
44 6. Threshold,Weatherstrip& Door Bottoms: As listed
4�
46 2.4 BUTT HINGES:
4'7
48 A. Quantity(per Leafl:
49 1. Door openings up to 60":2 each.
50 2. Door openings 60 to 90": 3 each.
51 3. Doors over 90": Furnish one additional for each 30"increment or fraction thereof.
52
2012-37/YCS Agricultura(Dept Impeovements �$7��� -Page 4 DOOR HARDWARE
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DPPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNETY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON McGOVERN
1 B. Si2es:
2 1. 1-3/4"Exterior&Vestibule Doors: 5 x 4-1/2"
3 2. 1-3/4" Interior poors up to and incluciing 36":4-1/2 x 4-1/2"
4 3. 1-3/4" Interiar poors over 36"—5 x 4-1/2"
5
6 C. Width of Hinges shall be as required to clear projecting trim or other conditions to allow maximum
7 degree of opening.
8
9 D. All hinges sha11 have non-removable pins(NRP—Set Screw in 8arrel)
10
11 E. Hinges shall have Flat Button 7ips.
12
I3 F. For unusual size or weight doors, furnish type, size and quantity recommended by the hinge
I4 manufacturer.
I5
I6 2.5. LOCKSETS AND CYLINDERS
17
I8 A. Lever and Rose Design: NSR
19
20 B. Backset:2-3/4"
21
2� C. Cylinders:
23 1. Furnish afl Loc[csets and Cylinders with Key Removable Interchangeable Cores.
24 2. Provide appropriate cylinder type, length, coflars,and cam iype to operate specified I�ocksets and
25 Exit Devices.
26
27 D. All Locksets and La#chsets shal] be listed with Underwriters Laboratories for A labe! and lesser class
28 doors.
29
30 E. Provide Curved Lip Strikes with adequate projection to protect door trim. Pravide flat, flush fip strikes
3l. for pairs of doors with overlapping Astragafs.
32
33 F. Provide manufacturers standard wrought or plastic strike boxes.
34
35 2.6. PANIC DEVICES AND FIRE EXIT HARDWARE
36
37 A. Furnish Sex Nuts and Bofts for wood composite and mineral core door applications.
38
39 B. Rated Openings: Provide UL listed Fire Exit Devices at rated openings.
40
47. C. Sizes: Provide Exit Devices sized in accordance with the manufacturer manufacturers
42 recommendations.
43
44 D. Removable Mullions: Furnish Angle Brackets and Spacer Blocks for installation in narrow stop
45 frames
46
47 E. Vision Frames: Provide Glass Bead Kits where interference with vision frames occurs.
48
49 F. Lever Trim: Exit Device Lever Trim shall match design specifisd under Article 2.5.
50
51 2.7 DOOR CLOSERS
52
53 A. Furnish drop plates where doors have insufficient height top ra91s, or where Regufar Arm Door
54 Closers are used in conjunction with Concealed Overhead Stops.
55
56 B. Furnish cofd weather fluid, at exterior&vestibule daors.
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Impeovements 08 7900-Page 5 DQOR HARDWARE
YELM HIGH SCHOOL.
AG DEPT. 1MPROVEMENT5
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON McGOVERN
1 C. Furnish non-flammable hydraulic ffuid at fire rated openings in conformance with UL Test Standard
2 10C.
3
4 D. Provide special closer moun#ing as required where interference with wea#herstrip ar sound seals
5 occurs.
6
7 E. Spacer Blocks: Furnish Spacer 8focks and/or shoe supports where frame stop does not provide for
8 adequate support for the parallel arm sofFit shoe.
9
10 F. Furnish Shoulder Through Bolts for wood composi#e and mineral core door applications.
11
12 2.8 KICK, MOP,AND ARMOR PLATES
13
14 A. Kick Plates shall be applied to the Push Side of the Door, Mop Plate applied to the PuEI Side.
15
16 B. Height: Kick Plates 10", Mop Plates 6",Armor Plates 34".
17
7.S C. Provide stainless steel Phillips ovaE/undercut head,full tread type sheet meal screws for fastening not
19 more than 5 inches on center.
��
21 D. Plates shall be .050 Stainless Steel, beveled four edges{B4E)with satin finish.
��
23 E. All plates shall be furnished with width as required to provide %a" clearance at sides of doors frame
24 stops, Mulfions,Astragals, or Stop and Mullion applied seals.
25
26 2.9 STOPS AND HOLDERS
�7
2S A. Furnish Overhead Stop and Holders sized as recommended by manufacturer.
29
30 B. Furnish Overhead Stop and Holders with special shims, brackets, or special template mounting
3l where required.
32
33 C. Coordinate Voltage location requirements for Magnetic Holders with Electrical Contractor.
34
35 D. Where wall stops are not applicable, furnish ffoor stops 9215CKU Series, or Overhead Stops if
36 required.
37
38 2.11 THRESHOL,pS
39
40 A. Furnish Thresho[ds with FHSL142d0, '/-2�x 2" Phillips Flat Head Sleeve Anchors.
41
42 2.10 WEATHERSTRIP AND GASKETING
43
44 A. Furnish weatherstrip and gasEcefs for complete perirneter of opening, incfuding mul[ions, and
45 astragals.
46
47 B. Provide Rain Drips full frame width including frame faces.
48
49 2.19 DOOR StLENCERS
50
51 A. Furnish Rubber poor Silencers for all apenings nat specified to have Smoke Gasketing or
52 Weatherstrip.
53
54 B. Quantity: Furnish three for each single doar frame,and four for each pair of door frames.
55
56 C. Type: 1229A.
2012-37/YCS Agricultura!Dept Impeovements 08 7100 -Page 6 DOOR HARDWARE
YELM H[GH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMEN7S
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKS�N McGOVERN
1 2.12 KEYING
�
3 A. All Locksets and Cylinders specified under this Section shali be keyed to the existing Russwin Grand
4 Master Key System for the Yelm School District.
5
6 B. Provide Brass Construction Cores and Keys for al! interchangeable core type cylinders during the
7 construction period. Plastic Construction Cores are unacceptable
8
9 C. The Finish Hardware Supplier shall meet with the Owner to prepare the permanent keying schedule.
10 Submit for approval in accordance with paragraph 1.4 F.
11
12 D. The Permanent Cores, Change Keys, Master Keys, and Control Keys, prepared according to the
13 approved keying scheduEe, shall be transmitted directly from the manufacturer to the Owner, prior to
14 substantial completion. The General Contractor shall remove the construction cores and install the
15 permanent cores.All construction cores shall be returned to the Finish Hardware Supplier.
16
17 E. All Permanent Cores and Keys shafl be sent direct from the Eock manufacturer via Registered Mail,
18 Return Receipt Requested.
19
2d F. Provide a key transcript list of all cylinders, including 25%additional change combinations.
��
22 G. Stamp all Keys "Do not Quplicate"and with change designation as directed.
23
24 H. Fumish:
2b 1. Six Building Grand Master Keys
26 2. Six Master Keys per Set
27 3. Four change keys per Lockset or Cylinder.
28 4. Six Construction Keys
29
30
31 2.13 MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS
32
33 A. Not Used
34
35 2.14 HARDWARE GROUPS
36
3? HW-1
38
39 Doors#01A and 02A
40
41 3 Each Hinges MC T4A3386
42 1 Exit Device CR ED5200 x N957 x M59
43 1 Door Closer NO PR7500
44 1 Door Closer NO PR7500 x 9623JWG
45 1 Overhead Stop GJ 100S Series
46 9 Kick Plate Tl B4EKP
47 9 Threshold PE 172A
4S 'i Set Weatherstrip PE 2891AS(Head)x 290AS (Jambs)
49 9 Door Sweep PE 315CN
50
51 HW-2
52
53 Dpors#01 B and 03
54
55 3 Fach Hinges MC TA2714
56 1 O�ce Lockset CR ML2053
2012-371 YCS AgricuIturai oept Impeovements 08 7100-Page 7 DOOR HARDWARE
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON McGOVERN
1 1 WaIl5top TR 1270CX
2 1 Set Gasket PE S88D
3 HW-9
4
5 PART 3-EXECUTION
6
7 3.7 PREPARATION
s
9 A. Examine Doors, Frames, and related items for conditions that would prevent the proper application of
10 the Finish Hardware. Do not proceed until defects are corrected.
11
12 B. Provide solid blocking for wall mounted components.
13
14 C. Fasteners: Check all conditions and use fastening devices as needed to securely anchor ali
15 hardware as per manufacturer's published tempfates. Self-tapping sheet mefal screws are not
16 acceptable. All Door Closers, Exit Devices, and Surface Mounted Overhead Stops on wood doors
i7 shall be through bolted.
is
19 3.2 INSTALLATION
20
21 A. Mounting Heights: Mount units at heights as recommended in "Fiecommended Locations for
22 Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames (200'I}" by Doors and Hardware
23 Institute, except as indicated below. Products not specificalfy covered shal( be instafled in accordance
24 with the manufacturer's templates and instructions.
25 1. Hinges:
26 a. Top Hinge: 7-1/4", 7op of frame rabbet to centerline of hinge.
27 b. Bottom Hinge: 12-1/4", Bottom of Frame to centerline of hinge
28 c. Intermediate Hinges:Centered, equal spacing between#op and bottom hinges.
29 2. Lock Strikes: 40", bottom of frame to centerline of Strike.
30 3. Deadlocks at 48", Bottom of Frame to centerline of Cylinder.
31 4. Push and Pull Plates:42", bottom of Frame to centerline of Plate.
32
33 8. Instafl each hardware item in compliance with manufacturer's instructions.
34 1. Wherever cutting and fitting are required to install hardware surtaces which will be painted or
35 finished at a later time, install each item completely and then remove and store in a secure place.
36 After completion of the finishes, re-install each item.
37 2. Do not install surface-rnounted items untif finishes have been completed on the substrate.
38 3. Install Fire Rated openings to compfy with NFPA 80.
39 4. Door shall swing to the maximum degree that project condifions will allow. 7he swings indicated
40 on the floor plan are intended to depict direction and do not indicate fulf degree of opening.
41 5. Trim Exit Devices to provide 1-1/2" clearance between End Cap and hinge jamb stop face and
42 where applicable,stop applied weatherstrip.
43 6. Door Closers shall be located to allow maxirnum degree of opening that project conditions will
44 allow. Door Closers shall not be used to stop the door, except for models equipped with an
45 integral stop-on-the-arm feature.
46 7. Locate Overhead Stop and Holders with meximum degree of opening that project conditions will
47 allow.
48 8. Locate Floors Stops at maximum degree of opening that project conditions will allow. do not
49 locate Floor Stops where they create a hazardous condition. Stops shall be located no more than
50 4/3 Door width from the latch edge of the�oor.
51 9. Set all Exteriar Thresholds in a bed of butyl rubber seafant. Remove excess sealant.Caulk edges
b2 and joints to exclude moisture. Fas#en Gym Floor Threshald to the concrete side of the transition
53 only.
54 10. Mount and Adjust Rigid Jamb Weatherstrip prior to mounting Parallef Arm Door Closers.
55 Weatherstrip shall be instal[ed to provide a continuous seal at head and jambs. Da not notch
2012-37!YCS Agricuftural Dept lmpeovements O$7'��0-Page 8 DOOR HARDWARE
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT, IMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERECKSON McGOVERW
1 Weatherstrip for poor Closer shoe. Provide Parallel Arm 5th hole spacer of increased thickness
2 to allow for revised location.
3 11. Mount Astragals on the pul! side of active leaf our out-swinging applications, inactive leaf for in-
4 swinging.
5 12. Smoke Gasket
6 a. Completely c[ean frame and apply gasket in accardance with manufacturer's instructaons.
7 b. Mount Gasket to stop face of Strike Jambs and Fieaders, Door Rabbet of Hinge Jamb. If the
S Gasket is required to be mounted on the door rabbet of the Strike Jambs due to fire labeling
9 requirements, provide Silencers.
IO
l.l. C. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door to insure proper operation or
12 function of every unit. F2eplace units which cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly.
7.3 3.3 FINAL ADJUSTMENT
14
15 A. Final Adjustment: Wherever hardware installation is made more than one (1} month prior to
16 acceptance or occupancy, make a final checfc and adjustment of all hardware items during the week
17 prior ta acceptance or occupancy. Clean and lubricate operating items as necessary to restore
1S proper function and finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door controf devices to compensate for final
19 operation of heating and ventilating equipment.
20
21 B. Door Cfoser Adjustment: After mechanical systems have been balanced, adjust Door Closers to
22 comply with following ICC/ANSI A117.1 requirements.
23 1. Closing Speed: With Yhe door open 70 degrees, the door closer shall be adjusted so that the
24 door will take at least#hree(3}seconds ta move to a point where the leading edge of the door is
25 three inches from latching.
26 2. Opening Force: The maximum force for pushing or pulling a door open shalf be as follows:
27 (these forces do not apply to the force required to retract latch bol#s or disengage other devices
28 securing the door).
29 a. Fire Doars: The minimum opening force allowable by the appropriate administrative
3d authority.
31 b. Exterior poors: 10.0 Ibf.
32 c. Interior poors:5.0 Ibf.
33
34 C. Door Closer Backcheck. Adjust Door Closer back check to provide protection for adjacent wafls,
35 stops,and magnetic holders.
36
3 r D. Instruction: ]nstruct Owner's Personnel in proper adjustment and maintenance of hardware and
38 hardware finishes
39
40 END OF SECTION
2p12-37!YCS Agriculturat pept lmpeovements U8 7100-Page 9 DOOR HARDWARE
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSC)N iIACGOVERN
1 SECTION 08 8000
2 G�...AZI iVG
3 PART � GENERAL.
4 1.0'� SEaCTiOiV INCLUDES
5 A. Glass.
6 B. This Section includes glazing for the foliowing products and applications, including those specified
7 in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section:
8 1. Doors.
9 C. Glazing compounds and accessories.
10 1.02 RELATED RE(�UIREMENTS
11 A. Section 07 9005 -Joint Sealers: Sealant and back-up material.
12 B. Section 08 1113- Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Glazed doors and borrowed lites.
13 C. Section 08 1416 - Flush Wood Doors: Glazed doors.
14 D. Section 08 4413 -Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls.
15 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS
16 A. 16 CFR 1201 -Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials; current edition.
17 B. ASTM C864- Standard Specification for Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets, Setting
18 Blocks, and Spacers; 2005.
19 C. ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2011.
20 D. ASTM C1036- Standard Specification for Flat Glass; 2006.
21 E. ASTM C1048- Standard Specification for Heat-Treated Flat Glass--Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and
22 Uncoated Glass; 2004.
23 F. ASTM C1193- Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2010.
24 G. ASTM E2190-Standard Specitication for Insulating Glass Unit Performance and Evaluation; 2010.
25 H. GANA(GM) - GAIVA Glazing Manual; Glass Association of North America; 2009.
26 I. GANA(SM) - FGMA Sealant Manual; Glass Association of North America; 2008.
27 J. IBC- International Building Code; current addition.
28 1. Section 2406.
29 K. SIGMA TM-3000 - Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units; Sealed Insulating Glass
30 Manufacturers Association; 2004.
31 1.04 ��FO�l�TIOIVS
32 A. Manufacturers of Glass Products: Firms that produce primary glass,fabricated glass, or both, as
33 defined in referenced glazing publications.
34 B. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit that contains dehydrated air or a
35 spec'rfied gas.
36 C. Deterioration of Coated Glass: Defects developed from normal use that are attributed to the
37 manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining
38 and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling,
39 cracking, and other indications of deterioration in metallic coating.
40 D. Deterioration of Insulating Glass: Failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is attributed to the
41 manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining
42 and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is
43 the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass.
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 08 8000- 1 GLAZING
YELM FIIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELM �OMMUNITY SCHOOLS
�RICKSON MCGOVERN
1 1.�5 PE�d�OFtiN1AIdCE REQ�tIREIVIENTS
2 A. General: Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movement and wind
3 and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to
4 the following: defective manufacture,fabrication, and installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to
5 remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materiais; or other defects in construction.
6 B. Glass Design: Glass thickness designations indicated are minimums and are for detailing only.
7 Confirm glass thicknesses by analyzing Project loads and in-service conditions. Provide glass lites
8 in the thickness designations indicated for various size openings, but not less than thicknesses
9 and in strengths (annealed or heat-treated) required to meet or exceed the following criteria:
10 1. Glass Thicknesses: Select minimum glass thicknesses to comply with ASTM E 1300,
11 according to the following requirements:
12 a. Design Wind Loads: Determine design wind loads applicable to Project from basic wind _
13 speed indicated in miles per hour(meters per second) at 33 feet (10 m) above grade,
14 according to ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures": ,�
15 Section 6.5, "Method 2-Analytical Procedure,"based on mean roof heights above grade
16 indicated on Drawings.
17 1.06 5U8MITTALS
18 A. See Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures.
19 B. Product Data on Glass Types: Provide structural, physical and environmental characteristics, size
20 limitations, special handling or installation requirements. �
21 C. Product Data on Glazing Compounds: Provide chemical, functional, and environmental
22 characteristics, limitations, special application requirements. Identify available colors.
23 D. Samples: Submit two samples 12 x 12 inch (_x_mm) in size of glass units.
24 E. Certificates: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
25 1.07 G4UALITY ASSURAIVC�
26 A. Perform Work in accordance with GANA Glazing N�anual, FGMA Sealant Manual, SIGMA
27 TM-3000 Glazing Guidelines, and GANA Laminated Glazing Reference Manual for glazing
28 installation methods.
29 B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum
30 3 years documented experience.
31 1. An experienced installer wrho has completed glazing similar in material, design, and extent to
32 that indicated for this Project; whose work has resulted in glass installations with a record of
33 successful in-service performance; and who employs glass installers for this Project who are
34' certified under the National Glass Association Glazier Certification Program as Level 2 ,
35 (Senior Glaziers) or Level 3 (Master Glaziers).
36 1.08 f�ELIVERY,S'��3�dAGE, A�ID HA1�C3�.IN� �'
37 A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions and as needed to prevent �-.
38 damage to giass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure
39 to sun, or other causes.
40 1.09 FIEL�7�CaldDli"IONS
41 A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature
42 conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing
43 channel substrates are wet from rain,frost, condensation,or other causes.
44 B. Do not install glazing when ambient temperature is less than 50 degrees F (10 degrees C).
45 C. Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and 24 hours after installation of glazing
4b compounds.
47 j,10 WARRANTY
48 A. See Section 01 7800- Closeout Submittals,for additional warranty requirements. `
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 08 8000- 2 GLAZING
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSt)N MCGOVERN
1 B. Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Provide a five (5) year warranty to include coverage for seal failure,
2 interpane dusting or misting, including replacement of failed units.
3 �ART 2 PRODUCTS
4 2.01 G�.laZI�IG i'YPES
5 A. Type IG-1 - Sealed Insulating Glass Units:Vision glazing.
6 1. Application(s):All exterior glazing unless otherwise indicated.
7 2. Outboard Lite: Annealed float glass, 1/4 inch (6 mm)thick, minimum.
8 a. Tint: Clear.
9 3. Inboard Lite: Annealed float glass, 1/4 inch (6 mm)thick, minimum.
10 a. Tint: Clear.
11 4. Total Thickness: 1 inch (25 mm).
12 B. Type S-3- Single Safety Glazing: Non-fire-rated.
13 1. Applications: Provide this type of glazing in the following locations:
14 a. Glazed lites in doors, except fire doors.
15 b. Glazed sidelights to doors, except in fire-rated walls and partitions.
16 c. Other locations required by applicable federal, state, and local codes and regulations.
17 d. Other locations indicated on the drawings.
18 2. Type: Fully tempered float glass as specified.
19 3. Tint: Clear.
20 4. Thickness: 1/4 inch (6 mm).
21 2.02 GLASS �VIATERiALS
22 A. Float Glass Manufacturers:
23 1. Zeledyne: www.versaluxglass.com.
24 2. AGC Flat Glass North America, Inc: www.afgglass.com.
25 3. Pilkington North America Inc:www.pilkington.com/na.
26 4. PPG Industries, Inc: www.ppgideascapes.com.
27 5. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 6000- Product Requirements.
28 B. Float Glass:All glazing is to be float glass unless otherwise indicated.
29 1. Annealed Type:ASTM C1036, Type I,transparent flat, Class 1 clear, Quality Q3 (glazing
30 select).
31 2. Heat-Strengthened and Fufly Tempered Types: ASTM C1048.
32 3. Tinted Types: Color and pertormance characteristics as indicated.
33 4. Thicknesses:As indicated;for exterior glazing comply with specified requirements for wind
34 load design regardless of specified thickness.
35 5. Tempered glass for interior glazing at special locations:
36 a. Locations:All interior doors with
37 b. Thickness: 1/4° (tempered).
38 C. Safety Glass: Clear;fully tempered with horizontal tempering (see special condition glazing
39 above).
40 1. Comply with ASTivI C 1036, Type I,transparent flat, Class 1 ctear, Quality Q3 (gfazing select)
41 and ASTM C 1048.
42 2. Comply with 16 CFR 1201 test requirements for Categoryil.
43 3. Comply with all requirements in IBC- Section 2406.
44 4. Where glazing is to be installed in fire-rated partition, provide glazing that is also
45 fire-protection rated in accordance with applicable code.
4b 5. 6 mm minimum thick.
47 8. Provide this type of glazing in the all interior door lite locations.
48 2.03 SEALED INSULATING GLASS UMITS
49 A. Manufacturers:
50 1. Any of the manufacturers specified for float glass.
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 08 8000 -3 GLAZING
�-
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN '
1 2. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. *
2 B. Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Types as indicated.
3 1. Locations: Exterior poors where scheduled and overhead sectional doors where scheduled.
4 2. Durability: Certified by an independent testing agency to comply with ASTM E2190.
5 3. Edge Spacers:Aluminum, bent and soldered corners.
6 4. Edge Seal: Glass to elastomer with supplementary silicone sealant.
7 5. Purge interpane space with dry hermetic air.
8 C. Insulated Glass Units: Double pane with glass to elastomer edge seal.
9 1. Outer pane of 1/4"Tempered glass, inner pane of 1/4"Tempered glass.
10 2. Place reflective coating on No.2 surface within the unit.
11 3. Glazing: Provide manufacturers clear, sealed insulating units of 1" overall thickness that
12 complies with ASTM E-774-81 Class A, e�cterior glazed using a closed cell foam tape and
13 applied PVC glazing bead. Glass shall be 1/8" minimum.Actual thickness shall meet
14 performance requirements listed above.
15
16
U-value: 0.35 .�
Shadin Coefficient SC : 0.71
Solar Heat Gain SHG : 0.62 n�}
Visible Reflectance 17% �„,
Visible Transmittance 74°/a
17 °
18
19 4. Durabiliry: Cert'rfied by an independent testing agency to comply with ASTM E 2190. �
20 5. Purge interpane space with dry hermetic air. A.�
21 a. Provide hermetically sealed IG units with dehydrated airspace, dual sealed with a
22 primary seal of Polyisobutylene (PIB), or thermo plastic spacer(TPS) and a secondary �
23 seal of silicone or an organic sealant depending on the application.
24 6. Total unit thickness of 1 inch (_mm) minimum. ""
25 D. Requirements: �
26 1. Insulating glass units are certified through the Insulating Glass Certification Council (IGCC) to
27 either ASTM E774, or to ASTM E2190, or both.
28 2. Annealed float glass shall comply with ASTM C1036, Type I, Class 1 (clear), Class 2 (tinted),
29 Quality-Q3.
30 3. Heat=Strengthened float glass shall comply with ASTM C1048, Type I, Class 1 (clearj, Class .
31 2 (tinted), Quality Q3, Kind HS.
32 4. Tempered float glass shall comply with ASTM C1048, Type I, Class 1 (clear), Class 2 (tinted), �
33 Quality Q3, Kind FT.
34 E. Edge Sea! Construction:Aluminum, bent and soldered corners.
35 2.04 GLAZI�ICa COINI�OI�.�NDS
36 A. Manufacturers:
37 1. Bostik Inc: www.bostik-us.com.
38 2. Mlomentive Performance Materials, Inc (formerly GE Silicones): www.momentive.com.
39 3. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com.
40 4. BASF Construction Chemicals-Building Systems:www.buildingsystems.basf.com.
41 5. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
42 B. Butyl Sealant: Single component;ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 12-1/2, Uses M and A; Shore A
43 hardness of 10 to 20; black color; non-skinning.
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 08 8000 -4 GIAZING M
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YEL.M COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERId
1 C. Polyurethane Sealant: Single component, chemical curing, non-staining, non-bleeding;ASTM C
2 920, Type S, Grade NS, Cfass 25, Uses M,A, and G; Shore A Hardness Range 20 to 35; color as
3 selected.
4 D. Silicone Sealant: Single component; neutral curing; capable of water immersion without loss of
5 properties; non-bleeding, non-staining; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses M, A, and
6 G; cured Shore A hardness of 15 to 25; color as selected.
7 2.05 +C�..AZING ACCESSORIES
8 A. Setting Blocks: Neoprene, 80 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness,ASTM C 864 Option I. Length of
9 0.1 inch for each square foot (25 mm for each square meter) of glazing or minimum 4 inch (100
10 mm)x width of glazing rabbet space minus 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) x height to suit glazing method and
11 pane weight and area.
12 B. Spacer Shims: Neoprene, 50 to 60 Shore A durometer hardness, ASTM C 864 Option I. Minimum
13 3 inch (75 mm) long x one half the height of the glazing stop x thickness to suit application,
14 self-adhesive on one face.
15 C. Glazing Tape: Preformed butyl compound with integral resilient tube spacing device; 10 to 15
16 Shore A durometer hardness; coiled on release paper; black color.
17 1. Manufacturers:
18 a. Pecora Corporation:www.pecora.com.
19 b. Tremco Global Sealants: www.tremcosealants.com.
20 c. Subs.titutions: Refer to Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
21 D. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing:ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size and
22 density to control glazir�g sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant
23 performance.
24 E. Perimeter Insulation for Fire-Resistive Glazing: Identical to product used in test assembly to obtain
25 fire-resistance rating.
26 F. Glazing Gaskets: Resilient silicone extruded shape to suit glazing channel retaining slot;ASTM C
27 864 Option I; black color.
28 G. Glazing Clips: Manufacturer's standard type.
29 H. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.
30 PAR`�3 EXE�CUTION
31 3.01 EXAiI�l�I�,�'ll'��1
32 A. Examine framing glazing, with Installer present, for compliance with the following:
33 1. Presence and functioning of weep system.
34 2. Minimum required face or edge clearances.
35 3. Effective sealing between joints of glass framing members.
36 B. Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance.
37 C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
38 3.42 PREPI�►RATl�l�
39 A. Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry.
40 B. Seal porous glazing channels or recesses with substrate compatible primer or sealer.
41 C. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant.
42 D. Install seaiants in accordance with ASTM C1193 and FGMA Sealant Manual.
43 E. Install sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
44 3.03 GL�IZING, �''aENERAL
45 A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other
46 glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced
47 glazing publications.
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 08 8000 - 5 GLAZING
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
ACa DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS �
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 B. Glazing channel dimensions, as indicated on Drawings, provide necessary bite on glass, minimum
2 edge and face clearances,and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.Adjust y
3 as required by Project conditions during installation.
4 C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from w�
5 Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or
6 other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and
7 appearance.
8 D. Apply primers to joint surtaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by
9 preconstruction sealant substrate testing.
10 E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing w..
11 publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of
12 compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.
13 F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. �
14 G. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches (1270 mm) as
15 follows:
16 1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install
17 correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing u'
18 tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to
19 comply with system performance requirements.
20 2. Provide 1/8 inch (3.0 mm) minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to �,
21 sealant width.With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness
22 of tape. �
23 H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in
�.
24 glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements
25 in referenced glazing publications. u�.
26 I. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.
�,..
27 3.04 �NSTAL.LATION- EXTERIOR DRY METIiOD (TAPE AND GASKET SPLINE GLAZING)
28 A. GeneraL `
29 1. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass,their exposed edges are
30 flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops.
31 2. Install tapes continuously, but not necessari�y in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes �,
32 to make them fit opening.
33 3. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs.
34 Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills.
35 4. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not iapped.
36 Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.
37 5. Do not remove release paper from tape until just before each glazing unit is installed.
38 6. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant where required.
39 7. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting
40 dense comp�ession gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable �-
41 stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.
42 8. Appty cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape.
43 B. Cut glazing tape to length; install on glazing pane. Seal corners by butting tape and sealing
44 junctions with butyl sealant.
45 C. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inches (150 mmj from corners.
46 D. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against fixed stop with sufficient pressure to attain full
47 contact.
48 E. Install removable stops without displacing glazing spline. Exert pressure for full continuous contact.
49 F. Trim protruding tape edge.
2012-37/YCS Agricuttural Dept Improvements 08 8000- 6 GLAZING
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSOId MCGOVERN
1 3.0� lNSTALLATION- ifdTERiOR DRY ME'�HOD (i'APE AND 7APE)
2 A. Cut glazing tape to length and set against permanent stops, projecting 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) above
3 sight line.
4 B. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inches (150 mm)from corners.
5 C. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against tape for full contact at perimeter of pane or unit.
6 D. Place glazing tape on free perimeter of glazing in same manner described above.
7 E. Install removable stop without displacement of tape. Exert pressure on tape for full continuous
8 contact.
9 F. Knife trim protruding tape.
10 3.06 C��ANI�G
11 A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers
12 to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove non-permanent
13 labels, and clean surfaces.
14 B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resufting from construction operations,
15 including weld splatter. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact
16 with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended by glass manufacturer.
17 C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at
18 frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month,for buildup of dirt, scum,
19 alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.
20 D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from
21 natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period.
22 E. Remove glazing materials from finish surfaces.
23 F. Remove labels after Work is complete.
24 G. Clean glass and adjacent surfaces.
25 1. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before
26 date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion.Wash glass as
27 recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.
28 END OF SECTION
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 08 8000- 7 GLAZING
YELM HIGH 5CHOOL
AG DEF'T. lMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ER9CKSON MCGOVERN
1 SECTIOi�09 5153
� DIR�C'T-APPLI�D ACOUSTiCAL�CEILiiVGS (AL3'�RNATE SID A-3)
3 PART � G�NERAL
4 1.fl1 SECTION iNCLUDES
5 A. Acoustic units.
6 1. Direct glued acoustical ceiling tiles.
7 1.02 f3ELATED REQUIREMENTS
8 A. Section 07 9005 -Joint Sealers.
9 1.03 REFERENCE�TANDARDS
10 A. ASTM E1264-Standard Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products; 2008e1.
11 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REt�U1REMENTS
12 A. Sequence work to ensure acoustic ceilings are not installed until building is enclosed,sufficient
13 heat is provided, dust generating activities have terminated, and overhead work is completed,
14 tested, and approved.
15 B. Install acoustic units after interior wet work is dry.
16 1.05 SU�MITTALS
17 A. See Section 01 3000-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures.
18 B. Product Data: Provide data on acoustic units.
19 �1.06 t#UALITY ASSURANCE
20 A. Manufacturer Qual'rfications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this
21 section, with not less than three years of documented experience.
22 B. Instalfer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified in this
23 section with minimum three years of documented experience.
24 1.07 REGU�A�'ORY REQUIREMENTS
25 A. Fire Pertormance Characteristics: Provide acoustical ceilings that are identical to those tested for
26 the following fire performance characteristics, per ASTM test method indicated below, by UL or
27 other testing and inspecting organizations acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. ldentify
28 acoustical ceiling components with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting
29 organization.
30 1. Surface Burning Characteristics:As folfows,tested per ASTM E 84 and complying with ASTM
31 E 1264 for Class A products.
32 a. Flame Spread: 25 or less.
33 b. Smoke Developed: 50 or less.
34 1.08 DE�.IVERY,STCiRAGE,AND �IAiVD�1�IG
35 A. Deliver acoustical ceiling units to project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a
36 fully enclosed space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, direct sunlight,
37 surface contamination, and other causes.
38 B. Before installing acoustical ceiling units, permit them to reach room temperature and stabilized
39 moisture content.
40 C. Handle acoustical ceiling units carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way.
41 1.09 F1�LD CO�IDITi+DNS
42 A. Maintain uniform temperature of minimum 60 degrees F (16 degrees C) and maximum humidity of
43 40 percent prior to, during, and after installation.
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 09 5153- 1 DIRECT-APPLIED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS(ALTERNATE
BID A-3)
�
YELM HIGFi SC�900L
A� DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS ,�
Y��M COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERlCKSON MCGOVERN �-
1 1.�10 P�?U�IECT CONDITIONS "�
2 A. Sequence work to ensure acoustic ceilings are not installed until building is enclosed, sufficient
3 heat is provided, dust generating activities have terminated, and overhead work is completed,
4 tested, and approved. �°
5 8. Install acoustic units after interior wet work is dry. .
6 i.i1 E�'TRA AIlATERIALS
7 A. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements,for additional provisions. �
8 B. Provide 5 percent of total acoustic unit area of extra units to Owner (Yelm Community Schools). °
9 �ART 2 �RODUCTS
�-
10 2.01 ACOUSTICAL CEILING UNITS,GENERAL
11 A. Standard for Acoustical Ceiting Units: Provide manufacturers'standard units of configuration �
12 indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by reference to types, �
13 patterns, acoustical ratings, and light reflectance, unless otherwise indicated.
14 1. Mounting Method for Measuring NRC: Type E-400 (plenum mounting in which face of test -=
15 specimen is 15 3/4 inches [400 mm] away from the test surface) per ASTM E 795.
�.6 2. Colors and Patterns: Provide products to match appearance characteristics indicated under �
17 each product type.
18 2.02 i1�lA�lUFACTURERS
19 A. Acoustic Tile: "�"
20 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Product Cortega: www.armstrong.com. ,,
21 2. CertainTeed Corporation; Product Baroque#412: www.certainteed.com.
22 3. USG; Product Radar#2990:www.usg.com. �
23 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000- Product Requirements.
24 2.03 i4fATERlALS �
25 A. Acoustic Tile:ASTM E1264, Conforming to the following: �
26 1. Size: 12 x 12 inches (300 x 300 mm).
27 2. Thickness: 3/4 inches (19 mm). "°
28 3. Composition: Mineral. �
29 4. Light Reflectance: 0.75 percent.
30 5. Edge: Square. �,-
31 6. Surface Color:White.
32 B. Adhesive:Waterproof, gun or knife grade;type recommended by tile manufacturer. ��
33 C. Perimeter Moldings: Rolled steel profile, white color.
34 D. Gasket For Perimeter Moldings: Closed cell rubber sponge tape. ,
35 PART 3 EX�CLt�ICDi�
36 3.01 EXAMIldA'f90�1
37 A. Ver'rfy existing conditions and substrate flatness before starting work.
38 B. Verify that substrate conditions are ready to receive the work of this section.
39 3.�2 IMSTALLA'��ON
40 A. Install system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
41 B. Perimeter Molding:
42 1. Instalt concealed edge molding at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces with continuous
43 gasket. °
44 2. Use longest practical lengths.
45 3. Miter corners.
46
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 09 5153 -2 DIRECT-APPLIED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS(ALTERNATE
BID A-3)
YELiVI HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELIIA COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON �IIICGOVERN
1 4. Provide concealed molding at junctions with other interruptions.
2 5. Where curved obstructions occur, provide preformed closures to match perimeter molding.
3 C. Center tile on room axis leaving equal border units.
4 D. Fit acoustic units in place,free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to appearance
5 and function.
6 E. Install acoustic units level in uniform plane.
7 3AS TC3LERAf�CES
8 A. Maximum Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m).
9 3.04 CLEANING
10 A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical ceilings. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for
11 cleaning and touch-up of minor finish damage. Remove and replace work that cannot be
12 successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.
13 END OF SECTION
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 09 5153- 3 DIRECT-APPLIED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS(ALTERNATE
BID A-3)
YELiIA HiGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
Y�LWI COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 SECTlON 09 9000
2 PAI�lTS A�ID COATIIdGS- (N�W CONSTRUCTION)
3 PA�iT � G�NERAL
4 i,01 DESCRIPTIOiV OF WORK
5 A. Extent of Painting:
6 1. As scheduled and indicated on the drawings, or unless noted otherwise, ail surfaces on the
7 total e�erior and interior of all buildings of this project sha{I be prepared, painted, and finished
g as described in the following contents of this Section 09 9000, even if not noted for specified
g in the Room Finish Schedule. Exceptions to this rule are natural finishes of materials
10 specifically noted below in paragraph "Surfaces Not To Be Painted."
11 a. Where surfaces and materials have not been scheduled or noted for paint finish, paint
12 with similar material and number of coats as on similarly scheduled or noted surface.
13 b. Surface preparation, priming and coats of paint specified are in addition to shop-priming
14 and surface treatment specified under other sections of work.
15 1) Coordinate with Gypsum Board Assemblies (drywall) contractor for application of
16 primer coat prior to the application of wall board texture. Primer coat prior to texture
17 is to be provided by this Section.
18 c. AII metal vision panel frames for doors shall be painted, unless noted (paint is required
19 even if not noted on door schedules).
2p d. All metal decks,trusses, and joists shall be painted, unless noted (paint is required even
2� if not noted on finish schedules or drawings).
22 B. Accent Painting:
23 1. Approximately 15% or less of total area will consist of"medium to deep colors"which may
24 require one additional coat above those specified for custom or premium finishes. This accent
25 is in addition to any accent specified in graphics application.
26 C. Mechanical and Electrical: Shall be as specified in Division 15 and 16 with the exception of the
27 following items at the following locations:
28 1. Primary occupied spaces, i.e. classrooms, offices, corridors,toilets, assembly areas, etc.
29 a. Ductwork:All exposed ductwork and supports shall be painted to match ceiling unless
30 noted othen�vise. One (1) prime and two (2)finish coats.
31 b. Electric Panels, Fuse Boxes, Equipment Boxes: Shall be heavily sanded to provide tooth
32 for application of 2 coats of industrial enamel to match the adjoining wall color.
33 c. Miscellaneous Items: Conduit, plug mold,wire mold, vents, grilles, miscellaneous pipe
34 and any other miscellaneous mechanical or electrical items. Minimum of 2 coats of
35 enamel or 1 primer and 1 finish. Color to match adjoining wall or ceiling color.
36 D. Surfaces Not To Be Painted:
37 1. Pre-Finished Items: Unless otherwise indicated, do not include painting when factory-finishing
38 or installer finishing is specified for such items as (but not limited to) roofing, brick, glass,
39 plastic laminate toilet enclosures, acoustic materials, architectural woodwork and casework,
40 and finish mechanical and electrical equipment, including sprinkler heads, light fixtures,
41 switchgear and distribution cabinets.
42 2. Concealed Surfaces: Unless otherwise indicated, painting is not required on surfaces such as
43 walls or ceilings in concealed areas and generally inaccessible areas,foundation spaces,
44 furred areas, utility tunnels, pipe spaces, duct shafts and elevator shafts.
45 3. Finished Metal Surfaces: Unless otherwise indicated, metal surfaces of anodized aluminum,
46 stainless steel, chromium plate, copper, branze and similar finished materials will not require
47 finish painting.
48 4. Operating Parts: Unless otherwise indicated, moving parts of operating units, mechanical and
49 electrical parts,such as valve and damper operators, linkages,sensing devices, motor and
50 fan shafts will not require finish painting.
51 5. Do not paint over any code required labels, such as Underwriters' Laboratories and Factory
52 Mutual, or any equipment identification, performance rating, name, or nomenclature plates.
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 09 9000 - 1 PAfNTS AND COATINGS-(NEW CONSTRUCTION)
�
YEL�VI HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
Y'�Lil►1 COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN �-
1 E. Following categories of work are included under other sections of these specifications. '
2 1. Shop Priming: Unless otherwise specified, shop priming of ferrous metal items is included ,
3 under various sections for structural steel, metal fabrications, hollow metal work and similar
4 items. �
5 2. Unless otherwise specified, shop priming of fabricated components such as architectural
6 woodwork, wood casework and shop-fabricated or factory-built mechanical and electrical v
7 equipment or accessories is included under other sections of these specifications.
8 1.02 SECTlO� INCLUDES J
9 A. Surface preparation.
10 B. Field application of paints and other coatings. �
11 C. All labor, materials,tools and other equipment, services and supervision required to complete all
12 interior and exterior painting and decorating work as indicated on Finish Schedules and to the full ¢
13 extent of the drawings and specifications.
�.
14 D. Work under this contract shall also include, but not necessarily be limited to:
15 1. Surface preparation of substrates as required for acceptance of painting, including cleaning, ��
16 small crack repair, patching, caulking, and making good surfaces and areas to the limits
17 defined under MPI preparation requirements. �'
18 2. Surface preparation and prime painting surfaces for wall coverings prior to installation. in
19 accordance with MPf and wall covering manufacturer's requirements.
20 3. Specific pre-treatments noted herein or specified in the MPI Architectural Painting �.
21 Specification Manual.
22 4. Priming (except where pre-primed with an approved primer under other Sections of work) and -
23 painting of structural steel, miscellaneous metal, ornamental metal and primed steel
24 equipment.
25 5. Priming and back-priming of wood materials as noted herein or specified in the MPI ,
26 Architectural Painting Specification Manual.
27 6. Painting of exposed to view mechanical (heating,ventilating and plumbing) services and �..
28 equipment, (e.g., ducts, sprinkler piping, etc.), and electrical work to extent noted on Finish
29 Schedule unless pre-finished. x
30 7. Re-painting of existing surfaces and finishes when adjacent to new painting and coating work
31 where appticable including surface preparation, prime and finish coats. �
32 8. Provision of safe and adequate ventilation as required over and above temporary ventilation
33 supplied by others, where toxic and/or volatile/flammable materials are being used. �
34 9, Refer to drawings and schedules (e.g., Finish Schedule) for type, location and extent of ,�.
35 finishes required, and include all touch-ups and field painting necessary to complete work
36 shown, scheduled or specified. --
37 10. This Section along with the drawings forms part of the Contract documents and is to be read,
38 interpreted and coordinated with all other parts. �
39 11. Providing Fire Resistant Coating (paint) to electrical and communication backer boards.
40 12. Provisions for 2 coat systems.
41 a. The first coat shall be applied at a 50% tinting of the color selected
42 E. Records of Paints Used: Contractor shall retain in good condition all paint schedules, marked
43 plans and paint samples used for job quality and color control. These are to be turned over to the
44 Owner at the end of the job.
45 1. COLOR SCHEDULES which are provided to the Contractor are frequently, due to the
46 Contractor's preference of paint supplier, "crossed over"with colors being matched by
47 another paint supplier (other than the supplier whose colors were specified).
48 2. Since it is not possible to predict what supplier and therefore which product numbers will be
49 used to complete a job, the color schedule (master) has extra blanks under each color for the
50 insertion of product information which must be supplied by the paint contractor when a
51 scheduled color may have to be mixed in more than one product type to paint different
52 surfaces. °
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 09 9000-2 PAINTS AND COATINGS-(NEW CONSTRUCTION)
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. lMPROVEMENTS
Y�LM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERiCKSON MCGOVERN
1 3. For example:Walis are scheduled to be painted color"x". If inetal louvers set in these walls
2 require a different product type other than the type scheduled for the walls, use the blank
3 space under"x" in the schedule to record the paint product and its number,thereby
4 facilitating the Owner's purchase of the proper product when maintenance is required.
5 4. See sample at end of this section.
6 1,03 REL..ATED SECTIONS
7 A. Unless otherwise nated,the following work or conditions are not included under this Section of
8 work:
9 1. Section 01 5000 -Temporary Facilities and Controls (temporary heat, lighting, scaffolds, etc.).
10 2. Section 03 3000 -Cast-in-Place Concrete (special finishes).
11 3. Section 09 2116-Gypsum Board Assemblies.
12 a. Coordinate with Gypsum Board Assemblies (drywall) contractor for application of primer
13 coat prior to the application of wall board texture. Primer coat prior to texture is to be
�4 provided by this Section.
15 4. Division 22 and 23 - Mechanical (painting, stenciling, banding of inechanical systems).
16 5. Division 26- Electrical (painting,stenciling, banding of electrica(systems).
17 '�.04 R�F'�R�NCES
18 A. Except as hereinafter specified,for materials and workmanship, conform to the "Architectural
19 Painting Specification Manual" hereinafter referred to as "MPI,"as published by The Masters
20 Painters and Decorators Association.
21 B. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D- National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural
22 Coatings; U.S. Environmental Protection Agency; current edition.
23 C. ASTM D 16- Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Nlaterials, and Applications; 2003.
24 1.05 DEFINIi'�ONS
25 A. Conform to MPI and ASTM D 16 for interpretation of terms used in this section.
26 1.06 Sl1BMl�"TALS
27 A. See Section 01 3000-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures.
28 B. Product Data: Provide data on all finishing products, including VOC content.
29 C. Samples: Submit three painted samples, illustrating selected colors and textures for each color
30 and system selected with specified coats cascaded. Submit on index weight paper stock, 8 1/2x11
31 inch (_x mm) in size.
32 D. Samples for wood surfaces: Samples for surtaces to be stained or clear finished shall be submitted
33 on no less-than 6 inch lengths of material representative of the surface to be stained and/or clear
34 coated.
35 1. Three samples required.
36 E. Submit two sets of Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) prior to commencement of work for review
37 and for posting at job srte as required.
38 F. When painting occupied areas, submit work schedule for various stages of work for the
39 Consultant's review and Owner's approval if requested.
40 G. At project completion provide an itemized list complete with manufacturer, paint type and color
41 coding for all colors used for Owner's later use in maintenance. See Paint Record Requirements at
42 the end of this Section.
43 H. At project completion provide properly packaged maintenance materials as noted herein and
44 obtain a signed receipt.
45 1.07 QUALITY ASSURAfdCE
46 A. This Contractor shall have a minimum of five (5) years proven satisfactory experience and shall
47 show proof before commencement of work that he will maintain a qualified crew of painters
48 throughout the duration of the work.When requested, Contractor shall provide a list of the last
2012-37/YCS Agricuttural Dept Improvements 09 9000- 3 PAINTS AND COATINGS-(NEW CONSTRUCTION)
YELM HIGH S�CFi00L
AG [3EPT. IMPROVEMENTS ,�
Y��M COMMUNITY SCHOO�S
ERICKSON MCGOVERN �
1 three comparable jobs including, name and location, specifying authority/project manager,start/ �
2 completion dates and value of the painting work.
3 B. Only qualified journeymen who have a Tradesman Qualification Certificate of Proficiency shall be
4 engaged in painting and decorating work.Apprentices may be employed provided they work under «
5 the direct supervision of a qualified journeyman in accordance with trade regulations.
6 C. All materials, preparation and workmanship shall conform to the standards contained in the latest
7 edition of the Master Painters Institute (MPI) Architectural Painting Specification Manual (hereafter ,�
8 referred to as the MPI.
9 D. Painting Manual as issued by the local MPI Accredited Quality Assurance Association having
10 jurisdiction.
11 E. All paint manufacturers and products used shall be as listed under the Approved Product List
12 section of the MP! Painting Manual. °
13 F. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES WILL PAINT APPLICATION BE PERMITTED WITHOUT
14 SPECIFIED SAMPLE APPROVAL. ANY PRODUCT APPLIED WHICH IS NOT ACCORDING TO �
15 SPECIFICATIONS AND SIGNED OFF FOR PROPER COLOR WILL BE SUBJECT TO REMOVAL .
16 AND REPAINT AT THE CONTRACTOR'S EXPENSE.
17 1.0$ REGULATORY REQUIREME�ITS '�
18 A. Conform to applicable code for flame and smoke rating requirements for products and finishes. ��
19 B. Conform to the latest edition of Industrial Health and Safety Regulations issued by applicable
20 authorities having jurisdiction in regard to site safety(ladders, scaffolding, ventilation, etc.). `�
21 C. Conform to requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction in regard to the storage, mixing, °-
22 application and disposal of all paint related materials.
23 1.09 MOCK-�JP
24 A. See Section 01 4000 -Quality Requirements,for general requirements for mock-up.
25 B. When requested by the Architect, provide duplicate minimum 300 mm (12") square samples of ,�
26 surfaces or acceptable facsimiles requested painted with specified paint or coating in colors, gloss
27 /sheen and textures required to MPI Painting Manual standards for review and approval.When -
28 approved, samples shall become acceptable standard of quality for appropriate on-site surface
29 with one of each sample retained on-site.
30 C. When requested by the Architect, prepare and paint designated surface, area, room or item (in
31 each color scheme)to requirements specified herein, with specified paint or coating showing
32 selected colors, gloss/sheen,textures and workmanship to MPI Painting Manual standards for �
33 review and approval.When approved, surface, area, room and/or iterns shall become acceptable
34 standard of finish quality and workmanship for similar on-site work. ~
35 D. Mock-up may remain as part of the Work. u
36 1.10 DEL�VERY, S�"09�AGE,AND PROT�CTION
37 A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability.
38 1. Deliver all painting materials in sealed, original labeled containers bearing manufacturer's �._
39 name, brand name,type of paint or coating and color designation,standard compliance,
40 materials content as well as mixing and/or reducing and application requirements. �
41 B. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name,type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand code,
42 coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and
43 instructions for mixing and reducing.
44 C. Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F {7 degrees C) and a
45 maximum of 90 degrees F (32 degrees C), in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's
46 instructions.
47 1. Store all paint materials in original labeled containers in a secure (lockable), dry, heated and
48 well ventilated single designated area meeting the minimum requirements of both paint
2012-37/YCS Agricuttural Dept Improvements 09 9000 -4 PAINTS AND COATINGS-(NEW CONSTRUCTION)
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 manufacturer and authorities having jurisdiction and at a minimum ambient temperature of
2 45° F (7° C). Only material used on this project to be stored on site:
3 D. Where toxic and/or volatile/explosive/flammab{e materials are being used, provide adequate
4 fireproof storage lockers and take all necessary precautions and post adequate warnings (e.g. no
5 smoking) as required.
6 E. Take all necessary precautionary and safety measures to prevent fire hazards and spontaneous
7 combustion and to protect the environment from hazard spills. Materials that constitute a fire
g hazard (paints, solvents, drop clothes, etc.j shall be stored in suitable closed and rated containers
9 and removed from the site on a daily basis.
10 i.ii EiNV9RONMENTAL RE(iUIREMENTS
11 A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature
12 ranges required by the paint product manufacturer.
13 1. UNLESS specifically pre-approved by the specifying body, (Paint Inspection Agency) and the
14 applied product manufacturer, perform no painting or decorating work when the ambient air
15 and substrate temperatures are below 50° F (10°C) for both interior and exterior work.
16 2. Perform no painting or decorating work unless adequate continuous ventilation and sufficient
17 heating facilities are in place to maintain ambient air and substrate temperatures above
1g minimum requirements for 24 hours before, during and after paint application. Provide
19 supplemental ventilating and heating equipment if ventilation and heating from existing
20 system is inadequate to meet minimum requirements.
21 3. Perform no painting or decorating work when the relative humidity is above 85% or when the
22 dew point is less than 5° F (3° C)variance between the air/surface temperature.
23 4. Perform no painting or decorating work when the maximum moisture content of the substrate
24 exceeds:
25 a. 12%for concrete and masonry (clay and concrete brick/block).
2b b. 15%for wood.
27 c. 12%for plaster and gypsum board.
28 5. Conduct all moisture tests using a properly calibrated electronic Moisture Meter, except test
29 concrete floors for moisture using a simple cover patch test.
30 6. Test concrete, masonry and plaster surfaces for alkalinity as required.
31 7. Apply paint only to dry, clean, properly cured and adequately prepared surfaces in areas
32 where dust is no longer generated by construction activities such that airborne particles will
33 not affect the quality of finished surfaces.
34 8. Perform no painting or decorating work unless a minimum lighting level of 323 Lux (30 foot
35 candles) is provided on surfaces to be painted or decorated. Adequate lighting facilities shall
36 be provided by the General Contractor.
37 B. Provide Iighting leve{of 80 ft. candles (860 Ix) measured mid-height at substrate surface.
38 1.12 SCH�D�ILING
39 A. Schedule painting operations to prevent disruption of and by other trades.
40 B. Schedule painting operations to prevent disruption of occupants in and about the building. Obtain
41 written authorization from Consultant/Owner for changes in work schedule.
42 C. Painting in occupied facilities to be carried out during hours in accordance with Owner's operating
43 requirements (during silent hours) (on weekends). Schedule work such that painted surfaces will
44 have dried before occupants are affected.
45 D. Phasing of work shall be in accordance with the requirements of Section 01 1000 - Summary.
46 1.13 E;K'fRA MA�ER�ALS
47 A. See Section 01 6000- Product Requirements,for additional provisions.
48 B. Supply 1 gallon (4 L) of each color used;store where directed.
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 09 9000- 5 PAINTS AND COATINGS-(NEW CONSTRUCTION)
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS �_
YEi�M COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERf�
1 1. At project completion provide 4 liters (1 gallon) of each type and color of paint from same `
2 production run (batch mix) used in unopened cans, properly labeled and identified for
3 Owner's later use in maintenance. Store where directed.
4 PART 2 P'FdCD�UCTS "
5 2.01 MANUFACTURERS
6 A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following or approved:
7 1. Benjamin Moore. "
8 2. GlidddenProfessional (ICI Dulux).
9 3. Parker Paint.
10 4. Sherwin-Williams. _
11 B. Unless otherwise specified conform to Standards of MPI for materials;this includes paint, varnish,
12 stain, enamel, lacquer,fillers and related paint products and materials not specifically indicated,
13 but required for prime, intermediate and finish coats.
14 C. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
15 2,�� PAINTS A�VD 9CC?ATINGS-G�NERAL
16 A. Paints and Coatings: Ready mixed, except field-catalyzed coatings. Prepare pigments: �
17 1. To a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to a
18 homogeneous coating.
19 2. For good flow and brushing properties.
20 3. Capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags.
21 B. Materials:
22 1. All materials (primers, paints, coatings, varnishes, stains, lacquers,fillers,thinners,solvents,
23 etc.) shall be in accordance with the MPI Painting Manual Approved Product listing and shall "`°
24 be from a single manufacturer for each system used. {
25 2. Other paint materials such as linseed oil,shellac, etc. shall be the highest quality product of
26 an approved manufacturer listed in the MPI Painting Manual and shall be compatible with
27 other coating materials as required.
28 3. All paint materials shall have good flowing and brushing properties and shall dry or cure free -
29 of blemishes or sags.
30 4. Where required, paints and coatings shall meet flame spread and smoke developed ratings �
31 designated by local Code requirements and/or authorities having jurisdiction.
32 C. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content:
33 1. Provide coatings that comply with the most stringent requirements specified in the following:
34 a. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D--National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for
35 Architectural Coatings.
36 2. Determination of VOC Content: Testing and calculation in accordance with 40 CFR 59,
37 Subpart D (EPA Method 24), exclusive of colorants added to a tint base and water added at
38 project site; or other method acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. ,
39 D. Chemical Content: The following compounds are prohibited:
40 1. Aromatic Compounds: In excess of 1.0 percent by weight of total aromatic compounds "
41 (hydrocarbon compounds containing one or more benzene rings).
42 2, Acrolein, acrylonitrile, antimony, benzene, butyl benzyl phthalate, cadmium, di (2-ethylhexyl)
43 phthalate, di-n-butyl phthalate, di-n-octyl phthalate, 1,2-dichlorobenzene, diethyl phthalate,
44 dimethyl phthalate, ethylbenzene,formaldehyde, hexavalent chromium, isophorone, �ead,
45 mercury, methyl ethyl ketone, methyl isobuty! ketone, methylene chloride, naphthalene,
46 toluene (methylbenzene), 1,1,1-trichloroethane, vinyl chloride.
47 2.03 Et�U1P�Ai�ENT
48 A. Painting and Decorating Equipment:to best trade standards for type of product and application.
49 B. Spray Painting Equipment: of ample capacity, suited to the type and consistency of paint or ,
50 coating being applied and kept clean and in good working order at all times.
2012-37/YCS Agricuftural Dept Improvements 09 9000 -E PAINTS AND COATINGS-(NEW CONSTRUCTIONj m
YELM HIGh SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
Y�LM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 2.04 i1�1lXlP1Ca/1t�VD TiNTING
2 A. Unless otherwise specified herein or pre-approved,all paint shail be ready-mixed and pre-tinted.
3 Re-mix all paint in containers prior to and during application to ensure break-up of lumps, complete
4 dispersion of settled pigment, and color and gloss uniformity.
5 B. Paste, powder or catalyzed paint mixes shall be mixed in strict accordance with manufacturer's
6 written instructions.
7 C. Where thinner is used, addition shall not exceed paint manufacturer's recommendations. Do not
8 use kerosene or any such organic solvents to thin water-based paints.
9 D. Thin paint for spraying according in strict accordance with paint manufacturer's instructions. If
10 directions are not on container, obtain instructions in writing from manufacturer and provide copy
11 of instructions to Consultant.
12 2.05 FINISH AiVD COLORS
13 A. Unless otherwise specified herein, all painting work shall be in accordance with MPI "Custom"
14 Grade finish requirements.
15 B. Colors shall be as selected by the Architect from a manufacturer's fuil range of colors.
16 1. Color selection will be based on (five (3) base colors and (three) accent colors (with a
17 maximum of(one (1) deep or bright color). No more than (eight(3) colors will be selected for
18 the entire project and no more than (three (3) colors will be selected in each area. Note that
19 this does not include pre-finished items by others, e.g.flashings, windows, etc.).
20 2. Walls shali be painted the same color within a given area.
21 3. Ceilings (except those having a spray textured coating) shall be painted (white) (the same
22 color as walls).
23 4. Except as noted herein or indicated on the Finish Schedule, walls and ceiling surfaces shall
24 be painted in accordance with the following criteria:
25 a. all areas (except as noted): washable latex eggshell finish over a prime/sealer coat.
25 b. laundry facilities/rooms, public wash/shower/bathrooms, residentiat kitchens and
27 bathrooms and ensuites: (washable latex) (alkyd) over appropriate prime/sealer coat.
28 5. Designated rooms/spaces shall be painted using different colors or more than one color
29 than typical rooms in accordance with Finish Schedule requirements with a minimum of two
30 (2) colors required.
31 6. Doors,frames and trim shall be painted a different color than walls.
32 7. Unless otherwise noted all window frames,trim and sills shall be painted using a semi-gloss
33 finish.
34 2.p6 G�OSS AND aHEE�I RATING
35 A. Paint gloss shall be defined as the sheen rating of applied paint, in accordance with the following
36 MPI values:
37
Gloss Level Description Units @ 60 degrees Units @ 85 degrees
G1 Matte or Flat finish 0 to 5 10 max.
G2 Velvet finish 0 to 10 10 t0 35
G3 Eggshell finish 10 to 25 10 to 35
G4 Satin finish 20 to 35 35 min.
G5 Semi-Gloss finish 35 to 70
G6 Gloss finish 70 to85
G7 High-Gloss finish >85
38
39 B. Gloss level ratings of all painted surtaces shall be as specified herein.
�l0 2.07 I'�C�ESSORY 11flATERIA�S
41 A. Patching Material: Latex filler.
42 B. Fastener Head Cover Material: Latex filler.
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 09 9000 -7 PAINTS AND COATINGS-(NEW CONSTRUCTION)
YELM HIGH SCHOOL.
AG DEF�T. IMPROVEMENTS �--
Y�LM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOV�RN
1 PART 3 E)CECUTIO�1 �
2 3.0� �XAMINA'�'ll7�i
3 A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive Work as instructed by the product manufacturer.
4 B. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any condition
5 that may potentially affect proper application.
6 1. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner
..
7 acceptable to Applicator.
8 C. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions otherwise .
9 detrimental to formation of a durable paint film.
10 D. Starting of painting work will be construed as Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions
11 within any particular area.
12 E. Test shop-applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials.
13 3.02 PREPARATION �
14 A. Surface Appurtenances: Remove or mask electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim,
15 escutcheons, and fittings prior to preparing surfaces or finishing.
16 1. Remove hardware, hardware accessories, machined surfaces, plates, lighting fixtures, and '�
17 similar items in place and not to be finish-painted, or provide surface-applied protection prior .
18 to surface preparation and painting operations. Remove, if necessary,for complete painting
19 of items and adjacent surfaces. Following completion of painting of each space or area, �:,
20 reinstall removed items.
21 B. Surfaces: Correct defects and clean surfaces which affect work of this section. Remove or repair
22 existing coatings that exhibit surface defects. ,�
23 1. Remove oil and grease prior to mechanical cleaning. Program cleaning and painting so that
24 dust and other contaminants from cleaning process will not fall onto wet, newly-painted �.
25 surfaces.
26 C. Marks: Seal with shellac those which may bleed through surface finishes.
27 D. Impervious Surfaces: Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of tetra-sodium phosphate and -
28 bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry.
29 E. Gypsum Board Surtaces to be Painted: Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot prime defects �
30 after repair. �
31 F. Asphalt, Creosote, or Bituminous Surfaces to be Painted: Remove foreign particles to permit
32 adhesion of finishing materials.Apply latex based sealer or primer. �"
33 G. Galvanized Surfaces to be Painted: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with -
34 solvent. Apply coat of etching primer.
35 H. Uncoated Steel and Iron Surtaces to be Painted: Remove grease, mill scale, weld splatter, dirt,
36 and rust.Where heavy coatings of scale are evident, remove by hand wire brushing or
37 sandblasting; clean by washing with solvent. Apply a treatment of phosphoric acid solution,
38 ensuring weld joints, bolts, and nuts are similarly cleaned. Prime paint entire surface; spot prime .
39 after repairs.
40 I. Shop-Primed Steel Surfaces to be Finish Painted: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and
41 rust. Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime
42 bare steel surfaces. Re-prime entire shop-primed item.
43 J. Interior Wood Items to Receive Opaque Finish:Wipe off dust and grit prior to priming. Seat knots,
44 }�itch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after primer has dried;
45 sand between coats. Back prime concealed surfaces before installation.
46 K. Exterior Wood to Receive Opaque Finish: Remove dust, grit, and foreign matter. Seal knots, pitch
47 streaks, and sappy sections. Fill nail holes with tinted exterior caulking compound after prime coat
48 has been applied. Back prime concealed surfaces before installation. �
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 09 9000 - 8 PAINTS AND COATINGS-(NEW CONSTRUCTION) ,.
YELM HIGN SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
Y�LM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERlCKSON MCGOVERN
1 3,03 APP�ICATIOI�
2 A. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3 1. Priming and coats of paint specffied are in addition to shop-priming and surface treatment
4 specified under other sections of work.
5 2. Omit first coat(primer) on metal surtaces which have been shop-primed and touch-up
6 painted, unless otherwise indicated.
7 3. Transition Coat:When a system is called for over a previous coating with which it is not
8 entirely compatible (by either its chemical type or condition), a special type of primer may be
9 required to assure good adhesion and"tying"the new system to the old.
10 4. Prime Coats:Apply prime coat to material which is required to be painted or finished, and
11 which has not been prime coated by others.
12 a. Recoat primed and sealetl surfaces where there is evidence of suction spots or unsealed
13 areas in first coat,to assure a finish coat with no burn-through or other defects due to
14 insufficient sealing.
15 5. Spot Priming: Items that have been factory primed or shop primed and are damaged in
16 shipment or during the construction process may require spot priming where indicated in
17 paint schedule. Paint contractor shatl verify that the spot primer specified is compatible with
18 the shop primer applied during the fabrication process.
19 6. Provide finish coats which are compatible with prime paints used.
20 7. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in "schedules" of the contract
21 documents.
22 8. Scheduling Painting:Apply first coat material to surfaces that have been cleaned, retreated or
23 otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before
24 subsequent surface deterioration.
25 a. Allow sufficient time between successive coatings to permit proper drying. Do not recoat
26 until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate
27 thumb pressure, and application of another coat of paint does not cause lifting or loss of
28 adhesion of the undercoat.
29 b. Minimum Coating Thickness:Apply materials at not less than manufacturer's
30 recommended spreading rate,to establish a total dry film thickness as indicated or, if not
31 indicated,as recommended by coating manufacturer.
32 c. Apply additional coats when undercoats, stains or other conditions show through final
33 coat of paint, until paint film is of uniform finish, color and appearance. Give special
34 attention to insure that surfaces, including edges, corners, crevices,welds, and exposed
35 fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces.
36 d. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover to provide an opaque, smooth surface
37 of uniform finish, color, appearance and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps,
38 brush marks, runs,sags, ropiness or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable.
39 e. For painting of cast concrete surfaces that may have areas of imperfection, (i.e.)form
40 lines, rock pockets, etc., either spray paint or brush out these rough areas to assure total
41 surface coverage.
42 f. Vary color of successive paint and enamel coats to a distinguishable difference but
43 similar to finish coat.
4�1 g. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat.
45 h. Spray Paint Application: Surfaces coated by spraying method shall be backrolled
46 immediately after application to redistribute paint film for a more consistent and even
47 coverage. Leave no evidence of rolling, such as laps, irregularity in texture, skid marks,
48 or other surface imperfections.
49 i. Completed Work: Painter responsible for improper workmanship or misuse of finishing
50 materials; refinish at Painter's expense and leave in first class condition, as approved by
51 Architect. Surtaces damaged after painting and decorating is completed shall be the
52 responsibility of the General Contractor and repaired at General Contractor's expense to
53 condition approved by Architect.
2012-37!YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 09 9000 -9 PAINTS AND COATINGS-(NEW CONSTRUCTION)
YELM HIGH SCHOlJL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMEN'�S ro
�I�L.M COMMUMTY SCHOOLS
ERICKSC�N MCGOVERf�
1 j. Coating application prior to installation: For exterior wood siding, standing and running °"
2 trim, i.e.fascia, rake boards or other miscellaneous type of finish wood trim, apply a coat
3 or primer or stain, dependent upon specified finish,to all surfaces and cut ends which
4 will be concealed after installation. •
5 k. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed
6 surfaces. Paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat •
7 only before final installation of equipment. �
8 I. Paint interior surtaces of ducts,where visible through registers or grilles, with a flat,
g non-specular black paint. u.
10 m. Paint back sides of access panels, and removable or hinged covers to match exposed
11 surfaces. �
12 n. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms and side edges same as exterior faces, unless
13 otherwise indicated.
14 0. For surfaces receiving 2 coats of stain, apply as follows: Initial application method at
15 contractor's discretion. However, the stain is then to be back brushed with flat iron "�
16 brushes to work stain well into the surface of the material. No substitute methods.
17 p. Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce glass smooth surface film of
18 even luster. Provide a finish free of laps, cloudiness, color irregularity, runs, brush marks, ,�„
19 orange peel, nail holes, or other surface imperfections.
20 1) Provide satin finish for final coats, unJess otherwise indicated.
21 B. Two (2) Coat Finish: For applications that are specified to receive (2} two finish coats, apply as
�<
22 follows:
23 1. The first coat shall be applied at a 50%tinting of the color selected. .-
24 2. Architect or Owner shall be contacted between coats to verify and approve first application.
25 3. The second coat shall be applied at a 100%tinting of the color selected. �
26 C. Where adjacent sealant is to be painted,do not apply finish coats until sealant is applied. ,.�
27 D. Do not apply finishes to surtaces that are not dry.Allow applied coats to dry before next coat is
28 applied. �
29 E, Apply each coat to uniform appearance. Apply each coat of paint slightly darker than preceding
30 coat unless otherwise approved.
31 F. Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just prior to �"
32 applying next coat. ,�
33 G. Substrate defects shall be made good and sanded by others ready for painting particularly after
34 the first coat of paint. Start of finish painting of effective surfaces (e.g. gypsum board) shall indicate �
35 acceptance of substrate and any costs of making good defects shall be borne by the painter
36 including re-painting of entire defective surface (no touch-up painting). `"
37 H. Sand, clean, dry, etch, neutralize and/or test all surfaces under adequate illumination, ventilation ,�
38 and temperature requirements.
39 I. Do not paint unless substrates are acceptable and/or until all environmental conditions (heating,
40 ventilation, lighting and completion of other subtrade work) are acceptable for applications of y
41 products.
42 J. Apply paint or stain in accordance with MPI Painting Manual Premium Grade finish requirements. -
43 K. Apply paint and decorating material in a workmanlike manner using skilled and trade qualified
44 applicators as noted under Quality Assurance.
45 L. Apply paint and coatings within an appropriate time frame after cleaning when environmental
46 conditions encourage flash-rusting, rusting, contamination or the manufacturer's paint
47 specifications require earlier applications. ¶
48 M. Painting coats specified are intended to cover surfaces satisfactorily when applied at proper
49 consistency and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
50 N. Tint each coat of paint progressively lighter to enable confirmation of number of coats. �
2012-37/YCS Agricuttural Dept Improvernents 09 9000- 10 PAINTS AND COATINGS-(NEW CONSTRUCTION)
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
`l�ELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 O. Unless otherwise approved by the painting inspection agency,apply a minimum of four coats of
2 paint where deep or bright colors are used to achieve satisfactory results.
3 P. Sand and dust between each coat to provide an anchor for next coat and to remove defects visible
4 from a distance up to 1000 mm (39").
5 Q. Do not apply finishes on surfaces that are not sufficiently dry. Unless manufacturer's directions
6 state otherwise, each coat shall be suificiently dry and hard before a following coat is applied.
7 R. Prime coat of stain or varnish finishes may be reduced in accordance with manufacturer's
S directions.
9 S. Paint finish shall continue through behind all wall mounted items (e.g. chalk and tack boards).
10 3A4 �INiSH1NG MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMEN�
11 A. Unless otherwise specified or noted, paint all "unfinished"conduits, piping, hangers, ductwork and
12 other mechanical and electrical equipment with color and texture to match adjacent surfaces, in
13 the following areas:
14 1. Where exposed-to-view in all exterior and interior areas. (Unless noted otherwise.
15 2. In all interior high humidity interior areas.
16 3. In all boiler room, mechanical and electrical rooms.
17 B. In unfinished areas leave exposed conduits, piping, hangers, ductwork and other mechanical and
18 electrical equipment in original finish and touch up scratches and marks.
19 C. Touch up scratches and marks on factory painted finishes and equipment with paint as supplied by
20 manufacturer of equipment.
21 D. Do not paint over nameplates.
22 E. Paint the inside of all ductwork where visible behind louvers, grilles and diffusers for a minimum of
23 460 mm (18") or beyond sight line, whichever is greater, with primer and one coat of matt black
24 (non-reflecting) paint.
25 F. Paint the inside of light valances gloss white.
26 G. Paint disconnect switches for fire alarm system and exit light systems in red enamel.
27 H. Paint[yellow] or band all natural gas piping in accordance with mechanical specification
28 requirements.
29 I. Backprime and paint face and edges of plywood service panels for telephone and electrical
30 equipment before installation (gray, semi-gloss) (to match adjacent wall surface). Leave equipment
31 in original finish except for touch-up as required, and paint conduits, mounting accessories and
32 other unfinished items.
33 J. Paint (exterior steel electrical iight standards). Do not paint outdoor transformers and substation
34 equipment.
35 K. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed
36 prior to finishing.
37 3.05 P�ELD QUA�1�'Y CUNT�3l�L
38 A. All surfaces, preparation and paint applications shall be inspected.
39 B. Painted surfaces shall be considered to lack uniformity and soundness if any of the following
40 defects are apparent to the Painting Inspection Agency inspector:
41 1. Runs, sags, hiding or shadowing by inefficient application methods.
42 2. Evidence of poor coverage at rivet heads, plate edges, lap joints, crevices, pockets, corners
43 and re-entrant angles.
44 3. Damage due to touching before paint is sufficiently dry or any other contributory cause.
45 4. Damage due to application on moist surfaces or caused by inadequate protection from the
46 weather.
47 5. Damage and/or contamination of paint due to windblown contaminants {dust, sand blast
48 materials, salt spray, etc.).
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 09 9000- 11 PAINTS AND COATINGS-(NEW CONSTRUCTION)
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS �.
YE�M CC?MMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 C. Painted surtaces rejected by the inspector shall be made good at the expense of the Contractor. "°
2 Small affected areas may be touched up; large affected areas or areas without sufficient dry film
3 thickness of paint shall be repainted. Runs, sags of damaged paint shall be removed by scraper or
4 by sanding prior to application of paint.
5 D. Protection:
6 1. Protect all newly painted exterior surfaces from rain and snow, condensation, contamination,
7 dust,salt spray and freezing temperatures until p"aint coatings are completeiy dry. Curing y
8 periods shall exceed the manufacturer's recommended minimum time requirements.
g 2. Erect barriers or screens and post signs to warn of or limit or direct traffic away or around
10 work area as required.
11 3.06 +CLEAN�iVG �
12 A. Collect waste material which may constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and -
13 remove daily from site.
14 B. Clean-Up: u�
15 1. Remove all paint where spilled, splashed, splattered or sprayed as work progresses using ,..
16 means and materials that are not detrimental to affected surfaces.
17 2. During progress of work, remove from site discarded paint materials, rubbish, cans and rags �_
18 at end of each work day.
19 3. Upon completion of painting work, clean window glass and other paint spattered surfaces. �`
20 Remove spattered paint by proper methods of washing and scraping, using care not to
21 scratch or otherwise damage finished surfaces. �
22 4. Keep work area free from an unnecessary accumulation of tools, equipment, surplus u�
23 materials and debris.
24 5. Remove combustible rubbish materials and empty paint cans each day and safely dispose of �.
25 same in accordance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
26 6. Clean equipment and dispose of wash water/solvents as well as all other cleaning and `�°
27 protective materials (e.g. rags, drop cloths, masking papers, etc.), paints,thinners, paint
28 removers/strippers in accordance with the `�
29 7. Safety requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. „,
30 8. Repainting of Existing Finishes:
31 a. Refer to MPI Maintenance Repainting Manual and Section 09 9005 for repainting of �.�
32 existing finishes.
33 b. Use finish coat of respective new surface paint system for minor repair of existing `�`
34 finishes. Use system primer where existing finishes are damaged down to bare surface.
�,
35 C. Protection: Protect work of other trades, whether to be painted or not,against damage by painting
36 and finishing work. Correct any damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as }
37 acceptable to Architect.
38 1. Provide "Wet Paint°signs as required to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary �"
39 protective wrappings provided by others for protection of their work, after completion of
40 painting operations.
41 2. At completion of work of other trades,touch-up and restore all damaged or defaced painted �
42 surfaces.
43 3.07 SCH��U�E -SURFAC�S TO BE FiNISHED
44 A. Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items:
45 1. Items fully factory-finished unless specifically noted.
46 2. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels. ~
47 B. Paint the surfaces described below under Schedule- Paint Systems.
48 C. Mechanical and Electrical: Use paint systems defined for the substrates to be finished.
49 1. Paint all insulated and exposed pipes occurring in finished areas to match background
50 surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
51 2. Paint shop-primed items occurring in finished areas. �"
2012-37/YCS Agricuftural Dept Improvements 09 9000 - 12 PAINTS AND COATINGS-(NEW CONSTRUCTION) .
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEP7. lMPROVEMENTS
�fELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 3. Paint interior surfaces of air ducts and convector and baseboard heating cabinets that are
2 visible through grilles and louvers with one coat of flat black paint to visible surfaces.
3 4. Paint dampers exposed behind louvers, grilles, and convector and baseboard cabinets to
4 match face panels.
5 3.0� SC�IEDULE-PAINT SYSTEMS
6 A. Exterior Paint and Coating Systems:
7 1. Paint EXTERIOR surfaces in accordance with the following MPI Painting Manual
8 requirements:
9 a. Galvanized Metal: (doors and frames)
10 1) EXT 5.3B Alkyd finish.
11 (a) Coats:
12 (1) Spot Prime
13 (2) Alkyd Anti-Corrosive Primer/1 Coat/Product-#79
14 (3) Silicone Alkyd Enamel (with Industrial Base Solvent Colorant#844) (G-6)
15 /2 Coats/Product-#94
16 b. Dimension Lumber: (columns, beams, exposed joists, underside of decking, siding,
17 fencing, etc.)
18 1) EXT 6.2A- Latex finish (over alkyd primer).
19 (a) Coats:
20 (1) Solvent Based Primer/ 1 Coat/Product-#5
21 (2) Semi-Gloss Waterborne Finish/2 Coats/Product#11
22 2. Note The Following For Exterior Paint:
23 a. Downspouts: Shall be painted out same color as their background. PVC downspouts
24 painting preparations: Fine sand to degloss and provide tooth. Provide one coat primer,
25 ICI Devoe, Devguard #4160, or equivalent and two finish coats 100% acrylic satin
26 enamel. (Tint primer coat similar to top coat for best hide).
27 b. Paintout:All miscellaneous mechanical,vents, louvers, or other detail against brick will
28 receive a brick matching paint; all similar items against neutral walls shall paint out as
29 required USING APPROPRIATE PRODUCT FOR SURFACE TYPE. No metal or other
30 surfaces requiring special paint will be accepted if painted with improper product (e.g.
31 latex over unprimed metal).
32 c. Spot prime afl factory or shop primed items damaged in shipment or installation with
33 primer compatible to existing primer and top coats.
34 B. Interior Paint and Coating Systems:
35 1. Paint iNTERIOR surfaces in accordance with the following MPI Painting IManual
36 requirements:
37 a. Galvanized Metal: (doors,frames, railings, miscellaneous. steel, pipes, overhead
38 decking,ducts, etc.)
39 1) INT 5.3C -Alkyd finish (over cementitious primer).
40 (a) Coats:
41 (1) Cementitious Primer/ 1 Coat/Product-#26
42 (2) Alkyd—Semi-Gloss Finish Coat/2 Coats/Product#47
43 b. Metal: (doors and frames;vision panel frames)
44 1) INT 5.3A- Latex finish.
45 (a) Coats:
46 (1) Spot Prime
47 (2) Solvent Base Corrosion Resistant. Primer/1 Coat/Product-#76
48 (3) Acrylic Enamel—Semi-Gloss Finish Coat/2 Coats/Product#54 (see
49 Note 1)
50 c. Pre-Primed Metal: (miscetlaneous. framing, smoke hatches, roof scuttle, steel trusses,
51 steel deck, etc.)
52 1) INT 5.3C-Alkyd finish (over waterborne primer).
53
2012-37/YCS Agricuftural Dept Improvements 09 9000- 13 PAINTS AND COATINGS-(NEW CONSTRUCTION)
YELiIA HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEP7. IMPROVEMENTS �.
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON iIflCGOVERN
1 (a) Coats: �
2 (1) Spot Prime
3 (2) Alkyd Metal Primer/ 1 Coat/Product-#76
4 (3) Alkyd Enamel—Gloss Finish Coat/2 Coats/Product#48 A
5 d. Dimension Lumber: (columns, beams, exposed joists, etc.)
6 1) INT 6.2D- Latex finish (over latex primer).
7 (a) Coats: �
g (1) Latex Primer/ 1 Coat/Product-#39
g (2) Acrylic Enamel—Semi-Gloss Finish/2 Coats/Product#54 (see Note 1) �
10 e. Dimension Lumber: (wood trusses and underside of decking, etc.)
11 1) INT 6.2J - Polyurethane varnish finish (over stain). �
12 (a) Coats: r.
13 (1) Uniforming Sealer/ 1 Coat/Product-#102 (see Note 2)
14 (2) Penetrating Semi-Transparent Stain/ 1 Coat/Product-#90 �.
�5 (3) Fast Drying—Varnish Finish/2 Coats/Product#56
16 f. Dressed (Painted) Lumber: (including, door and window frames, casings, molding,
17 running wood trim etc.)
18 1) INT 6.3T- Latex finish (over latex primer) �°
19 (a) Coats: ,
20 (1) Latex Primer/ 1 Coat/Product-#39
21 (2) Acrylic Enamel—Semi-Gloss Finish/2 Coats/Product#54 (see Note 1) �,
22 g. Plaster and Gypsum Board Surfaces: (gypsum wallboard, drywall, "sheet rock type
23 material", etc., and textured finishes) m°
24 1) INT 9.2A- Latex finish (over la#ex sealer).
25 (a) Coats �
26 (1) Waterborne Primer Sealer/ 1 Coat/Product-#50. Coordinate with
27 Gypsum Board Assemblies (drywall) contractor for application of primer
28 coat prior to the application of wall board texture. Primer coat prior to �;
29 texture is to be provide by this Section.
30 (2) Waterborne Primer Sealer/ 1 Coat/Product-#50.Applied after texture ��
31 application.
32 (3) Acrylic—Semi-Gloss Finish/2 Coats/Product#54 (see IVote 1) �'
33 2. Interior Schedule Notes: ,_
34 a. Note 1 -Vllhen product#52 or#54 is specified for use, provide ICI "Dulux Pro Acrylic
35 Enamel", Kelly-Moore "1680 Series—Dura-Poxy Acrylic", or approved product �
36 equivalent in performance, i.e. excetlent adhesion qualities, rapid curing and drying,
37 scrub ability and exceptional stain and abrasion resistance. �
38 b. Note 2- Uniforming Sealer: Three pounds cut clear shellac reduced nine parts
39 denatured alcohol to one part shellac. After all wood surfaces to be stained are totally �
40 prepared,spread one uniform thin coat over all surtaces. (Do not over saturate surface.) �
41 c. General Note For Interior Paint:
42 1) Exposed Piping: All exposed piping including sprinkler piping shall be painted. One �,
43 coat Alkyd Rust-lnhibitive Primer and two coats Alkyd Enamel. Premium Grade.
44 Color as selected by Architect. -
45 3.09 PAsINT RECm�3DS �EG1l91REMENTS
46 A. The painting contractor shall maintain, keep current and in good condition through the duration of `
47 the job, all drawings and schedules indicating specified products and their locations of application.
48 These records shall be returned to the Owner, through the Architect, at the end of the job to
49 facilitate future building maintenance.
50 B. Because the painting contractor may prefer to use a different paint manufacturer (requiring the
51 ArchitecYs approval)from the one specified, he is required to fill out the PAINT PRODUCTS
52 SCHEDULE to indicate the alternate manufacturer and product number. (See sample below.)
2012-371 YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 09 9000- 14 PAINTS AND COATINGS-(NEW CONSTRUCTION)
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELIIA COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 C. Also,when a scheduled color is to be used in more than one paint type, i.e. on wood, metal or
2 concrete,the requested information shall be filled in on the PAINT PRODUCTS SCHEDULE in the
3 spaces provided below the'"scheduled color/material" listed. (See sample below.)
4 D. See attached "Paint Record Schedule"following this Section.
5 END OF SECTION
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 09 9000 - 15 PAINTS AND COATINGS-{NEW CONSTRUCTION)
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNlTIf SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERid
1 SECTION 09 9005
2 PAiId�S AND COATINGS- (EXiS'TING�TRUCTURES)
3 PART '1 G�idERAL
� 1.01 DESCFiIPT10N OF WORK
5 A. Extent of Painting:
6 1. As scheduled and indicated on the drawings,or unless noted otherwise, painted, and finished
7 as described in the following contents of this Section 09 9005, even if not noted for specified
S in the Room Finish Schedule. Exceptions to this rule are natural finishes of materials
9 specifically noted below in paragraph "Surfaces Not To Be Painted."
10 a. Where surfaces and materials have not been scheduled or noted for paint finish, paint
11 with similar material and number of coats as on similarly scheduled or noted surface.
12 b. Surtace preparation, priming and coats of paint specified are in addition to shop-priming
13 and surface treatment specified under other sections of work.
14 B. Accent Painting:
15 1. Approximately 15%or less of total area will consist of"medium to deep colors"which may
16 require one additional coat above those specified for custom or premium finishes. This accent
17 is in addition to any accent specified in graphics application.
18 C. Mechanical and Electrical: Shall be as specified in Division 15 and 16 with the exception of the
19 following items at the following locations:
20 1. Primary occupied spaces, i.e. classrooms, offices, corridors,toilets, assembly areas, etc.
21 a. Duetwork:All exposed ductwork and supports shall be painted to match ceiling unless
22 noted otherwise. One (1) prime and iwo (2)finish coats.
23 b. Electric Panels, Fuse Boxes, Equipment Boxes: Shall be heavily sanded to provide tooth
24 for application of 2 coats of industrial enamel to match the adjoining wall color.
25 c. Miscellaneous Items: Conduit, plug mold, wire mold,vents, grilles, miscellaneous pipe
26 and any other miscellaneous mechanical or electrical items. Minimum of 2 coats of
27 enamel or 1 primer and 1 finish. Color to match adjoining wall or ceiling color.
28 D. Surfaces Not To Be Painted:
29 1. Pre-Finished Items: Unless otherwise indicated, do not include painting when factory-finishing
30 or installer finishing is specified for such items as (but not limited to) roofing, brick, glass,
31 plastic laminate toilet enclosures, acoustic materials, architectural woodwork and casework,
32 and finish mechanical and electrical squipment, including sprinkler heads, light fixtures,
33 switchgear and distribution cabinets.
34 2. Concealed Surfaces: Unless otherwise indicated, painting is not required on surfaces such as
35 walls or ceilings in concealed areas and generally inaccessible areas,foundation spaces,
36 furred areas, utility tunnels, pipe spaces, duct shafts and elevator shafts.
37 3. Finished Metal Surfaces: Unless otherwise indicated, metal surfaces of anodized aluminum,
38 stainless steel, chromium plate, copper, bronze and similar finished materials wil( not require
39 finish painting.
40 4. Operating Parts: Unless otherwise indicated, moving parts of operating units, mechanical and
41 electrical parts,such as valve and damper operators, linkages, sensing devices, motor and
42 fan shafts will not require finish painting.
43 5. Do not paint over any code required labels, such as Underwriters' Laboratories and Factory
44 Mutual, or any equipment identification, pertormance rating, name, or nomenclature plates.
45 E. Following categories of work are included under other sections of these specifications.
46 1. Shop Priming: Unless otherwise specified, shop priming of ferrous metal items is included
47 under various sections for structural steel, metal fabrications, hollow metal work and similar
48 items.
49 2. Unless otherwise specified, shop priming of fabricated components such as architectural
50 woodwork, wood casework and shop fabricated or factory built mechanical and electrical
51 equipment or accessories is included under other sections of these specifications.
2012-37/YCS Agriculiural Dept Improvements 09 9005- 1 PAINTS AND COATINGS-(EXISTING STRUCTURES)
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS �
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
EI31CKS4N MGGOVERN
1 1.02 SECT10�9 �iV�LUDES y
2 A. Surface preparation to existing structures.
3 B. Field application of paints and other coatings to existing structures.
4 C. All labor, materials,tools and other equipment, services and supervision required to complete all
5 interior and exterior pa+nting and decorating work as indicated on Finish Schedules and to the full
6 extent of the drawings and specifications.
7 D. �Nork under this contract shall also include, but not necessarily be limited to:
8 1. Moisture testing of substrates.
9 2. Surface preparation of substrates as required for acceptance of painting, including cleaning,
10 small crack repair, patching, caulking, and making good surfaces and areas to the limits �
11 defined under MPI preparation requirements.
12 3. Surface preparation and prime painting surfaces for wall coverings prior to installation. In
13 accordance with MPl and wall covering manufacturer's requirements. �
14 4. Specific pre-treatments noted herein or specified in the MPI Architectural Painting
15 Specffication ManuaL �
16 5. Priming (except where pre-primed with an approved primer under other Sections of work) and
17 painting of structural steel, miscellaneous metal, ornamental metal and primed steel �
18 equipment. y
19 6. Priming and back-priming of wood materials as noted herein or specified in the MPI
20 Architectural Painting Specification Manual.
21 7. Painting of all semi-concealed areas (e.g. inside of light troughs and valances, behind grilles, "�
22 and projecting edges above and below sight lines). ��
23 8. Painting of exposed to view mechanical (heating, ventilating and plumbing) services and
24 equipment, (e.g., ducts,sprinkler piping, etc.), and electrical work to extent noted on Finish �
25 Schedule unless pre-finished.
26 9. Provision of safe and adequate ventilation as required over and above temporary ventilation "'
27 supplied by others,where toxic and/or volatile/flammable materials are being used.
28 10. Refer to drawings and schedules (e.g., Finish Schedule)for type, location and extent of �'
29 finishes required, and include all touch-ups and field painting necessary to complete work �,
30 shown, scheduled or spec'rfied.
31 11. This Section along with the drawings forms part of the Contract documents and is to be read, »,h
32 interpreted and coordinated with all other parts.
33 12. Provisions for 2 coat systems.
34 a. The first coat shall be applied at a 50%tinting of the color selected �
35 E. Records of Paints Used: Contractor shall retain in good condition all paint schedules, marked
36 plans and paint samples used for job quality and color control.These are to be turned over to the -
37 Owner at the end of the job.
38 1. COLOR SCHEDULES which are provided to the Contractor are frequently, due to the `°
39 Contractor's preference of paint supplier, "crossed over"with colors being matched by
40 another paint supplier (other than the supplier whose colors were specified).
41 2. Since it is not possible to predict what supplier and therefore which product numbers will be �:
42 used to complete a job,the color schedule (master) has extra blanks under each color for the
43 insertion of product information which must be supplied by the paint contractor when a
44 scheduled color may have to be mixed in more than one product type to paint different
45 surfaces.
46 3. For example:Walls are scheduled to be painted color "x". If inetal louvers set in these waNs
47 require a different product type other than the type scheduled for the walls, use the blank
48 space under"x" in the schedule to record the paint product and its number, thereby
49 facilitating the Owner's purchase of the proper product when maintenance is required.
50 4. See sample at end of this section.
2012-37/YCS Agricuftural Dept Improvements 09 9005-2 PAINTS AND COATINGS-(EXISTING STRUCTURES)
YELIIA iiIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSOId MCGOVERN
1 1 A3 R�L,faTE�SE�TtONS
2 A. Unless otherwise noted,the foflowing work or conditions are not included under th.is Section of
3 work:
4 1. Section 01 5000 -Temporary Facilities and Controls (temporary heat, Iighting, scaffolds, etc.).
5 2, Division 22 and 23- Mechanical (painting,stenciling, banding of inechanical systems).
6 3. Division 26- Electrical (painting, stenciling, banding of electrical systems).
7 1.04 REFEREIVCES
8 A. Except as hereinafter specified,for materials and workmanship, conform to the "Architectural
g Painting Specification Manual" hereinafter referred to as"MPI,"as published by The Masters
10 Painters and Decorators Association.
11 B. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D- National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural
12 Coatings; U.S. Environmental Protection Agency; current edition.
13 C. ASTM D 16- Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials, and Applications; 2003.
14 1.05 DE�iNITIONS
15 A. Conform to MPI and ASTM D 16 for interpretation of terms used in this section.
16 1.OS SUBiIAiTfALS
�.7 A. See Section 01 3000-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures.
18 B. Product Data: Provide data on all finishing products, including VOC content.
19 C. Samples: Submit three painted samples, illustrating selected colors and textures for each color
20 and system selected with specified coats cascaded. Submit on index weight paper stock, 8 1/2x11
21 inch �_x mm) in size.
22 D. Samples for wood surtaces: Samples for surfaces to be stained or clear finished shall be submitted
23 on no less than 6 inch lengths of material representative of the surface to be stained and/or clear
24 coated.
25 1. Three samples required.
26 E. Submit two sets of Materiat Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) prior to commencement of work for review
27 and for posting at job site as required.
28 F. When painting occupied areas,submit work schedule for various stages of work for the
29 Consultant's review and Owner's approval if requested.
30 G. At project completion provide an itemized list complete with manufacturer, paint type and color
31 coding for all colors used for Owner's later use in maintenance. See Paint Record Requirements at
32 the end of this Section.
33 H. At project completion provide properly packaged maintenance materials as noted herein and
34 obtain a signed receipt.
35 1 A7 QUA�ITY ASSI�FiAMCE
36 A. This Contractor shall have a minimum of five (5) years proven satisfactory experience and shall
37 show proof before commencement of work that he will maintain a qualified crew of painters
38 throughout the duration of the work.When requested, Contractor shall provide a Iist of the last
39 three comparable jobs including, name and location, specifying authority/project manager, start/
40 completion dates and vafue of the painting work.
41 B. Only qualified journeymen who have a Tradesman Qualification Certificate of Proficiency shall be
42 engaged in painting and decorating work.Apprentices may be employed provided they work under
43 the direct supervision of a qual'rfied journeyman in accordance with trade regulations.
44 C. All materials, preparation and workmanship shall conform to the standards contained in the latest
45 edition of the Master Painters Institute (MPI)Architectural Painting Spec'rfication Manual (hereafter
46 referred to as the MPI.
47 D. Painting Manual as issued by the local MPI Accredited Quality Assurance Association having
48 jurisdiction.
2012-37/YCS Agricuftural Dept improvements 09 9005 - 3 PAINTS AND COATINGS-(EXISTING STRUCTURES)
YEL�IiI HiGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
Ei�ICKSQN MCGOVER�9
1 E. All paint manufacturers and products used shall be as listed under the l�pproved Product List
2 section of the MPI Painting Manual.
3 F. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES WILL PAINT APP�ICATION BE PERMITTED WITHOUT
4 SPECIFIED SAMPLE APPROVAL.ANY PRODUCT APPLIED WHICH IS NOT ACCORDING TO
5 SPECIFICATIONS AND SIGNED OFF FOR PROPER COLOR WILL BE SUBJECT TO REMOVAL
6 AND REPAINT AT THE CONTRACTOR'S EXPENSE.
7 1.08 RECaI..D�1��'P,3R1(REQUIREMEN7S
8 A. Conform to applicable code for flame and smoke rating requirements for products and finishes.
9 B. Conform to the latest edition of Industrial Health and Safety Regulations issued by applicable
10 authorities having jurisdiction in regard to site safety (ladders,scaffolding, ventilation, etc.). �
11 C. Conform to requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction in regard to the storage, mixing, x
12 application and disposal of all paint related materials.
13 �1.09 MC►GK-l9P '�
14 A. See Section 01 4000-Quality Requirements,for general requirements for mock-up.
15 B. When requested bythe Architect, provide duplicate minimum 300 mm (12") square samples of
16 surfaces or acceptable facsimiles requested painted with specified paint or coating in colors, gloss "
17 /sheen and textures required to MPI Painting Manual standards for review and approval.When
18 approved, samples shall become acceptable standard of quality for appropriate on-site surface
19 with one of each sample retained on-site. ,
20 C. When requested by the Architect, prepare and paint designated surface, area, room or item (in
21 each color scheme)to requirements specified herein, with specified paint or coating showing
22 selected colors, gloss/sheen,textures and workmanship to MPI Painting Manual standards for
23 review and approval. When approved, surface, area, room and/or items shall become acceptable ��
24 standard of finish quality and workmanship for similar on-site work. .-
25 D. Mock-up may remain as part of the Work.
�
26 �.10 D�LIVERY,STf7RAGE,AND PROTECTIOf�
27 A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability. �
28 1. Deliver all painting materials in sealed, original labeled containers bearing manufacturer's
29 name, brand name,type of paint or coating and color designation, standard compliance, �`'
30 materials content as well as mixing and/or reducing and application requirements.
31 B. Container Labef: Include manufacturer's name,type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand code,
32 coverage,surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and
33 instructions for mixing and reducing.
34 C. Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of � and a maximum of�, in ventilated
35 area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions. «�
36 1. Store all paint materials in original labeled containers in a secure (lockable), dry, heated and
37 well ventilated single designated area meeting the minimum requirements of both paint �
38 manufacturer and authorities having jurisdiction and at a minimum ambient temperature of
39 45° F (7° C). Only material used on this project to be stored on site. '�
40 D. Where toxic and/or volatile/explosive/flammable materials are being used, provide adequate
41 fireproof storage lockers and take all necessary precautions and post adequate warnings (e.g. no
42 smoking) as required.
43 E. Take all necessary precautionary and safety measures to prevent fire hazards and spontaneous
44 combustion and to protect the environment from hazard spills. Materials that constitute a fire
45 hazard (paints, solvents, drop clothes, etc.) shall be stored in suitable closed and rated containers �
46 and removed from the site on a daily basis.
47 1,11 �(VVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS �
48 A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature
49 ranges required by the paint product manufacturer.
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 09 90�5 -4 PAINTS AND COATINGS-(EXISTING STRUCTURES) .
YEL.M HIGH SCHOOl.
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELM COI►AMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVER�
1 1. UNLESS specifically pre-approved by the specifying body, (Paint Inspection Agency) and the
2 applied product manufacturer, perform no painting or decorating work when the ambient air
3 and substrate temperatures are below 50° F (10° C)for both interior and exterior work.
4 2. Perform no painting or decorating work unless adequate continuous ventilation and sufficient
5 heating facilities are in place to maintain ambient air and substrate temperatures above
6 minimum requirements for 24 hours before,during and after paint application. Provide
7 supplemental ventilating and heating equipment if ventilation and heating from existing
8 system is inadequate to meet minimum requirements.
9 3. Perform no painting or decorating work when the relative humidity is above 85% or when the
10 dew point is less than 5° F (3°C) variance between the air/surface temperature.
11 4. Perform no painting or decorating work when the maximum moisture content of the substrate
12 exceeds:
13 a. 12%for concrete and masonry(clay and concrete brick/block).
14 b. 15%for wood.
15 c. 12%for plaster and gypsum board.
16 5. Conduct all moisture tests using a properly calibrated electronic Moisture Meter, except test
17 concrete floors for moisture using a simple cover patch test.
18 6. Test concrete, masonry and plaster surfaces for alkalinity as required.
19 7. Apply paint only to dry, clean, properly cured and adequately prepared surfaces in areas
20 where dust is no longer generated by construction activities such that airborne particles wifl
21 not affect the quality of finished surfaces.
22 8. Perform no painting or decorating work unless a minimum lighting level of 323 Lux (30 foot
23 candles) is provided on surfaces to be painted or decorated.Adequate lighting facilities shall
24 be provided by the General Contractor.
25 B. Provide lighting level of 80 ft. candles (860 Ix) measured mid-height at substrate surface.
26 1.12 SCHE'DIJ�ING
27 A. Schedule painting operations to prevent disruption of and by other trades.
28 B. Schedule painting operations to prevent disruption of occupants in and about the building. Obtain
29 written authorization from Consultant/Owner for changes in work schedule.
30 C. Painting in occupied facilities to be carried out during hours in accordance with Owner's operating
31 requirements (during silent hours) (on weekends). Schedule work such that painted surfaces will
32 have dried before occupants are affected.
33 D. Phasing of work shall be in accordance with the requirements of Section 01 1000 -Summary of
34 Work.
35 1.13 E�TFiA MAT�RIA�LS
36 A. See Section 01 7800 - Product Requirements,for additional provisions.
37 B. Supply 1 gallon (�l L) of each; store where directed.
38 1. At project completion provide 4 liters {1 gallon) of each type and color of paint from same
39 production run (batch mix) used in unopened cans, properly labeled and identified for
40 Owner's later use in maintenance. Store where directed.
41 C. Label each container with color in addition to the manufacturer's label.
42 PA�tT 2 PRODi�CTS
43 2.01 I�AA�IU�A�'��JRERS
44 A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following or approved:
45 1. Benjamin Moore
4b 2 tCl Dulux
47 3. Parker Paint
48 4. Sherwin-Williams
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 09 9005- 5 PAINTS AND GOATINGS-(EXISTING STRUCTURES)
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS r-
YE�N] COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVER�9
1 B. Unless otherwise specified conform to Standards of MPI for materials;this includes paint,varnish, °
2 stain, enamel, lacquer,fillers and related paint products and materials not specifically indicated,
3 but required for prime,intermediate and finish coats.
4 C. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements. �
5 2.02 PAINTS AND COATINGS-GENERAL.
6 A. Paints and Coatings: Ready mixed, except field-catalyzed coatings. Prepare pigments:
7 1. To a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to a °-
g homogeneous coating.
9 2. For good flow and brushing properties.
10 3. Capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags. <.
11 B. Materials
12 1. All materials (primers, paints, coatings,varnishes,stains, lacquers,fillers,thinners, solvents,
13 etc.) shall be in accordance with the MPI Painting Manual Approved Product listing and shall
14 be from a single manufacturer for each system used.
15 2. Other paint materials such as linseed oil,shellac, etc. shall be the highest quality product of
16 an approved manufacturer listed in the MPI Painting Manual and shall be compatible with
17 other coating materials as required. �`
18 3. All paint materials shall have good flowing and brushing properties and shall dry or cure free
19 of blemishes or sags.
20 4. Where required, paints and coatings shall meet flame spread and smoke developed ratings
21 designated by local Code requirements and/or authorities having jurisdiction.
22 5. Glass Reflective Beads (for pavement marking): of type suitable for application to a wet paint n
23 surface for light reflectance. Apply beads at a minimum rate of 0.5 kg/me (5 Ibs./g)to a white
24 and/or yellow latex or alkyd zone/traffic marking paint of approved type as listed in the MPI _
25 Painting ManuaL
26 6. Slip Resistant Additive (SRA): rubber aggregate, clean/washed silica sand or ground walnut °
27 chips (interior dry areas only)for use with or as a component part of paint (usually floor/
28 porch/stair enamel) on horizontal surtaces as required to provide slip resistance. Where site '�
29 applied, material to either mixed into paint(and mixed constantly to keep material in ,.
30 suspension) or broadcast into first or prime coat as required.
31 C. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content: "�`
32 1. Provide coatings that comply with the most stringent requirements specified in the following: .
33 a. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D--National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for
34 Architectural Coatings.
35 2. Determination of VOC Content:Testing and calculation in accordance with 40 CFR 59,
36 Subpart D (EPA Method 24), exclusive of colorants added to a tint base and water added at �
37 project site; or other method acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
38 D. Chemical Content: The following compounds are prohibited: �
39 1. Aromatic Compounds: In excess of 1.0 percent by weight of total aromatic compounds �
40 (hydrocarbon compounds containing one or more benzene rings).
41 2. Acrolein, acrylonitrile, antimony, benzene, butyl benzyl phthalate, cadmium, di (2-ethylhexyl) �
42 phthalate, di-n-butyl phthalate, di-n-octyl phthalate, 1,2-dichlorobenzene, diethyl phthalate,
43 dimethyl phthalate, ethylbenzene,formaldehyde, hexavalent chromium, isophorone, lead, �
44 mercury, methyl ethyl ketone, methyl isobutyl ketone, methylene chloride, naphthalene,
45 toluene (methylbenzene), 1,1,1-trichloroethane,vinyl chloride. '�
46 2.�3 EGtUIPiNEMT
47 A. Painting and Decorating Equipment:to best trade standards for type of product and application.
48 B. Spray Painting Equipment: of ample capacity, suited to the type and consistency of paint or
49 coating being applied and kept clean and in good working order at all times. -
2012-37/YCS Agricuttural Dept Improvements 09 9005 -6 PAINTS AND COATINGS-(EXISTING STRUCTURES)
YELIN HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
Y�LM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSt?N MCGOVERN
1 2.Ik� 11�IXIi�G AND�"INTI�IG
2 A. Unless otherwise specified herein or pre-approved, all paint shall be ready-mixed and pre-tinted.
3 Re-mix all paint in containers prior to and during application to ensure break-up of lumps, complete
4 dispersion of settled pigment, and color and gloss uniformity.
5 B. Paste, powder or catalyzed paint mixes shall be mixed in strict accordance with manufacturer's
6 written instructions.
7 C. Where thinner is used, addition shall not exceed paint manufacturer's recommendations. Do not
8 use kerosene or any such organic solvents to thin water-based paints.
9 D. Thin paint for spraying according in strict accordance with paint manufacturer's instructions. If
10 directions are not on container, obtain instructions in writing from manufacturer and provide copy
11 of instructions to Consultant.
12 2.05 �INISW AND�OLORS
13 A. Unless otherwise specified herein, all painting work shall be in accordance with MPI "Custom"
14 Grade finish requirements.
15 B. Colors shall be as selected by the Architect from a manufacturer's full range of colors.
16 1. Color selection will be based on (five (5) base colors and (three) accent colors (with a
17 maximum of (one (1) deep or bright color). No more than (eight(S) colors will be selected for
18 the entire project and no more than (three (3j colors will be selected in each area. Note that
19 this does not include pre-finished items by others, e.g.flashings, windows, etc.).
20 2. Interior colors and/or patterns shall be consistent (throughout each unit) with two (2) or three
21 (3) separate schemes prepared.Allow for a minimum of three (3) exterior colors for fascia,
22 trims, doors and frames.
23 3. Walls shall be painted the same color within a given area.
24 4. Ceilings (except those having a spray textured coating)shall be painted (white) (the same
25 color as walls).
26 5. Except as noted herein or indicated on the Finish Schedule, walls and ceiling surfaces shall
27 be painted in accordance with the following criteria:
28 6. all areas (except as noted): washable latex eggshell finish over a prime/sealer coat.
29 7. Designated rooms/spaces shall be painted using different colors or more than one color
30 than typical rooms in accordance with Finish Schedule requirements with a minimum of two
31 (2) colors required.
32 8. (Doors shall be painted a different color than door frames and trim with walls a different color
33 than either) (Doors,frames and trim shall be painted a different color than walls) (the same
34 color as walls). Unless othenrvise noted all doors,frames and trim shall be painted using a
35 semi=gloss finish.
36 9. Provide a slip resistant additive to interior painted floor where noted on the Finish Schedule or
37 where required by authorities having jurisdiction. In addition, provide tactile warning using a
38 slip resistant
39 2.OS GLOSS A�ND SHEE�I RAT1�1G
40 A. Paint gloss shall be defined as the sheen rating of applied paint, in accordance with the following
41 MPI values:
42
Gloss Level Description Units @ 60 degrees Units @ 85 degrees
G1 Matte or Flat finish 0 to 5 10 max.
G2 Velvet finish 0 to 10 10 t0 35
G3 Eggshell finish 10 to 25 10 to 35
G4 Satin finish 20 to 35 35 min.
G5 Semi-Gloss finish 35 to 70
G6 Gloss finish 70 to85
G7 High-Gloss finish >85
43
2012-371 YCS Agricuftural Dept Improvements 09 9005- 7 PAINTS AND COATINGS-(EXISTING STRUCTURES)
�;
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YE�LiIfl COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
E�tICKSON MCGOVERN
1 B. Gloss levei ratings of all painted surfaces shall be as specified herein.
2 2.07 lACCESSOFdY N1A3'ERIAL� "
3 A. Patching MateriaL• Latex filler. �,
4 B. Fastener Head Cover Material: Latex filler.
5 6�AR�"3 EXECUTlO�f
6 3.09 EXANIINATION �'
7 A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive Work as instructed by the product manufacturer. ,
8 B. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any condition
9 that may potentially affect proper application.
10 1. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner
11 acceptable to Applicator.
12 C. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions otherwise �
13 detrimental to formation of a durable paint film.
14 D. Starting of painting work will be construed as Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions �
15 within any particular area. ,�-
16 E. Test shop-applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials.
17 F. The degree of surface deterioration (DSD) shall be assessed using the assessment criteria
18 indicated in the MPI Maintenance Repainting Manual. In generai the MPI - DSD ratings and �;,
19 descriptions are as follows:
CONDITION DESCRIPTION °
DSD-0 Sound Surtace (may include visual (aesthetic) defects
that do not affect film's protective properties). �
DSD-1 Slightly Deteriorated Surface (may show fading; gloss
reduction, slight surface contamination, minor pin
holes scratches, etc.).
�,
DSD-2 Moderately Deteriorated Surtace (small areas of
peeling,flaking, slight cracking, staining, etc.). �,,
DSD-3 Severely Deteriorated Surface (heavy peeling,flaking,
cracking, checking, scratches,scuffs, abrasion, small ��
holes and gouges).
DSD-4 Substrate Damage (repair or replacement of surface "
required).
20 `�
21 3.02 PF3EPARATION �
22 A. Prepare all exterior and interior surfaces for repainting in accordance with MPI Repainting Manual
��
23 requirements. Refer to the MPI Repainting Manual in regard to specific requirements for the
24 following:
25 1. environmental conditions.
26 2. pH testing. �~
27 3. acid etching.
28 4. rust stain removaL
29 5. mildew removal.
30 6. asphalt surfaces.
31 7. vertical and horizontal concrete surfaces.
32 8. clay and concrete masonry units.
33 9. structural steel and miscellaneous metals. °
34 10. steel exposed to high heat.
35 11. galvanized and zinc coated metaL
36 12. dimension and dressed lumber. �
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 09 9005- 8 PAINTS AND COATINGS-(EXISTING STRUCTURES) �
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AC'a DEPT.IMPROVEMENTS
YELi1il COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 B. Surface Appurtenances: Remove or mask electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim,
2 escutcheons, and fittings prior to preparing surfaces or finishing.
3 1. Remove hardware, hardware accessories, machined surfaces, plates, lighting fixtures, and
4 similar items in place and not to be finish-painted, or provide surtace-applied protection prior
5 to surface preparation and painting operations. Remove, if necessary,for complete painting
6 of items and adjacent surfaces. Following completion of painting of each space or area,
7 reinstall removed items.
8 C. Surfaces: Correct defects and clean surfaces which affect work of this section. Remove or repair
9 existing coatings that exhibit surface defects.
10 1. Remove oil and grease prior to mechanical cleaning. Program cleaning and painting so that
11 dust and other contaminants from cleaning process will not fall onto wet, newly-painted
12 sur�aces.
13 D. Marks: Seal with shetlac those which may bleed through surtace finishes.
14 E. Impervious Surfaces: Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of tetra-sodium phosphate and
15 bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry.
16 F. Concrete and Unit Masonry Surfaces to be Painted: Remove dirt, loose mortar, scale, salt or alkali
17 pov�rder, and other foreign matter. Remove oil and grease with a solution of tri-sodium phosphate;
18 rinse well and allow to dry. Remove stains caused by weathering of corroding metals with a
19 solution of sodium metasilicate after thoroughly wetting with water.Allow to dry.
20 G. Gypsum Board Surfaces to be Painted: Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot prime defects
21 after repair.
22 H. Asphalt, Creosote, or Bituminous Surfaces to be Painted: Remove foreign particles to permit
23 adhesion of finishing materials.Apply latex based sealer or primer.
24 I. Copper Surfaces to be Painted: Remove contamination by steam, high pressure water, or solvent
25 washing.Apply vinyl etch primer immediately following cleaning.
26 J. Galvanized Surfaces to be Painted: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with
27 solvent.Apply coat of etching primer.
28 K. Uncoated Steel and Iron Surtaces to be Painted: Remove grease, mill scale, weld splatter, dirt,
29 and rust.Where heavy coatings of scale are evident, remove by hand wire brushing or
30 sandblasting; clean by washing with solvent. Apply a treatment of phosphoric acid solution,
31 ensuring weld joints, bolts, and nuts are similarly cleaned. Prime paint entire surface; spot prime
32 after repairs.
33 L. Shop-Primed Steel Surfaces to be Finish Painted: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and
34 rust. Featf�er edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime
35 bare steel surfaces. Re-prime entire shop-primed item.
36 3.03 AAPLl�ATION
37 A. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
38 1. Priming and coats of paint specified are in addition to shop-priming and surface treatment
39 specified under other sections of work.
40 2. Omit first coat(primer) on metal surfaces which have been shop-primed and touch-up
41 painted, unless otherwise indicated.
42 3. Transition Coat:When a system is called for over a previous coating with which it is not
43 entirely compatible (by either its chemical type or condition), a special type of primer may be
44 required to assure good adhesion and "tying"the new system to the old.
45 4. Prime Coats:Apply prime coat to material which is required to be painted or finished, and
46 which has not been prime coated by others.
47 a. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where there is evidence of suction spots or unsealed
48 areas in first coat, to assure a finish coat with no burn-through or other defects due to
49 insuificient sealing.
50 5. Spot Priming: Items that have been factory primed or shop primed and are damaged in
51 shipment or during the construction process may require spot priming where indicated in
2012-37/YCS Agricuitural Dept Improvements 09 9005- 9 PAINTS AND COATINGS-(EXISTING STRUCTURES)
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG �1EPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YEL�1 COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 paint schedule. Paint contractor shall verify that the spot primer specified is compatible with �
2 the shop primer applied during the fabrication process.
3 6. Prime coat to be applied prior to and after application of sprayed-on texture (see Section 09
4 2116).
5 7, Provide finish coats which are compatible with prime paints used.
6 8. Paint colors, surtace treatments, and finishes are indicated in "schedules"of the contract
7 documents. m
8 9. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat material to surfaces that have been cleaned, retreated or
9 otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before
10 subsequent surface deterioration.
11 a. Allow sufficient time between successive coatings to permit proper drying. Do not recoat „
12 until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate
13 thumb pressure,and application of another coat of paint does not cause lifting or loss of
14 adhesion of the undercoat.
15 b. Minimum Coating Thickness:Apply materials at not less than manufacturer's �
16 recommended spreading rate,to establish a total dry film thickness as indicated or, if not
17 indicated, as recommended by coating manufacturer.
18 c. Apply additional coats when undercoats, stains or other conditions show through final ,
19 coat of paint, until paint film is of uniform finish, color and appearance. Give special
20 attention to insure that surfaces, including edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed .
21 fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces.
22 d. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover to provide an opaque, smooth surface �°
23 of uniform finish, color, appearance and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps,
24 brush marks, runs,sags, ropiness or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable.
25 e. For painting ofi cast concrete surfaces that may have areas of imperfection, (i.e.)form
26 lines, rock pockets, etc., either spray paint or brush out these rough areas to assure total ��
27 surtace coverage. -
28 f. Vary color of successive paint and enamel coats to a distinguishable difference but
29 similar to finish coat. �`
30 g. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat.
31 h. Spray Paint Application: Surfaces coated by spraying method shall be backrolled
32 immediately after application to redistribute paint film for a more consistent and even
33 coverage. Leave no evidence of rolling, such as laps, irregularity in texture, skid marks, �
34 or other surface imperfections. -t
35 i. Completed Work: Painter responsible for improper workmanship or misuse of finishing
36 materials; refinish at Painter's expense and leave in first class condition, as approved by �-
37 Architect. Surfaces damaged after painting and decorating is completed shall be the
38 responsibility of the General Contractor and repaired at General Contractor's expense to �'
39 condition approved by Architect.
40 j. Paint interior surfaces of ducts, where visible through registers or grilles, with a flat, �
41 non-specular black paint. �
42 k. Paint back sides of access panels, and removable or hinged covers to match exposed
43 surfaces. �°
44 I. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms and side edges same as exterior faces, unless
45 otherwise indicated.
46 8. Two (2) Coat Finish: For applications that are specified to receive (2)two finish coats, apply as k
47 follows:
48 1. The first coat shall be applied at a 50%tinting of the color selected.
49 2. Architect or Owner shall be contacted between coats to verify and approve first application.
50 3. The second coat shall be applied at a 100%tinting of the color selected.
51 C. Where adjacent sealant is to be painted, do not apply finish coats until sealant is applied.
52
2012-37/YCS Agricukural Dept Improvements 09 9005 - 10 PAINTS AND COATINGS-(EXISTING STRUCTURES) �
YELiM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 D. Do not apply finishes to surFaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to.dry before next coat is
2 applied.
3 E. Apply each coat to uniform appearance. Apply each coat of paint slightly darker than preceding
4 coat unless otherwise approved.
5 F. Vacuum clean surfaces af loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just prior to
6 applying next coat.
7 G. Substrate defects shall be made good and sanded by others ready for painting particularly after
8 the first coat of paint. Start of finish painting of effective surfaces (e.g. gypsum board)shall indicate
9 acceptance of substrate and any costs of making good defects shall be borne by the painter
10 including re-painting of entire defective surface (no touch-up painting).
11 H. Sand, clean, dry, etch, neutralize and/or test all surfaces under adequate illumination, ventilation
12 and temperature requirements.
13 I. Do not paint unless substrates are acceptable and/or until all environmental conditions (heating,
14 ventilation, lighting and completion of other subtrade work) are acceptable for applications of
15 products.
16 J. Apply paint or stain in accordance with MPI Painting Manual (Premium) (Custom) Grade finish
17 requirements.
18 K. Apply paint and decorating material in a workmanlike manner using skilled and trade qualified
19 applicators as noted under Quality Assurance.
20 L. Apply paint and coatings within an appropriate time frame after cleaning when environmental
21 conditions encourage flash-rusting, rusting, contamination or the manufacturer's paint
22 specifications require earlier applications.
23 M. Painting coats specified are intended to cover surfaces satisfactorily when applied at proper
24 consistency and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
25 N. Tint each coat of paint progressively lighter to enable confirmation of number of coats.
26 0. Unless otherwise approved by the painting inspection agency, apply a minimum of four coats of
27 paint where deep or bright colors are used to achieve satisfactory results.
28 P. Sand and dust between each coat to provide an anchor for next coat and to remove defects visible
29 from a distance up to 1000 mm (39").
30 Q. Do not apply finishes on surfaces that are not sufficiently dry. Unless manufacturer's directions
31 state otherwise, each coat shall be sufficiently dry and hard before a following coat is applied.
32 3.A4 �iNISHI�dG MECNA�IICAL AND EI.�CI'RICAl.�QUIPMENT
33 A. Unless otherwise specified or noted, paint all "unfinished" conduits, piping, hangers, ductwork and
34 other mechanical and electrical equipment with color and texture to match adjacent surfaces, in
35 the following areas:
36 1. Where exposed-to-viev� in all exterior and interior areas.
37 2. In all interior high humidity interior areas.
38 B. In unfinished areas leave exposed conduits, piping, hangers, ductwork and other mechanical and
39 electrical equipment in original finish and touch up scratches and marks.
40 C. Touch up scratches and marks on factory painted finishes and equipment with paint as supplied by
41 manufacturer of equipment.
42 D. Do not paint over nameplates.
43 E. Paint the inside of all ductwork where visible behind louvers, grilles and diifusers for a minimum of
44 460 mm (18") or beyond sight line, whichever is greater, with primer and one coat of matt black
45 (non-ref(ecting) paint.
46 F. Paint disconnect switches for fire alarm system and exit light systems in red enamel.
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 09 9005 - 11 PAINTS AND COATINGS-{EXISTING STRUCTURES)
YELM HIGH SCHOt?L
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS <
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 G. Paint [yellow] or band all natural gas piping in accordance with mechanical specification
z requirements.
3 H. Backprime and paint face and edges of plywood service panels for telephone and electrical
4 equipment before installation (gray, semi-gloss)(to match adjacent wall surface). Leave equipment =
5 in original finish except for touch-up as required, and paint conduits, mounting accessories and
5 other unfinished items.
7 I. Paint (exterior steel electrical light standards). Do not paint outdoor transformers and substation s
S equipment.
9 J. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed
10 prior to finishing. �
11 3.05 FIELD QI�ALITY CONTROL
12 A. All surfaces, preparation and paint applications shall be inspected.
13 B. Painted surfaces shall be considered to lack uniformity and soundness if any of the following <-
14 defects are apparent to the Painting Inspection Agency inspector:
15 1. Runs, sags, hiding or shadowing by inefficient application methods.
16 2. Evidence of poor coverage at rivet heads, plate edges, lap joints, crevices, pockets, corners ,
17 and re-entrant angles.
18 3. Damage due to touching before paint is sufficiently dry or any other contributory cause.
19 4. Damage due to application on moist surfaces or caused by inadequate protection from the
20 weather. "
21 5. Damage and/or contamination of paint due to windblown contaminants (dust, sand blast
22 materials, salt spray, etc.).
23 C. Painted surfaces rejected by the inspector shall be made good at the expense of the Contractor. _
24 Small affected areas may be touched up; large affected areas or areas without sufficient dry film
25 thickness of paint shall be repainted. Runs, sags of damaged paint shall be removed by scraper or
26 by sanding prior to application of paint.
27 D. Protection:
28 1. Protect all newly painted exterior surfaces from rain and snow, condensation, contamination,
29 dust, salt spray and freezing temperatures until paint coatings are completely dry. Curing
30 periods shall exceed the manufacturer's recommended minimum time requirements. �
31 2. Erect barriers or screens and post signs to warn of or limit or direct traffic away or around
32 work area as required.
33 3.OS CLEANiNG �
34 A. Collect waste material which may constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and
35 remove daily from site.
36 B. Clean-Up: �
37 1. Remove all paint where spilled,splashed, splattered or sprayed as work progresses using
38 means and materials that are not detrimental to affected surfaces.
39 2. During progress of work, remove from site discarded paint materials, rubbish, cans and rags
40 at end of each work day.
41 3. Upon completion of painting work, clean window glass and other paint spattered surfaces.
42 Remove spattered paint by proper methods ofi washing and scraping, using ca�e not to
43 scratch or othen�vise damage finished surfaces. -
44 4. Keep work area free from an unnecessary accumulation of tools, equipment, surplus
45 materials and debris.
46 5. Aemove combustible rubbish materials and empty paint cans each day and safely dispose of
47 same in accordance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
48 6. Clean equipment and dispose of wash water/solvents as well as all other cleaning and
49 protective materials (e.g. rags, drop cloths, masking papers, etc.), paints, thinners, paint
50 removers/strippers in accordance with the -
51 7. Safety requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
2012-37/YCS Agricuftural Dept Improvements 09 9005 - 12 PAINTS AND COATINGS-(EXISTWG STRUCTURES) ,
YELM HiGH SCHOOL
A� DEF�T.IMPROVEMENTS
YEL.M COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 C. Protection: Protect work of other trades, whether to be painted or not, against damage by painting
2 and finishing work. Correct any damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as
3 acceptable to Architect.
4 1. Provide "Wet Paint"signs as required to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary
5 protective wrappings provided by others for protection of their work, after completion of
6 painting operations.
7 2. At completion of work of other trades,touch-up and restore all damaged or defaced painted
8 surfaces.
9 3.07 SCHEDl1LE-SURFACES TO BE FINISHED
10 A, Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items:
11 1. Items fully factory-finished unless specifically noted.
12 2. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels.
13 B. Paint the surfaces described below under Schedule- Paint Systems.
14 C. Mechanical and Electrical: Use paint systems defined for the substrates to be finished.
15 1. Paint all insulated and exposed pipes occurring in finished areas to match background
16 surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
17 2. Paint shop-primed items occurring in finished areas.
18 3. Paint interior surfaces of air ducts and convector and baseboard heating cabinets that are
19 visible through grilles and louvers with one coat of flat black paint to visible surfaces.
20 4. Paint dampers exposed behind louvers, grilles, and convector and baseboard cabinets to
21 match face panels.
22 3.08 SCHEDiJLE- PAINT SYSTEMS
23 A. Exterior Paint and Coating Systems:
2�i 1. Paint EXTERIOR surfaces in accordance with the following MPI Painting Manual
25 requirements:
26 a. Galvanized Metal: (not chromate passivated) - For high contact/high traffic areas
27 (bollards, lintels, ladders, railings, misc. steel, pipes, etc.) - For low contact/low traffic
28 areas (overhead decking, downspout brackets, ducts, gutters,flashing, etc.)
29 1) REX 5.3B Alkyd finish.
30 (a) Coats:
31 (1) Latex Galvanized Primer/1 Coat/Product- #26
32 (2) Alkyd Gloss Enamel - Finish Coat/2 Coats/Product-#94
33 B. Interior Paint and Coating Systems:
34 1. Paint IiVTERIOR surfaces in accordance with the following MPI Painting Manual
35 requirements:
36 a. Concrete Vertical Surfaces: (including horizontal soffits)
37 1) RIN 3.1 D-Alkyd finish.
38 (a) Coats:
39 (1) Primer/ 1 Coat/Product-#50
40 (2) Semi-Gloss Waterborne Finish/2 Coats/Product#47
41 b. Concrete Horizontal Surfaces: (floors)
42 1) RIN 3.2C- Epoxy finish.
43 2) RIN 3.2E-Concrete floor sealer.
44 3) RIN 3.2L-Waterborne epoxy floor paint finish.
45 c. Galvanized Metal: (doors,frames, railings, misc.steel, pipes, overhead decking, ducts,
46 etc.)
47 1) RIN 5.3C -Alkyd [insert gloss level]finish (over cementitious primer).
48 (a) Coats:
49 (1) Cementitious Primer/ 1 Coat/ Product- #26
50 (2) Alkyd—Semi-Gloss Finish Coat/2 Coats/Product#47
51
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 09 9005 - 13 PAINTS AND COATINGS-(EXISTING STRUC7URES)
YEL�IiI FIIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
Y�LM COMMUNiTY SCHOOLS
ERIC�SON �1ACGOVERN
� d. Metal: (doors and frames) 4
2 1) RIN 5.3A- Latex finish.
3 (a) Coats:
q (1) Spot Prime �`
5 (2) Solvent Base Corrosion Resistant. Primer/ 1 Coat/Product-#76
6 (3) Acrylic Enamei—Semi-Gioss Finish Coat/2 Coats/Product#54 (see
7 Note 1)
8 e. Dressed (Painted) Lumber: (including, door and window frames, casings, molding, �`
g running wood trim etc.)
10 1) RI N 6.3U - Latex finish (over latex primer)
11 (a) Coats: �'
12 (1) Latex Primer/1 Coat/Product-#39
13 (2) Acrylic Enamel—Semi-Gloss Finish/2 Coats/Product#54 (see Note 1}
14 2. Interior Schedule Notes
15 a. Note 1 -When product#52 or#54 is specified for use, provide ICI "Dulux Pro Acrylic
16 Enamel", Kelly-Moore "1680 Series—Dura-Poxy Acrylic", or approved product u.
17 equivalent in performance, i.e. excellent adhesion qualities, rapid curing and drying,
18 scrubbability and exceptional stain and abrasion resistance. �•
19 b. Note 2- Uniforming Sealer: Three pounds cut clear shellac reduced nine parts
20 denatured alcohol to one part shellac. After all wood surfaces to be stained are totally °
21 prepared,spread one uniform thin coat over all surfaces. (Do not over saturate surface.)
22 c. General Note For Interior Paint:
23 1) Exposed Piping:All exposed piping including sprinkler piping shall be painted. One
24 coat Alkyd Rust-Inhibitive Primer and two coats Alkyd Enamel. Premium Grade.
25 Color as selected by Architect. �°
26 3.09 PAINT R�CORDS REQUIREMENTS
27 A. The painting contractor shall maintain, keep current and in good condition through the duration of
28 the job, all drawings and schedules indicating specified products and their locations of application. �
29 These records shall be returned to the Owner,through the Architect, at the end of the job to
30 facilitate future building maintenance. �
31 B. Because the painting contractor may prefer to use a different paint manufacturer (requiring the �:.
32 Architect's approval)from the one specified, he is required to fill out the PAINT PRODUCTS
33 SCHEDULE to indicate the alternate manufacturer and product number. (See sample below.)
34 C. Also,when a scheduled color is to be used in mare than one paint type, i.e. on wood, metal or
35 concrete,the requested information shall be filled in on the PAINT PRODUCTS SCHEDULE in the �
36 spaces provided below the"scheduled color/material" listed. (See sampte below.) -
37 D. See attached "Paint Record Schedule"following this Section.
38 E�D OF SECTIOI�
2012-37/YCS Agricuftural Dept improvements 09 9005- 14 PAINTS AND COATINGS-(EXISTING STRUCTURES) �.
YELiUI HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 SECTION 09 2116
2 GYP5U�U1 BOARD ASSEiVIBLIES
3 PAFiT 1 GENERAL
4 �.01 SEGTION INCLUDES
5 A. Gypsum wallboard.
6 1. Gypsum board screw-attached to wood framing and furring members.
7 B. Joint treatment and accessories.
8 C. Textured finish system.ALL NEW AND EXISTING GYPSUM WALL BOARD.
9 1.02 ��LATED REflUIREMENTS
10 A. Section 06 1000 - Rough Carpentry: Building framing and sheathing.
11 B. Section 07 2100 -Thermal Insulation:Acoustic insulation.
12 C. Section 07 9005 -Joint Sealers: Acoustic sealant.
13 D. Section 09 9000- Paints and Coatings- (New Construction).
14 1. Coordinate primer coat to be provided by painting contractor, prior to texture application.
15 E. Section 09 9005- Paints and Coatings - (Existing Structures).
16 1. Coordinate primer coat to be provided by painting contractor, prior to texture application.
17 1.03 REFEREiVCE STANDARDS
18 A. ASTM C475/C475M -Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing
19 Gypsum Board;2002 (Reapproved 2007).
20 B. ASTM C840-Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; 2008.
21 C. ASTM C1047- Standard Spec'rfication for Accessories for Gypsum Wallboard and Gypsum Veneer
22 Base; 2010a.
23 D. ASTM C1280- Standard Specification for Application of Gypsum Sheathing; 2009.
24 E. ASTM C1396/C1396M - Standard Specification for Gypsum Board; 2009a.
25 F. ASTM D 226- Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and
26 4Vaterproofing; 2005.
27 G. GA-216-Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; Gypsum Association; 2010.
28 H. GA-600- Fire Resistance Design Manual; Gypsum Association; 2009.
29 1.04 SUBMITTALS
30 A. See Section 01 3000 -Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures.
31 1.0§ fl1JALITY ASSUF�A�NCE
32 A. Perform in accordance with ASTM C 840. Comply with requirements of GA-600 for fire-rated
33 assemblies.
34 B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing gypsum board application and
35 finishing, with minimum 5 years of documented experience.
36 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
37 A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers or bundles bearing brand name and identification
38 of manufacturer or supplier.
39 B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from
40 �eather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic and other causes.
41 Neatly stack gypsum boards flat to prevent sagging.
42 C. Handie gypsum boards to prevent damage to edges, ends, and surfaces. Do not bend or
43 otherwise damage metal corner beads and trim.
2012-37/YCS Agricuttural Dept Improvements 09 2116- 1 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
�
YELM H1GH SCHOOL
AG DEPT, IMPROVEMENTS �
Y!ELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERlV
1 1.�7 PROJECT CONDITIO(�IS x
2 A. Environmental Conditions, General: Establish and maintain environmental conditions for
3 application and finishing gypsum board to comply with ASTM C 840 and with gypsum board
4 manufacturer's recommendations. '
5 B. Minimum Room Temperatures: For non-adhesive attachment of gypsum board to framing,
6 maintain not less than 40 deg F (4 deg C). For adhesive attachment and finishing of gypsum board
7 maintain not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) for 48 hours prior to application and continuously �
S thereafter unti!drying is complete.
9 C. Ventilate building spaces to remove water not required for drying joint treatment materials.Avoid
10 drafts during dry, hot weather to prevent materials from drying too rapidly.
�
11 PART 2 PRODUCTS
12 �.�1 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLiES
13 A. Provide completed assemblies complying with ASTM C840 and GA-216.
14 2.02 BOARD iVfATER1ALS .
15 A. Manutacturers-Gypsum-Based Board:
16 1. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC: www.gp.com/gypsum. �'
17 2. National Gypsum Company:www.natianalgypsum.com. .
18 3. USG Corporation; Product : www.usg.com.
19 4. Gold Bond Building Products. ��
20 5. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.
21 B. Gypsum Wallboard: Paper-faced gypsum panels as defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M; sizes to �"°
22 minimize joints in place; ends square cut.
�:
23 1. Application: Use for vertical surfaces and ceilings, unless otherwise indicated.
24 2. Thickness: �
25 a. Vertical Surfaces: 5/8 inch (16 mm). Type X.
2b C. Backing Board For Non-Wet Areas:Water-resistant gypsum backing board as defined in ASTM '"�
27 C1398/C1396M; sizes to minimum joints in place; ends square cut. �
28 1. Application:full wall length behind sinks and eye wash.
29 2. Type: Type X, in locations indicated. �_
30 3. Type X Thickness: 5/8 inch (16 mm).
31 4. Edges: Tapered.
32 5. Products:
33 a. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC;ToughRock ivloisture-Guard Gypsum Board
34 ("Greenboard"). t
35 b. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond Brand XP Gypsum Board.
36 c. USG Corporation; Sheetrock Brand Mold Tough Gypsum Panels. �
37 2.03 AC�ESSORIES �,
38 A. Building Paper: Asphalt impregnated building felt conforming to ASTM D 226, Type I.
39 B. Finishing Accessories:ASTM C1047, galvanized steel or rolled zinc, unless otherwise indicated. ��
40 1. Types: As detailed or required for finished appearance. w
41 2. Special Shapes: In addition to conventional cornerbead and control joints, provide U-bead at
42 exposed panel edges. �_
43 C. Joint Materials:ASTM C475 and as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for project :
44 conditions.
45 1. Tape: 2 inch (50 mm)wide, coated glass fiber tape for joints and corners, except as �.
�i6 otherwise indicated.
47 2. Tape: 2 inch (50 mm) wide, creased paper tape for joints and corners, except as otherwise
48 indicated.
49 3. Ready-mixed vinyl-based joint compound. "
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 09 2116- 2 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES �
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 a. Taping compound formulated for embedding tape and for first coat over fasteners and
2 flanges of corner beads and edge trim.
3 1) Topping compound formulated for fill (second) and finish (third) coats.
4 4. Chemical hardening type compound.
5 a. Factory-packaged,job-mixed, chemical-hardening powder products formulated for uses
6 indicated.
7 b. For filling joints and treating fasteners of water-resistant gypsum backing board behind
8 base for ceramic tile, use formulation recommended by gypsum board manufacturer.
9 D. Screws: ASTM C 1002;self-piercing tapping type; cadmium-plated for exterior locations.
10 E. Thermal Insulatiorr: See Section 07212.
11 PAR7'3 EXECUTION
12 3.01 EXAiIAINATION
13 A. Verify that project conditions are appropriate for work ot this section to commence.
14 1. Examine substrates to which drywall construction attaches or abuts, preset hollow metal
15 frames, cast-in-anchors, and structural framing, with Installer present,for compliance with
16 requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of drywall
17 construction. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been
18 corrected.
19 B. Specific requirements:
20 1. All framing cavities shall be cleaned and vacuumed prior to closing, covering or filling.
21 2. Owner shall inspect and approve all cavities prior to closing, covering or filling.
22 3. Prior to the cover of any insulation, Owner shall inspect and approve the installation.
23 4. Requirements for gypsum wallboard to be 3/8"above finished concrete slab will be reviewed.
24 3A2 BOARD INSTALLATIOIV
25 A. Comply with ASTM C 840, GA-216, and manufacturer's instructions. Install to minimize butt end
26 joints, especially in highly uisible locations.
27 1. Fastening Method:
28 a. GWB Fastening: The fastening method of the gypsum wallboard shall be exclusively by
29 screws.When rated or non-rated systems are indicated in the specifications or on the
30 drawings, and they may refer to nailing,the following shall rule:
31 1) Screws meeting ASTM C 1002 or ASTM C 954 shaH be permitted to be substituted
32 for prescribed nails. One for one, when the head diameter, length and spacing of
33 the screws equal or exceed the requirements for the nails used in the tested
34 system.
35 2) Partitions (Per International Building Code- IBC.)
36 3) Non-Rated Non-Load Bearing Partition, Single Ply: One layer 5/8"Type X gypsum
37 wallboard applied either vertically or horizontally to each side of studs spaced at 24
38 inches maximum.
39 4) 1-1/4"Type W screws spaced at 12 inches o.c. (maximum).
40 2. Locate exposed end-butt joints as far from center of walls and ceilings as possible, and
41 stagger all vertical and horizontal joints not less than 24 inches in alternate courses of board
42 and opposite sides of wafl.
43 3. Install ceiling boards across framing in the manner which minimizes the number of end-butt
44 joints, and which avoids end joints in the central area of each ceiling. Stagger end joints at
45 least 24 inches.
46 4. Install wall/partition boards in manner which minimizes the number of end-butt joints or avoids
47 them entirely where possible.At stairwells and similar high walls, install boards horizontally
48 with end joints staggered over studs.
49 5. Install exposed gypsum board with face side out. Do not install imperfect, damaged or damp
50 boards. Butt boards together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16
51 inch open space between boards. Do not force into place.
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 09 2116-3 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS «
Y'ELiI►1 COMMUNITY SCHOOi.S
ERICKSON MCGOVERN `
1 6. Locate either edge or end joints over supports, except in horizontal applications where
2 intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Position ,
3 boards so that Iike edges abut,tapered edges against tapered edges and mill-cut or field-cut
4 ends against mill-cut or field-cut ends. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends.
5 Stagger vertical joints over different studs on opposite sides of partitions.
6 7. Apply gypsum board to wall framing leaving a gap of no less than 1/4"or more than 3/8" °
7 between floor surface and bottom edge of GWB. If framing/flooring conditions create voids
8 greater than 3/8", mud in excess space flush with face of gypsum board, while complying with �`
9 listed clearances.
10 8. Attach gypsum board to supplementary framing and blocking provided for additional support
11 at openings and cutouts. �
12 9. Form control joints and expansion joints at locations indicated, with space between edges of
13 boards, prepared to receive trim accessories.
14 10. Isolate perimeter of non-load bearing drywall partitions at structural abutments. Provide 1/4
15 inch to'/2 inch space and trim edge with "U" bead edge trim. Seal joints with acoustical "
16 sealant.
17 11. Floating Construction:Where feasible, including where recommended by manufacturer,
18 install gypsum board over wood framing, with "floating" internal corner construction. ,�
19 12. Where sound rated drywall construction is indicated,seal construc#ion at perimeters, control
20 and expansion joints, openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant --
21 including a bead at both faces of partitions. Comply with ASTM C 919 and manufacturer's
22 recommendations for location of edge trim, and close off sound-flanking paths around or �
23 through construction, including sealing of partitions above acoustical ceilings.
24 13. Space fasteners in gypsum boards in accordance with refarenced gypsum board application
25 and finishing standard and manufacturer's recommendations. _
26 B. Water Resistant 8acking Board Installation And Finish:
27 1. Wall Tile Base:Where drywall is base for thin-set ceramic tile, plastic laminate wainscot, and
28 similar rigid applied wall finishes, install water-resistant gypsum backing board. M
29 a. At"wet" areas (not including showers) install water-resistant backing board. Apply with
30 un-cut long edge at bottom of work. Seal ends, cut-edges, penetrations and fastener
31 heads of each piece with water-resistant adhesive or, where recommended by backing
32 board manufacturer,with water-resistant joint compound.'Fill tapered edges in gypsum =�
33 panels with vvater-resistant joint compound, embed joint tape firmly and wipe off excess
34 compound;follow immediately with a second coat of water-resistant joint compound over Y
35 taping coat, being careful not to crown the joint. Fold and embed tape in all interior
36 angles to form true angles. �`
37 b. tn areas not to be tiled,treat fastener heads and embed tape as indicated above using
38 water-resistant joint compound but finish with 2 coats of joint compound used for regular
39 gypsum board work. �,
40 3.03 JOI�iT TR�ATMEMT
41 A. Paper Faced Gypsum Board: Use paper joint tape, bedded with ready-mixed vinyl-based joint
42 compouncl and finished with ready-mixed vinyl-based joint compound. ��
43 B. Finish gypsum board in accordance with levels defined in ASTM C840, as follows:
44 1. Level 4:Walls and ceilings to receive paint finish or wall coverings, unless otherwise
45 indicated.
46 2. Level 1:Wall areas above finished ceilings, whether or not accessible in the completed
47 construction.
48 C. Finish all gypsum board in accordance with ASTM C 840 Level 4.
49 1. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles,flanges of cornerbead, edge trim, control
50 joints, penetrations,fastener heads,surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare
51 gypsum board surfaces for decoration.
52 2. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged areas using setting-type joint
53 compound.
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 09 2116 - 4 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNiTY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 3. Levels of Gypsum Board Finish: Provide the foilowing levels of gypsum board finish as
2 presented by
3 4. Northwest Wall and Ceiling Bureau, Seattle,WA Phone 1-206/524-4243.
4 a. Level 1 (Fire-taping for plenum areas above ceilings, in attics, in areas where the
5 assembly would generally be concealed): All joints and interior angles shall have tape
6 set in joint compound. Surface shall be free of excess joint compound. Tape and
7 fastener heads need not be covered with joint compound.Tool marks and ridges are
8 acceptable.
9 b. Level 2 (For ceramic tile, acoustic tile, and plastic laminate wainscot backing board):All
10 joints, interior angles, and accessories, shall have tape embedded in joint compound.
11 Wipe off the excess leaving a thin coat of joint compound over the tape of all joints,
12 angles, and accessories. Cover fastener heads with one coat of joint compound and
13 wipe off the excess. Surface shall be free of excess joint compound.Tool marks and
14 ridges are acceptable.
15 1) Use the following joint compound combination as applicable to the finish levels
16 specified:
17 (a) Embedding and First Coat: Light weight setting compound.
18 5. Level 4 (For all locations unless noted otherwise):All joints and interior angles shall have
19 tape embedded in joint compound and three separate coats of joint compound applied over
20 all joints, angles,fastener heads, and accessories. Touch up and sand between coats and
21 after last coat as needed to produce a surtace free of visual defects and ready for decoration.
22 All joint compound shall be smooth and free of tool marks and ridges.
23 6. Tape,fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and corners to produce smooth surface ready to
24 receive finishes.
25 a. Feather coats of joint cornpound so that camber is maximum 1/32 inch.
26 b. Use the following joint compound combination as applicable to the finish levels specified:
27 1) Embedding and First Coat: Ready-mixed,drying-type,taping compound.
28 2) Fill (Second) Coat: Ready-mixed, drying-type,topping compound.
29 3) Finish (Third) Coat: Ready-mixed, drying-type,topping compound.
30 c. Partial Finishing: Omit third coat and sanding on concealed drywall construction which is
31 indicated for drywall finishing or which requires finishing to achieve fire-resistance rating,
32 sound rating or to act as air or smoke barrier.
33 7. Fill and finish joints and corners of cementitious backing board as recommended by
34 manufacturer.
35 3.Q4 TE3C1'U�i� �INISF�
36 A. Apply finish texture coating by rneans of spraying apparatus in accordance with manufacturer's
37 instructions and to match approved sample.
38 1. Sprayed-On Texture Finish (Requires Level 4 GWB Finish):
39 a. Surface Preparation and Primer: Prepare drywall and other surfaces in strict accordance
40 with texture finish manufacturer's instructions.All surfaces to be textured shall be primer
41 painted both prior to and after the texture application. Coordinate with Section 09 9000
42 for primer application.
43 1) Gypsum Board Assemblies (drywall) contractor to coordinate and permit time for
44 Paints and Coating (painting) contractor to apply primer finish prior to texture
45 application."
46 b. Finish Application: Mix and apply finish to drywall and other surtaces indicated to receive
47 finish in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions to produce a uniform texture
48 matching Architect's sample without starved spots or other evidence of thin application,
49 and free of application patterns. If locations have not been indicated, provide texture to
50 all gypsum wallboard walls and ceiling unless otherwise indicated.
51 c. Provide texture as approved by Architect from approved sample.
52 d. Remove any texture droppings or over spray from door frames, windows and other
53 adjoining construction.
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 09 2116- 5 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS ,-
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 3.0� t�F34�TEC�'aOiV ,_
2 A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner suitable to Installer, which ensures
3 gypsum drywall construction being without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial
4 Completion.
5 3,06 TOi�ERANCES •
6 A. Maximum Variation of Finished Gypsum Board Surface from True Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3
7 mm in 3 m) in any direction.
g END C)F S�CTION -
�
�
�
�
��..
�.
2012-37/YCS Agricu{tural Dept Improvements 09 2116-6 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES g
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
'`fELM GOMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 SECTION 12 3450
2 �AC70RY BUIL7 CASEWORK
3 P�►d�T � GENERAL
4 �.01 SECTiON INCLUDES
5 A. Includes all factory fabricated modular casework as required by project drawings. Exposed
6 surfaces shail be laminated with decorative high pressure plastic laminate or hardwood veneer.
7 Semi exposed surfaces shall be overlaid with low pressure thermofused melamine laminate.
8 1. Full overlay style with 3mm edge banding in a select range of PVC colors or hardwoods.
9 2. Inclusions:
10 a. Base and wall cabinets.
11 1) Cabinets with shelving in gymnasiurr storage rooms shall be provided with 3/4"
12 raised lip on front face of shelf whether shown or not shown on the drawings.
13 b. Custom casework assembfies as detail on the drawings.
14 c. Cleaning of all casework at completion of installation.
15 d. Trained finish carpenters to install and adjust complete casework system.
16 B. All cabinets, designed,detailed, or modified to suit condition of installation, as specified herein,
17 indicated on the Drawings or required; as approved, Include all accessories and trim items,
18 standard with manufacturer's, unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings.
19 C. KV bracket and hanger systems.
20 1.Q2 ALLOWAIVCES
21 A. Allow for additional extra stock at the completion ofi the installation of all casework. Extra stock
22 components shall be provided and transmitted to Owner (Yelm Community Schools) as follows:
23 1. 3 extra- hinges.
24 2. 4 extra-drawer pulls.
25 3. 3 extra- locks.
26 4. 4 e�ra-drawer glides.
27 1.43 COORDi�NATION
28 A. Coordinate with work of other trades.
29 1.04 REFE�tENCES
30 A. All materials shall conform to these requirements:
31 1. NEMA LD-3 (National Electrical Manufacturers Association} - Decorative, high pressure
32 plastic laminates.
33 a. Horizontal Grade.050" GP50
34 b. Posiforming grade.042" PF42
35 c. Vertical Grade.028" =VG28
36 d. Cabinet Linear Grade.020 = CL20
37 e. Chemical Resistant Grade.036"
38 f. Low pressure thermofused polyester and melamine laminates-ALA(American
3g Laminators Association).
40 2. PVC Edgebanding (polyvinyl chloride) on seamless rolls to be applied with automatic edge
41 banding machines using hot-melt adhesives. Product to be chip proof,flame and moisture
42 resistant.
43 3. U.S. Dept. of Commerce Product Standards: PS-1-74 Construction and Industrial Plywood
44 a. Particleboard -ANSI-A208.1 (American National Standards Institute).
45 b. Softwood plywood - U.S. Product Standards PS1.
46 c. Hardwood plywood -ANSI-HPVA(Hardwood Plywood &Veneer Association).
47 d. Hardboard -ANSI-AHA 135.484 (American Hardboard Association).
48 4, PVA Adhesive (polyvinyl acetate}White glue, Type II� -ASTM-D31 10 (American Society for
49 Testing and Materials).
2012-37/YCS Agricuftural Dept Improvements 12 3450- 1 FACTORY BUILT CASEWORK
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS ,.
Y�LM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 5. Aliphatic Adhesive (carpenters glue) Type II -ASTM-D31 10 (American Society For Testing '
2 and Materials).
3 6. Solvent based contact cement- IMMM-A-J1 30B.
4 7. Workmanship complies with industry standards: �
5 a. AWI (Architectural Woodwork Institute).
6 b. WIC (Woodwork Institute of California).
7 8. WSBCC -Washington State Building Code Council -Chapter 51-40 WAC -Amendments to
8 the International Building Code (latest edition), Section 1106-"Accessible Design and °
9 Standards and all sub-paragraphs. .
��
10 9. BHMA A156.9-American National Standard for Cabinet Hardware; Builders Hardware
11 Manufacturers Association, Inc.; 1994 (ANSUBHMA A156.9). �.4
12 1.05 SUBiNII'�"�"ALS �
13 A. See Section 01 3000-Administrative Requirements,for submittai procedures.
14 1. Shop Drawings: �
15 a. Complete shop drawings submitted showing all casework, elevations, plans, cross
16 sections and installation details. Surface finishes will be noted along with information
17 about equipment being installed into casework requiring coordination of other trades.
18 b. A complete keying schedule will be submitted with proposed keying for review by owner.
19 1) All cabinets to be keyed the same. �.
20 c. Samples:
21 1) Samples of plastic laminate showing full line of color selections available shall be
22 provided.Also, samples of actual hardware or catalog cut sheets shall be submitted
23 on manufacturer's standards.
24 (a) Plastic laminate colors shall be from laminate manufacturer's full-line of
�
25 standard colors.
26 (b) Submit (full line of colors) 2" long minimum sample of drawer/door edge ��
27 treatment and shelf edge treatment.
28 (c) Submit 6"x6"sample of tackable surfacing material. �
29 2) Half size sample cabinets shall be provided to show hardware, construction
30 techniques, and workmanship. "
31 3) These samples may be retained for verification that project work is of the same
32 quality. �
33 B. Certificate of Compliance: Manufacturer shall submit a written statement on company letterhead
34 indicating the degree of the products compliance with provisions of this specification. Specific
35 areas of noncompliance shall be stated.
36 C. Coordinate with the separate mechanical and electrical sub-contractors for location, number, size
37 and shape of cutouts for mechanical and electrical fixtures and fittings installed under separate
38 contracts. Coordinate with Contractor for location of backing between studs in walls required for �
39 casework installation and anchorage.
40 1,� 4UALITY ASSUR/��VC�
41 A. Single Source Responsibility: Provide all casework as manufactured by same company for single �
42 responsibility.
43 B. Workmanship complies with industry standards:
44 1. AWI (Architectural Woodwork Institute). �
45 2. Field Measurements: Verify sizes and shapes of countertops prior to fabrication by field
46 measurements taken after base cabinets are installed.
47 3. Standards:Westmark Series 100, current specifications and standards shal( be used as a
48 basis for comparing like products.
49 1.07 WARR�►Id'�Y
50 A. See Section 01 7800-Closeout Submittals,for additional warranty requirements.
51 �
2012-37/YCS Agricuftural Dept Improvements 12 3450 - 2 FACTORY BUILT CASEWORK r..
YELM HiGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 B. Correct defective Work within a one year period after Date of Substantial Completion.
2 1. Provide a written warranty indicating that all new cabinets will be free of defects in materials
3 and workmanship for a period of one year after date of substantial completion and that
4 repairs/replacement of said defects shall be performed in a timely manner at no expense to
5 the Owner.
6 1 A8 PRODUC'�DEUVERY,STORAGE AND HANDLING
7 A. Protect wood cabinets and countertops during transit, handling and storage to prevent damage.
8 B. Store in a dry, clean and well ventilated space, protected from damage. Do not deliver materials
9 until temperature and relative humidity are stabilized and conditions are representative of finished
10 facility.
11 C. Job Conditions:
12 1. Maintain temperature and humidity in installation areas as required to maintain moisture
13 content of installed cabinet work within a tolerance range of the optimum moisture content
14 acceptable to cabinet manufacturer,from date of installation through rernainder of
15 construction period.
16 1.09 CAS�WORK DEFINITiONS
17 A. Exposed Portions:
18 1. All surfaces visible when doors and drawers are closed except interiors of open cabinets.
19 2. Cabinet tops under 72"above finish floor, or over 72"above finish floor if visible from an
20 upper building level.
21 3. Visible edges of cabinet ends, doors and drawer fronts.
22 4. Sloping tops of cabinets that are visible.
23 B. Semi-Exposed Portions:
24 1. All surfaces visible when doors and drawers are open including interior faces of hinged doors.
25 2. The underside bottoms of wall hung cabinets.
26 3. Visible surtaces in open cabinets or behind glass doors.
27 4. Visible portions of bottoms,tops, and ends in front of sliding doors in closed position.
28 C. Concealed Portions:
29 1. Toe space unless otherwise specified.
30 2. Sleepers.
31 3. Web frames,stretchers.
32 4. Security panels.
33 5. Underside of bottoms of cabinets less than 30" above the finished floor.
34 6. Flat tops of cabinets 72" or more above the finished floor, except if visible from an upper
35 building level.
36 7. The three non-visible edges of adjustable shelves.
37 8. The underside of countertops, knee spaces, and drawer aprons.
38 9. The faces of cabinet ends of adjoining units that butt together.
39 PART 2 PR013UCTS
40 2.41 N9ANlJFACi'URERS
41 A. Westmark Products.
42 B. Nick's Custom Casework
43 C. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000- Product Requirements.
44 2.02 C�ISEWORK S�'ANDARDS/SPECIFICATIONS
45 A. Casework: Provide to conform generally to the detailed specifications issued by Westmark
46 Products, Inc., Series 100 complete with all fittings, accessories, and hardware described therein
47 for each unit, all complete in place. Include all floor and wall mounted and mobile casework
48 identified by Westmark numbers; use two braking casters on each mobile cabinet.
2012-37/YCS Agricuftural Dept Improvements 12 3450- 3 FACTORY BUILT CASEWORK
YELM NiGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS �
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 B. Westmark Products Specifications have been modified with the following Options: �
2 1. For countertops and backsplashes with sinks, or which are over bUilt-in dishwashers, revise
3 the 3/4 inch composition board to a 3/4 inch plywood,touch sanded Exterior AC Grade.
4 Extend plywood a minimum of 2 ft. beyond each side of sink. Seal edges of plywood at sink �
5 cutouts. Plastic laminate to be 1/16 inch nominal thickness.
6 2. Cabinet bases shall consist of 3/4-inch exterior grade plywood stringers front and back and -
7 sleepers in-between at 24 inches o.c. Bases shall be leveled and anchored to floor in
8 continuous lengths to ensure straight, level and true lines of casework.
9 3. Door/Drawer Pulls: Provide manufacturer's standard 1/4-inch bent wire pulls. 3-1/2 inches x
10 1/4 inch solid brass with chrome finish.
11 4. Drawers: Provide for the front piece of the drawer box construction to be 3/4 inch plywood. �,
12 2.03 i4iATERII�►L.S
13 A. Exposed Portions:
14 1. Exposed material shall be pattern and color as specified. If not specified, it shall be a non-
15 premium priced, high pressure standard pattern Iaminate.028" minimum thickness meeting
16 NEMA LD-3 standards. High pressure laminates shall be laminated with PVA adhesive under -
17 50 PSI pressure.
18 a. Optional laminate brands are Formica,Wilsonart and Nevamar.
19 b. Writing whiteboard laminate: Formica or Wilsonart markerboard laminate.
20 c. Wood grain patterns shall run vertically on doors, ends and fixed panels. Drawer fronts
21 and sink fronts shall run horizontally unless specified otherwise.
22 B. Semi-Exposed Portions:
23 1. Semi-exposed materials shall be one of the following at manufacturer's option, unless
24 otherwise specified. Color shall be consistent throughout semi-exposed surfaces with the �„
25 following color options: Almond, Folkstone Grey or White.
26 a. Low pressure thermofused melamine or polyester laminate meeting ALA standards. �
27 Lamination is achieved through self-bonding of the resin under 300 PSI at 3201 F.
28 b. High pressure plastic Iaminate.028"thickness meeting NEMA LD-3 standards. Panels �°
29 shall be laminated with PVA adhesive under 50 PSI pressure.
30 2. Interior faces of cabine#doors, drawer fronts and finished ends shall be laminated with high
31 pressure plastic laminate. Color matched to cabinet interior. �,
32 3. Interior faces of tops, bottoms, ends, partitions, and shelves shall be overlaid with low
33 pressure thermofused melamine laminate. �
34 4. Cabinet backs and drawer bottoms shall have factory applied coating to both faces. Interior
35 face to match cabinet interior color. �'
36 5. Sma�l vertical or horizontal dividers shall be 1/4"thick tempered hardboard, brown color.
37 C. Concealed Portions, Cores,And Substrates:
38 1. Concealed materials shall be any species of sound, dry solid stock, plywood, particleboard,
39 medium density fiberboard, or a combination thereof.
40 2. All materials shall be securely glued with Type li adhesive meeting ASTM-D3110 standards.
41 3. Laminate core material shall be premium grade particleboard, 45 Ib. density meeting
42 ANSI-208.1 standards in either fir or pine composition. Thicknesses shall be 7/16", 11/16",
43 3/4", 7/8" and 1".
44 D. Visible Edges, Exposed And Semi-Exposed:
45 1. Exposed edges of cabinet ends, doors and drawer fronts shall be edge banded with thick '
46 3mm PVC. Colors shall be chosen from a select range to either complement or match the
47 face color.
48 2. Exposed edges of cabinet shelves, sub-tops, bottoms and partitions shaA be edge banded
49 with.024" PVC to match cabinet interior.
50 3. Edges at underside of upper cabinets and drawer parts shall be edge banded with.024" PVC
51 to match cabinet interior.
52 4. Machine applied edge banding shall be applied after face laminates are applied, ``
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 12 3450-4 FACTORY BUILT CASEWORK
YEL.M HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT.IMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 2.04 HAl3DW�RE:
2 A. Hinges:
3 1. Five knuckle, radius tips 2 3/4"x.095"fastened with 4 screws to end panel and 5 screws to
4 door panei with door opening of 270 degrees. Satin chrome or black finish standard.
5 2. Hinges: Hettich #4944.
6 B. Door and Drawer Pulls:
7 1. Door/Drawer Pulls: Provide manufacturer's standard 1/4-inch bent wire pulls. 3-1/2 inches x
8 1/4 inch solid brass with chromefinish.
9 C. Drawer Slides:
10 1. Box drawer-single extension, almond epoxy finish with 75 Ib. load rating. Features positive
Z1 in and out stops,stay close detent, one side captive and four nylon rollers.
12 a. Hettich #FR602L.
13 2. Paper drawers-full extension, zinc finish with 100 Ib. load rating. Features positive in and out
14 stops, stay close detent and steel ball bearings.
15 a. Accuride#3832.
16 3. File drawers-full extension zinc finish with 150 Ib. load rating. Features positive in and out
17 stops, stay close detent and steel ball bearings.
18 a. Accuride#4032.
19 D. Adjustable Shelf Support System:
20 1. Standard adjustable shelf support system into predrilled 5mm diameter holes 32mm (1 1/4")
21 on centers.
22 a. Allied Field - HD double pin shelf lock.
23 1) Product no. 55036.
24 b. Color: Clear or white, to be selected by Architect(Erickson McGovern).
25 E. Catches:
26 1. AAagnetic Type- 7 Ib. pull rating with metal base plate and plastic housing to match cabinet
27 interior: Epco#1000.
28 F. Wall Standards and Brackets:
29 1. Shelves 12"deep, zinc plated steel, adjustable 2" centers: K&V#87 standards with # 187
30 brackets.
31 G. Locks:
32 1. Locks shall be a dead bolt type, constructed with solid brass cylinder and five pin tumblers.
33 Exposed finish is US26D satin chrome.
34 a. Provide the following locks where shown or called for, keyed and master keyed as
35 directed by Owner through Architect. Include nylon spacers to align face of lock flush
36 with face of door or drawer.
37 1) Drawer Locks
3S (a) National Lock 8179-26D 5-Pin Tumbler.
39 (b) Olympus Lock 200 DW 5-Pin Tumbler.
40 2) Door Locks:
�� (a) National Lock 8173-26D 5-Pin Tumbler.
42 (b) Olympus Lock 100 DR 5-Pin Tumbler.
43 b. Standard keying:
44 1) Alike per room - provide 3 keys per room.
�5 2) Master keyed - provide 6 keys,
46 2. Slide bolt used on inactive door when pair of doors require lock: Epco#910.
47 a. Provide 1/8" plate- 1 1/2"x 4"for inactive door stop if slide bolt is not accessible.
48 3. Sliding door- Plunger type lock: National Lock#C8142-26D.
49 2.05 CABINET COMPONENTS
50 A. Drawers (Wood Construction):
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 12 3450- 5 FACTORY BUILT CASEWORK
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
Q�G �EP�. IMPROVEMENTS •
YEL�M COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 1. Drawer fronts shall be 3/4 inch plywood overlaid with high pressure plastic laminate on both `
2 faces to equal 3/4"thickness. Inside color to match cabinet interiors with face color to be
3 seiected. Edges shall be banded with 3mm PVC. Edge colors shall be chosen from a select
4 range to either complement or match the face color. �,
5 2. Drawer sides shall be i/2"thick particleboard overlaid with thermofused melamine on two
6 sides to match cabinet interior. Top edges shall be banded with.024" PVC. Drawer parts shall
7 be joined together with 6mm x 25mm hardwood dowels 32mm on centers.
8 3. Drawer bottoms, sub-fronts and backs shall be 1/2" particleboard with factory applied coating
9 to both faces. Bottoms shall be tongued into sides, back and sub-front, giued and clamped to
10 produce a rigid square drawer. Interior face color to match cabinet interiors.
11 4. Drawer fronts shall be attached to the sub-fronts with minimum of four#8 x 1 " panhead
12 screws.
13 5. Drawers shall be mounted with positive "IN"and "OUT" stops to provide permanent and quiet -_
14 operation. Drawer fronts that impact cabinet body will not be allowed.
15 6. All drawers to have roller guides as specified above. Full depth security panel shall be �"
16 provided between drawers when individual drawer locking is required. „
17 B. Doors:
18 1. Doors shall be 11/16"thick particleboard overlaid with a high pressure plastic laminate on
19 both faces to equal 3/4"thickness. Inside color to match cabinet interiors with face color to be
20 selected. ��
21 2. Edges shall be banded with 3mm PVC. Edge colors shall be chosen from a select range to �
22 either complement or match the face color.
23 3. Hinges shall be installed as follows: �
24 a. Maximum Door Size: 24"x 36"
25 1) No. of Knuckles: 2 °�
26 b. Maximum Door Size: 24"x 48"
27 1) No. of Knuckles: 3
28 c. Maximum Door Size: 24"x 84"
29 1) No.of Knuckles:4
30 d. Maximum Door Size: 24"x 90"
31 1) No. of Knuckles: 5
32 C. Cabinet Ends �
33 1. Semi-exposed ends shall be 3/4" particleboard overlaid with thermofused melamine on both
34 faces.
35 2. Exposed or finish ends shall be 11/16"thick particleboard overlaid with high pressure plastic
36 laminate on both faces to equal 3/4"thickness. Inside color to match cabinet interiors with
37 face color to be selected. �
38 3. Ends shall be drilled for adjustable shelf supports with 5mm diameter holes on 32mm (1 1/4") m
39 centers.
40 �. Front edge shall be banded with 3mm PVC. Edge colors shall be chosen from a select range
41 to either complement or match the face color.
42 5. Top &bottom edges of upper ends shall be banded with.024" PVC. �
43 D. Cabinet Tops and Bottoms:
4� 1. Semi-exposed tops and bottoms shall be 3/4" particleboard overlaid with thermofused
45 melamine on both faces. Front edge shall be banded with.024" PVC. ,
46 2. Exposed or finished tops and bottoms shall be 11/16"thick particleboard overlaid with high
47 pressure plastic laminate on both faces to equal 3/4"thickness. Inside color to match cabinet
48 interiors with exposed color to be selected.
49 a. At locations with attached coat hooks: `
50 1) Exposed or finished tops and bottoms shall be 3/4"thick plywood (only- no
51 exceptions) overlaid with high pressure plastic laminate on both faces to equal 3/4"
52 thickness. Inside color to match cabinet interiors with exposed color to be selected. �
53 3. Front edging shall be banded with.024" PVC.
2012-37/YCS Agricuttural Dept Improvements 12 3450 -6 FACTORY BUILT CASEWORK
YELM HIGH SCNOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMEN7S
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSOM MCGOVERN
1 E. Fixed and Adjustable Shelves:
2 1. Standard shelf system shall be designed to support up to 50 Ibs. per sq.ft. yniform shelf
3 loading while allowing no more than 2mm (.080") per lineal-foot deflection of unsupported
4 shelf span. Deflection is defined as the measured distance from a straight iine that a shelf wili
5 deflect under load. Industry standard is U144" (the length of the shelf divided by 144") as the
6 standard for maximum acceptable shelf deflection.
7 2. The following materials and thickness shall be used to provide this performance:
S a. Shelves at cabinets up to 32"wide shall be 3/4"thick particleboard overlaid with
9 thermo-fused melamine on both faces.
10 b. Shelves at cabinets over 32" Up to 48"wide shall be 1 "thick particleboard overlaid with
11 thermofused melamine on both faces.
12 c. Spans over 48" - not permitted.
13 3. The front edge only of adjustable shelves inside cabinets shall be banded with.024" PVC.
14 4. Adjustable shelves shall be supported on 4 shelf clips in cabinets up to 25" deep and 6 shelf
15 clips in cabinets greater than 25"deep.
16 5. Fixed shelves shall be 3/4" or 1 "thick particle-board overlaid with thermofused melamine on
17 both sides. Front edge banded with.024" PVC.
18 6. Adjustable shelves for wall mounted standard shall be 1 "thick particleboard overlaid with
19 thermofused melamine on both faces. All four edges shall be edge banded with.024" PVC.
20 7. See special front lip requirements for gymnasium storage rooms above.
21 F. Cabinet Backs:
22 1. Semi-exposed backs shall be 1/2" particleboard with factory applied coating to both faces.
23 Interior face to match cabinet interior color. Semi-exposed edge shall be banded with.024"
24 PVC.
25 2. Exposed or finish backs shall be 11/16" particle-board overlaid with high pressure plastic
26 laminate on both faces to equal 3/4"thickness. Exterior color to be selected.
27 3. Removable backs shall be available at any location for service access as required by project.
28 4. Bottom edge of upper backs shall be banded with.024" PVC.
29 G. Partitions And Dividers:
30 1. Vertical 1/2" and 3/4" partitions shall be particle-board overlaid with thermofused melamine
31 on both faces. Exposed edges shall be banded with.024" PVC.
32 2. Small dividers shall be 1/4"tempered hardboard and supported by adjustable clips or
33 grooved into adjacent members. Edges shall be sanded.
34 H. Cabinet Bases;
35 1. Cabinet bases shall consist of 3/4-inch exterior grade plywood stringers front and back and
36 sleepers in-between at 24 inches o.c. Bases shall be leveled and anchored to floor in
37 continuous lengths to ensure straight, level and true lines of casework.
38 2. Free standing cabinet shall have unit bases with cabinet ends running to the floor.
39 3. Base and tall cabinets shall have individual unit bases with (4) adjustable leveling feet each.
40 Small cabinets, less than 18"wide or deep, will not have adjustable levelers.
41 I. Fillers And Soifit Panels:
42 1. Panels shall be made of 11/16" particleboard overlaid with high pressure plastic laminate on
43 both faces to equal 3/4"thick and shafl be fitted to adjacent surfaces.
44 2. Exposed faces shall have laminate matching to adjacent cabinets.
45 J. Countertops:
46 1. See special requirements for radius corners and for back and side splashes above.
47 2. For countertops and backsplashes with sinks, or which are over built-in dishwashers, revise
48 the 3/4 inch composition board to a 3/4 inch plywood,touch sanded Exterior AC Grade or
49 moisture resistant (fvlR) medium density overlay (MDO). Extend plywood or MDO a minimum
50 of 2 ft. beyond each side of sink. Seal edges of plywood at sink cutouts. Plastic laminate to be
51 1/16 inch nominal thickness.
52
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 12 3450 - 7 FACTORY BUILT CASEWORK
YELM HIGH SCHOOL �
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMEN7S
`lELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN �
1 3. Decorative Laminate Countertops:
2 a. Plastic laminate shall be from Formica, Nevamar and Wilsonart with a standard texture
3 (suede)finish. One manufacturer for total project.The following colors listed in the
4 schedule are from Formica.The approval of Nevamar or Wilsonart will be contingent ,.
5 upon color match as approved by Architect.
6 b. Finished edges shall be trimmed with GP50 grade laminate applied after the top surface.
7 Overall thicknesses available shall be 3/4"to 1 1/2"with build-up added to the substrate.
8 1) Style: 1-1/2"thick edge with 90 degree formed laminate.
9 2) Provide complete factory finish to comply with chemical and physical resistance �..
10 requirements. After installation,touch-up or refinish damaged portions equal to
11 original factory finish. Sand exposed and semi exposed components using machine �
12 and hand methods. Carefully sand finishes after each surface treatment. Apply
13 finishes as follows:Three (3) coats of highly chemical resistant finish, heat dried `
14 and sanded between each coat to produce a smooth, satin luster free of
15 imperfections. �`
16 c. Backsplashes and side splashes shall be 3/4"thick and 4" high unless otherwise
17 specified. Material and color to be the same as countertop deck.
18 d. Backsplashes and side splashes shall be factory assembled with waterproof sealant and �
19 #6 x 2"screws at 6"on center.
20 e. Countertops shall be furnished in longest possible lengths.When joints are required they �r
21 shall be factory prepared with a minimum of four 1/4"joint bolts each.joints shall be field
22 assembled with waterproof sealant to insure stable and rigid construction. '"�
23 f. No joints allowed within 24"of sinks, counter ends, or knee space areas. ��
24 2.C)6 CABIM�T.Dt91M�R`t
25 A. Cabinet Construction: �
26 1. Fabrication: �.�
27 a. Cabinets shall be assembled square and true using manufacturer's preferred methods,
28 materials and equipment. »�
29 b. Align doors and drawers to show uniform gaps between all doors and drawers within
30 individual units. "`
31 c. Fabricate all cases to sizes indicated on approved shop drawings to tolerances of+/-2
32 1/2%. �
33 d. Verify all conditions and make all cut-outs required for mechanical, electrical and other �.
34 equipment or accessories built into casework.
35 e. Shop assemble casework for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit
36 passage through building openings.
37 fi. Fabricate corners and joints without gaps or inaccessible spaces or areas where dirt or
38 moisture could accumulate.
39 g. Fabricate each unit to be rigid and not dependent on building structure for rigidity. `
40 fi. Apply taminate backing sheet to reverse side of plastic laminate finished surfaces.
41 i. When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting.
42 Provide trim for scribing and site cutting. �
43 2. Cabinet parts shall be assembled with one or more of the following methods:Tongue and
44 groove joints, wood dowels, Type II adhesive, screws and staples. Units shall be squared and
45 clamped to ensure strong joint assembly.
46 3. Cabinet backs shall be applied with staples and screws to provide a strong and square '
47 cabinet assembly. .
48 4. All hardware shall be securely screwed or press fitted into pre-drilled holes.
49 2.07 WORKi�,r1A1VSi�IP °
50 A. Casework Components:
51 1. All components shall be accurately cut, edge banded, machined and processed to meet
52 standards as set forth by A.W.I. and W.I.C.
53
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 12 3450- 8 FACTORY BUILT CASEWORK ry-.
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELNI COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 2. Cabinet Assembly:
2 a. Ali components shall be neatly assembled and clamped together with Type II adhesive,
3 wood dowels, screws,staples and other fasteners to form a complete system.
4 b. Complete cabinets shall be square, plumb and true.
S c. All units shall be labeled with project name, model number, room number location and
6 item number for easy identification by the job-site installers.
7 PAR�3 EXECIJTION
8 3.01 EXANIIN�►TION
9 A. Examine conditions under which products will be installed.
10 B. Verify adequacy of support framing.
11 C. Measure all areas for scribe fit.
12 3.02 INSTALLATION
13 A. Storage And Protection:
14 1. Casework is to be protected and stored under cover in a ventilated building not exposed to
15 extreme temperatures or humidity. Do not store casework in area with wet concrete, masonry
16 or plaster.
17 B. Workman:
18 1. Install casework with factory trained finish carpenters under direct supervision of
19 manufacturer's representative.
20 C. Attachment:
21 1. All casework items shall be securely anchored to building structure, except for those items
22 identified as "mobile"or "moveable"on drawings, which are to be adjusted to prevent any
23 rocking when sitting on finish floor.
24 2. Primary anchorage of base and wall cabinets shall be through the 1/2"thick cabinet back into
25 wall framing or blocking furnished under other sections.Additional anchorage will be made
26 into cabinet bases and adjacent side walls where they occur.Appropriate sized anchor
27 screws shall be used to best attach to the existing wall condition which will allow each cabinet
28 to be loaded to a capacity of 50 Ib. per sq. ft. of shelf area.
29 3. For schools, hospitals and public buildings, all installations shall be in strict conformance with
30 seismic codes.
31 4. At free-spanning countertops or work surfaces, steel support brackets shall be provided at a
32 maximum spacing of 32 inches, or as shown on drawings. Support brackets shall be
33 designed to allow for knee space clearance and attach to wall framing for support.
34 D. Workmanship:
35 1. Erect casework straight, level, plumb and true.
36 2. Neatly scribe casework to walls, soffits and columns. Fillers to color match adjacent surfaces
37 and will not be permitted in excess of 1 1/2"wide, unless specifically requested otherwise.
38 3. Joints are not permitted in continuous countertops over knee spaces or within 24 inches of
39 sinks or counter ends.joints, where approved, shall be tight, in perfect alignment, and not
40 allowing excessive deflection.
41 E. Coordination:
42 1. Verify requirements and location from Architect or Owner 6efore cutting holes for paper slots
43 and grommets.
44 2. Provide cutting and fitting as necessary to accommodate mechanical and electrical work built
45 into casework units.
46 3. Provide alterations to casework to keep devices accessible when they are covered by
47 casework. This includes mechanical and electrical switches, receptacles, panels, access
48 doors and other devices.
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 12 3450- 9 FACTORY BUILT CASEWORK
YELM H1GH SCHOOL
AG DEPT, lMPROVEMENTS
YELiIA COMMUNITY SCHQOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN °
�,.
1 3.03 IiVS�'A��.ATI(9�! O�'�'OPS
2 A. Field Jointing:lNhere practicable, make in same manner as factory jointing using.dowels, splines,
3 adhesives, and fasteners recommended by manufacturer. Locate fieid joints as shown on
4 accepted shop drawings,factory prepared so there is no job site processing of top and edge �
5 surfaces.
6 B. Fastenings: Use concealed clamping devices for field joints, located within 6 inches of front, at
7 back edges and at intervals not exceeding 24 inches.Tighten in accordance with manufacturer's �-
8 instructions to exert a constant, heavy clamping pressure at joints.
9 C. Workmanship:Abut top and edge surfaces in one true plane, with internal supports placed to ��
10 prevent any deflection. Provide flush hairline joints in top units using clamping devices. .
11 D. Provide holes and cutouts as required for mechanical and electrical service fixtures.
12 E. Provide scribe moldings for closures at junctures of top, curb and splash with walls as �
13 recommended by manufacturer for materials involved. Use chemical resistant, permanently elastic ,�.
14 sealing compound where recommended by manufacturer.
15 3.0�4 A�7JUSTING
16 A. Adjust doors, drawers, hardware,fixtures, and other moving or operating parts to tunction
17 smoothly.
18 1. Adjust hinges so doors hang straight.
19 3.05 G�.E�►NING �
20 A. Clean caseworlc, countertops,shelves, and hardware.
21 3.Ofi PROT�CTIO�I �F �INISHED WORK
22 A. Do not permit finished casework to be exposed to continued construction activity.
23 B. Repair all damage done to premises as a result of installation.
24 C. Remove all debris generated by this installation on a daily basis.
�
25 END O� SECTION
2012-37/YCS AgricuRural Dept Improvements 12 3450- 10 FACTORY BUILT CASEWORK --
YELiIA HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
Y��M COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVEF�Id
1 SECTION 32 3113
2 C�9Alld LI�IK FENCES AND GAT�S
3 PART 1 GENERA�.
4 1.01 SECTION INCLIlDES
5 A. Fence framework,fabric,and accessories.
6 1. This Section includes the following:
7 a. Stationary-Galvanized steel chain link fence and gates for interior enclosures
8 B. Manual gates and related hardware.
9 1.02 REFEREIVCES
10 A. ASTM A 153/A 153M -Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel
11 Hardware; 2005.
12 B. ASTM A 392 - Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated Steel Chain-Link Fence Fabric; 2003.
13 C. ASTM F 567- Standard Practice for Installation of Chain-Link Fence; 2000.
14 D. ASTM F 568M -Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Externally Threaded Metric
15 Fasteners; 2004.
1b E. ASTM F 668-Standard Specification for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) and Other Organic
17 Polymer-Coated Steel Chain-Link Fence Fabric; 2004.
18 F. ASTM F 900-Standard Specification for Industrial and Commercial Swing Gates; 2005.
19 G. ASTM F 1083- Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Hot-Dipped Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)
20 Welded,for Fence Structures; 2004.
21 H. CLFMI CLF 2445 - Product Manual; Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute; 1997.
22 1.03 SUBM9'�TALS
23 A. See Section 01 3000-Administrative Requirements,for submittal procedures.
24 B. Product Data: Provide data on fabric, posts,accessories,fittings and hardware.
25 C. Shop Drawings: Indicate plan layout, spacing of components, post foundation dimensions,
26 hardware anchorage,and schedule of components.
27 1.04 t�UAL�"�Y ASSURANCE
28 A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this
29 section,with not less than three years of documented experience.
30 1. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain chain link fences and gates as complete units, including
31 necessary erection accessories, fittings, and fastenings from a single source or manufacturer.
32 1.Ov PROJ��1'�LOS�OUT
33 A. Warranty: General Contractor shall submit a 5-year written factory warranty, signed by the
34 manufacturer,to cover all galvanized components against rust and/or corrosion.
35 PART 2 PRODIJCT$
36 2.D9 MAN�IFAC7URERS
37 A. Chain Link Fences and Gates:
38 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of the following or
39 approved:
40 a. Members of Chain Link Fence Manufacturers' Institute
41 b. Master-Halco, Inc.: www.fenceonline.com.
42 c. Merchants Metals: www.merchantsmetals.com.
43 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000- Product Requirements.
44 2.02 iV1ATERIALS AND COMPONENTS
45 A. lvlaterials and Components: Conform to CLFMI Product Manual.
2012-37/YCS AgricuRural Dept Improvements 32 31 13- 1 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
A� DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELWI COMMUNiTY SCHOOLS
ERICKSUN MCGOVERN �-
1 B. Fabric Size: CLFMI Heavy Industrial service. �
2 1. Zino-coated Wire: ASTM A 392- 1.2 oz/sf.
3 2. Size: 2" mesh, 9 gage wire.
4 3. Knuckled selvage on both ends of fabric. tr
5 C. Intermediate Posts:Type I round.
6 1. Type I:ASTM F 1083, standard weight schedule 40; minimum yield strength of 30,000 psi;
7 sizes as indicated. Hot-dipped galvanized with minimum average 1.8 oz./ft2 of coated surface ,�,
8 area.
9 D. Terminal, Corner, Rail, Brace, and Gate Posts:Type I round.
10 1. Type I:ASTM F 1083, standard weight schedule 40; minimum yield strength of 30,000 psi;
11 sizes as indicated. Hot-dipped galvanized with minimum average 1.8 oz./ft2 of coated surface �
12 area. t
13 E. Gates:
14 1. Fabrication: Fabricate perimeter frames of gates from metal and finish to match fence �"
15 framework. Height of gate to be same height as adjacent fence unless noted or shown
16 otherwise. Assemble gate frames by welding. Provide horizontal and vertical members to
17 ensure proper gate operation and attachment of fabric, hardware, and accessories. Space �
18 frame members maximum of 8 feet apart unless otherwise indicated.
19 a. Provide same fabric as for fence unless otherwise indicated. Install fabric with tension �
20 bars and bands at vertical edges and at top and bottom edges.
21 b. Instatl diagonal cross bracing consisting of 5/16 inch diameter adjustable length truss `�
22 rods on gates to ensure frame rigidity without sag or twist. y
23 1) Swing Gates: Comply with ASTM f 900.
24 (a) Up to 6 feet High and 8 feet Wide: Fabricate perimeter frames of minimum ,�s
25 1.660 inch OD Type I steel pipe.
26 (b) Over 6 feet High and 8 Feet Wide: Fabricate perimeter frames of minimum -�r
27 1.90 inch OD Type I steel pipe.
28 (c) Gate Hardware: Provide hardware and accessories for each gate attached by �
29 means which will provide security against removal or breakage, galvanized per
30 ASTM A 153, and in accordance with the following:
31 (d) Hinges: Size and material to suit gate size with offset to permit 180 deg. gate ,�;
32 opening. Provide 1-1/2 pair of hinges for each leaf over 6 foot nominal height.
33 (1) Latch: Forked type for single gates less than 10 ft. wide or plunger-bar �
34 type to engage the center stop and permit operation from either side of
35 gate, with padlock eye as integral part of latch. �°
36 (2) Latch: For double gates up to 12'-0"total opening width provide"Frost
37 Free" latch assembly as manufactured by Master Halco or approved. Part `
38 No. 17205 or 17206 as required. To be used with 3/4" I.D. galvanized �
39 cane bolts 24 inch length with handle, Drill holes or set sleeve to receive
40 cane bolts. �
41 (3) Latch: For double gates in excess of 12 feet total opening width provide
42 "Fence Loc" latch assembly(bolt on Model FL-100) as manufactured by �
43 Cargo Protectors, Inc. (1-800-728-3038) or approved.
44 (4) Keeper: Provide keeper for vehicle gates, which automatically engages
45 gate leaf and holds it in open position until manually released.
46 2.03 r'aALVlNIZED COATEfl ACCESS{JRIES
47 A. Chain Link Fence Accessories:ASTM F 626- Provide items required to complete fence system.
48 Galvanize each ferrous metal item and finish to match framing. �
49 B. Caps: Galvanized;sized to post diameter, set screw retainer.
50 1. Post Caps: Formed steel or cast malleable iron weather tight closure cap for tubular posts.
51 Provide one cap for each post. Cap to have provision for barbed wire when necessary. "C"
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 32 3113 - 2 CHAW�INK FENCES AND GATES ,,,
YELM HIGH SCHDOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSt?N MCGOVERN
1 shaped line post without top rail or barbed wire supporting arms do not require post caps.
2 (Where top rail is used, provide tops to permit passage of top rail.j
3 C. �ittings: Sleeves, bands, clips, rail ends,tension bars,fasteners and fittings; steel.
4 D. Top Rail and Rail Ends: Pressed steel per ASTM F626,for connection of rail and brace to terminal
5 posts.
6 E. Top Rail Sleeves: 7"expansion sleeve with a minimum.137"wire diameter and 1.80" length spring,
7 allowing for expansion and contraction of top rail.
8 F. Wire Ties:9 gauge galvanized steet wire for attachment of fabric to line posts. Double wrap 13
9 gauge for rails and braces.
10 G. Brace and Tension (Stretcher Bar) Bands: Pressed steel, minimum 300 degree profile curvature
11 for secure fence post attachment.At square post pro�ide tension bar clips.
12 H. Tension (Stretcher) Bars: One piece lengths equal to 2 inches less than full height of fabric with a
13 minimum cross-section of 3/16"x 3/4". Provide tension (stretcher) bars where chain link fabric
14 meets terminal posts.
15 I. Tension Wire: Galvanized coated steel wire, 6 gauge, [0.192"(4.8 mm)] diameter wire with tensile
16 strength of 75,000 psi (517 MPa).
17 J. Truss Rods and Tightener: Steel rods with minimum diameter of 5/16". Capable of withstanding a
18 tension of minimum 2,000 Ibs.
19 2.Q4 FI�IISHES
20 A. Components: Coating of 1.8 oz./sq. ft. galvanizing.
21 B. Accessories: Same finish as framing.
22 2.05 SE�'TIfVG MATERIALS
23 A. Concrete: ilAinimum 28 day compressive strength of 3,000 psi (20 MPa).
24 F�ART 3 EXECUTIOi�
25 3.01 INSTA�LATlON
26 A. Install framework,fabric, accessories and gates in accordance with ASTM F 567.
27 B, Place fabric on outside of posts and rails.
28 C. Set intermediate posts plumb.
29 D. Vertical Posts to have base plates to be anchored to the existing concrete by epoxy bolting.
30 E. Corner, Gate and Terminal Post Footing Depth Below Finish Grade:ASTM F 567.
31 F. Brace each gate and corner post to adjacent line post with horizontal center brace rail and
32 diagonal truss rods. Install brace rail one bay from end and gate posts.
33 G. Provide top rail through line post tops and splice with 6 inch (150 mm) long rail sleeves.
34 H. Install center brace rail on corner gate leaves.
35 I. Do not stretch fabric until concrete foundation has cured 28 days.
36 J. Stretch fabric between terminal posts or at intervals of 100 feet (30 m) maximum,whichever is
37 less.
38 K. Position bottom of fabric 2 inches (50 mm) above finished grade.
39 L. Fasten fabric to top rail, line posts, braces, and bottom tension wire with tie wire at maximum 15
40 inches (380 mm) on centers.
41 M. Attach fabric to end, corner, and gate posts with tension bars and tension bar clips.
42 N. Install bottom tension wire stretched taut between terminal posts.
43 O. Do not attach the hinged side of gate to building wall; provide gate posts.
44 P. Install gate with fabric to match fence. Install hardware.
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 32 3113 - 3 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES
�;
YELM Fi1GH SCHf�OL
AG DEPT. iMPROVEMENTS
Y�L.M CUMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 3.0� �RECTIO��'t)L.�RANCES
2 A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch (6 mm).
3 B. Maximum Offset From True Position: 1 inch (25 mm).
4 3.03 �LEANUiP
5 A. Remove scraps and debris, resulting from work under this section, off the site, both inside and
6 outside fencing work. Rake excess dirt evenly and to finish grade. �
7 EIVD OF SECTION
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 32 3113-4 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES
��� TACOMA OFFICE
6021 12°h Street East, Suite 200
Tacoma,WA 98424
Phone (253)922-0446
� Fax (253)922-0896
YELM COMMUNI7Y SCHOOLS
YELpN HIGH SCHOOL.-AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENI'S
BCE PROJECT NO.213-003.00
JANUARY 30,2013
TABLE OF CONTEIdTS
Section Descriptian No. of Pages
DlViS10N 2�-MECHANICAL SPEClFICATIONS
20 0000 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 13
DIVISION 22-#�LUMBING SPECIFICATIONS
22 0523 VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 4
22 0529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING EQU4PMENT 4
22 0719 PIPING INSULATIONS 3
22 1116 DOMEST�C WATER PtPE AND fITTINGS 3
22 1119 PfPING SPECIALTIES 4
22 1300 SOIL,WASTE,AND VENT PIPING SYSTEM 4
22 2000 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR MECHANICAL
UNDERGROUND UTILITIES 5
22 3300 ELECTRIC STORAGE TYPE WATER HEATERS 2
22 4000 PLUMBfNG FIXTURES 3
DIV1Sl��l 23-t�EATING, VEiVTiLAi'ING, AND AIR COiVDIT10NING (HVAC)SPECIFICATIONS
23 0529 HANGERS &SUPPORTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 2
23 0548 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL 4
23 8239 ELECTRIC HEATERS 2
23 9000 DEMOLITIO�I 1
EN13 O�TABLE OF CONTENTS
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements TOC- 1 TABLE OF CONTENTS-MECHANICAL
YELM HIGH SCHOl7L
ACa DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
Y�LM �OMMUNiTY SCHOO�S
EfiICKSON IIACGOVEF3N
1 SECTION 20 0000
2 t;EN��AL ME�HANICA�RE4UIRE�VIENTS
3 P�►Ri' 1 GENERAL
4 1.01 GEi�ERA�
5 A. Includes, but not limited to, furnishing labor, materials, and equipment for completion of work
6 unless indicated or noted othervvise. See Division 01 for sequence of work.
7 B. Work indicated on the mechanical plans and in the specifications that will not be perfiarmed
8 t�y this Mechanical Contractor (i.e. duct and pipe block-outs, penetrations through walls,
9 floors, and attic, wall patching, work indicated to be performed by other Contractors, etc)
10 shall t�e coordinated with the General Contractor prior to bid. The Mechanical Contractor is
11 responsible for identifying quantity, size, and type of work with the General Contractor.
12 lNork not caordinated will be the responsibility of the Mechanical Contractar and shall not
13 b�charged as additional cost to the Owner,
14 C. All work included in Division 22 and 23 shall be the responsibility of a single Mechanical
15 Subcontractor.
16 D. This Contractor shall obtain and pay for all permits required by State and local authorities
17 governing the installation of the mechanical work. It is the Contractor's responsibility to contact all
18 utility organizations serving the building, prior to bid, and to include all charges for inspections,
19 installation of materials, equipment and connection of all required utilities.
20 E. Furnish exact location of electrical connections and complete information on motor controls to
21 Division 26, prior to bid.
22 F. Putting heating and exhaust systems into full operation and continuing their operation during each
23 working day of testing and balancing.
24 G. The drawings and specifications are complementary and what is called for in either is binding as if
25 called for in both.
26 H. The ductwork and accessibility to HVAC equipment shall take precedence over all other equipment
27 in the ceiling interstitial spaces or other mechanical areas including, but not limited to, domestic
28 water piping and electrical conduit.
29 1.02 R�LATED S�C'fICDNS
30 A. General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 apply to this Section.
31 1.03 Sl3BPr1lTTALS R�QIJIREMEMTS UF 7HIS SECTION
32 A. Access doors.
33 1.04 QUALlTY ASSURANC�
34 A. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies:
35 1. Perform work in accordance with applicable Codes.
36 2. In case of differences between building codes, state laws, local ordinances, utility company
37 regulations, and Contract Documents,the most stringent shall govern.
38 B. Product Approvals: See paragraphs elsewhere in this specification.
39 C. Warranties:
40 1. In addition to guarantee specified in General Conditions, guarantee heating, cooling, and
41 plumbing systems to be free from noise in operatian that may develop from failure to construct
42 system in accordance with Contract Documents.
�3
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 20 0000- 1 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
YELM hiIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS �
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
EFiICKSON MCGOVERN -
1 2. In order to be protected,secure proper guarantees from suppiiers and Subcontractors.
2 3. Provide certificates of warranty for each piece of equipment. Clearly record,"start-up" date of ,.
3 each piece of equipment on certificate. Include certificates as part of Operation &
4 IMaintenance Manual. ��
5 D. Manufacture: Use domestic made pipe, pipe fittings, and motors on Project. r
6 E. Identification: Motor and equipment name plates as well as applicable UL and AGA labels shall be �
7 in place when Project is turned over to Owner.
8 1.05 C��E�I�IVD STANLIARDS �
9 A. Codes and agencies having jurisdictional authority over mechanical installation.
10 1. Washington State Energy Code-- Latest Approved Edition
11 2. International Building Code -- Latest Approved Edition +
12 3. International Fire Code— Latest Approved Edition ,k
13 4. International Mechanical Code-- Latest Approved Edition
14 5. Uniform Plumbing Code-- Latest Approved Edition •
15 6. Local Sewer and Water District Requirements
16 7. State and County Department of Health �
17 8. Local Fire Marshal
18 9. Puget Sound Air Pollution Control
19 10. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) �.:
20 11. Washington Industrial Safety and Health Act (WISHA)
21 12. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) -
22 1.+06 SYSTEMS DESCFiIP'7101V �,,,
23 A. Site Inspectiorr:
24 1. Examine premises and understand the conditions which may affect performance of work of
25 this Division before submitting proposals for this work. «�.
26 2. No subsequent allowance for time or money will be considered for any consequence related to
27 failure to examine site conditions. -
28 1,07 DESIGN DRAVIII�GS «�
29 A. Mechanical drav+iings are not shop drawings and are intended to show general arrangement of
30 piping, ductwork, equipment, etc. Follotiv as closely as actual building construction and work of
31 other trades will permit. >
32 B. Consider architectural, structural and electrical drawings part of this work in so far as these
33 drawings furnish information relating to design and construction of building. Architectural drawings
34 take precedence over mechanical drawings.
35 C. Because of small scale of inechanical drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, and
36 accessories which may be required. The Mechanical Contractor shall include in the bid a sufficient
37 quantity of offsets, fittings, and accessories for the size of the project, based upon the contractor's �`
38 experience, necessary to facilitate mechanical utility installation. No additional costs shall be
39 charged for additional offsets, fittings, and accessories required to install the mechanical utilities
40 shown on the design drawings. Investigate structural and finish conditions affecting this work and
41 arrange work accordingly, providing such fittings, valves, and accessories required to meet
42 conditions.
43 1.08 PRE-CO�lSTRU�TION�t�ORDINATION MEETING
44 A. This Contractor is responsible to participate in coordination meetings with the General Contractor,
45 Fire Protection Contractor and other subcontractors needing to coordinate special requirements
46 (such as electrical contractor, HVAC contractor, plumbing contractor, etc.)
2012-37/YCS Agricuftural Dept Improvements 20 0000 - 2 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
YELiIA HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 B. Coordination meetings shall consider elevations, required clearances, and routings of all trades to
2 assure that all trades can be installed without conflict.
3 C. The outcome of this coordination shall allow each system (Mechanical, Fire Protection, Plumbing,
4 Electrical, etc)to be installed without further conflicts for space or locations.
5 D. Failure to coordinate with other trades and/or existing conditions that result in the removal and re-
6 installation of systems shaN not be charged as additional costs.
7 1,09 COORDINATION DRAWINGS
8 A. Develop coordination drawings, and other pre-installation coordination methods as necessary to
9 coordinate layouts prior to installation. Coordination drawings shall consist of overlay drawings, or
10 other similar methods to graphically indicate plumbing, fire protection, HVAC, electrical, and other
11 similar elements in a single location in order to identify conflicts. All elements shall be drawn to
12 scale. Coordination drawings are not required to be submitted for approval, except where indicated
13 otherwise in the specification. However, a minimum of one hard copy of coordination drawings
14 shall be present on site at all times and made available to the Architect/Engineer (A/E)
15 Representative upon request. If coordination drawings are not on file, or if systems are not
16 installed per coordination drawings, costs and delays of required reengineering, replacement and
17 other work required to correct conflicts shall be solely the Contractor's.
18 1. Contractor shall have the underground coordination drawings available upon request by A/E
19 Representative within 60 days after Notice to Proceed.
20 2. Contractor shall have the aboveground coordination drawings available upon request by A/E
21 Representative within 90 days after Notice to Proceed.
22 B. Coordination drawings shall consist of one of the following:
23 i. Drawing sheets developed sequentially by each trade with all components drawn to scale and
24 color coded to represent each trade.
25 C. Where coordination drawings, or other preinstallation coordination methods show that availab�e
26 space is inadequate or that modifications will affect architectural elements, request information from
27 the Architect before proceeding with work. No additional payment will be made for installation
28 conflicts which could have been identified by coordination drawings or other pre-installation
29 coordination methods.
30 D. Made runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize space efficiently to maximize accessibility for other
31 installations, for maintenance, and for repairs.
32 E. Each subcontractor shall:
33 1. Indicate the exact name, location and dimension of each element to be provided by that
34 subcontractor.
35 2. Arrange components as necessary to avoid conflict with new and existing conditions and the
36 work of other subcontractors as directed by the General Contractor.
37 3. Note requirements for sleeves, block-outs, cutting, patching, access doors, blocking, supports,
38 inserts and other similar items.
39 4, Notify the General Contractor of conflicts.
40 5. Approve the coordination drawings when afl conflicts are resolved and an acceptable layout is
41 obtained.
42 F. The General Contractor shall coordinate the layouts indicated on the coordination drawings and
43 resolve any conflicts prior to commencement of subject portions of the work.
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 20 0000- 3 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
YELIM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS �
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
�RICKSON MCGOVERN
1 1.14 �LEC7RICi�L �
2 A. All electrical work, conduit, boxes and devices in connection with control wiring as required to install '
3 the control equipment as specified herein or shown on the drawings shall be furnished and installed
4 complete by the Division 26 Contractor.
5 B. All electrical work performed under this Section of the Specifications shall conform to all applicable �
6 portions of the Division 26 specifications and shall confiorm to all governing codes. �
7 C. All equipment shall be factory wired to a junction box for connection to electrical service.
8 D. Where a piece of equipment specified includes an electric motor, the motor shall be furnished and
9 mounted by this Contractor. Motor starter, disconnect switches and wiring from the electrical panel �
10 to the motor control devices and to the motor shall be provided by the Division 26 Contractor unless
11 stated otherwise in the mechanical specification and on the mechanical equipment schedule.
12 E. All motor controllers and equipment panels (including but not limited to packaged equipment, '�
13 custom control panels, custom air handler panels) shall comply with NEC (including, but not limited
14 to, marking on controllers and labeling requirements).
15 1.11 "fEMPC1RAR1t'IiEA"fING ""'
16 A. Temporary heating for facility during construction phase shall not be supplied by the permanent �
17 system installed under these specifications, unless all of the following are satisfied:
18 1. Product warranties shall be extended to account for construction use. Contractor shall furnish °�
19 certified document stating such extended warranties. �
20 2. Contractor shall obtain letter of approval from the Owner stating that they understand
21 equipment expected life may be shortened due to severe usage. �
22 3. Contractor shall be responsible for pressure cleaning all coils prior to occupancy.
23 �.12 PRODUC°f FlANDLING ,,a►N� PROTECTIQId �Y
24 A. Contractor is responsible for protection of all material, equipment and apparatus provided under �
25 this Section from damage, water, corrosion, freezing and dust, both in storage and when installed, �
26 until final project acceptance.
27 B. Provide temporary heated and sheltered storage facilities for material and equipment.
28 C. Completely cover motors and other moving machinery to protect from dirt and water during �
29 construction.
30 D. Handle and protect equipment and/or material in manner prectuding unnecessary fire hazard.
31 E. Material or equipment damaged because of improper storage or protection will be rejected. �
32 F. Equipment finish that is damaged by handling, storage, etc. shall be corrected by the Contractor at
33 no additional cost to the Owner. -
34 i.13 DEF�INIT10�1�
35 A. Finished Spaces: Spaces used for habitation or occupancy where rough surfaces are plastered,
36 paneled, or otherwise treated to provide a pleasing appearance.
37 B. Unfinished Spaces: Spaces used for storage or work areas, such as fan rooms, mechanical and
38 boiler rooms, etc., where appearance is not a factor.
39 C. Concealed Spaces: Spaces out of sight. For example, above ceilings; below floors; between
40 double walls; furred-in areas; pipe and duct shafts; and similar spaces. "�
41 D. Exposed: Open to view. For example, pipe running through a room and not covered by other
42 construction.
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 20 0000- 4 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS >
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT, IMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 E. Outside: Open to view up to 5 feet beyond the exterior side of wails, above the roof, and
2 unexcavated or crawl spaces.
3 F. Conditioned Space: An area, room or space normally occupied and being heated or cooled for
4 human habitation by any equipment as defined by the extent of the building envelope insulation.
5 G. Replace: Existing mechanical equipment and components shall be demolished and discarded from
6 the project site or as directed otherwise. New mectianical equipment and components shall be
7 installed in the area where the existing mechanical equipment and components were demolished or
8 as indicated on the contract documents.
9 H. Removed: Existing mechanical equipment and components identified on the contract documents
10 shall be taken apart, taken down, and discarded from the project site unless directed otherwise on
11 plan. Removed items shall not be brought back to the project site for use or reinstallation.
12 I. Reinstall: Existing mechanical equipment and components identified on the contract documents
13 that need to be taken down and installed in the same or new location.
14 1.14 ABBREViA►TI(�NS
15 ADA Americans with Disabilities Act
16 A/E Architect/Engineer
17 AFF Above Finish Floor
18 AGA American Gas Association
19 AMCA Air Moving &Conditioning Association
20 ANSI American National Standards Institute
21 APWA American Public Works Association
22 ASHRAE American Society of Heating,Aefrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers
23 ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
24 ASTM American Society of Testing &Materials
25 AWWA American Water Works Association
26
27 BFF Below Finish Floor
28 BHP Brake Horsepower
29 BTU British Thermal Unit
30
31 CFM Cubic Feet per Minute
32 CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute
33
3� fpm feet per minute
35 FS Federal Specifications
36 F.C.O Flush Cleanout
37 F.D. Floor Drain
38 FWH Freeze Proof Wall Hydrant
39
40 GPM Gallons per Minute
41
42 HP Horsepower
43
44 IAPMO International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials
45 IAQ Indoor Air Quality
46 IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
47
48 KW Kilowatt
49
50 MBH One Thousand British Thermal Units per Hour
51
2012-37/YCS Agricuftural Dept Improvements 20 0000 - 5 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society
2
3 NEC National Electrical Code
4 NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
5 NFPA National Fire Protection Association
6 a,_
7 PDI Plumbing and Drainage lnstitute
8 per in accordance with ""�
9 POC Point of Connection
10 PSI Pounds per Square Inch Gauge Pressure
11 PVC Polyvinyl Chloride ,�,
12
13 SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Coniractors National Association ��
14 SP Static Pressure
15 =--
16 UL Underwriter's Laboratories
17 `"
18 VTR Vent Thru Roof
19 �"`
20 w.g. Water Gauge (inches of water) �
21 W.P. Working Pressure
22 WPL Weatherproof Louver �.
23 W�A Water Quality Association
24 Additional abbreviations are as listed on the drawings or elsewhere in these specifications.
�=
25 1.15 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
26 A. General: Provide schedule of values per Division 01 and related project requirements: �
27 1. Division 22 and 23 Breakdown: Provide schedule of values for each building, broken down .�;
28 into labor and materials per specification section at a minimum. Further breakdown into
29 subcategories is at the option of the Contractor, except as noted below: °°
30 a. Section 20 0000 — General Mechanical Requirements: Provide a subcategory for
31 "Mechanical Punchlist, Closeout and Owner Training". The dollar value for this �
32 subcategory shall be no less than 2.25% of the total dollar value of the Division 22 and 23 �.
33 work (or as indicated in Division 1, whichever is higher. The contractor shall receive
34 payment upon completion of all Mechanical Punchlist and Closeout items and Owner �F
35 Training.
36 b. Section 20 0000 — General iVlechanical Requirements: Provide a subcategory for "Pre-
37 Construction Coordination iVleeting." The dollar value for this subcategory shall be no
38 less than 1% of the total dollar value of the Division 22 and 23 work. Contractor shall „
39 submit the meetings sign in sheei to the Engineer for review. The sign in sheet shall -�
40 include the printed and signed names of the General and all subcontractors who attended
41 the meeting. The contractor shall receive payment once the sign-in sheet has been �
42 verified to meet the Pre-Instruction Coordination requirements of this Section.
43 a Section 20 0000 — General Mechanical Requirements: Provide a subcategory for
44 "Coordination Drawings". The dollar value for this subcategory shall be no less than 1%
45 of the total dollar value of the Division 22 and 23 work. The contractor shall receive
46 payment upon Engineer's ve�cation of Coordination Drawing completion, in accordance
47 with the requiremenis of fhis Section
48 d. Section 23 0800 —Commissioning HVAC System: The dollar value for "Commissioning"
49 shall in no case be less than 0.75% of the total dollar value of the Division 22 and 23
50 work (or as indicated in Division 1, whichever is higher). The contractor shall receive
51 payment upon completion of all outstanding commissioning items as identified by ihe
52 commissioning agent, Engineer, and/or Owner.
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 20 0000 - 6 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS :
YELM NIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 B. The Contractor is advised that in addition to payments held out for retainage and project final
2 completion (i.e. "Mechanical Punchlist, Closeout, and Owner Training"); as specified above and in
3 Division 01, the Owner reserves the right to withhold 10% of the funds for any of the above
4 categories until the systems (of that category) have been proven to operate as specified and have
5 been completely tested, adjusted, and balanced.
6 1.i6 SU�iIiIITTAL.PROCEDURES
7 A. All material used on the project shall be new and free of defects. The Architect and/or Engineer
8 reserves the right to reject any material, the appearance of which has been damaged on the site or
9 in shipment. The material shall be of pre-approved equal quality to that which is specified. Should
10 the make and type of material differ from that specified, the Contractor may be required to submit
11 catalog and engineering data (samples if requested) necessary to make a comparison and
12 determine its suitability. The Contractor shall also bear the cost of all changes to any aspect of the
13 project (electrical, mechanical, building, etc.) made necessary by any approved substitutions.
14 Approved substitutions include those listed as approved manufacturers or approved substitutions.
15 Tentative approval of substitute material and equipment will be made prior to bid only. Such
16 request for approval shall be made iwo weeks in advance of the bid opening to allow time to
17 assess its suitability. Failure to obtain approval prior to bid shall require the successful bidder to
18 furnish materials and equipment only as specified herein (see paragraph 2.01,this specification).
19 B. Equipment submittals shall be submitted per the following process:
20 1. Hard Copy Submittal Process:
21 a. The Contractor shall submit to the Architect, for approval, complete information on all
22 equipment and materials to be provided on the project. Provide copies as specified by
23 Division 1 and at a minimum provide six (6) copies of the manufacturer's catalog and
24 engineering data, shop drawings of shop fabricated equipment and instruction data for
25 each item included under this Section of the Specifications. The Contractor shall submit a
26 typed, signed list including all items to be furnished on the project. The signature on the
27 aforementioned iist shall indicate that the Contractor has examined the suitability of all
28 materiad and equipment with respect to compfiance with these specifications. The
29 Contractor's approval shall also indicate that physical dimensions of the equipment have
30 been verified with the installation requirements and were found to cause no interference
31 therewith. The submittal packages are as follows:
32 b. Furnish submittals in a hard-back, three-ring binder. The binder shall have tabs which
33 are indexed with a Table of Contents. The Table of Contents shall correlate an index
34 number for each individual specification number. If the equipment submittal is not bound
35 to the Engineer's satisfaction, it may be rejected.
36 2. Review of submittal data by the Engineer or Architect does not relieve the Contractor of
37 responsibility for quantities, measurements, and compliance with the intent of all contract
38 documents.
39 3. Furnish submittals generally according to the list below. Individual sections may contain more
40 specific submittal listing of the particular section labeled "Submittal Requirements." Furnish on
41 each particular section and the following equipment:
42 a. Pipe
43 b. Pipe Insulation
44 c. Hot Water Tanks
45 d. Plumbing Fixtures
46 e. Valves
47 f. Pipe Hangers
48 g. Piping Specialties
49
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 20 0000- 7 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
ACa DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS �
YE�i1A COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERiCKSON MCGOVERN
1 4. Any material found to be installed without prior approval will be required to be removed and '�
2 replaced with only specified material at Contractor's cost. �.
3 5. fVlechanical Drawings for the project have been developed by the Engineer using AutoCADT""
4 Revision 2007 software. These drawing files will be made available to the Contractor for �
5 development of shop drawings and/or "As-Builts"for a fee of$30.00 per sheet. Full payment
6 to be made prior to release of drawing files.
7 1.17 O�EFtA710N AND MAINTENAIVCE MANUAL FOR MECHANICAL SYSTENIS
8 A. Bind Operation & Maintenance Manual for Mechanical Systems in three-ring, hard-backed binder
9 with clear plastic pocket on spine. Spine of each binder shall have following typewritten lettering
10 inserted: "�
11 OPERATION
12 AN D
13 MAINTENANCE ,�
14 MANUAL
15 FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS �
16 B. Provide master index at beginning of Manual showing items included. Use plastic tab indexes for
�
17 Sections of ManuaL
18 C. First Section shall consist of name, address, and phons number of Architect, General Contractor, ��
19 and Mechanical, Plumbing, Sheet Metal, Refrigeration, Temperature control, and Electrical
20 Subcontractors. Also include complete list of equipment installed with name, address, and phone
21 number of each vendor.
22 D. Provide Section for each type of item of equipment. �,.
23 E. Submit copies as specified by Division 01 and at a minimum provide three (3) copies of Operation
24 & Maintenance Manual to Architect for his approvaL
25 F. Include descriptive literature (Manufacturer's catalog data) of each manufactured item. Literature "��
26 shall show capacities and size of equipment used and be marked indicating each specific item with �
27 applicable data underlined.
28 G. Include all warranties/guarantees including extended warranties.
29 H. Include all start-up logs.
30 I. Operating Instructions shall include:
31 1. Gener�l description of each mechanical system.
32 2. Step-by-step procedure to follow in putting each piece of inechanical equipment into `'
33 operation.
34 3. Provide diagram for electrical control system showing wiring of related electrical control items �y
35 such as firestats,fuses, interlocks, electrical switches, and relays.
36 4. Provide drawing of each temperature control panel identifying components on panels and their
37 function.
38 J. Maintenance Instructions shall include:
39 1. Manufacturer's maintenance instructions for each piece of inechanical equipment installed in
40 Project. Instructions shall include name of vendor, installation instructions, parts numbers and -
41 lists operation instructions of equipment, and maintenance and lubrication instructions.
42 2. Summary list of inechanical equipment requiring lubrication showing name of equipment,
43 location, and type and frequency of lubrication. ,
44 3. List of inechanical equipment used indicating name, model, serial number, and name plate
45 data of each item together with number and name associated with each system item.
46
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 20 0000 -8 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
'M'ELVVI COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 1.'i8 AS-BUILT DRA\IVINGS
2 A. The Contractor shall maintain, in addition to coordination drawings, an as-built set of prints that
3 clearly identify all deviations from the original design. The As-Built drawings shall be drafted per
4 one of the following methods:
5 1. Draft all revisions on a separate dark layer, on the coordination drawing set. The Contractor
6 shall maintain a copy of the original coordination drawing set.
7 2. Draft all revisions on the design drawings with a red color pencil.
8 B. This red lined set shall identify all drawing revisions including addenda items, change orders, and
9 Contractor revisions.
10 C. Drawings shall show locations of all underground pipe installed by this Contractor. Underground
11 pipes shall be shown with cross section elevations. All pipe, raceway, manholes or lines of other
12 trades shall be included.
13 D. The Contractor shall update all references to specific products to indicate products actually
14 installed on project.
15 1. Upon completion of the Division 22 and 23 Work, the Contractor shall deliver the red lined
16 drawings and one set of neatly drafted as-built drawings on electronic media in ACAD 2007
17 format and PDF files to the Engineer for transmittal through the Engineer to the Owner.
18 PAR1'2 AFiODUCTS
19 2.Q1 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS
20 A. Any reference to the specifications or on the drawings to any article, device, product, material,
21 fixture, form or type of construction by manufacturer, name, make, or catalog number shall be
22 interpreted as establishing a standard of quality and shall not be construed as limiting competition.
23 B. The manufacturer listed as Approved Manufacturers are approved to bid the project for the items
24 indicated without obtaining prior approval. Other manufacturers desiring to bid the project require
25 prior approval.
26 C. The listing of a manufacturer as an Approved Manufacturer does not necessarily mean that the
27 products of that manufacturer are equal to those specified. The listing is only an indication of those
28 manufacturers which may be capable of manufacturing, or have in the past manufactured, items
29 equal to those specified, and is intended to aid the Contractor in identifying manufacturers.
30 D. Products provided by Approved Manufacturers shall be equal to or superior to the specified
31 manufacturer's item in function, appearance, and quality, and shall fulfill all requirements of the
32 plans and specifications. The Architect/Engineer shall be the final judge as to whether an item
33 meets these requirements or not. If a manufacturer is not certain that his product meets these
34 requirements or not, then the manufacturer shall submit data as required to obtain the Design
35 ConsultanYs approval prior to bid opening.
36 E. The approval of a manufacturer applies to the manufacturer only and does not relieve the
37 Contractor from the responsibility of ineeting all applicable requirements of the plans and
38 specifications.
39 F. Contractor shall be responsible for all costs to other trades and all revisions required to
40 accommodate any products which are different from those specified or shown.
41 G. In reviewing a manufacturer for acceptance, factors considered include the following: engineering
42 data showing item's performance, proper local representation of manufacturer, likelihood of future
43 manufacturer's local support of product, service availability, previous installation, previous use by
44 Owner/EngineerlArchitect and record, product quality, availability/quality of maintenance and
45 operation data, capacity/pertormance compared to specified items, acoustics, items
46 geometrylaccess utility needs, and similar concerns.
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 20 0000-9 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS �
Y!ELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSf3N MCGOVERN
1 H. If approval is received to use other than specified items, responsibility for specified capacities and
2 ensuring that items to be furnished will fit space available lies with this Division. .
3 I. If non-specified equipment is used and it will not fit job site conditions, this Division assumes
�
4 responsibility for replacement with items named in Specification.
5 2.Q2 ACCESS DOOF�S
6 A. This Contractor shall be responsible for furnishing and installing flush mounted access doors in �
7 walls, ceiling and floors and chases where the following equipment is concealed and is not
8 accessibJe through same.
9 1. Valves (shut off, balancing, control,trap primers, etc). �
10 2, Dampers (control, balancing,fire, smoke, etc.).
11 B. Doors shall be UL listed 20 ga. cold rolled steel with concealed hinge, screwdriver operated lock
12 and prime coated. Furnish suitable for area mounted. Provide stainless steel access doors for non- �,
13 painted surtaces (i.e. tile, MDF}
14 C. Approved Manufacturers:
15 1. Milcor
16 2. Acudor
17 3. Greenheck
18 4. Nystrom
19 PART 3 EXECUTIORI
20 3.U1 WORK141ANSHIP
21 A. This Contractor shall provide completed systems with a neat and finished appearance. If, in the �
22 judgment of the Engineer, any portion of the work has not been performed in a workmanlike �
23 manner or is left in a rough, unfinished state, this Contractor will be required to remove, reinstall or
24 replace same and patch and paint surrounding surfaces in a manner acceptable to the Engineer, �
25 without increase in cost to the Owner.
26 3,02 FINAL INSPECTION
27 A. Final fnspection: �`�
28 1. Prior to acceptance of the mechanical work, the Contractor shall put all mechanical systems ,
29 into operation for a period of not less than 5 working days so that they may be inspected by
30 the Architect/Engineer and the Owner's representatives. �
31 2. The time of the final inspection shall be mutually agreed to by the Owner, Engineer, and
32 Contractor. "
33 3. The Contractor shall furnish adequate staff to operate the mechanical systems during
34 inspection.
35 3.03 OP�RAT�01d A�i� i�l�►INTE�IA�VCE 7RAiNING
36 A. Upon completion of the work, and after all tests and final inspection of the work by the Authority(s)
37 having jurisdiction, the Contractor shall demonstrate and instruct the Owner's designated operation
38 and maintenance personnel in the operation and maintenance of the various mechanical systems.
39 The Contractor shall arrange scheduled instruction periods with the Owner. The Contractor's -
40 representatives shall be Superintendents or Foremen knowledgeable in each system and
41 Supplier's Representative when so specified.
42 B. Schedu�ed instruction periods shall be:
43 HVAC Equipment Maintenance 2 Hours
44 Plumbing Equipment 2 Hours
2012-37/YCS Agricuftural Dept Improvements 20 0000 - 1� GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
YELM HiGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
EFtICKSON MCGOVERN
1 C. The contractor shall, at a minimum, include an Owner Training sign-in sheet in the O&M Manual
2 that indicates the start and end times of the training and the type of training provided. Owner shall
3 sign off on the Owner training sign-in sheet to be considered complete and satisfactory to Owner.
4 D. Costs for time involved by Contractor shall be included in the bid.
5 3.04 CLOSEQUT SUBMi�'TALS
6 A. Requirements: Final approval of inechanical installation will be recommended upon completion of
7 the following:
8 1. Completion of afi punchlist items
9 2. Owner Training Sign-In sheet with Owner's signature
10 3. Permit Submittal
11 4. Reproducible As-Built drawings delivered to Architect
12 5. Asbestos Free Statement
13 6. Guarantees
14 3.05 PREPARATION
15 A. Existing Buildings:
16 1. Cut carefully to minimize necessity for repairs to existing work. Do not cut beams, columns, or
17 trusses.
18 2. Patch and repair walls, floors, ceilings, and roofs with materials of same quality and
19 appearance as adjacent surfaces unless otherwise shown. Surface finishes by General
20 Contractor.
21 3. Cutting, patching, repairing, and replacing pavements, sidewalks, roads, and curbs to permit
22 installation of work of this Division is responsibility of Section installing work.
23 4. This work shall be scheduled such that utility services and/or existing systems for the facility
24 are not interrupted during normal operating hours, without prior written permission of the
25 Owner's representative. Work that is performed during normal operational hours shall not
26 interfere with the normal function of the facility's daily operation.
27 5. The Mechanical Contractor shall be responsible for the removal of all existing mechanical
28 equipment and utilities indicated to be removed on the drawings. The Mechanical Contractor
29 shall also be responsible for the removal and reinstallation of all existing mechanical
30 equipment and utilities that will interfere with instaflation and operation of any new construction
31 indicated or required and shall be responsible for the removal of all existing mechanical
32 equipment and utilities indicated to be abandoned that will interfere with installation and
33 operation of any new construction indicated or required. All mechanical equipment (other than
34 pipingj to be removed shall remain the property of the Owner, and shall be transported -
35 stored -or disposed of, as directed by the Owner. This will be at no cost to the Owner.
36 3:0& 11NSZALLATIOT�
37 A. Install mechanical equipment to permit easy access for normal maintenance, and so that parts
38 requiring periodic replacement or maintenance, (e.g., coils, sheaves, motors, bearings, etc.) can be
39 removed. Relocate items,which interfere with access.
40 B. Provide access doors in walls/ceilings as required to allow for inspection and proper maintenance.
41 C. Valves and other devices which are manually adjusted or operated shall be located so as to be
42 easily accessible by a person standing on the floor. Any such items which are not in the open shall
43 be made accessible through access openings in the building construction.
44 D. Gauges, thermometers, instrumentation and other components which are installed to monitor
45 equipment pe�formance, operating conditions, etc., shall be oriented so as to be easily read by a
46 person standing on the floor. Provide necessary brackets and hangers as needed,
2012-37/YCS Agricuftural Dept Improvements 20 0000 - 1 1 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
YELM HIGH SCIi00L
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS h
Y��.iVl COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN -
1 E. If circumstances at a particular location make the accessible installation of an item difficult or
2 inconvenient, the situation shall be discussed with the Architect/Engineer before installing the item
3 in a poor access location.
4 F. Belts, pulleys, couplings, projecting set screws, keys and other rotating parts which may pose a ro`
5 danger to personnel, shall be fully enclosed or guarded in accordance with OSHA regulations. ..
6 G. Dissimilar Metals: Provide separations between all dissimilar metals. Where not specified in
7 another way, use 10 mil black plastic tape wrapped at point of contact or plastic centering inserts.
8 H. Provide offsets around all electrical panels (and similar electrical equipment) to maintain space
9 clear above and below panel to structure and clearance of 3.5 feet directly in front of panel, except _
10 where indicated otherwise or required by NEC to be more. Such offsets are typically not shown on
11 the drawings, but are required per this paragraph.
12 I. Piping Through Framing: Piping through framing shall be installed in the approximate center of the �,
13 member. �/1/here focated such that nails or screws are likely to damage the pipe, a steel plate at
14 least 1/16-inch thick shall be installed to provide protection. At metal framing, wrap piping to -
15 prevent contact of dissimilar metals. At metal and wood framing, provide plastic pipe insulators at
16 piping penetrations through framing nearest each fixture and on at least 48-inch centers,
17 J. Safety Protection: All ductwork, piping and related items installed by this Contractor that present a -
18 safety hazard (i.e., items installed at/near head height, items projecting into maintenance access
19 paths, etc.) shall be covered (at hazardous area) with 3/4" thick elastomeric insulation and 2" wide °"
20 reflective red/white striped self-sticking safety tape.
21 K. Equipment Access: Access to equipment is of utmost importance. Contractor shall apply extra
22 attention to the laying out of pipe and duct routings, and in coordinating all work. Poor access to �`
23 equipment will not be accepted. Contractor shall note that in essentially all areas, piping routed in �_
24 ceiling space needs to run in joist space, necessitating elbows/fittings/transitions at crosses with
25 other trades, at structural beams, and at all connections to mains and branches. Hatched areas at �
26 HVAC units indicate equipment access areas. These (and all other) access areas shall be clear of
27 obstructions. The Mechanical Contractor is responsible to coordinate and ensure that all trades ""
28 stay clear of access areas for any Division 22 and 23 furnished equipment.
�<
29 L. Ensure that items to be furnished fit space available. Make necessary field measurements to
30 ascertain space requirements including those for connections and furnish and install equipment of �P
31 size and shape so final installation shall suit true intent and meaning of Contract Documents. �
32 M. Pipe Installation: Install piping in longest reasonable lengths. The use of short lengths of pipe with
33 multiple couplings where a single length of pipe could have been used is not acceptable.
34 3.07 ADJUSTI4�ENT,AN�? CLEANIIVC t
35 A. Properly lubricate equipment before Owner's acceptance.
36 B. Clean exposed piping, equipment, and fixtures, remove debris from site. Repair damaged finishes
37 and leave everything in working order.
38 C. Remove stickers from fixtures and adjust flush valves.
39 3.08 PAiNTi�l(a
40 A. Paint all exposed pieces of equipment if not factory finished or painted under the Architectural
41 Section of these specifications. Paint shall be one coat primer and two coats enamel color as
42 directed by the Architect. �
43 3.09 REBA7ES
44 A. Furnish vendor invoices on heat pumps to Owner after installation for power company rebates.
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 20 0000- 12 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 3.10 RE,QIJESTS FflH IiVFOR�tATIOId (I�FIj
2 A. It is our intent to provide a timely response for RFIs regarding Division 22 and 23 Work. To further
3 expedite this process, if a suggestion can be determined or derived at by the initiator of the RFI, it
4 is required this suggestion be supptied with the submitted RFI. If no suggestion is given where one
5 is possible, the RFI will be returned as incomplete. RFI`s will be returned to the Contractor within
6 seven (7) business days from the time received by the Architect/Engineer Representative.
7 END OF SECTION
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 20 0000 - 13 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
YELM HiGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 SE�TIt�Id 22 0523
2 lJALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
3 FAR�' 1 GENERAL
4 1.01 GENEFiAL
5 A. Includes, but not limited to, valve installation for all systems with domestic water.
6 1.02 RELATED DOGUMEN�S
7 A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
8 and Division 01 Specifications apply to this section.
9 1 A3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
10 A. Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single
11 manufacturer.
12 B. ASME Compliance:
13 1. ASME 616.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous dimensions and design criteria.
14 2. ASME B31.1 for power piping valves.
15 3. ASME 631.0 for building service piping valves.
16 C. NSF Compliance: NSF 61 and NSF 372 for valve material for potable-water service.
17 1.04 SUMMARY
18 A. Section Includes:
19 1. Gate valves.
20 2. Globe Valves
21 3. Ball valves.
22 4. Check valves.
23 1.05 SUBMI'fTAL REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTIORI
24 A. Product Data: For each type of valve indicated,
25 1 A6 OPERATION AND �IIIAINTENANCE REQUIREMEN7S OF THIS SEC710N
26 Not Applicable
27 �AFiT 2 �PRODUCTS
28 2.01 APPFiOVED NIAidIJ�ACTURES
29 Not Applicable
30 2.02 G�t�ER/4L
31 A. Provide factory-fabricated valves recommended by manufacturer for use in service indicated.
32 Provide valves of types and pressure rating indicated; provide proper selection as determined by
33 installer to comply wfth installation requirements. Provide sizes as indicated, and connections
34 which properly mate with pipe, tube, and equipment connections. Where more than one type is
35 indicated, selection is Installer's option. Valves shall be of same make for all these services.
36 2.03 GATE VALV�S
37 A. Packing - Select valves, equipped with packing suitable for intended service. (Under no
38 circumstances is asbestos acceptable.) Select valves designed so back seating protects packing
39 and stem threads from media when valve is fully opened, and equipped with gland follower.
40 Guides for disc on rising stem valves must be machined for accurate fit.
41
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 22 0523 - 1 VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
At'a CDEPT. IMPROVEMENTS �
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 B. Comply with the following standards:
2 1. Cast-Iron Valves: MSS SP- 70
3 2. Bronze Valves: MSS SP—80
�..
4 C. Valves:
5 1. Threaded Ends 2" and Smaller: Class 125, bronze body, screwed bonnet, rising stem, solid
6 wedge: Milwaukee 1JP148 or equaL (Non-rising stem gate valves may be used where
7 headroom prevents full extension of rising stems: Nibco T-113-LF, Milwaukee UP667 or
8 equal.)
9 2. Solder Ends 2" and Smaller: Class 125, bronze body, screwed bonnet, rising stem, solid
10 wedge: Milwaukee UP149 or equal. (Non-rising stem gate valves may be used whsre �°
11 headroom prevents full extension of rising stems: Nibco S-113-LF, Milwaukee UP668 or
12 equal.)
13 D. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide gate valves of one of the following: �
14 1. NIBCO
15 2. MILWAUKEE VALVE COMPANY
1 G 3. STOCKHAM �
17 2.U4 GLOBE VALVES
18 A. Packing - Select valves, equipped with packing suitable for intended service. (Under no
19 circumstances Ps asbestos acceptable.) Select valves designed so back seating protects packing
20 and stem threads from media when valve is fully opened, and equipped with gland follower.
21 B. Composition Discs -Where required, provide suitable material for intended service.
22 C. Comply with the following standards: '
23 1. Cast-Iron Valves: MSS SP -85 `
24 2. Bronze Valves: MSS SP-80
25 D. Valves:
26 1. Threaded Ends 2" and Smaller: Class 125, bronze body, union bonnet, rising stem, Teflon
27 disc: Nibco T-211-Y, Milwaukee UP502 or equaL ,�.
28 2. Soldered Ends 2" and Smaller: Class 125, bronze body, screwed bonnet, rising stem, bronze
29 disc{swivel type): Rlibco S-2�1-Y, Milenraukee UP1502 or equal.
30 E. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide globe valves of one of the
31 following:
32 1. NIBCO
33 2. MI�WAUKEE VALVE COMPANY
34 3. STOCKHAM ��
35 2.05 BA��.�IAL.VE�a
36 A. General - Select with FULL port opening blow-out proof stem, hard chrome plated bronze ball, .
37 rated not less than 600#W.O.G.
38 B. Comply with the following standards
39 1. MSS SP-110 Ball Valves-THREADED, SOLDER JOINT .-
40 C. Valves:
41 1. Threaded Ends 2" and Smaller: 600# W.O.G., bronze two piece body, full port hard chrome
42 plated bronze ball, true adjustable packing nut ("O"-ring only type stem seal not acceptable),
43 blow-out proof stem: Nibco T-585-70,Apollo 77CLF Series, Milwaukee 11PBA400 or equal.
2012-37/YCS AgricuRural Dept Improvements 22 0523 - 2 VALVES FOR PLUMBING PiPING
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
Y�LM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERIGKSON MCGOVERN
1 2. Soldered Ends 2" and Smaller: 600# W.O.G., bronze two piece body, full port hard chrome
2 plated bronze ball, true adjustable packing nut ("O"-ring only type stem seal not acceptable),
3 blow-out proof stem: Nibao 5-585-70, Apollo 77CLF Series, Milwaukee UPBA-4pOS, or
4 equal.
5 D. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide ball valves of one of the following:
6 1. NIBCO
7 2. MILWAUKEE VALVE COMPANY
8 3. APOLLO (BY CONBRACO INDUSTRIES)
9 2.06 SVViNG CHECI�VALVES
10 A. General -Construct pressure containing parts of Valves as follows:
11 1. Bronze Valves, 125 or 150 psi: ANSI/ASTM B 62
12 2. Iron Body Valves: ANSI/ASTM A-126, Grade B
13 B. Comply with the following standards for design, workmanship, material and testing:
14 1. Bronze Valves: MSS SP-80
15 2. Cast Iron Valves: MSS SP-71
16 C. Construct valves of pressure castings free of any impregnating materials.
17 D. Construct disc and hanger as one piece. Support hanger pins by removable side plug.
18 1. Valves:
19 a. Threaded Ends 2" and Smaller: Class 125, bronze body, screwed cap, 5 degree seated
20 swing, bronze disc: Nibco T-413-Y-LF, Milwaukee UP509 or equal.
21 b. Soldered Ends 2" and Smaller: Class 125, bronze body, screwed cap, 5 degree seated
22 swing, bronze disc: Nibco 5-413-Y-LF, Milwaukee UP1509 or equal.
23 c. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Swing Check valves of
24 one of the following:
25 1. NIBCO VALVE
26 2. MILWAUKEE VALVE COMPANY
27 3. STOCKHAM VALVE
28 4. VICTAULIC
29 2.07 SPRINCa IN-LINE�CHECK VALVES
30 A. General -Construct pressure containing parts of Valves as follows:
31 1. Bronze Valves, 125 or 150 psi: ANSI/ASTM B 62
32 2. Iron Body Valves: ANSI/AST�I A-126, Grade B
33 B. Comply with the following standards for design, workmanship, material and testing:
34 1. Bronze Valves: MSS SP-80
35 2. Cast Iron Valves: MSS SP-71
36 C. Construct valves of pressure castings free of any impregnating materials.
37 D. Construct disc and hanger as one piece. Support hanger pins by removable side plug.
38 1. Valves:
39 a. Threaded Ends 2" and Smaller: Class 125, bronze body, bronze or stainless steel spring
40 and disc holder, buna or PTFE disc ring, silent closing: Nibco T-480-Y-LF, Milwaukee
41 i�P548T,Apollo CVB-LF or equal.
42 b. Soldered Ends 2" and Smaller: Class 125, bronze body, bronze or stainless steel spring
43 and disc holder, buna or PTFE disc ring, silent closing: Nibco 5-480-Y-LF, Milwaukee
44 UP1548T,Apollo CVB-LF-800 or equal.
45 c. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Swing Check valves of
46 one of the following:
47 1. NIBCO VALVE
�t8
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 22 0523 -3 VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSOM MCGOVERN
1 2. MILWAUKEE VALVE COMPANY '�
2 3. STOCKHAM VALVE
3 PAR'�3 �EXECUTIO�d
4 3A1 INSTALLATiOfV
5 A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with the following requirements.
6 B. Install valves where required for proper operation of piping and equipment, including valves in �
7 branch lines where necessary to isolate sections of piping, Locate valves so as to be accessible ,..
8 and so that separate support can be provided when necessary.
�.
9 C. Install valves with stems pointed up, in vertical position where possible, but in no case with stems
10 pointed downward for horizontal plane unless unavoidable. n�
11 1. Applications Subject to Shock: Install valves with bodies of inetal oiher than cast iron where
12 thermal or mechanical shock is indicated or can be expected to occur.
13 2. Selection of Valve Ends (Pipe Connections): Except as otherwise indicated, select and install
14 valves with the following ends or types of pipe/tube connections:
15 a. Tube Size 2"and Smaller: Soldered-joint valves. �
16 b. Pipe Size 2" and Smaller: One of the following at installer's option:
17 1. Threaded Valves
18 2. Grooved-end Valves
19 3.02 fiVSTALL.ATION OF CHECK VALVES �
20 A. Swing Check Valves: Install in horizontal position, unless otherwise shown on drawings, with hinge
21 pin horizontally perpendicularto centerline of pipe. Instalf for proper direction of flaw. „�:.
22 END OF SECTION
�-
�:�
��
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 22 0523- 4 VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING �
YELnII WIGH SCHOOL.
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 S�CTION 22 0529
2 NANGERS�1'�D SUPPOR'fS FOR �LUMBING EQUIPMEN�'
3 PAR'T 1 �ENER�4L
4 �.0"� �aENERA�
5 A. Includes:
6 1. Pipe Hangers and Supports
7 2. Mechanical Equipment Anchors and Supports
8 1.02 RELQTED SECTIONS
9 A. All Division 23 using piping, ductwork, equipment and air terminals,
10 1.03 QUALITY ASS�RANCE
11 A. Pipe Hanger Standards: (MSS) Manufacturers Standardization Society Standards SP-58-2002,
12 SP-89-2003,and SP-69-2003.
13 B. All methods, materials, and workmanship shall conform to the International Building Code (IBC)
14 and International Mechanical Code (IMC), as amended and adopted by the authority having
15 jurisdiction.
16 1.OA SUBMSTTAL REQUIREM�NTS OF THIS SECTION
17 A. Hangers.
1 8 B. Struts.
19 C. Anchors.
20 D. Shop drawings are required for all equipment supports and fabricated supports or assemblies.
21 1 A5 OPER�►TION A�VD MAIIVTENANCE REQUIREMEiVTS OF THIS SECTION
22 Not applicable
23 PART 2 PROD�JCTS
24 2.01 APPROVE� 1VIANUFACTUFiERS
25 A. Hangers and Supports: Elcen, Grinnell, B-Line Systems, Unistrut, Michigan, Tolco, PHD.
2E B. Anchors: Rawplug, Phillips, Hilti, Michigan.
27 2.fl2 C�ENERAL HANGERS AND SUPP(7RTS
28 A. Hanger Rods: Threaded hot rolled steel, electro-galvanized or cadmium plated. Hanger rods shall
29 be sized so that the total load (including pipe or duct, insulation, hangers, and fluid) does not
30 exceed the following:
�lomiraa� Ro+� Diameter Ma�cimum Load
3/8 Inch 610 Pounds
1/2 Inch 1130 Pounds
31 B. Hanger Straps: Galvanized steel. Straps shall be sized so that the total load does not exceed the
32 following:
Strap Size Maxlmum Load
1"x 22 Gauge 230 Pounds
1"x 20 Gauge 290 Pounds
1"x 18 Gauge 380 Pounds
1"x 16 Gauge 630 Pounds
33 C. Beam Attachments: Shall be of the following type:
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 22 0529- 1 HANGERS AND SUPPORT FOR
PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
�
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
A�G DEP7. IMPROVEMENTS �,
'�ELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
�RICKSON MCGOVERN
MSS Type �Icen �i�ure No. �ronnel Fi�ure No.
21 33, 34 131
22 67 66
23 29A 87 V-
28 95 292, 228
30 95 229
1 D. Anchors: Masonry anchors shall be Phillips wedge anchors, Phillips "Red Head" or Rawl "Saber-
2 Tooth".
3 E. Steel: Structural steel per ASTM A36.
�F F. Wood: Shall be fire treated.
5 2.03 PiP� �iANGERS AND SUPPORTS
6 A. All hangers used directly on copper pipe shall be copper plated or have a factory applied 1/16-inch r
7 thick (minimum) plastic coating on all contact surfaces.
8 B. All other hangers,supports, and hardware shall be cadmium plated or galvanized.
9 C. Pipe Hangers and Supports; Shall be of the following type (numbers are 'MSS'): �
Maximum System Temperature Insulated Pipe Type p
120 to 450 Degrees 1, 3, 7, 9, 10, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, E
60 to 120 Degrees 1, 3, 7, 9, 10
33 to 59 Degrees 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 10, 41, 42, 43, 44, 45, 46, E
10 D. Vertical Pipe Supports: MSS Type 8 riser clamp (Elcen Fig. 39 and 339; Grinnel Fig. 261 and
11 261 C). �
12 E. Trapeze Hangers: Shall be constructed of carbon steel angles, channels, or other structural �:�
13 shapes with flat surtace for point of support. Trapeze hangers shall be supported with hanger rods
14 suspended from concrete inserts or approved structural clips. Provide a steel washer plate (Elcen �°
15 Fig. 84 or equal) where hanger rod nuts bear on trapeze hanger.
16 F. Insulated Pipe Supports and Insulation Shields:
17 1. Insulation material at pipe support shall consist of expanded perlite insert with flame resistant �
18 jacket of nylon reinforced kraft paper bonded to aluminum foil cover on insulation, with sheet
19 metal shield. Expanded perlite shall have no more than 5% deformation at 100 psi and a
20 thermal conductivity no more than 0.32 Btu/hr./sq.ft./degree F/1-inch thick. �,
21 2. Expanded perlite insert shall be same thickness as adjoining pipe insulation and sized to
22 match pipe in which it is used on. See Section 22 07 19 for insulation sizes. �
23 3. Provide shield per Section 22 11 19 Piping Specialties.
24 4. Manufacturer: Michigan Hanger Company, Model Nos. 1031 and 4031. �
25 PART 3 EXE�UTICIN -
26 3.01 IN�TAL�A"TIC}N - G�dVERAL
27 A. Provide all necessary bolts, nuts, washers, turnbuckles, rod connectors, and any other
28 miscellaneous accessories required for the support and anchoring of all pipes, ducts, and
29 mechanical equipment. ...-
30 B. Install steel or wood backing in walls (anchored to studs) as required to provide support for items
31 hung from walls.
32 C. Install concrete inserts and anchors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
33 D. All welded steel support assemblies shall have a power wire brush and primer paint finish.
34 E. Attach to building structure as shown on drawings (reference structural drawings).
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 22 0529- 2 HANGERS AND SUPPORT FOR
PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 F. Maximum spans between piping supports may be significantly less than the maximum spans
2 allowed herein due to structural limitations of allowable loads on hangers. The most restrictive
3 criteria governs. Reference structural drawings.
4 3,02 IIaSTAiLLe�►TION OF PIPE IiANGERS AND SUPPOR7S
5 A. Pipe which is not run underground, shall be adequately anchored to the structure to prevent
6 sagging and to keep pipe in alignment.
7 B. All pipe supports shall be provided with a means of adjustment for the aligning and leveling of the
8 pipe after installation.
9 C. Installation and sizing of pipe supports and accessories shall be in accordance with the
10 manufacturer's recommendations and standard MSS SP-89 and MSS SP-69, UBC 9-1 for fire
11 protection piping, UPC, and IMC.
12 D. Provide supports at each change in direction of piping; and on cast iron soil pipe at each branch
13 connection and at each side of concentrated loads.
14 E. Where mechanically coupled piping is used, a hanger shall be placed within 2 feet on each side of
15 couplings, with hanger spacing in no case to exceed the following:
Maximum Span Mechanically
Nominal Pipe Diameter Coupled Piping
3/4 to 1 Inch 7 Feet
1 �/4 to 1 '/z Inch 7 Feet
16 NOTE: Manufacturer's support instructions shall be used where it is more restrictive than the
17 above. Above is for rigid coupled piping systems. Follow manufacturer's requirements for flexible
18 piping systems, except that in no case are spacing to be more than the above.
19 F. Copper Tubing: Maximum spacing between supports:
Nominai Tubing Diameter Maximum Span Copper
'/2 Inch 5 Feet
3/4 to 1 '/4 Inch 6 Feet
20 G. Cast Iron Soil Pipe: Maximum spacing between supports shall be 5 feet, except when the pipe
21 length between joints exceeds 5 feet, in which case the maximum spacing between supports may
22 be 10 feet.
23 H. No-Hub Cast Iron Soil Pipe: Shall be supported at every other joint, except when the pipe length
24 between joints exceeds 4 feet, in which case the pipe shall be supported at each joint. Supports
25 shall be provided at each horizontal branch connection and shall be adjacent to couplings.
26 I. Three or more pipes running parallel may be supported on trapeze hangers provided the slopes of
27 such pipes allow use of common trapeze. Where trapeze width exceeds 24 inches, provide three
28 (3) hanger rod supports.
29 J. Provide additional supports at concentrated loads (such as valves, in-line pumps, etc.) on each
30 side of the load. Such supports are in addition to the ones otherwise required.
31 K. Vertical Piping Supports: Support piping at each floor line with pipe clamps and at intermediate
32 points as required to prevent excessive pipe movement and so as to comply with the maximum
33 spacings cited above. Support all pipe stacks at their bases with a concrete pier or suitable
3�l hanger. For vertical pipe drops which occur away from a wall or similar anchoring surface, provide
35 angled bracing from nearest structure to provide rigid anchoring of pipe drop.
36 L. Insulated Pipe Supports and Insulation Shields: Protect insulated pipe at point of support with pipe
37 insert and shield as required by the following table:
Naminal Pipe Insulation Length Shield Length Minimum Shield
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 22 0529 - 3 HANGERS AND SUPPORT FOR
PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS ..
YELM +COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
Diame#er in Inches ➢n inches ir� Inches Gauge `
'/z to 2 6 6 20
2'/z to 3 '/2 6 6 18
4to5 9 8 18 �-
6 to 10 9 8 16
1 Suc� supports shall be in piace a�the ti�ne of installing pipe,
2 M. Underground Pipe: Shall be evenly supported on approved bedding materials, as specified for the
3 type of piping being used. Such bedding and backfilling shall be as specified in Section 22 20 00.
4 3.03 I�dSTALLATION OF iV1ECHANICAL EQUIPMENT ANCHORS AND SUPPORTS
5 A. Provide anchoring and supports for all mechanical equipment.
6 B. Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning equipment where suspended from structure shali be
7 supported per SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards or as shown on the drawings. "
8 C. Equipment shall be supported and anchored in such a way so that no equipment vibration is
9 transmitted to the building structure.
10 D. Added supports and bracing shall be provided per Section 22 05 48.
11 E. Provide curbing as shown on drawings and as required to support all mechanical equipment.
�,
12 END UF SECTIOId -
�
�
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 22 0529 - 4 HANGERS AND SUPPORT FOR
PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNlTY SCHOOLS
ERICKSC7N MCGOVERN
1 SECTION 22 0719
2 PIPING INSU�ATIONS
3 AA�iT 1 GENERA�.
4 �.01 �GENERAL
5 A. Includes, but not limited to, insulating of piping and fittings per schedule in Part 3 of this
6 specification.
7 B. Insulation at Hangers: Insulation shall be continuous through hangers on al! insulated systems.
8 Inserts at hangers are specified in Section 22 0719 and are considered as part of the hanger and
9 support system. Inserts are required to be installed at the time of pipe installation and are intended
10 to be installed by the Contractor installing the pipe hangers/supports. See Section 22 0719.
11 C. The intent of this section is to meet or exceed the requirements of the most current version of the
12 Washington State Energy Code (WSEC). The stricter of this section and WSEC shall be met.
13 1.02 RELATED SECT#ONS
14 A. General Conditions, Division 01
15 B. Section 20 0000—General Mechanical Requirements
16 C. Section 22 0529—Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Equipment
17 D. Section 22 1116—Domestic Water Pipe and Fittings
18 1.�� SEC'9"lOfd l�ICILUDES
19 A. Piping insulation,jackets, and accessories.
20 1.04 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMEi�i'S O�THIS SEC"�ION
21 A. All insulation
22 B. Field Applied Jackets
23 1.CDa taPERATIORI AND iIAAINT�NANCE �EQUIREi1AENTS O�THIS SECTION
24 Not applicable
25 PAI�T 2 PRO{�UCTS
26 2.01 APPR��/ED MAidU�AC7URERS
27 A. Manville
28 B. Armstrong
29 C. Knauf
30 D. Owens Corning
31 E. IMCOA(for Flexible Unicellular Polyolefin only)
32 2,02 P1P'� IR#SULATIONS
33 A. Glass Fiber: Meeting ASTM C547; rigid molded, noncombustible.
34 1. 'K' ('ksi') Value: 0.23 at 75 degrees F (0.033 at 24 degrees C).
35 2. Maximum Service Temperature: 850 degrees F (454 degrees C).
36 3. Vapor Retarder Jacket: AP-T PLUS White kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and
37 bonded to aluminum foil, secure with self sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips or AP Jacket
38 with outward clinch expanding staqles or vapor barrier mastic as needed.
39 B. Field Applied Jackets:
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 22 0719- 1 PIPING INSULATIONS
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELIIA COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVER(�
1 1. PUC Plastic: One piece molded type fitting covers and jacketing material, gloss white.
2 a. Connections:Tacks; Pressure sensitive color matching vinyl tape.
3 b. Manville Zeston 2000.
4 2. Canvas Jacket: UL listed fabric, 6 oz/sq yd (220 g/sq m), plain weave cotton treated with
5 dilute fire retardant lagging adhesive.
6 3. Aluminum Jacket: 0.016 inch (0.045 mm) thick sheet, (smooth/embossed) finish, with
7 longitudinal slip joints and 2-inch (50 mm) laps, die shaped fitting covers with factory attached
�
8 protective liner.
9 4. Self-Adhering Jacketing: Material to be VentureClad [1579CW] with a white finish. Jacketing
10 material is to have a maximum flame spread/smoke developed index of 25120 per UL 723, 1
11 0.0000 water vapor permeance rating per ASTM E-96, mold inhibitors incorporated, and be '
12 UV stable.
13 �ART 3 EXEC�1Ti0�
14 3.01 EXAMINATIOfV AND PREPARATION �
15 A. Verify that piping has been tested for leakage in accordance with U.'P.C. standards before applying
16 insulation materials.
17 B. Verify that all surfaces are clean, dry, and free of foreign material.
18 3,02 INSTALL,ATION
19 A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, building codes, and industry
20 standards. `
21 B. Continue insulating vapor barrier through penetrations except where prohibited by code.
22 C. Piping Insuiation:
23 1. Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations.
24 2. Neatly finish insulation at supports, protrusions,and interruptions. �
25 3. Provide insulated dual temperature pipes or cold pipes conveying fluids below ambient
26 temperature with vapor retardant jacket with self sealing laps. lnsulate complete system.
27 4. For insulated pipes conveying fluids above ambient temperature, secure jackets with self
28 sealing lap or outward clinched, expanded staples. Bevel and seal ends of insulation at
29 equipment, flanges, and unions.
30 5. Insulated pipe supports and insulation shield shall be in place at each hanger and support as
31 required by Section 22 0529 prior to insulating.
32 6. For pi�pe exposed in mechanical equipment rooms or exposed in finished spaces up to 10 feet
33 above finished floor, finish with Manville Zeston 2000 PVC jacket and fitting covers, self-
34 adhering jacket, or aluminum jacket.
35 7. For exterior applications, provide weather protection jacket or coating. Insulated pipe, fittings,
36 joints, and valves shall be covered with Manville Zeston 2000 PVC, self-adhering jacket, or
37 aluminum jacket. Jacket seams shall be located on bottom side of horizontal piping. Install
38 per manufacturer's recommendations.
39 3.03 PIPI�V�G INSULA'��OI� SCHED�ILE
40 PIPE SIZE THICKNESS
41 I�iSULATiO�i TY�E INCH INCH
42 Glass Fiber lnsulation.
43 Domestic Hot Water Up to 2" 1° .
44 Cold Water Up to 4" 1"
45
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 22 0719 -2 PIPING INSULATIONS -
YEL�IM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 3.04 FI171NGS,VALVES, STRAINERS, Fa..ANGES, HEADERS, EXPAIVSION TANKS, HEA7'
2 EXCHANGERS,A�R C4NTROL EQUIPMENT, PUnAP Sl1CTlON AND DISCHARGE.INSULATION
3 COVERS
4 A. General: Provide all fitting insulation covers for pipe fittings, grooved end couplings, and for pipe
5 flanges.
6 B. Exposed Work: Provide "Zeston PVC" insuiated fitting covers applied after pipe insulation is
7 insta4led. A pre-cut "Hi-Lo Temp" insulation insert, conforming to the UL 25/50 rating, shall be
8 snugly tucked around the fitting making sure the fitting is covered with the fuil thickness of
9 insulation.
10 1. All others, provide covering in pad form, constructed as follows: Use 1-inch thick Owens-
11 Corning Fiberglas TIW Glass Wool, Type I, non-oiled, fully enclosed on all sides and edges
12 within tight-weave canvas jacket.Attach Bergen hooks around edges of pad. Fit pad to device
13 with edges tightly butted and secure with copper wire taced between hooks. Provide vapor
14 seal where vapor seal is required for adjacent insulation.
15 C. The one-piece UL 25/50 rated PVC fitting cover shall be snapped over the insulated fitting and
16 secured with tack fasteners, staples, or tape.
17 D. Gauge Lines: Insulate to the gauge shutoff valve.
18 3.05 PIP� �iANGERS
19 A. Do not allov� pipes to come in contact with hangers.
20 3.�6 RUNO�DTS
21 A. Runouts Indicate pipe insulation from main system to fixture for not more than 12'-0" in length and
22 less than 2" pipe.
23 END OF SECTIO�I
2012-37/YCS Agricuttural Dept Improvements 22 0719-3 PIPING INSULATIONS
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMAAUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 SEC"�ION 22 1916
2 DOMESTIC VUATER PiPE AND FI7TINGS
3 PART 1 GENERA�
4 1.01 GENERAL
5 A. Includes, but not limited to, general piping installation procedures for domestic water systems.
6 1.02 RELATEfl SECTIONS
7 A. General Conditions, Division 01
8 B. Section 20 0000—General Mechanical Requirements.
9 C. Section 22 0529—Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Equipment
10 D. Section 22 1119— Piping Specialties
11 E. Section 22 1300—Soil,Waste, and Vent Piping System
12 F. Section 22 2100—Sleeves and Seals for Plumbing Equipment
13 1.03 SUBMITTA�REQUIREMEtdTS OF THIS SECTIORI
14 A. Pipe
15 B. Solder
16 1.04 OPERA'fiON AND �1t1AINTENA9VCE REQUlREMENTS OF THIS SECTION
17 Not Applicable.
18 PART 2 PRODUCTS
19 2.01 APPROV�D MAIVUFAC7i�RES
20 Not applicable
21 2.02 PIPE{�OR POTABLE SYSTEMS)
22 A. Underground Piping (Inside Building Perimeter):
23 1. Type K Copper
24 B. Above Ground Piping:
25 1. Type L Copper:
26 a. Fittings:
27 1. Solder rype (all sizes), or
28 2. Mechanical press type (all sizes)
29 a. Approved Manufacturers:
30 (1) Viega ProPress
31 (2) Nibco
32 3. Mechanical couplings (2-1/2"and larger)
33 a. Approved Manufacturers:
34 (1) Victaulic
35 (2) Prior approved equal.
36 2. NSF61 316 L Stainless Steel:
37 a. Fittings:
38 1. Welded (all sizes), or
39 2. Mechanical press type(2" and smaller)
40 a. Approved Manufacturers:
41 (1) Victaulic
�2
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 22 1116- 1 DOMESTIC WATER PIPE AND FITTINGS
YE�M HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS �
YEL�1A COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN `
1 PAR"�3 �XECUTIOf�
2 3.0� '��5�'JALLA710N C9F P9PING AND FITTINGS
��
3 A. Furnish and install complete system of piping, valved as indicated or as recessary to completely
4 control entire apparatus. Pipe drawings are diagrammatic and indicate general location and �..
5 connections. Piping may have to be offset, lowered, or raised as required or directed at site. This
6 does not relieve this Division from responsibility for proper erection of systems of piping in every �
7 respect. ,,
8 B. Properly make adequate provisions for expansion, contraction, slope, and anchorage.
9 1. Cut piping accurately for fabrication to measurements established at site and work into place `�'
10 without springing or forcing. ,.
11 2. Remove burr and cutting slag from pipes.
12 3. Make changes in direction with proper fittings. �-
13 C. Install piping at such heights and in such a manner as to not interfere with removal of other
14 equipment, or devices, or block access to doors, windows, or access openings. Provide
15 accessible, ground joint unions in piping at connections to equipment. .�
16 D. Coordinate installation of piping with all trades which are affected by installation to avoid conflicts. �.
17 E. Consult all drawings for location of pipe spaces, electrical equipment, ceiling heights, door
18 openings, window openings, and other details and report discrepancies or possible conflicts to `�"
19 ArchitecUEngineer before installing pipe. M.
20 F. Allow sufficient clearances for installation of pipe insulation in thickness specified. If interterences
,�-
21 occur, reroute piping to accommodate insulation.
22 G. Make connections of dissimilar metals with insulating couplings. (di-electric unions). See Section "
23 22 1119—Piping Specialties. �
24 H. Cap or plug open ends of pipes and equipment to keep dirt and other foreign materials out of
25 system. Do not use plugs of rags, �nrool, cotton waste, or similar materials.
26 I. Do not use reducing bushings, street elbows, or close nipples.
27 J. T-drill procedure for connecting pipes will not be allowed. �-
28 K. Wrought tees shall be used on all branch piping and branch to main connections.
29 L. Bury water piping 6 inches minimum below bottom of slab and encase in 2 inches minimum of
30 sand.
31 M. Solder for potable water pipes shall be of a lead free type and shall conform to current UPC °`
32 standards for solder and all local code requirements,
33 1. Approved fVlanufacturers:
34 a. Canfield �.
35 b. J.W. Harris
36 c. Aqua-Clean
37 N. All piping in finished areas shall be installed concealed unless specifically noted otherwise. e�
38 O. Pitch all piping and provide drain valves so that all piping and equipment can be drained.
39 P. Provide escutcheons where pipe passes through walls,floors, or ceilings.
40 Q. Install all exposed piping parallel to the closest wall and in a neat, workmanlike manner.
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 22 1116- 2 DOMESTIC WATER PIPE AND FITfINGS
YELM HIGH SCii00L
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 3.02 DOiIAESTIC WATER PIPIiVdG TESTS AND ST�RILIZATION
2 A. Tests: As the work progresses each section of the water system shall be tested under a 100psi
3 hydrostatic test held for 2 hours without reduction of pressure (a pressure fluctuation of +/- 1 psi is
4 acceptable). If any leaks occur or piping or valves are found to be defective, same shalt be
5 removed and new material installed, and the test made on that section again until all material is
6 found to be satisfactory. Such test shall be made in the presence of the Owner's Representative.
7 B. Flushing and Chlorination: All piping shall be flushed to remove all dirt and foreign material. After
8 flushing, all piping shall be chlorinated in accordance with regulations of the Washington State
9 Health Dept. After the contact period, the chlorine shall be drained from the piping and the piping
10 flushed. The Contractor will take samples for bacteriological analysis. The water analysis must be
11 satisfactory before piping is acceptable.
12 END OF SECTION
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 22 1116-3 DOMESTIC WATER PIPE AND FITfINGS
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 SECTION 22 'i 119
2 PSPING SPECIALTIES
3 PART1 GENERAL
4 1.0� .(`'aE�ERAL
5 A. Furnish devices as indicated with complete installation procedures for systems.
6 �.02 REl�TED SECTIOfVS
7 A. General Conditions, Division 1
8 B. Section 20 0000—General Mechanical Requirements
9 C. Section 22 1116—Domestic Water Pipe and Fittings
10 D. Section 22 2000—Excavation and Backfill for Mechanical Underground Utilities
11 1.03 SIOBMITTA�REQUiREMENTS OF THIS SECTION
12 A. Thermometers
13 B. Gauges
14 C. Strainers
15 D. Unions
16 E. Trap Primers
17 F. Thermostatic Mixing Valves and Manufacturers Approved Piping Diagram
18 G. Backflow Prevention Devices
19 H. Thermal Expansion Tanks
20 1.04 OPERATION AND �!�!AlNTENANCE REQUIREMEIVTS O�THIS SECTIOId
21 Not Applicable.
22 PART 2 P�4DUCTS
23 2.0�1 A�PR01�E1� �►11,aNUFACTURERS �
24 A. Thermometers: Ashcroft, March, Taylor, Tel-Tru,Winters
25 B. Pressure Gauges: Ashcroft, Marsh,Taylor,Tel-Tru,Winters
26 C. Strainers: Armstrong, Bell and Gossett, Apollo Conbraco, Hoffman,Wheatley, Nibco
27 D. Flexible Connectors: �vtinnesota Flex, Resistoflex, Universal
28 E. Backflow Preventers: Apollo Conbraco,Wilkins,Watts
29 F. Dielectric Unions: Walter Vallett Company V-line, Clear Flow.
30 G. Thermostatic Mixing Valves: Bradley, Apollo Conbraco
31 H. Thermal Expansion Tanks: Armstrong, Amtrol, Wilkens
32 2.02 7'WER�VIOM£TERS
33 A. Adjustable angle type, 304 stainless steel stem, 5" reading dial type, true anti-parallax-dial black
3� numerals, markings in degrees F., stainless steel, double-strength glass viewing window. Provide
35 sockets with extension necks where installed on insulated piping
36 B. Thermometer Temperature Ranges:
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 22 1 1 19- 1 PIPING SPECIALTIES
YELM HiGW SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS �
Y5Li1►9 COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOI/ERId
iVleasuring Range Degree�. ancrements 4
Degree F
Domestic Cold Water 0-100 1
Domestic Hot Water 30—180 2
1 2.03 PRESSURE GAUGES -
2 A. Glycerin filled type, 2 '/2" reading dial with aluminum face and black numerals, markings in English
3 units, 304 stainless steel case and acrylic lens. Provide each gauge with snubber and needle �
4 valve. Provide sockets with e�ension necks where installed on insulated piping. �--
5 B. Pressure gauge ranges: �
Numeral
Measuring Range PSIG Intervals inter-Graduations -
PSIG
Domestic Hot Water 0- 160 20 2
Domestic Cold Water 0- 160 20 2
6 2.�4 STRAINE�dS
�
7 A. Water Strainers: "Y" type, same size as the pipe in which they are installed, with bronze bodies
8 rated for 125 psi working pressure, and with removable cover and sediment basket. Basket screen �
9 shall be stainless steel or monel, with a net free area of at least 3 times that of the entering pipe.
10 Provide with blowdown valve where shown on the drawings. �'
11 B. Air Strainers: Unless otherwise noted, air and gas line strainers shall be Y-pattern, iron body, 250
12 psi working pressure, with 40 mesh Monel screen packed with Everdur wool. Air line strainers shall
13 be fitted with brass blowoff cock. `�"
14 2,05 UN10�9S
15 A. Dielectric Waterways: Inert, non-corrosive thermoplastic lining with zinc electroplated casing, rated �
16 at 300 psi at 225 deg. F., conforming to ANSI/NSF 61. Type and size to match piping.
17 B. Unions on Copper Pipe: ��
18 1. In 2-Inch Pipe and Smaller:Wrought copper solder joint copper to copper union.
19 C. Unions on Steel Pipe:
20 1. In 3-1/2-Inch Pipe and Smaller: Screwed malleable iron with ground joints, brass to iron insert,
21 150 psi minimum working pressure. ��
22 2.t)6 �I�E SHIELDS (SADDL.ES) �-
23 A. Saddles shall be minimum, 20 gauge dimpled galvanized sheet steel covering 40% of the �TM
24 circumference of the insulation. Length shall be a minimum of 6". See Section 22 0529 Hangers
25 and Supports for longer shields.
26 2.07 TRAP PFi1�i1�RS
27 A. Provide an approved trap primer at each floor drain, funnel drain, shower drain, janitor mop sink,
28 and floor sink.
29 1. Automatic Trap Primers (Water Pressure Drop Activated): Up to 4 traps may be served by a .
30 single trap primer and trap primer distribution system. Distribution system shall be Sioux Chief
31 Manufacturing, model 695-D20, 695-30, 695-D40 or approved equal. Automatic primers shall
32 be concealed in every case, located in pipe spaces or wall cavities; and where not accessible
33 in a pipe space, provide an access panel. Elevate trap primer at increments of 12" per 20L.F. "
34 of pipe run to trap.
35 a. Sioux Chief Manufacturing
36 b. Mifab
2012-37/YCS Agricuftural Dept lmprovements 22 1119- 2 PIPING SPECIALTIES �A
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 2. Automatic Trap Primers (Electronically Activated): Up to 30 trap primers may be served by a
2 single electronic trap primer assembly. Electronic trap primer assemblies shall be provided
3 preassembled with and atmospheric vacuum breaker, preset 24 hour clock, manual over ride
4 switch/test button, calibrated manifold providing equal water distribution, and a recessed wall
5 box with a locking stainless steel access panel.
6 a. PPP (Precision Plumbing Products)
7 3. Trap primer Tailpieces: 17 GA chrome plated. To be installed on lavatories and hand sinks
8 only. One trap may be served by a single tailpiece trap primer. Provide with stainless steel
9 braided primer hose and escutcheon.
10 a. JR Smith
11 b. Watts
12 c. Zurn
13 2.08 7HERIMOSSATIC MIXING VALV�S
14 A. The thermostatic water mixing valve (TM� shall consist of a liquid-filled thermal motor or a solid
15 bimetal control mechanism with a positive shut-off of hot water when cold water supply is lost. The
16 TMV shall allow a restricted cold flow in the event of loss or interruption of the hot water supply. All
17 flow is shut off in the event of thermostat failure. The TMV shall be constructed of bronze bodies
18 with corrosion resistant components and shall be equipped with integral checkstops, thermometer,
19 outlet temperature gauge, and removable strainers. The TMV shall control the temperature to
20 within +/-3 degrees from low flow to the maximum flow rate scheduled.
21 B. For Emergency Eyewashes:
22 1. The mixing valve shall be manufactured specifically for emergency fixture applications and be
23 compliant with ANSI 358-1.
24 2. The mixing valve shall have solid bimetal thermostat directly linked to valve porting to control
25 the intake of hot and cold water and compensate for supply temperature and pressure
26 fluctuations.
27 3. Provide a locking type temperature regulator to prevent accidental movement, set temperature
28 at 80 degrees F.
29 4. The mixing valve shall close down on failure of cold water supply.
30 5. Shall have internal cold water bypass capable full flow upon failure of hot water supply.
31 6. Provide outlet dial thermometer, integral wall support, union angle check stops on inlets, and
32 recessed or surface mounted cabinet with locking access panel.
33 7. Mixing valves for eyewashes shall be capable of 4 gpm, including cold water bypass.
34 2A9 BACKFLOW �?RE1/E�lTION DEVICE�
35 A. Provide letter of certification to Owner.
36 B. Type and configuration shall conform to local authority requirements.
37 C. Backflow prevention devices requiring an air gap shall be provided with a Jr. Smith Model 3950 or
38 approved equal.
39 2.1U TH�RMAL E)CPANSION �'AfVi.S
40 A. Non-ASME Domestic Water Thermal Expansion Tank (For Systems With Water Heaters Less Than
41 or equal to 119 Gallons and/or 199 mbh):
42 1. The non-ASME domestic water thermal expansion tank shall be IAPMO and NSF listed.
43 2. The outer shell shall be high grade steel with exterior coating. The bladder shall be FDA
44 approved butyl rubber and prevent water from contact with shell interior. The assembly shall
45 incorporate a shrader valve for adjustable air precharge and lead free bronze system
46 connection. Expansion tank pressure is to set at the domestic water operating pressure.
47
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 22 1119 - 3 PIPING SPECIALTIES
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. 1MPROVEMENTS -
YELIIA �OMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN �
1 PART 3 EXECU71CDi�
2 3.Q1 INS'�'AL�ATIO�1
3 A. Thermometers: Install thermometers and thermal wells in piping at locations indicated, and so as
4 to be easily read. �
5 B. Pressure Gauges: Install pressure gauges at each side of pressure reducing valves; and as
�
6 indicated.
7 C. Strainers: Install strainers as indicated. Provide plugged gate or ball valve in blow-off connection `
8 on strainers, valve shall be same size as blow-off tapping. �,
9 D. Unions: Install unions in pipe connections to control valves, coils, regulators, reducers, all
10 equipment, and where it may be necessary to disconnect the equipment or piping for repairs or
11 maintenance; and as indicated. E
12 E. Thermostatic Mixing Valves: Install in accordance to installation detail and the manufacturer's
13 recommendations.
14 END OF SECTION °
�.
�.
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 22 1119-4 PIPING SPECIALTIES *
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 SECTION 22 1300
2 �OIL,WAST�&VEN�'PIPING SYSTEIIA
3 PAR� 7 GEfdERAL
4 9.01 GENERAL
5 A. Inciudes but not limited to:
6 1. Furnish and install soil, waste, and vent piping systems within buiiding and connect with
7 outside utility lines 5 feet out from building, or as indicated.
8 2. Perform excavating and backfilling required by work of this Section.
9 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
10 A. General Conditions, Division 01
11 B. Section 20 0000—General Mechanical Requirements
12 C. Section 22 0529—Hangers and Supports Plumbing Equipment
13 D. Section 22 1116—Domestic Water Pipe and Fittings
14 E. Section 22 20 00—Excavation and Backfill for Mechanical Underground Utilities
15 1.03 SUBMITTAL REQUIREi1AENTS OF TliIS SECTION
16 A. Pipe
17 B. Above ground couplings
18 C. Below ground couplings
19 D. Solvent Cement
20 1.tf4 t�PERATION AidD IN1AI�ITENA�ICE REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION
21 Not App'licable
22 PART 2 PRODUCTS
23 2.fl1 APPF�OVED MANUFACTURERS
24 Not Applicable
25 2.02 CAST 1R4N SOIL WASTE AN�V�INT �iPIfVG
26 A. Each piece of cast-iron pipe shall bear the manufacturer's identification mark and shall be certified
27 by the manufacturer to have met the requirements of the latest ASTM spec'rfications.
28 1. Above Ground Waste and Vent: All soil, waste and vent piping above ground shall be:
29 a. Hubless cast iron pipe and fittings: Conform to ASTM A888 and CISP1301.
30 1. Approved Manufacturers:
31 a. AB&I
32 b. Charlotte
33 c. Tyler
34 b. Couplings shall be constructed of 300 Series type stainless steel. There shatl be 2 bands
35 for pipe sizes up to 4" and a minimum of 4 bands for pipe sizes 5" and larger. Sealing
36 bands shalt require a minimum of 60-inch Ibs. torque per band. Neoprene gasket shall
37 meet ASTM C 564.
38 c. Approved Above Ground No Hub Couplers:
39 1. Thermafit-Regular Duty
40 2. Tyler-Standard No-Hub
41 3. Clamp-All Corp. - HI-TORQ 80
42
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 22 1300- 1 SOIL,WASTE&VENT PIPING SYSTEM
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS ,
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGCIVERN
1 2. Below Ground Waste and Vent: All soil and waste vent below ground shall be: -
2 a. Hubless Cast Iron Pipe and Fittings: Conform to ASTM A 888 &CISPI 301.
3 1. Approved Nlanufacturers:
4 a. AB&I �
5 b. Charlotte
6 c. Tyler
7 b. iVo Hub Coupling: Couplings shall be constructed of 300 Series type stainless steel with
8 a minimum shield thickness equal to 0.015. There shall be 2 bands for pipe sizes up to 4°
9 and a minimum of 4 bands for pipe sizes 5" and larger. Coupling shall be capable of ,,,
10 holding 15 psi of pressure. Sealing bands shall have a minimum thickness of 0.026 and
11 require a minimum of 80-inch Ibs. torque per band. Neoprene gasket shall meet ASTM C ��-
12 564.
13 c. Approved No Hub Coupling Manufacturers
14 1. Clamp-All Corp. - HI-TORQ 80
15 2. Thermafit-Heavy Duty
16 3. Belowground Waste and Vent Beyond 5' From The Building: All soil, waste, and vent piping
17 below ground shall be:
18 a. Plastic piping:ANSI/ASTM D2665-94 (PVC). �
19 b. Fitting: Comply with current UPC.
20 2A3 PVC 501�.WASTE AND VENT PIPING
21 A. Each pipe of PVC pipe shall bear the manufacturers identification mark and shall be certified by the
22 manufacturer to have met the requirements of the latest ASTM specifications.
23 B. Aboveground: All aboveground soil, waste and vent piping and fittings shall be type DWV and
�,..
24 comply with ASTM D 2665, ASTM D 2949, ASTM F 891, ASTM F 1488 and CSA CAN/CSA-
25 B181.2. n
26 C. Belowground: All below ground soil, waste and vent piping and fittings shall be type DWV and
27 comply with ASTM D 2665,ASTM D2949, ASTM F891 and CSA CAN/CSA-6181.2.
28 D. Below Ground PVC Waste and Vent Piping Beyond 5' Outside Building: Shall be type DWV and
29 comply with ASTM D 2665, ASTM D 2949, ASTM D 3034, ASTM F 891, CSA B 182.2 and CSA �
30 CAN/CSA-B182.4.
31 E. Joints
32 i. Mechanical Joints: Mechanical joints on drainage pipe shall be made with an elastomeric seal s
33 conforming to ASTM C 1173, ASTM D 3212 or CSA CAN/CSA-B602. Mechanical joints shall
34 not be installed in above-ground systems, unless otherwise approved. Joints shall be installed
35 in accordance v�ith the manufacturer's instructions.
36 2. Solvent Cementing: Joint surfaces shall be clean and free from moisture. A purple primer that �
37 conforms to ASTM F 656 shall be applied. Solvent cement not purple in color and conforming
38 to ASTM D 2564, CSA CAN/CSA-B137.3, CSA CAN/CSA-B181.2 ar CSA CAN/CSA-B182.1
39 shall be applied to all joint surfaces. The joint shall be made while the cement is wet and shall s
40 be in accordance with ASTM D 2855. Solvent-cement joints shall be permitted above or
41 belov�ground.
42 3. Threaded Joints: Threads shall conform to ASME B1.20.1. Schedule 80 or heavier pipe shall
43 be permitted to be threaded with dies specifically designed for plastic pipe. Approved thread
44 lubricant or tape shall be apptied on the male threads only.
45 2.04 ASS SOIL WAS7E AND VENT PIPING y
46 A. Each pipe of ABS pipe shall bear the manufacturers identification mark and shall be certified by the
d7 manufa�turer to have met the requirements of the latest ASTM specifications.
48 B. Aboveground: All aboveground soil waste and vent piping and fittings shall be type DWV and
49 comply with ASTM D 2661,ASTM F 628, CSA B181.1.
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 22 1300- 2 SOIL,WASTE&VENT PIPING SYSTEM s.
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 C. Belowground: All belowground soil waste and vent piping and fittings shall be type DWV and
2 comply with ASTM D 2661,ASTM F 628, CSA 8181.1.
3 D. Belowground ABS Waste and Vent Piping Beyond 5' Outside Building: Shall be type DWV and
4 comply with ASTM D 2661, ASTM D 2751 and ASTM F628.
5 E. Joints:
6 1. Mechanical Joints: Mechanical joints on drainage pipe shall be made with an elastomeric seal
7 conforming to ASTM C 1173, ASTM D 3212 or CSA CAN/CSA-B602. Mechanical joints shall
8 not be installed in above-ground systems, unless otherwise approved. Joints shall be installed
9 in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
10 2. Solvent Cementing: Joint surfaces shall be clean and free from moisture. A purple primer that
11 conforms to ASTM F 656 shall be applied. Solvent cement not purple in color and conforming
12 to ASTM D 2564, CSA CAN/CSA-6137.3, CSA CAN/CSA-B181.2 or CSA CAN/CSA-6182.1
13 shall be applied to all joint surtaces. The joint shall be made while the cement is wet and shall
14 be in accordance with ASTM D 2855. Solvent-cement joints shall be permitted above or
15 below ground.
16 3. Threaded Joints: Threads shall conform to ASME 61.20.1. Schedule 80 or heavier pipe shall
17 be permitted to be threaded with dies specifically designed for plastic pipe. Approved thread
18 lubricant or tape shall be applied on the male threads only.
19 PART 3 EXECIlTION
20 3.+D1 IiVS7AL.L�ITIO1�
21 A. Do not caulk threaded work.
22 B. Place cleanouts as follows:
23 1. Where shown on Drawings and near bottom of each stack and riser.
24 2. At every 90 degree change of direction for horizontal lines.
25 3. Every 100 feet of horizontal run.
26 4. Extended cleanout to accessible surface. Do not place cleanouts in carpeted floors. In such
27 locations, use wall type cleanouts.
28 C. Each fixture and appliance discharging water into sanitary sewer or building sewer lines shall have
29 seal trap in connection with complete venting system so gases pass freely to atmosphere with no
30 pressure or siphon condition on water seal.
31 D. Vent entire waste system to atmosphere. Discharge vent pipe minimum 14 inches above roof.
32 Join lines together in fewest practicable number before projecting above roof. Set back vent lines
33 so they will not pierce roof near edge or valley.
34 E. Use torque wrench to obtain proper tension in cinch bands on above ground hubless cast iron pipe.
35 Butt ends of pipe against centering flange of coupling.
36 F. Flash pipes passing through roof with 4 Ibs. per sq. ft. of sheet lead flashing (or as shown on the
37 plan) fitted snugly around pipes and caulk between flashing and pipe with flexible waterproof
38 compound. Extend lead up and turn in to pipe for min. 1"/vent. Flashing base shall be at least 24
39 inches square.
40 G. Grade soil and waste lines within building perimeter 1/4 inch fall per ft. in direction of flow.
41 H. For exterior waste piping under parking areas or roads use ductile iron or SDR 35 PVC (DWV
42 rated) if pipe is buried less than 5'-0" below finish paving or grade.
43 I. Installation shall comply with all the latest local plumbing, building, and fire code requirements.
44 Solvent cement joints shall be made in a two step process with primer manufactured for
45 thermoplastic piping systems and solvent cement conforming to ASTM D 2564,test installation with
46 water.
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 22 1300 -3 SOIL,WASTE&VENT PIPING SYSTEM
YELM H1GH SCHOOL.
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS ,�.
Y�LM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVEFiN
1 3.02 F��LD G1Ul�1L9T1(CO�ITROL w
2 A. Before piping is covered, conduct tests for leaks and defective work. Notify Architect prior to
3 testing. Correct leaks and defective work. Fill waste and vent system to roof level with water, 10
4 feet minimum, and show no leaks for two hours.
5 �ND OF SECTION
�.,
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 22 1300 - 4 SOIL,WASTE&VENT PIPING SYSTEM ��
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNiTY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 SEC710W 22 2000
2 EXCAVA7ICDN AND BACKF�LL�OR INECHANICAL UNDERGROUND UTILITIES
3 P,�►R�'� G�N�RA'�
4 1.0� �"'aENEFd/�1L INCLUDES
5 A. Excavation and Associated Grading.
6 B. Trenching and Trench Protection.
7 C. Backfilling and Compaction.
8 D. Verification of Existing Utilities.
9 E. Protection of Utilities.
10 1.02 RE�ATE�7 SECTIONS
11 A. Section 22 1116—Domestic Water Pipe and Fittings
12 B. Section 22 1300 - Soil,Waste and Vent Piping System
13 1.Q3 QUA�ITY ASSURANCE
14 A. Inspection of Job Conditions: Prior to starting work and during work, the installer shall examine the
15 work by others, site and job conditions under which excavation, trenching, and backfilling for
16 underground utilities work will be pertormed, and notify the General Contractor in writing of
17 unsatisfactory conditions or work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have
18 been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Installer.
19 B. Codes and Standards: Comply with requirements of the following codes and standards (Latest
20 Edition) except as modified herein:
21 1. International Conference of Building Officials, "Uniform Building Code".
22 2. Local requirements for all utility work.
23 3. OSHA and WISHA regulations.
24 4. APWA Standard Specifications.
25 1.04 �3�S�ONSIBILITY
26 A. The Contractor is solely responsible for compliance with the requirements of the drawings,
27 specifications, local codes and standards, proper construction coordination with work of other
28 trades, and protection and worker's safety. Contractor shall advise Design Consultant of any
29 discrepancy in, or disagreement with the specifications and/or drawings prior to starting work and
30 not proceed until issue is resolved. Commencement of work shall indicate Contractor's
31 acknowledgement of his expertise in this type of work. Any delay resulting from failure to comply
32 with this procedure will not be basis for an extension of the complstion date.
33 1.Qa APPLICABi�E PUBLlCIaT10NS
34 A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced.
35 B. American Society of Testing and materials (ASTM) publications:
36 D 422-63 Particle Size Analysis of Soils.
37 D 423-56 Liquid Limit of Soils.
38 D 42�-59 Plastic Limit and Plasticity Index of Soils.
39 D 1557-78 Moisture Density Relations of Soils using a 10 Ib. (4.54kg) Rammer and 18 inch
40 (457 mm) Drop.
41 D 2167-66 Density of Soil In-Place by the Rubber Balloon Method.
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 22 2000 - 1 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR
MECHANICAL UNDERGROUND UTILITIES
YELM HiGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOi.S
ERICKSON MCGOVERiV '"
1 D 2217-66 Wet preparation of Soil Samples for Particle-Size Analysis and Determination of Soil �
2 Contents.
3 D 2487-69 Class'rfication of Soils for Engineering Purposes.
4 D 2922-81 Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate In Place by Nuclear Methods
5 (Shallow Depth). -
6 E 548-79 Generic Criteria for Use in the Evaluation of Testing and Inspection Agencies.
7 �.06 �PERATION AND IVlAINTENANCE REQUIREVIAEiVTS OF THIS SECTION
8 Not Applicable.
9 PART 2 NIATERIALS
10 2.01 A�PROVED IIAANUFACI'4JRER5 �
11 Not applicable �=-
12 2.02 SATISFAGTO'�Y MA1'ERIALS ..
13 A. Materials classified as ASTM D2487, Unified Soil Classification System as SW, SP, GW, and GP
14 are satisfactory for backfill use. Materials classified as SP-SM, GP-GM, GM, GC and ML are also '�
15 satisfactory for backfill use provided that they contain moisture contents suitable for the intended �._
16 use and are reasonably free of organic matter. Native material, not considered unsatisfactory as
17 specified below, may comply. Except that no material shall have any object with a dimension
18 exceeding 2 inches.
19 2A3 UiVSATISFACTORY IUTATERIALS
20 A. Materials classified in ASTM D2487, Unified Soil Classification System as PT, OH, and OL are �'�
21 unsatisfactory. Unsatisfactory materials also include man-made fills, refuse and all materials �:.
22 containing excessive organic matter or having moisture contents which are not suitable for the
23 intended use, or having objects with dimensions exceeding 2 inches (boulders, etc.). �
24 2A4 UNSTAB�LE MATERIAL ��
25 A. Unstable material shall consist of material too wet to properly support the utility pipe, conduit or ��:
26 appurtenance structure.
27 2.05 GRAV�LL`(SARID BORROW MATERIA� `
28 A. Gravelly sand borrow material to provide backfill, or replace unsuitable soil, shall meet the '�
29 requirements of SW, SP, GW, and GP materials, except that the maximum percentage passing the 4
30 No. 200 sieve shall not exceed 5% based on the soil fraction passing the U.S. No. 4 sie�e, and not
31 contain discrete particles greater than 2 inches in diameter. �
32 2.p6 DEGREE OF C0�1►1�AC�"10N
33 A. Degree of compaction shall be expressed as a percentage of the maximum density obtained by the
34 test procedure presented in ASTM D1557, Method C. Minimum compaction requirements shall be `�
35 as specified in PART 3.
36 2.07 DRAINAGE taFtA�l'�L �
37 A. Shall be 3/4 inch washed gravel with no more than 2% passing 1/2 inch sieve opening.
38 2,08 SP��CaAI� BEDDING AND �IVITIAL BAClCF1LL MATERIAL
39 A. Minus 3/8 inch washed pea graveL ��
40
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 22 2000 - 2 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR
MECHANICAL UNDERGROUND UTILITIES
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSfJN MCGOVERN
1
-. . . • � r � :
z
�
�: � �
��, �- �, .R � , �:r�"s # ,��;h
�.,,, �.; �� „� � ,F ,
Gravels GW Well-graded gravels and gravel-sand
50% or more Clean mixtures, little or no fines
of course Gravels Poorly graded gravels and gravel-sand
fraction GP mixtures, little or no fines
retained on
the No. 4 Gravels GM Silty gravels, gravel-sand-silt mixtures
Course-�Grained Soils sieve with Fines GC Clayey gravels, gravel-sand-clay mixtures
More than 50% retained
on the No. 200 sieve Sands SW Well-graded sands and gravelly sands, little
50% or more Clean or no fines
of course Sands SP Poorly graded sands and gravelly sands,
fraction little or no fines
passes
the No. 4 Sands SM Silty sands, sand-silt mixtures
sieve with Fines SC Clayey sands, sand-clay mixtures
ML Inorganic silts,very fine sands, rock four,
silty or clayey fine sands
Silts and Clays Inorganic clays of low to medium plasticity,
Liquid Limit 50% or less C� gravelly/sandy/silty/lean clays
Fine-Gralned Soils Organic silts and organic silty clays of low
More than 50% passes �� plasticity
the No. 200 sieve
Inorganic silts, micaceous or diatomaceous
Silts and Clays MH fine sands or silts, elastic silts
Liquid Limit greater than CH Inorganic clays or high plasticity,fat clays
50%
OH Organic clays of inedium to high plasticity
Hi�hly Organic Soils PT Peat, muck, and other highly organic soils
Prefix: G = Gravel, S = Sand, M = Silt, C = Clay, O = Organic
Suffix:W=Well Graded, P = Poorly Graded, M =Silty, L= Clay, LL< 50%, H = Clay, LL> 50%
2 PART$ EXECU�'IpN
3 3.01 EXCAVATiO�J
4 A. If workers enter any trench or other excavation four or more feet in dspth that does not meet the
5 open pit requirements of WSDOT Section 2.09.3(3)B, it shall be shored and cribbed. The
6 Contractor alone shall be responsible for worker safety. All trench safety systems shall meet the
7 requirements of the Washington Industrial Safety and Health Act, Chapter 49.17 RCW.
8 B. Excavation of every description and of whatever substances encountered shall be performed to
9 allow the installation of all utilities at the lines and grades as required. During excavation, material
10 satisfactory for backfilling shall be stockpiled in an orderly manner at a distance from the banks of
11 the trench sufficient to avoid overloading and to prevent slides or cave-ins. Adequate drainage
12 shall be provided for the stockpiles and surrounding areas by means of ditches, dikes, or other
13 approved methods. The stockpiles shall also be protected from contamination with unsatisfactory
14 excavated material or other material that may destroy the quality and fitness of the suitable
15 stockpiled material.
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 22 2000 - 3 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR
MECHANICAL UNDERGROUND UTILITIES
�k
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS �
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN "'"
1 C. If the Contractor fails to protect the stockpiles and any material becomes unsatisfactory as a result,
2 such material shall be removed and replaced with satisfactory on-site or imported material from ka,
3 approved sources at no additional cost to the Owner.
�.
4 D. Excavated material not required or not satisfactory for backfill shall be removed from the site and
5 shall be disposed of off site, at the Contractor's expense, at the Contractor's waste area. Any ��
6 excess satisfactory excavated materials shall not be mixed with unsatisfactory materials.
7 Unsatisfactory materials shall not cover available suitable materials, or be disposed of in such a *�°
8 manner as to interfere with subsequent borrow operations.
9 E. Grading shall be done as may be necessary to prevent surface water from flowing into the
10 excavation, and any water accumulating therein shall be removed so that the stability of the bottom �'
11 and sides of the excavation is maintained. Unauthorized over-excavation shall be backfilled in e=
12 accordance with paragraph 3.05 BACKFILLIING at no additional cost to the Owner.
13 F. The Contractor shall provide any dewatering needed and is considered incidental to the Contract. �`°
14 3.02 TRENCH EXCAVATION
15 A. The trench shall be excavated as recommended by the manufacturer of the pipe to be installed �,-
16 unless shown otherwise on the drawings. Where recommended trench widths are exceeded,
17 redesign shall be performed by the Contractor using stronger pipe or special installation •°�
18 procedures. The cost of this redesign and the increased pipe or installation procedures shall be
19 borne by the Contractor without additional cost to the Owner. �
20 B. Bottom Preparation: The bottoms of trenches shall be accurately graded to provide uniform "
21 bearing and support for the bottom quadrant of each section of the pipe and for bedding. Bell holes
�
22 shall be excavated to the necessary size at each joint or coupling to eliminate point bearing.
23 Stones of 2 inches or greater in any dimension, or as recommended by the pipe manufacturer, .�.
24 whichever is smaller, shall be removed to avoid point bearing.
��.
25 C. Removal of Unsuitable Material: Where unsuitable material is encountered in the bottom of the
26 trench, such material shall be removed to the depth directed and replaced to the proper grade with �
27 select granular material as provided in paragraph 3.05 BACKFILLING. When removal of unsuitable
28 material is required due to the fault or neglect of the Contractor in his performance of the work, the �"
29 resulting material shall be excavated and replaced by the Contractor without additional cost to the
30 Owner.
31 D. Bedding: The bedding surface for the pipe shall provide a firm foundation of uniform density
32 throughout the entire length of the pipe. The pipe shall be bedded carefully in a soil foundation _
33 accurately shaped and rounded to conform to the lowest one-fourth of the outside portion of circular
34 pipe or to the lower curved portion of pipe arch for the entire length of pipe or arch. When �
35 necessary, the bedding shall be taped. Bell holes and depressions for joints shall be only of such
36 length, depth and width as required for properly making the particular type joint. Provide bedding
37 using pea gravel where noted on the drawings.
38 3.03 EXCAVATI��J FUR APPURTENANCES �
39 A. Excavation for manholes, catch basins, inlets, or similar structures below be sufficient to leave at
40 least 12 inches clear between the vuter structure surfaces and the face of the excavation or �•
41 support mernbers. When concrete or masonry is to be placed in an excavated area, special care
42 shall be taken nat to disturb the bottom of the excavation. Excavation to the final grade level shall -
43 not be made until just before the concrete or masonry is to be placed.
44 3.04 JA�KIf�(a, BORING, AND TUNNELING
45 A. Unless otherwise indicated, excavation shall be by open cut, except that sections of a trench may
46 be jacked, bored, or tunneled if the pipe, cable or duct can be safely and properly installed and F
47 backfill can be properly tamped in such sections.
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 22 2000 -4 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR
MECHANICAL UNDERGROUND UTILITfES '
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. lMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNI'fY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 3.05 BAC'�CFIi.L1N�
2 A. Backfiil materiai shall be compacted to 6" layers and as specified in Paragraph 3.07.
3 1. Trench Backfill: Trenches shall be backfilled to finish grade. The trench shall be backfilled to
4 above the top of pipe prior to performing the required pressure tests (except that where piping
5 requires insulation, the pipe shall have an initial test prior to insulating and then a final test as
6 specified hecein). The joints and couplings shall be ieft uncovered during the pressure test.
7 2. Replacement of Unstable Material: Unstable material removed from the bottom of the trench of
8 excavation shall be replaced with select granular material or gravel borrow placed in layers not
9 exceeding 6 inches loose thickness.
10 3. Bedding and Initial Backfill: Bedding shall consist of satisfactory materials. Initial backfill shall
11 be in 6 inch lift.
12 3.06 SP�CIAL REQUIREMEN'TS
13 A. Special requirements for excavation, backfill, and bedding relating to the specific utilities are as
14 follows
15 1. Domestic Water Lines: Trenches shall be of a depth to provide a minimum cover of 3.0 feet
16 from the existing ground surface, or from the indicated finished grade, whichever is lower, to
17 the top of the pipe. Except that branch lines serving individual fixtures within building footprint
18 shall have minimum of 1.0 faot cover. Bedding shall use "special bedding" materials as
19 specified in paragraph 2.07.
20 2. Where piping passes under footings, provide concrete fill starting 12 inches above pipe for
21 excavated length and width of footing above pipe for footing support. Concrete specification
22 shall match same provided for footing.
23 3.07 COMPACTION
24 A. Each layer of fill, or the excavated subgrade, shall be compacted to at least 95%, per ASTM
25 D1557, of laboratory maximum density. Compaction shall be accomplished by approved tamping
26 rollers, pneumatic-tired rollers, three-wheel power rollers, or other approved compaction
27 equipment.
28 3.08 PROTEC'�ION
29 A. Newly graded excavated or bedded areas shall be protected from traffic and from erosion, and any
30 settlement or washing away that may occur from any cause, prior to acceptance, shall be repaired
31 and grades reestablished to the required elevations and slopes.
32 END O�SECTiON
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 22 2000- 5 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL FOR
MECHANICAL UNDERGROUND UTILITIES
�y
�.
�
�,,
ti�
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. iMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 SECTION 22 3300
2 E��CTRIC STORAGE TYRE WATEF$ HEATERS
3 PART 1 GENE�A�
4 1.01 GENERAL
5 A. Includes, but not Iimited to, furnishing and installing specified system.
6 1 A2 RELATED SECTIONS
7 A. General Conditions, Division 1
8 B. Section 20 0000—General Mechanical Requirements
9 C. Section 22 0548—Vibration and Seismic Control
10 D. Section 22 1116—Domestic Water Pipe and Fittings
11 1A3 SUBMITTAL RE4UIREMENTS O�THIS SECTION
12 A. Water heaters.
13 1.0�3 OP�RATION AiVD MAINTENA(VCE REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTIOW
14 Not Applicable
15 PA�dT 2 PRODUC�'S
16 2.01 APPROVED �VIAfVUFAC�'URERS
17 R. State
18 B. Lochinvar
19 C. Rheem/Ruud
20 D. Bradford White
21 E. A.O. Smith
22 2.02 CONIMERCIAL HEATER
23 A. The heater(s) shall be as scheduled. The heater shall be for (vertical/horizontal) installation with
24 lifting lugs and channel skid base. Vessel shall be constructed to Section IV of the ASME Code for
25 125 psi working pressure. Vessel shall be glass-lined with anodic protection. Entire vessel and
26 electrical controls are to be encased in a rectangular sheet metal enclosure with baked enamel
27 finish. Tank to be insulated with fiberglass insulation. Separate 2" dial type temperature gauge will
28 be mounted on the front of the enclosure. Enclosure to have hinged locking door over electric
29 controls. There shall be individually replaceable 4 bolt flange mounted, incoloy sheathed heating
30 elements, each complete with prewired terminal leads. These elements will be switched by
31 magnetic contactors which are operated by a 120V fused control circuit protected by manual reset
32 high limit. Control circuit is activated by a master pilot switch and electronic low water cutoff. The
33 thermostatic control of the contacts shall be staged thru solid state modulating step control which
34 will balance the water heating input to the demand. This control shall prevent the entire electrical
35 load from being switched on instantaneously. The control shall have even load progressive
36 sequencing which utilizes the "first on, first off" principle thereby equalizing the operating time of
37 heating elements and contactors. Each magnetic contactor and heating element circuit will be
38 protected by a maximum of 60 amp cartridge type fuses with a minimum of 100,000 amp
39 interrupting capacity. The entire water heating package shall be prewired to solderless terminal
40 lugs, factory tested, complete with ASME temperature and pressure relief valve and bear the
41 Underwriter's Laboratories label. Heater(s) shall have a 3 year limited warranty as outlined in the
42 written warranty.
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 22 3300 - 1 ELECTRIC STORAGE TYPE WATER HEATERS
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS ��
Y�LiN COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN `
��
1 PAF�T 3 EXECUTION
2 3.�1 iNSTe4��ATION
3 A. Water heaters shall each have a relief valve sized to match heat input and set to relieve at 120 psi. �=
4 B. Install temperature-pressure relief valve on hot water heater and pipe discharge directly above F
5 funnel of floor drain or as shown on plans.
�,
6 C. Provide a pre-charged, diaphragm type expansion tank "Amtrol" Model AST or approved equal.
7 Size per schedule on Hot Water Tank Piping Diagram.
S D. Water heaters installed in unconditioned space or on a concrete floor shall be placed on
9 incompressible insulation having a minimum insulation value of R-10.
10 E. Provide and install seismic bracing per S.M.A.C.N.A. zone 3. Ay
11 END OF SECTION
�
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 22 3300 -2 ELECTRIC STORAGE TYPE WATER HEATERS °
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. lMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 SECTION 22 4000
2 PL.UMBING FIX7URES
3 PAFYT 1 GENE�tAL
4 1,01 5Ui41 MARY
5 A. Includes, but not limited to, furnishing and installing specified plumbing fixtures. Provide and
6 install soft flow aerators on all lavatories and sinks (service sinks not included). See 3.03 for
7 energy conservation devices.
8 1 A2 RE�ATED SECTIONS
9 A. General Conditions, Division 1
10 B. Section 20 0000—General Mechanical Requirements
11 C. Section 22 1116—Domestic Water Pipe and Fittings
12 1.03 Ql1ALITY ASSURANCE(REGULATORY FiEQUIREMENTS)
13 A. Installation shall meet requirements of local codes and manufacturer's instructions.
14 1.�4 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMEidTS OF THIS SECTION
15 A. All plumbing fixtures in this section and called out on the plans.
16 B. Floor drains.
17 C. Clean outs.
18 D. Hose Bibbs.
19 1.p5 C1PERe4TI0N A�JD i►ilA1�,1TEi�lANCE FiEQUIR�MENTS OF THIS SECTION
20 Not Applicable
21 PAR7'2 �RQDUCTS
22 2.01 AA�'FtOVED AVIANUFACTI.JRERS
23 A. Stainless Steel Sinks:
24 1. Just
25 2. Elkay
26 B. Supply Stops:
27 1. Chicago Faucets "STB" Series, Loose Key
28 2. Engineers Brass Company (EBC) "LAH" Series, Loose Key
29 3. BrassCraft"'KT" Series, Loose Key
30 C. Faucets:
31 1. Chicago Faucets
32 2. Zurn
33 3. Symmons
34 4. Toto
35 5. Speakman
36 �. Moen
37 7. Delta
38 D. Waste:
39 1. EBC
40 2. Just
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 22 4000- 1 PLUMBING FIXTURES
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
'(�LIIA COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOV�RN `"
1 3. Elkay �
2 E. Traps:
3 1. EBC
4 2. Just
5 3. Elkay
6 4. Dearborn Brass
�,
7 F. Emergency Eye Wash:
8 1. Haws
9 2. Guardian
10 3. Bradley �`
11 4. Speakman
12 5. Acorn
13 �.02 FIXTURES '
14 A. See Schedule on Drawings. '
15 2.03 FLOOR DRAINS {F.D.) �
16 A. Cast iron body floor drain, with 5" nickel bronze adjustable strainer head, vandal proof screws,
17 and trap primer connections. Size outlet to match pipe size shown on drawings. Where used for
18 shower drain, provide with chrome plated strainer. Furnish with 6" diameter strainer and funnel �
19 where indicated.
20 B. Cast iron body floor drain, with Type 'N' 7" diameter, nickel bronze grate, vandal proof screws,
21 and trap primer connections. Size outlet to match pipe size shown on drawings. Use in �
22 mechanical rooms and utility spaces.
23 C. Approved Manufacturers: J.R. Smith,Zurn,Wade
24 2.04 CLEANC►UTS �
25 A. Finish Floors: �
26 1. Zurn ZN-1400
27 2. Smith#4023X „
28 3. Wade#W-6000 -
29 4. Josam #56010
30 B. Resilient Flooring: M
31 1. Zum ZN-1400-X
32 2. Smith#4143
33 3. Wade#W-6000-T °
34 4. Josam #56010-12
35 C. Finished Wall:
36 1. Zurn Z-1468
37 2. Smith#4472
38 3. Wade#W8460R
39 4. Josam #58890
40 D. Exposed Drain Lines
41 1. Zurn Z-1441
42 2. Smith #4402 ---
�3 3. Wade#W8560A
44 4. Josam #58510
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 22 4000 -2 PLUMBING FIXTURES r
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
Y�LM COMMUNITY SCHdOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 E. General Purpose:
2 1. Zurn Z-1441
3 2. Smith #4402
4 3. Wade#W8550A
5 4. Josam #58500
6 2.05 HOSE BiBBS
7 A. Approved types with integral vacuum breaker, chrome plated face and loose key. J.R. Smith
8 FIG 5618.
9 PAR'�3 �XECUTIOiV
10 3.01 G�NERAL
11 A. lnstallation: Install fixtures including traps and accessories with accessible stop or control valve
12 in each hot and cold water branch supply line.
13 B. Mounting: Verify mounting height with architectural elevations.
14 C. Make fixture floor connections with approved brand of cast iron floor flange, soldered or caulked
15 securely to waste pipe.
16 D. Make joints between fixtures and floor flanges tight with approved fixture setting compound or
17 gaskets.
18 E. Caulk between fixtures and wall and floor with white butyl rubber non-absorbent caulking
19 compound. Point edges.
20 F. All exposed metal shall be chrome-plated brass.
21 G. All fixture mounting heights shall be verified or determined on site prior to installation.
22 Coordinate with architectural drawings.
23 H. Install (1) bellows type water hammer arrester (at each quick acting valve). Jay R. Smith
24 Hydrotrol, Sioux Chief Manufacturing, Zurn Shoktrol or approved equal and for branch supply
25 lines up to 20' in length serving plumbing fixture groups. Install water hammer arrester befinreen
26 last two fixtures, for branch supply lines exceeding 20' in length, serving plumbing fixture groups
27 install water hammer arrester between middle two fixtures and last two fixtures, sizes as
28 indicated in the table below.
Water Harnrner Arrester Tab9e
Fixtures Units Water Hammer Rrrester Size
1-11 JR Smith#5005(4" High Shell)
29 I. Provide trap primer and connection to p-trap of floor drains.
30 J. Hose Bibb: Install at 18" above finished grade, unless otherwise indicated.
31 3.U2 ADJUS'�IIdG,�L�A�IING
32 A. Polish chrome finish at completion of Project.
33 B. Remove all manufacturers' labels tags, and protective plastic,
34 C. Clean all fixtures.
35 D. Polish floor drain covers,
36 END OF SECTION
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 22 4000 - 3 PLUMBING FIXTURES
�:e
�.
�-
�,-
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 SEC�'ION 23 0529
2 �tANGEF2S AND StJPPORTS FO�i HVAC Et'�UIPMENT
3 PART 1 GENERAL.
4 �,01 GENERAL
5 A. Includes:
6 1. Mechanical Equipment Anchors and Supports
7 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
8 A. All Division 23 equipment.
9 1.03 QUAL.ITY ASSIJRANCE
10 A. Pipe Hanger Standards: (MSS) IVlanufacturers Standardization Society Standards SP-58-2002,
11 SP-89-2003, and SP-69-2003.
12 B. All methods, materials, and workmanship shall conform to the International Building Code (IBC)
13 and International Mechanical Code (IMC), as amended and adopted by the authority having
14 jurisdiction.
15 1.04 SUBMI'I?AL REQUIREMEN'�S OF THIS SE�CTIO�d
16 A. Hangers.
17 B. Struts.
18 C. Anchors.
19 D. Shop drawings are required for all equipment supports and fabricated supports or assemblies.
20 1.05 OPERATION �►ND iWAINTENANCE OF THIS SECTION
21 Not Applicable
22 PART 2 PRODUCTS
23 2.01 AP�R�VED MAidUFACTURERS
24 A. Hangers and Supports: Elcen, Grinnell, B-Line Systems, Unistrut, Michigan, Tolco, PHD.
25 B. Anchors: Rawplug, Phillips, Hilti, Michigan.
26 2.02 GEN�RAL HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
27 A. Hanger Rods: Threaded hot rolled steel, electro-galvanized or cadmium plated. Hanger rods shall
28 be sized so that the total load (including pipe or duct, insulation, hangers, and fluid) does not
29 exceed the following:
Nominal Rad Diameter Mauimum Load
3/8 Inch 610 Pounds
30 B. Hanger Straps: Galvanized steel. Straps shall be sized so that the total load does not exceed the
31 following:
Strap Size Maximum Load
�"x 22 Gauge 230 Pounds
1"x 20 Gauge 290 Pounds
1"x 18 Gauge 380 Pounds
1"x 16 Gauge 630 Pounds
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 23 0529 - 1 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR
HVAC EQUIPMENT
�,.
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG LIEPT. IMPROVEMENTS �
�1'�LM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN "
1 C. Beam Attachments: Shall be of the following type: �
AASS Type Elcen Figure No. Grinnel Figure f�o.
21 33, 34 131
22 67 66 r-
23 29A 87
28 95 292, 228
30 95 229
2 D. Anchors: Masonry anchors shall be Phillips wedge anchors, Phi(lips "Red Head" or Rawl "Saber-
3 Tooth".
4 E. Steel: Structural steel per ASTM A36. x
5 F. Wood: Shall be fire treated.
6 PART 3 EXECUTIO�f
7 3.01 #NSTALLATION-GENERA�
8 A. Provide all necessary bolts, nuts, washers, turnbuckles, rod connectors, and any other
9 miscellaneous accessories required for the support and anchoring of all mechanical equipment. �
10 B. Install steel or wood backing in walls (anchored to studs) as required to provide support for items
11 hung from walls.
12 C. Attach to building structure as shown on drawings (reference structural drawings). �
13 3.02 CEiLINC; AIR TERAlI1NA�5/SERVICES 5
14 A. Unit heaters shall be supported directly from the structure above by approved hangers. �`�
15 3.U3 INST/�,LLATiOi�! OF MECHA�,�IICAL EQUIPIW]ENT ANCHORS AND SUPPORTS °
16 A. Provide anchoring and supports for all mechanical equipment. ,�,
17 B. Heating equipment where suspended from structure shall be supported per SMACNA HVAC Duct
18 Construction Standards or as shown on the drawings.
19 C. Equipment shall be supported and anchored in such a way so that no equipment vibration is �
20 transmitted to the building structure.
21 D. Added supports and bracing shall be provided per Section 22 0548.
22 E. Provide cu:rbing as shown on drawings and as required to support all mechanical equipment. N
23 E1VD OF SECTIO�1 "
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 2$0529 - 2 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR °
HVAC EQUIPMENT
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YEL.M COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON 1NCGOVERN
1 SECTION 23 0548
2 VIBRA�'iOIV AND SEISMIC CONTROL
3 PART' 1 G�NERA�
4 i.01 L'aE�dERAL REQUIREIIflEN7S
5 A. This section includes, but not limited to vibration isolation and seismic restraint installation for all
6 equipment, ductwork, and piping as described here-in.
7 B. Seismic Restraints shall be bidder-designed. Seismic Design Criteria are to be established per the
8 International Building Code and ASCE 7-05 along with Project Structural drawings.
9 C. Items not included in this specification shall not relieve the contractor of the responsibility of
10 providing seismic bracing that meets all the criteria required by the referenced codes and in
11 accordance with the seismic design guidelines and the project structural drawings.
12 1.02 �E�FERENCED CODE AND STANDARDS
13 A. The latest adopted versions of the following codes and standards apply to this section.
14 1. International Building Cods (IBC}
15 2. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA-13)
16 3. Seismic Restraint Manual—Guidelines for IVlechanical Systems (SMACNA)
17 4. ASCE 7-05, American Society of Civil Engineers "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and
18 Other Structures"
19 5. Applicable Project Structural Drawings for Seismic Design Criteria
20 6. Applicable iVlanufacturer's Seismic Design Guides for proprietary listed seismic bracing and
21 mounting hardware
22 7. Where there is a conflict in requirements between these guidelines and above mentioned
23 codes the more stringent parameters shall prevail.
24 1.03 RELA7ED SECTIONS
25 A. General Conditions, Division 1
26 B. Section 20 0000—General Mechanical Requirements
27 1,04 DESIGN CRITERIA
28 A. Occupancy Category of Structure (I-IV) per IBC or ASCE 7-05
29 B. Componerrt Importance Factor (IP) per ASCE 7-05
30 C. Mapped Acceleration Parameters (S, and (SS) per IBC and Project Structural Drawings
31 D. Site Class (A—F) per IBC and Project Structural Drawings
32 E. Site Coefficient (Fa) per IBC and Project Structural Drawings
33 F. Site Coefficient (F„) per IBC and Project Structural Drawings
34 G. Seismic Design Category (A — D) based on Short Period Response Accelerations per IBC and
35 Project Structural Drawings
36 H. Seismic Design Category (A— D) based on 1-Second Period Response Acceleration per IBC and
37 Project Structural Drawings
38 I. Amplification Factor ap per ASCE 7-05
39 J. Response Modification Factor Rp per ASCE 7-05
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 23 0548- 1 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL
YELM HfGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENT5
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOL.S
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
�
1 1.05 SUBMITTAL REt'�IJIREi41�NT5
2 A. Isolation Pads
3 B. Spring Isolators
4 G Seismic Control:
5 1. Periodic Special Inspections: The mechanical contractor shall provide a list of
6 components/systems requiring periodic special inspections per IBC. �
7 2. Special Certification Requirements: Each contractor responsible for the construction of a
8 "Designated Seismic System" for active mechanical equipment that must remain operable
9 following the design earthquake, or components with hazardous contents certified by the �.
10 manufacturer to maintain containment following the design earthquake shall submit a
11 Manufacturer's Certificate of Compliance for review and approval by the Registered Design =
12 Professional responsible for the design of the system. This information shall then be submitted
13 to the AHJ. �'
14 3. All brace or restraint components, mounting devices,snubbers and anchors.
15 1.06 OPERATIO� AND illlAINTENANCE REC�UIREMEiV7S OF THIS SECTIC?N
�
16 Not Applicable
17 PAF3T 2 PRODUCTS �
18 2.�� APPROV�D i1N1ANl�FACTURERS �
19 Not Applicable
20 2.02 NEOPRENE ISO�LA�'flR� �
21 A. Suspension Isolators: Shall be double deflection neoprene type, with isolator encased in open steel �-:
22 bracket and minimum 3/8-inch deflection. Hanger rod shall be isolated from steel bracket with
23 neoprene grommets. Mason Series HD, Amber Booth °BRD" or approved. �
24 2.03 SPRIN� ISOLATORS �x
25 A. General: The load carried by each isolator shall be carefully calculated and isolators selected so �,
26 that the static deflection will be the same and the supported equipment will remain level. Isolators
27 shall be so designed that the ends of the springs will remain parallel during and after deflection to �
28 operating height. At operating height, springs shall have additional travel to complete (solid)
29 compression equal to at least 50 percent of the operating deflection. Suspension isolator springs �°
30 shall have a static deflection {as shown on drawings) not less than 1-1/2", except that for units with
31 components rotating at 1000 rpm and less, the static deflection shall be not less than 2 inches.
32 Floor isolator springs shall have deflection of not less than 1 inch. All isolators shall provide at least
33 96% isolation efficiency. Note: Deflections other than these may be used where circumstances
34 warrant and more optimum isolation results can be achieved.
35 B. Suspension Type Spring Isolators: Shall consist of a rigid steel frame, a stable steel spring in the �
36 bottom part of the frame, and double deflection neoprene isolating pad at the top of the frame.
37 Where supporting rods pass through the frame, a clearance of not less than on half rod diameter
38 shall be provided all around the rod. Mason Series DNHS,Amber Booth "BSSR" or approved.
39 2.04 S�ISiI►�IC RESTRAINTS
40 A. General:
41 1. All seismic hangers and components shall be domestically made. Products designed
42 domestically and fabricated in a foreign country are prohibited.
43 2. Products not permitted include: powder actuated anchors, gas actuated anchors, or anchors
44 requiring epoxy.
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 23 0548- 2 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL
YELIIA HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 3. Only Steel or Ductile Iron components shall be provided. No Cast Iron or Cast Aluminum
2 components are allowed.
3 4. Steel shall be per ASTM A36; hangers and other devices shall be as shown in "SMACNA
4 Seismic Restraint Manual"or approved manufacturers seismic design guidelines.
5 B. Seismic Bracing (rigid and cable):
6 1. Approved Manufacturers:
7 a. Tolco
8 b. International Seismic Application Technology(ISAT)
9 c. Mason lndustries
10 d. Cooper B-Line
11 e. Kinetics Noise Control
12 f. AFCON
13 g. Gripple
14 h. PHD
15 i. Unistrut
16 j. Anvil or prior approved equal.
17 C. Seismic Anchorages (for wood, steef and concrete):
18 1. Approved Manufacturers:
19 a. Hilti
20 b. ITW Ramset/Red Head
21 c. IT1N Buildex
22 d. Mason Industries
23 e. Tolco,AFCON
24 f. Simpson Strong-Tie
25 g. Powers Fasteners, Inc. or prior approved equal.
26 D. Flexible Connectors:
27 1, Approved Manufacturers:
28 a. Mason tndustries
29 b. Metraflex
30 c. Victaulic
31 d. Kinetics Noise
32 e. International Seismic Application Technology (ISAT) or prior approved equal.
33 PART 3 EXECUTI()�1
34 3.01 VIBRAI'10lV 1S0l.ATIO1�
35 A. Motorized equipment shall be mounted on or suspended from spring vibration isolators either
36 integral or external to the equipment.
37 B. The design of vibration dampening shall consider lateral load as well as vertical load and be
38 suitably snubbed against earthquake forces.
39 C. A list of isolators accompanied by certified transmissibility ratings for the required duty shall be
40 submitted for each item of equipment.
41 D. Unless noted otherwise, all vibration isolating equipment shall be of the same make and shall be
42 submitted as one group,
43 E. All piping in the mechanical equipment rooms connected to vibrating equipment shall be supported
44 from resilient ceiling hangers or from floor mounted resilient supports.
45 3.02 SEISMIC B#�ACING GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 23 0548- 3 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. iMPROVEMENTS �
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERlCKSON MCGOVERN �
1 A. Support and bracing from the structure to mechanical equipment shall conform to the plumbing & �
2 HVAC industry standard SMACNA"Seismic Restraint Manual, Guidelines for Iulechanical Systems" �
3 or approved manufacturer's listed seismic assemblies.
4 3A3 JNSi'ALLATION
5 A. Installation of seismic restraints shall be as follows: �
6 1. Upon completion of installation of all seismic restraint materials and before start up of
�
7 restrained equipment, all debris shall be cleaned from beneath all protected equipment,
8 leaving equipment free to contact snubbers. a
9 2. All external utility connections to restrained equipment shall be designed to allow differential
10 seismic motion without damage to the equipment or utility connections. "�`
11 3. Adjust isolators and restraints after piping systems have been filled and equipment is at its
12 operating weight, following manufacturer's written instructions.
13 4. After equipment installation is completed, adjust limit stops following manufacturer's written �,
14 instructions so they are out of contact during normal operation.
15 5. Adjust snubbers according to manufacturer's written instructions.
16 6. Torque anchor bolts according to anchor manufacturer's written instructions to resist seismic
17 forces.
18 7. Attach piping to the trapeze per seismic restraint manufacturer's design. Install cables so they
19 do not bend across sharp edges of adjacent equipment or building structure.
20 8. Install vertical braces to stiffen hanger rods and prevent buckling per seismic restraint �
21 manufacturer's design. Clamp vertical brace to hanger rods. Requirements apply equally to
22 hanging equipment. Do not weld vertical braces to rods. �'
23 3A�t SPE�IAL �NSP'EC'TIONS
24 A. When required continuous or periodic special inspections of the equipment and systems
25 designated on the list provided by the mechanical contractor shall be performed in accordance with
26 the IBC and ASCE 7-05. The owner shall reserve the right to employ an approved special �
27 inspector.
28 B. Per the IBC, the registered design professional in responsible charge may designate members of
29 the A&E team to act as special inspectors provided those personnel meet the qualification �
30 requirements of the IBC to the satisfaction of the building official.
31 �ND OF SECTION
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 23 0548- 4 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROL =
YELM H1GH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSOM MCGOVERN
1 SECTI0�123 8239
2 EI�ECTRIC HEATERS
3 PART 1 GENERA�
4 �.01 SUMMARY
5 A. Includes but not limited to: Furnishing and installing specified materiai as described in the Contract
6 Documents.
7 B. Related Sections:
8 1. General Conditions and Division 1 apply to this section.
9 2. Section 20 0000—General Mechanical Requirements.
10 1.02 QUALlTY ASSURANCE
11 A. Units to be UL listed.
12 B. Shall conform to NEC and NFPA requirements.
13 1.03 OPEI3ATIOId AND i1IlAINTENANCE REqUIREMENTS O�THIS SECTION
14 Not Applicable
15 PART 2 PRODL9CTS
16 2.0� APPROVED NIANUFACTURERS
17 Not Applicable
18 2.02 �AN FORCED WALL HEATERS
19 A. Provide recess mounting in stud wall and surface mounting in block wall unless otherwise stated on
20 plans.
21 B. 20-gauge minimum sheet metal casing.
22 C. Heating element shall be encased in steel finned casting and protected by thermal switch.
23 D. Fan motor shall be heavy duty enclosed and permanently lubricated.
24 E. Fan shall be precision balanced and fan motor assembly mounted to be vibration free.
25 F. Units shail be controlled automatically by integral thermostat when heater is in "ON" position unless
26 otherwise stated on plans.
27 G. Heater shall have built-in fan delay.
28 H. Finish shall be baked-on enamel.
29 I. Bi-metallic limit turns the element off when an over temperature condition occurs. Automatically
30 resets when the normal temperature returns.
31 J. Approved manufacturer:
32 1. Berko
33 2. King
34 3. Markel
35 2.03 UNI'f HEATERS
36 A. Furnace shall be factory assembled unit, with blower, heaters, steel casing and completely wired.
37 B. Cabinet: 22-gauge minimum cold rolled steel with baked enamel finish. Interior of cabinet around
38 electric heating elements shalt be lined with 'h inch thick 1-1/2 Ib densityfiberglass insulation.
39 C. Blower:
2012-37/YCS Agricuftural Dept Improvements 23 8239- 1 ELECTRIC HEATERS
»�
YELM H1GH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS �-
YE�M COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 1. Propeller type, dynamically and statically balanced. �
2 2. Unit shall be direct drive.
3 D. Heaters:
4 1. High mass, all steel finned and tubular heating element.
5 2. Each set of heaters shall be equipped with limit control with fixed temperature "OFF" setting
6 and automatic reset with supplemental thermal cut-off safety fuses.
7 3. Provide fan time delay relay and circuit breakers. a
8 4. Furnaces shall have manually reset transformer.
9 E. Approved Manufacturers:
10 1. Indeeco °
11 2. Lennox
12 3. Markel
13 4. Trane �
14 PART 3 EXECUTSON .
15 Not Applicable
16 �ND OF SECTIOfV
�
�;
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 23$239- 2 ELECTRIC HEATERS
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNlTY SCHOOLS
ERIGKSON MCGOVERN
1 S�CTIt�N 23 9000
2 MECHAiVICAL DEMO�LITIOi�
3 P�P►RT � GE�IERA�
4 1.01 SI�NI�'IARY
5 A. Includes But Limited To: Demolition and maintaining existing systems.
6 B. Related Sections: General Conditions, Division 1 and Section 20 00 00 apply to this Section.
7 1A2 OP�RATION AND il�'IAIN'fENANCE REQUIREMENTS OF THIS SECTION
8 Not applicable
9 PART� PRODID�TS
10 Not applicable
11 PART 3 EXECUTIOdV
12 3.01 DEMOLI'�IUid
13 A. The Mechanical Contractor shall be responsible for the removal of all existing Mechanical
14 equipment including, but not limited to piping, fixtures, HVAC equipment, ductwork in areas shown
15 on the drawings and indicated thereon.
16 B. The Mechanical Contractor shall also be responsible for the removal and/or relocation of all
17 Mechanical equipment that will interfere with installation and operation of any new construction
18 indicated or required.
19 C. Any existing equipment to which modifications are made under this contract shall be painted and
20 labeled in accordance with specifications for new materials.
21 D. All Mechanical equipment (other than piping) to be removed shall remain the property of and shall
22 be transported, stored, or disposed as directed by the Owner. This will be at no cost to the Owner.
23 END OF SECTION
2012-37/YCS Agricuttural Dept Improvements 23 9000- 1 MECHANICAL DEMOLITION
��S TACOMA OFFICE
6021 12�'Street East,Suite 200
Tacoma,WA 98424
Phone (253)922-0446
•" Fax (253)922-0896
.'r
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
YE�.iV! HIGH SCHOOL-AG DEPT. IMPROVEMEidTS
BCE PROJECT NO,213-003.00
JANUARY 30,2013
TABL£t�F COMTENTS
SECTION DESCRIPTIOiN NO. (�F PAGES
DIVISIO�d 2S— ELECTRICAL SPECIFI�A710iVS
26 0000 ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS 8
26 0005 ELECTRICAL—EXiSiTNG SYSTEMS 2
26 0519 WIRES AND CABLES 2
26 0532 OUTLET AND PULL BOXES 3
26 0533 RACEWAY 3
26 2726 SWITCHES AND RECEPTACLES 2
26 5000 LIGHTING 3
END CDF TABLE OF CONTE�ITS
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements TOC- 1 TABLE OF CONTENTS-ELECTRICAL
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
. ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 SE�710N 26 OOOfl
2 El�EGTRICAL GENERAL CONDiTIONS
3 PART i GfNER�1L
4 1 Ai GE�IERAL
5 A. Conform to the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and related work in other Divisions
6 for all work in Division 26. See Division 01 for sequence of work.
7 1 A2 \IVORK lNCLUDED
8 A. It is the intention of this division of the specifications and the accompanying drawings to describe
9 and provide for the furnishing, installing, testing and placing in satisfactory and successful
10 operation all equipment, materials, devices and necessary appurtenances to provide a complete
11 electrical system, together with such other miscellaneous installations and equipment hereinafter
12 specified and/or shown in the plans. The work shall include all materials, appliances and apparatus
13 not specifically mentioned herein or noted on the plans, but which are necessary to make a
14 complete working installation of all electrical systems shown on the plans or described herein.
15 Equipment and devices furnished and installed under other divisions of this specification (or by the
16 Owner) shall be connected under this division. The drawings and specifications are complementary
17 and what is called for in either is binding as if called for in both.
18 B. By submitting a bid, the Contractor is acknowledging that he has made a thorough examination of
19 the Contract Documents, existing site and building conditions, and has determined that these
20 documents do sufficiently describe the scope of construction work required under this Contract.
21 1.03 SCOP'E OF BASIC BID
22 A. Included in Division 26 work is all work and related items necessary to provide all electrical
23 installations except as specifically excluded. In general, this includes all labor, equipment, tools,
24 etc.,to complete the electrical work.
25 1.U4 STANDARDS AND REGULATIONS
26 A. The work shall comply with the latest edition of the applicable Standards and Codes of the
27 following:
28 ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
29 NBFU National Board of Fire Underwriters
30 NEC National Electrical Code
31 --- State Electrical Code
32 NESC National Electrical Safety Code
33 NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
34 NFPA National Fire Protection Association
35 U.L. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
36 IPCEA Insulated Power Cable Engineers Associated
37 CBM Certified Ballasts Manufacturers
38 --- Federal, State and Local Building Codes
39 ETL Electrical Testing Laboratories
40 B. If any conflict occurs between Government adopted Code Rules and this specification, the codes
41 are to govern. Nothing in these drawings and specifications shall be construed to permit work not
42 conforming with governing codes. Also,this shall not be construed as relieving the Contractor from
43 complying with any requirements of the plans and specifications which may be in excess of, but not
44 in conflict with, requirements of the Governing Codes.
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 26 0000 - 1 ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS
YELM FiIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS �
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
�RICKSON MCGOVERN "
1 1.0� P�RMITS& �E�S �
2 A. The Contractor shall obtain and pay for all licenses, permits and inspections required by laws,
3 ordinances and rules governing work specified herein. The Contractor shall arrange for inspection
4 of work by the inspectors and shall give the inspectors all necessary assistance in their work of
5 inspection.
6 1.06 13�FINITIONS �-
7 A. VVhen "Provide" is used, it shall be interpreted as "furnishing and installing complete in operating
8 condition".
9 B. When "Drawings" is used, it shall be interpreted as "all Contract Drawings for all Disciplines". '"
10 C. When "Contractors"is used, it shall be interpreted as the Electrical Contractor. °
11 1.07 fNT�NT�F DRAWINGS .�
12 A. The electrical drawings are intended to serve as working drawings for general layout. The ,
13 equipment layout is diagrammatic and unless specifically dimensioned or detailed, does not
14 indicate all fittings, hardware or appurtenances required for a complete operating installation. �
15 B. Anything shown on the drawings but not covered in the specifications, or anything covered in the
16 specifications but not shown on the drawings, shall be as if covered in both. In case of conflict
17 between the dr.awings and specifications, the Engineer will select the method to be used. The �
18 Contractor shall be responsible for verifying all measurements before proceeding with the work.
19 C. Wiring diagrams are not intended to indicate the exact course of raceways or exact location of h
20 outlets. Raceway and outlet locations are approximately correct and are subject to revision as may �
21 be necessary or desirable at the time of installation. Precise location in every case shall be subject
22 to the Engineer's approval. `
23 1.08 PROT��TION �_
24 A. The Contractor shall store and guard all equipment before installation and shall protect same, and
25 replace any equipment that has been damaged prior to final acceptance.
26 1.09 HOUSE�EEPINta �
27 A. All electrical materials shall be kept stored in an orderly fashion protected from heat, cold, and the
28 weather.
29 B. All marred surfaces shall be refinished and painted after installation.
30 C. All debris shall be removed from premises during work, as directed, and at completion of job.
31 1.10 TEi1t1i�ORARY US� J
32 A. Temporary or interim use of any and all portions of the electrical system shall be under the
33 supervision of the Electrical Contractor.
34 1.11 A5-BUILI"��D�3�,WI�lGS
35 A. The Contractor shall maintain, in addition to any reference drawings, an as-built set of prints, on
36 which all deviations from the original design shall be drafted in a neat, legible manner with red n
37 colored pencil. This red lined set shall identify all drawing revisions including addenda items,
38 change orders, and Contractor revisions. The Contractor is responsible to revise panel schedules
39 and load calculations as required. -
40 B. Drawings shall show locations of all concealed raceway runs larger than 1", giving the number of -
41 conductors and size of raceway. Underground ducts shall be shown with cross section elevations.
42 All pipe, raceway, manholes or lines of other trades shall be included.
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 26 0000 - 2 ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS �
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 C. The Contractor shall update all references to specific products to indicate products actually
2 installed on project. This shall include, but not be limited to, lighting fixtures, baseboard heaters,
3 etc.
4 1.12 WARRAN'�Y
5 A. Provide a written warranty that the Division 26 work is free from mechanical and electrical defects.
6 Contractor shall replace and repair, to the satisfaction of the Engineer, any parts of the installation
7 which may fail within a period of 12 months after the certificate of final acceptance, provided that
8 such failure is due to defects in material or workmanship, or failure to follow the specifications and
9 drawings.
10 1.13 iNSTRUCTIOINS AND MANUALS
11 A. Manuals shall contain shop drawings, wiring diagrams, operating and maintenance instructions,
12 replacement parts lists, and equipment nameplate data for all equipment and systems installed
13 under the project. Signal equipment submittals shall contain step-by-step circuit description
14 information designed to acquaint maintenance personnel with equipment operation in each mode of
15 operation. Manuals shall contain original brochures supplied by manufacturers. Xerox copies of
16 originals will not be accepted.
17 B. Each type of device provided shall be identified in the O & M Manual using the same identification
18 as shown on the drawings and specifications. The information included must be the exact
19 equipment installed not the complete "line" of the Manufacturer. Where sheets show the
20 equipment installed and other equipment, the installed equipment shall be neatly and clearly
21 identified on such sheets. Parts lists shall give full ordering information assigned by the original
22 parts manufacturer. Relabeled and/or renumbered parts information as reassigned by equipment
23 supplier are not acceptable. The following information shall be provided for each device:
24 1. Manufacturer's name, address and phone number.
25 2. Local supplier's name, address and phone number.
26 3. Complete parts lists including quantities and manufacturer's part numbers.
27 4. Installation instructions.
28 5. Recommended maintenance items including maintenance procedure and recommended
29 interval of maintenance listed in hours of operation, calendar unity or other similar time unit.
30 1.14 WfJRK MOT INCLl1DED
31 A. Indicated motors, controls, and equipment as described in other divisions shall be furnished by
32 other trades, but shall be moved, set and wired to electrical controls and power supply by the
33 Electrical Contractor.
34 B. Work to be included under this Contract shall be defined on drawings and in these specifications.
35 Any details beyond these limits are meant only to give installation clarity to that portion which is a
36 part of this Contract.
37 1.15 C011i]PLE710�1 QF 1►►,/ORK
38 A. Upon completion of the Division 26 work, the Contractor shall deliver to the Engineer a completion
39 letter stating that he has fulfilled all the requirements of his Contract for Division 26 work as set
40 forth in the drawings and specifications and that all items in pre-final inspection lists submitted by
41 the Engineer have been satisfactorily completed.
42 B. Arrange for and obtain all required inspections and certificates pertaining to the Division 26 work
43 and deliver the certificates to the Engineer in triplicate.
44 C. Prior to or at the time of final inspection, the Contractor shall, as outlined in detail in the
45 specifications, complete the delivery of all the following items:
46 1. Completion Letter
47 2. Certificate of Final Inspection, in triplicate form.
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 26 0000 - 3 ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS �
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
Electricai inspector COMPLETION OF WORK f
Fire Department 26 00 00— 1.17
3. Warranty to Owner SUPPLEMENTARY GENERAL CONDITIONS
(with copy for Engineer) 26 00 00- 1.13 �
1 * Secure delivery instructions from Architect for delivery to Owner.
2 1.16 SHOF� DRAWING SUBMITTALS
3 A. The Contractor shall submit to the Architect no later than 30 days after the award of the Contract, a
4 minimum of seven (7) copies, each bound under separate cover, with index, detailed shop
5 drawings,to include:
6 1. Manufacturer's Catalog Data. �
7 2. Complete Physical and Technical Data.
8 3. Wiring Diagrams.
9 4. Detailed Reference (written or highlighted) noting compliance with the appropriate w
10 specification section and applicable item numbers within that section.
11 5. Other Descriptive Data as required by the Architect/Engineer. °
12 B. Shop drawings shall be submitted complete, at one time and each item indexed with dividers and ��,
13 separated per specification section and shall be, but not limited to the items of equipment listed
14 below: �
15 1. Motor starters and controls designating where items are intended to be used and equipment
16 being controlled. °
17 2. Disconnect Switches �
18 3. Fuses and spare fuse cabinet
19 �. Lighting Fixtures (Complete) �
20 5. Lighting Fix#ure Lamps and Ballasts referenced to fixture types
21 6. Occupancy Sensors &'
22 7. Wiring Devices
23 8. Coverplates "�
24 C. Within 10 working days after the date of the letter rejecting any items of equipment, lighting fixtures, '�
25 or materials as not in accordance with the specifications, Contractor shall submit a new list of items �.
26 he proposes to furnish and install in place of those items rejected. If the Contractor fails to submit
27 this new list within the above specified time, or if any items on this second list are rejected a5 not --
28 being in accordance with these specifications, the Engineer may select the items which the
29 Contractor shall furnish and install without change in Contract price or time of completion. "r
30 D. The acceptance of a manufacturer's name or product by the Engineer does not relieve the �-
31 Contractor of the responsibility for providing materials and equipment which comply in all details
32 with the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for �`"
33 submitting materials at such a time to allow a minimum of two weeks for Engineer's review. �
34 E. Electrical Drawings for the project have been developed by the Engineer using AutoCADT"'
35 Revision 2004 software. These drawing files will be made available to the Contractor for
36 development of shop drawings and/or"As-Builts"for a fee of$20.00 per sheet.
37 1.17 SCHEDU�E t�F VA�UES
38 A. Provide Schedule of Values per Division 01 and related project requirements. �
39 B. Division 26 Breakdown: Provide schedule of values for the following categories (as a minimum):
40 1. Electrical Mobilization, Submittals and Project Management �-
41 2. Electricaf Submittals
42 3. Branch Circuit Materials Rough-in and Labor
43 4. Light Fi�ures and Labor
�,
5. Fire Alarm System
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 26 0000- 4 ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS �
YELM HIGN SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMEN7S
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 6. Electrical Punchlist, Cioseout, and Owner Training
2 C. The dollar value for "Electrical Punchlist, Closeout, and Owner Training" shall in no case be less
3 than 2% of the total doilar value of the Division 26 work (or as indicated in Division 01, whichever is
4 higher).
5 D. The Contractor is advised that in addition to payments held out for retainage and project final
6 completion (i.e. Electrical Punchlist, Closeout, and Owner Training"), as specified above and in
��
7 Division 01, the Owner reserves the right to withhold 10% of the funds for any of the above
8 categories until the systems (of that category) have been proven to operate as specified and have
9 been completely tested and adjusted.
10 PART 2 PRODUCTS
11 2.01 COMPETIT�VE PRODUCTS
12 A. Any reference in the specifications to any article, device, product, material, fixture, form or type of
13 construction by name, make or catatog number shall be interpreted as establishing a standard of
14 quality and shall not be construed as limiting competition. The Contractor, in such cases, may at his
15 option use any article, device, product, material, fixture, form or type of construction which in the
16 judgment of the Engineer, expressed in writing, is equal to that specified. However, any
17 manufacturer not listed as an accepted bidder for a specific item must be submitted for acceptance
18 in writing and with descriptive data verifying equal quality and performance at least ten (10) working
19 days prior to the bid date for approval.
20 2.D2 MANU�ACTURER/EQUIPMENT PRIOR APPROVALS
21 A. Any manufacturer/equipment not listed as an approved substitute for a specified item must be
22 submitted for acceptance in writing, with detailed information to include:
23 1. Manufacturer's Catalog Data
24 2. Complete Physical and Technical Data
25 3. Wiring Diagrams
26 4. Detailed reference (written or highlighted) noting compliance with the appropriate Specification
27 Section and all applicable Specification item numbers within that Section
28 5. Complete type written index cross referencing all proposed substitutes and specified items
29 6. Detailed reference to specified items (written or highlighted) noting equal quality and
30 performance of proposed substitute equipment
31 7. Other descriptive data, as required by the Engineer
32 B. If substitute material is determined to be acceptable by the Engineer, it will be included in a
33 subsequent Addenda prior to bidding. The acceptance of a manufacturer's name or product by the
34 Engineer does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for providing materials and equipment
35 which comply in all details with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
36 C. Only materials which are specified or published in addenda as acceptable shall be used.
37 2,03 M1Ai'ERI/#L.S
38 A. All materials must be of the quality herein specified. AII materials shall be new, of the best quality
39 and free from defects. They shall be designed to ensure satisfactory operation and operational life
40 in the environmental conditions which will prevail where they are being installed.
41 B. Each type of material shall be of the same make and quality. The materials furnished shall be
42 standard products of the manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such equipment and
43 shall be the manufacturer's latest standard design.
44 C, All materials shall be U.L. or E.T.L. listed for the purpose for which they are used.
45 D. Equipment in compliance with U.L, standards but not bearing their label is not acceptable. If the
46 manufacturer cannot arrange for labeling of an assembled unit at the factory the unit shall be field
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 26 0000 - 5 ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS
YEl.M HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS x
YELilll COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN '
1 evaluated per the Washington State Administrative Code (WAC) and the electrical inspector's
2 requirements.
3 2,0� C09VIPLETE SYSTENI .:
4 A. All the systems mentioned shall be complete and operational in every detail except where
5 specifically noted otherwise. Mention of certain materials in these specifications shall not be
6 construed as releasing the Contractor from furnishing such additional materials and performing all 3
7 labor required to provide a complete and operable system.
8 2.05 tdAMEP��►TES
9 A. Provide nameplates constructed of plastic (black on white) laminated material engraved through
10 black surface material to white sublayer (attach with screws on NEMA 1 enclosures). EXCEPTION y_
11 (1): Emergency distribution system component labeling - white letters on red background.
12 Exception (2): Series rated systems shall be yellow background with white letters.
13 1. Motor Starter and Disconnect Labels: Refer to Section 26 28 16
14 PART 3 EXECllT�Ui�
15 3.01 G��V�RA�
16 A. Careful consideration shall be given to clearances under and over beams, pipes and ducts, to
17 provide proper headroom in all cases. Check drawings to determine heights of all suspended
�
18 ceilings and size of pipe shafts where raceway and wire-ways shall run. Coordinate installation of
19 Division 26 wiring and equipment with Division 23 and other trades. Where insufficient room for
20 proper installation appears, obtain clarification from Engineer before any installation is begun.
21 B. Cutting and Patching: �
22 1. Obtain permission from the Architect and/or Owner's Representative prior to cutting. Locate �4
23 cuttings so they will not weaken structural components. Cut carefully and only the minimum
24 amount necessary. Cut concrete with diamond core drills except where space limitations �
25 prevent the use of such drills.
26 2. All construction materials damaged or cut into during the installation of this work must be
27 repaired or replaced with materials of like kind and quality as original materials by skilled labor �,
28 experienced in that particular building trade.
29 3.02 COORDiNeaT101V
30 A. The Contractor is responsible for accomplishing Division 26. The work shall coordinate with that of "`
31 the other Contractors and/or other trades doing work in the building and shall examine all
32 Drawings, including the several Divisions of Mechanical, Structural, Civil and Architectural, for
33 Construction Detaiis and necessary coordination. Specific locations of construction features and
3�1 equipment shall be obtained from the Contract Documents, field measurements, and/or from the
35 trade providing the material or equipment. No extra costs will be allowed for failure to obtain this `
36 information.
37 B. All conflicts shall be reported to the Engineer in writing before installation for decision and
38 correction. Special attention is called to the following items:
39 1. Door swings to the end that switches will be located on "Strike"side of the door.
40 2. Location of grilles, pipes, sprinkler heads, ducts and other mechanical equipment so that all
41 electrical outlets, lighting fixtures and other elsctrical outlets and equipment are clear from and
42 in proper relation to these items.
43 3. Location of cabinets, counters and doors so that electrical outlets, lighting fixtures and -
44 equipment are clear from and in proper relation to these items.
45 4. Type and height of ceiling.
46 5. All device measurements referenced on drawings or specifications are to be centered of
47 device unless noted otherwise. "
2012-37/YCS Agricuftural Dept Improvements 26 0000 - 6 ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSOfd MCGOVERN
1 C. The Contractor will not be paid for work requiring reinstallation due to lack of coordination or
2 interference with other Contractors or trades. This includes, but is not limited to, removing,
3 replacing, relocating, cutting, patching, and finishing.
4 3,a3 'REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFI)
5 A. It is our intent to provide a timely response for RF(s regarding Division 26 Work. To further expedite
6 this process, where a suggestion can be determined or derived at by the initiator of the RFI, it is
7 required this suggestion be supplied with the subrnitted RFI. If no suggestion is given where one is
8 possible, the RFI will be returned as incomplete.
9 3A4 CL�ANING AND PAINTING
10 A. All equipment, whether exposed to the weather or stored indoors shall be covered to protect it from
11 water, dust and dirt.
12 B. After installing, all metal finishes shall be cleaned and polished, cleaned of all dirt, rust, cement,
13 plaster, grease and paint.
14 C. All equipment with a primer coat of paint shall be given two (2) or more coats of a finish enamel and
15 scratched surfaces be refinished to Iook like new. Markings, identification and nameplates shall be
16 replaced.
17 3.05 �QI�IPMENT IDENTIFICATIOfd
18 A. Provide identifying engraved bakelite nameplate on all equipment, including pull boxes, to clearly
19 indicate its use, area served, circuit identification, voltage, and any other useful data.
20 B. Each auxiliary system, including communications, shall be clearly labeled to indicate its function.
21 3.06 D�VIAT�t7N
22 A. Deviation from the shop drawings in construction or installation of equipment shal� not be made
23 unless Shop Drawings showing proposed deviations are submitted to and approved by the
24 Engineer. If any equipment is furnished under this or other divisions with current, voltage or phase
25 ratings that differ from those shown on the drawings, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer in
26 writing immediately and shall not connect said equipment until instructed as to required changes by
27 the Architect. I�o extension of time will be granted as a result of such changes.
28 3.07 WIRl�IG M'�TH�DS
29 A. Provide access panels as needed for pull boxes and equipment located above ceiling or behind
30 walls.
31 B. Any low voltage cables that are not terminated at both ends shall be tagged and labeled per code.
32 3.08 PEidETRATIO�IS OF FIRE RATED E�EiV1ENi'S
33 A. Must be made such as to retain that rating.
34 3,09 HANCaERS�►ND SU�POR�S
35 A. Provide hangers, brackets, and suspension rods and supplementary steel to support equipment.
36 B. Hangers provided under other divisions shall not be used for support of Division 26 equipment
37 unless permitted by Architect/Engineer.
38 3.1 Q PAINTING
39 A. Painting in general will be covered under another division of this specification, except items
40 furnished under Division 1& that are scratched, marred in shipment or installation, shall be
41 refinished by the Division 16 Contractor.
42 3.11 WORKMANSHIP AND OBSERVATION
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 2fi 0000- 7 ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS
YELM HIGN SCHOOL
AG D�EPT. IMPR!?VEMEN7S --
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 A. Workmanship shall be of the best quality and none but competent workers shall be employed under `
2 the supervision of a competent foreman. Ail completed work shall represent a neat and
3 workmanship like appearance.
� B. All work and materials shall be subject to observation at any and all times by representatives of the �
5 Engineer.
6 3.12 �'IiSCELLANEOUS
7 A. Provide complete seismic anchorage and bracing for the lateral and vertical support of conduit and
8 electrical equipment, as required by the International Building Code.
9 B. Conduits that cross seismic separations shall be installed with flexible connection suitable to �
10 accommodate conditions. Secure raceways on each side of a separation and provide a minimum
11 of 36" length of flexible conduit to span separation.
12 3.13 GABLE AND WIRING �OUTED UNDERGROUND OR UNDERSLAB
13 A. All cables and conductors, both line voltage and low voltage, routed underground or underslab -
14 shall be U.L. listed for installation in wet locations per NEC and WAC codes.
15 END OF SECTIOfV
16
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 26 0000 -S ELECTRICAL GENERAL CONDITIONS -
YELIVI HIGH SGHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 SECTiON 26 0005
2 E�.ECTRICAL—EXISTING SYSTEMS
3 PART 1 �ENEFiA�.
4 1�01 V�/rORK IidCLUDEC9
5 A. Portions of the existing electrical lighting, power and signal systems are to be removed as detailed
6 on the drawings.
7 PART 2 QRODUCTS
8 2.01 �XISTI�G MATERIALS
9 A. Existing materials which are a part of the building shall remain the property of the Owner.
10 2.02 EXlSTING MATERIALS �E-INSTALL.ED
11 A. Existing materials and equipment that are removed as a part of the work or stored in surplus may
12 be re-installed as a part of the new system subject to approval of condition suitability by the
13 Architect/Engineer. The requirements of the specifications (i.e. installation, warranty, testing, etc.)
14 shall apply as if the materials were new,supplied by the Contractor.
15 2.03 ��CISTING �19ATERIALS NOT Tt) BE RE-INSTALL�D
16 A. In coordination with the Architect/Engineer, these materials shall be made available for his
17 inspection and decision as �to whether the Owner will retain possession. Items selected for
18 retention shall be delivered to a location on the premises selected by the Owner and turned over to
19 him. Take reasonable care to avoid damage to this material. If the Contractor fails to conform to
20 this requirement, he shall purchase and turn over to the Owner replacement materials of like kind
21 and quality.
22 B. All material not selected for retention by the Owner and debris shall be disposed of by the
23 Contractor. This shall include, but not be limited to, removal of ballasts and fluorescent lamps
24 which shall be disposed of in accordance with EPA requirements.
25 P�RT 3 EXECI�TlON
26 3.01 EXIST1NCa CONDlT10NS
27 A. Examine the structure, building, and conditions under which Division 26 work is to be installed for
28 conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with work until
29 deficiencie� encountered in installation have been corrected. Report any delay or difficulties
30 encountered in installation of Division 26 work which might be unsuitable to connect with work by
31 other divisions of this specification. Failure to report conditions shall constitute acceptance of other
32 work as being fit and proper for the installation of Division 26 work.
33 B. Maintain continuity of existing circuits of equipment to remain. Existing circuits of equipment shall
34 remain energized. Circuits which are to remain but were disturbed during demolition shall have
35 circuits, wiring, and power restored back ta original condition.
36 3.02 DEM�l.iTtOf�
37 A. Switchboards, panelboards, signaling systems, other electrical equipment free standing (or surface
38 mounted), raceway (exposed) and conductors no longer in service as a result of this Contract shall
39 be removed. Unused raceways or sleeves shall be cut flush at ceiling, #loor or wall and filled with
40 grout.
41 3,03 NEW DEVIC�S IN REMODEL AREAS
42 A. Provide surface mounting for devices on existing walls. Where existing boxes are indicated to be
43 reused, extend box as necessary and provide new devices and plates.
2012-37/YCS Agricuftural Dept Improvements 26 0005- 1 ELECTRICAL—EXISTING SYSTEMS
YELM HIGH SCHOO�
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMEiVTS
Y�L.M COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSOId MCGOV�FtN ""
1 3Ad �Xi�71N+G PAiVELBOARD
2 A. Any modifications made to existing panels must be incorporated into the existing circuit index on `
3 the panel. If more than three circuits are modified a new typewritten index incorporating the _
4 changes to the existing index shall be installed in the existing panel.
5 B. Listing shall match circuit breaker arrangements, typically with odd numbers on the left and even �'
6 numbers on the right. Room numbers used shall be final room numbers used in the building as r
7 verified with the Owner.
8 END OF SECYION
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 26 0005- 2 ELECTRICAL—EXISTING SYSTEMS
YEi��1►1 HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. 1(IAPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 SEC�ION 26 0519
2 WIRES AND CABLES
3 PART 1 GENERAL.
4 1.0� WORK INCLUDED
5 A. Provide all wire, cable, and terminations complete.
6 PART 2 PRODUCTS
7 2.0� WIRE AND CABLE{COpPER,600-VOL'�
8 A. Interior and Above Grade: All wires to be Type THW or RHW. Type THWN/THHN or XHHW
9 wire may be utilized at Contractors option, subject to code requirements. Wire and cabies shali
10 be brought to project in original containers bearing the underwriters label. Provide Type AVA
11 wire where conductors are subject to temperature above 167 Degrees F.
12 B. Underground: All conductors to be type USE. Increase Raceway size when necessary to
13 accommodate conductors per code. Exception: Underground conductors completely contained
14 in code recognized Raceway and boxes may be Type THW, THWN or XHHW.
15 2.02 SPLICES
16 A, Above Grade: Solderless type only. Preinsulated "twist-on" type (limited to size #10 and
17 smaller). Bolt on compression type with application of preformed insulated cover, heat
18 shrinkable tubing or plastic insulated tape acceptable for all sizes.
19 B. Below Grade: Splices below grade shall be in handholes and shall be made watertight with
20 epoxy resin type splicing kits similar to Scotchcast.
21 2.03 TER�411�1ATiONS
22 A. Compression set, bolted or screw terminal.
23 B. Conductors #12 and smaller shall utilize eye or forked tongue type compression set terminator
24 when termination is to a bolted or screw set type terminal block or terminal cabinet.
25 PART 3 �XE+CUTION
26 3A1 GEtaERAL
27 A. Install all wiring in Raceway unless shown or specifically authorized otherwise.
28 3.02 V�/tR�SIZE
29 A. fVo. 12 AWG minimum for power and lighting circuits.
30 B. Provide solid wire for No. 10 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for No. 8 AWG and
31 larger (600) volts.
32 3.�i3 COM�UCTOR SIZ�S, R�FE�I�NC�D 4�N PLAiVS
33 A. Copper,type THW or RHUV unless noted.
34 3.0+4 PULi.I�ICa
35 A. Use no mechanical means for pulling No. 8 AWG conductors and smaller. Powdered soap
36 stone or approved spray cream shall be the only lubricant used.
37 3.05 STRIPPi'Mta INSULATIOI�1
38 A. Do not ring the cable, always pare or pencil.
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 26 0519- 1 WIRES AND CABLES
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS �•-
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN �
1 3.06 T��'��IG �
2 A. If used shall be half lapped synthetic tape.
3 3.07 �O�1Dl7CTORS 1� PANELS AND SWITCHBOARDS �
4 A. Conductors in panels, switchboards, and terminal cabinets shall be neatly grouped and formed
5 in a manner to "Fan" into terminals with regular spacing.
6 3.08 RA��WAY SIZ�S FiEFERENCED l�N DRAWINGS *
7 A. Raceways are sized for copper, type THW, unless otherwise noted. Size all Raceways per "
8 code unless specifically noted to be larger on the drawings.
9 END OF SECTtO�!
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 26 0519- 2 WIRES AND CABLES �
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
Y�LM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
� SECTION 26 0532
2 C>UTLEi'AND Pl7LL BOXES
3 PAi�T 1 GENERA�.
4 1.0� W{�RK IiNCLUDED
5 A. Pravide outlet and pull boxes to enclose devices, permit the pulling of conductors and for wire
6 splices and branches.
� �A�r� �AO�uc-�s
8 2,01 IIdTERIOR WIRING
9 A. General: Outlet and pull boxes shall be pressed drawn steel, zinc coated with plaster ring where
10 applicable. Welded boxes not allowed. Four-inch size minimum. Large pull boxes shall be
11 fabricated sheet steel, zinc coated or baked enamel firtish, with return flange and screw retained
12 cover.
13 B. Surface Metal Raceway: Boxes of same Manufacture and to match Raceway. Boxes to
14 accommodate standard devices and device plate.
15 C. Install pull boxes so as to be accessible after completion of building construction.
16 D. Ceiling outlet boxes shall be galvanized octagonal 4 inch, 1-1/2 inch deep (without fixture stud), 2-
17 1/8 inches deep (with fixture stud).
18 2.02 EXTEFiIOR�IVIRINCa
19 A. Above Grade: Outlet and junction boxes shall be cast or malleable iron or shall be cast of
20 corrosion resistant alloy compatible with Raceway to which it is connected. Pull boxes shall be
21 fabricated of heavy gauge steel and hot dipped galvanized. All boxes shall have gasketed covers.
22 B. Exterior outlet boxes shall be weather resistant and rain tight, with appropriate covers, gaskets and
23 screws.
24 PART 3 EXECUTIOiV
25 3,0`� AN�HORING
26 A. All boxes shall be firmly anchored directly or with concealed bracing to building studs or joints.
27 Boxes must be so attached so that they will not "Rock" or"Shift"when devices are operated.
28 3.02 'FLtJSH MOUMTII�I+G
29 A. Except for surface mounted boxes or boxes above accessible ceilings, all boxes shall have front
30 edge (box or plaster ring) even with the finished surface of the wall or ceiling.
31 3.C13 ELE�TRlCAL.OiJ°TLETS
32 A. General: Coordinate the work of this section with the work of other sections and trades. Study all
33 Drawings that form a part of this Contract and confer with various trades involved to eliminate
34 conflicts between the work of this section and the work of other trades. Check and verify outlet
35 locations indicated on Architectural Drawings, door swings, installation details, layouts of
36 suspended ceilings and locations of all plumbing, heating and ventilating equipment.
37 B. Centered on Built-In Work: In the case of doors, cabinets, recessed or similar features, or where
38 outlets are centered between such features, such as between a door jamb and a cabinet, make
39 these outlet locations exact. Relocate any outlets which are located off center.
2012-37/YCS Agricuttural Dept Improvements 26 0532 - 1 OUTLET AND PULL BOXES
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS &�
YELNI COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN "
1 C. Vertical and Horizontal Relationships: Where more than one outlet is shown or specified to be at
2 the same elevation or one above the other, atign them exactly on centerlines horizontaHy or
3 aertically. Relocate as directed all such outlets (including Iighting, receptacle, power signal and
4 thermostat outlets) which are not so installed, at no additiona� cost to Owner. %
5 D. Device Outlet Height: Measure from the finished floor.
6 *Switches 4 Feet, Set Vertically,to Top of Box
7 �._
8 *Receptacles, 24 Inches, Set Vertically to Centerline
9 Telecommunications
10 Other As Noted or as Directed by Architect
11 * Heights may vary. See Drawings for additional information "�
12 E. Ceiling Location: For acoustical material locate outlet either at the corner joint or in the center of a
13 panel, whichever is closer to the normal spacing. Locate all outlets in the same room in the same
��.
14 panel location.
15 F. Installed In Sound Walls: Boxes installed in sound walls shall not be installed back to back. All
16 boxes shall be separated by one stud space and shall be interconnected with flex conduit with a
17 90°1oop. �
18 3.04 EL.ECTRICAL WORK IfV COUNTERBACKS, MILLWORK AND CASEWORK
19 A. Provide as shown and/or specified. Provide templates, where required, to other trades for drilling -"
20 and cutting to insure accurate location of electrical fixtures (outlets and devices) as verified with the
21 Architect. Provide all wiring, devices, plates and connections required by said fixture. �
22 3.05 CONNEC°fION�'CD EQUIPIVIENT
23 A. For equipment furnished under this or other Divisions of the Specifications, or by others. Provide `F
24 outlet boxes of sizes and at locations necessary to serve such equipment. An outlet box is required
25 if the equipment has pigtail wires for external connection, does not have space to accommodate �
28 circuit wiring used. Study equipment details to assure proper coordination. .
27 3.06 B�ANK CC�VERS
28 A. Provide blank covers or ptates over all boxes not covered by equipment. �
29 3.U7 JUMC71�� OF{ PU1.L 80XES �t�
30 A. Pull and junction boxes shall be installed as shown, and to facilitate pulling of wire and to limit the �
31 number of bends within code requirements. Boxes shall be permanently accessible and shall be
32 placed only at locations approved by the Architect.
33 B. In suspended ceiling spaces, boxes shall be supported from the structure independently from �
34 ceiling suspension system.
35 C. The Drawings do not necessarily show every pull or Junction Box required. The Contractor is
36 permitted to provide boxes deemed necessary by him for his work when installed in accordance
37 with these Specifications,
38 3.08 BGIKES aCfl�fTAINING MULT�PL.E DEVICES
39 A. Boxes containing emergency and normal devices are permitted only with steel barriers
40 Manufactured especially for the purpose of dividing the box into two completely separate
41 compartments.
42 B. Device Boxes Containing Multiple Devices and Wiring Rated Over 150 Volts to Ground and Over
43 300 Volts Between Conductors are permitted onJy with steel barrier manufactured especially for the
44 purpose of dividing the box into separate compartments for each device having exposed live parts.
45 END OF'SECTION
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 26 0532 - 2 OUTLET AND PULL BOXES
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 SECTION 26 0533
2 RACEWAY
3 PART 1 GENERAL
4 1 A1 WORK I�ICLl1DECd
5 A. Pravide Raceway System complete.
6 PA�iT 2 �RODl1CTS
7 2.01 G�►LVANIZED RIGID STEEL Ct)NDUIT {!GRS)
8 A. General: Hot dipped galvanized.
9 B. Fittings: Galvanized malleable iron or noncorrosive alloy compatible with galvanized conduit.
10 Erickson couplings, watertight split couplings (O.Z. type or equivalent) permitted. Running thread
11 or set screw type fittings not approved.
12 2.02 il�TERMED�ATE METAL CONDUIT (IM'C�l
13 A. General: Hot Dipped galvanized.
14 B. Fittings: Galvanized malleable iron or noncorrosive alloy compatible with galvanized conduit.
15 Erickson couplings, watertight split couplings (O.Z. type or equivalent) permitted. Running thread
16 or set screw type fittings not approved.
17 2,03 EL�CTRlCAL ME'TALLIC TUBING (EMT)
18 A. General: Hot dipped galvanized.
19 B. Fittings: Raintight; steel or malleable iron type using a split corrugated compression ring and
20 tightening nut or stainless steel locking disc. Steel set screw fittings are acceptable. Indenter, drive-
21 on and pressure cast or die cast type set screw are not acceptable.
22 2.04 FLEXiBL� METAL�ONDUIT
23 A. Dry Locations:
24 1. General: Galvanized flexible steel for dry locations.
25 2. Fittings: Ma�leable iron or steel, Thomas and Betts "squeeze"type or equal.
26 B. Damp and Wet Locations:
27 1. Liquid Tight: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) weatherproof cover over flexible steel conduit.
28 2. Fittings: Thomas and Betts "Super-Tite" or equal.
29 2.05 SUR�ACE METAL RA�EWAI�'
30 A. Formed steel or aluminum type. Standard factory finish. Where color choice is available, consult
31 Architect/Engineer for selection prior to ordering.
32 PART 3 EXE�Il1'lO�1
33 3.01 G�NERAi.
34 A. Install Raceway concealed in construction unless noted otherwise on the Drawings or specifically
35 approved in writing by the Architect/Engineer.
36 B. Cut Raceway ends square, ream and extend maximum distance into all couplings and connectors.
37 C. Provide and install manufactured end caps on all Raceway ends during construction to prevent the
38 entrance of water or dirt. Tape, as a cover, not permitted.
39 D. Swab out all Raceways before pulling wires.
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 26 0533- 1 RACEWAY
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELiIA COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 E. All elbows for GRS and PVC Raceway shali be factory elbows. For all other Raceway, use factory
2 elis for bends of 1-1/4" and larger diameter.
3 F. Raceway shall not penetrate sheet metal ducts unless permission is granted by Architect/Engineer.
4 All sleeves shall be provided for Raceway installation.
5 3A2 GJ�►�lIA�OZED RIGID STEEL CONDUI'�
6 A. AI1 Connections shall be watertight. Install for all Raceways in concrete or where subject to �
7 damage.
8 3.03 iNTERi�IEDIA�'E METAL CONDUIT
9 A. Intermediate metal conduit is permitted as a substitute for galvanized rigid steel conduit except
10 where GRS is required by code.
11 3.04 'EL�CTR�CAL ME'fALLIC TUBING ,
12 A. Install for wiring in masonry,frame construction, furred ceilings and above suspended ceilings. May
13 be used for exposed work in unfinished areas where not subject to damage. Where construction
14 involves masonry work, surface cut masonry units wherever such masonry units are to remain .,
15 unplastered or uncovered in complete construction.
16 3.45 SEAL.lNG CDF RACEWAY�ENETRATIO�S
17 A. Exterior Wall Surfaces Above Grade: Seal around all penetrations with caulking approved by "
18 Engineer. For concrete construction above ground level, cast Raceway in wall or core drill wall and
19 hard pack with a mixture of equal parts of sand and cement.
20 3.06 SEA�Ll�IG OF RAC�VI/AYS
21 A. Seal interior of all Raceways which pass through buildings roofs, floors or through outside walls of Y°
22 the building, above or below grade. Seal on the end inside the building using duct sealing mastic,
23 non-hardening compound type, specially designed for such service to maintain the integrity of the
24 seal of the wall, floor or roof. Pack around the wires in the Raceways.
25 3A7 F9AN�ARS FOR RAC�\PJAYS
26 A. In suspended ceiling spaces Contractor may, at his option, attach 1/2" or 3/4" EMT Raceways to
27 the ceiling suspension system where such system is structurally suitable; in which case, provide
28 clips manufactured for the purpose.
29 B. V�/hen more than two Raceways will use the same routing, group together on a patented channel
30 support system (such as Unistrut).
31 3.08 SLlAI=ACE �►1ETA� RACEWAY
32 A. Install parallel to building surface (i.e., wall, ceiling, floor). Fasten to surface as recommended by
33 Manufacturer. tvtount so Raceway is in the least obvious location.
3� 3,09 FLE;C�BLE CrJNDUlT
35 A. Flexible conduit shall be used only for connection to motors and equipment subject to vibration
36 with 90 degrees loop minimum to allow for isolation and for lay-in fluorescent fixtures above T-Bar
37 ceilings. For fixture installations, one end of flex must terminate in rough-in junction box. Flex
38 conduit shall not be installed over 6' long or used to connect from fixture to fixture. Use liquid tight
39 for pumps, equipment which is regularly washed down, and equipment in damp locations. Provide
40 ground wire when required by code.
41 3.10 PllLL CORDS
42 A. Nylon type shall be included in all installed empty Raceway.
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 26 0533- 2 RACEWAY
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
A� DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNIi'Y SCHOOLS
ERICKSQN MCGOVERN
1 END O�SE�CTiO�I
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 26 0533 -3 RACEWAY
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
EF3ICKSON MCGOVERN
1 SECTION 26 2726
2 SWI�'CHES A,ND FtECEPTACLES
3 Pl�RT 1 CENERAL
4 1.0� 1NORK I�VCLUDE[�
5 A. Provide all wiring devices and plates.
6 B. No push-in terminals allowed.
7 C. All devices color shall be ivory, unless otherwise noted.
8 AART 2 PRODUCTS
9 2.Oi A�C�EPTABL�iIAAI�UFACTURERS
10 A. Hubbell
11 B. Pass &Seymour
12 C. Leviton
13 D. Cooper
14 2.02 SWIT�HES
15 A. "Industrial Specification Grade", quiet type, rated 277 voft, 20 amp, unless noted, with plastic
16 handle. Single pole, double pole, 3-way, or locking type as required. Meets Fed. Spec. WS-896
17 Provide matching styles and colors in other devices as required for the conditions of installation.
18 Hubbell CS1221, Cooper CSB120, Leviton 1221, and P&S 20AC1
19 B. Interchangeable type shall be rated same as above.
20 C. Occupancy Sensors
21 1. Provide self-adjusting occupancy sensor iight switching devices for control of lighting in all
22 rooms shown on drawings. Sensors shall be ceiling or wall mounted to provide adequate
23 coverage. Occupancy sensors shall be "Leviton", Model OSC20-MOW for ceiling mounting,
24 OSW12-MOW fo� wall mounting, complete with OSP20-RDO power pack and associated
25 mounting hardware. Provide"Leviton° ODSOD-ID wall switch sensors where shown. Sensors
26 shall be wired to maintain switching and circuits shown on drawings.
27 D. Motor rated switches: Switches serving as motor disconnecting means shall be horsepower rated
28 with overlo�d relays and meet requirements as stated above. See manual starters in Section 26 24
29 19, 'Manual Starters'.
30 E. Device plates shall be Hubbell and Cooper thermoplastic type, color to match device.
31 2.03 REC�P�'ACLES
32 A. "Industrial Specification Grade", Duplex NEMA 5-20R configuration (20-Amp, 120-Volt) unless
33 shown otherwise. Must have "rivetless ground" contact manufactured as an integral component of
34 the external ground screw terminal. Meets Fed Spec. WC-596 Hubbell HBL5362, Cooper 5362,
35 P&S 5362A, and Leviton 5362.
36 B. Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupter Duplex Receptacles: NEMA 5-20R. Hubbell GF201LA, and
37 Cooper VGF20,for 20 Amp, 125-Volt AC. Provide GFI receptacles where required by code.
38 C. Weather Resistant (WR) / Ground Fault Circuit-Interrupter (GFCI) Outdoor Duplex Receptacles:
39 NEMA 5-20R. Hubbell GFTR201 or equal,for 20 Amp, 125-Volt AC.
40 D. Special Purpose Receptacles: For special purpose receptacles, see drawings for voltage,
�1 amperage, and phase. Provide with matching plug delivered to the Owner.
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 26 2726 - 1 SWITCHES AND RECEPTACLES
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 2.t�4 DEViCE ��AT�S
2 A. Interior: Plates for receptacles other than NEMA 5-20R shall have ampere rating, voltage and
3 phase engraved in the plate. Plates for recessed boxes shall be Hubbell and Cooper thermoplastic
4 type. Attachment screws shall match finish of plate. Plates for surface mounted boxes shall be of
5 pressed stainless steel with size to fit exactiy the box used.
6 B. Exterior: Intermatic#WP1010MC, for verticai mount and # WP1010HMC for horizontal mount, or
7 equivalent for receptacles. Metal cover shall be raintight while-in-use.
8 2.t95 MULTlOUTLE7 ASSEMBLY{WHEN SHOWN)
9 A, Provide assemblies complete, including necessary fittings and hardware with circuits as indicated "
10 on Plans and outlet spacing as indicated. All assemblies shall contain ground wire. Wiremold or
11 equaL
12 PART 3 EXECUI'I+UN "
13 3.01 M()IJNTING
14 A. Rigidly fasten each device to the outlet box at proper position with the wall to bring receptacle flush
15 with plate or switch handle the proper distance through the plate.
16 3.02 OR�E�ITATION
17 A. Set Switches vertical with handle operating vertically, up position "ON". n
18 B. Set Receptacles vertical with ground slot down.
19 3.�D3 REC�PTACLE GROUNDIiVG
20 A. Provide bare bonding wire between receptacle grounding terminal and box. Plaster ear screws �
21 connecting frame to the box vvill not be acceptable for grounding.
22 E1VD !3F SECTION �
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 26 2726- 2 SWITCHES AND RECEPTACLES
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 SECTION 26 5000
2 LIGHTING
3 PIaR`f 1 �EIVERAL
4 1.01 1►'WORK INCLi1DED
5 A. Provide the lighting system complete and operational.
6 1.�2 FIKfURE SCWEDULE MANUFACTURER'S SERIES IVUMBERS
7 A. Are a design series reference and do not necessarily represent the number, size, wattage or the
8 type of lamp, ballast or special requirements as specified hereinafter.
9 1A3 SU�MITTALS
10 A. Shall be neatly and clearly marked to indicate the fixtures, lamps and ballasts fully comply with
11 contract documents. When substitute fixtures are submitted (if permitted) the data sfiall clearly
12 cross reference (written or highlighted) that the substitute fixture complies with every detail of the
13 specified fixture. Fixtures not fully complying with contract documents are not permitted.
14 PART 2 PFiODi�CTS
15 2,01 �41ET�►L �ARTS
16 A. Interior Fixtures: Steel or aluminum with 300°F, baked enamel finish, brushed aluminum with
17 baked acrylic clear lacquer finish, or stainless steel with a brushed finish, manufacturer's standard
18 color unless specified otherwise.
19 B. Exterior Fixtures: Corrosion resisting metal, a (non-ferrous, stainless steel or special finish) and in
20 all cases suitable for outdoor service without tarnishing or other damage due to exposure;
21 manufacturer's standard colors unless specified otherwise; cadmium plate all metal parts
22 concealed by canopies, including screws, plates and brackets. All exposed fasteners shall be
23 tamperproof.
24 2A2 LIGHT TRANSMITi"1NG COMPONENTS
25 A. Virgin acrylic plastic (0.125-inch thick overall minimum) or glass. Shall be contained in a steel
26 frame hinged and which remains attached to the fixture when door is in open position.
27 2.03 SPEaC1AL PARTS
28 A. Adapters, Plates, Brackets and Anchors: Provide where required by construction features of the
29 building to sui�bly mount lighting fixture. All such appurtenances and mounting methods shall be
30 approved by the Architect/Engineer prior to fabrication and installation.
31 2.44 LA�,II'AS
32 A. General Electric, Sylvania or Philips. All lamps supplied shall be by the same manufacturer.
33 B. Provide for each fixture in the exact number and type for which the fixture is designed or as noted.
34 C. Fluorescent Type:
35 1. Bi-pin, T-8 rapid start; color temperature of 3500 K; CRI 82; average life of 20,000 hours.
36 2.U5 BA�L.ASTS- FLUORESCENT (ELECTRONIC)
37 A. Suitable for lamp type employed and approved by Lighting Design Lab specification committee.
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 26 5000- 1 LIGHTING
YELM HIGH SCHOO�
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS �
1fELM COMMUNITY SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 B. Acceptance Manufacturers:
2 1, Advance -
3 2. Magnetek
4 3. Motorola
5 4. Osram/Sylvania
6 C. UL and CBM labels.
7 D. Low temperature and/or outdoor application. Provide ballasts suitabie for low temperature where
8 outdoors or space ambient is expected to be below 50°F. -
9 E. Electronic ballasts shall be high power factor, greater than 95% and total harmonic distortion (THD)
10 less than 20%. Provide for operation with T-8, T-12 and BIAX lamps. "A"sound rating.
11 F. All ballasts shall be provided with a UL listed factory pre-installed ballast disconnect.
12 G. Ballasts for T8 fluorescent lamps:
13 1. Advance "Centium" Series or Equivalent programmed rapid start.
14 2. Ballast factor of 98% or greater.
15 3. "A"sound rating for 265 MA. (T8 lamps). R�-
16 4. The ballast shall operate at a frequency below 30 Khz or above 40 Khz without visible flicker.
17 5. Shall be designed for use with occupancy sensors by providing up to 30,000 lamp starts. The
18 ballast shall heat the lamp cathodes to 650 degree C with no glow current before applying arc
19 voltage to the lamp. "
20 6. Electronic ballast harmonic distortion and current shall be less than 10% THD. ,
21 7. Where fluorescent light fixtures are to be located outside, the ballast shall be capable of 0
22 degree F. lamp ignition. ��
23 8. Five Year Warranty.
24 H. Emergency Battery Backup: Provide as indicated. Each fluorescent fixture unit shall consist of an
25 automatic power failure device, test switch operable from outside of the fixture, pilot light visible �°
26 from outside the fixture, automatic code-compliance testing, and fully automatic solid-state charger
27 in a self-contained power pack. Battery shall be electrolyte type with power to supply two T-8 lamps
28 at 1100 lumens each, two compact fluorescent lamps at 300 to 750 lumens each, or one T-5H0
29 tamp at 1100 lumens for a period of 90 minutes. Emergency unit shall operate unattended and
30 require no maintenance for a period of 5 years.
31 1. Emergency unit for T-8 lamps shall be Bodine 650 ST. or Lithonia PS1400QD/SD Emergency
32 unit for compact ftuorescent lamps shall be Bodine B94 or Lithonia PSDL3/SD. Notify the
33 Engineer In cases where the Bodine units are too large to fit in the light fixtures. In such cases
34 an ESI equivalent unit will be acceptable.
35 PARI`3 EX�CU'�ICJ�!
36 3,01 LId�HTi1�G FIXTUF�Ea- �GENEFtAL
37 A. Size and mounting height from finished floor to bottom of fixture as indicated on the drawings.
38 Verify mounting provisions prior to the ordering of fixtures. Fixtures shall be UL listed for the
39 location, and application in which they are installed.
40 B. Ceiling fixtures shall be coordinated with and suitable for installation in, on or from the ceiling as
41 shown. Installation and support of fixtures shall be in accordance with NFPA 70 and
42 manufacturer's recommendations.
43 3.02 DI�FFUS�RS ANIJ ENCLOSURES
44 A. Install lighting fixture diffusers only after construction work, painting and clean up are completed.
45 Prior to final acceptance, remove all lamps, reflectors and diffusers,wash, rinse and reinstall.
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 26 5000 - 2 LIGHTING
YELM HIGH SCHOOL
AG DEPT. IMPROVEMENTS
YELM COMMUNI7Y SCHOOLS
ERICKSON MCGOVERN
1 3A3 �l1PPOR7 OF FLUORESCEiU'� �FiXT�1RES
2 A. Surface and Pendant Mounted Type:
3 1. Where mounted on accessibie ceilings, hang from structural members by means of hanger
4 rods through ceiling or as approved.
5 2. Where ceiiing is of insufficient strength to support weight of lighting fixture, provide additional
6 framing to support as required. Fixtures shall be supported from structure with seismic
7 bracing independent of ceiling.
8 3. For Pendant Mount Type: Provide a unistrut channel for mounting fixtures entire fixture length
9 unless light fi�ure is designed specifically for supporting itself. Provide 3/8-inch thread rod
10 secured to structural members for support of unistrut channel.
11 4. Continuous Runs of Fixtures: Straight when sighting from end to end, regardless of
12 irregularities in the ceiling. Where fixtures are so installed, omit ornamental ends between
13 sections.
14 3.04 LO�CATIOIV
15 A. Mount to the dimensions shown on the drawings. Mount at quarter points where no dimensions
16 appear. Architect shall specify mounting locations where no dimensions appear and quarter point
17 mounting is impractical or not indicated on the drawings.
18 B. Refer to details, mechanical drawings, and coordinate with mechanical Contractor for equipment
19 and ductwork mounted in ceilings to prevent conflict with light fixtures prior to installation. If
20 conflicts cannot be resolved with the Mechanical Contractor, notify ArchitectlEngineer.
21 3A� SPARE FIXTUR�S
22 A. Self-Luminous Exit Sign: Provide (2) two Self-Luminous Exit Signs Lithonia # DSW1X Green or
23 Red to match EX-1. Install al locations as directed by Architect.
24 END OF SECTION
2012-37/YCS Agricultural Dept Improvements 26 5000- 3 LIGHTING